Search the history of over 505 billion pages on the Internet.
Open Library
Full text of "The Combined Spanish Method: A New Practical and Theoretical System of Learning the Castilian ..."
See other formats
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
\ ^M V, b-]. Is 3^
FROM THE
LIBRARY
OF
CHARLES
ELIOT
NORTON
THE GIFT OF f HIENDS
M D C C C C V
3 2044 102 86^70
I
THE
COMBINED SPANISH METHOD.
A NEW
FBACnCAL AND THEOBETICAL STSTEM OF LKAIOmiQ
THE CASTniAN LANGUAGE,
BMBBAOINO THE HOST ADYASTAOSOVS FKATDBH OF THB BBST XKOWH
METHODS.
WITH A
PROlfOUlfCING YOCABULART,
OOXTAININO ALL THE WORDS USED IN THB 00UB8B Or THE WORK, AMD RBnEBXHGB
TO THB LESSORS IK WHICH BACH 0KB IS EXPLAIKED, THUS EHABUKO
AKT OKE TO BE HIS OWK IHBIBVCIOB.
BY
ALBERTO DE |ORNOS, A.M.,
VOBV^J VnaOIOB of VOBK AL MDOOLB DI BPADT, AJTB vow TBAOniB OF SPAKISB Dl
XEB HEW TOSK XXBOANTILS UBVAAT, mw TOHK KrVStMa HIGH flCHOOIt AKD
TBM FOLTTECHHIO AKD PAGKBB IB8IITimB| BBOOELTX.
• NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
443 Ain> 446 Bboadwat.
1867.
N ■•• • ' •••-n.
BRnaiD, aocoiding to Act of Congresfi, in the year 1807, by
D. APPLETON.& COMPANY,
In the Oerk^s Office of the District Court of the United States for the Sonthem District
of New York.
PREFACE
It is an undoubted fact that in teaching, not only lan-
guages, but any other science or art, there neither is, nor
can be, any other method than that of uniting theory
with practice^ and the various modes of applying the one
to the other, the extent of the application, and the time at
which it should be commenced, have produced the great
number of methods hitherto published.
This fact is now universally acknowledged, and each new
author proclaims himself to be the only one who has put it
into execution. The most insignificant little phrase-book
does not fail to announce, in its introduction, that it com-
bines theory and practice ; and grammars containing noth-
ing more than confused masses of rules, heaped one upon
another, are entitled " Theoretical and ProMicair It is
admitted on all hands that much progress has been made
within the last few years in the art of teaching languages ;
and, in testimony of this, we have only to mention the ex-
cellent oral and practical methods of Jacotot, Manesca, Ollen-
dorff, Boulet, Kobertson, and others who have followed in
their footsteps, all of which are ably treated, and have done
much good in their way. But each one of the grammarians
referred to, satisfied with his own invention, looked with
disdain upon that of his predecessor. Hence the enmity
IV PBEPAOB.
andihe almost unaccountable diversity of opinion wliich we
observe amongst them. Had they studied each other with
impartiality, ai^d endeavored to profit by the experience
and even the defects of the several systems, their labors
would certainly have been attended with still more favora-
ble results, and of course more considerable benefit would
have accrued thereby to the art in general. Numberless
points of excellence are to be found, scattered here and
there, throughout the various ancient- and modem systems,
and chiefly those already alluded to; and it has been
thought that, if carefully sifted out and judiciously com-
bined, they would form a new method which would be in
details essentially superior to any of the old ones.
This conviction, joined to twenty years' experience
in teaching the Spanish language, sometimes through the
medium of one, sometimes of another of the before-men-
tioned systems, has led the author to prepare and publish
the Combined Method, which he now offers to those desir-
ing to learn the noble language of Cervantes.
Whether he has succe^fully attained his object, the pub-
lic wUl decide.
OBSEEYATIOK"S
gOME OF THE ADVANTAGEOIJS FEATURES OP THE "DE TORNOS*S
COMBINED METHOD."
Ist. Tetb advantage of presenting the verb as the first and
principal part of speech, wMch serves as the axis upon which
all the other parts revolve. These, too, have been introduced
in their torn, not in grammatical order, nor by mere chance,
but in the logical and natural order in which they occur in
discourse, whether written or spoken.
2d. That of explaining these parts of speech in the order
just mentioned, not in an isolated manner, but united to form
a homogeneous whole, and in such a way that the learner will
have no difficulty in finding the explanation relative to the use of
each one of them respectively, as often as occasion may require.
3d. These explanations, which embrace the whole theory,
and form a complete grammar of the language, are separate
from and independent of the exercises ; the latter being com-
posed in strict accordance with the examples accompanying
each lesson, in such a manner that those unacquainted with
grafaimar in general, and those who have no desire to enter
into the theory of the language, or, finally, those who are too
young or too old to learn grammar, may acquire a thorough
conversational knowledge of Spanish, by merely committing to
memory the Vocabulary, studying the Compositions, and care-
fiiUy writing the Exercises.
4th. From the arrangement alluded to, arises another great
advantage, namely, all the elements are found in the vocabu-
lary of each lesson, separated and detached from the examples
and rules given in the explanation ; thus enabling the student
to see at one glance all that*he has to commit to memory for
each recitation.
VI OBSERVATIONS,
Bth. And this division of the lessons into Elements, Compo-
sition, Explanation, Version, and Exercise, enables the teacher
to divide each lesson into two, three, or even four parts, accord-
ing to the age and capacity of the learner.
6th. JRepetition, and constant repetition^ is indispensable for
acquiring any language ; but by repetition should not be under-
stood the simple reiteration of single words and easy phrases ;
but repetition of the idioms, and of those fprms of expression
differing most widely from the idiomatical constniction of the
learner's native tongue. It is true, that though this is the
proper plan for acquiring a thorough knowledge of a language,
that feature might tend to make the present work appear, at
first sight, more difficult than the books hitherto used; but
such will not be found the case; for when there is frequent
change of matter there cannot be monotony ; and variety ren-
ders study at the same time easy and agreeable. This repetition,
then, of useful forms of expression, and contrast of idiom, will
be found in every page of our " Combined Method," in which
it has been our endeavor to introduce gradually and with the
necessary explanations of each, the most important idioms of
the Spanish language,
7tlL Although we are of opinion that to leani a language,
and, above all, to learn to pronounce it, it is always preferable
to have the assistance of a skilful teacher, and one who speaks
his native tongue with purity and correctness ; yet, as it is not
always possible to procure such, we have placed at the end a
Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the course of the
work, and the pronunciation of each, so that nothing may be
wanting to second the efforts of those who, from choice or
necessity, may be their own instructors.
8th. The Vocabulary, besides giving the pronunciation and
meaning of the words, indicates the lesson in which the expla-
nation of each has been given in the Grammar. By this means
the learner can with ease refer to the explanation of all those
words of which it has been deemed essential to give one. *
CONTENTS.
PMFACB, • . . . ^^^
A nw BXMARKB OH THB COXBOZD HkTBOD, . • • • ▼« ▼!
COMTENTB, TU-Xri
Pbeldohabt Lesson ok Obthogbapht ahd PaoamfdAnaM^ . x?li-xxlT
LESSON I.
mnXiS
1. Begnlar Terbs, dasdiled in fhxee coi^iagatloiifl, . • . • • 1
2. Boots, *
8. Tenxiinations of the three model Ter1>9,corre8pondI]igto an tlier^gnlarTeilw^ 2
— . Sappression of the nomixiAtlTe pronouns, . .... 2
4. F. (C^f^AO zeqnlres the yerb in the third perBOO, 3
LESSON II.
& saSor,»efUfrllo,»etU)ra,9efUjrUa,iueotitieaeM<^^ • • • 4
6. Am and A>^a8e of these words, ..••••. 6
7. ^o; placed before the T^b, • • 5
LESSON III.
a The conjunction y changed into ^, .7
0. ^, interrogatlTe pTonoun, ... • • 7
10. tSKiio.— When &t£t is to be translated by «^ ..... 7
11. itet?.— When &irf is to be translated by pcro, .• . . . • , 7
12.' JSipa^ infflet, Ac., one word may belong to difTerent parts of speech, . 7
LESSON IV.
13. -4, preposition to, nsed after active Terbs, when the object is a person, . 10
14. 2>e,ased to express positioner the material of which any thing is made, . 10
15. ^, the article the, nsed to determine a noun masculine sin^lar, . 10
— . Contraction of the article rf and the prepositions a and <fe into a/, drf, . 10
16. ^», the indefinite prononn used before masculine nonns, ... 10
— . D'wiaonlyusedasanumeTal.i^ective, 10
LESSON V.
17. Oender, how ascertained, ....... 18
— . ZTHo, nacd before feminine nouns, . . . . • . .13
18. 72»ir, how translated, 18
VUl CONTENTS.
LESSON VI.
19. The tenDinAtions of the penons of the pieeent indicatiTe ; how they diifer
in the three coi^agatlonB, ........ 16
SO. Ifuy, how tmuBlated, ........ 16
21. Noons ending in o change that Yowel into a for the feminine, . .* . 17
LESSON VII.
22. A4)ectiTeB ending in o, on, or on form their feminine In a, . . 20
— . AtUectivea Bigniiying nationality and ending in 0, . ... 20
— . AdJectlYes are generally placed alter their nonna, .... 20
~. A4)ectfTeB naed metaphorically are always placed before the noona, . . 20
— . Some a4)ectiTes drop their last letter or syllable, .... 20
LESSON VIII.
23. The endings of the secpnd and third cox^ngations, how they differ, . . 28
24. The coi^unction 6 when changed into 6, . . . , . 28
25. i\^, how tranalatodi . . . . . . . ' . 23
26. The plural of nouns, • « . . . . . . 28
27. Adjectives agree with their nonns in gender, number, and case, . . 24
28. The article agrees also, 24
— . Feminine nouns that take the masculine article, 24
29. The neuter article A>, . * 24
LESSON IX.
80. -Rip<£,ma»«i,jrf^, are exceptions, 27
81. Nonns which are not monosyllables and end in «, their plural, . . 28
— . Words ending in «, their plural 28
82. Words which are compounds of two nouns,, their plural, ... 28
88. The days ofthe week, when they take the article, .... 28
81 Donde^ adonde, euandoi placed before the verb, . . . 28
86. Donde^ adonde^ euando, in interrogations require an accent, . . .28
LESSON X.
86. Irregular verbs, 81
' — . Tmer not included in the seven verbs, . . . . • .81
~. Objective case of the third person 2^, ft», 2a, 2t2«, ft), . . . . 81
87. Lo and U, the difference between them, . . ... . .82
— . Jl and M> are translated sometimes by 2o, . . . 83
88. Quim^ eiud, que, de qtden, used interrogatively do not take the article, . 82
89. When the Interrogative is governed by a preiK>8ition, the same preposition
must be repeated in the answer, 82
LESSON XI.
40. AlgtUen, -alffuno, the di^rence between them, . . . • .85
—. Any me or any body, when translated by cualqiderc^ ... 85
41. JVodli^ nMfTimo, their distinction, 85
42. Algwio and ninffuno, when they lose the 0, . • • • • 86
48. AlgOt algwia com, used affirmatively, ..•••• 86
COSTTSITTS. IX
44. y<kta,fdngma€09a^iiaedikegtldrelf, ; as
4ft. Negatiyes, when placed before the Yeib, aS
— . Two negatiyes reader the negation more emplistk thai one, • . aS
40. ^ or on, when not tzanalated, 86
LESSON XII.
47. 7S9ur and Aa0«r, their distinetioa, W
— . 7b Aaog and to flg, followed by an IniinltiTe, how they are tnmiiatw!, . . m
48. JPrderU Btd^^bUU, 40
LESSON XIII.
48. JflO, toyo, Ac, change the o into a for the femtnfaie, . . . . 4S
60. Foeaesetyepranoans agree In gender and number with the name of the thhtg
poBseaeed, ......... 48
61. As pronominal a^Jectiyea, nda, tti^ ntyo precede the noon and drop their
final syllable, 48
65. JOo, when phuxd alter the noon, 44
68. FDsBesaiyea need aa pronoana agree in gender sod nnmher with the noona
they repreeent, and take the article, .' . .44
M. When naed indefinitely they take the neater article, ... 44
66. When connected with the yeib ft) te, tlie article ia ondtted, . . .44
66. Fii«^ vuMCni, when aaed, 44
LESSON XIV.
91. Formation of compound nombers, 48
68w Nnmbera are indeclinable, except «fK» and the oompoonda of flitnA^ . 48
60. Uno, its agreement ; when it loeea the 0, . . . . .48
to, ClefUo, iU agreement ; when it loses the Umt syOable, ... 48
LESSON XV.
ei. 0!nllnab,tteir agreement and place, 61
— . iV*wm) and fawwv, when they drop their final letter, ... 61
63. (?rd«rMi&, when ascd, 88
— . N. B.— When ordinala do not reqoire the definite article, ... 61
LESSON XVI.
68. PreUrUD^fMU, -J*
64. ^nfe, its meaning, ^
66. Jf« and #?»«», how oBod, <»
LESSON XVIlI
66. ^!«fen,howased, ....••••• ^
67. TWko, when translated by «w«, and when by flr«i»H ' ' ' ' «
68. (S«rf and ?w« relate to persons and things, vl
60. ftivo refers to persons and things: its agreement, . • • .61
— . It partakes of the nature of the relatlyea and of the poBseiBiyes, . 61
X. CONTKKTS.
70. The prepoftition placed before the rclatlTe, . • • • .61
71. Belatiye pronouns am ntftyer be BuppiesBed in Spanish, • • • 61
LESSON XVIII.
72. Declension of the demonstratlTe pronouns esU, ese, as^ * • • .66
73. JSrfe, how used, .....•••• ^
74. JS5rfe, ew, forming one word with the a^jectlyp otro^ . . • •67
75. The demonstrative pronoons used as neater, . . . • • 67
76. 7%«/orm<r and ^to«tfr, translated by o^t**? and «fe, .... 67
77. 2%<jrf <2r, <Aa< wAo, or ^Aflrf M>AfcA, translated by rf «te, rf flw, 67
78. TCngHah personal pronouns rendered in Spanish by demonstratiTe pronouns, 67
79. -Aj«f, oAi, 000, oai, how employed, 68
LESSON XIX. • -
80. jRira and ;3or, how they differ, 73
81. ^Ure, its meaning, .....•••• 78
eSL flcuto, its meaning, 73,
LESSON XX.
83. Tanio and cuanio, when they lose the last syllable, • . • • .77
84. Comparison of equality^ bow formed, ...... 77
85. Cuan may be employed, . . . . . . ... 77
80. Comparison of mperiority^ how formed, . . . . .77
87. Comparison of <;i/J?rtor(/y, ........ 77
88. Mayor, menor, m^jor, peor, are already in the comparatlye degree, . 77
88. Than, translated by de and que, . . . . .78
90. Comparison relating to nmaa, verbs, and adverbs, . . ' . . '78
LESSON XXI.
01. Superlatives ending in est, or formed by most, how translated, '. 83
93. Most, or most qf, when translated by la mayor parte, or by mas, . • . 83
03. In, preposition, when translated by efe, . . . . .83
04. Superlatives fdrmed by very, mast, etc., when formed in Spanish by mvy and
whcnbyi«imo, . • . 83
05. Adjectives drop the last vowel on taking the termination (0<m0, . 83
06. Other superlatives ending m errimo, . . . . . . 83
07. A4)ectives which change their endings before the termination idma, . . 83
Oa Superlatives in Uimo irregularly formed, ..... SI
09. Irregular comparatives and superlatives, . . . . . .84
— . These make also a superlative in («<mo, ..... 84
— . Also with muy, and a comparative with mas or menos, . . . .81
100. Substantives used a(yectively admit the degrees of comparison, . . 84
LESSON XXII.
101. 8er and ettar, the distinction between them, 89
103. '' *' their employment, ....... 80
CONTENTS. xi
LESSON XXIII.
Birui TAam
103. Future simple, .96
101 The d^finiie arUde lued with nnmerals, indicatixig the hour of the day, . 96
106. Evening and nighl, translated by nochs, . . .96
106. The coojimction »L, when it governs the BubJonctiTe, and when the indica-
tiye, 96
LESSON XXIV.
107. Oofnpound fuiitrts ' • .100
106. Acabar de, its meaning, 100
— . N. B.^How the pupil may learn a great number of words with little or no
dilfieulty, 101
100. Noons endhig in tion are the same in Spanish, changing the letter t into e, 101
110. The days of the month are connted by the cardinal nnmbcrs, preceded by the
article, 101
LESSON XXV.
111. iSlsd^ and 00ruK»r, how they differ, ...... 107
112. Jtm, ya^ todavia^ their different meaning and nses, . . . .107
— . Once, twice, Ac, translated by una vez^ doe veces^ &c., ... 107
— . Wedo^ valor, &c., take the preposition de after them, . . . .107
113. 7b be (tfroid, to be thirty, &c., how translated, .... 107
114. Jam6a and nuncOy how used, . ' . 107
LESSON XXVI.
115. Frononn sabject, or nominatlre, ...... 112
116. Two objective cases of the personal pronomis, how used, . . .118
117. The objective case, when not preceded by a preposition, is affixed to infini-
tives, genmds, Ac., . '118
118. When the verb drops the final letter followed by ruw or (W, . . ' . 113
— . The reason of this, . . .113
119. When the objective case may follow the verb, . *. .113
lao. When the objective may be placed before the first verb, or after the second, 113
121. Prepositions, when expressed, always goyem the second objective case, . 113
122. *i/?, /{, «l, when preceded by con, ...... Hi
128. .Sh^MS, how nsed, ......... 114
124. The second objective case is used after comparatives, ... 114
125. When the first objective case is used, .114
126. Th^ objective case of the third person is rendered by fe, to, if the preposition
1o govern it in English, ........ 114
LESSON XXVII.
127. The third person rendered in Spanish by ««, .110
128. The object of the verb is to be placed last, when two first objective cases
occur in the sentence, ........ 110
129. Placed first when the object of the yerb is the reflective pronoun, . . ISO
180. Both of the ol)|ective cases belonging to the same person used together, . ISO
181. The expressions a df gu^m?, f{ <l amo, arc incorrect^ . . . 120
xii CONTENTS.
amvu rAca
132. The pronoanfl.S, la,lo^loi^ and to, how dlfltlynlflhfld from the articles eZ, la,
k>,lo8,la8, .ISO
188. The aidJecUye mUmo^ how need, • . • 120
LESSON XXVIII.
184. When the lm|»3;/«rnB used, 125
185. When the pluperfect Lb need, . . . . .* . . .196
186. How the expreeslonB to heme just and to be just are translated before a past
participle, . . 126
LESSON XXIX.
187. The preterit anterior, its use, . . • 180
138. Derivation of adyerbs of mannier and quality, .... 131
180. How adverbs are formed ftom adjectiyes, . . . . .131
140. Adverbs terminating in mmU admit, like adjectives, the degrees of compari-
son, 181
141. How these adverbs can be sabstitated, 181
LESSON XXX.
143. What impersonal verbs are, 187
143. Amaneoer and anocher^ used in the three persons, . . • .137
144. Haber and Aocer, and other verbs nsed impersonally, ... 187
145. The pronoon U^ accompanying impersonal verbs, not translated, . . 188
— . Nonns taken in a definite sense require the article, .... 138
— . NomiB used in their most general sense take the article, .188
146. Names of nations, countries, mountains, &c., take the article, . 188
147. Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by a preposition, do not
take the article, .' . . . * . . . 188
— . Names of some places that fdways take the article, .... 138
LESSON XXXI.
14a (^itftor, 8ignliyingto^wj)2fla««r«to, howused, 148
149. atwtof, followed by the preposition d«, 144
160. Oustar, used as an active verb, 144
151. Verbs that require the same idiomatic construction as that of the verb flwtor, 144
158. The verb pcsar, when meaning to WflTrf, 144
LESSON XXXII.
•*
158. How the passive voice is formed, - * **^
154. When the passive form is used with the verb wr hi the present and imperfect
tenses of the indicative, ...•••• J*®
166. When the preposition «fe or i»r is to be used alter passive verbs, . . 149
156. Passive voice formed by ««, . • • '" JS
167. When the passive, formed with «, is to be preferred, . . • • iW
LESSON XXXIII.,
168. 5Q^^c«wtWf6f, what they are, ...•#•• 1*®
CONTENTS. Xiii
159. Whan are the Terbe made TflieetlTer 186
100. When a yerb denotes raoi^vva^y, how it la conjugated, • • • 166
LESSON XXXIV.
161. Which are the irragalar Terhs, KU
162. Yerhe which, although thej undergo Blight changes in their radical letters,
are not to he considered as liregiilar, ISl
163,164. Verbs which change i into y, 169
165. How the irregular verbs are divided, 1611
166. What is to be observed relative to the object of the verb jMgw, . . 168
LESSON XXXV.
167. Irregnlarlty of the verb oeotUsr^ ,..-...'. 168
16a ImpertUive mood^ when used, . .168
160. The 9 of the first person plural, and the d of the second, snppreaacd before
nofandof, ......... 168
170. The subjunctive, used when thp imperative is negative in English, . . 168
171. The fhture of the indicative, used for the Imperative, ... 168
173. Adjectives ending in 0U9, how rendered into Spanish. . . .168
17S. Nouns and adjectives ending in English in fe or iocU^ bow rendered into
Spanish, .......... 160
LESSON XXXVI.
174. Irregularity of the verb moMn 1^3
175. iSe, aa the Spanish indelinite personal pronoun, ' . ' . ' . * . 173
176. The pronoun M, in its four flmctions, . .*.'.'. 174
177. Nouns ending in English in /y, how rendered into SDanish. * " 174
17a Itafcr.howused, *^^ * " J.^
LESSON XXXVII.
179. Irregularity of the verb afciwfer,. !««
180.181,182,183. aiVwk^ttw Ifood, when lied in 'spsnii, . " . * " in
184. Present tense of the suljnnctive ' Cpi
186. Perfecttense, . . .'.'.".".*.' ' iS
LESSON XXXVIII. .
186. Pruent Partic^tes, . i«,
187. Otrundt, . . .'.'.*.'.*.'.". lae
J!^' ^ ^*^**^™«d^th the gerund in Spanish, ' .'.*.'.' 186
189. When in English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used,
how rendered into Spanish, Igy
190. The Inflnitive used as a verbal noun, . . ... 187
m. The infinitive governed by an other verb, how rendered into En^sh, . 187
LESSON XXXIX.
199. Irregularity of the verb /!«»•, . . . • • • • lOS
198. The nsnal forms of salutations, . • 199
Xiv CONTENTS.
LESSON XL. /
194. Omdttdr, its InegiilBrlty, 197
105. iS^grun as a prepoBition and an adVex^, . . . . . . 198 .
196. CoUectiye nouns, ......... 196
• . - LESSON XLI.
197. Defective verbg podritt plaar^ &c., ....*.. 203
198. racw. Its use, . . 808
199. Soler, its use, ' . . .808
900. J9m<I«, Ite meaning and asc, .... t .. 803
901. CorUra, rendered into English by agatnU^ 201
909. iSoftre, its signification, 204
208. Traa^ its meaning ^804
9M. The conjunction /?ue9^ its Qse, . . .' . . .804
LESSON XLII.
906. C^unc<fi>rw, their classification, 909
906. Wliat is to be observed In relation to the government of coi^JnnctlonB, . SKIO
907. Some conjonctions that govern the sabjunctive mood, . . .910
906. Compoond coi^onctlons which require the infinitive mood, . . 210
909. Compound coi^unctions which require the Indicative, . . . .210
LESSON XLIII.
910. Imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive, 215
211. How to render into Spanish the auxiliaries may, fnight^ car^ could, vbUL,
would, ttudshauia . . -817
212. What the Imperfect subjunctive denotes, . . .' . . 917
2ia What the pluperfect denotes, 217
ESSON XLIV.
214. Auj^entative and diminutive nouns, ...... 992
915. Irregular terminations of certain diminutives, . . . . .994
916. Diminutives may be formed from a4)ectives, participles, gerunds, and ad-
verbs, •. *. . . . . . . 924
917. Some of the primitive words do not admit all the diminutive terminations, . 924
218. There are derivatives which, although they appear to be augmentatives or
diminutives, are not so, . . . . . . . 295
LESSON XLV.
919. The fhture simple of ihesubjnnctiye, . . .980
990. How the present of the subjunctive may be substituted by the ititure, . 230
921. The fhtnre compound, . . ' . . . ... .280
222. The compound present of the subjunctive may be substituted by the future
compound, . . • . . .231
228. What is to be observed in order not to misapply the Imperfect and plu-
perfect, . .981
S94. Goyemment of the ftiture simple and compound fhturc of tlfe subjunctive
mood, 981
CONTENTS. XV
LBSSON XLYI.
23&-2a6. Inteijectioiifl, S3T'
LESSON XLVII.
227. Use of the article, 243
22& The definite article used with common nonna taken in a general eenee, . 213
3S9. The article before the names of the foor parts of the giohe, names of empires,
kingdoms, &c.\ . 243
230. Nouns of measure, weight, dEc., when they require the article, . M8
281. The article repeated before every noon enumerated, ... 243
233. The definite article used before nouns Indicating nmk, ofl&ce, Ac., . . MS
238. Used instead of the poBsessiyea^iective, SM
234. Used aa in Bnglisti, before nouns, taken in a particular or definite sense, . 344
LESSON XLVIII.
236. Correspondence of the tenses with each other, 949
296. When the determined verb is put in the InfinitiTe, . 9S0
237. When the determining verb is «er, or any impersonal verb, and the gOTeming
Terl^ lias no subject, . 250
238. Put in the subjunctiye when the determining verb has a nominatiTe, . . 261
839. When the goyeming verb is pht in the present or fhture of the subJunetiTe, 261
340. Government of the preterit indefinite, and compound fhture of the indica-
Uve, 261
941. The nominative being the same for both verbs and the governing one in the
indicative, in what mood the determining verb is put, ... 263
LESSON XLIX.
942, 943, 344, 345, 318, M7, 948, »i9, 260, 351, 263. Derivative nouns, . 267
LESSON L.
864
263. Compound nouns, .••-***
LESSON LI.
• . . 209
264. The natural construction, ..•••' . ino
S55, 256. Figurative construction, ,^
257. Which of the two constructionB is preferable, . . • • •
LESSON LII.
2T6
258. Past PartidpUs^ • * . . 2^6
968. ExtraoriUnaryirrcijnlarity of the verb OTOrtr,. • ^ * ' . .278
m Some past or p«irfyep«Udple.t.|kc™«tlTC.«n«l«tion^ ^
SM. ftrt participles my vmetlmestoke the place of »nb»t«iinTeB. ^
S6S. Other tenaea In the InflniUve mood.
XVI OONTKNTB.
LESSON LIII.
206. Idiomatic ezpresBionSf in which the English prepoBition differs in meaidng
from that which most generally constitates its proper signification, . S84
LESSON LIV.
967. Ck>i^unction8 in English that are frequently nsed as anhstitates for other
words, how rendered iilto Spanish, Sgg
968. Spanish coi^nnctions used as substitutes for other words, . . 989
— . Different uses of the cox\}nnction<<, . •• * . .980
LESSOI^ LV.
900. Some ofthe principal uses of the coi^unction^iM, . . . .985
LESSON LVI.
970. Epistolary correspondence, 801
LESSON LVII.
971. Observation in regard to verbs that change their meaning according to the
preposition by which they are followed, . * ' . . . . 810
LESSON LVIII.
979. The verbs to be ^ad and to be r^oieed^ how translated, . . • .814
978. The verbs to be wiry and ix> grkve, how translated, .... 814
874. How the Terb oi&tfr is used, . 814
LESSON LIX.
975. Idioms with the verbs eaer, dar, dedr, ecAar^ . . . . .890
LESSON LX.
876. .Idioms with the verbs enirar, Tiaoer, ir, Uevar, mandar, oler d, iober <£, saUr,
Mro<r, tofvtor, and vo^wr, . *. . . . 896
LESSONS LXI TO LXV.
On the Principal Idioms of the Spanish Language, 889 to 854
Genersl observations on some gnmmatiGal and idiomatical peculiarities of the
Spanish language, not hitherto treated of in the Grammar, . . .856
Recapitulation of all the rules of the Grammar, . . . . 88510 889
Complete list of the ooiOagations of all the Spanish verbs, . . . 388 to 488
List of aU the irregular verbs, 488,440
VocABULABT, Containing all the Spanish words used in the grammar, . 441 to 470
PRELIMINARY LESSON
ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION.
THE AI^PSIABET.
Thb SpAnnsn Alphabet contains twentj-seren letters, ex-
elusive of JT and Wj which are used in foreign words only,
and are pronounced as in English. The W appears in a very
few historical names, like Wambay Witizcu The letters are all
of the feminine gender, and their names and pronunciation are
as follows:
A,
a.
ah.
N,
n.
tfynay.
B,
^
lay.
%
«,
ain-yay.
0,
c,
Oay.
0,
«>,
0.
CH,
ch,
«^y.
P,
P,
pay.
D,
d.
day.
Q,
q,
loo.
E,
e,
ay.
B,
«•.
air-ray.
F,
{,
ay-fay.
8,
«.
aytay.
G.
g,
Uy.
T,
t,
toy.
n,
h,
at-thay.
u,
«.
00.
I,
i,
e.
V,
▼,
nay.
J,
J,
hotah.
X,
X.
ayhiM.
L,
1.
tt-lay.
Y,
7,
e-ffree-ay'-ffoh.
m
n,
aOryay.
z,
*,
fhay-tah.
M,
m,
aymay.
XViU PBBLIMINARY LESSOX.
All the letters are invariable in sound, except c and <;, which
have each two sounds, as will he seen in the proper place; and
every letter is pronounced in all positions, except the A,' which
is always silent, and the t/, which is not sounded in the sylla-
bles gue^ ffuiy and que^ qui.
So that, with a few exceptions, the Spanish language is
pronounced exactly as it is written, and does not present those
difficulties met with in the orthography and pronunciation of
most other languages. The system of representing, in each les-
son, the pronunciation of each word by an incorrect orthography
only augments the doubts and labor of the learner, besides in-
creasing unnecessarily the size of the work ; one lesson of an
hour's duration with a native Spanish teacher will do more toward
the acquisition of a pure Castilian pronunciation, than all the
works that could be written on the subject.
As the English vowels differ in sound from those of all
other languages, great care ought to be taken to learn the
irue sound of the Spanish vowels; they are:
a, 0, i, o, n..
ah^ ' ay, «, o, oo,
Y is sometimes a vowel. (See the letter Y.)
A has an invariable sound, as heard in the words arty father;
as, arte, padre (not varying as in the English words fare, fat^
faTyfaU^ stoalloWj manyy courage^ mustard).
Z! has the sound of a in made ; as, hecho.
I sounds like the first e in even ; as, inglia, (See letter Y.)
O is pronounced like the English o in the word ode ; as, amo.
U sounds as the English u mhuU\ as, hrda\ it is silent in
the syllables gue^ gui^ guerra^ except it has a diaeresis marked
over it, agilero. In the syllables que^ qui^ it is always silent.
SOUNDS OF THE COIVSONAIVTS.
B has the same sound as in English ; but in Castile and
Aragon (where in other respects the Castilian language is most
PBJELIMIKABY LESSON. xix
• purely spoken and pronounced), they do not press the lips
quite so close as the English do, which causes it very frequent-
ly to be confounded with the r, although they are distinct
letters, and should be pronounced as in English.
O, when followed by a, o, w, or any consonant, sounds like
Tc ; before e and «, it sounds like th in thanks ; as, gracias, leo
cioHj cabaUero, (See letter Z.)
OH is not a double consonant, but a letter which, although
of a double form, has by itself a particular denomination and
sound ; it is pronounced like ch in chess ; as, chicOy chocolate.
Formerly, in words of Hebrew and Gre^k origin, it had the
sound of ky when the vowel following it was marked with the
circumflex accent ; as, archdngel, chtmica : but this practice is
obsolete, and such words are now written arcdngely quimica.
D is pronounced like the English c?, except when found be-
tween two vowels or at the end of words, when it sounds
softer than the English d, li£e th in the article thCy but not like
th lisped, as in thin^ as Madricf (like the)^ not Madrid (like
thin); Ustee? (like the)j not TJste« (like thin). This lisped
pronunciation on the d is considered vulgar.
P is always pronomnced like the English/, and is now used
instead of 2?A; a»j Filosofia^ Mladelfia^ imtead of JPhilosophuZy
PhUadelphia,
G has two distinct sounds : one, before a, Oy w, or a conso-
nant, is the same sound as in English go^ good; as, gato^ gror
cias : before e and i it has another strong, guttural, aspirated
sound, for which the English has no equivalent, and which
even a very strongly aspirated A, as in the words hot^ holy^ does
not represent ; as, gente^ people ; gesto^ gesture ; gigante^ giant.
H is never pronounced in the Spanish language; as, hace,
higo, pronounced as if no such A were there. It is, properly
speaking, only a sign used to mark the etymology of words,
and is now omitted in many words in which it was formerly
used; as, Cristo, FOosofla, Teatro, Pitdgoras, FUadeifia.
/
XX PBELIMIKABT LEBSOH.
This letter is always written before the words that begin
by tie and ie, and here it has a very soft, alpiost imperceptible,
aspiration ; as, huevo^ egg; htiesOj bone; huispedy guest; hierroj
iron; hielOj ice: bat great care must be taken not to pronounce
it too strong, as the lower classes of certain provinces do, pro-
nouncing juevOj or fftievo ; jitesoj or gUeao^ which is considered
vulgar.
J has always an aspirated guttural sound, like that which
the g has befbre e and /, and is written before the vowels a, o,
Uj instead of the letter a;, which formerly represented the same
aspirated sound ; as, ^l^andrOy Alexander ; Don Quyote, Don
Quixote.
Ii always sounds as in English.
IjIi is, like the cA, a single letter, although of double form,
, which therefore cannot be divided at the end of a line. It has
a liquid sound, resembling that of the English U in WiUiamy
brilliant I as, CruiUermo^ briUante.
BEE, N, and F have the English somid.
"& is always pronounced like ni in the English word pinion,
Q is pronounced like the English * before ue and w£, in
which combination alone it is now used ; in all other positions
it has been replaced by c ; as, cuando^ camay comer j quien^ querer.
R, when single, is sounded soft, as in English; as, querido^
oro : and when double, or at the beginning of a word, and
when it comes after /, n, or «, or in compound words, in which
the second begins by r; it is pronounced with a very strong
rolling sound ; as, rc%', malrotar^ enriquecer^ Israel^ prerogati-
«?a, manirotOy cariredondoy &c.
S is pronounced like the English s in say; as, saibiOj wise;
solOy alone ; aerlory sir.
T is pronounced as in English.
V has the sound of the English v. (See letter JB.)
PBSLIMIVABT L1SB80V. XXI
X has the sound of the x in the English irord tax; %a,
exdmen^ eaOrangero. It no longer lepresentA its foimsx guttu-
ral sound, as has been observed. (See letter J^ Some replace
it by the letter s^ when it comes before a consonant, and write
eetrangero instead of extrangero. The grammar of the Span-
ish Academy does not authorize this practice.
T is a consonant letter, but use makes it serve as a
vowel when it stands alone, used as a copulative conjunction
(meaning and) ; it is also used instead of the vowel », in the
pombinations ai^ eij ui at the end of a word ; as, vetdegay^ rey^
fey, convoy^ muy.
When used in its proper place, that is to say, as a conso-
nant, .it has the same sound in Spanish as in the English words
y&ung, year.
Z has always the sound of ^A, as heard in thank^ batK
V¥lAJiBMJR%.
Such syllables only will be noted here as may be subject
to doubt as to the pronunciation and orthography.
ca,
que,
qui,
CO,
en,
hah.
• hay.
hee.
ho.
hoc.
za,
ce,
ci,
zo,
zn,
ikah.
thay.
thee.
iho.
th4)0.
az,
ez,
W
oz,
uz,
ath.
aith.
eeth.
oth.
ooth.
&h
^%
gni,
go,
go,
ffoh.
^ay.
ghee.
gd.
goo.
ja.
ge,
gi,
jo,
jn,
hah. '
hay.
hee.
hd.
hoo.
ya,
ye.
yi.
yo.
yu.
ThlB flomid cannot be pxopeily repKsented In EngUah.
(Sc© letter T).
cha, •
cbe,
chi,
cho,
chn,
tehah.
tehay.
• tehee.
Uhd.
tehoo.
XXU . PBELIMINABY LBSSON.
Ha,
lyah. ■
lyay.
Hi,
lyee.
Do,
lyS.
Dt.,
lyoo.
nyah.
fie,
nyai.
fii,
nye.
flo,
flu,
nyoo.
cna,
iwah
cue,.
hway.
cui,
iwee.
cuo,
. hcS.
S^,
g<ie,
gOi,
gno,
ffway, gwee,
BIPHTKONGS.
ai,
as in
daboia,
dah'-hahree98.
You gave.
ay,
((
hay,
ah'-e.
There is.
aw, ■
((
pausa,
pah'-oo-m.
Pause.
«,
(C
V61S,
mi'-em.
You see.
^,
u
%,
lai'-e.
Law.
ea,
(i
lineo,
W-naira,
Due.
e<?.
((
virglnao,
^eer-he'-nairo.
Virginal.
«w.
((
dcwda,
dai'-oo-da.
Debt.
ia,
((
graoto.
grah' -tJie-a.
Grace.
w»
tc
cfelo.
the-ai'-lo.
Heaven.
io.
Ifr
precio,
prai'-tlve-o.
Price.
»V,
a
cti*dad.
iJu'Oo-^th'.
City.
ofl,
u'
h6ro0,
ai'-TiHiu
Hero.
Oh
i(
wis,
S0''e€98.
You are.
oy, .
((
yof/.
w'-e.
I go.
«a.
((
fragMO,
frdh'-gwa.
Forge.
^*«
it
dt/^no,
. doo-ain'-yo.
Owner.
ui;
((
rwido,
Too-e'-do.
• Noise.
«yi
((
muy,
. moo'-e.
Very.
«d,
u
arduo,
aT'-do(H>.
Arduous.
TBIPHTUO]!VGS.
ta£,
as in precMiis,
prai'the-ah'-
een.
i<?i,
" YBjoieis,
ftah-the-a^^eew.
uai^
" santigwdfs, san-U-gwak'-
ees8.
wiy,
" Paragwdy, pah-rah-gwah'-i.
uei,
'* averigttws, dh-tai-Tl-gtBa^-iem.
fiey,
huey,
IwaH-l,
PBELIMINABY LESSOK. XXIU
Whenever one of the vowels is accented (generally the i
and m), these combinations do not form diphthongs, because
each vowel belongs then to a separate syllable ; as, leid^ varic^
efecti&aj Ac. And in poetry the diphthongs as well as the
triphthongs may be divided into different syllables by a di-
uresis, when the verse requires an additional syllable, as :
^< Bi rode6 tal yez,
For el Istmo de Siiez.'*
ACCEKITS.
Words that end in a consonant are accented on the last
syllable; as, virtud, virtue; hablar^ to speak; fusil^ ^^^\
papeiy paper.
Words'that end in a vowel are accented on the penultimate ;
as, banco, bench ; meaay table ; libra, book.
Of course we need not put any written accent on the last
syllable,. when it ends in a consonant; nor on the next to the
last, when it ends in a vowel, because the fact of ending in any
of these letters is a sufficient mark where to lay the stress of
the voice.
The written accent is used only over the words that do not
follow the above two general rules, to show they are excep-
tions ; as, pqpdf papa ; periddico, newspaper ; Idpiz, pencil ;
IdneSy Monday ; mdrtes, Tuesday ; miercoles, Wednesday, &c.
Remabks.
Monosyllables having only one signification are never ac-
cented ; as, pan, mai. But monosyllables or any other word
having more than one signification should h^ accented when
they are more slowly pronounced ; as, mi, me ; mi, my ; t^,
thoa,; tu, thy ; il, he ; d, the, &c.
The vowels d, e, 6, H, when used alone are always accented.
The verb is an exception to what has been stated about the
accent, since many persons of it, in different tenses, have the
stress of the voice on the syllable next to the last, although
they end in a consonant ; as, hablan, they speak ; compraron.
XXIV. PEKLIMINABY LESSON.
they bonght, &c, ; and although this mjs^ be an exception, it
is not customary to place the written accent over them as is
done in the case of other words.
The employment of the written accent in the verbs is now
generally confined to the first and third persons singular, and
first person plural of the perfect indiccUiv€j and every person
of the future indiccUive.
If one or more pronouns of the dative or accusative case be
affixed to an unaccented person of a verb, the syllable on which
the stress falls should be marked with the accent; as from
busca, bHiscalo^ b&scmelo; from venda^ v&ndalOy vindasdo.
PCWCTlJATIOIf.
The marks are the same as in English, and are similarly
applied, excepting those of interrogaticm and exclamation,
which both precede and succeed the sentence; the former it
should be remarked are inverted. — TSjl.^ g C6mo estd V. f
t Oh^ si FT mpieral
DE TOEHTOS'S
SPANISH GRAMMAR.
LESSON I.
BEGCLAB XESS3.—fSnt Oai^i^aiiim.
Sabl-ar. | To speak.
INDIOATIVB PBB8SNT.
To habl-o.
Ispeak.
Tti habl-as.
ThoQ speakesL
£1 or ella habl-a.
He or she speaks.
Usted (V.) habl-a.
Toa speak.
Nosotros, or ^ ^,
Noeotras, \^^-^^
We speak.
Vosotros,or
Yosotna, } °*°^ "^
Yon speak.
EDoB, or eUas, habl-an.
They speak.
Ustedes (Vds.) habl-an.
You speak.
Si (adverb).
Yes.
No **
No, or not
Senor.
Sir.
C50MP0
smoN.
^HablaV.t
Sf, sefior, JO hablo.
^H&blan Vd0.?
Do you speak?
Yea, BIT. I speak.
Do yon speak?
LBB80N I.
No, sefilor, dlas hablan.
I Hablais voflotias?
No, sefiior, ellos hablan.
^Hablaella?
No, sefior, ella no habla.
jHablaatii?
No, sefior, A habla.
iHabUV.?
Si, sefior, hablo.
^Hablan ellas?
No, sefior, no hablan.
I Hablamos nosotros ?
Sf, sefior, hablamos.
i Hablais vosotras f
Nosotraa no hablamos.
No^ rar, they speak.
Do you speak?
No, sir, they speak.
Does she speak ?
No, sir, she does not speak.
Dost thon speak?
No, dr, he speaks.
Do yon speak?
Yes, sir, I speak.
Do they speak ?
No, sir, they do not speak.
Do we speak?
Tes, sir, we speak.
Do yon speak?
We do not speak.
EXPLANATION.
1. Regulab Vebbs. — ^All the verbs of the Spanish language
have their endings, in the infinitive mood, either in ar^ er, or
ir; hence their classification in three conjugations: Ist, those
ending in ar; 2d, those ending in er; and dd, in tr ; as, hablrar^
aprend-er^ escrUhir.
2. Roots. — ^The letters before the terminations or, «r, »r, in
the preceding verbs, are habl^ aprend^ eacribj and are called the
roots.
3. Terminations. — ^All regular verbs of the^r«^ conjugation
vary the endings in their respective tenses, so as to correspond
with those of the verb habl^tr; all those of the second conjuga-
tion correspond to the terminations of aprender; and all those
of the ^Airc? correspond to eacrilhir.
Consequently, when the student has learned how to conju-
gate one of the regular verbs of each conjugation, he can con-
jugate all the regular verbs of the Spanish language (about
8,000). For this reason we recommend the scholars to devote
their attention, in thejirstplacey to committing to memory the
different moods and tenses of these three model verbs. They
will be found complete at the end of the book.
The terminations of the verbs being different for each per-
son, as well in the plural as in the singular number, the nomina-
tive pronouns are ordinarily dispensed with, and are only used
LESBOK I. 8
to give emphasis ; except the pronoun Ustedf which must
always be expressed. — Ustedj meaning You, is a contraction
from vuegtra merced. Your Honor ; and, being a title, its omis-
sion would be considered impolite.
4. You.— In addressing an individual in Spanish, the third
person is used with the pronoun Uited: as, Uited hcMa^ you
speak ; the second person is employed only in speaking to rela-
tives or intimate friends.
CONVEBSAHON AND VEKSION.
1. lEablan ellas? 8i, sefior, eOas hablan.
2. iHablais vosotros? No, sefior; elloB hablan.
8. |Hablamo8 nosotras? No, sefior ; ella habla.
4. iHabhds vosotroe? No, sefior; 41 habla.
5. I Habla ella^ 8i, sefior, habla.
6. I Habla 61 f No, sefior, no habla.
7. iHablas td? Si, sefior, yo hablo.
8. ^Hablais voeotras? 81, sefior, nosotras hablamos.
9. 2 Hablo yo? 81, sefior, Y. habla.
10. I Habla 61? No, sefior, no habla.
11. I No hablan ellos? Si, sefior, ellos hablan.
12. I Habla Y. ? No, sefior, yo no hablo.
18. 4 No habla Y. ? No, sefior, yo no hablo.
14. I No hablan ellas? Si, sefior, hablan.
16. I No hablais vosotras? No, sefior, nosotras no hablamos.
EXGERCISE.
1. Do you speak? I speak.
2. Do they speak? Yes, sir, they speak.
8. Dost thou speak? No, sir, he speaks.
4. Do you speak? No, ear, we do not speak.
5. Dost thou speak? No, sir, I do not speak.
6. Does he not speak? Yes, sir, he speaks.
7. Do you not speak? No, sir, we do not speak.
8. Does she not speak? No, sir, she does not speak.
9. Do we not speak? Yes, sir, we speak.
10. Do they (Jem.) not speak? No, sir, they (Jem,) do not speak.
11. Do we (^fem) not speak? Yes, sir, we {fern.) speak.
12. Do you speak? No, sir, I do not speak; they (fern.) speak.
LESSON II.
LESSON II.
MASCfUUNB K0T7NB.
FSMINUIK K0TJN8.
Seflor (Sr.). Sir, Mr., or Lord.
Caballero. Gentleman, Sir.
Sefiorito. Yoong gentleman.
Don.(Dn.,orD.).Mr., Esq.
Sefiora (Sra.). Madam, or Mrs.
" " TAdy, or My Lady.
Sefiorita (Srita). Misa, or younglady.
Dofia Pa.) Mrs.
Espafio). Spanish.
Tngl^s. English.
Frances. French.-
Aleman. German.
COMPO
Lnisa. Louisa.
3inON.
Sefiorita, i habla Y. espafiol ?
Si, eefior, hablo espafiol.
Luisa, I hablas frances ?
No, sefior, no hablo frances.
^Hablanyd8.mgl6B?
Hablamos inglds.
jHablan elloe, 6 eUas, fiunces?
Sefiora, ^ habla Y. espafiol ?
Bon Manuel, i habla Y. aleman?
Caballero, i habla Y. espafiol ?
Sefiorita Luisa, 4 habla Y. frances ?
Do yon speak Spanish, Missf
Yes, sir, I speak Spanish.
Louisa, dost thou speak French f
No, rar, I do not speak French.
Po you speak English f
We speak English.
Do they speak French ?
Madam, do you speak Spanish ?
Mr. Emanuel, do you speak German ?
Sir, do you speak Spanish ?
Miss Louisa, do you speak French ?
EXPLANATION.
6. SkI^ob. — ^This word, used alone, L e., in the vocative case,
implies inferiority on the part of the speaker, and answers to
the word Lord in English. It is used in addressing God, or
the King; or by servants when speaking to their masters.
"With an equal, the proper term is cabdUerOy gentleman ; never-
theless, Seflor may also be used among equals : in the affirmar-
tive, S%^ seflor^ or in the negative, wo, seHor^ in which cases it
means sir; or together with the name of the person ; as, iSeftor
JETempy which means Mr. Kemp.
Sefiora^ Sefiorita. — ^In addressing ladies, the word Sefiora^
Madam, and Sefiorita^ Young Lady, or Miss, may be used
LBSSON II. 5
alone; as, SenorOj or Seflorikt^ ^AoMa FT e^foflolf Madam,
or Young Lady, or Miss, do you speak Spanish ?
SeikyrUo^ IDce Sefior^ implies inferiority on the part of the
speaker, for which reason it is seldom used, except by servants.
6. DoK, Mr., applies to gentlemen, and Doflaj Mrs., to la-
dies. These terms are only used in conjunction with the Christ-
ian names; as, Don Manuel^ Dafla IJuisa^ and, still more re-
spectfully, Seflor Don Manud^ Sefiota Dofia Ijuiaa. This
title, conferred, in old times, only upon members of noble
Amines, is now used in addressing all persons, except those
of very humble station, and is written in abbreviation thus,
Dn., Da. ^
7. The negative no, is always placed immediately before
the verb.
CONVBRSAnON AND VERSION.
1. ^Habla V. espafiol? Hablo espafioL
2. Lnisa, jhablas frances? Hablo franoes.
8. jHabla Manuel ingles? Hablaingl4s.
4. Cabanero, ^habla Y. aleman ? Si, sellor, hablo alei^ian.
5. iHablan Yds. frances? |Hablamos frances?
6. I Hablan eQos ingles? No, sefior, no hablan ingl6s.
7. 2 Hablan dlas espafiol? No, sefior, no hablan espalioL
8. (Habla Lmsa frances? No, sefior, no habla frances; ella habia
espafioL
9. i^o habla Mannel aleman ? No, sefior, no habla aleman ; 41 habla
ingl^
10. I Habla Y. espafiol ? No, sefior, no hablo espafioL
11. I Habla Mannd espafiol ? Si, sefior, 61 habla espafioL
12. iDon Manne], habla Y. frances? No, sefior, no hablo frances.
18. Sefiora Da. Luisa, ^habla Y. espafiol? No, sefior ; hablo ingl^.
14. Sefiorita Da. Lnisa, ^habla Y. frances? Yo hablo frances.
15. CabaUero, | habla Y. aleman? No, sefiorita, hablo espafioL
EXERCIBEL
1. Do they speak French? They speak French.
2. Do you speak Enghsh? ' We speak English.
8. Do they speak Spanish ? No, madam, they do not speak Spanish.
4. Sir, do yon speak German? Tes, madam, I speak German.
5. Does Emannd speak French? No, sir; he speaks English.
6
LESSON III.
6. Do 70Q speak Spazush? No, ear, I do not epeak Spanish.
7. Does not Louisa speak German? No, sir, she does not speak Ger-
man ; she speaks French.
8. Emannel, dost thou speak English ? I speak English.
9. Does Louisa speak Spanish ? Yes, sir, she speaks Spanish.
10. Do you speak French? No, sir, I speak English.
11. Sir, do you speak French? No, sir.
12. Miss Louisa, do yon speak Spanish? Yes, madam.
18. (Don) Emanuel, do you speak English ? Yes, sir, I speak Eng-
lish.
14. Do we speak Spanish? We do not speak Spanish; we speak
French.
LESSON III.
Estudi-ttT.
To study.
Estndi-o.
I study.
Estudi-as.
Thou studiest
Estudi-a.
He studies.
Estudi-amoa.
We study.
Estudi-ais.
You study.
Estudi-an.
They study.
El (moie, sing.).
The.
Yor6.
And.
What or which.
Pero, sino.
But.
Bien (adverli).
WeU.
ATfl]
Badly.
ADJRO
nVEB.
Espafiol.
Spaniard.
IngMs.
Englishman.
Frances.
Frenchman.
A1flTnq.n,
German.
Americano.
American.
MABCTJUafB KOUNS.
FEMININK NOUXS.
Al^andro. Alexander.
I Margarita. Margaret.
LB880K III.
ooxposmoy.
«Estadiay. espftfiol?
No, seiior, tl Fnnces estodia e^MuBol ;
pero JO eBta^o in^da.
i Qai estadia el Americano f
Estadia espafiol y franoea.
Alqandro, i estudiaa francea y aleman f
No, seSor, estudio espafiol 4 in^ia.
Maimd no eatadia rino fnncea.
i Qa6 hablan elloe aino espukA f
iHabU bien ingl^ d Espafiol ?
No, sefior, ^l-habla el in^te mal, pero
habla bien d espafioL
Do joQ study E^nmah ?
No, sir, the Frencfaman atedies Spanidi ;
bat I study fti^ah.
What docs the American sCady ?
He stndiea Spani^ and French.
Alexander, do you stndy French and
German?
No, ^, I study Spamsh and Ba^sh.
Ernanud stoifies bat (onlj) French.
What do they speak bat Spamsh *
Does the Spaniard speak English wcDt
No, sir, he speaks EngCah badly, bat
speaks Spanish veO.
EXPLANATION.
8. Y. — ^The conjanction y is changed into i when the fol-
lowing word begins with i or At; as, etpaHoi i ingle^ Spanish
and Englisb ; algodon i hilo^ cotton and thread.
9. Qu^ interrogative pronoun, is written with an accent,
to distinguish it from que, relative prononn, or conjunction.
10. Seng. — ^When we translate but into Spanish, we most
first ascertain its meaning ; because this conjundion is used in
English to express many very different things. In Spanish it
is translated sino, when it is used in antithesis, that is, when it
means except \ and also after an interrogation, or a negation.
The verb is not repeated with this conjunction ; as, £l no habla
9ino ingles. He speaks but (only) English. ^Qne habla nito
espaSol ? What (else) does he speak but Spanish ?
11. Pebo is used when it is not preceded by a negative,
and the verb is repeated ; as, JuMo etpaiicl, pero no JuMo
francea. I speak Spanish, but do not speak French.
N. B. — ^We will see hereafter that but, according to its dif^
ferent meanings in English, must be translated by different
words in Spanish.
12. We have again introduced the words etpafiol, inglis,
fiances, and aleman into this lesson, because, while they were
given before as substantives, they are now employed as adjec-
tives. The pupil will observe that, in Spanish, as in English,
some words are, at different times, different parts of speech ; as.
8 LB880K III.
M Espaflcl habla hien frances. The Spaniard speaks French
well. Here the word ^Espaficl is used as an adjective,
me2kVkm^' Spaniard \ and the word frances as a sabstantive,
meaning the French language \ hien is employed as an ad-
verb, meaning well, and it will appear hereafter as a substan-
tive, meaning good. Consequently, the learner, before trans-
lating a word, must first ascertain the part of speech to which
it belongs.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. 2 Habla espafiol Margarita? Margarita no habla espallol, pero
habla ingl6&
2. j Habla Y. espafiol? No, sefior, hablo frances y aleman.
8. Alejandro, ^hablas ingles? Si, sefior, hablo ingl^.
4. I Hablan Yds. espafiol ? Hablamos espafiol k ingles.
6. ^Qn6 hablan eUos? Hablan aleman.
6. Gaballero, ^estndia Y. espafiol? Si, sefior, estadio espafiol k in-
gl^.
7. i Qu6 estndia el Aleman? Estndia espafiol.
8. ^Estudian Yds. espafiol? Estadiamos frances y aleman.
9. \ Uabla bien Luisa el ingMs? Habla bien espafiol k inglds.
10. j Habla bien Manuel el aleman? No, sefior, habla mal el aleman,
pero habla bien el frances.
\\, I Habla bien ingles el Americano? Habla bien ingl68, pero habla
mal el espafiol.
12. Sefiora, |estadia Y. frances. No, sefior, estadio espafioL
18. % Qne estndia Alejandro? El no estndia sine frances.
14. I Que hablan ellos sino espafiol ? Ellos hablan frances.
EXERCISE.
1. Do jon study German ? We study French and Spanish.
2. Does Alexander speak Spanish? Alexander does not speak Span-
ish, but he speaks English.
3. Margaret, do you speak French? No, sir, I speak German and
Spanish.
4. What do they speak ? They speak Spanish and Grennan, but do
not speak French.
6. Do you speak Spanish? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish, but I
speak English.
6. Does Louisa speak French well? She speaks French badly, but
iq>eaks German welL
LJESS80K lY.
9
7. What do joa study? We stady Spanisb, and Alexander stadies
IVench.
6. What does the German study? He studies Spanish.
9. Does he study well ? No, madam, he studies badly.
10. Do yon speak Spanish, madam? No, air, I do not speak Spanish,
but I speak "Kngliah and German.
11. Does the Frenchman speak English well ? No, madam, he speaks
English badly, but the Spaniard speaks English weD.
12. What does the German study ? He studies English, and the Eng-
lishman studies German.
18. What does Alexander study ? He studies French only.
14. What do they speak but Spanish? ) v tjvo ii
What else do they speak but Spanish ? J ^^^ ^'P®^ ITrencb.
LESSON IV.
Compr-ar,
To buy.
Compr-o.
I buy.
Gompr-as.
Thou buyest
Oompr-a.
He buys.
Oompr-amos.
We buy.
Oompr-aiSb
You buy.
Compr-an.
They buy.
6u80-ar.
1
To look for, to seek.
A.
~ To.
De.
Of^ or from.
AL
To the.
Del
Ofthe,orfromthe.
Un (maae. Hng,).
A, or an.
libro.
Book.
Onademo.
Oopy-book.
PapeL
Paper.
Madera. Wood.
Caballo.
Horse.
Untera
Inkstand.
COHPO
filTION.
^Qa^oompimy.?
What do you buy?
Ckmqiro un Ubio.
Ibuyabook.
10 LESSON IV.
i Compran Yds. |>apel ?
jNo, Befior, no compramoe papd,
oompramos on coademo.
Busco al Americano.
£l buBca el libro.
£1 caballo del Frances.
£1 tinttro de madera.
Do you buy paper?
No, sir, we do not buj paper, we buy
a copy-book.
I look for the American.
He looks for the book.
The Frenchman's horse.
The wooden inkstand.
EXPLANATION.
13. -i. — ^The preposition d, to. Active verbs govern their
objectives with the aid of the preposition d^ if that objective be
a person ; as, Suaco al Americano^ I look for the American ;
JBusco dpapdy I look for the paper.
14. De. — The preposition <fe, of^ or from^ is used to ex-
press possession, being always placed before the possessor ; as,
El cabaUo del Frances: The Frenchman's horse. It is also
used to denote the material of which any thing consists, or is
made ; as, JS7 tintero de madera^ The wooden inkstand.
16. El. — ^The article d^ the^ is nsed to determine a noun
masculine singular ; as, el lihro^ the book.
N. B. — ^When the article el comes after the proposition d
(to), or de (of, or from), the e is suppressed, and the two words
compounded into one ; thus, al^ dely instead of d el^ de eL
16. Un. — The indefinite pronoun un is used before mascu-
line nouns ; as, un ingles, an Englishman ; un caballo, a horse.
N. B. — Uho is only used as a numeral adjective.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. iQxx^ compra el Frances? Gompra d caballo del Ingl^
2. iQa6 comprais vosotras? Oompramos nn cuademo.
8. 4Qa6 compra V.? Oompro un libro.
4. ^Oompran Yds. nn cnademo? No, sefior, compromos un tintero
de madera.
5. 4Qn6 bnscas ttif Bnsco un libro espoQoL
6. I Qn6 buscais vosotros ? Nosotros buscamos nn tintero.
7. |Qu6 busoan ellas? Bnscan el papel.
8. Alejandro, ibnscas el papel? No, sefior, busco el cnademo.
9. ^Estudia Margarita ingles? No, sefior, estudia frances.
LESSON lY. 11
10. |Qn6 estadia el Americano f Estadia espafioL
11. {Estadian Yds. frances? No, sellor, estadiamos inglde.
12. iQa6 estadia ella? Estndia aleman.
18. 4Qq^ compra Y. ? Compro el caballo del Espafiol.
14. iQa6 compran ellos? Gompran on tintero de madera.
15. ^Bascais yosotros al Aleman? No, sefior, bnscamos al Frances.
16. jHabMs vosotros aleman? 81, sefior, hablamos aleman.
17. i<Hablan ellas espafiol ? No, sefior, hablan franoes.
18. I Qa6 estadia Y. ? Estndio ingl^ y espafioL
19. lOompra ella on libro? Si, sefior, compra on libro.
20. iBosca 61 al Frances? No, sefior, abosca al Aleman.
21. iQa6habIa el Americano? Habla espafiol.
22. Manuel |qa6 estndias tti? Estndio aleman.
23. |Qa6 compran ellos? Gompran nn caballo.
24. I Qa6 bnscan Yds. ? Boscamoe el libro espafioL
EXERCISE.
1. What do they look for? Thej look for an inkstand.
2. What does she look for? She looks for a book.
3. Do you look for a copy-book? Yes, sir, we (fern.) look for a
copy-book.
4. Do they (Jhrn.) bay a wooden inkstand? Yes, sir, they buy a
wooden inkstand.
6. What do you buy? We buy the Frenchman's horse.
6. Do you buy paper? No, sir, I buy a book.
7. Do you buy a copy-book ? Yes, sir, I buy a copy-book.
8. What does the Frenchman study? He studies German.
9. Do you study Spanish? No, sir, I study French.
10. Wliat does she study? She studies English.
11. Wliat do they (fern.) study? They study Spanish.
12. Do you 9peak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French.
13. Does she speak Enghsh? No, sir, she speaks German.
14. Do you speak German? No, sir, we (fern.) speak English.
15. Do you look for the Frenolunan? Yes, sir, I look for the French-
man.
16. Do yon look for paper? No, sir, I look for a copy-book.
17. What do they look for? They look for a book.
18. Do you look for the German? Yes, sir, we (/w».) look for the
German.
19. Do you speak French? Yes, sir, I speak French.
20. What does Margaret q>eak? She speaks English.
12
LB8S0N y.
21. What do they buy? They bay a wooden inkstand.
22. What dost thon look for? I look for a horse.
28. What do you stndy ? We (/em.) study Spanish.
24. What do you speak? 1 speak English.
LESSON V.
•
Uecentar.
To need, or to be in want of.
Necesit^o.
I need.
Neceslt-as.
Thou needest
Necesit-a.
He needs.
Necesit-amos.
We need.
Necesit-ais.
You need.
Necesit-an.
They need.
m.
My.
Su.
His, her, its,
their.
Sa (») de v., or \
m (n) de V. J
Your.
GES
FDES.
El papi. The papa.
La mami.
The mftmnm^
El abogado. The lawyer.
Lapluma.
The pen.
El oomerciante. The merchant
Latinta.
The ink.
El lacre. The sealmg-wax.
La gramiitica.
Thegranunar.
El poUo. The chicken.
La gallina.
The hen.
El algodon. The cotton.
Laseda.
The silk.
Eljabon. The soap.
La lavandera.
The washerwoman.
El pattuelo. The handkerchief.
COMPO
Lacamisa.
smoN.
The shirt
i Neoesita el abogado la pluma ?
Si, eefior, necesita la pluma j el tintero.
^Qu6 necesita comprar la lavandera?
Necesita comprar Jabon.
^Necesita el oomerciante mi algodon?
Does the lawyer want the pen ?
Yes, sir, he wants the pen and the ink-
stand.
What ddies the washerwoman want to
buy?
She wants to buy soap.
0oes the merchant want my cotton ?
LESSOir ▼. 13
Neoesita compnr el algodon de Y. y
la seda del Frances.
i Neoesita Y. ea pafinelo de algodon ?
No, seiiora, neceaito bu paiiuelo de seda
deY.
i Qae neoesitan Yds. t
Neoesitamos nn poUo y una gallina.
He wants to bay yoor cotton, and the
Frenchman's silk.
Do you want your cotton handkerchief?
No, nuulam, I want your silk handker-
chiefl
What do yon want ?
We want a chicken and a hen.
EXPLANATION.
17. GsiTDBB. — ^In Spanish aU noons are either mascnline or
feminine ; the neuter gender is only applied to those things so
indefinitely used that their gender cannot be discovered.
The gender of nouns may be ascertained either by their
signification or their termination.
NounB which signify males, or which denote dignities or
professions, &c., applicable to men, are masculine; and those
which signify females, or professions, &c., applicable to women,
are feminine, without regard to their terminations: so that,
hombrey man; cdbaUerOy gentleman; poUOy chicken; zapaterOy
shoemaker; abogadoy lawyer, are masculine; and tnujerj wo-
man ; sefLora, lady ; gallina^ hen ; Uwanderay washerwoman,
are feminine.
Nounds ending in a, cf, or ion, are generally feminine, and
those ending in other letters are masculine ; as.
PapdL
Paper.
Leodon.
Lesson.
Tmtero.
Inkstand.
Floma.
Pen.
BOlete.
BUlet
aadad.
aty.
N. B. — Una {indefinite article) is used before feminine nouns.
To facUitcOe thepuptis in the distinction of gender ^ the left-
hand side, in the vocabulary ^ is reserved for maeeuliney the
right for feminine nouns.
18. When your is preceded by yoUy it is sometimes trans-
lated by Su; otherwise, it is generally rendered by el — de K,
OTsu—^ v.; as,
V, neoeriia sn carta. «
/ Qui neeemia ^peytdde Y. ?
Jfeemia su l^ro de Y .
Tou need your letter.
What does yemr fiither need t
He needs your book.
14 LBSBON V.
CONVEBSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Necesita Y. mi gram&tica? No, sefior, no neoesito sn gramAtica
deV.
2. I Necesita ella el palinelo de seda ? Si, sefior, ella necesita el pafinelo
de seda.
8. I Necesita Y. comprar nn libro ? Neoesito comprar un cnademo.
4. ^Necesitan ellas el lacre? No, sefior, necedtan el pafinelo de al-
godon.
5. I Qa6 necesita comprar el abogado? Necesita comprar nna plnma.
6. I Qa6 necesita comprar la lavandera? Necesita comprar jabon.
7. iBnsca Y. su pafinelo? Si, sefior, bnsco mi pafinelo.
8. I Bnsca Y. el cnademo de Mannel? No, sefior, bnsco el cnademo
deY.
9. I Habla Y. bien el aleman ? No, sefiorita, hablo mal el aleman.
10. ^Estndian Yds. trances? No, sefior, estndiamos espafioL
m 11. ^Compra Y. nn caballo ingles? Si, sefior, compro un caballo
ingles.
12. I Qn6 compran ellos? Oompran nna plnma j tinta. *
13. iQn6 comprais vosotras? Nosotras compramos nn pafinelo de
seda.
14. 2 Qci^ compra la lavandera? Compra jabon.
15. I Bnsca Y. 4 mi abogado ? Si, sefior, bnsco al abogado de Y.
16. jOompra la lavandera nnpoUo? Compra nna gallina.
17. I Compra jabon el comerciante ? No, sefior, el comerciante com-
pra algodon.
18. I Bnscan ellas el pafinelo de Y. ? Bnscan el pafinelo de Y.
19. ^ Necesita Y. hablar al abogado? Si, sefiora, necesito hablar al
abogado.
. 20. j Necesita Y. comprar nn libro ? No, sefior, necesito comprar nna
plnma y papel.
21. I Necesita Y. estndiar ingles? Si, sefior, necesito estndiar ingl^
22. I Qu6 necesitais vosotras ? Necesitamos comprar lacre.
28. 2 Necesita Y. hablar ol Frances? No, sefior, necesito hablar al
Aleman.
24. £Qn6 necesita Y.? Necesito nn pafinelo de algodon.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you need ? I need a book and paper.
2. What does she need ? She needs your handkerchief.
8. Do you need a horse? Yes, sir, I need an English horse.
4. What do you need? I need soap.
LBSSOK VI.
15
5. Does the American need the Spanish bookt Yea, air, he needa the
Spaiushbook.
6. Bo they need a lawyer? Yea, air, they need a lawyer.
T. Do yon hny a silk handkerchief? No^ ar, we {/em.) huy a cot-
ton handkerchiefl
8. Do yon look for the Frenohman'a harae? No, air, I look for the
£nglishiiian*s horse.
9. Dost thou stndy German ? No, sir, I stndy Tgngliah,
10. What does the merchant hny? He hnys cotton.
11. What does the washerwoman hny ? Bhe bnys a hen and a chicken.
12. Does the lawyer bay a book ? No, sir, he bnys paper.
13. Do they (Jem.) speak well? No, sir, they speak badly.
14. Do yon speak French, sir? No, sir, I speak English.
15. Do yoH study much {muoho)% No, su-, we stndy very little {poeo).
16. Do yoa study fast {aprua) ? No, sir, I study slowly {deepaeio),
17. Do you buy cotton from the merchant ? No, air, I buy silk from
your brother.
16. What does your papa need? He needs the lawyer's book.
19. What are they looking for ? They are looking for paper.
20. Do you need a copy-book? No, sir, I need a book.
21. Do you study Spanish ? Yes, madam, I stndy Spanish.
22. Do you need paper and pen ? Yes, sir, I need paper and pen.
23. What do they need? They need a dlk handkerchie£
24. What do yon need? I need an English horse.
LESSON VI.
Aprendree.
A[Hrend-o.
Aprend-es.
Aprend-e.
Aprend-emos.
Aprend-eis.
Aprend-en.
To learn.
I learn.
Thou leamest
Heleams.
We learn.
Yon learn.
They learn.
Vender.
To sell.
16
LB880N yi.
Mu7.
Very.
Macho.
Mach, a great deal
Pooo.
Littia
Aprisa.
Qoioklj.
Despacio.
Slowly.
Estadioflo.
Stadioua.
Holgazan.
Man.
Idle.
Hombre.
Mi^'er.
Woman.
Muchacbo.
Bor.
Maohacha.
Gu-L
Padre.
Father.
Madre.
Mother.
Hyo.
Bon.
Hya.
Daughter.
Hermano.
Brother.
Hermana.
Sister.
COMPOS
moN.
I Aprende may aprisa el madiacho ?
£1 machacho eatadioBo aprende may
i4>rifla; pero el machaoho holgazan
aprende may deapado.
^Aprenden ingl^a an padre y an hei^
mano de Y . f
Sf, aefior, y mi madre y mi hermana
aprenden franoea.
i Aprende macho la machacha ?
No, aeflor, aprende poco.
^Aprenden apriaa an h^o y aa htja
deV.?
No, aeflor, aprenden deapada
Doea the boy learn very fiistt
The atadiooa boy leama very &st; bat
the idle one leains very slowly.
Do year father and brother learn Eng-
lish?
Tea, sir, and my mother and sister
learn French.
Does the girl learn mach t
No, sir, she leains little.
Do yoor son and daaghter learn fiuit ?
No, dr, they leam alowly.
EXPLANATION.
19. The tebmination of the Jlrst person in the present in-
dicative is always o in all the verbs of the Spanish language,
to whatever conjugation they may belong, except six irregular
verbs, as we shall see in future ; bo that the only difference be-
tween the termination of (be second and first conjugations is
the changing the a into e in the second and third persons
singular, and in all the plural
20. MuT is generally translated by vert/ or very much ; as
muy bienj very well ; may lueno^ very good, <fec. ; but it can
LE880K YI. 17
never qaalify a rerb nor stand alone in discourse; as. Does
he speak very well? Yes, very. ^JSiMa it muy bienf Sly
mucho.
21. Many masculine^ nouns ending in o, change this letter
into a for the feminine ; as,
Hennaoo.
Brother.
Hcmuuia.
Sister.
Hijo.
Son.
Hijft.
Daughter.
lladiacbo.
Boy.
Muchacha.
GirL
CONVERSATION AND TEBSION.
1. (Aprende Y. bien d franccat No, sefior, aprendo mny mal el
finances.
2. I Aprcnden ellas aprisa ? No, sefior, aprenden despacio.
8. I Aprende macho el machacho holgazan ? No, sefior, aprende may
poco.
4. I Aprendeis vosotros aprisa t Si, sefior, aprisa y bicn.
5. I Qq^ vende el hermano da sa padre de V. ? Yende algodon.
6. 2 Yenden ellas papel? No, sefior, venden plamas y lacre.
7. I Qa6 Tende Margarita? Yende ana gallina.
8. I Yende lacre el comerciante? No, sefior, vende papeL
9. |Necesita Y. el pafiaelo de sa hermana? No, sefior, neoesito el
pafinelo de sa hya de Y.
10. jBusca sa mam4 de Y. el pafiaelo de sedat No, sefior, boSCa el
pafiaelo de algodon.
11. iQa6 necesita sa h^a de Y. ? Necesita hablar al hermano de Y.
12. I Necesita la machacha comprar papel? No, sefiora, necesita com-
prar an caademo.
13. jHabla Y. del Frances? No, sefiorita, hablo del Aleman.
14. |Qa6 compra sa padre de Y.? Gompra el caballo del h^o del
abogado.
15. I Qa6 bosca Y. ? Basco an libro y ana planuu
16. |Qa6basca la machacha? Basca el jabon de la hermana de Y.
17. I Aprende macho d machacho estadioso? 61, sefior, aprende
macho.
18. I Aprende Y. sa leccion de frances? No, sefior, aprendo mi lec-
don de aleman.
19. jHabk bien BonHanad d espaflol? Si, sefior, habla may bien
el espafiol.
20. (Estadia Y. gram&tica inglesa? No, sefior, estadio grom^ca
francesa.
21. I Compra Y. an tintero y papd ? No compro sino an tintero.
18 LESSON YI.
22. ^Bnsca Y. i mi padre ? Si, sefiorita, bosco & so padre de V.
23. 2 Neoesita \ . comprar un tintero ? No, sefiora, necesito hablar 4
mi hermana.
24. ^Necesitamos nosotras aprender espafiol? Si, sefior, necesitamos
mucho aprender espafioL
EXERCISE.
1. Does yonr sister learn English ? Yes, sir, she learns English.
2. What does joar brother learn f Mjr brother learns Spanish.
8. Do you leam quickly? No, sir, we learn very slowly.
4. Does the studious boy leam well ? Tes, sir, he learns very well.
5. What does your brother sell ? *ne sells cotton and edlk.
6. Do you s^U paper ? No, sir, I sell sealing wax and ink.
7. Do they (Jem,) need a French book ? No, sir, they need a copy-
book, a pen, and ink.
8. Do you need the English grammar? No, sir, I need the Spanish
grammar.
9. Do you want to speak to my father ? Yes, sir, I want to speak to
your father.
10. Do you want to speak to my sister's son ? No, sir, I want to
speak to the Frenchman.
11. Does he want to buy a horse ? Yes, sir, he wants to buy a horse.
12. Do you need my book ? No, madam, I need your wooden ink-
stand.
18. Do you look for the merchant ? No, sir, I look for your father.
14. Do they look for papa? No, sir, they look for the lawyer.
16, Do you buy a book ? No, sir, we buy a copy-book ^d paper.
16. Do they study English ? Yes, sir, they study English.
17. Do you study German, sir ? No, I study Spanish, madam.
18. Do you speak English well ? No, sir, I speak English badly.
19. Does your sister speak French very well? No, sir, she speaks
very little French.
20. What does your father speak ? He speaks but (only) English.
21. Does he not speak German? No, sir, he does not speak German.
22. Does your daughter speak to your sister? Yes, sir, she speaks to
my sister.
23. Do you learn very quickly ? Yes, sir, I leam very quickly.
24. Do you sell your book ? No, sir, I sell my paper.
LS880H YII.
19
LESSON VII.
Le-a
Le-emoa.
Le-eis.
Le-en.
Comer.
Beber. .
XASOULDrS AiMBonrxB.
Bneno. Good.
Hermosa Handsome.
Feo. U»[y.
Peqnefio. Little or smaD.
(xrande (fit. &/!)• Large.
EspafioL Spaniah, also Spaniaid.
Americano. American.
To read.
Iread.
ThoareadesL
He reads.
We read.
Yon read.
Theyrea^
To eat, to dine.
To drink.
nOHNIBE ABraOTIYl
Bnena. Good.
Hennosa. Handsome.
Fea. F^y.
PeqnefEa. little or smalL
Espaflola. Spanish.
Amerii^ana. American.
Pan.
Bread.
Came.
Meat
Pescado.
Fish.
Leche.
Milk.
Qaeso.
Cheese.
Agua.
Water.
Vino.
Wine.
Cer^eza.
Beer.
Bfll^.
BiUet or note.
Carta.
Letter.
OOMPO
smoN.
jLeeY. imbineter
No, sefior, leo una carta.
i Qu6 come el Espafiol ?
Come haen pescado, pero come mala
came.
i Beben Yds. rino baeno ?
Bebemoa baen rino j buena cerveza.
I Que compra el Americano f
Cknnpra mi caballo peqnefio.
i Habia Y. al gran hombre ?
If Of sefior, hablo al hombre grande.
i Q116 Tende la Franoesa ?
Yende hermosa seda.
Do yon read a note f
No, sir, I read a letter.
What does the ^Moiaid eat?
He eats good fish, bat bad meat.
Do you drink good wine ?
We drink good wine and good beer.
What does the American buy ?
He buys a small horse.
Do you speak to the great man ?
No, sir, I speak to the large man.
What does the French woman sell ?
She sells handsome silk.
20 LESSON YII.
EXPLANATION. .
22. Adjectiybs terminating in o, an, or on, form their
feminine termination in a. Those terminating otherwise are
conmion to both genders ; as,
£1 muchacho holgazazu
La muchacha holgazaxuk
El hombre comilon.
La mi^jer comilona.
El hombre feliz»
La mujer feliz.
La gallina bueiuw
The idle boj.
The idle ^L
The gluttonous man.
The gluttonous woman.
The happy man.
The happj woman.
The good hen.
Adjectives signifying nationality, and ending in a conso-
nant, take an a to form their feminine terminations ; as,
EspafioL Spaniard.
Espafiola. Spanish.
Libro ingUs. English book.
Gram&tica ingldsa. English grammar.
Those ending in o change this letter into a ; as,
Americano. I American.
Americana, | American.
A^ectivea are generaUy placed after their nouns; but in
poetry, or in an elevated style, and even in conversation, we
place many before the nonn. Reading and practice will form
the ear of the scholar so as to use them properly.
Adjectives used metaphorically, or in a signification differ-
ent from their proper one, are always placed before ; as, •
Un gran caballo. | A great horse.
Some adjectives lose their last letter, or syllable, when pre-
fixed to the singular masculine noun ; as,
Hal muchacho. Bad boy.
Buen libro.
Gran caballo.
Good book.
Great horse, &c.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. iLee V. un buen libro? Si, sefior, leo uu libro bueno.
2. jLeemos nosotros bieu el ingles ? No, sefior, leemos mal el ingl^
t>ero leemos bien el espafiol.
8. I Bebe V. vino ? No, sefior, yo bebo agua.
LBSSOK YII. 21
4. I Qo6 beben ellos? Beben ceireza.
C. I Gomeis voeotros qaeso 7 pan ? No, sefior, comemos pescada
6. I Qa6 comen los IngleBes ? Loe Icgleses o<»nen bnena came.
T. ^Qn6bebeeIEspaflol? Bebe bnen yino 7 oerveza mala.
8. £ Qa6 lee la Americana f Lee un libro de mi benxuma.
9. I Qa6 estadia el h^o peqaefio de Y. ? Estndia gramidca.
10. |Qa6necesitalamachacbabeimoBa? Neoeata mi peqneflo pafioelo
deseda.
11. iNecesita Y. mi caballo grande? No, aefior, 70 no neoeaito on
caballo grande, ono mi gran caballo.
12. I Qn6 estndia la Espafiola? Estndia ingl^
13. i Estndia Y. la gramitica francesat No, sefior, estndio la gramA-
tica ingflesa.
14. I Come pan la Inglesa ? Si, sefior, come pan 7 came.
15. j Qn6 beben Yds. ? Bebemos lecbe.
16. I Lee Y. nn libro ingl^ ? No, sefior, leo nn libro frances.
17. I Qai lee la Americana? Lee sn lecdon.
18. iQn^vendelaLiglesa? Yende nn pafinelo.
19. ^Compra Y. algodon al comerdante americano? Si, sefior, com-
pro algodon al comerdante americano.
20. I Necesita la Franoesa nn pafinelo grande ? No, sefior, necedta nn
pafindo hermoso.
21. I Qa6 bnsca d mnchacfao ? Bnsca 6 sn hermana.
22. I Qa6 compra Y. ? Gompro nn pafindo feo, pero bneno.
28. I Necesita Y. seda? No, sefior, necesito algodon.
24. I Qn6 lee Y. ? Leo el libro de mi padre.
25. I Qne comeis vosotros ? Gomemos pan 7 pescado.
26. I Qn6 bebe el Aleman ? Bebe vino 7 cerveza.
EXERCISE.
1. Wbat do 7on read ? I read a great book.
2. Do 7on read English weD? Yes, sir, I read English yer7 well.
8. Does the German drink wine ? No, rar, he drinks beer.
4. What do the7 (f&m.) drink ? The7 drink water.
5. Do 7on eat meat ? No, sir, I eat fish.
6. What does the Englishman eat ? He eats bread and meat
7. What does 7onr danghter bn7? She bn7s a silk handkerchief
from the American woman.
8. Does the stndions bo7 bn7 a book? Yes, dr, he bn7s a French
grammar.
9. Does the handsome American woman bn7 a large book ? No, dr,
she bnTS a little book.
22
LKS80W VIII.
10. Doee jowr mamma want a large handkerchief? No, eir, she wants
a handsome handkerchief.
11. Do 7on need your book ? No, sir, I do not need my book.
12. Do they need a Spanish grammar ? Yes, sir, they need a Spanish
grammar.
18. Does the woman sell bread ? Yes, sir, she sells bread and fish.
14. What do yon read ? I read my letter.
15. What does your brother read ? He reads a note.
16. Does the girl sell soap ? No, sir, she sells milk.
17. Does the lazy boy learn well ? No, sir, he learns badly.
18. Do you learn much ? No, dr, I learn little.
19. Do you read the book ? No, rar, I read the letter.
20. Do you buy cheese ? Yes, sir, I buy cheese.
21. Do tiiey buy bread ? No, sir, they buy meat and beer.
22. Do you need a handkerchief? No, sir, I need soap.
28. Do you read your father's letter? No, sir, I read my brother^s letter.
24. Does your fi^ther buy an English grammar ? No, sir, he buys a
French book.
25. Does your brother read my note ? No, sir, he reads my sister's letter.
LESSON VIII.
THIBD COKJUaATIOK.
JSwriJ-ir.
Escrib-o.
'Escrib-es.
Esorib-e.
Escrib-imos.
Esorib-is.
Esorib-en.
Hecibir.
To write.
I write.
Thou writest.
He writes.
We write.
You write.
They write.
1 To receive.
En.
In, into, or at
No, neither, nor.
El (mase. sing.).
La (Jhn. Hng,),
Lo (neuter).
Los (nuue. plural).
Las (fern, plural).
The.
LBS80N YIII.
23
ADJXcmrEs.
Mncho.
Mach.
Poco.
litde.
MnchoB.
Many.
Pocos.
Few.
Peri6dico.
Newspaper.
LeccioiL
Lesson.
Peri6dico8.
Newspapers.
Lecciones.
Lessons.
IJercicio.
Exercise.
Ley.
Law.
Ejerdoios.
Exercises.
Leyea.
Laws.
Zapatero.
Shoemaker.
Plata.
Silver.
Semana.
Week.
Bemanas.
Weeks.
COMPOi
3inON.
^Eseribe y. ks lecciones 6 los qerci-
dosP
Ko eacribo ni las lecciones ni los ^erd-
dos.
i Escriben las sefioritas mnchos biUetes ?
EUas eaciiben machos.
i Bedbe el oomemaTite plata 6 oro ?
t\ redbe oro y plata.
^Escribe Y. la carta en ingles f
Si, seflor, escribo la carta en ingl^
Do yoa write the lessons or the exer-
I write ndther the lessons nor the ex-
Do the joang ladies write many notes ?
They write many.
Does the merchant reoeiTe silyer or
gold?
He recdves gold and silTcr.
Do you write the letter in E&gUah f
Yes, sir, I write the letter in Bngtish.
EXPLANATION.
23. The endings of the third conjugcUion and those of the
second are the s^me, except in the first and second persons of
the plnral ; in which the e of the second conjugation is changed
into i in the third, as the learner must have observed.
24. The conjunction 6 is changed into H when the fol-
lowing word begins with 6 or hoi ^^y
Plata t oro. | SUyer or gold.
25. Ni. — Neither and nor are rendered by ni ; as,
]& no necesita ni la came ni el pescado. | He wants neither the meat nor the fish.
26. Thb plubal 6f nouns is formed by adding an 8 to
those terminating in a vowel not accented ; as,
1^'ercido. Exercise. | igerdcios. Exercises.
24 LBSSOK YIII.
And adding <
Ist. To those ending in an accented vowel ; as,
AleU. Gilliflower. | Aldfes. Gilliflowen.
2d. To those ending in a consonant ; as,
Lecdon. Lesson. | LeoGi<Mie8. Lessons.
dd. To those ending in y ; as,
Lej. Law. | Leyes. Laws.
27. Ak ADJEanvE agrees with its noan in gender, nomber
and case, and forms the plural according to the rules laid down
for nouns ; as,
Buen hombre.
Buenos hombres.
Buena miger.
Buenas mi^cres.
Good]
Goodi
Good woman.
Good women.
28. The abticle must agree also with the noun to which it
refers, in number, gender and case ; as.
El libro.
Los libros.
La ploma.
Lasplumas.
Lo bueno.
The book.
The books.
The pen.
The pens.
What is good.
Ell
£1 agoa.
El alba.
El hambre.
Feminine nouns beginning with d accented, take the mascu-
line^ article el in the singular number, instead of the feminine
/a, in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two a^s ; as,
The soul
The water.
The dawn of day.
The hunger, &c
29. The neuter abticle lo has no plural number, and is
placed only before adjectives used as substantives, in an abso-
lute indeterminate case ; as,
Lo bueno. I What is good.
Lomalo. | What is bad.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. j Escribe Y. & sa padre ? No, sefior, escribe & mi hermano.
2. I Qa6 escribe Y. ? Esoribo mia carta & la machacha.
LXSSON VIII. 25
8. (l^cribe Y. mnchos bflletest No, sefior, esoribo muj pocos.
4. lEsdiben ellos bien los ^}eroioios? SS, aeflory ellos escriben bien
los qerddoa.
5. j Bedbe Y. libros ingleaes ? No, senor, redbo libros franoeses.
6. iQa6 reciben ellos ? Reciben plata j oro.
7. ^Bedben nrnoho oro? No, Befior, redben 111117 poco.
8. |Lee Y. sos cartas 6 sosbilletes? No leo ni mis cartas, ni mis
billets ; leo mis ejerddos.
9. I Neoesita Y. machos pafioelos ? No, sefior, necento mnj pocos.
19. jEstadia Y. mnchas kcdonest No, sefior, estodio pocas.
11. I Bosoa Y. tsua plmna? No, sefior, basco mia gnanAtica.
12w |Qa6 bnsca so hermana de Y. ? Bnsca los ejerddos en ingl4i. «
13. iEstodia Y. fi*aiices 6.aleman ? No estudio ni franoes, ni aleman ; .
estodio espafioL
14. I Neoesita Y. mi c^jerddo ? SI, sefior, necedto so ^'erddo ingl^
15. I Escribe Y. al comerdante 6 el abogado? Ni escribo al oomer-
dante^ ni al abogado; escribo 4 sa padre de Y.
16. I Escriben ellas los cgerddos de ingles? No, sefior, escriben los
^erddos de espafioL
17. I Bedbe Y. mnchas cartas de sa padre? No, sefior, redbo maj
pocas.
18. I Bedbe el comerdante macho algodon ? Si, sefior, redbe macho.
19. I Compra Y. machos pafiudos? Si, sefior, compro machos.
20. I Compra sa padre dcY. machos caballos? No, sefior, compra
pocos.
21. i Compra Y. la gram^tica dd mnchaoho f No, sefior, compro el
coademo de la mnchacha. *
22. I Habla macho el Frances ? No, sefior, habla poco.
23. i Escribe Y. bien d ingl4s ? No, sefior, escribo mal d ingl^ pero
escribo bien d espafiol.
EXEBCISE.
1. Does joor brother write English well? Tes, or, he writes Eng-
lish welL
2. Do yon write to my brother ? No, sir, I write to my father.
8. Do 70a write in English or in Spanish ? I write in English.
4. Do Wey (/em.) Write the lessons or the exerdses? They write
ndther the lessons nor the exercises ; they write letters.
6. Do yon receive many Qotes? No, dr, I receive bat few.
6. Do they receive gold ? No, sir, they receive silver.
7. Do you recdve many letters firom your father ? Yes, dr, I recdve
many.
2
26
LB8SON IZ.
8. Do jou eat fish ? No, sir, I eat bread and cheese.
9. Do the Grermans drink water f No, sir, they drink beer.
10. Do 70U read your brothef^s letter? No^ sir, I read my sister's
letter.
11. Does the merchant sell French paper? No, sir, he sella English
paper.
12. Does your brother learn German and English? No, sir, he learns
neither Grerman nor English ; he learns Spanish.
13. Do yon need silver or gold ? I need neither gold nor silver.
14. Do yon look for my father ? No, madam, I look for the lawyer.
15. Do you buy a grammar from the merchant? Yes, sir,.! buy a
grammar from the merchant
16. Do they study their lessons well? Tes, sir, they study thdr les-
sons well.
17. Do you speak much to your sister? Yes, madam, I speak much
to my sister.
18. Do yon speak Spanish or English ? I speak English.
19. Do you receive French books ? No, ^, I receive English books.
20. Does the merchant receive silver or gold? He receives gold and
silver.
21. Do you write your exercises? No, sir, I write my letters.
22. Do you write a letter to your father? No, sir, I write to my
aster.
LESSON
IX.
Vw-ir.
To-live.
Tiv-6.
' I live.
Viv-es.
Thou livest.
Viv-e.
He lives.
Viv-imos.
We live.
•Viv-is.
You live.
Viv-en.
-
They live.
Residir.
1
To reside.
Mia {plwal).
My.
Sus {plwal).
Your.
Gnando.
When.
Donde (without motion).
■
Where.
Adonde (with motion).
LESSPN IX. 21
•
Oampo, pais.
Country.
Flor. Flower.
Dia.
Day.
Flores. Flowers.
Dias.
Days.
Gasa. Honse, or home.
L&piz.
PenciL
Nneva York. New York.
L&pices.
Pencils.
Franda. France.
AlelL
Gilliflover.
Espana. Spain.
Alelies. *
GilMowers.
Inglaterra. England.
Cortaplxunas.
Penknife.
Alemania. Germany.
Hotel
Hotel
Tienda. Store.
Oiudad. Oity.
J)ia8 de la Bemana.*
Dayi of the week.
Limes.
Monday.
M&rtes.
Tnesdi^y.
Hi^rcolea.
Wednesday.
Ja^yes.
Thnrsday.
Vi^rnes.
Friday.
Sdbado.
Saturday.
Sdbadoe.
Saturdays.
Domingo.
^Sunday.
Domingofi.
COMPOI
Sundays.
srnoN.
^Yive y. en d campo 6 en la dudad?
Viro en la dndad.
I En d6nde redden sns pap6s de Y . ?
Pap& redde en Frandai y mamk en
Nneyia York.
jGo&ndo come Y. en casa de sos her-
manoe de Y. ?
Lo8 domingos, m&rtes y ju^res como en
casa de mis hennanos.
4 Y en d6nde come Y. Ics Itines, mi^r-
ooles, Ti^mes y s&bados ?
Comb en casa. ^
Do you liye in the country or in the dty ?
I live in the dty.
Where do your parents redde ?
Father reddes in France, and mother in
New York.
When do you dine at your brothers*?
On Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays
I dine at my brothers'. ^
And where do you dine on Mondays,
Wednesdays, Fridays and Saturdays ?
I dine at home.
EXPLANATION.
30. Pa^<f, papa; mamd^ mamma; jpt^ifoot; are exceptions
to the general rule, and form the plural by the addition of b\
2i8jpapdSy papas; marndsy mammas ; piisj feet.
* AH of the masonllne gender.
28 LBBSOH IX.
31. Nouns which are not tnonosylUMes^ and end in «, the
last syllable not being accented, do not change their termina-
tion in the plural number ; as, lAnes^ Monday or Mondays ;
Mdrtes, Tuesday or Tuesdays, etc. Words ending in z take eSj
and change the z into c in the plural ; as, IdpiZy Idpices^ pencil,
pencils ; juez^jueceSy judge, judges.
32. Words which are compounds of two nouns differ so ya-
riously that it is not possible to give rules for the formation of
their plurals ; but compounds of a verb and a noun in the singu-
lar number form the plural in the same manner a9 simple nouns ;
and compound words of a verb and a noun in the plural will be
used the same in both numbers ; as, cortaplumas^ penknife, or
penknives. *
33. The days of the week always take the article when they
are employed to mark, or express time ; as,
Eatadio espafiol el ItuieB j el Ti^meB. | I stady Spaniah on Monday and Friday.
34. Donde, where (without motion) ; adande, where (with
motion) ; cuando^ .when. These adverbs are placed always be-
fore the verb ; as,
i D6nde reside Y. f | Where do yon reside }
i Cu&ndo escribe Y. ? | When do you write ?
35. Donde, adonde^ and ciuzndOj wKen used interrogatively
require an accent; thxiB^ ^Ddndevivef Where does he live?
^ Cudndo lee Kf When do you read P
CONYERSATION AND YERSION.
1. |En d6nde vive V. ? Vivo en Nueva York.
f. 4D6nde viven sns padres do Y. t AG padre vive en la ciudad y mi
madre en el campo.
8. |D6nde viven sos hermanos ? Viven en Fnmo^
4. £D6nde come V. los s&bados y los domingost Gomo on el hotel
de los Franceses.
5. lY d6nde come V. los Itines y-los mdrtes? Oomo en el hotel
Americano.
6. I D6nde reside V. f Resido en el compo.
7. ^ Y d6nde reside sn mam4 de V. ? Reside en los Estados Unidos.
8. |(Mndo estadia V. sos lecoiones de frances? Los mi^rcoles y loa
ju^ves.
LE8S0K IZ. 29
9. |Y qn6 estadia Y. los viemes? Los yiemes estadio una Icocbn
defrances.
10. jOa&ndo lee Y. los peri6dioos? To leo los peri6dicos los do-
mingoe.
11. I OompraQ alelies sns faermanas ? Si, sefior, ellas compran alelles.
12. ^Estadia Y. las lejes de Inglaterraf No, sellor, esstadio las de
los Estados Unidos {ITnited States).
13. lAprende bien la muchacha el ingles? Si, sefior, aprende bien
elin^^
14. I Qn6 beben los Espafioles j los Alemancsl Los Espafioles beben
boen Yino, y los Alemanes bnena cerveza.
15. |D6nde compra el comerciante el algodonf Compra el algodon en
los Estados Unidos.
16. I Y d6nde vende el oro y la plata ? En Jnglaterra.
17. I Cdbdo necesita sn hermano de Y. la gram^tica ? Ifi bennano
neoesita sn gram&tiea el Itiines.
18. |En qn6 botel oome Y. ? Gomo en el botel de Jnglaterra.
19. iQa^ compra el comerciante, plata li oro? El comerciante no
compra ni oro ni plata, compra seda.
20. i Qa6 estndia Y. ? Estndio los dias de la semana en ingles.
21. I Escribe Y. & Franda? No, sefior, escribo ft Jnglaterra.
22. iQn6 escribe Y.? Escribo los ^erdcios de la semana en ingl6s.
23. I D6nde reride sn bermana de Y. ? Beside en el campo.
24. ^ En qn6 pais vive sn pap4 ? Yive en Alemania.
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon live in the country ? No, sir, I live in town.
2. Where does yonr sister live? She lives in New York.
3. Where do yonr parents live? They live in France.
4. Where does yonr brother reside ? He resides in England.
5. Do yon not reside in the United States? No, sir, in Spain.
6. In which conntry does yonr mother live ? She lives in the United
States.
7. Do yon write to yonr father in Spanish or in English ? I write
in English.
8. Where does the merchant buy the c6tton ? He buys the cotton in
England.
9. Which do yon sell, gold or silver ? I sell gold.
10. Where do yon dine on Sundays and Mondays ? I dine in the
French hotel
11. And where on Wednesdays, Fridays and Saturdays? In the
German hotel
30
LSS80K X.
12. When do they study their lesson? On Tuesdays.
13. Does the lawyer study the laws of England ? No, sir, he studies
the laws of the United States.
14. Where does your mother reside ? She rendes in Qermany.
15. When do you need your grammar ? On Friday.
16. When do your sons study the French lessons? They study the
French lessons on Mondays and Saturdays.
17. Where does the merchant huy the good penknives? In England.
18. What day do you (/tfw.) receive the newspapers? We receive the
newspapers on Sundays.
19. Does your sister buy ^iflowers? Yes, sir, she buys gilliflowers.
20. Where do you buy your pencils ? In the French store.
21. What do you study ? I study the days of the week in Spanish.
22. Where do your parents reside ? My mother resides in Spain, and
my father in Germany.
23. Where does your sister reside ? She resides in the country.
24. Do you need my books? Yes, sir, I need your books.
LESSON X.
Tengo.
Tienes.
Tiene.
Tenemos.
Teneis.
Tienen.
To have,
I have.
Thon hast.
He has.
We have.
You have.
They have.
OBJXOnVB CASE.
Le, los {imoM, pL),
La, las (fern, pL).
Lo {neuter).
It, him, them.
It, her, them.
It, (sometimes) so.
JLN TERBOOA.TI V K PRONOUNS.
^Qui^n, qui6nes Q>?.)?
iOu4I, cu41es(jp2.)?
iQu6?
De qui6n, de qui6nes {pl^ ?
Con.
Who?
Which one, which ones?
What, or which? '
Whose?
With.
ZiEssoir z.
31
Zapato.
Chaleoo.
Baston.
Sombrero.
Shoe.
Vest
Cane.
Hat.
i Qai6ii tiene mi baaton ?
Yd lo tengo.
i Cual cqrbata tiene Y. f
Tengo la bpnita.
i Tienen elloa mi cbalcco f
No, senor, tienen la oorbata de V. 9
i De qni^n habia Y. ?
Hablo de los Franoesea.
i Teneia voeotroa casacaa ?
Si, se&or, las tenemoa.
i Qni^n tiene sombreros ?
Los tiene el comerciante.
i Neoesita Y. k mi padre f
Si, sefior, le necesito.
i Tiene Y. mi casaca ?
Si, sefior, la tengo.
i Chx&les botas tiene Y. f
iQtt6 tiene Y.?
Botaa. Boots.
Caaaca. Coat
Corbata. Cravat
Medias. Stockings.
COHPOSmOK.
Who has mj cane f
I hare it
Which craTat hare yon f
I have the pretty one.
Have they my waistcoat ?
No, sir, they hare yonr cravat
Of whom do you speak ?
I speak of the Frenchmen.
Have you coats f
Tes, sir, we haye (them).
Who has hats f
The merchant has (them).
Do yon need my father ?
Yes, sir, I need him.
Haye you my coat ?
Yes, sir, I have it
Which boots have you ?
What ia the matter with you?
EXPLANATION.
36. Ibheguiab yebbs are those which do not retain in-
tact the radical letters and ihe terminations designated for
each tense and person.
The verb tenerj to hare, is the first of the irregular verbs
here introduced ; and, like all the auxiliary verbs, is not in-
cluded in the seven groups in which the irregular Spanish
verbs are classified, on account of their multifarious irregulari-
ties. The auxiliaries require, therefore, to be learned separate-
ly, or each one by itself
A complete list of the irregular conjugations will be found
at the end of the book.
When the objective case of the third person is the object
of the English verb, it is translated by Ze, los, for the masculine ;
fa, las, for the feminine ; and lo for the neuter; as,
SI le bnaca. | He looka for hinK.
Ella /of oompra. i She buys ikem,
Elloa lo neceaitan. I They want it
32 LESSON X.
37. Lo and Le. — ^It must be observed^ however, with regard
to the objective forms le and lo, that their use is very doubtM
in Spanish, sinee many correct writers employ the neuter lo^
inst^Ekd of the masculine fe. Consequently, while custom or
general use does not ^ve the preference to either, the learner
may use them according to his own discretion or taste, in the
accusative case, masculine gender ; as,
MaDuel tiene un buen jibro y lo (le) I Emanuel has a good book and sella iL
venJe. ( •
Xo is sometimes employed to avoid the repetition of a
whole or part of a sentence, and then it is equivalent to «o, or
it Of this, however, more will be said when treating of the
regimen of verbs.
38. The iNTEBBOGATnnB pbonouns quHn, cudlj gtd^ de
quien^ who, which, what, and whose, do not require the arti-
cle; as,
^Qui^nhabla?
i Cu&l tengo yo ?
I Qu6 escribe V. ?
I De qni^n son los caballos ?
Who speaks f
Which one hare I?
What do you write?
Whose are the horses ?
39. When, in a question, the interrogative pronoun is
governed by a preposition, that preposition must also be re-
peated in the answer ; as,
i Con qui^n vive V. ?
Con mi amigo.
/ De qui^n es el caballo ?
De mi amigo.
With whom do you lire ?
With my friend.
Whose is the horse f
My friend's.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qn6 tiene Y. Y Tengo nn hermoso baston.
2. iHenes tH nn buen sombrero? Si, senor, lo (le) tengo.
8. ^QnSpafinelo tiene ellaf Tiene el de seda.
4. I Odd tiene Y. ? Tengo mi pafinelo.
5. ^Teneis Tosotros bnenos chalecos? Si, sefior, los tenemos.
6. ^De qui^n hablan ellos ? Hablan de las Americanas.
7. 2 Tiene Y. las corbatas ? Si, selior, las tengo.
8. I Tienen eUos los hermosos panuelos de seda? Si, sefior, los tienen.
9. I Qoi^n tiene las medias ? Yo las tengo.
10. i Tiene Y. mi sombrero ? Si, senor, lo (le) tengo.
LESSON Z. 33
11. I Qni6n tiene mi baston ? Sa hennano lo (le) tiene.
12. |Habla Y. 4 sa hermana? Si, sefior.
13. jBusca y. 4 sa hermana? Si, sefiorita, la basco.
14. ^Estadia Y. sa leccion f Si, sefior, la estadio.
15. jNecesita Y. 4 sa pap4? Si, sefior,- le (lo) necesito.
16. 4Qa6 sombrero tiene V. ? Tengo el de Y.
17. iQu6 botas busca Y. ? Basco las baenas.
18. I Con qai^n aprende Y. el ingl^ ? Con on Americano.
19. i A qni^n bosca Y. ? Basco al abogado.
20. I Qa6 compra Y. ? Compro 14pic6s ingleses.
21. i Tiene Y. ana baena gram4tica ? Si, sefior, tengo ana may baena.
22. i Tiene Y. macbos libros ? No, sefior, tengo pocos.
23. iTienen elks macha seda? No, sefior, tienen majpoca.
24.2 I>6nde reside Y. ? Resido en el campo.
25. 2D6nde vive sa abogado de Y. ? Yive en la ciadad.
26. 2 Yive en Francia sa hennano de Y. ? No, sefior, yiFe en Espafio.
EXERCISE.
1. Who has the stockings? I have them.
2. What has he ? He has mj grammar.
3. Have they my vest? Yes, sir, they have it.
4. Which books have they (/em.) ? They have yonrs. .
5. Of whom do yoa spe^k ? I speak of the Frenchman.
6. Who has my coat ? They have it.
7. Have yoa my cravat ? No, sir, I have it not.
8. Have we very good coats?' Yea, sir, we have.
9. Who has the hahdsome stockings ? They (fem.) have them.
10. Do you speak to the Frenchman? Yes, sir, I speak to the French-
man.
11. Do you need my hat? No, ur, I have my hat.
12. Whom do you look for ? I look for yoar father.
13. What do yon bay ? I bay English books.
14. Which shoes do you bay ? I bay the handsome shoes.
15. Which hats have yoa ? I have the merchant's hats.
16. With whom do yon learn En^h? I learn with an American.
17. Have you good coats? Yes,.sh', I have good coats.
18. Have they many grammars? No, sir, they have very few.
19. Where do yon live ? I Itve in the country.
20. Does your &ther reside in France ? No, sir, he resides in England.
21. Does your mother live in Gennany? No, rnr, she lives in the
United States.
2*
34
LS8S0N XI,
22. Do you buy many books ? No, sir, I buy very few.
28. Who has my handsome boots? I have them.
24. Which hat have you? I have yours. ^
25. What have you? I have my stockings.
26. Of whom do you speak? I speak of your £&ther.
LESSON XI.
/Sfer.
To be.
Soy.
lam.
Eres.
Thou art.
Es.
He is.
Somos.
We are.
Sois.
You are.
Son.
They are.
INDEFmiTB
PRONOUNS.
Alguien.
Some one, somebody, anylxx]
any one.
Alguno.
Some, somebody, anybody.
Nadie.
No one, nobody.
Nfngnno.'
None, no one, nobody.
Algo, alguna cosa.
Something, anything.
Nada, ninguna cosa.
Nothing, not anything.
Todo.
All, everything.
Todos.
Every one, everybody.
Librero.
Bookseller.
Libreria. Bookstore.
Panfldero.
Baker
Panaderia. Bakery.
Carnicero.
Butcher.
Camiccria. Butcher^s shop.
Sastre.
Tailor.
COMPO
Sastreria. Tailor^s shop.
smoN.
i Son Vds, camiceros ?
Are you butchcra ?
No, seflor, Bomoa panaderos.
No; sir, wa are bakers.
jEsY. carnicero?
Are you a butcher ?
No, BeSor, yo soy sastre.
No, sir, I am a tailor.
^neneY. algun pan?
Have you some bread ?
So,
iQni^ii tiene d aonbrero?
B Ameriemo lo
iDdndeeQmpimV.ptti?
En Ift paBBdofa.
^Donde eompim T. aoi filvoB?
fiikfibieiii.
^Eres t& maj estnfioao?
Ko, sefior, no lo boj.
ilkncn lodos Tda. bM
iQni^itiaoiMpcl?
KadkloCIe)
SXPLASTillOX
•
40. AiiGunnr, AiiGu^ra — ^^I/tkm rcfen qnly to
and always in the smgiilar nimber ; as,
ViTo con ilgideD. I Ifiv«viAaMB«^
Eseribo 4 ilguen. | I wnle to ■Miliiii^
When some one, any one is fiiDowed by the piqwriiiiM o^
ve most nse oH^wno in 8pankh, and not 6lgmm ; as, o^mo A
elloB escribe en el peii&dioo, •omt one ot them vxites in the
newspaper.
.^y onej or anybody, not nsed interrogatiTelT, is tnas-
lated by ewdquieraj as will be seen when we intzodoee the in-
definite prononn.
Alguien is nsed only in the affinnatiTe. Afymo mar, on
the contrary, be employed either in affiimatiTe or ne^atiTe
sentences ; In the affirmatiye it always precedes the noon to
which it refers, and in the negative it inrariaUy eomes after
it; as,
No estadian leedon algana. I Thej rtndj no loam (or do boc ttaij
I myksni).
41, Nadie, BiKeuxo. — mnguno relates to persons and
things, and is nsed in the n^ative in the same manner as al-
gtmo in the affirmative ; nadic relates to penona only, aa^ is
36 LBSSON XI.
used in the negative in the same way as the pronoun dlffuten
in the affirmative. In a word, nadie and ninguno are merely
the negative forms of dlguien and alguno,
42. Alouno and kingitno lose the o when they come im-
mediately before the noun.
43« Algo, and alguna cosa, are used in the affirmative ; as,
Como al^f or alffutia eaaa, I I eat Bomething.
iRedbeY. alffo^ or afyuna oo$af \ Do yoa receive anything ?
Anything, when not used interrogatively, is translated
cualquiera cwa^ as will be seen in its proper place.
44. Nada, kikguna cosa are used in the negative form.
45. Nada, nunguno, nadie, the adverb no^ as well as any
other words expressing negation, are placed before the verb ;
but when no precedes the verb, another negative may be placed
after it, and the two negatives serve to strengthen each other,
contrary to the practice of the English language ; as, •
No estudio nada.
No bablo k nadie.
No recibo niti^no
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody, or no one.
I receive none.
But in omitting the negative no, the words which express
the negation must be placed before the verb ; as.
Nada estudio.
A nadie hablo.
Ninguno recibo.
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody.
I receive none.
The two negatives are always, preferable.
46. The indefinite article a or auj is not translated into
Spanish when accompanied by a noun which expresses nation-
ality, profession, &o. ; as.
^EaV. Ingles?
No, sefior, soy Espafiol
^Ea (A sastre?
No, sefLor, es zapatero.
Are you an Englishman f
No, sir, I am a Spadiard.
Is he a tailor ?
No, sir, he is a shoemaker.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Es Y. Frances? Ko, sefior, soy Americano.
2. jSon Yds. Alemanes? No, sefior, somos Ingleses.
8. ^Eres td bnen mnebacho ? SS sefior, lo soy.
4. jSois vosotros sastresf No, sefior, somos panaderoa
LESSOK ZI. 37
5. ^Es bneno el libro de su hennano de Y. ? 8!, sefior, lo es.
6. 2 Son buenos sob zapatoe de Y. ? No, sefior, son may malos.
7. ^Tiene alguno mi sombrero? SI, sellor, dlgoien lo (le) tiene.
8. I Tiene algoien papel? No, sefior, ningono tiene papel.
9. 2 Tiene Y. alguna cosa ? No, sefior, no tengo nada.
10. ^No tiene Y. cosa algnna? Si, sefior, tengo Alguna cosa.
* 11. 2 Compran pan todos Yds. ? Si, sefior, todos compramos pan.
12. iD6nde compran Yds. todo an panf Lo (le) compramos en la
panaderia.
. 13. ^Son Yds. panaderos? No, sefior, nosotros somos zapateros.
14. ^ Tiene ^goien mi sombrero bneno f Si, sefior, filgoien le (lo)
tiene.
15. iNo compra Y. algo ? Si, sefior, compro algnna cosa.
16. 2 Escribe Y. algo? No, sefior, no escribo nada.
17. ^Necesita Y. todo el papel ? Si, sefior, lo (le) necesito todo.
18. ^Necesita Y. todas las plnmas? Si, sefior, las necento todas.
19. |£s Y. sastre? Si, sefior, yo soy sastre.
20. 4D6nde tiene Y. sn sastreria ? La tengo en Nneva York.
21. |Es BQ padre de Y. librero ? Si, sefior, lo es.
22. I Yende machos libros? Si, sefior, vende mncbos.
23. ^D6nde tiene 61 sn libreria ? La tiene en Francia.
24. 2 Tiene Y. nna panaderia? No, sefior, tengo nna comioeria.
25. |Habla Y. & %aien ? No, sefior, no hablo & nadie.
EXERCISE.
1. Are yon an EngBshman? No, sir, I am an American.
2. Are you good boys? Yes, sir, we are very good boys.
8. Is Lonisa a good girl ? Yea, sir, slie is a yery good girl.
4. Art' tbon a Frenchman ? No, sir, I am a German.
5. Is yours a good book ? Tea, sir, mine is a very good one.
6. Are they (/em,) studious ? Yes, sir, they are very studious.
7. Have ypu anything ? No, su*, I have nothing.
8. Have you nothing ? Yes, sir, I have something.
9. Has anybody a good grammar ? Yes, sir, the Frenchman has one.
10. Who speaks French ? The American speaks French. ^
11. Do you write an exercise ? Yea,' or, I write an exercise.
12. Where do you buy all your books? I buy them in the bookstore.
13. Are you a bookseller ? No, sir, I am a baker.
14. Where have you your bakery ? I have it in New York.
15. Where do you buy your coats? In the tailor's shop.
16. Have you all of your books? Yes, or, I have alL
38
LB8SON XII.
17. Do 700 all reside in the United States? Yes, sir, we reside in the
United States.
18. Have yon any bread f No, or, I have none.
19. Do 70a speak to anybody ? Yes, sir, I speak to the Amerioans.
20. Do yon buy anything ? No, sir, I buy nothing.
21. Are you a baker? No, sir, I am a tiulor.
22. Are they French ? No, sir, the7 are En^ish.
28. Art thon a Spamard ? No, sir, I am an American.
24. W&o is studious ? Emannel is yer7 stndious.
LESSON XII.
EcSber.
1 To have.
He.
I have.
Has.
Thon hast
Ha.
He has.
Hemos.
We have.
Habeis.
You have.
Han.
They have.
PAST PABTIOIPLES.—
'First Conjugation,
Habl-ado.
Spoke.
Estudi-ado.
Studied.
Compr-ado.
Bought
Busc-ado.
Looked for, sought
Necesit-ado.
Sea
md m
Needed.
id Third.
Aprend-ido.
Learned.
Vend-ido.
Sold.
Le-ido.
Read.
Beb-ido.
Drunk.
Com-ido.
\
Eaten, dined.
Recib-ido. *
Received.
Viv-ido.
Lived.
Redd-ido.
Resided.
Escrito (irregular
in
this
Written,
partieiple arUff).
LX880K XII.
39
Hoy.
Paris.
L6ndres.
Madrid.
Pa&o.
Paria.
Londoo.
Madrid,
dotib.
To-day.
Habana. Hayana.
Yi^na. Vienna.
Filadelfia. Philadelphu
Esqaela. Note.
COMPOSITION.
iCbindo ha escrito Y. 4 an padre?
He escrito hoy k mi padre.
( Ha recibido Y. ana cartas f
Si, aefior, las he recibido.
« Ha rirido Y. en Paris ?
Si, sefior, he rirido ana semana.
i Ha residido Y. en Ldndres f
Si, seSor, he residido algunos diaa.
^Han comido ellos f
Si, sefior, han comido.
i Hemos leido bien nosotcos ?
Si, se&or. Yds. han leido mny blen.
(Habeb Tcndido Tosotros muchos pa-
fiuelos?
Hemos rendido mny pocoa.
i Cuindo habeis apiendido Tnestra leo-
don?
La hemos aprendido hoy.
i Habeis comprado pan ?
Si, fidior, lo hemos comprado.
i Ha estadiado Y. aleman t
Xo, sefior, no lo he estadiado.
i Ha bablado Y. con d Frances ?
Si, sefior, he hablado con 61
When hare yoQ written to your father ?
I have written to my father to-day.
Haye yon recciyed your letters t
Tes, sir, I haye receiyed them.
Haye yon Uyed in Paris f
Tes, su*, I haye liyed a week.
Haye yon resided In London ?
Tes, sir, I resided some daya
Haye they eaten (or dined) ?
Tes, air, they liaye eaten.
Haye we read well f
Tes, sir, yon liaye read yery welL
Haye yon sold many handkerchief ?
We haye sold yery few.
When haye yon learned yonr
We haye learned it to-day.
Haye you bought bread?
Yes, sir, we haye bought it
Haye you studied Oerman ?
Ko, sir, I haye not stuped it
Haye you spoken with th^renchman ?
Yes, sir, I haye spoken with him.
EXPLANATION.
47. Tenkb and Habek, To have, used as an active verb,
is translated by tener^ as an auxiliary, by haber ; as,
Tener caballos, To haye horses.
Tengo oro. I have gold.
Habcr hablado. To have spoken.
Hemos hablado. We haye spoken.
When the anzHiaiies to fuive and to be^ followed by an infi-
40 LESsoir XII.
nitive, denote some future action, to have is rendered by tener
quey and to be by haber de\ as,
Tenemos que eacribir. I We have to write.
Hemos de redbir dinero. | We are to receive money.
48. Pretkbit Indefinite, — ^This tense not only refers to
what is past, but also conveys an allusion to the present time ; as,
Alejandro ha estudiado el eepafioL | Alexander has studied Spanish.
It must also be used when we speak indefinitely of any
thing past, as happening or not happening in the day, year,
or age, in which we mention it ; as,
He escrito hoy muchas cartas. | I have written many letters to-day.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1, I Ha escrito V. sus cartas? No, sefior, he eacrito Ids ^'ereicios de
la leccion.
2. iHa recibido V. su dinero? Si, sefior, lo he recibido,
8. I Ha escrito V. d su hermana? Si, sefior, he escrito hoy d mi her-
mana.
4. I Gadndo ha recibido Y. los peri6dicos de Paris ? Los he recibido
hoy.
6. iHa leido V. mi libro? Si, sefior, lo he leido.
6. 2nanvividoYd8.6nL6ndres? Si, sefior, hemos vivido una semana.
7. I Ha comido Y. ? Si, sefior, he comido.
8. I Ha leido Y. la carta de mi hermano? Si, sefiora, la he leido.
9. I Ha vendldo Y. su baston ? Si, sefior, lo he vendido hoy.
10. ^Ha necesitado Y. el libro de mi hermana? No, sefior, no lo he
necesitado.
11. 2 Ha bnscado Y. bicn el pafiuelo? Si, sefiora, lo he buscado bien.
12. 4 Ha comprado Y. pan ? No, sefior, he comprado vino.
18. jHa aprendido Y. su leccion do espafiol? La he estadiado, pero
he aprendido muy poco.
14. ^Ha hablado Y. con mi padre? Si, sefior, he hablado con 6L
15. 2 Ha estndiado Y. el aleman? Si, sefior, lo he estadiado con nn
Frances.
16. jHa vivido Y. en la Habana? No, sefior, he vivido en Filadelfia.
17. 4 Ha vendido Y. machos Idpices? No, sefior, he vendido niuy
pocos.
18. jHa recibido Y. sos cartas? No, sefior, he recibido los peri6dicos
del jn6ves.
LESSOK XII. 41
19. I Ha Iddo Y. mi esqnela ? No, sefior, no la he leido.
20. I Ha bascado Y. bien mi baston ? Si, seflor, lo he bnsoado bien.
21. jHa comprado Y. nn sombrero? Si, senor.
22. ^Han hablado ellos & sa padre? No, sefior.
23. I Ha aprendido Y. el ipgl^s? No, sefior, lo he estadiado on poco;
pero no lo he aprendido.
24. jHa leido Y. el peri6dioo de hoy ? Si, sefior, lo he leido. *
EXERCISE.
1. Have yon received yonr letters? Yes, sir, I have received them
to-day.
2. Have yon read the newspapers? Tes, sir, I have read them.
8. Have yon written to my sister ? No, sir, I have not written to
her.
4. Have yon received yonr letters from Yienna? I have received
them.
5. Have yon read the English newspapers? Yea, siv, I have (read
them).
6. Have yon dined with yonr sister? I have dined with her.
7. Have yon bought yonr hat? I have bought it to-day.
8. Have yon looked for my father in Paris? Yes, sir, I have looked
for him.
9. Have yon spoken with him?* Yea, nr, I have spoken with him.
10. Where have yon spoken with him ? I have spoken with him at
hb honse.
11. Have yon studied yonr Spanish lesson? Yes, mr, I have studied it
12. Have yon leamedit well? No, sir, I have learned it little.
18. Have the bakers sold much bread? No, sir, they have sold very
Httle.
14. Has the tailor bought much doth ? Yes, sir, he has (bought).
15. Have they (/em.) dined with yonr sister? Yes, sir, they have
dined with my sister.
16. Have they dined with your brother? Yes sir.
17. What have they eaten? They have eaten bread and meat
18. What have they drunk? They have drunk water, wine and ale.
19. Have you spoken with the Spaniard? Yes, sir, I have spoken
with Mm.
20. Have yon spoken with him in Spanish or English? I have spoken
with him in English.
21. Have yon received yonr letters from Philadelphia? Yea, eir, I
have recdved them.
22. Have you received them all ? I have received them alL
42
LBBSON XIII.
23. Have yon liyed in London ? No, sir, I haye lived in Vienna.
24. Have yon lived with yonr &ther ? No, sir, I have lived with my
brother.
LESSON XIII.
Querer.
Qtterido.
Qniero.
Quieres.
Quiere.
Qaeremos.
Quereis.
Quieren.
To wish, to be willing, to love.
Wi8hod, loved, dear.
I wish, or am willing.
Thou wishest
He wishes.
We wish.
Ton wish.
They wish.
POSaSSSIYB PBONOUira.
Mio.
Tayo.
Suyo.
Nnestro.
Vnestro.
Amiga
Primo.
Dinero.
Friend.
Consin.
Money.
My, or mine.
Thy, or thine.
His, hers or its.
Our, or onrs.
Yonr, or yonrs.
UtiL
UsefuL
Oaro.
Dear.
Barato.
Cheap.
Viejo.
Old.
J6ven.
Young.
Rico.
Rich.
Pobre.
Poor.
Amiga.
Prima.
Moneda.
Friend.
Oousin.
Coin.
COMPOSITION.
i Quiere Y. un sombrero?
No, sefior, quiero un baston.
i Quiere Y. mucho k su primo ?
Sf, sefior, le quiero mucho.
Do you wish a hat f
No, sir, I wish a cane.
Do you love your couirin much?
Yes, sir, I love him much.
LK8SON XIII.
43
iQaieie V. escribir f
Xo, Befior, qmero leer.
iQuiere V. hablar con mi hermana?
Si, eefior, qiiiero hablar con ella.
i Qoiere T. comprar el caballo de naes-
tro amigo?
Si, sefior, qniero ocymprar el caballo del
amigo de T.
i Quieres escribir 6 mi herraano ?
^ se&or, quiero escribirle.
i Tiene Y. mi baston ?
No, sefioT, tengo el mio.
i Tienen eUas nuestros libros ?
Si, BdioT, tienen los de Yds.
i Es Yiejo 8u padre de Y. f
Sf, eeffor, es mi poco vieja
i Es j6yen so hermana de Y. ?
SI, aefior, es mny j6ven.
I Ea pobre el comerciante?
Ko, aefior, es muy rico.
iHa eecrito Y. 4 su amigo ?
Si, aeiior, he escrito hoy & mi amigo.
iHa hablado Y. con sn prima ?
No, seEioT, he hablado con mi amigo.
i Donde yive su prime de Y. ?
Yive en FOadelfia.
Do you widi to write ?
No, sir, I wish to read.
Do yon wish to speak to my sister ?
Yes, sir, I wish to speak to her.
Do you wish to buy our friend's horse?
Yes, sir, I wish to buy your friend's
horse.
Do you wish to write to my brother f
Yes, sir, I wish to write to him.
Have you my cane ?
No, sir, I have mine.
Have they our books ?
Yes, sir, they have yours.
Is your father old f
Yes, sir, he is rather old.
Is your sister young ?
Yes, sir, she is very young.
Is the merchant poor f
No, sir, he is very rich.
Did you write to your friend ?
Yes, sir, I have written to my friend
to-day.
Have you spoken with your cousin f
No, sir, I have spoken with my friend.
Where does your cousin live ?
Eo lives in Philadelphia.
EXPLANATION.
49. Mio, TUYO, BiTYO, NUE8TRO, vuESTRO, change the final
o into a, to form the feminine termination.
BO. In Spanish, the possessive pronouns always agree with
the name of the thing possessed, in gender, number, and case ; as,
Nuestra gramitica. I Our grammar.
Nuestros Ubros. I Our books.
51. When used as pronominal adjectives, they precede the
noun with which they agree ; and it is to be observed that, in
this case, m»o, tuyo and suyo drop their final pliable ; as,
Nuestros caballos.
Mi pluma.
TupapeL
Sncuadema
Our horses.
My pen.
Thy paper.
His copy-book.
44 LESSON XIII.
Mxs plomas.
Tuspapeles.
Bus cuadernoB.
My pens.
Thy papers.
His copy-books.
62. Mio, when used in the rocatiye case — ^that is, in ad-
dressing persons — ^is placed after the nonn governing it ; as,
Escribei h^o niio. | Write, my son.
53. When possessives are used as pronouns, they agree in
gender, number and case with the noun which they represent,
and are preceded by the definite article ; as,
Ta gram6tica y la mia.
0e mis mucbachos y lo8 iuyo9,
8a hermano y d nuestro.
Sus zapatos y ha nuestros,
Tus caballos y los auyas.
Thy graimnar and mine.
Of my boys and thine.
Bla brother and oura.
His shoes and oura.
Thy horses and thein^ &c.
54. Possessives are preceded by the neuter article, when
they are indefinitely used ; as,
Lo mio, lo tuyo, lo suyo. | What is mine, what is thhie, what is his.
55. When the possessive pronoun is connected witii the
noun by the verb to fte, the article is omitted ; as.
Este billete es mio.
Esa carta es tuya.
£1 caballo es sayo.
Mucbachos, i es este vuestro Ubro ?
Nifios, I es este el vuestro f
This note is mine.
That letter is thine.
The horse is his.
Boys, is this your book ?
Children, is this youra f
66. YuEsiso, YUESTBA, is chlefly used in addressing per-
sons in very high positions ; as,
Sefior, vuettra patria lo cx^e. | Sir, your country demands it
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jQniere V. vino? No, senor, qniero agaa.
2. ^Qaieren Vds. mis libros? Ko, sefior, qneremos los nuestros.
8. iTienen alios nuestros peri6dico8? No, sefior, eilos tienen los
snyos.
4. ^Tiene V. nuestro libro? No, sefior, yo tengo el mio.
5. ^Teneis vuestros^jeroiciosf Si, sefior, tenemos los nnestros.
6. iEs vi^a SQ amiga de V. ? No, sefior, es j6Yen.
7. ^Es rico el comerciante? Si, sefior, es may rioo.
8. iVende barato? No, sefior, compra barato; pero vende caro.
LKB80K XIII. 45
9. |Eb ^tn k gram^tica? Si, sefior, ee may tiSL
10. iQoiere V. mnoho 4 sa hermana? Si, sefior, la qniero macho.
11. ^Qoiere Y. beber vino? No, sefior, qoiero beberagoa.
12. iQaiere Y. G<»Dprar an pafiaelo da algodon? No, sef&or, qaiero
comprar ono de seda. *
18. I Qoiere Y. Tivir en naestra casa? No, sefior, qaiero viybr en la mia.
14. ^Qoiere Y. estodiar espafiol ? Si, sefior, qaiero estadiarlo.
15. I Qa6 qaieren ellos ? Qoieren hablar con Y.
16. iQoiere Y. iT{togo) 4mi casa el m&rtesf No, sefior, qmeroir hoy.
17. iNeoesita Y. an libro ? Si, sefior, necesito el mio.
18. iNecesita Y. hablar con el abogado? No, sefior, necesito hablar
con el comerdante.
19. jNeoesita so prima an Upiz? No, sefior, eDa no lo necesita.
20. ^Ha qaerido Y. macho 6 su padre? Si, sefior, le he qaerido
madio.
21. ^Ha necesitado Y. dinero? No, sefior, he necesitado amigos.
22. 1 Ha escrito Y. sos cartas ? Si, sefior, las he escrito.
23. I Ha Iddo Y. los peri6dico6 ? Si, sefior, los he leido hoy.
24. ^Qaiere Y. aprender espafiol? Si, sefior, qoiero apronderlo.
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon wish to eat anything? No, sir, I wish to drink.
2. What do yon wish to drink ? I wish to drink water.
8. Do yon wish to speak to yoar brother ? Tes, ur, I wish to speak
to him.
4. Do yoa wish to learn Spanish ? No, sir, I wish to learn French.
6. Do they wish to live in New York ? No, sir, they wish to live in
Philadelphia.
6. Have yoa read yoar note ? Yes, sir, I have read it.
7. Do you want some wine ? No, sir, I want some water.
, 8. Do they want my book ? Yes, ar, they want yoar book.
9. Does yoar brother want to speak to my father? No, sir, he
wants to speak to the lawyer.
10. Did yoa want my fiither's letter? No, sir, we did not want yoar
father's letter.
11. Did yoa want any money ? Yes, sir, I wanted some.
12. Do yon wish to live in France? No, sir, I v^ish to live in the
United States.
18. Do yon wish to speak French ? No, or, I wish to speak Spanish.
14. Dothey wish to bay a grammar? No, mr, they wish to buy news-
papera
46
LBSSON xir.
15. What do 70a wish to bny ? I wish to buy a handkerchief.
'16. What do 70a wish to read? I wish to read the English news-
papers.
17. What do yon wish to drink? I wish to drink some wine €nd
water?
18. What do they want to sell ? They want to sell their horses.
19. When did yon receive yonr let^ters from England? We have re-
ceived them to-day.
20. When did yon dine with yonr friends? I have dined with them
to-day.
21. Have yon a nsefbl book ? Yes, sir, I have a Spanish grammar.
22. Does the merchant sell his hats dear ? No, sir^ he sells them very
cheap.
28. Is yonr friend yonng? No, sir, he is old.
24. Are yon rich? No, air, I am poor.
25. Do yon wish to have money ? Yes, nr, I wish to hfive it
26. Bo yonr friend and consin live in New York? No, nr, they live
in Philadelphia.
LESSON XIV.
Llemr, Uetado.
Ervoiar^ enviado.
Tomar, tornado,
PagoTj pagado.
Guanto.
Onantos.
Bastante.
Peso. Dollar.
Oentavo. Cent
Caf6. OofTee.
Chocolate. Chocolate.
To bring, brought.
To send, sent
To take, taken.
To pay, paid.
How mnch.
How many.
Enough.
Silla.
Cama.
Ch^r.
Table.
Bed.'
NTTMBBAL ADJSOTIVIES — OASDINAL NT7KBXB8.
Uno, una. One.
Dos. Two.
Tres. Three.
OuatiD. Four.
Cinco. Five.
LB8BON ZIY.
47
8d8.
Sieie.
Ocha
Diez.
Once.
Dooe.
Trece.
Catoroe.
Quince.
Diez 7 seifl.
Diez 7 aiete.
Diez 7 ocho.
Diez 7 nneye.
Yeinte.
Yeinte 7 nno, etc.
Treinta.
Cnarenta.
Cincae^ta.
Sesenta.
Betenta.
Oohenta.
Noventa.
Ciento.
Dosciento8.
Trescientos.
CoatrocieDtos.
Qdnientos.
Seiscicntos.
Setecicntos.
Ochocientos.
Novedentos. ,
Mil.
Dos mil.
Mil ciento.
CieU mil.
Un millon.
Six.
ISght.
Nine.
Ten.
Eleven.
Twelve.
Thirteen.
Fourteen.
fifteen.
Sixteen.
Seventeen.
Eighteen.
Nineteen.
Twent7.
Twenty-one, fto.
Thirt7.
Forty.
Fifty.
Sixty.
Seventy.
Eight7.
Ninet7.
A or one hnndrecL
Two hundred.
Three hundred.
Four hundred.
Five hundred.
Six hundred.
Seven hundred.
Eight hundred.
Nine hundred.
A or one thousand.
Two thousand.
Eleven hundred.
A or one hundred thousand.
A or one million.
COMPOSITION.
4 Han Devado mieombrero al sombre-
rero?
% eeSoFy lo han llerado.
Have the7 taken 07 bat to the batter?
Yes, rir, they have taken St
48
LESSON XIV.
I Ha eaviado V. la carta & an primo ?
La he enviado.
^Ha tornado v. caf6?
No, se&or, he tornado chocohite.
i Ou&nto dinero tiene Y. ?
Tengo bastante.
I Cu&nto tiene Y. ?
Tengo diez pesos.
i Ha comido Y. con sa hennano hoy ?
No, sefior, no he comido con H.
i Ga&nto ^ pagado Y. al sombrerero ?
Ocho pesos 7 eels centayos.
i CuAntaa sillas ha comprado Y. t
He comprado seis.
Have yon sent the letter to your cousin?
I liaye sent it
Have yoa taken oofifee ?
No, sir, I have taken cfaocohite.
How madtk money have you ?
I have enough.
How mudi have yoa f
I have ten dollars.
Have yoa dined with your brother to-
day?
No, ur, I have not dmed witii him.
How madtk have you paid to the hatter ?
Eight dollars and six cents.
How many diairs have you boo^t?
I have boogfat six.
EXPLANATION.
NUMERAL ADXBOnYBB.
67. In the formation of compound nnmbeis, the same order
is observed in Spanish as in English, except as to the place of
the conjunction ; as.
Mil ochodentos sesenta y seis. | 1866.
68, All these numbers, except unOy one, and the compounds
of cientOy one hundred, are indeclinable. ~
59, ITno agrees in gender with the noun to which it refers,
but drops the o when it comes immediately before a masculine
noun; as,
Uno de los hombres.
Ufia miger.
Un hombre.
Un gran caballo.
One of the men.
A woman.
A man.
A great horse.
60- CiENTO drops the last syllable when it comes immedi-
ately before a noun. Its compounds agree in number and
gender with the nouns to which they refer ; as.
Cien hombres y den m\\jeres.
Otenio vdnte y tres eaballoe.
Do6«imto8 libros.
TreB<;ienta9 d^as.
One hundred men and one hundred
women.
One hundred and twenty-three horses.
Two hundred books.
Three hundred boxes.
LXS80N XIY. 49
GONYEBSATION AND YEBSION.
1. |Ha escrito Y. sua cartas? Sf, sefior, las he escrito.
2. iLas ha enyiado V. al correo^? 8i,8enor, las he enviado hoy.
8. 4 Ha tx>mado V. caf6 6 chocolate? He tornado oaf&.
4. 4 Tiene Y . bastante dinero ? 6S, sefior, tengj> bastante.
6. iCo^totiene Y.? Tengo veinte pesos y treinta centavos.
6. I Gndnto ha pagado Y. & sn sastre ? He pagado 4 mi sastre veinte
J cinco pesos j cnarenta centavos.
7. i Onfindo ha comido Y. con sa amigo ? He comido con dl hoy.
8. I Cn4ntos caballos ha comprado Y. ? He comprado ocho.
9. (Ha comprado Y. sillas? Si, sefior, he comprado doce.
10. I Tiene Y. mucho dinero ? Tengo cien pesos y cincnenta oentavoe.
11. lOoanto tiene sn hermano ? Hene qninientos (500) pesos.
12. |I>6nde vive Y. ? Yivo en Nneva York.
18. |Qq4 ntmero {number) tiene la casa de Y.? Tiene el ntimero
trescientos treinta j ocho (888).
14. I Ha recibido Y. sos peri6dicos de Paris ? Si, sefior, los he recibido.
15. |Qn6 ntimeros ha recibido Y.? He recibido el once, doce, trece,
catorce, y diez y ocho.
16. 4 Los ha leido Y. ? No, sefior, no los he leido.
17. |Ca4ntos afios (year) ha vivido Y. en Paris? He vivido cmoo.
18. I Gointas lecciones ha aprendido Y. ? He aprendido trece.
19. I Cnintas gramdticas tiene Y. ? No tengo sino nna.
20. I Qni^n ha recibido hoy peri6^cos ? Nadie los ha recibido hoy.
21. ^Es rico el amigo de Y. ? Si, sefior, tiene qninientos mil (500,000)
pesos.
22. {Ha Ilcvado Y. mis cartas al correo? No he llevado sino dos.
23. {Ha enviado Y. mis zapatos al zapatcro ? Si, sefior, los he envia-
do hoy.
24. 2 Ha tomado Y. mnchas lecciones de espafiol? He tomado doce.
25. I Cntoto ha pagado Y. & sa amigo ? Tres mil ochocientos cnarenta
y cnatro pesos (8,844).
EXEBdSE.
1. Do yon wish to send anything to yonr consin? Yes, sir, I wish to
send money to my consin.
2. How mnch money do you wish to send? I wish to send $317.
3. Who has taken the money to the tiulor? My cousin (fern.) has
taken it.
4. Where have yon sent the horses ? I have sent them to Paris.
6. How many have you sent? I have sent two very good ones.
_ • Oonw, poBt-offlce.
50
LESS029^ XT.
6. Mj son, have yon taken the $31.60 to the baker ? Tes, dr, I have
(taken them).
7. Hasyonr brother sent some ohairs to yonr house? No, ear, but he
has sent some to his.
8. How many haa he sent? He has sent ten chairs and three tables.
9. Has the womim bought no chairs? Yes, sir, she has bought
twenty-six.
10. How many letters have they written this (etta) week. They have
written three hundred and ten letters and one thousand and one notes.
11. Which newspapers have yon sent to your father ? I have sent him
numbers three, fifteen and eighteen.
12. Has he read them all ? He has read only number fifteen.
18. Has the butcher much money ? He has $1,000.
14. How much have you sent to your Mend (fem.)^ I have sent
$111.17.
15. Whom do you wish to pay ? I wish to pay my tailor.
16. Where does your tailor redde? He resides in "Vienna.
17. When have you written to Alexander ? I have written to Alex-
ander to-day.
18. Have you received a letter from him to-day ? Tes, rar, I have re-
ceived six,
19. What day do you receive letters from France? I receive them on
Tuesdays and Saturdays.
20. How many has your oouMn written to you ? Kone.
LESSON XV.
Fronunciar^ pronunciado,,
Tocwr^ tocado.
Cantor^ cantado,
jReina^j reinado,
Como.
To pronounce, pronounced.
To touch, touched; to play,
played.
To sing, sung.
To reign, reigned.
How, like, as.
OBDINAL NTTMBBBS.
Primero (primer htfore a noun),
Begnndo.
Teroero {or tercer htforeanoun).
First.
Second.
Third.
LBSSON XV.
Ciuurto.
Fourth.
Qomto.
Fifth.
Sexto.
Sixth.
86ptimo.
Seventh.
Octavo.
Eighth.
NoveBo, w nona
Nmth.
D6cimo.
Tenth.
Piano.
Bano.
Oandon.
Song.
Violin.
Violin.
Palabra.
Word.
Mtisioa
Mofiician.
Gmtarra.
Guitar.
Ptamsta. '
Pianist.
Histoiia.
History.
Cantor.
Singer.
Arpa.
Harp.
Tomo w Toltimen. Volnme.
Obra.
Work.
Carlos.
Charles.
Mtlaiea.
Mnsio.
Luis.
Louis.
Cantora, oantatriz. Smger.
Enriqne.
Henry.
CaUe.
Street
Rey.
King.
Avenida.
Avenne.
Trab^o.
Work, labor.
61
COMPOSITION.
i G61110 pronimda Uannel el espafiol ?
Lo pronimda bien.
4T0CA v. la goitarra?
No, sefior, tooo el violin 7 d piano.
I Outa V. candones espafiolas ?
No, aefior, canto candones inglcsas.
^Qoien reina en Bnsiaf
AUjandro Segimdo.
^Enqo^calleviveV.?
Yivo en la calle Once.
iYV., d6ndevivcf
To vivo en la calle Vdnte y tres.
^Qa6 toca d mfisico?
Toca d arpa, d violm 7 d piano.
i Tiene V. d primer tomo de mi librof
No, se&or, tengo el segmido.
4 Ha Iddo V. el tomo tercero ?
No, seiior, he Iddo d caarto.
i Cu&ntos afios tiene V. ?
How does Emannd pronounce Spanish ?
He pronounces it wdL
Do yon play the guitar ?
No, sir, I play the violin and the piano.
Do you sing Spanish songs f
No, sir, I sing English songs.
Who reigns hi Russia f
Alexander the Second.
In which street do you live ?
I live in Eleventh street
And where do yov live ?
I live hi Twent7-third street
What does the mudcian pUj ?
He plaTS the harp, violin and piano.
Have you the first volume of m7 book ?
No, sir, I have the second.
Have you read the third volume?
No, sir, I have read the fourth.
How old are you f
EXPLANATION.
61. The ordinals always agree in gender. and nnmber with
62 LB880N ZV.
the noun, e3q)reB8ed or understood, to which they refer, and may
be placed either before or after that noun ; as,
The first volume.
The first good book.
The first copy-books.
The first lessons.
The second volume.
The second mtentions.
£1 primer tomo (or el tomo primero).
El primer buen Ubro.
Los primeros cuademos.
Las primcras lecciones.
El segundo tomo.
Las segundas intenciones.
It has been seen, in the list of ordinal numbers at the open-
ing of the present lesson, that /Trim^ro and tercero lose the final
letter when they immediately precede their noun, or are separ-
ated from it only by an adjective. We may observe here, that
tercero is by some written entire ; the contracted form, how-
ever, is much to be preferred ; as,
EI tercer tomo. | The third volume.
62. The ordinals are not so frequently used in Spanish as
in English; and, except primero^ first, their place is generally
supplied by the cardinal numbers ; as, for instance, in speaking
of the days of the month, which are expressed by el doSy tres,
cuatro^ etc.j the second, third, fourth, &c. The following are
the principal cases in which the ordinals are employed: 1st,
with the names of sovereigns, popes, &c. ; 2d, in the enum-
eration of books, chapters, lessons, <&c., and a few others;
but, even in these cases, after dbcimo^ tenth, they are, by rea-
son of their great length, generally replaced by the numerals ;
as,
Charles the Fifth.
C&rlos Quinto.
Pio Nono.
Capftulo d^cimo.
Calle Veinte y trcs.
Luis Catorce.
Pius the Nmth.
Chapter tenth.
Twenty-third street.
Louis the Fourteenth.
N. B. — ^The definite article is not required in the above ex-
{fmples.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^PronuDcia V. bien el ingles? Ko, seflor, lo pronimcio maL
2. iEs V. cantor? No, sefior, pero tooo.
8. I Qu6 toca V. ? Toco el violin.
LESSON XV. 53
4. iGanta bien sa hermana de Y. ? No, sefior, ella canta mal; pero
toea bien el piano.
5. I Qii6 leccion estadia Y.? Estndio la cnarta.
6. ^Eq quife calle vive sa padre de Y. ? Vive en la calle Catorce.
7. 4Qn4 tomos ha Iddo Y. ? He leido el primero, segondo, tercero j
eoarto.
8. |On&ntos tomos tiene la obraf Tiene seis.
9. iQu61ibrolee Y.? Leo la Mstoria de CWos Qninto.
10. I Ha leido Y. la hiatoria de Enrique Ootavo de Inglaterra? 81,
sefior, la he leado.
11- iQu^ tomo lee an bennana de Y. ? Lee el noveno.
12. I Cudnto dinero ba recibido Y. boy ? He recibido dncnenta y un
pesos.
13. lOu&ntoshennanoBtiene Y.9 Tengo cinco.
14. I Curios afios tiene sa bennana de Y. ? Tiene qnince.
15. I Gn^nto tiempo ba vivido Y. en Paris ? He viyido seis afios.
16. iQn6 ndmero tiene sn cosa? El doscientos seis (206).
IT. iQn^diadelasemanacsboy? Hoy es mi6rcoles.
18. I Qii6 bora tiene Y. ? Las diez.
19. I GnAntos dias tiene una semana? Tiene siete.
20. Ocbo y doce ^cn^tos son? Son veinte.
21. I Gndntos afios tiene sn pflp4 de Y. ? Tiene sesenta.
22. 2 Cn&ntos dias tiene el afio ? l^ene trescientos sesenta y cinco (865).
23. iC6mo ba leido Y.9 He leido despacio.
24. I Ha llevado Y. mi piano al pianista ? Sf, sefior, lo be llovado.
26. I Ha cantado Y. mncbo boy ? Hoy be cantado poco.
26. I Cu6ndo ba yendido Y. sa caballo ? Lo be yendido boy.
EXERCISE.
1. What book bave yon? A mneac-book.
2. How many volumes lias it? Tbree.
8. Wbicbyolame bave yoa read? Tbe first.
4. Has your fatber not read the second volume? Ko, sir; but my
cousin bas read it.
5. Wbat are you reading, miss? I am reading tbe History of Cbarles
" tlieFiftb.
6. Wbo bas sold your sister's History of England ? She bas sold it.
7. Wbo bas bougbt the violin? The pianist.
8. Where does he liVe ? In Seventeenth street.
9. In wbat street does the butcher live ? In Sixth avenue.
10. Have you bought good meat in tbe butcher's shop? Tbe meat
(which) I bave bought is very bad.
64
LES8X>N XYI.
11. What things have yon sent to the tailor ? I have sent stockings,
vests, and pocket-handkerchiefs.
12. What day of the week is to-day? Monday.
18. Is Monday the first day of the week 9 No, sir, it is the second;
Sunday is the first.
14. How much money does the merchant require? He requires $1,500.
15. How much money do you wish to send to your friend? I wish to
send my friend $50. ,
16. Does he need much money ? Tes, madam, he is very poor.
17. How many letters have your brothers written to Emanuel? Very
few.
18. How do your costers pronounce Spanish? They pronounce it well
when they read, but not when they speak.
19. When do they write their exercises? When they have studied
their lessons.
20. And you, when do you write yours? When my brothers write
theirs.
21. How do the poor buy? The poor buy dear, and the rich buy
cheap.
22. Hasyour&ther sold his old horse? He has sold it
28. Have you read the History of Louis XYL? I have read volumes
first, second, and third.
LESSON XVI.
HBST ooiSJVQATiOK— Preterit D^nite.
ffdbU.
Habl-aste.
Habl-6.
I spoke.
Thou spokest
He spoke.
Habl-Amos.
Habl-asteis.
Habl-aron.
We spoke.
You spoke.
They spoke.
8B00ND 00
BTJUOATION.
Aprend-L
Aprend-iste.
Aprend-io.
I learned.
Thou leamedst
He learned.
Aprend-imos.
Aprend-isteis.
Aprend-ieron.
We learned.
You learned.
They learned.
LX880K XYI.
55
£Bcril>-L
£scrib>iste.
£Bcrib-i6.
'EamMnnos,
Escrib-isteis.
Eacrib-ieron.
Pasar.
Ayer.
Antes de ayer, or anteayer.
£1 a&o pasado.
£1 mes pasado.
La aemana pasada.
Ante (,pr^,).
Ante todas cosaa.
Ante todo.
Antes (ad.).
Belante (ad.).
Despues ((id.),
Mas (ad.).
M^nos (ad.).
Qae (eonj.).
OOHTUOATIOK.
I wrote.
Thoa wrote.
He wrote.
We wrote.
Yon wrote.
They wrote.
To pass, to spend (in relation
to Ume).
Yesterday.
The day before yesterday.
Last year.
Last month.
Last week.
Before, in the presence ot
Before all things.
Above alL
Before (r^en to time).
Before (refers to place).
Afterwards, after.
More.
Less, fewer.
That, than.
COMPOSITION.
iHabl6 y. con mi padre?
Si, aefior, habl^ con 61 ftntes de ayer.
I Han apiendido Yds. sa leocion f
81, aefior, la hemes apiendido hoy.
i Gaaodo escribid Y. & su hermana ?
Kflcribi la aemana pasada & mi henaana.
jHa redbido Y. sua periddiooa del
mes pasado?
SI, sefior, los he recibido hoy.
iCn&ndo vendid Y. su caballo?
Lo Tendi d afio pasado.
i Estadia Y. Antes 6 despaes de comer ?
Sstadio Antes de comer.
4 Habl6 Y. mucfao ante el Juex ?
IHd yon speak inth my fkiher ?
Tes, sir, I spoke with him the day be-
fore yesterday.
Have you learned your lesson ?
Tes, sir, we have learned it to-day.
When did yon write to your sister ?
I wrote to my sister last week.
Have yon recdred year newspapers of
last month (last month^s newspapers)?
Yes, sir, I have recdved them to^y.
When did you sell yoor horse ?
I sold it last year.
Do yoa stady before or after dining (or
dinner)?
I study before dining.
Bid yon speak much before the Judge?
56
LESSON XYI.
No, Befior, habU muy poco.
I Qu6 libro tiene Y. delante ?
Tengo la gram&tica espafiola.
I E8cribi6 V. BUS cartas ?
Si, sefior, las eacribi el domingo pasa-
do.
i Come V. m^nos que yo ?
No, Be&or, como maa que Y.
i Ha visto Y. & su amigo ?
Si, seuor, lo y1 ayer.
4D6ndelovi6 Y.?
Lo Tf delante de la iglesim.
^Habl6 Y. con^I?
Si, sefior ; pero muy poco.
i Ha comido Y. f
Si, sefiora, he comido pan y he bebido
vino.
i Ha leido Y. y estudiado bus q'ercicios ?
Sf, sefior, los he leido y estudiado.
i Ha escrito Y. & su padre f
Si, sefior, escribf ayer.
i Gu&ndo ha recibido Y. las cartas de
Las he recibido hoy.
I Ha enviado Y. mis cartas despues de
las suyas ?
Las he enviado &ntea.
i Habl6 Y. ante d rey ?
Ko, sefior, habl6 ante el juez.
^Cuftnto tiempo?
No, BUT, I spoke very little.
What book have you before you ?
I have the Spanish grammar.
Did you write your letters ?
Tes, sir, I wrote them last Sunday.
Do you eat less than I f
No, sir, I eat more than you.
Have you Been your friend ?
Yes, sir, I saw him yestertlay.
Where did you see him ?
I saw him before (in front of) the
church.
Did you speak to him ?
Yes, sir ; but very little.
Have you dined ?
Yes, sir, I have eaten bread and drunk
wine.
Have you read and studied your exer-
cises?
Ye$«, sir, I have read and studied them.
Have you written to your father ?
Yes, sir, I wrote yesterday.
When have you received the letters
from him ?
I have received them to-day.
Have you sent my letters after yours ?
I (have) sent them before.
Did you speak before the king ?
No, sir, I spoke before the judge.
How long ?
EXPLANATION.
63. The Pretebite DEPiNTrB refers to a time past, and
generally specified in the sentence, and denotes the thing or
action past in such a manner that nothing remains of that
time in which it was done ; as.
Escribi & mi padre en el afio 1864.
iiprendi el frances el aSo pasado.
I wrote to my father in the year 1864.
I learned French last year.
In colloquial language, the preterite indefinite (which has
been treated of in Lesson xii.), is sometimes, though incorrect-
LB8SON ZTI. 57
ty, substituted for the preterite definite. The following example
will show the impropriety of such a substitution :
He escrito k mi padre ayer. | I have written to my iatlier yestenlay.
Nothing remains of yesterday ; it is time past^ and has no
connection with the present ; and, as it has been already seen
that the preterite indefinite conveys an aUutUm to the present
timej the incorrectness of the foregoing example is at once
apparent.
We may, however, say with propriety :
Eacribi la carta k las trefl, & las cna- I I wrote the letter at three o^do<^ at
tro, etc. I four o'clock, &c
for the time specified is completely past.
64. AsTTE. — ^This preposition means before^ or in the pree-
€nee of-^ as,
Habl6 ante el jaez. | He spoke before the jadge.
And it sometimes denotes priority, antecedence, Ac. ; as,
Ante todas oosas. | Before all things.
6 5 - Mas, more ;* Miasros, few, fewer, — ^These two adverbs are
used to form the comparative degree of several adjectives,
which last they always precede in the sentence ; as.
El vino es tuM caro que la cerveza. I Wine is dearer'tfaan beer.
Yo soy ma» rico qne Y. I I am richer than you.
When nsed to express some quality or circumstance re-
specting, verbs, their usual place in the sentence is immediate-
ly after these last ; as.
To escribo www. I I write more.
T6 hablas meriM, \ Thou speakest less.
It is needless to observe here, that mcu and menos are thetnt
selves the comparatives of mvcho sudpoco^ respectively.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Cu4ndo habl6 V. con el abogado ? Habl^ con 61 anteayer.
2. 4 Ha hablado V. con mi hennana? No, sefior, habl6 ayer con su
amigo de V.
8. 4 Ha hablado V. con el pianista ? Si, seflor, le habl6 ayer.
58 LESSON XYI.
4. ^Ha aprendido Y. an leccion? No, sellor; pero lie escrito el
cjercido.
5. ^Han aprendido ellos sns lecciones de frances? Si, sefior, han
aprendido las de frances y de espafioL
6. I Otidndo aprendi6 sa bermana & tocar el piano ? Aprendi6 el alio
paB^do.
7. I Ha leido Y. la l^tonsL de los Estados Unidos ? He leido el tomo
primero j el segnndo.
8. I Ha leido Y. la carta de sa hermana y la de sa amiga ? He leido
la de mi hermana; pero no la de mi amiga.
9. I Qa6 ha leido Y. hoy ? He leido los ^ercicios de la semana pasada.
10. j Cndndo compr6 Y. sa caballo ? Lo compr^ el mes pasado.
11. iD6nde habl6 Y. con mi padre 9 Delante de sa casa de Y.
12. iLej6 Y. la carta de sa padre dates qae la de sa hermano ? No,
sefior, la lei despaes.
18. j Oadndo residid Y. en Paris ? Besidi alii Antes qae Y,
14. j Cadntos alios tiene sa hermana 9 Tiene veinte.
15. I Oadntos pesos pag6 Y. el mes pasado al comerciante ? Qoinien-
tos.
16. I Ha Uevado Y. mis zapatos al zapatero 9 Si, sefior, los ]lev6 oyer.
17. I Ou&ndo ha recibido Y. sa dinero 9 Lo recibi anteayer.
18. 2 Ha escrito Y. despaes qae escribi6 mi padre 9 No, sefior, escribl
dntes.
19. j Esoribi6 Y. sa carta despaes qae recibi6 la de sa hermano 9 Si,
sefior, la escribi macht) despaes.
20. I Ha hablado Y. con la madre dntes qae con la hija9 No, seflor,
habl6 dntes con la h^a qae con la madre.
21. I Estndid Y. sa leccion de ayer 9 No, sefior, estudi6 la de dntes de
ayer ; pero no he estndiado la de ayer ni la de hoy.
22. I Habl6 Y. ante el jaez 9 Si, sefior, habl6 ante el jaez y ante el rey.
23. I Habla Y. mas qae yo 9 No, seflor, hablo m6nos ; pero escribo
mas.
EXERCISE.
1. Did yoa speak more yesterday than to-day 9 I spoke less ; bat I
read more.
2. How many newspapers did yoar father read yesterday 9 Yery few.
8. How old is your sister 9 She is nineteen.
4. Who took the vest to the tailor last year 9 The baker took it.
, 5. How much did the taUor pay to the baker afterwards 9 $59.10.
6. Did he receive the vest after or before the coat 9 He received it
after.
LESSON XYII.
59
7. Did your sisten sing yesterday? Tes, sir, they sang and played.
6. What did they sing ? They sang Spanish songs and played on the
piano.
9. Have yon (plural) played to-day? No, madam, we have not
played; but we have written our French exercises.
10. How many words have your brothers written in Spanish to-day?
Fewer than last Thursday.
11. Do they speak more EngUsh than Spanish? No, madam, they
speak more Spanish.
12. What have the singers received from Paris? They have received
some good songs and French music.
18. Have the singers (/em,) enough Spanish music ? Yes^ sir, they
have received some to-day.
14. Did they sing well last month? Not very welL
15. Who sang in your house the day before yesterday? Nobody sang.
16. How long did you reside in Vienna? Hve years, six months, and
thirteen days.
17. How many churches has Paris? Paris has many churches.
18. How did your cousins pronounce their Spanish yesterday. Very
welL
19. Are yon a musician? Yea^ madam. ,
20. Is your sister a pianist or a singer, or does she play on the guitar ?
She sangs and plays on the piano.
21. When did you speak before the judge? The day before yesterday
and last week.
22. Do you sing much with the muncians ? I sing a little ; but be-
fore all things I study my Spanish lessons.
Thibd^ar.
Mandar
LESSON XVII.
To work.
To command, to send.
Quien, quienes,
A quien, 4 quienes.
iQn6?
Oual, cuales.
Cuyo (nuue. <in^.)) cuya (fim.^
9ing,).
Gnyos (moie. pltiral)^ cqyas
(/em. plural),
Varios.
Who.
Whom, to whom.
What (inter,), who, that, or which.
Which one, which ones.
Whose, which, or of whom*
Several.
60
LESSON XTII.
Retrato.
Portrait
[Oriada.
Servant
Pantalon.
Pantaloons.
Iglesia.
Church.
Criado.
Servant.
OaUe.
Street
Concierto.
Concert.
Plaza.
Square, market
Teatro.
Theatre.
Oompafiia.
Company.
MercaJo.
Market
Jaana.
Jane.
Parque.
Park.
Jaan.
John.
Trabiyador.
Workman.
Hotel
Hotel.
COMPOSmON.
I Es viejo el caballero d quien Y. habl6
en el concierto ?
No, sefior, pcro lo es la sefiora que ha
hablado con Y. en el teatro.
i A qui6n buaca Y. ?
Bijisco k la Befiorita d quien Y. busca.
i Qiii6n es el joven que ha hablado con
v.?
Es un criado del hotel
El muchacho que lee, 7 alcual Y. man-
d6 trabiyar, es mi hennano.
La ^m&tica que 61 ticne, y en la eual
estudia, es mia.
El caballero cuya casa Y. coinpr6 es
amigo mio.
El comerciante cuyo Tino Y. compr6,
vende muv barato.
El libro en que leemos*
La sefiora d quien habl6 es mi madrc.
iManda Y. bus niSos al Parque Cen-
ti-al?
I A qui6n manda Y. trabcgar ?
A mis criados.
I Juan!
] Scfior ! I qu6 manda Y. ?
Quicro la comida.
J En d6nde trabajan hoy los trabaja-
dores?
Trabajan en la calle.
Is the gentleman to whom you spoke
at the concert «ld ?
No, sir; but the lady who spoke to you
at the theatre is (so).
For whom do you look?
I am looking for the young lady that
you look for.
Who is the young man that has spoken
to you?
He is a servant in the hotel
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work is my brother.,
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
The gentleman whose house you bought
is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you bought
sells very cheap.
The book in which we read (or which
we read in).
The lady I spoke to is my mother.
Do you send your children to the Cen-
tral Park?
Whom do you command to work ?
My servants.
Johnl
Sir ! what do you wish ?
I wish my dinner.
Where do the workmen work t>day?
They work m the street
liBSSOIf XYII. 61
EXPLANATION.
66- QuiEBT. — The relative pronoan quien refers to perBons
only, and is al^w^ys preceded by the preposition 4, when gov-
erned by a verb ; as,
EI bombre d qwen, V. qaiere. | The man whom 70a lore.
67. Who, coming immediately after its antecedent, is
translated by gw ; when it stands alone, or is governed by a
preposition, it is rendered by quien; as,
El macbac^o que estudla. | The boy who studies.
La muchacha con qmtn hablas. | The giri with whom 70a speak.
68. CuaIj and qite relate to persons and things ; as,
El mnchaclio que lee, 7 al eual Y.
mondo trabcjar, es mi heimano.
Ia gram4tica que &. tiene, 7 en la
euai estudla, es mia.
The bo7 that reads, and whom 7011
commanded to work, is m7 brother.
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
6 9. CxjTO also refers to persons and things, but agrees with
the word by which it is immediately followed ; as,
EI caballero ewfa com V. compro es
amigo mio.
El comerciante euyo Yino V. compr6
Tende mu7 barato.
Tlie gentleman whose house 70U bought
is m7 friend.
The merchant whose wine 70U bou^t
sells Ter7 cheap.
This pronoun partakes of the nature, both of the relatives
and tbe possessives.
70. In English the preposition does not always precede the
relative pronoun; but in Spanish it is indispensable to place
the preposition before the relative ; as,
El libro en que leemos. I The book which we read in (or, in
I which we read).
71. The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Span-
ish ; so that we cannot say, as in English, the lady I spoke to,
but, in full ; as.
La sefiora d quien, habI6, es mi I The Iad7 to whom I spoke is m7
madre. | mother.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. g A qui^n mand6 V. ayer al mercado ? Mand^ & mi criado Juan.
2. jCn&l do sQs criadoB trabi^'a mas? Jnan trabtga mas que todos.
3. I Qai^n es el hombre 6 qui^n Y. bosoa? El hombre 4 quien basc6
63 trab^jador.
62 LESBON Xyil.
4. ^Qni6n es el caballero con qnien habl6 Y. a/er en el concierto?
Es on discipnlo mio.
5. I A qai6n quiere Y. hablar f Qaiero hablar & la seliorita que toca
el piano.
6. 1 06mo pasaron Yds. el tiempo en el campo ? Lo pasamos muy
Men en compaflia de nnestros amigos.
T. i£s Franoes el comerciante & qnien compr6 Y. el oaballo? Si,
sefior, es el Franoes cuja casa oonipr6 Y.
8. |Manda (envia) Yi sua nifios al Parqne Central t Si, sefior, los
mando al Parque Oentral.
0. I Oon qui^n los envia Y. f Oon sns primos.
10. iQa^ libro qniere Y. leer? Quiero leer el de ManneL
11. iNo qniere V. leer el que yo tengof No, sefior, quiero leer el de
Alejandro.
12. I A qui6n manda Y. trab^ar ? A mis criados.
13. I Juan I I Sefior t ^Qu6 manda Y.f Quiero la comida.
14c. I Canta Y. bien f No, sefior ; pero la sefiorita que reside en su
casa de Y. canta muj bien.
16. 2 Estudia Y. mucho ? No, sefior, pero trab^o mncho.
1^ 2 na estudiado Y. hoj sn leccion ? No, sefior, la estudi6 ajer ; hoy
he escrito los C|jercicios.
17. |06mo pronuncia su maestro de Y. el espafiolf Lo pronuncia
bien ; pero pronuncia muy mal el ingles.
18. I Toc6 Y. ayer el piano en casa de sua amigos ? Si, sefior, todtmos
y cant&mos.
19. jQu6 cantaron Yds.? Oantdmos canoiones espafiolas y la can-
clon amoricana llamada, ^' The Star Spangled Banner."
20. iCabollerost iQuieren Yds. tomar chocolate 6 caf6? Queremos
beber vino.
21. I Oudntos dias pa96 Y. en el campo ? Pas6 toda una semana.
22. 2 Porqu6 no pasa Y. un mes en el campo con nosotros ? Porque
necesito residir en la ciudad.
23. lOvL&L de sus amigos habla bien espafiol? £1 que estudia mucho
habla bien.
24. 2 OuiU de sus hermanos estudia mas ? El mas pequefio.
25. I De qui^n recibe Y. cartas ? De mi padre y mis hermanod.
26. {Es de Y. el libro en el cual estudia su hermano ? No, sefior, es
snyo.
27. |Trab^j6 Y. mucho ayer? No, sefior; pero he trabigado mucho
hoy.
' 28. I Cuibido estudia Y. sos lecciones ? Las estudio los mi6rcoles y los
s&bados.
LBBBON XYII. 63
EXERCISE.
1. Whose is the portrait (which) you sent me yesterday ? It is the
portrait of my hrother who lives in Germany.
2. Which portrait have you sent to Charles? I have sent no portrait
to Charles ; hnt I have sent mine to the musician.
3. With whom did you spend last week ? I spent last week with my
toiisin John.
4. In which dty of France does the pianist^s hrother live ? He lives
in the city in which your sister Jane resides.
6. To whom did you send the first volume of your work? I sent it
to Louis.
6. Whom do you order to work ? My servant John.
7. Who is the lady you are looking for ? She is the mother of the
anger {/em.) whose piano Charles bought last year.
8. With whom did you send your children to the concert last night?
I sent them with a servant
9. With which servant did you send them ? With one of mine (my
own).
10. In which church does Miss Garcia sing ? She sings in Twenty-
eighth street church.
11. How did you {plural) pass the time in Philadelphia? Yery well.
12. Did you study many lessons ? We studied very little, and neither
read nor wrote our exercises.
13. How much did you write the day before yesterday ? I studied a
good deal, but wrote little.
14. Which volumes of Robertson's History has your son ? He has re-
ceived the first, second, third and fourth.
15. Did you buy any books at the bookstore in Walker street? Yes,
madam, I bought the History of Charles Y. and some music books.
16. Whom have you paid with the money I sent you ? I have paid
the man who worked in my house yesterday.
17. Does your servant work much ? Ko, or ; but she reads a great deal.
18. From whom do you receive letters every day ? I receive letters
from Henry on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, and from my father
on Tuesdays.
19. Who has the boots that I bought in Fourth avenue? John has
tak^ them to his cousin who lives in Philadelphia.
20. Has your servant bought any good meat in the market ? He has
not bought any to-day.
21. How many songs have you received from Spain ? I have received
several from Spain and two from England.
64
LBSBON Xyill.
22. Have jon song any of them ? None ; bnt my raster sang one or
two last night at .the concert
23. Are they very good ? One of them is very good, and my cousin
(Jem,) sings it very well.
24. How many pencils does the hatter wish ? He wants twelve pen-
cils and three penknives.
25. Does Louisa play maoh on the piano? Ko, sir, she is very lazy,
and will neither play nor study.
26. The tailor has a handsome vest, very cheap ; will you buy it ? I
do not wish to buy a vest ; but I want pantaloons.
27. Has he any pantaloons ? He has none, he sold them all lost week.
lesso:n^ XVIII.
Ir.
1
PRESENT.
Togo.
Voy.
Vas.
Va.
I go (or, am going).
Thou goest.
He, or she, goes.
Vamos.
Vais.
Van.
We go.
You go.
They go.
PBETBETT DEFUnTE.
Ful.
Fuiste.
Fu6.
I went.
Thou wentest.
Ho, or she, went.
Fuimos.
Fuisteis.
Fueron-
We went
You went
They went
FEESENT.
Venir.
Vengo.
Vienes.
Viene.
To come.
I come (or, am coming),
lliou comest.
He, or she, comes.
Venimos.
Venis.
Vienen.
We come.
You come.
They come.
LESSON XYIII.
66
PBBTEBIT
Yine.
I came.
Yiniate.
Then earnest
Yino.
He, or she, came.
Yinimos.
We came.
Yinisteis.
You came.
Yinieron.
They came.
BEMONfiTKATTTB PBOSOUNS.
Sin^lar.
Uaaealbie. Feminine. Kenter.
Este. Esta. £sto.
This.
E3e. Esa. Eso.
That.
AqueL Aqnella. Aqaello.
That (yonder).
Flu
ral.
Estos. Estas. JSh neuter.
These.
Esos. Elsas. "
Those.
Aquellos. Aquellas, "
Those (yonder).
EIlo.
It
Aqni, adi.
Here.
Ahi. )
Alii, aU^ acnll^
There.
Porqud.
Why.
Porqne.
Because.
L6J08.
Far.
Cerca.
Near.
Otro.
Another.
Ni imo ni otro (ind, pro.).
Neither.
Profesor. Professor.
Juana. Jane.
Bifldpulo. PupiL
Discipnla. Pupil.
Trfwlo. Side.
Zapateria. Shoemaker's shop.
Jardin. Garden.
Manteca. Butter.
COMPO
smoN.
i De qai6n es esU libro que lengo aquif
Ese que tiene Y. ahi, y este que yo ten-
go aqui, son del profesor.
^Quidn es aqiiel caballero que
alii del otro lado de la callc ?
AqueL cabellero c& mi discipulo.
Whose book is this which I hare here ?
That one which you have there, and this
one which I have here, are the pro-
Who is that gentleman who resides
there on the other side of the street ?
That gentleman is my pupiL
66
LBBSOK XYIII.
i Ad6nde va Y. t
Toy all&, al otro lado del parqae.
i No quiere Y. Tenir ac4 de eate lado ?
No, seiior, yoj tJlk del otro lado.
i Quiere Y. oomprar aqud Ubro ?
No, seiior, quiero comprar eae otro.
i Quiere Y. venir al teatro oon nosotros ?
jE^ quiero.
i lAevb Y. aqudlo k la eastreria t
LoUerd.
^MandaY. algo mast
No, e>o ea todo.
i EnTi6 Y. el chaleco k la saatrerfa, y
las botas k la zapaterfa ?
£iiyi6 lo uno y lo otro (or amboe).
^Fueron k su casa de Y. el m6dioo
francee j el profesor aleman ?
Yino aqudf pero no Tino etle,
i Habl6 Y. de agueOo k mi madre ?
No, sefior, pero liabl6 de eUo k ea pa-
drodeY.
En mi casa y en 2a de sa hennano de Y.
El jardin de esta casa y el de la que Y.
compr6.
Este cabaUo y e^ de mi amigo.
Where do you go ?
I go there to the other mde of the park.
Will yoa not come here to this side ?
No, sir, I go there to the other side.
Do yoa wish to buy that book ?
No, BUT, I wish to buy that other one.
Will you come to the theatre with us ?
That (is what) I wish.
Did yoa take that (thing) to the tailor's ?
I did (or I took it).
Do you command anything more (or
have you any more conunands) f
No, that is all
Did you send the Test to the tailor's,
and the boots to the shoemaker's ?
I sent both.
Did the French phyudan and the Ger-
man professor go to your house ?
The fonner came, but the latter did not
come.
Did you speak of that to my mother ?
No, sir, but I spoke of it to your father.
In my house and In your brother's.
The garden of this house and that of
the one you bought
This horse and my friend's (that of my
fUend).
EXPLANATION.
72. The demonstrative pronouns este^ this, ese^ aqud^ that,
are thus declined :
Este, ese, aquel {nuue, nng,\
Esta, esa, aquella {fem, nng,\
EstOB, esos, aqueUoB (nuwc. plural).
Estas, esas, aquellas (fern, plural).
Esto, eso, aquello {neuier),
73. EsTB is used to point oat what is near to ns, and cor-
responds to the meaning of the adverb here ; ese points out
that which is at some distance, and corresponds to the adverb
LS880N XYIII.
67
there; and (zqud denotes remoteness, and corresponds to the ad-
Terb yowfer; as.
jSffe tibro qae tengo agui.
Ek que tiene Y. ahi,
Aqael que l]ev6 V. cM,
Thi» book which I have here.
That one which you have Ihere,
Thai one which yoa took there.
74. When the pronouns este, eae precede the adjective otro^
another, they may sometimes be written together, so as to form
but one word with it, in the 4>Uowing manner :
Estotro. '
Estotroa. '
Estotra.
This other.
Estotraa.
These others.
Eaotra
That other.
Esotrofl.
Those others.
Esotra. .
Esotraa. .
These forms, however, are now rarely used.
76. The demonstrative pronouns, in their quality of adjec-
tives, are used also na neuter. JEbo, that, is the most used of
the three, and almost as much as the personal pronoun fo, and
in the same manner; as,
&o se har&. t That will be done.
/Aoes! I That 19 it!
76. The former and the latter is translated in Spanish by
aqtid and este; thus.
La aplicacion j la pereza hacen al
hombre muy diferente ; aquella le
elera j etia le rebaja.
Industry and slothfhiness have arery
different effect upon man ; the former
eleratea him, the latter lowera him.
77. When in English the demonstrative pronoun thca is
followed by the prepositipn of, or either of the relatives who,
whiehy expressed or understood, referring to a noun already
mentioned, the definite article, in the corresponding number
and gender, is employed in Spanish ; as.
En mi eaaa y en la de su hermano de
V.
£1 jardUi de esta casa y el de 2a ^u«
V. oompr6.
Este caballo y d de nu amiga
In my house and in your brother's.
The garden of this houae and that of
the one (which) yoa bought
This horse and my friend's (t. e., that
" of my friend).
78- English personal pronouns, followed by a relative not
agreeing in case, are generally rendered in Spanish by the de-
monstrative; as,
Quierocomprar&aQtMJZMqaeTeQden | I want to buy from cAom who sell
barato. | cheap.
68 LESSON XVIII.
79. AQTjf, Aixf, Aci, AixA. — ^Although the adverbs a^uty
here, o/K, yonder, are employed as synonyms of acdy here, and
aUdy yonder, respectively, we must observe that aqui and alli
refer to a place more circumscribed or determinate than acd^
olid; for the same reason we can say, mas acdj mas aUd^
nearer, farther ; and we cannot say, ma« aquX^ more here, m>as
aUij more there.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. J Vione Y, del campo? No, 8efior, voy alia.
2. ^ De d6nde viene su amigo de Y. ? Yiene de Espafla.
8. I Ad6nde va Y. este alio ? Este alio quiero ir a Paris.
4. ^De quidn es ese retrato qne tiene Y. ahi? Este que tengo aqni
es el de mi padre, y aquel que tieno sa amigo de Y. olli, es de mi madre.
6. ^Es discipulo de Y. el caballero que reside en aquella hermosa
casa ? No, sefior ; pero su prima, quo reside de este otro lado de la calle,
es mi discipula.
6. 4 Ya. Y. d su casa todos los dias? No, sefior, voy alli los lAnes,
midrcoles y vi^mes.
7. I Cudntas lecciones toma el caballero que vino ayer & su casa de Y. ?
Toma dos & la semana.
8. I Qui^n trab^ja mas, el profesor 6 el discipulo? El uno y el otro
trabfijan mucho.
9. ^Es este nifio su h^o de Y. ? Si, sefior, cs mi h^jo Manuel.
10. 2 Manuel I ^quieres venir aqui & mi lado? No, sefior, no quiero ir.
11. iPorqu6 ? Porque quiero ir con mi padre.
12. I Cudntos nifios tiene Y. ? Tengo cinco, tres nifias y dos nifios.
18. ^Quiere Y. venir con nosotros al Parque Central? No, sefior, por-
que tengo que ir con mis nifios al campo.
14. iHa de ir Y. (tiene Y. que ir) hoy? Si, sefior, tengo que ir hoy.
15. ^No quiere Y. venir acd de este lado? No, sefior, voy alia del
otro lado.
16. iDev6 Y. aquello d la sastrerfa? Si, sefior, lo llev6.
17. ^Manda Y. algo mas? No, eso estodo.
18. iHabl6 Y. de aquello & mi amigo? No, sefior; pero habl6 de ello
d su hermano.
19. I En d6nde trabiy6 Y. ayer ? Trab(\j6 en la casa de Y. y en la de
su hermano.
20. I Trab^)6 Y. en mi jardln 6 en el de mi amigo ? Trabcj6 en el uno
y en el otro.
LSBSOK XYIII. 69
21. 4 Ad6nde va Y. & trabigar hoy ? Yoy & trabiviar en el jardin de
esta casa j en el do la qne Y. compr6 el afio pasado.
22. I Llev6 Y. mis botas 4 la ziq)ateria, j conipr6 Y. el pan que necedta-
mo6 f Llev6 las botas ; pero no he comprado el pan.
23. iQa& llevas ahi, Alejandro? Llevo mis libros.
24. I Qq6 qniere ta hermano ? Qoiere pan 7 mantecik
25. 4Pag6 Y. al sastre ? 61, senor, ajer pagu6 al sastre, j boy be pa-
gado al zapatero.
26. I De qni^n son esos caballos ? Este es el de mi padre, j aqnel es el
de mi bermano.
2T. i Cu61 es el de Y. ? Yo no tengo ningnno.
28. iQuiere Y. tencr nno? Qaiero tener muchos.
29. 4£scribi6 Y. la carta 7 la leocion ? Escribi aqnella, pero no he
escrito esta.
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon go to chnrch every day ? I only (solo) go on Sundays.
2. Where is yonr servant Jane going? She is going to the bakery.to
buy bread.
8. Do yonr mnsic teacher (f/Mestro) and yonr Spanish professor come
to your house every day? The former comes every day, but the latter
only comes on Tuesdays and Saturdays.
4. Which of the two works the more ? Both have to work much.
5. Which of the two horses is the older, this one here or that one
there ? This one here is the yoimger.
6. Have you that letter which you received last Monday ? I have not
that one ; but I have here the one I received the day before yesterday.
7. Who has written these two histories, that of France and that of
America? RoUin has written the former, and Robertson the latter.
8. Does the piano teacher live far from here? The piano teacher
does not live far from here ; bnt the French professor lives very far.
9. Is that all {lo que) your brother has studied? Yes, sir, that is all.
10. Which lesson have you studied? I have studied the one (la que)
we read the other day.
11. Which did we read, the fifte'enth or the sixteenth ? We read both.
12. Which one do you wish to read first ? I require to read the former.
13. Why do you require to read the former? Because I have not
studied it well
14. Which exercise have^you there? I have mine and my brother's.
15. Is your brother not coming to take his lesson to-day? No, sir, he
has to take his music lesson to-day.
16. John? Sir I
^0
XB8S0N XIX.
17. Have yon .taken my coat to the tailor's? Yes, sir, I took it last
night
16. Have yon paid that man? Yes, Eor, I have paid him to-day.
19. How mnch have yon paid him ? I have paid him three dollars and
seventy-five cents.
20. Why did yon pay him three dollars and seventy>five cents ? Be-
cause he worked one day in this garden, and two in that of the Twenty-
third street house.
21. How many pupils have you ? I have thirty : seventeen learn
Spanish and the thirteen others French.
22. Do they study well? Some of them study very well; but none
write their exercises well.
28. When do you slug and play on the piano? I study my lessons
before singing and playing.
24. Who is that gentleman that came from Vienna last month? That
gentleman is the one to whom I spoke last week at the concert
LESSON XIX.
Saeer.
Haciendo.
Hecho.
To do, or to make.
Doing, making,
pone, made.
PBEC
JKNt.
Hago.
Haces.
Hace.
I do, or make.
Thon doest, or makest
He does, or makes.
Hacemos.
Haceis.
Hacen.
We do, or make.
You do, or make.
They do, or make.
Hice.
Hidste.
Hizo.
I. did, or made.
Thou didst, or madest
He did, or made.
Hicimos.
Hicisteis.
Hicieron.
We did, or made.
You did, or made.
They did, or made.
Partir.
Marchar.
Cambiar.
To set out, to depart, to divide.
To go, set out, setoff to march.
Change,
LBSSOK XIX.
71
FSBPO0IIIO2IB.
Para.
For, or in order to.
A«d
So, thus.
Por.
By, for, through.
Entre.
Between, among.
Hasta.
Until, even.
H4cia.
Towards.
Sin.
Withont.
Pedro.
Peter.
Helena.
Helen.
Eficritor.
Writer.
Escritora
Writer (femaU).
Escribano.
Notary.
Tienda.
Store, shop.
Estado.
State.
Prorinda.
Prorinoe.
Pais.
Oonntry.
Manera.
Manner.
Medico.
Phygidan.
Eflcritara.
Writing, convey-
' Doctor.
ance.
Cnarto.
Aragon.
Tie.
Boom.
Aragon.
Uncle.
OOMPOSmON.
iQa6 hixo Y. ajer en sa cnarto?
Estodi^ mi leodon.
iQa6 ha hecho Y. hoy f
He escrito los qjerddos.
^Qu6 haoe el zapatero en la zapaterfa?
Haoe lapatoe y botas para Y.
iTiene Y. papei para escribir ana
cartaf
SI, aefiora, lo tengo.
i Qoiere Y. escribir una carta por mi
hermano f
/ Para qni^n es la carta ?
£s /MDM ManneL
Yo parte /»ra Madrid.
^ Para d6nde parte Y. ?
Parto para loe Estados Unidos.
i Habl6 Y. & sn padre /x>rim hemumo ?
HabU j9or 61 & mi padie y fc mi tio.
What did yon do yesterday in year
room?
I stodied my lesson.
What have yon done to^y f
I have written my exercises.
What does the shoemaker do in tbe
shoe-shop ?
He makes shoes and boots for yon.
Have yon paper to write a letter t
TeSj madam, I have.
Will you write a letter for my brother ?
For whom is the letter?
It is for Emanael.
I set out for Madrid.
For where do you set out ?
I set out for the United States.
Did yon speak to your father for any
brother ?
I spoke for hhn to my &iher snd to my
nncle.
n
LEfiBON XIZ.
i Habla Y . Uen d franceB t
Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta paso por
frances.
/ Por cuanto Yendi6 V. el caballo ?
Lo vendi por doBcientoB dncaenta pesos.
^ Keoesita Y. enviar joor algo ?
Necesito enviar por el medico.
/ Por qu6 envia V. ?
Envio por vino.
i Yiye V. para comer ?
No, sefior, como ^ra ^vir.
^March6 ayer macho el regimiento
S^ptimo.
March6 hasta el Parque Central
Do yon speak French well t
I speak it very well, and I even pass
for a Frenchman.
For how much did you sell the horse ?
I sold it for two hundred and fifty dol-
lars.
Do you want to send for anything ?
I want to send for the physician.
What do you send for ?
I send for wine.
Do you live to eat ?
No, sir, I eat to live.
Did the Seventh regiment march much
(far) yesterday ?
They marched to the Central Park.
EXPLANATION.
80- Para and Por. — ^As both these preposition^ very fre-
quently answer to the English for^ they are apt to be con-
founded by foreigners. Such confusion may, however, be
avoided by bearing in mind the following rules :
Para expresses aim, object, destination.
Por conveys the idea of want or requirement, substitution,
favor, duration of time, direction, &c. Examples :
"wrrii poB.
wrrn paba.
PapeljEMra escribir.
Paper for writing.
Este libro es para Y.
This book is for you.
Parte /)ara Nueva York..
I start for New York.
Comer jtwra vivir.
To eat to live.
Trabsgo para ganar la vida.
I work in order to earn a living.
Para el domingo.
For Sunday.
Este caballo es para su padre do V.
This horse is for your father.
Lo har6 para tu hermano.
I shall do It for thy brother.
Escribo/M>r mi hermano.
I write for my brother.
Gambia mi sombrero por el suyo.
I changed my hat for his.
Pasa jDor docto.
He passes for a man of learning.
Vender^ la casa por diez mil pesos.
lie will sell the house for ten thousand
dollars.
Trabi^jo 7>or ganar la vida.
I work to (endeavor to) earn my living.
Habld jDor id amigo.
I spoke for (in iavor of) thy friend.
EnviojDor pan.
I send for bread.
Lo har6 por tu hermano.
I wiU do it for thy brother (for thy
brother's sake).
LSSBON XIX. 73
81. Entbs. — ^The general meaning of this preposition is
between and amonffst; as.
Entre loe doe.
Between the two.
Entre V. j yo.
Between you and me.
Entre todofl.
82. Habta signifies tiU^ urUU, eveuy to, as many aSj aa far
as; as,
Haetft d domingo.
TiU (or until) Sunday.
Pasaron hasta wiH,
Yoj hasta el Parqne Central.
I go as far aa the Central Park.
EBtadi6 el espailol hasU que lo
He studied Spanish till he learned it
aprendi6.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. iE8cribi6y. la carta para sa padre, j los cgercidos de la leccion de
espanol ? Hice aqneDo ; pero no he hecho esto.
2. iHene Y. papel para escribir nna carta? Si, sefior; pero tengo
que escribir ^tes mis ^jeroicios.
3. I Hizo el sastre mi casacaf La hizo.
4. I Qa6 ha hecho el zapatero ? Ha hecho nnas botas para Y. y nnoB
zapatOB para ManneL
5. 4 Para d6Dde parte Y. ? Parto para los Estados Unidos.
6. iQniere Y. escribir una carta por mi hermano? Si, sefior, ipara
qm6n es la carta? Es para Dn. Manuel.
7. iHabl6 Y. 6 sa padre por mi hermano ? Habl6 por 61 & mi padre
y 6 mi amigo.
8. iHabla Y. Men el francos ? Lo hablo mny bien, y hasta paso por
frances..
9. jPor cuAnto vendi6 Y. la casa? La vend! por ocho mil pesos.
10. I Por qu6 envia Y. ? Envio por mis libros.
11. I Vive Y. para comer ? No, sefior, como para vivir.
12. |March6 Y. ayer con el regimiento S^ptimo? Marcb6 hasta el
Parqne Oentral.
18. |Es Dn. Pedro escritor? No, sefior, Dn^ Pedro es escribano.
14. I De qn6 manera hace Y. eso ? Lo hago asL
15. |Qn6 hizo Y. ayei.? Estndi^ la leccion de espaOol, y hoy he
escrito los ejerdcios.
16. jTiene Y. qne trabijar mas qne yo? Tengo que escribir mas que
Y. ; pero no tengo qne trabigar mncho.
17. lEdciadondevan Yds.? Yamos h&cia la iglena.
18. jEn d6nde vive Y. ? Yivo en la Onarta avenida niimero, trescien-
tos treinta y ocho, entre las calles Yeinte y cinco y Yeinte y seis.
4
14 LESSON XIX.
19. 2 Para qu6 qniere V. mi libro ? Para leerlo.
20. 2 Qai6n pag6 la comida ? La pag&mos entre todos.
21. I Marohan bien estos bombres? Marcban may bien.
22. ^Por d6nde pasaron Yds. cuando fderon & la iglesia? Pasimos
por la calle Yeinte y tres.
23. {Es esa senora esoritoraf Si, sefior, y escribe may bien.
^. jDe qa6 pais es V. ? Soy de Espana.
25. ^De qa^ provincia? De Aragon.
26. I Pronancian bien el espallol en Aragon ? Lo prononcian may bien.
27. I Hablan bien el ingles en los Estados Unidos ? Lo bablan bien.
28. £ Qniere Y. venir 4 mi casa para comer con nosotros ? No, sefior,
porqne tengo qne ir & comer & casa de mi amigo.
EXERCISE.
1. How &r did tbe Seyenth regiment marcb yesterday ? Tbey Qt)
marched to the Central Park.
2. Did yoor sister set oat yesterday for Philadelphia? No, madam,
she did not set oat yesterday.
8. When does she start ? She starts to-day.
4. What does yoar servant look for ? He looks for my coosin^s i/em,)
letter.
5. What do yon da to learn Spanish ? I stady the lessons of my
Spanish grammar and read good writers.
6. To whom did yon speak last night at the concert ? I spoke to the
physician for Peter.
T. Who is that man who came to yoor hoase last night? He is my
brother^s servant.
8. Do yon speak Spanish well ? No, sir ; bat I speak Italian very
well, and I even pass for an Italian (italiano),
9. How did yoar ancle spend the day yesterday ? Stndying his les-
sons and writing to Madrid.
10. Will yonr ancle write a letter for (m favor of) Charles ? He will
write it,
11. Do the yoang ladies want to send for anything? They want to
send for the phyfltcian.
12. For what do they send for the physician? To speak for their
serviait (/em.).
18. Where does he live ? In Fifth avenae, between Twenty-fonrth
and Twenty-fifth streets.
14. Where do yon send? I send to the shoemaker's.
16. What do yon send there for? For some boots and shoes for
Emanael.
LESSON XX,
75
16. How do yon write your exerdses without ink? I write them with
apenciL
17. How did Louis write his exercise the other dajf He and his sis-
ter wrote it between them.
18. Have you sold joor old hat? I changed it for Peter's new one.
19. Will yon pass me that paper to write a letter for my brother?
This paper is not for letters.
20. What is it for? It is for my exercises.
21. Whose letter is that? This letter is for your mother.
22. Where did the singer go last year? He went to Aragon, a proT-
inoe in Spain.
23. What have yon sent lor? I have sent for nothing.
24. Will yon go for wine? I do not want wine, but bread and meat.
25. Do yon live to eat? No, sir, I eat to live.
26. Have yon read the newspapers to-day? N<^ sir; bnt I have
marched with my regiment.
27. Has the tdlor made my vest ? Yes, mr, he made it last week.
28. Will yon go to the pianist's for my piano? Ko; I have to stndy
my lessons.
29. Do yon write before studying? No; I stndy first and write after-
wards.
LESSON XX.
Salir.
6aliendo.
Salido.
Salgo.
Sales.
Sale.
SalimoB.
Salid:
Salen.
Sail
Saliste.
8ali6.
To go out, to leave.
Going out.
Gone out.
FBSSENT.
I go out
Thou goest out.
He goes out
We go out
Yon go out
They go out
FSBTEBTT DEFUdlTE.
I went out
Thou wentest out
He went out
76
I.KSS03r XX.
SafieroD.
Wa went ooL
Too went ooL
Tliej went out
Tanta
So, 80 mnch, as much.
Caanto.
How much.
Como.
As, how.
Presto.
8oon, speedily.
Pronto.
Promptly, quickly.
Temprano.
Early.
Tarde.
Late.
M^or.
Better.
Peor.
Worn.
Mayor.
Greater, larger, older.
Menor.
Smaller, younger.
Mqjor.
Better.
Peor.
Worse.
Prudente.
Prudent.
Imprndente.
Imprudent.
Pronto.
Prompt, quick, ready.
Presto.
Ready, prepared.
Callado.
Silent, taciturn.
Hablador.
Talkative.
limpio.
Oleanly, clean.
Vivo.
Lively, alive.
Situado.
Situated.
Cansodo.
Tiresome, tired.
M6jioo.
Mexico.
Fecha.
Date.
COMPOSITION.
^£s Alqjandro Ian prudente como 8U
bermano ?
No, sefior, Alqjandro ea muy impru-
dente. Es tan im|irudente eomo ha-
blador.
^Son Ids comerciantes mas rices que
los m^cos ?
Algunoa son nuu ricos; pero otros lo
son mhw9 quo los m^cos.
I Ss Nuera Tork mayor que Madrid ?
Madiid es menor que Nueva York,
Is Alexander as prudent as his brother?
No, sir, Alexander Is very imprudent
He is as imprudent as talkative.
Are merchants richer than physicians f
Some are richer; but others are less
rich than physiciaxis.
Is New York lai^feer than Madrid ?
Madrid is smaller than New York.
LBSSON XZ.
11
lQa6 cabaDo es fn^or^ el de Y. 6 d
mio?
£1 de Y. es mayor ; pero tApeor que el
loio.
i Tiene Y. mas ds cincaenta pesos f
No tengo mas que veinte y tres.
£1 tiene UaUo dinero como Y.
To estudio tanto como Y.; pero do
iqireiido tanto.
1^ habla espaSol tan bien eomo Y. ;
pero no lo escribe tan bien.
fl tiene iatUo euanto quiere.
Tengo tantM libros y tanto papel como
a
To escribo maa que Y.; pero Y. lee
nuu que JO.
£l habU m^nos que Y.
Which horse is the better, yours or
mine?
Tours is larger; but it is worse than
mine.
Have you more than fifty dollars ?
I have not more than twenty-three.
He has as much money as you.
I study as much as you ; but I do not
learn so much.
He speaks Spanish as well as you ; but
he does not write it as well.
He has as much as he wishes.
I have as many books and as much
paper as he.
I write more than you ; but you read
more than I.
He speaks less than you.
EXPLANATION.
DEOBEES OF OOMPASISON.
83. The adverbs tarUo and euanto lose the last syllable, tOj
before an adjective or anofher adverb.
84. The comparative of equality is formed by placing the
adverb ton, bo or as, before, and como, as, after the adjec-
tive; as,
Alejandro es tan prudente eomo su I Alexander is a» prudent a* his sister,
hermana. |
85. CuAN may be employed, if the comparative is followed
by an adjective instead of a noun ; as,
Es tan hablador cuan imprudente. | He is as talkative as imprudent
But como is more frequently used.
86. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing
the word mas^ more, before the adjective, and que^ than, after
it; as,
^ es ma» rico que Y. | He is richer than you.
87. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing
the word minos^ less, before, and que after ; as,
£l es mhio» rico que Y, | He is 26W rich than you.
88. Mayob, greater or larger ^ mbnob, smaller; mbjob, bet-
This house is Uirger or anaUer than
that one.
This horse is beUer or worse than mine.
78 LB880K XZ.
ter, and psob, worse, are already in the oomparativc degree,
and do not require mas or mkioa before them ; as,
Esta easa es mayor 6 motor qae esa.
Este caballo es m^r 6 peor que d
mia
89. Than^ after comparatives coming before numeral ad-
jectives, is also generally translated by cfe in the affirmative,
and qu^ in the negative ; as,
Tengo mas «k dncaenta llbroa. 1 I have more than filly books.
Ko teogo mas q^ Teinte pesos. | I have not more than twenty dollars.
90* Comparison may also take place with relation to nouns^
rerisy and adverbs; but its form is so similar to that laid down
for the adjectives that the learner will not require any other
explanation than the examples given in the Composition.
CONTERSATION AND VERSION.
1. 4 Sale y. taato oomo su hermano? No, sellor, mi hermano sale
mas quo yo.
2. iCudndo salimos nosotros9 Nosotros, salimos mny pronto.
8. 4Sali6 sa hermano temprano de casa? No, sellor, sali6 tarde.
4. iSalioron Yds. pronto del teatro? Sf, sellor, salimos mny pronto.
6. 4 Sale Y. presto 4 la calle? Si, sellor, salgo may presto.
6. jSalieron Yds. temprano de la iglesla? Salimos tardo.
7. iCa^ do estas dos gram&ticas es mejor? La que Y. tiene delante
es mqjor que la otra.
8. jEs malo este caballo? Es peor que el de Y.
9. j Es bnena la pluma de sa hermano de Y. ? Es mejor qae la mia y
peor que la de Y.
10. 4 Caiato dinero tiene Y. ? Tengo caarenta pesos.
11. I Co4ntos libros tiene sa hermana? Tiene tantos como sa prima.
12. i Ca&nto tiempo vivi6 Y. en Paris ? Yivi caatro afios.
13. i Es stt hermano mayor 6 monor que Y. ? Es mayor.
14. iQm6n de su familia do Y. habla mejor el ingl6s? Mi hermano
mcnor lo habla mejor quo todos.
15. 4D6ndo lo aprendi6? En L6ndre8.
16. I Cuiinto tiempo yiyi6 alld? Seis afios.
17. i Cnfindo vino de alld? Yino el afio pasado.
18. iOafil do Yds. dos estadia mas? £l estadia m^nos que yo ; pero
aprende mas.
LB8S0K XX. 79
19. i Cnil de sos hennanos de V. es mas pradente ? El mayor es mny
callado j pradente ; pero el menor es vivo 6 impradente.
20. ^Salieron Yds. del concierto 6ntes que noeotros? No, sellor, salf-
mos despnes.
21. I Ca&ndo 8ali6 sa amigo de Yds. de Nueva York ? Sall6 cl mee
pasado para Paris.
22. ^Ouando sale Y. para ilkdelfiaf No salgo hasta la semana que
viene.
23. ^H^ia d6nde vive sn amigo de Y. ? Yive hdcia la plaza.
24. 4 Por d6nde vino Y. de Pans ? Yine por Inglaterra.
25. I En d6Dde vive Y. ? En la Qointa avenida entre las calles Trcinta
J Treinta y una.
26. iQn6 caballo es mejor, el de Y. 6 el mio? El deY.es mayor;
pero no tan bneno como el mio.
27. ^Tiene Y. mas de cien pesos? Tengo mas de ciento.
28. I No tiene Y. mas que tres pesos? No, sellor, no tengo mas que
dos.
29. 4 Habla Y. espafiol mejor qne Laisa ? No, senor, lo hablo peor ;
pero lo escribo mejor que ella.
80. I Sali6 Y. ayer temprano ? Sali temprano ; pero Loy he salido
may tarde.
EXEBGISE.
1. Have you written your letter? Yes, sir, I Laye written it.
. 2. What is the date of it (what date has it) ? The first of this month.
8. Do yon {plural) go out mach? We go oat this year as mach as
last year.
4. Which is the better grammar, mine or yoars? Yoors is better
than mine, bat not so large.
6. Which of the two goes oat earlier, yoa or your coasin? I go oat
earlier than he.
6. Are merchants as rich as singers? Some singers arc richer than
merchants.
7. Is this horse not as lively as that one? That one is a little more
lively than this one.
8. Is Mexico as large as the United States ? No, miss, the latter are
mach larger than the former.
9. When do the masicians leave for Havana ? They leave next week
(the week that is coming).
10. When did yo^ take yoar moaic lesson? I took it the day before
yesterday, early.
80 LE9SON XX.
11. Did jonr brothers take theirs as early as you ? No, sir, they took
theirs very late.
12. Which of you two speaks Italian better? He q^aks it better
than I ; but I write it better than he.
18. Do you sing much every day ? I do not sing as much as last
month.
14. Does the notary write as well as the physician? The former
writes better than the latter.
16. Is that man not very tiresome? He is very talkative and very
tiresome.
16. Is Lewis as prudent as his uncle? lie is more prudent than he;
but not so taciturn.
17. Are you less tall (aUo) than Louisa? Ko, she is less tall than I.
18. Is your uncle, the merchant, as rich as your father ? No, sir, my
father is richer than he.
19. When do your cousins leave f»r Paris? They leave very soon.
20. Is your servant as cleanly as ours? Ours -is more cleanly than
yours, but not so talkative.
21. Have you any paper for writing? I have as much paper and as
much ink as I wish for.
22. Is Henry very prudent ? He is as imprudent as talkative.
23. Who goes to the bakery quicker than John? Nobody goes as
quick as he.
24. Have the merchants sent as much silver to France as to Spain?
They have sent more to France.
25. Did the shoemaker make the shoes as quickly as the tailor made
the coat ? The former mode the shoes quicker, because he worked more
than the latter.
28. Which works the later, the tailor or the baker? The latter does
not work so late as the former.
27. Are your father's books larger than ours ? Yours are smaller than
his.
28. Are those horses bad? They are worse than the others.
29. Will you go with your friend (Jem,) to the concert ? I will not go.
30. Why will you not go ? Because it is very late, and I have to play
on the piano.
81. Where did your mother learn Spanish ? She learned it here.
82. And does she speak it well? She does not speak it as well as she
writes it.
83. How much money have you ? I have not more than seven dollars.
84. Has your friend as much as you ? He has more than I ; he has
received more than two hundred dollars from Spain.
LSSSON XXI.
81
LESSON XXI.
Saber.
Sabiendo.
Sabido.
Sabes.
Sabe.
Sabemos.
Sabeis.
Saben.
Snpe.
Sapiste.
Supo.
Supimos.
Snpisteis.
Supieron.
Amar.
Viajar,
Trinidad (/em).
Sabio, sapientisuno.
HAbil, babilisimo.
Dif icil, dificilisimo.
Fdcil, facilisimo.
Ck>rto, cor^mo.
Alegre, alegrisiiiio.
Triste, tristlsimo.
Feliz, felicisimo.
Largo, larguismo.
Faerte, fortiaimo.
Nuevo, noviamo.
Kel, fidelisimo.
Alto, altf»mo.
4*
To know.
Knowing.
Known.
I know.
Thou knowest.
lie knows.
We know.
You know.
They know.
I knew.
Thon knewest.
He knew.
We knew.
Yon knew.
They knew.
To love.
To travel.
Trinity.
Wise, learned ; very, most or ex-
tremely wise.
Clever, skilful; very clever.
Difficult, very or most difficult
Easy ; very or most easy.
Short; very or most short.
Cheerful ; very or most cheerful.
Sad; very or most sad.
Happy ; very or most happy.
Long ; very or most long.
Strong ; very or most strong.
New ; very or most new.
Faithful; very or most faithfid.
Tall; very or most tall
82
LESSON XXI.
IBBBOXTLAS 00MPABATIVB8 Aim BUFEBLiiTXTES.
Baeno, m^or, 6ptimo.
Malo, peor, p^imo.
Grande, mayor, m&zuno.
Pequeno, menor, minimo.
Alto, superior, supremo.
B<go, inferior, Infimo,
Good, better, best
Bad, worse, worst
Great, greater, greatest
Small, smaller, smallest.
High, i ^ig^er, highest
Low,
( superior, supreme.
jiSor, f^^^^
COMPOSITION.
Es d maa sabio de mis discfpulos.
Esta sefioriU es la mat amabla
La mayor parte del r^imlento.
Za mayor parte, 6 lo8 mas^ de los solda-
dos.
La m^or casa de la calle.
Manuel, jcu&led son los profesorea que
saben mas en tu escuela ?
£1 profesor de aritm^tica sabe mucho,
el de frances, sabo mas; pero el
proresor do historia es el que mas
sabe.
i Es bneno este caballo ?
Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero el de
Y. es mejor, y el mio es el mcjor de
los tres.
i Es esta lecdon muy facil f
"Eb facilUima,
^Essu casa de y. tan alta como la mia ?
La mia es mas alta que la de V., y la
de sn hermano de Y. es la mas alta,
Ese Frances es muy cabaUero,
I Es alegre 6 triste sa amigo de Y. f
Es al^rfsimo ; pero cs muy nifia
iEsmuyj6vcn?
No, seHor, es ricja
He is the wisest of my pupils.
This young lady is the most amiable.
The greater part of the regiment
The greater part, or the most, of the
soldiers.
The best house in the street
Emanuel, which are the professors in
your school who know the most ?
The professor of arithmetic is learned,
the French professor is more learned ;
but the professor of history is tlie
most learned.
Is this horse good f
This horse is very good ; but yours is
better, and mine is the best of the
three.
Is this lesson very easy?
14 is most, or ve% easy.
Is your house as high as mine f
Mine is higher than yours, and your
brother's is the highest
That Frenchman is very gentlemanly.
Is your friend cheerful or sad ?
He is most cheerful; but he is very
childish.
Is he Tery young ?
No, sir, he is old.
EXPLANATION.
91. English superlatiyea ending in est^ or formed by tnost^
LESSON XXI. 83
are rendered by placing the definite article before the Spanish
comparative; as,
£1 mas sabio. I The wisest
La mas amable. | The most amiable.
92. Mostj or most ofj when followed by a noun (singular),
is translated by la mat/or parte ; as,
Ija mayor parte del r^^ento. | Host of the Fegiment
But if the noun is in the plural, most may also be translated by
maSy with the corresponding article ; as,
La mayor parte, 6 loe nuu^ de los I Host of the soldiers,
soldados. |
93. The preposition m, after the English superlative, is
translated by de in Spanish ; as,
La m^or casa de la calle. | The best house m the street
94. Those superlatives which in English are formed with
the aid of very^ most, &c., may in Spanish be formed either
with the help of mut/ before the adjective, or by adding to the
latter the termination isim^o ; as,
Mu]f h&bfl, or habilinmo. I Very clever.
Misy f&cO, or facUinmo. | Very, or most easy.
The termination isimo is, however, more expressive of the
positive superlative degree than is the adverb mut/.
95. Observe that adjectives ending in a vowel drop that
vowel on taking the termination isim^ ; as.
Short, very short
Cheerful, most cheerful
Sad, very sad.
Corto, cortistmo.
Alegre, alegristmo.
Triste, tristinmo.
96. There are other superlatives ending in irrimo; as,
C^lebre, celeb^mmo. I Celebrated, most celebrated.
Salubre, salub^rrtmo. | Salubrious, very salubrious.
But these forms are not the most used.
97. Adjectives ending in the following letters change them
before admitting the termination isimo :
Co becomes qu; as, rico, ri^visimo.
Go *' ^ ; a^ lu^) larTulshnp.
Ble " bil; as, amable, ama&fVlsimo.
Z ** c; as, felizy feliOBlmo.
84 LESSON XXI.
98. Snperlatives in iaimo irregularly formed :
Buenoy good, makes bonUimo^ very good.
Ihiertey strong, makes forUdmOy yery strong.
NuevOy new, makes novidmOj very new.
iSabiOy wise, makes sapienUsimo, rery wise.
Sacro, sacred, makes^a<Ta^iRmo, yery sacred,
i^, fedthful, makes fiddimnOy rety fakhfuL
99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives:
Bueno, mejor, ' 6pdmo.
Halo, peor, p^simo.
Grande, mayor, m&ximo.
Pequefio, menor, minimo.
Alto, sapeiioPy supremo.
B^'o, inferior, fnfimo.
Mucho, mas, lo mas.
Foco, m^nos, lo mdinos.
All these adjectives form also a superlative in Uimo^ accord-
ing to the rules already given ; as, malisimOj poguUimOy mu-
chUimo,
They admit also a comparative formed with mas or tnhnos ;
and a superlative with muy\ as,
M6no9 malo.
Los mas grandes.
Muy pequcfios.
Less bad.
The greatest
Very smaU.
100. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of
comparison; as,
Es mas caballero que tii.
£s muy hombre.
Este hombre es muy nifio.
He is more gentlemanly than thou.
He is very much of a man, or yery
manly.
This man is very childish.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Sapo y. su leccion 6ntes de ayer? La snpe muy bien, y la 96
todos los dios.
2. I Ama Y. & sn hermano ? Le amo.
8. 2 Le ama 4 Y. sn hermano? No lo s^.
4. A qui^n ama Y. ? Amo 4 mis papas.
6. I Ha vicgado Y. macho? He viigado mucho en Europa; pero he
vii\jado may poco en America.
LESSON XZI. 86
6. ^Sabe Y. el espaflol ? Muy pooo, sefiorita ; pero lo aprendo.
7. Y v., sefiorita, ^lo sabe Y. ? No, sefior, no lo s6, ni lo aprendo.
8. ^Porqu^ no estadia Y. el eepafidl? Porqae aprendo la mdsica, y
no tengo tiempo para estadiarlo.
9. ^Es nray bdbil sa profesor de mtiuoa de Y. ? Es habilisimo.
10. {Sabe Y. cantar ? No, sefiora, pero sS tocar nn pooo el piano.
11. 4 No sabe Y. tocar la guitarra ? No, seflora, tooo el violin.
12. ^Aprendo bien ese oaballero el espafiol? Estudia macho y lo
aprende may bien.
18. iQoi^n aprende mas pronto d espaliol, las sefioras 6 los oaballeros ?
Las sefioras aprenden mnoho mas pronto.
14. 4 Qoi^n es el mas sabio de sos diadpnlos de Y. ? La sefiorita N., es
la mas sabia de todos mis discipnlos.
15. g OnM de estos nifios es el m^'or ? El qne ama 4 sos padres, y es-
tadia mas sas lecciones, es el m^or.
16. 4Maich6 todo el regimiento 7^. por Broadway hasta el Parqne
Central ? No, sefior, pero la mayor parte de €L
17. ^Faeronal campo los soldadost .Los mas deles soldados fneron
alM. ,
18. I'Ea esta la mejor casa de la calle? No, sefior, esta casa es may
bnena ; pero la de Astor es mejor y la de Stewart es la mcjor de la
ciadad.
19. ^Sabe Y. qoi^n pas6 por aqni anocbe? No, sefior, pero se qoi^n
pas6 por la 5* avenida.
20. ^Es bneno este caballo? Este cabaUo es mny bneno ; pero el de
Y. es m^or, y el mio es el mejor de los tres.
21. lEs caballero ese Frances? Si, sefior, es may caballero.
22. ^Es ese hombre alegre 6 triste? Es mny alegre; pero es may
nifio.
23. iFa6 Y. al conderto la semana pasada ? Fai dntes de ayer.
24. I Qaiere Y. tocar el piano ? Qniero, pero no s6.
25. iHavenidosaamigode Y.? Havenido.
26. I Oa^ndo vino ? Yino 6ntes de ayer.
27. iOnindosale Y.9 Qoiero salir la semana qae viene.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know French ? No, sir, bat my brother knows it
2. Is that physician dever ? He is most clever.
8. Which is the most ekilfiil physician? Oars is the most skilfd in
the dty.
4. Is Miss Lonisa very amiable ? Yes, she is very amiable.
86 LBSSOK ZXI.
6. Alexander, wMch is the most learned teacher in yonr school ^
The En^ish teacher is learned, the teacher of arithmetic is more learned ;
hat the Italian teacher is the most learned of alL
6. Is your school-mistress cheerf ol, Louisa ? Tes, mamma, she is most
cheerful and very happy.
7. Did you know your lessons well yesterday? Yes, I knew them
very well, hetter than to-day^s, for I have not had time to study them.
8. Does your hrother know his every day? I do not know ; but he
works very little.
9. Is he taciturn ? No, ear, he is very talkative.
10. Whichis the largest church in New York? Trinity Church is the
largest and the handsomest in the city.
11. Whose is that handsome house there? It is my nucleus.
12. Is it not the finest in the street ? No ; Mr. Emanuers is the finest
in the dty.
18. Did the 12th Regiment go out to march yesterday? Not all, but
the greater part went out.
14. Did not all the soldiers march througli Fourteenth street last
Thursday? The most of them marched through Fourteenth street, but
not all.
15. Is your Spanish lesson for to-day difficult? Yes, it is the most
difficult (that) I have had this month.
16. Is your French lesson very difficult, Charles ? No, mr ; my French
lesson for to-day is the easiest one in the grammar.
17. Which is the best Spanish grammar? The Combined Spanish
Grammar is the best and the eaMest.
18. Is not your table very low for writing? Yes, it is very low; I
write better on a higher one.
19. WiD you take this small pen to write your exercise? No; I do
not write well with my own, which is very small, but larger than
yours.
20. Have you travelled much in Europe ? I have travelled very much
in America, but veiy little in Europe.
21. Which is the longest street in New York ? Broadway is the
longest in the United States.
22. Do you love your parents ? Yes, I love them very much.
28. Why does Margaret not love her cousin? She does not love him
because he is very taciturn.
24. Which of your pupils is the wisest ? Henry and Louisa are the
wisest of all my pupils.
25. Who reads the most newspapers in your house ? I do not knoyr ;
but papa reads a great many.
LB880N ZXII.
87
26. To whom have yoa pud the most money to-day ? I have paid
most to the tailor, because he has worked most for me.
27. Does not yoor washerwoman work very mnch ? Yes, she works
very mnch, bnt earns {ganar) Yerj little money.
28. Whose horse is the most lively, yours, Charles^ or mine? Charles'
is lively, mine is more lively, bnt yours is the liveliest of the three.
29. In what street do you live? I live in Twenty-eighth street
80. Is that a fine street? Yes, it is one of the finest streets np-town
(of the iq»per part (jH»rte alta) of the city).
LESSON XXII.
JEstar
Estoy.
Estiis.
£st4.
Estamos.
Estais.
Estan.
Prestar.
Hablando.
Estudiando.
Gomprando.
Bnscando.
Necesitando.
Aprendiendo.
Yendiendo.
Leyendo.
Bebiendo.
Oomiendo.
Escribiendo.
Rocibiendo.
Viviendo.
Resdiendo.
Teniendo.
Biendo.
Queriendo.
OKBUNDS.
To be (in a certiun place,
state or condition),
lam.
Thou art.
He is.
"We are.
You are.
They are*
To lend.
Speaking.
Studying.
Buying.
Looking for.
Needing, wanting, requiring.
Learning.
SelHng.
Beading.
Drinking.
Eating, dining.
Writing.
Receiving.
Living.
Re&iding.
Having, holding.
Being.
Wishing, desiring, loving.
88
LBSSON ZXII.
lievando.
£nviando.
TonuDido.
Pagando.
Pronnnciando.
Cantando.
Tocaado.
Haciendo.
Pasando.
Trab^jando.
Mandando.
Tendo.
Viniendo.
Estanda
Norte, sor, este, oeste.
Oarr jing, taking.
Sending.
Taking.
Paying.
Pronouncing.
Sin^g, chanting.
Touching, playing.
Doing, making.
Passing.
Working.
Sending, commanding.
Going,
Coming.
Being (m a certain state, &c.).
North, BouUi^ east, west
COMPOSITION.
/ ^ 8u casa de Y . grande ?
& grande ; pcro estd en mal estado.
I En que calle estd la casa de su henna-
no de V. ?
&id en la Cuarta avenida.
/iSbLuisabonita?
M may bonlta.
/ Eatd ella contenta ?
No eatd contenta, porque estd enferma.
/iSbenfermiza?
Lo «9 mucho.
i De qui^n 6$ esta casa f
^ de mi hermono.
JEstd muy bien Bitaada.
Esta carta es para Margarita.
Nueva York estd entre el rio del Norte
y el del Este.
El sefior Walker es pintor.
La mesa ess de madera.
Ektuve en casa hasta que Y.
Mi amigo estd para parUr.
JEstay sin comer.
i Qu6 estd Y. hadendo ?
ISstoy escribiendo.
Is your house large ?
It is large ; but it is in a bad state.
In what street is your brother^s house ?
It is in (the) Fourth Avenue.
Is Louisa pretty ?
She is very pretty.
Is she contented ?
She is not contented, because she is
uck.
Is she sickly f
She is very much so.
Whose house is this ?
It is my brother's.
It is very well situated.
This letter is for Margaret.
New York is between the North and
East rivers.
Mr. Walker is a painter
The table is of wood.
I was at home until you arrived.
My friend is about to set out.
I have not dined (I am without eating).
What are you doing ?
I am writing.
LBSSON XXII.
80
i De qiu4n et Y. amado ?
Soif anuido de mis ninos.
Kanuel et bueno.
Manuel «s<tf malo.
/ &td Pedro cansado ?
£std cansado j et cansado.
i Porqu^ esld tan callado Al^andro f
Porqae «• callado.
By whom are you lored f
I am loTed by mj children.
Emanuel is good.
Emanuel is ilL
Is Peter tired?
He is tired, and he is tiresome.
Why is Alexander so silent ?
Because he is taciturn.
EXPLANATION.
101. Skb and Estak. — These two verbs have in English but
one equivalent — to be ; but their respective significations and
uses are so materially different as to constitute one of the chief
difficulties of the Spanish language. By careful observation,
however, of the following simple rule, the learner will, we are
assured, be enabled to overcome that difficulty, and know ex-
actly when to use the one and when the other of these two
verbs.
102. Whenever we wish to express tchat persons or things
arej and their mode of being, in an absolute manner, bbb is the
verb to be employed ; but if we desire to express the aUUe or
condition of persons or things, and the mode of that ^ate or
condition in a relative manner, then estab must be used.
The following examples will serve to render the application
of this rule more clear :
Ist. Esta casa et grande.
2d. EsU casa efftllimpia.
3d. Esta casa esfcl en Broadway.
4th. Loisa a bonita.
6th. Lmaa a feliz.
6th. Loisa edd oontenta.
7th. Luisa mtd enferma.
8th. Loisa et enfermiza.
This house is large.
This house ta clean.
This house U in Broadway.
Louisa if pretty.
Louisa it happy.
Louisa f « content
Louisa u sick.
Louisa tf sickly.
In the first example we use seb to express nofua kind of a
house the one referred to w — ». e. large ; in the second, estab,
inasmuch as we desire to express Aoto, or in what state the
house M, f . e. in a clean state ; estab is also employed in the
third, sixth and seventh examples, the object being to make
known respectively where the house is^ and in wha^ state or
90
LSSSON ZZII.
condition Louisa is or finds herself ; while in the fourth, fifth
and eighth seb again comes into play, seeing we wish to design
nate Louisa^s mode of being in an absolute manner.
From the above general rule may be deduced the following
observations :
Ist. That SEE must be used whenever we wish to express
possession, use, purpose or destination ; to point out the nation-
ality, profession or calling of persons ; the place of production
of things or the materials of wWch they are composed ; the
simple fact of existence, the occurrence of events ; and, finally,
as an auxiliary in forming the passive voice of verbs.
2d. That bstab is to be employed in speaking of situation
or position, place, state or condition, in making the progressive
form in ndo (corresponding to the English ing) of other verbs ;
and, lastly, to govern verbs in the infinitive mood with the aid
of a preposition, or past participles without such aid.
N. B. — ^The verb estab can never be used with the present
participles of ir and venir.
Examples of the uses of sbb and estab :
La casaca es de mi hennano.
The coat is my brother^B.
La carta es para Maigarita.
The letter U for Margaret
El sefior Walker a pintor.
Mr. Walker is a painter.
£ste vino ea de Espa&a.
This wine is from Spain.
La mesa m de madera.
TheUbleisofwood.
Has ado prudente en hacerlo asL
Thou liast been pradent in so doing.
.Hoy es la celebracion.
The celebracion is to-day.
/Sim las dlez.
It is ten o'clock.
Fui el caso como yo escribf & Y.
The case was as I wrote to you.
^y amado.
I am loved.
BSTAB.
Esta casa e$td bien sitoadit
This house is well situated.
Nuera'Tork e$Ui entre el no del
Norte y el del Este.
New Tork is between the North and
East riyers.
Esiuve en casa hasta qte lleg6.
I was at home until he arrived.
EI esid escribiendo.
He is writing.
Mi amigo esid para partlr.
My friend is about to set out
JSitoy por no hacerlo.
I am inclined not to do it
EsUxmM sin comer.
We have not dined (or eaten).
Esta carta estd fechada en Madrid.
This letter is dated from Madrid.
LESSON XZII.
91
N. B. — ^As it fieqnently occurs that, in perfect accordance
with the rules of grammar, the same sentence may be construed
with either seb or estab, though conveying entirely different
ideas, it is essential to inquire thoroughly into the respective
value of these two verbs, in order to avoid the confusion which
must necessarily arise from their misapplication. The impor-
tant nature of this remark may be seen from the following
examples :
WTTH BBS.
Manuel e$ bueno.
Emiimel is good.
Joan es malo.
John u bad (or wicked).
Pedro es cansado.
Peter is tiiesome.
Joana «9 Tiva.
Jane Is lively.
Alqandro et callado.
Alexander ia t^dtuni.
Bate nifio et limpio.
• This child is cleanly.
Esta naraija ei agria.
This is a soar orange (i. e. of the eour
species).
What is said in the course of the present lesson relative
to SEE and estab, being all that is requisite to enable the
student to determine which of the two is to be used in any
ordinary case, his attention shaU not again be called to them
until we come to treat of their idiomatic uses.
WITH ESTikB.
Manuel eatd bneno.
Emanuel is welL
Juan e$id malo.
John is sick.
Pedro etld cansado.
Peter is tired.
Juana etldyvnL
Jane is alive;
Alejandro e$id callada
Alexander is silent
Este nifio ettd limpio.
This child is dean.
Esta narai\ja etid agria*
This orange is sour (t. e, unripe).
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qa6 est4 haciendo el mnebacho ? Est^ estadiando su leccion.
2. ^Ha estadiado Y. la snja? La estudi^ ajer.
3. I De qui6n es Y . amado ? Soy amado de mis nifios.
4. ^Estd Y. escribiendo bos cjercicios? No, sefior, estoy escribiendo
una carta.
5. |£st4 Margarita cansada? Margarita no estd cansada; pero es
cansada.
6. I Porqu^ est& Pedro tan callado ? Porqne es callado.
7. {Para qm6n es esta carta 9 £s para Y.
92 LESSON XXII.
8. |£nd6nd6est4atiiadaNneTaYork? £std aitnaida outre el no del
Norte y el del Este.
9. |£8 Y. Espafiol? No, seflor, soy Americano.
10. i£s ese caballero abogado ? No, seflor, es m^co.
11. I C6mo est4 Alejandro ? Estd baeno.
12. 2 £^ Alejandro buen machacho ? Es baeno.
13. jEstuYO y. ayer en mi casa? Estnve alii basta que sn padre de
V. vino.
14. ^De qn6 es este tintero? Es de madera.
15. i£s grande su jardin de Y. ? Es grandisimo ; pero est4 en mal
estado.
16. ^En qa6 calle esl& sa casa de Y. ? Estd en la Goa^ ayenida.
17. iEshermosalacasadesaamigode Y.? Es bermoslsima.
18. |Es Luisa feliz? Lnisa es mny feliz; pero no est& contenta, por
que no vino Y. & verla.
19. {Es Y. enfermizo ? No, sefior ; pero estoy enfermo.
20. |De qni^n es aqnella casa tan alta? Es de nn amigo mio ; pero
qoiere venderla porqne est& mal sitoada en esta calle tan fea.
21. I Cn^do parte Y. ? No 86, qniero partir boy, porqne tengo mncbo
que bacer.
22. iParti6 su amigo de Y. ayer? No, sefior, ba partido boy.
23. jFnd Y. & la iglesia el domingo pasado ? Si, sefior, voy & la iglesia
todos los donHngos, cnando no estoy enfermo.
24. jYive sa amigo de Y. en el campo? No, sefior, reside en la
ciadad.
25. I Qa6 bace en la ciadad ? Trabija de abogado.
26. iQa6 bace Y. ? Yo vendo y compro : soy oomerciante.
27. iPas6 Y. por Paris, coando fa6 k Madrid ? Si, sefior, y por otras
maobas dadades de Franoia y Espafia.
28. I Yi^ja Y. macbo? He vii^ado mncbo ; pero no viiyo mas.
29. I Yii\j6 Y. en M^jioo? Si, sefior, estave alii el afio pasado.
80. |Es bonitopais? El pais es bermosisimo.
EXCERGISE.
1. Wbere is yoor boose sitaated? In Eleventb street
2. Is it very large ? No, sir, it is not as large as my ancle's.
8. Wbicb of tbe tbree languages, Englisb, French or Spanisb, is tbe
richest? Tbe Spanish is mnoh richer than tbe other two.
4. Do yon speak Spanish? No, madam ; bat I am learning it
5. Do yoa and your aster take a lesson to-day? No, oar teacher is
not coming (does not come) to-day, be is mck.
LESSOXT XXII. 93
6. What lesson are you at (in). We are at the twenty-second, one
of the most difficult in the grammar.
7. Is Louis very tacitam? he speaks rery little. No, sir, he is not
tadtmm ; bnt he is silent to-day, becaose he is nnwelL
8. Why is Henry so cheerful to-day ? He is cheerM because he has
received letters from his father and mother.
9. Is he a good boy? He is a very good boy; he is studying his
Italian lesson.
10. How is your friend to-day? He is much better than yesterday.
11. Where is that wine from that Charles is drinking? It is from Spain.
12. Has your father been prudent in selling his horse? He has been
most imprudent in selling it.
13. Whom do you love ? I love my fiither and mother, and I am loved
by them.
14. Where is that letter from? It ia (comes) horn 'Pana.
15. Have you (plural) dined to-day? No^ sir, we have hot dined;
our servant is very ill.
16. What do you do every day fo pass the time ? Sometimes I sing
and play on the piano, and at otiiers I read the newspapers and go out
to walk.
17. What does Mr. Emanuel do ? He is a merchant
18. For whom is that letter that Louisa is writing? It is for her
cousin (fern,).
19. Is Alexander a tiresome boy? No, madam, but he went to walk
very early, and he is tired.
20. Was Louis at your house yesterday? Yes, sir, he was there until
my unde came.
21. How is your xmcle to-day? He is very well ; he is about to set
out for Paris.
22. Is Henry tired ? No ; but he is very tiresome.
23. Whose book is that? It is my friend's; but he wants to sell it,
because it is very badly written.
24. How much does he want for it ? He wants five dollars and a half.
25. Is it in French ? No, sir, it is in Spanish.
26. When do you (plural) leave for Europe ? We leave Terj soon.
27. Have you a garden at your house ? Yes, sir, I have a very fine
garden.
28. Is it very large ? It is very large.
29. What is your friend doing in Paris ? He is studying law (for a
lawyer). .
80. And you, what do you do in Philadelphia? I work as a notary.
31. Whom is this letter from? It is from the pianist, and for you.
M
LX8SOV XXIII.
LESSON XXIII.
FTTUBS BDfFIJL
I^t Cimjuyation.
HiU^tt^
I shall speak.
Habl.«r^
Thou wilt speak.
HaU-ari.
He win speak. •
Habl-arteooL
We shall speak.
Hd>Ui^ia.
Ton win speak.
HaU-tfin.
They win speak.
Swmd Omfvd^ion,
Aprend-erl
Aprend-eHis.
Thou wilt learn.
Aprend-eriL
He win learn.
Aprend-er6mo8.
We shaU learn.
Aprend-er^is.
Yon wiU learn.
Aprend-erim.
They win learn.
7A»n? Conjugation.
Escrib-ird.
I Shan write.
£scrib-irfi0.
Thou wUt write.
Escrib-irl
He wUl write.
Escrib-ii^moa.
We shaU write.
Escrib-ii^is.
Yon win write.
Ecrib-idoL
They win write.
Desear.
To desire.
Praoticar.
To practise.
Bailar.
To dance.
Principiar.
To commence, to begi
Acabar.
To finish.
Medio.
~ Half.
Proximo.
Next
£nt6noo8.
Then.
Anoche.
Last night.
Antes do anool^e.
The night before last
HaAana.
To-morrow.
LESSON XXIII.
05
Pasado mafiana.
La TTIUffftTlfL-
SL
I
Gusto. Taste, pleasure.
Deseo. Desire, miud.
Kegocios. Business, occupa-.
tian.
Oficio. Office.
Minuto. ' Ifinnte.
Seg^nndo. Second. -
Vals. Waltz.
Idioma. Language.
The day after to-morrow.
The morning.
If. '
Noche. Night
Gracias. (to give) Thanks.
Familia. Family.
Pr&ctica. Practice.
Teoria. Theory.
Hora. Hour.
Polca. Polka.
Lengua. Tongue, language.
COMPOSITION.
^£Btad]ar& Y. mafiana sa leodon de es-
pafiol?
Si, seSor, la estudiard mafiana por la
i A qu6 hora prindpiAri Y . ?
Frinctpiar6 k las tres de la wmfiflna^
Sefiorita, i qm6re Y. bailar mi vals ?
Gracias, caballero, no 86 bailar vals.
jBailar& Y. mia polca ?
Si, sefior, con macho gosto.
Hablo mal el espafiol, porqne no lo
practico.
Y. necesita practicar macho para apren-
der ana lengoa.
Practicar^ en Espafia, porque ir6 alll
may pronto.
^Qa6 dias toma Y. sos leodones de
piano?
Las tomo los liines y los Tidmes, & las
once de la mafiana.
4 A qa6 hora tomar& Y. las lecciones
defrancee.
Las tomar^ & las diez.
i Qa6 hora es ?
Efllaana.
WiD you stady yoor Spanish lesson to-
morrow?
Tes, sir, I will stady it tomorrow
morning.
At what hoar will yoa conmience ?
I shall commence at three o'clock in
the morning.
Will yoa (dance a) waltz, IGss ?
Thank yoa, sir, I do not know how to
waltz.
Will yoa dance a polka ?
Yes, sir, with great pleasure.
I speak Spanish badly, because I do
not practise it
Ton require to practise a great deal in
order to learn a language.
I will practise in Spain, because I shall
go there very soon.
On what days do you take yoor piano
lessons?
I take them on Mondays and Fridays,
at 11 o'clock in the morning.
At what hour wiH you take your French
lessons?
I BhaQ take them at 10 (o'clock).
What o'clock is it?
It is one (o'clock).
96
LBSSON XXIII.
Son Us once j euaiio.
Son laa tres m6no8 dies nunntoe.
Maflana ir^ al campo, y paaado mafiar
na tendr6 el gosto de pasar el dia
conV.
Oracias ; entdnces 8er6 muy feliz.
I Bailar6m08 en sa caaa de Y. ?
Si, aeftor, bailar^mos, cantar^moa, toca-
rdmos y practtcar^mos d espafiol
toda la noche.
Muy bien, may bien ; ent6nce8 sei^moB
mas qne felices, serdmoB feUdomos.
i En donde pas6 Y. ayer la noche ?
La pas^ con mis amigos los aefiores
Martinez y sn familta.
i Ca4nto tiempo estnyd Y. en sa casa ?
Fill 4 las siete de la noche y sail & los
OQoey media.
It is a qnarter-past eleren.
It is ten minutes to three.
I shall go to the comitry to-morrow,
and shall have the pleasure of spend-
' ing the day after to-morrow with you.
Thank you ; then I shall be very happy.
Shall we dance at your house ?
Tea, sir, we shall dance, sing, play and
practise Spanish all the evening (the
whole night).
Yery well, very well ; then we shall be
more *than happy; we shall be most
happy.
Where ^d you spend the evening
yesterday?
I spent it with my friends, Mr. and Mrs.
Mardnez and (their) family.
How long were you at theur house ?
I went at seven in the evening and left
(went out) at half past eleven o^dock.
EXPLANATION.
103. FuTUBB SIMPLE. — ^This tense affirms what is yet to be
or to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as,
8erS comerciante. ^ I I MU be a merchant
Joan estudiard mallana. | John will study to-morrow.
This tense is also used as imperative, as will be seen when
that mood is introduced.
104. The DEFiNiTB ABTicLE is to be used before numerals
indicating the hour of the day, and the word o^dock is never
translated into Spanish ; as,
A las tres do la tarde. | At three oVlock in (of) the afternoon.
106. NocHB (evening or night), commences at sundown;
so that evening and night both are translated into Spanish by
nooAe.
106. The conjunction si, when conditional, does not gov-
ern the subjunctive in Spanish as it does in English, unless the
latter be followed by should, as will be seen in the proper
place ; in all other oases, si is followed by the present of the
indicative; as,
Si V. AVmepapel, iescribiri? | If you have paper, wiU you write?
LE8SOK XXIII. 97
CONVERSATION JlND VEBSION.
1. iCn&ndo prmcipiar& Y. & escribir sos ejeroicios? Prindpiar^
2, I A qn6 hora acabard Y. ? Acabar6 4 las diez j media.
8. Alejandro, ^qti^ quieres ser, abogado 6 esoritor? No 8er6 ni abo-
gado ni escritor, ser6 comerciante.
4. Sefiorita, iqniere Y. bailar una polca? Graciafi, caballero, no
bailar^, porqne estoy muy cansada.
5. 2 Bailard Y. la pr6zima ? Si, aefior, eon mncho gosto.
6. iFrscticaik Y. el piano boy? No, sefior, boy no tengo Uempo;
pero praoticar6 mafiana por la mafiana.
7. iQa6 hark Y. mafiana? Mafiana por la mafiana escribir6 mis
ejercicios j praoticar6 el espafiol con mi hermano.
8. 2 Qu6 dias toma Y. leccion de piano ? Los Itines y vi^mesL
9. I A qn6 bora tomard Y. su leccion mafiana ? A las once y cnarto.
10. I Yendr& Y. 4 mi c^isa en el campo ? Ir6 pasado mafiana y tendrd
el gosto de pasar el dia con Y.
11. 2 Bailar6mo6 en su casa de Y. ? Si, sefior, bailar^mos, cantarSmos
y practicar^mos el espafiol toda la nocbe.
12. I En d6nde pasard Y. mafiana la noobe ? La pasar6 con nus ami-
gos los sefiores Martinez y sa fsunilia.
13. I A qn^ bora ir&n Yds. alii ? Ir6mos & las siete de la nocbe.
14. I Hasta qa6 bora estardn Yds ? Hasta la nna y media.
15. lEstard Y. mafiana por la mafiana en sa cnarto ? £star6 basta las
nneve y diez minptos.
16. I Es triste su bermano de Y. ? No, sefiora, no es triste ; pero est&
triste.
17. {Es Y. feliz ? Soy felicisimo ; pero no estoy oontento esta tarde.
18. jEs Y. mayor qne su bermano ? No, sefiora, soy el menor de toda
lafamilia.
19. iQoi^n es el mayor? Joan es el mayor.
20. I Sale Y. de casa temprano? Salgo tempranisimo.
21. 2 A qn6 bora? Salgo & las ocbo y media.
22. iStihd Y. ayer tan temprano? No, sefior, ayer sali mas tarde;
pero boy be salido temprano.
28. 2 A qn6 bora saldrdY. mafiana? Mafiana 8aldr6 & la nna de la tarde.
24. I Para qm6n escribe Y. nna carta? Escribo al abogado, por el
pobre Jnan, qne lo necesita para nn negoclo.
25. jPartird Y. mafiana para la Habana ? No, sefior, no partir6 basta
la semana pr6xima.
26. {Es este caballo nmyfaerte? Es fortfsimo; pero cse que est4
ahi es mas fnerte y el que est& alii al otro lado es el mas faerte.
6
08 I.BS80K XXIII.
EXERCISE.
1. When shall yon commenoe to stadj nrnsic ? I desire to commence
next month.
2. Do you know how to dance ? I do not dance yery well ; bnt I am
going to take lessons soon.
5. Do yoQ study in the morning or in the evening ? I stndy in the
morning.
4. At what o^dock do yon take yonr lessons ? At a quarter to three
In the afternoon {tofds).
6. Does yoor teacher come so late ? Yes^ he has a great many pupils
this year.
6. Tnn yon dance a waltz, Mias? Thank yon, sir, I danced so much
the night before last that I am tired.
7. Then it will be better to talk. I stiall talk with mnch pleasure.
8l TThen shall your conan write lis exercise? .He shall write it to-
morrow morning.
9. At what time do yon receive your newspapers ? I receive them
ereiy day at eight o^dock in the morning.
10. Mr. Louis, will yon come and dine at my house ? I shall be very
happy to go with yoa.
11. How did yoa spend the evening at your friend's? Very well; his
wife (iody) is most anuable.
12. Has she not travelled in Europe? No, sir; but they spoke last
night of travelling very soon.
18. Is thdr family large ? No, they have no children.
14. Does not your friend speak Spanish very well ? Yes, sir, ho some-
times even passes for a Spaniard.
15. Did you practise much with him? No ; his cousin speaks trench
very well, and so we spoke that language all the evening.
16. Where shall you spend this evening? I do not know; but the
day after to-morrow we shall go to your house.
17. Thank you I then I shall be more than happy; I shall be most
happy.
18. How many se^nds make a minute ? Sixty.
19. How many minutes make an hour ? Sixty minutes.
20. And how many hours has a day ? A day has twenty-four hours,
a week seven days, a month four weeks, and a year twdve months.
21. Peter, what oVlock is it ? It is half-past two.
22. Then I am going to take my lesson : will you come? No, thank
you ; I wish to read this morning's paper.
23. Until what o'dock shall you be ? I shall finish at one.
LESSOK XXIV*
09
24. Peter! Sir?
25. Has the tailor finished my vest?' Yes, esip, here he is with the
vest and 'the coat
26. "When will the shoemaker make my hoots? He will make them
for next Tuesday.
27. Have'jrou any husiness in Philadelphia? Yes, sir, lam writing
the history of Louis XVI., for a gentleman of that city.
28. Mr. Henry, are you happy? Yes, sir, thank you, I am very
happy ; hut I am not very contented this eyening.
29. Why are you not contented? Because my father has not written
to me this week.
LESSON XXIV.
OOMPOUWD PITTUBB.
Hahr^ escrito.
I shall have
)
Hahr^ escrito.
Thou wilt have
> written.
Hahri eecrito.
He will have
i
Hahr^mos escrito.
We shall have
)
Hahr^is escrito.
You will have
y written.
Hahrdn escrito.
They will have
)
Coser.
To sew.
Lavar.
To wash.
Barrer.
'
To sweep.
Pasear.
To walk (take i
iwalk).
Dedal.
Thimhle.
Agiya.
Needle.
Hilo.
Thread.
Primavera.
Spring.
Verano.
Summer.
Accion.
Action.
Inviemo.
Wmter.
Nacion.
Nation.
Otollo.
Autumn (FaU).
Afeotacion.
Affectation.
Enero.
January.
Navegacion.
Navigation.
Fehrero.
Fehruary,
Agitaoion.
Agitation.
Marzo.
March.
Aprohacion.
Approbation.
Ahril.
April.
AceptacioD.
AcceptatioD.
Mayo.
May.
Atraccion.
Attraction.
Jnnio.
June.
Conversacion.
Conversation.
Julio.
July.
Direccion.
Direction.
Agofito.
August.
Gircunspeccion.
Circumspection.
100
LBSBON XXIY.
Setiembre.
September.
Clflsificadaii.
CUsdficalioiL
Oetobre.
October.
ColeockiB.
CcdlectioiL
Xoriembre.
November.
ComMcadoB.
Comlnnfllion.
Diciembre.
December.
Gompandon.
Oomparison.
Compofiicioii.
Compoation.
ReputadoB.
Eeputation.
COMPOSITION.
Habr6 escrito mi lecdon 4nte8 de ir &
€«5a d«l profesor.
Habc^ Mftbado k ks diet.
El abogado acaba de bablar.
To acabo de estudiar mi leccioD.
La laTandera habci acabado de lavar
4 lascoatro.
' i A cuAntos estamos f
Estamos iseia.
i Qui dia del mes es hOj f
£s el primero.
i Qui fecba ticne eaa carta f
£1 primero de Enero de mil ochodentos
aesenta y seis.
i En qu6 alio fu6 Y. & H^jlco ?
Fu( en Setiembre de mil oehodentos
cincuenta y dos.
i Ir& y. este yerano & Europa ?
No, sefior, ird en el inyiemo.
i Paseari V. mucbo esta primayera ?
No, sc&or, trabiyar^ macho.
1 Bhall have written my lesson before
going to the professor^s.
I shall have finished at ten o'clock.
The lawyer has jost spoken.
I have just studied my lesson.
The washerwoman will have finished
washing at four o^clock.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is to-day ?
It is the first
What is the date of that letter f
January 1st, 1866.
In what year did you go to Mexico ?
I went in September, 1862.
Will you go to Europe tlus simimer?
No, sir, I shall go in the winter.
Will you walk much this spring ?
No, sir, I shall work a great deal.
EXPLANATION.
107. The COMPOUND futukb affirms something future that
will have taken place before or at the time of some other future
action or event expressed in the sentence ; and is composed of
the simple future of the verb habere to have, and the past parti-
ciple of another verb ; as,
nabr6 escrito mi ejercicio totes de
ir & casa del profesor. •
Habrd acabado 4 las dlez.
I will have written my exercise before
going to the professor^s.
I will have finished at ten o^dock.
108. AcABAB DB is employed before an infinitive in the
LE8SOK ZXIY. 101
sense of to have jmtj and the infinitive is translated in English
as a past participle ; as,
Acaba de hablar. I He Km Jtut spoken.
Acabo de estudiar. | I have just studied.
N. B. — ^In order to facilitate the acquisition of words, we
shall give now and then a few rules, with the help of which the
learner will be enabled to convert several thousand English
words into Spanish. And, although we have proposed not to
introduce many new words or elements at one time, these
observations will enable the pupil to learn a greater number of
words with little or no difficulty at all, fix^m the striking re-
semblance that those words bear to the English ones.
109. The greater part of English nouns ending in tion are
rendered into Spanish by changing the letter t into c ; as, appro-
bation, aprobacion. It is to be observed that the only conso-
nants that can be doubled in Spanish are e, n and r. All nouns
of the above termination are feminine,
110. The days of the month are all counted in Spanish by
the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, except the first
day; and there are several forms of asking the day of the
month; e. g.y
i Qii6 dia del mes tenemoB ' ) I
i Qa6 <Ua es hoy ? \ What day of the month is it ?
4 A cu&ntOB estamos del mes ? ) |
There is no preference between these ; but the answer must
be made in the same form as the question ; as.
jQa6 dia tenemos?
Tenemos el sds.
^ A cu^ntos estamos ?
Estamos 4 dos.
i Qa6 dia es hoy ?
£b el primero.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is it?
It is the second.
What day of the month is to^y?
It is the first
CX)NVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Habr4 Y. acabado de escribir su Icccion k las diez y media ? ITo,
b6; pero la habrd acabado ^ntes de ir a casa del profesor.
2. ^Ha hablado aquel abogado? No, sefior, acaba de hablar este.
8. ^Ha hablado bien? May bien, pero con afectacion.
102 LXBSOK ZXIY.
4. iHarA y. una bnena composioiott para la leccion pr6ziznaf SS,
se&or, si tengo tiempo, la har^
5. j Lava bien sn layandera de Y. ? Lava mnj bien.
6. I A d6nde envia Y. sos ninos ? Los envio & pasear con la criada.
7. lAdonde? A la plaza de MadisoD.
a. I Esta oorca de sa casa de Y. ? Est4 mny'cerca.
9. I Barri6 el criado ayer mi cuarto ? No, sefior, no lo barri6 ayer ;
pero lo ha barrido boy.
10. iLobarrer&mafiana? Lo babr4 barrido totes de las nueve.
11. Macbacboi |eBt& el sastre en la sastreria? No, sefior, acaba de
salir.
1^ 4 A qo^ bora prindpiaron Yds. 4 bailar? Principi^mos & las diez
de la nocbe.
IS. I De^'A Y. practicar el ingl^ ? Si, sefior, si tengo tiempo prind-
plaK^ pasado mafiana.
14. 2 I>5ndo C5t4 sa amigo ? Est& vi^ando por Franda.
15. I Ama sn benuana de Y. mndio 4 sos li\jo3? Si, sefior, los ama
mncbisimo.
16. jSaldr^Y.mny pronto para Enropa? Qoiero salir mafiana.
17. |Sabe Y. bailar el valst No, sefior, pero b6 bailar d rigodon y
lapolka.
18. ^De d6nde yienen Yds.? Yenimos de Franda, y yamos para
FUaddfia.
19. 4 Quiere Y. salir 4 pasear ? Mny bien, ir^mos al Parqne Central
20. i Qni^n lay6 estos pafindost Estan mny mal lavados. Sa lavan-
dera de Y. los lay6.
21. 4D6ndepas6 Y. dyerano? Lo pas^ en d campo. ^^dinyiemo?
£n la coidad.
22. I CuMes son los meses mas alegres del afio? Los de la primayera.
23. I Sabe Y. la direccion de la casa de sn bermano do Y. ? Si, se^or,
calle Catorce, ntimero dento yeinte y dnoo.
24. 4 A qn4 bora comen Yds. ? Gomemos 4 las tres de la tarde.
25. I Qu4 bora tiene Y. ? Tengo las dos y yeinte
26. I A qn4 bora salieron sns bermanas para d parque ? Salieron 4 las
sds y media de ia mafiana.
27. j Y 4 qa4 bora yolvieron ? A las once m4nos cnarto.
28. i Buenos diasi— Bnenos dias.— 4£st4 Y. bueno ? May baeno, grar
cias. I T sa familia de Y. ? May bnena, gracias.
29. iBaila Y. la poloa? No, sefior, estoy prindpiando 4 aprenderla.
LESSON ZZIT. 103
EXERCISE.
1. When shall yotir uncle have finished his letter? He shall have it
finished at eight o'clock.
2. When shall yon have jonr letter written ? I shall have it written
before going to the professor's.
8. When shall the notary make the conveyance (writing) ? He has just
made it.
4. Shall your servant have swept my room before the lesson hour to-
morrow ? Yes, sir, she shall have it swept at six o'clock.
5. What day of the month is it? It is the thirteenth.
6. . Does yonr washerwoman come to wash in yonr house f She does
not, but she washes very well.
7. How many lessons do those gentlemen take every month ? They
take four every week ; that makes sixteen every month.
8. Which are the best months for walking ? The three months of
spring, and the three of antomn (or fall).
9. "Where are yon coming (do yon come) trom ? I am coming from
walking.
10. Win yon give me a needle and thread and a thimble to sew?
Here is the needle ; I am going to look for the thread and thimble.
11. In what year did yonr sister Margaret go to England? She went
in Jane, 1865.
12. What is the date of that letter? Madrid, 7th July, 1866.
13. Shall yon go to Enrope this summer ? No, madam, I shall nvt go
before next spring.
14. Is December a good month for travelling? No, it is one of the
worst in the year.
15. How did you (plural) spend the day yesterday? We walked in
the Central Park.
16. Did yon walk the whole day ? No,* we walked until twelve o'clock,
and then we read and played on the piano.
17. Did yon not pass the evening at Mr. Martinez ? No, we did not
go ont an Qsx all) the evening, Margaret was a little dck.
18. Do you know which are the longest months ? Yes ; they are Jan-
uary, March, May, July, Augni^ October and December.
19. And which are the shortest? April, June, September and No-
vember.
20. But what do you do with February ? February is the shortest of
all; it has but twenty-eight days.
21. Shall yon walk much this spring? No, miss, I shall work a great
deal
104
LESSOK XXY.
22. THien shall the tailor sew my vest? He shall sew it to-morrow
eTeiung*
23. Has the lawyer not spoken ? He has just spoken.
24. Until what hour did he speak? Until half-past one.
25. Did he speak in Spanish? No, he spoke in French to-day; bat
to-morrow he ahaJl speak in Spanish.
26. Do yon not wish to practise Italian ? Tea, flir, and I shall prac-
tise the d^y after to-moirow, if I have time.
27. U yoor teacher comes to^y, will yon take a lesson ? I shall
take it if he comes.
2Sl Does he pronounce weQ? He pronounces yery well, but with
scane affectation.
29, How many Spanish words do you know that end in eion t I know
TWT many.
80. Which are they t Conversation, approbation, agitation, complica-
tioQ« classification, intention, desertion, circumspection, nation, naviga-
tion, and very many others.
LESSON XXV.
^ \/9tMCtT»
I To know, to be acquainted with.
FBBSKST Cn>ICATIVS.
COQOICO.
I know.
ConoccsL
Thou knowesL
Conoce.
He knows.
Conocemos.
We know.
Coneceia.
Ton know.
Conocen.
They know.
FBKISBIT
CJonocL
I knew.
Cbnociste.
Thou knewest
Conoci6.
He knew.
Conocimos.
We knew.
Conocisteis.
You knew.
Conocieron.
They knew.
LE880K XXY.
105
3
PUTUBE
SQCFLB.
Conoccr6.
I shall know.
Conocer^.
Thou wilt know.
Conocer4.
He will know.
Conocer^moa.
We shall know.
Conocer^is.
You will know.
Conocer^n.
They will know.
PBETEEIT DTDEFraiTE.
He Gonocido.
1
I have known.
COMPOTTNI]
» FUTUBB.
Habr^ conocido.
__\
I shall have known.
Qozar,
To epjojr.
Prometer.
To promise.
Una vez.
Once.
Dos veces.
Twice.
Alto.
High, loud.
Biyo.
Low.
Siempre.
Always.
Nunca.
Never.
Jam^.
Never.
Ya.
Already, yet {interrogatively).
Ta (toith a negathe).
No longer.
Aun.
Still, yet, even.
Todavia.
StiD, yet, even.
A menndo.
Often.
Demasiado.
Too, too much.
Bastanie.
Enough, pretty.
Frio. Cold (the).
VergHenza. Shame.
Calor. Heat
Razon. Reason.
Miedo. Fear.
Sed. ^ Thu^t.
Sueflo. Sleep.
Ldstima. Rty.
Hambre. Hunger.
Salud. Health.
Valor. Courage, worth,
value.
Moda. Fashion.
Maestro. Master, teacher.
COMPO
Maestra. Mistress (school).
SITION.
i CJonoce V. & eae hombre ?
Do you know that man ?
No lo conozoo ; pero b6 quiei
i le 00-
I do not know hun; but I know wl
noce.
knows him.
5*
106
LESSON XXY.
i Forqnd no aprende V. sua lecciones f
Conozco que he hecho mal en no
aprenderlas; pero prometo saber-
las para mafiana.
I Sabe y. frances ?
No, sefior, pero roy k aprendcrlo;
i conoce Y. un buen maestro ?
i Estadia Y. aun (todavfa) el espafiol ?
Ya no lo estudio.
jSabe Y. hablarloja?
No, todavia.
i Ha prindpiado ya sa hennano de V.
soa lecciones f
iTa ha principiado ; pero no las apren-
der& jamis (nunca), porque no esta-
dia bastante.
i Cudntas yeces ha estado Y. este mes
en el teatro f
He estado una vez ; pero el mes pasa-
do estuve tres veces.
i Tiene Y. miedo de sn maestro ?
No tengo miedo de 61 ; pero tengo ver-
guenza de 61.
^ De qui6n tiene V. l&stima f
Tengo l&stima de ese pobre hombre.
I flene V. calor 6 frio ?
No tengo ni calor nl frio ; tengo ham-
brey sed.
i Tiene razon el abogado f
El abogado no tiene razon.
i Tiene 61 razon alguna vez f
Tiene razon algonas yeces, pero no
siempre.
i Hard V. eao otra vez ?
No lo har6 jam&s (nnnca).
i Amar& Y. & su amlgo ?
Le amar6 por siempre Jam&s.
i Ha leido Y. jam&s ese libro ?
Nunca jam&s lo har6.
i Tiene su madrc de Y. buena salud ?
Sf, seiior, goza de muy buena salud.
i Tiene Y. hambre 6 sed ?
No tengo ni hambre ni sed, tengo
suefio.
Why do you not learn your lessons ?
I know that I have done wrong in not
* learning them ; but I promise to
know them for to-morrow.
Do you know French P
No, sir, but I am going to learn it ; do
you know a good teacher ?
Do you still study Danish ?
I study it no longer.
Do you know how to speak it already P
Not yet
Has your brother commenced his les*
sons yet?
He has (already) conmienced ; but he
will never learn them, for he does
not study enough.
How many times have you been in the
theatre this month P
I have been once; but last month I
was there three times.
Are you afraid of your master ?
I am not afraid of him; but I am
ashamed before him.
On whom do you take pity f
I take pity on that poor man.
Are you warm or cold ?
I am neither warm nor cold; I am
hungry and thirsty.
Is the lawyer right ?
The lawyer is not right
Is he right sometimes ?
He is right sometimes, but not always.
Will you do that again (another time) ?
I will never do it
WiU you love your friend f
I shall love him always (for ever).
Have you ever read that book ?
I shall never do it
Is your mother in good health (has
your mother good health)?
Tes, sir, she enjoys very good health.
Are you hungry or thirsty ?
I am neither hungry nor thirsty, I anx
sleepy.
LJB880H ZZY. 107
EXPLANATION.
111. Sabeb, to know, and conoceb, to be acquainted with.
— ^It mast be observed, in order not to confound these two
verbs, that %abet is employed to signify the act of knowing,
being informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of
something; whereas eonocer is nsed to express the fact of
being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distinguish
persons or things ; as,
I SabeY. qxaaieonoeekeete hombre f | Do yoa know who knows that man ?
112. AuN, TA, ToDAviA. — ^The adverb aun indicates that
the subject of the sentence continues in the same state as be-
fore; quite the reverse with the adverb ya, which always
signifies discovUifmance of a former state (expressed or under-
stood) ; e. ^.,
I Escribe V. ann t 1 Do yon write yet t
No eacribo ya. 1 1 do not write any longer.
Todavia, yet, still, is synonimous with aun ; as,
£st4 trabajando (odavia (or aim). | He is still working.
Once, twice, &c, are rendered in Spanish by una vez^ doa
vece8y &c.
MiedOy valaf^ vergHenza, Idstimay tiempOy take the preposi-
tion de after them ; as,
Tengo miedo de salir. 1 1 am afraid to go out
Tengo verpiaua de ese hombre. | I am ashamed of that man.
113. When in English the verb to be precedes the adjec-
tives hungry J thirsty^ afraid, cuhamedj rights ajrong, warm, cold,
skq>y, it is changed into the Spanish verb tener, and the adjec-
tive into a corresponding substantive ; as,
i Hcne V. miedo ?
i Tiene Y . sed ?
i Tiene Y. calor.
^TleneY. frio?
Are yon afraid t
Are you thirsty t
Are yon warm t
Are yon cold ?
114. JamIs and iruNCA may be used indiscriminately, or
one for the otheir ; aSy
J<md9 (or mmco) le he conoddo. ] I have nerer been acquainted with him.
108 I.S6BOH XXY.
Sometimes the j are lued together, to give more energy to
the expression ; as,
Kunea jamiM lo hard. | Xerer, no nerer, ehall I do sa
But jamds has the peculiarity of being used after the words
por sienypre and para sienyffre^ for ever; where, instead of being
a negative, it affirms, meaning demaUy ; as,
Le vmax^ por nen^re jamdL \ I will lore him forerer.
Sometimes it is used alone interrogatively, meaning €ver\ as^
;Ha letdo Y. jamiM ese libro? | Hare yoa ever read that book ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. 2l^6nde conoci6 Y. & sa amigo? Le oonod en Paris el inviemo
pasado.
2. I Sabe Y. qnidn conoce k ese hombre ? Mi ^|dre le conoce mny
bien.
S. jCu^doconocer^&SDheiTDanode Y. ? Enclotofioleconocer4Y.
4. I Ha conoddo Y. en L6ndres d ese caballero ? Si, sefior, le conoci
alli el ano pasado.
5. 1 06mo esta sn hijo de Y. ? Mai ; no goza de bnena salad.
6. I Bail6 Y. mncho en el baile de anoche ? Bi, sefior, mnohisimo.
7. I Qnien es ese caballero ? £s on escritor de gran repntadon.
8. I Tienen macha aceptacion sos obras ? Tieneu muchisima.
9. I Sabe Y. lo qne ban prometido sos amigas de Y. ? Ko lo sS. — ^Han
prometido estudiar sns leociones.
10. j Yendrd Y. mafiana k comer con nosotros? No, sefior, be prome-
tido comer con mis amigos los Alemanes.
11. jHabla ya espafiol su prime de Y.? No lo habla ami, y no lo
bablard Jamds (nmica), porque no estadia bastante.
12. 2 Barri6 Y. mi caarto ? No, sefior, pero prometo barrerlo mafiana
temprano.
18. I Cndntas veces promoti6 Y. buscar mi sombrero ? Jamds lo pro>
metL
14. 2 No desea Y. ya ir 4 su pals? Lo deseo mncbisimo.
15. I Sale Y. ya & pasear todos losdias ? No salgo sino algunas veces.
16. i Llev6 Y. ya mi carta al correo ? Todavia no la he Uevado.
17. i No ha estado Y. jamds en Paris ? No, sefior, jamds he estado.
18. iNo ha leido V. jamds la bistoria de los Estados Unidos? Si, la
he leido nna vez.
19. 4 Habla bien el abogado ? Habla bien, pero muy bcgo.
20. I Oomprende Y. ya el espafiol ? Si hablan alto, y despacio, si, sefior.
liBSSOX XXY. 109
21. I Tlene Y. bastante que hacer ? Tengo demasiado.
22. I Cuintos alios tiene V. ? Tengo veinle y uno,
23. I Gadndo Yi6 Y. por tiltima vez 4 bu familia ? El dia seis de Se-
tiembre del afio de mil ochocientos cincnenta j cinco.
24. I Gadndo conoci6 Y. al pianista ? Le conoci ayer por primera vez.
25. ^Han salido sns hennanas para el campo? Todavk no, pero aal-
dran may pronto.
26. 2Qa6 hace sa padre de Yds.? Est4 gozando del bnen tiempo en
cl campo.
27. I Qu6 tiene bu niflo de Y. ? Tiene fno y snefio.
28. iTienen ellos hambre? No, sellor, tienen sed.
29. I Tiene Y. valor para hac^lo? Si, sefior, pero tengo vergHenza.
80. 2 No tiene Y. Mstima de esa miger? Si, senor, tengo liistima de
jella, porque no tiene buena salad.
81. I Tiene sneno sa madre de Y. ? No, sefior, pero est4 may cansada.
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon know that man? Yes, sir, that gentleman is my uncle.
2. Are yon still writing? No, I am no longer writing,
8. Has Gharles come from the country yet ? No, be has not come yet.
4. Have you {plural) ever read the History of Givilization by Gnizot?
No, but we shall read it next spring.
6. Are you not ashamed of not having read the History of the
United States? I am not ashamed, because I am too young to read his-
tory.
6. When shall you commence to read it? I shall commence next
year.
7. Yery well ; it is a useful study {estudw),
8. Does your aunt e^joy good health ? Yes, sir, thank you, she en-
joys very good health.
9. Are you cold, madam ? No, thank you, I wish to go out a minute,
because I am very warm in this room.
10. Is itlen o'clock yet? No, it is but a quarter past eight.
11. Who is that gentleman to whom your cousin spoke last night at
the concert ? I do not know him.
12. And that gentleman who came this morning to your house, who
is he? He is a Spanish writer who enjoys a high (great) reputation.
18. Has he written many works? He has already written many
books, and he is going to write a history of Spain.
14. Do you knaw Sir Walter Scott's works ? Yes, I have read them all.
15. Are they not much esteemed in Europe (have they not much esti-
mation) ? Yes, very much.
110 LJBSSON ZZY.
16. When-^did your brother become acquainted with his Spanish
friend ? Last year, in London.
17. Are you sleepy, young ladies? Yes, we are very tired, thirsty
and sleepy (tener sed y Bumo),
18. Will you take a little wine ? No, thank you, we never take wine.
19. Does your mother know Emanud^s address (direction) ? Yes, here
it is in this letter.
20. WiQ you read it ? With much pleasure. Emanuel Martinez, Esq.
(don), 113 Broadway. A thousand thanks.
21. Did your cousin's {fem,) Mends commence their lessons the
other day ? Yes, they commenced, and are much pleased (content) with
them.
22. Why does the lawyer speak so low ? I do not know.
28. Does he not speak as low as his brother loud? He speaks low
from (by) aflfectation.
24. Which of your servants (fern.) sews the best? None of them
sews.
25. How many conjugations has the Spanish language? Three regu-
lar {regular) cei^ugations, and several irregular (irregular) ones.
26. Have you ever been in Philadelphia? I have never been there
yet ; but 1 shall go next year.
27. Did your father write the letter for Peter yesterday ? No, but he
promised to write it the day after to-morrow.
28. Has your shoemaker enough to do ? Yes, sir, he has too much
to do.
29. Will you always love your brothers and sisters?* Yes, I shall
love them forever.
80. Do you not pity that man ? I do pity him, for he has nothing to
do.
81. Have you money enough to buy a house? Yes, sir, I have
enough.
LESSON XXVI.
Dor. I To fi^ve.
SBBSENT CTBIOATIVS.
Doy, das, da. 1 1 give, thou givest, he gives.
Damos, dais, dan. I We g^ve, yon give, they ^ve.
LE8SON XXYI.
Ill
PBSTEBIT DSFCmX.
Di, diste, di6. 1 1 gave, thou gaveet^ ho gave.
Dimos, disteis, dieron. I We gave, you gave, they gave.
Dar^ dar^ dar^
Dar^moB, dar^is, dar&o.
FUTUBB BIMPIB.
I shall give, thou wflt give, he will
give.
We shall give, you shall give, they
shall give.
FBETESrr INDSFEnS.
He dado, has dado, etc 1 1 have given, thou hast j^ven, &c.
Hahr^ dado,
OOHFOUin)
3tC 1
I shall have given, d
Ganar
1
To gain, earn, win.
SiTig. 27bm.
1st Olj.
^ Olj.
To.
Me. )
AmL )
I.
Me, or to me.
Phir. Norn,
lat Ohj.
%d Ohj.
Kosotros.
Nos. ?
Anofitros. J
We.
Us, or to us.
Sing, Ifom.
iMt Olj,
2d 01^,
T6. J
A tL
Thou.
Thee, or to thee.
Plur, N<m.^
l9t Olj.
U Olj.
Yosotros.
Os.
A vosotros.
Ye, you.
Ye, you, or to you.
Sing, mm.
Ut Olj.
2d Olj,
£1.
Le.
Aa J
He.
Him, or to him.
Plur, Xom.
lit Olj,
2d Olj.
Ellos.
Los, les. 1
A ellos. J
They.
Them, to them.
Sing, Nam.
Ut Olj,
28 Olj.
Ella.
La,le.
Aella.
She.
Her, to her.
112
LESSON zxyi.
Plur. Nom. Ellas.
\»t Olj, Lasy les.
2d Obj. Aellas.
Sing, and Plur,
lit Obj, Be.
2d Obj. AsL
^Neuter Farm,
mm, EDo.
Ut Ob}, Lo.
2d Olj. Aello.
They.
Them, to them.
' Himself, herself itself; them-
selyes; or to himself, to her-
self to itself; to. themsdves.
It
It
To it
COMPOSITION.
Peseo
^Conoce Y. aqaellas sefiofast
conocerlas.
Conoci^ndolas las amarft V.
I Me promcte Y. lleTarme 4 su casa f
Doj & y. mi palabra.
i Qu^ le di6 & V. mi primo f
Quiso darme imas florea ; poro 70 no
quise redbirlas.
I Quieres venir comnigo al teatro ?
Ko ir6 contigo, porquo mi padre quicre
Uevarme consigo.
i Son estas flores para if ?
No son para mi ; son para V,
Yo te neceaito.
£Ua nos habl6 en d teatro.
tl me amar& con el Uempo.
Noaotros le hablamoa en el ooncierto.
Yo le eacribf una carta.
Ella les di6 un libra.
Do you know those ladies ? I desire to
know them.
On knowing them you will love them.
Do you pramlse me to take me to their
house?
I win give you my word.
What did my cousin give you ?
He wanted to give me some flowers ; but
I would not receive them.
Wilt thou come with me to the theatre ?
I will not go with thee, because my
&ther wants to take me with him.
Are these flowers for thee ?
They are not for me, they are for yoo.
I want thee.
She spoke to us m the theatre.
He will love me in time.
We spoke to him at the concert
I wrote him a letter.
She gave them a book.
EXPLANATION.
116. SimjEor or Nominative. — ^To what has already been
Baid, in Lesson X, relative to pronouns as subjects or nominative
cases to verbs, we shall here simply add, that they may at all
times precede their verbs, unless the latter be in the imperative
mood, or be used interrogatively ; examples :
Yo estudio.
Tu escribes.
Vengan «22o«.
i Lee ella t
I study.
Thou writest
Let them come.
Does she read.
LESSON XXVI. 113
116. Pebsonal Pbonoxtns. — ^In SpaDish there is a pecu-
liarity to be observed amongst the personal pronouns : that is,
that they have two objective cases ; one of which can never
be used with prepositions, and the other never, without one.
117. The Objective Case, when not preceded by a prepo-
sition, is aflSxed to infinitives, imperatives and gerunds ; as,
Amianoale,
Amkndolos,
HabUndo^ amado.
CbmpnUs algo.
Habi6ndo2o« hallado.
To lore her.
Let us love him.
LoYing them.
Having loved her.
Buy them something.
Having found them.
118. In some tenses the verb drops the final letter in the
first and second persons plural, when they are followed by nos
or o^ ; as,
AmdmonM instead of amdmomos. I We loved each other.
Amaos instead of amadoB, \ Love each other.
In the first case, the reason of this is perhaps to soften the
pronunciation of the first word ; and in the second the d is
dropped, in order that the imperative be not confounded with
the past participle. Nevertheless, we say idos^ go, and not
io8 ; but this is the only exception to the rule.
119. The objective case may sometimes elegantly follow
the verb, but rarely when the sentence does not begin by the
verb; as,
Llev6m6 al teatro. I He took me to the theatre.
120. When one verb governs another in the infinitive
mood, the objective- case teferring to the second verb may be
placed either before the -governing verb, or after the governed
one; as,
• Quiero Uevarle, or le quiero llevar. | I wish to take him.
121. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the
second objective case ; as,
Para mi. For me.
ffin H. Without thee.
H&da elioa. Towards them.
114 LBS60K XXTI.
122. Mf, xf, sf, when preceded by can, take go after them,
and are joined to the prepoBition ; as.
Gonmtgo.
Ck>D^go.
Gonstjga
With me.
With thee.
With him, her, them, it "
123. Entbb is nsed with the nominative case of the first
person singalar, in this expression,
BiUre td j 70. | Between thee and me ;
bat in every other instance it governs the second objective
case; as,
BrUre sf. I Between themselves.
JSnire nofiotros. j Between us.
124. The second objective case is always used after com-
paratives; as,
Te quiero mas qne d SL | I love thee better than hun.
126. When in English the objective case of the first or
second person is the object of the verb, or of the preposition
to^ expressed or understood, we use the first case ; as;
To te necesito.
Ella no8 habl6.
"EL me amar&.
I want thee.
She spoke to us.
He will love me.
126. In Lesson X. we explained the objective case of the
third person when it is the object of the English verb ; bnt
if the third person in English be governed by the preposition
tOy expressed or understood, we render it by fo, fej?, for both
genders; as,
Nosotros le habUunos.
To le escribi.
Ella &» did.
We spoke to him.
I wrote to her.
She gave theoL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Qa6 me dar4 V. ? Le dar6 4Y. las gracias.
2. I Qa6 les di6 Y. d ens nifios ? Les di veinte centavos.
8. gMe dards algo per mi trabi^o? Algo te dar6 si k) haces bien y
sin6, nada.
Ii^SSOK ZXYI. 115
4. I Qn6 OS dieron en casa de in prinio ? Nos dieron chocolate.
6. iQa6 le has prometido & ta prima? Bailar hoy con ella.
6. iC6mo ser^mos mas felloes? Amindonos los onos 4 los otros.
7. i Gn^do vendrd 61 con nosotros ? Y endr4 mafiana temprano.
8. ^Ga&ndo 8aldr4 Y. conmigo k paseo? Tendr6 ese gusto pasado
malfana.
9. I Qni^n irk conmigo al teatro esta noche ? Yo ir^ contigo.
10. ^D6nde hablaste 4 mis amigos ? Les habl6 en el Parqne CentraL
11. ^Les 1076 Y. mi carta? No, les lei la de sa hermana de Y.
12. ^Me envid Y..I08 libros? No, senor, los envie 6 sa hermano
deY.
18. i06mo snpo Y. de sus amigos? Escribi^ndoles.
14. iC6mo conooi6 Y. & su amiga? Bailando con ella en casa de su
hermano.
15. i Qu6 le prometi6 Y. 4 su prima ? Le prometi Bevarla & la
opera.
16. 4N0S hablaron ellos alguna vez? Nos hablaron una 6 dos veces
en el paseo.
17. iPorqu6 no les habl6 Y. ? Porque no los conozco bien.
18. ^Qu6 le han escrito 4 Y. sus amigos ? Que vendr4n 4 hablamos.
19. iQuieres salir conmigo 4 paseo ? Si, saldr^ contigo.
20. jCuando iremos 4 casa de tus amigos? Ir^mos hoy, porqne ellos
tendr4n mucho gusto en conocerte.
21. ^Quiere Y. pasarme el pan ? Con mucho gusto. — Gracias.
22. 4Qu6 le prometiste 4 tu prima? Le prometi ir 4 su casa manana
y llevarle un pa&uelo de seda.
28. I Gu4ndo le habl6 Y. ? Le habl6 anoche en casa de su madre.
24. iQuiere Y. venir 4 pasear? Mejor ser4 estamos aquL
25. i A qu6 Tienen Yds. ? Yenimos 4 hablarle 4 Y.
26. ^Gnando irdmos al campo con nuestros amigos? Ir6mos mafiana.
27. iG6mo les gan6 4 Y. la lavandera tanto dinero? Lavandonos los
Testidos y trabtgando mucho.
28. iOa4ntas veces 4 la semana habla Y. con sus anugos? Nos ha-
blamos todos los dias.
29. i Yendr4 hoy su primo de Y. 4 comer con nosotras? SS, porque
qmere conocerlas 4 Yds.
80. J Le di6 Y. los bnenos dias 4 su prima? Le di los buenos dias ayer
en la plaza y le habl6 de Y.
81. Le doy 4 Y. las gracias. jTieno buena salud ahora? Bi, seflora,
e8t4 muy buena.
82. i Le di6 4 Y. los peri6dico8 ? No, seflora, pero prometi6 mandar-
los mafiana.
116 LBSSON XXVI.
EXERCISE.
1. WLat was* that you gave to your friend last night at the theatre?
I gave him the second volume of Mr. Eomanos' new work.
2. Why do you not give him the first volume? I have already given
it to my cousin.
3. Did you not promise last week to ^ve me those two volumes ?
Yes ; and you shall have them the day after to-morrow.
4. Will you come with me to the country in the summer? I will go
if you set oulTon the first of July.
6. Will you and your uncle come with us to walk this afternoon ?
This evening we have to go to the concert
6. When will you go out with us? I do not know; hut I think (that)
to-morrow {creo que maflana),
7. Have you heard (saiido) from your father this week? No; hut
we heard from our brother John last week.
8. How often has he written to you 'from Boston? We have received
seven or eight letters from him.
9. How much did that singer make (gain) in New York? Which
one ? I do not know any singers.
10. Do you not know the singer who spent last week at your uncle's
in the country? Yes; but it was in PhCadelphia that he sang, not in
New York.
11. Are you cold? No, sir; but I am hungry and thirsty.
12. When wUl you take Emanuel to see your children ? I shall take him
to-morrow.— They wiU have much pleasure in making his acquaintance.
13. How many languages does that gentleman speak? He only speaks
his own ; but his cousin speaks five.
14. Which are they' He speaks French, German, Spanish, English,
and Italian.
16. How did he learn so many languages? By studying the grammar
of each one of them (coda una de ellaa), reading the works of the best
writers, and practising with the natives (natural), .
16. Does he write all those languages as well as he speaks them ? He
writes them better than he speaks them.
17. Did I not see you (plural) speaking to the notory yesterday in the
park ? No, it was the day before yesterday.
18. What has he done in that affair (negocio) of your brother's? He
has done nothmg ,et ; and as he has to leave town (la ciudad) this after-
noon, he will do nothing all this week.
19. Who is the young lady who danced so well last night at your
house? Do you not know her? she is my cousin.
♦ Sec the conjugation of the verb Sbb, at the end of the book.
LBSSOSr XZYII. 117
20. When did jon see onr friend Mr. Perez ? I saw him the other day
in Twenty-sixth street, and we talked for more than two hours about
(de) theatres and concerts.
21. I saw him the night before last ; but we did not talk about thea-
tres and concerts. In whose house did you see him? At Mr. de la Rosa'&
23. At what o^cIock did you go there? I went at a quarter to eight,
and left at half-past ten.
23. Did* yon see many Mexicans there? I only saw one: that Mexi-
can lawyer who has just written a history of his country.
24. Does he leave soon for Europe ? He wishes to set out next week.
25. Did John write to his father the day before yesterday ? Tes, and
he has heard (saber) since that he set out last week for France.
26. Has your sister read the books yet which she received from Louisa
last week? Yes; and she wishes to read them again (ptra ves^.
27. I shall see her this evening; and if you wish Qt) I shall take them
to her.
28. Thank you. Have you much to do now? No, I never have much
to do in summer.
29. Is Peter tured ? No ; but he is the most tiresome boy I know.
LESSON XXVII.
Decir. \ To say, to teD.
PBB6SNT OF INDICATIVE.
Digo, dices, dice, decimos, de- 1 I say, or tell, &c.
eSs, dicen. I
FBETEBIT DEFINITE.
Dye, dyiste, dyo, dyimos, di- I I said, or told, &o.
jisteiS) dyeron. I
FTITUBE SEMFLB.
Dir6, dirfis, dir4, dir^mos, di- I I shall or will say, or tell, &c.
r6is, dirdn. I
PRETESIT INDEFINITE.
He dicho, has dicho, etc. I I have said, or told, &c.
COMPOUND FDTUKE.
Habr6 dicho, etc * | I shall or will have said, or
told, &c.
118
LEBSOK ZXYII.
ExouBar.
Toezcuae.
Perdonar.
To pardon.
Oreer.
To believe, to think.
Ofender.
To offend.
Llamar.
To call, to knock.
Ensefiar.
To teach, to show.
Ahora.
~ Now.
Mismo (adf>erh).
Just, very.
Mismo.
Same, self.
Neceaario.
Necessary.
Preciso.
Precise, needfuL
Begnlar.
Regular, middling.
Parte. Despatch.
Parte. Part
Estudio. Stady.
Falta. Fault, mistake.
Humor. Humor, disposition.
Esperanza. Hope.
Bugeto. A person,
subject, topic.
Puerta. Door.
Asonto. Subject, business, matter.
Noticia. News.
Ramillete. Bouquet
COMPOSITION.
Le compr6 un ramillete, y Be lo maixd6.
Les escribir^ ties cartas, y «e las man-
dar6.
Ella 96 lo ha prometido.
i Qu6 e8t4 y . haciendo con ese libro ?
Estoy eusefiandose^o & KanueL
i Le IdBte la carta ?
Ta M la lei.
Ella me lo d\jo.
Yo »e lo di
Hi madre me ama d mi,
Tu amigo te busca d H.
Yo ha di las notidas d elloe,
Yo 86 las dar6 dVJ
A Hie amo, or te amo & tf.
i Qa6 U ha dicho d V, 6u hermano f
No me ha dicho nada.
/XtfdQeyo esod VJ
Y.Bomelo dijo.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent it to
her.
I shall write them three letters, and
send them to them.
She has promised it to her.
What are you doing with that book ?
I am showing it to Emanuel.
Did you read the letter to him ?
I did. (I read it to him already.)
She told it to me.
I gave it to him.
My mother loves me.
Thy friend looks for thee.
I told them the news.
I will tell them to you.
I love thee.
What has your brother told you f
He has told me nothing.
Did I tell you that?
You did not tell it to me.
LBSSOK ZXYII.
119
/&&>hadicho61dr./
Mt h ba dicho.
i Qmere Y . dedr eso & sos amigos f
Quiero decfiseio d ettos.
' I Qoi^ llama k la paerta ?
Soy 70 mismo.
i 1^6116 buen humor su amigo de V. /
Si, sefior, Ueae buen humor coando le
▼an bien loB negodoa.
4 Gana ese sugetomucho en ese asaniof
El no gana pan sf mismo ; pero gana
paraotroB.
Tengo esperanza de que me perdonar&.
Haa he told it to yon f
He has told it to me.
WiU you teU your friends that ?
I will tell it to them.
Who knocks at the door f
It is I (myself).
Has your friend a good disposition ?
Yes, sir, he is good humored when busi-
ness goes well with him.
DoesHhat man make (or earn) much in
that business ?
He does not make for himself; Xfui he
makes for others.
I have hopes he will pardon me.
EXPLANATION.
127. OBjEcnvB PBONOXTKS, cotUirmed. — The third person
being governed by to in English, either expressed or under-
stood, is in Spanish rendered by se^ if the object of the verb
be a pronoun in the third person ; as,
Le oompT6 un ranullete, y m lo mand6.
Les escsribir^ tres cartas, y te
mandlar^.
Ml criado ae lo dar&.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent it to
her.
I shall write thera three letters, and
send them to them.
My servant will give it to him.
This is done for the sake of euphony, changing the first of
the two pronouns, whatever its full form may be (fe, la or fc«),
into «e. This rule applies to all pronouns, after as well as be-
fore the verb ; as,
EUa M 2o ha prometido (instead of
dUiUlo).
PromeHindouio (instead of promo-
tUndolelo).
i Le leiste la carta ?
Yaaelalei, instead o£ yalelalet
She has promised it to her.
Promising it to him.
Did you read the letter to him ?
I read it to turn (already).
128. When two^r^^ objective cases occur in the sentence,
one of whioh is the object of the verb, and the other is gov-
erned, in English, by the preposition tOy either expressed or
understood, the object of the verb is to be placed last ; as,
Ella roe lo dijo. I She told ii to me.
To se fo di 1 1 gaye U to him.
120 LESSON XXVII.
129. Bat if the object of the verb be the reflective pro-
noun, it mast be placed first ; as,
Lu^o 86 me exciis6. | He excused himself immediately to me.
130. Both the objective cases belonging to the same per-
son are sometimes used together in Spanish, in order to give
more energy to the expression, and then the second must al-
ways be preceded by d ; as,
10 madre me ama d mi,
Tu amigo ie bosca d ii.
£l se lo dgo d dlas.
To /ef di las noticias d dlw,
YoM las dax6d Vdt,f
My mother loves me.
Thy fiiend seeks thee.
He told it to them.
I told them the news.
I will tdl them to you.
131. The second objective case of any of the persons
should never be used in the sentence, preceded by d, as the
ob^ct of the verb, without being accompanied by the first
(except after comparatives) ; therefore, such expressions as
these: d U quiero^ d t% amo^ are incorrect, and should be thus:
d Ule quieroj dtite amo. The place of the second objective
case in sentences of this kind is restricted to the following rules :
1st. If the first objective case precede the verb, the second
may be placed either before the first, or after the verb ; as,
A Ute amo, or te amo dlL | I love thee.
2d. If the first objective case follows the verb, the second
must be placed after the first ; as,
Am&ndoZff d H, \ Loving him.
132. It may appear that the personal pronouns ^, la^ lOj
l08 and las might be confounded with the articles e/, la, lo, las,
laSy having the same form ; but they are easily distinguished,
since the articles must always be occompanied by and precede
nouns ; as, el tiempo, la salud, los soldadoSy las obras, lo hueno ;
while, on the other hand, the personal pronouns are only em-
ployed with verbs, and placed before or after them ; as,
La tUvarony or UevdronJa, | They carried li,
Lo hucaroHj or biucdronlo, > . | They looked for it
133. Whenever emphasis is required to be laid on any
LBSSOK ZXYII. 121
noun or pronoun, the adjective miamo is used in Spanish for
that purpose ; as,
El no ama & nadie mas qne & d He lovefl no one bat himselC
This rery man will do it.
I will do it myselC
Este mumo hombre lo harA,
To fntunp lo har6.
GONYEBSATION AJSD VERSION.
1. {Le dyo Y. 680 al ingl^? Se lo d^e.
2. |Se lo d\jo y. en inglte 6 en espafiol? Se lo dye en ingl^
8. ^Le comprendi6 & Y. ? Si, sefior, may bien.
4. I T qn6 le ensen6 & Y. ? He ensefi6 d retrato de sa hermana.
6. iLolieneY.? No; seloenyi^ja.
6. |Me lo ensefiar& Y. ? Se lo ensefiarS 6 Y. la semana pr6xima.
7. &Ha llamado Y. & la criada? La he Uamado 7 no ha venido.
8. I No le perdonar& Y. esa falta ? No qniero perdon&raela.
9. |A qni^n llama mi padre? Te llama & tL
10. I Qnieres ense&arme ta veetido nnevo ? Te lo ensefiar^ oon mnoho
11. iYendr&ntdsamigos&darnosloBbaenosdias? Greo qne vendrdn
^diunosloe.
12. 4 Nos han enyiado los peri6dioos ? Os los enviardn mafiitfia.
13. (Oainto le gan6 Y. & ese sngeto? Le gan6 dos mil trescientoe
cincaenta y ouatro pesos.
14. I Qa6 lea dieron 6 sms amigas de Y. ? Prometl^ronles Bevarlas 6
paaeo ; pero no les dieron nada.
15. I Qoi^n d\jo eso ? To mismo lo dye.
16. i Para qmSn son estos libros ? Para ti mismo.
17. (Han mandado mis cartas al correo? 81, sefior, yo mismo las he
mandado.
18. iQoi^n me ha enviado este ramillete? Sa amiga misma se lo ha
enviado.
19. |Le leiste & ta padre las noticias de Francia ? El mismo las ha leido.
20. iQoieresensefiarmetareloj? Qoiero enseflirtelo.
21. I Qoi^n llam6 & la pnerta Y To mismo llam6.
22. I Tiene Y. esperanza de ver sa pais ? SI, sefior, tengo esperanza de
verlo may pronto.
28. I Cantaron bien anoche en el conderto ? Oantaron bien la primera
parte; pero la segonda may maL
24. 1 06mo eBt4 sa tio de Y. ? Est& baeno ; pero de may mal hnmor.
26. 4£s hombre de mal hamor? No; sefior, es hombre muy amable;
pero hoy est& de mal hamor por asantos de fiimilia.
6
122 LESSON ZZYII.
26. j Green enodganardinero&esehombre? €h«en ganiraelo.
27. iNecedta V. enyiar este peri6dico 6 sa hennanol Neoesito ea*
vi^FBclo.
28. |Cu^do quiere Y. mandar sa piano al pianiBta? So lo qiiiero
mandar ahora.
29. iGnindo necedta Y. hablar al abogado? Neoeaito hablarle ahora
mismo.
30. |Es esta la carta qne Y. recibi6 ayer ? Es la misma.
81. i A qni^n ama el Mqjicano ? No ama k nadie mas que 6 id miBmo.
82. (Paraqai^Qtrabi^jaesamiyer? Trabiga para si misma.
88. I Qa6 le ha ^cho Y. hoy & sa padre ? Lo mismo qne le d^e ajer.
EXEBGISK.
1. €k>od morning, sir; how are yonf Yery well, thank yoo.
2. How is your family? Yery well, thank you,
8. When did you hear from your cousin Janet I received a letter
from her yesterday. But will yon excuse me an instant? some one is
knocking at the door.
4. Haye you sent your sister the bouquet I bought for her the other
day ? Not yet ; but I shall send it to her to-morrow morning.
6. Will you write to her at the same time and (to) tell her what
Charles said? I am g<nng to write to her just now, and I shall tell it
to her.
6. Do you think my fiither will pardon us? I do (I think so), because
Emanuel showed me a letter he received from him, in which he says he
will pardon both of us.
7. And what does Henry think of the matter? He thinks the
same.
8. Have the pupils shown their new books to their teacher yet?
Yes, they showed them t9 him yesterday.
9. Does he think they are good ? He says they are very good.
10. What else (more) did he say? He said that if they study them
with attention they will very soon speak Spanish.
11. Is that all he said? That is alL
12. Who is knocking at the door? is it you, Peter? Yes, it is L
18. Why did you not come earlier? I was (have been) reading the
news from Italy.
14. What is the news (what news have we) ? The papers say that the
Italians have gained another victory (oietaria),
16. What did that man promise you last night ? He promised to bring
me some volumes of the History of the United States.
LBBSOK ZZVII. 123
16. Has he brought (traido) them to yon yet ? Not yet
17. When do yon think he will bring them ? He has to come to onr
honse this evening, and I thii^ he will bring them with him.
18. What do yon wish to see ? I wish to see yonr new dress, if yon
win have the goodness (bondad) to show it to me.
19. Will yon tell the En^ishman what I have. told yon? I shall not
tell it to the Englishman; bnt I shall tell it to the Frenchman this yery
day.
20. Will he believe it? Tes, he will (believe it) ; he believes every-
thing I tell him.
21. Have they taken my letters to the post^ffioe ? I took them my
aelf^ sir.
22. Who is my Mher calling? He is calling yon to send yon to the
bookstore for a book.
23. Do yon know why Lonis does not send ns the papers any more
(ya)l He promised to send them ; bnt yon know that no steamer {va-
par) has arrived this week yet.
24. When does the merchant want to see the notary ? He wants to
see him jnst now.
25. There he is talking to a gentleman; wQl yon go and (to) teU him
that my &ther wishes to speak to him a moment (momento) ?
26. Good morning, rir; &ther wishes to tell yon something; will you
come now ? Tes, I shall go Jnst now.
27. How is yonr son, Mr. Alexander ? He is mnoh better, thank yon ;
bnt he wonld not come ont this morning, becanse he has to stndy his
lesson.
28. What language is he learning? He is not learning any now; he
commenced to learn Spanish in the winter.
29. What is he studying, then ? He takes lessons in (of) writmg, his*
toiy and music.
80. What part of the grammar are you in now, Peter ? I have just
got to (arrived at) the twenty-seventh lesson*
31. ho yon require to send this paper to your brother? I require to
send it to him this very day.
124
LESSOK XXYIII.
LESSON XXVIII.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
IMFKRFBOT.
First ' Corrugation,
I spoke, was speaking, or used to
speak, &o^ &&
W^ spoke, Ac.
Habl-aba, Habl-abas, Habl-aba.
Habl-abamos, habl-abais, habl-aban.
Sec<md Conjugation.
Aprend-ia, aprend-iaa, aprend-ia.
Aprend-iamos, aprend-iais, aprend-
iaiL
I learned, was learning, or used to
learn, &c., &c
Third ConJugaUon,
Escrlb-ia, esorib-ias, escrib-ia. i I wrote, was writing, or used to
Escrib-iamos, escrib-iais, escrib-ian. | write, &&, &0.
Habia
hablado.
Ihad
spoken.
Habiais
aprendido.
Thon hadst •
learned.
Habia
escrito.
He had
written.
Habiamos *]
hablado.
We had
spoken.
Habiais V
aprendido.
Yon had
learned.
Habian J
eaorito.
They had ^
written.
Aoabar.
To finish.
Entrar.
To enter, come i
m, go in.
Deber.
To owe.
Deber.
Shonld, oaght, mnst, to be to, to be
one's daty to.
Dudar.
To doubt.
Temer.
To fear, be afraid of.
Abrir, abierto (irregolar in this
To open, opened.
past participle only).
Ambos.
Both.
Ouidado.
Care.
Oabeza.
Head.
Deber.
Dnty.
Mano.
Hand.
Prdjimo.
Neighbor.
Ropa.
aothes.
LESSON ZXVIII.
125
Yedno.
Beloj.
Marido, cssposo.
To escribia coando Y . Tino.
El estodiaba sua leodonea todoe loe
diaa.
Margarita bailaba macho coando era
joven.
To acababa de salir coando Y. entr6.
I Abria Y. la paerta 6 la yentana en d
inTierao f
En el inyierno no abria ni la ona ni la
otra ; pero en el yerano abria &mbafl.
i Habia Y. escrito los qjerddos &nte8
de dar so leocion ?
Ko los habia escrito ; pero habia esta-
diado la leccion.
Debe Y. tenor cddado no solo de estu-
diar la leodon, sino de escribir los
cjerdcioe, porque si no Y. no apren-
deri nada.
i En d6nde est4 sa yecino de Y. ?
Acaba de entrar.
i Qq6 bora tiene so reloj de Y. f
Son las dooe j coarto.
i Tenia so yedno de Y. coidado de so
ropa?
Debia hacerio, pero no lo hada.
pebemos amar al pr6jimo tanto como
& nosotrofl mismos ; pero mi yedno
no me atna 6 mi ni yo le amo & 61.
No dodo lo que Y. dice.
Neighbor.
Clock, watch.
Hnaband.
Yentana.
Yisita.
Cnenta.
Esposa.
Window.
Yisit.
Bill, acoonnt.
Wife.
COMPOSITION.
I was writing when yon came.
He osed to stodj his lessons eyery day.
Margaret used to dance much when she
was yoong.
I had just gone out when yoa came in.
Used yoa to open the door or the win-
dow in winter f
In winter I osed to open ndther; bat
in summer I used to open both.
Had yoo written yoor exercises before
taking yoor lesson ?
I had not written them; bat I had
stadied my lesson.
Ton most take care, not only to study
your lesson, but (also) to write your
ezerdses; for if not, you will learn
nothixig.
Where is your nd^bor ?
He has just come in (entered).
What o'dock is it by your watch
(what hour has your watch) ?
It is a quarter past twdye.
Used your ndghbor to take care of his
clothes ?
He should haye done so, but did not
We should loye our ndghbor as oor-
selyes; but my ndghbor does not
loye me, nor do I loye him.
I do not doubt what yoa say.
EXPLANATION.
lS4;i The hcpebfegt is need to express what is past, and,
at the same time present, with regard to something else which
is past ; that is, it is a past tense which was still present at the
time spoken o£ It may always be employed in Spanish when
in English the word was can be used with the present parti-
120 LXBBOV ZZYIII.
dple, or ft$ed to with the iofinitiye, or when we speak of hsr
bitual actions ; as.
To escribU coando Y. Tiiia 1 1 was writing wlien yoa ctme
El estudiaba mu Iflcdones todoe las I He used to stad j his lessons eterj
diss. I day.
135. The FLUPiESFECT is used to express what is past, and
took place before some other past action or event, expressed or
understood; as,
To habia leido ya los peri6dioo6 cnando 1 1 had already read the newspapen wheQ
y. me los dl6. | you gave them to me.
136. AcABAB DK. — The English expressions, to havejust,
and to be jugt, before a past participle, are translated into
Spanish by acabar dCy precedmg an infinitive ; as,
Aeabo de entrar. t I have just come m.
£1 aeaba de abrir la yentaua. | He has just opened the window.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. 2 Ha hablado Y. con la sefiorita? No, eila acababa de salir coando
yo toqn6 k la pnerta.
2. jDndaba Y. entrar? Si, porqne temla ofender k Y.-
8. I No sefior ; i qu6 hora es ? Mi reloj tiene las once y cnarto.
4. 4 Y qn6 hora tiene Y. ? To tengo las onoe y media.
5. jSabe Y. qn6 hora es en el reloj de la igleaa? Cruuido jo pasaba
estaban dando las once.
6. jEnt6nce8 ahora deberin ser no mas que las once j yeinte 6 veinte
7 cinco minutes? Creo que ser&n un poco mSnos.
7. i Ha hablado Y. con mi y ecino ? He ido 4 haoerle una vifiita, pero
habia salido.
8. I No habl6 Y. con la senora? Si, estaba en la yentana cuando 70
pa86.
9. I Tiene una mano muj hermosa ? Si, pero los ojos son mas her-
mosos.
10. I Qn6 tenia en la cabeza? Dos flores.
11. jQuidn llama 4 la puerta? La layandera, que yiene 4 buscar la
ropa.
12. I Cui!into le debo 4 Y. ? Me debe Y. yeinte 7 cinoo centayos de la
ropa de la semana^pasada.
18. (No se los ha pagado 4 Y. mi marido ? No, sefiora, no tenia di-
nero.
14. i Duda Y. lo que le digo ? No, sefiora, lo creo.
LSBSON XXYIII. 127
15. I'Eeti bien lavada la ropa? May bien ; 70 roisma la lay6.
16. iHizo Y. la viMta & su veoino ? Fai 6 an casa ; pero habia salido.
17. ^Ya Y. nmchas veces al teatro? Caaado yivia en Paris iba &
aienado ; pero aqni yoj maj pocas yeces.
18. 1 06mo debemos amar al prdjimo ? Tanto oomo 6 nosotroa mismos.
19. (Qni^n es el pr6jimo ? Todos los hombres son nnestros pr6jimo6.
20. lEst&mfllasahennanade Y.f 8S, sefiora, 7 de ooidado (seriouflly).
21. jOn4ntas yisitas le ha heoho el m^co ? Hnchisimas.
22. jDeben Yds. tener macho caidado de ella? S(, seflora, 7a lo te-
nemos.
23. I Caintas yisitas le debo 70 & Y. ? Ck>a esta son tres.
24. |No yendrd Y. & comer mafiana con noeotras? Mafiana ir6 al
campo con mis vecinos.
25. ^ Habia Y. redbido la carta del Frances caando redbid la mia ?
La redbi despaes.
26. ^Pprqu^ trabiga Y. tanto ? Porqae es mi deber.
27. ^Yenddb Y. 7 sa hermana& pasar ana semana con nosotrosf
Si, eefiora, la semana pr6zima rendr^mos 6mbos.
28. jQai^n abri6 mi yentana, Juan ? Senor, 70 mismo la abrL
29. 4Habl6 Y. con el sastre ? ' Fai all^ pero habia salido.
80. lOn&ndoyino Y.f Ahora mismo acabo de entrar.
81. iD6nde est^ mi padre ? Acaba de salir & la calle.
82. I Babes & d6nde fa6 ? Fa6 6 comprar ropa.
38. ^Habr4 ido & la Ooarta ayenida? No, sefior, creo qae fii6 &
Broadwa7.
84. |Qa6 hora es? £1 reloj de sa caarto de Y. aoaba de dar las doce.
EXERCISE.
1. What were 70a doing when Alexander w&ai into 7oar room? I
was talking to m7 father.
2. I thonght 70a were writing 7oar exercises. No, I had written
them alread7.
8. Does the servant take care to sweep 7oar room eyer7 da7 ? Yes,
ho knows yeiy well it is his dat7.
4. Wh7 did 70a not come before? 70a were to come at nine o^clock.
I know I haye done wrong in not coming earlier; bat I haye been
writing all the morning.
5. Does 7oar sister Margaret dance now as nrach as she ased ?
When (she was) in the cit7 she ased to dance yer7 mach, but now she
has no time.
6. When 70a liyed in the coantr7 did 70a open botji the doors and
the windows? I opened neither.
128 LKBBOK XXTIII.
7. Had yon finished your work before going to the concert? I had
(finished it).
8. Do yon doubt what I ten yon? No, sir, I never doubted anything
you told me.
9. Is your neighbor afiraid to open his windows in winter ? He is
not afraid to open them.
10. Who was it that went out last night after ten o'dock? No one
went out; my brother came in at that hour.
11. Did Alexander go out when your couMn came in ? He had already
gone out when my cousin came in.
12. Where is he now ? He has just gone out to walk.
18. Will he be very long (much time) ? He will not be long ; he is to
take his Spanish lesson this eyening.
14. Did you pay (make) a visit to my neighbor last week ? I went to
his house, but he was not at home.
15. When did you see the pianist? He came to see me the other day,
but I had gone out.
16. Do you think we shall have studied our lessons before going to the
teacher's? t think we shall.
IT. What o'clock is it by Qn) your watch? It is seventeen minutes
past three by mine; what time have you?
18. It must be (deben ser) half-past three; has the music teacher
come ? Not yet.
19. Will you have the kindness to go to his house and tell him I shall
not take my lesson this afternoon ? With much pleasure.
20. 8o soon I Well,'did you see the teacher? No, madam, he bad
just gone out
21. How much do you owe the tailor now ? I owe him very little ;
you know 1 sent him some money last month.
22. I know (it) ; but did he not send (pasar) in another bill on Mon-
day ? If he has sent in another I have not seen (vwto) it
23. I thought you were in the country, Mr. Emanuel ? I was there
last week.
24. Why did you not come yesterday? I saw you were writing and
I feared to offend you.
25. But you know it was your duty to come in ; you knew I wanted
you. Well, if you pardon me tiiis time (vez), I shall come in again (another
time).
26. How often do yon go to the theatre? Not very often now; I
used to go every night in the week.
27. How are we to love our neighbor? As ourselves.
28. Who is our neighbor ? All mankind (men) are oar neighbors.
LESSON XZIX,
129
29. How many visits bus the physician made to yonr nnde ? He be-
gan his visits on the 80th of December, and visited him twice i^ week
until April 4th.
30. How many visits do I owe yon for now? Ton owed me for
twelve, bnt yon paid me for nine, and so yon only owe for three now.
81. Whose letter did yon receive first, mine or Jane's f When yonrs
came to hand (my hands), I had already received Jane's.
32. Win yon take yonr lesson to-dsy ? I am to go to the Oentral Park
this afternoon with my mother, and so I shall not take my lesson until
to-morrow.
LESSON XXIX.
FBStEEOT AJITJUaOB.
Hnbe ] hablado.
I had 1 spoken.
Hnbiste . aprendido.
Thon hadst I learned.
Hnbo J escrito.
He had J written.
Hubimos ] hablado.
We had 1 spoken.
Hnbisteis . aprendido.
Yon had . learned.
Hnbieron j escrito.
They had J written.
Ver.
To see. {See the end qf the
Mirar.
To look.
Esperar.
To hope, *to wait for.
Afli que.
As soon as.
Ap^nas.
Scarcely.
No bien.
No sooner.
Tampoco {eon}.).
Neither, not either.
Tambien (adwrb).
Also, likewise.
Tambien (eonj.).
As well, moreover.
Adem49.
Moreover, besides.
Primeramente^ or en primer In-
Firstly.
gar.
Secondly, &o.
Ingar.
Frecnente.
Freqnent
Frecnentemente.
Frequently.
G6modo.
06modamente.
Conveniently, comfortably.
6*
130
LXSSON ZXIZ.
Inoomodo.
InoonTenient^ unoomfortable.
lBo6modamente.
Inoonyenientij, unoomfortablj.
Probable.
Probable, Hkely.
Probablemente.
Probably, Hkely.
Perfecto.
Perfect
Perfectamente.
Perfectly.
Oorrecto.
Correct
Oorrectamente.
Correctly.
Ojo. Eye.
1
"vLta.
Sights view.
Oorreo. Po8t>
postroffioe,
ComodidacL
Convenience,
courier.
comfort
Lugar. Place.
COMPOSITION.
Cuando le hube coaocido le am6.
Ap^nas bubo salido ti cuando yo entr^
Ko bien le babe visto ooando le oonocf .
Asi que babe escrito la carta la llev6
al correo.
Cuando le oonocf le am6.
i Iba v. frecuentemente al teatro el alio
pasado?
Iba frecuentlsimamente, or may freeaen-
temente.
£1 Tive en esa casa edmodamente, or
con comodidad.
El escribe correcta y perfectamente;
pero y. escribe mas f^dlmente.
When I had known him I lored hiuL
Scarcely had he gone oat when I
came in.
No sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
As soon as I had written the letter I
took it to the poet-office.
When I knew him I loyed him.
Did you go often to the theatre last
year?
I went rery often.
He liyes comfortably, or with comfort,
in that house.
He writes correctly and perfectly ; bat
you write more easily.
EXPLANATION.
137, The PBETEBiT AivTEBioB IS used to express a past
action or event that took place immediately before another
action or event also past. It is never used except after some
of the adverbs of time ; cttandoy when ; ewi qitCy as soon as ; no
bieUy no sooner ; ap&n<X8y scarcely ; luego que^ immediately after ;
despu^ quCy soon after ; as,
Cuando le hube conocido. When I had pade his acquaintance.
Ap^nas hubo salido cuando yo Tine. Scarcely had he gone out when I came.
No bien le Aufttfvisto coando le conoci. No sooner had I seen him than I knew
LS460N. ZXIX.
131
This tense is very little UJBed,.not only for the reason already
mentioned, of its being preceded by an adverb of time, bat also
because its place may be elegantly supplied by the fbetebtt
DSFiKiTE ; as,
Cutfido le eonoc(,
Ap^nas 9alid coando 70 Tine.
No bien le vi coando le oonod.
When I had known him.
Scarcely had he gone ont when I came.
No sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
138. The adverbs of manner and quality, in Spanish as
well as in English, are generally derived from adjectives.
189. To form an adverb from an adjective, it is sufficient
to add menie to the adjective, if the latter has the same ter-
mination in both genders ; as,
Frecoente, frecnentem^nfe.
Oramatical, gramatiotbnente.
If the adjective has a different termination for each gender^
then mente is added to the feminine ; as,
Inc6moda, inc6modamtfnl^.
Ferfecta, perfectaiiMti^e.
When two or more of these adverbs follow each other, only
the last one takes mentCy th6 others taking the feminine termi-
nation a ; as,
Gceron habl6 sabi^i 7 elocnentemaU^ | CScero spoke learnedly and ekx^aently.
140. These adverbs terminating in mentey being derived
from adjectives, admit like these the degrees of comparison ; as,
Easily
More easily.
Less easily.
As, pc so easily.
Very easily^ or most easQy.
F&dlmente.
Mas f&cilmentet.
Menos f&dlmente.
Tan fldlmente.
May f&dhnente, or f&dllsimamente.
141, Those adverbs may, without any change in the
sense, be substituted by a substantive governed by the prepo-
sition eon ; as,
ti Tire c6modameiite, or oon comodi- ( He Utm comfortably,
dad.
132 LX8B0K XXIX.
OONVEBSATION AlO) VERSION.
4. I Ye Y. aqoella flor tan hennosa ? Miro, poro no la veo.
2. 2 Ye Y. qa6 hora es en el rdoj de la iglesia? No, pero mirarS en
mi reloj.
8. (Ha yisto Y. 6 sa hermano? Si, sefior, le ri ap^nas hnbo aalido
del teatro.
4. jLe conoci6 & Y. mi vecino? No bien le babe hablado, me oo-
noci6.
6. I Han venido mis amigos ? Ylnieron asi qne hnbo Y. salida
6. |Le dieron k Y. mis libros? Ke los dieron, no bien les hnbe
bablado de ello.
7. jY se marcbaron mnj pronto? Se marcharon asi que bnbieron
escrito sns cartas.
6. jQu6 hizo Y. despnes? Primeramente (or primero) fbi al oorreo
7 despues al meroado.
9. jQa6 qniere Y. bacer? Primeramente eacnbir los cjercicios y
despnes estndiar la leccion.
10. iPorqu6 no lo bizo Y. &ntes? En primer lugar porqne no tenia
bnmor j en scgnndo porqne ap^nas tuve tiempo.
11. iHabla Y. frances frecnentemente ? Si, selLor, lo bablo con fre-
cnencia.
12. ^Lo escribe Y. correctamente ? Gnando lo estndiaba lo escribia
con mas correccion que ahora.
13. I Aprende Y. ingles 6 espafiol ? Aprendo 6mboB.
14. 4 Y sn hermano de Y. ? Mi hermano los apreode tambien.
15. I Los hablan Yds. con perfeocion ? Si, sefior, el ingl^ lo bablamos
perfectamente ; pero el espafiol ni yo, ni 61 tampoco.
16. I Ha enviado Y. sn carta al correo? No, sefior, la enviar^ ma-
fiana.
17. iLtL ha escrito Y. ? Tampoco la he escrito, porqne quiero bacerlo
con comodidad.
18. ilia aprendido Y. la leccion de hoy? He aprendido la de boy y
la de mafiana tambien.
19. £On4ndo piensa Y. salir para Paris? Probablemente saldr^ la
semana pr6xima.
20. ^No YivQ Y. c6modamente aqoi ? Si, sefior, pero vivo mas o6mo-
do en Francia.
21. jYivia Y. c6modamente cuando estaba en L6ndres? No, sefior,
vivia inc6modamente porqne no hablaba ingles.
22. jTiene Y. otro libro adem&s de ese ? Si, sefior, tengo otros dos.
23. iEst& Y. malo de la vista ? Si, sefior, tengo malo nn ojo.
LX880K ZZIX. 188
24. jPorqn^ no ha venido aim sa primo de Y. f Porqae qniere venir
con comodidad.
25. ^Tiene Y. bnena yista? fii, sefior, pero ahora iengo los ojoB
malofl.
26. iCnindo estndia Y. sns leociones? Las eetndio de dia porqne el
cstadio de noche es malo para la Tista.
27. iD6Dde estan sns hermanos de Y. ? Salieron & paseo no blen hn-
bieron escrito sua ejercicios.
28. jCndndo escribieron las cartas? Asi qne hnbieron aprendido sns
leociones.
29. iLley6 Y. mis cartas al correo f Si, sefior, asi qne Y. bnbo saHdo.
80. 4 Ya Y. con frecnencia al correo t Si, senor, voy frecnentemente ;
YOj todos los dias.
EXERCISB.
1. Did yon go to the lawyer's as I told yon? I went as soon as
yon told me.
2. Was he at home ? did yon see him ? He was not in when I went;
bnt I waited nntil he come.
8. Did yon show him the letter f I opened it and showed it to him ;
bnt he wonld not read it.
4. What did yonr children do after taking their lesson ? They had
scarcely finished their lesson when they went to bed.
6. Did yon look at the horses yonr brother bonght on Monday. I did
(look at them), and I think they are very fine.
6. Have yon ever taken yonr family to Italy? Tes, several times;
last year we travelled in Italy.
7. Did yon spend some time in the principal cities? Yes; bnt prin-
cipally in Rome (Bama\ Florence (Floreneia) and ^lan (MUan).
8. Where were yon on the 16th of December, 1865? On the 16th
we were in Florence in the morning, and in Some at night
9. Did yon all ei^oy good health in Europe ? Yes, all, except {nUnoi)
Alexander, who had a sore (malo) eye the greater part of the time.
10. IM, yon go often to the tiieatre? We generally went every
evening.
11. Had yon any difficnlty {dificultad) in nnderstanding the langnage?
None ; yon know Emanuel speaks Italian very correctly : he had learned
it before setting ont for Europe.
12. Did yon see many Americans when yon were travelling ? Yery
many ; some of them we knew very weD, and others were Mends
of onrs.
184 LESSON XZIX. \
18. Where u the letter yon were writing this moixung? As soon as I
had finished it John took it to the po6tK>ffice.
14. Do yon ever write to yonr nnde ? Yery little onoe we left New
York ; bnt there I used to write to him very frequently.
16. Which of yon three writes French the most correctly ? I know it
is not I ; and as to (^ cuanto d) Peter and Louis, I think Peter writes
best) but Loois writes with more ease (more easily).
16. Do yon see that beautiful flower ? I am looking ; but I do not
see it.
17. Win you teU me what o'clock it is by the church dock? I am
lookmg at the church ; but I see no dock.
18. Have you not good sight? Yes, very good; but I have a very
sore eye.
19. Did my cousins not come ? They came as soon as you went out.
20. Did you show them my portrait? I did ; but they scarcely had
time to look at it
21. Did they say where they were going? They said they were going
to the country.
22. How long are they to be there ? They did not tell me that
23. Are they not coming for me to-morrow ? Yes, sir, they are com-
ing for you to go and pay a visit to Mrs. Pefiaverde.
24. Have you ever seen a more comfortable littie room than this one ?
Besides being comfortable it is very handsome.
25. Why do you not speak Spanish with Mr. Biberns? In the first
place, because I do not speak it wdl enough ; and in the second, because
he speaks English very correctiy.
26. I thought you were studying Spanish? Jam studying it; but
studying and speaking are two distinct {dispinto) things.
27. Did you tell the music teacher that Louisa wishes to take lessons?
Not yet ; but I shall see him to-morrow and tell him so.
28. Why did you not take your lesson yesterday ? I was sick.
29. Have you studied yesterday's lesson, and to-day's? I have studied
both.
80. Will yon come to-morrow at the same hour ? Probably I shall
LS680N ZZZ.
186
LESSON XXX.
nCFSBSOZTAL TEBS8.
UoYor.
To ram.
Iloyienda
Raming.
Lloyido.
Rained.
Indicative.
Present.
Uneve.
It rains.
Imperfect.
lioYia.
It was raining.
Preterit d^nite.
Lloyi6.
It rained.
Future Hmple.
UoyedL
It will rain.
Campcun
d Tenses.
Preterit d^ite.
Ha noyido.
It has rained^
Pluperfect.
Habia lloyido.
It had rained.
Anterior.
Habo Uoyido.
It had rained.
Future compound
. Habr4 lloyido.
It win haye rained.
Amanecer.
To grow light
Anochecer.
To grow dark.
Dfliiviar. .
To rain like a deluge, to rain in
torrents.
Oranizar.
To hall.
Helar.
To freeze.
Uoyiznar.
To drizzle.
Keyar.
To snow.
Kelampagaear.
To lighten.
Tronar.
To thunder.
:
PKB80KAL YKBIiS TIE
lED IHFEB80NALLT.
Bastar.
To be sufladent.
Haber.
(Signifying) there to be.
Hacer.
(Signifying) to be.
Ser.
To be.
Oonyenir.
To snit, to be proper.
Parecer.
To seem, to appear.
BraoL
Brazil.
Habana. Hayana.
Keneater.
Neceadtj.
Nieye. Snow.
melo.
Ice.
Lluyia. Rain.
136
LXBSOK XXX.
Helado.
loe cream.
Tarde.
AftemooiL
Trueno.
Thunder.
La wiRftj^na.
Morning.
Medio dia.
Noon.
Media noche.
Midnight
Yiento.
Wind.
COMPOSITION.
^Es neoeeario estndiar nrncho pan
. aprender el espafiol f
Es menester estadiar macho, pero no
tanto como para aprender el ingles.
En Nueva York Uoeve y llo?iziia macho,
pero no dllttvia como en la Habana.
En Madrid amaneoe mny temprano y
anocheoe muy tarde en el venuio.
En la Habana amaneoe y anocheoe siem-
pre & la miama hora, en todoe los
diaa del afio.
En el Brasil no idera; pero trnena y
relampaguea macho Biempre qae
Uueve.
En la Habana no hay hielo, porqae no
haoe baatante fHo para helar ; y por
eso lo lleran de Nueva York.
En Naera York ha helado y nerado
macho este afio ; pero en el paaado
neT6 y hel6 may poco. «
i Haoe macho calor en eflte paia f
En los mesee de Noyiembre, Didembre
y Euero hace mucho frio ; pero en
Junio, Julio y Agosto hace macho
calor.
^Qu6 tiempo hace?
Parece que va & Uover, porqae hay
mucho Tiento y hace calor.
Cuatro afioB h&, or hay caatro afios, que
no veo & mi padre.
Pero v. tiene esperanza de yerle pron-
to, porqae llegar& hoy & Nueva York
en el rapor ''Etna** que yiene de
Earopa.
En verano voy & pasear todos los dias
al
Ib it neoeasary to study much to learn
Spaniah?
It is necessary to stady a great deal,
but not 80 much as to learn En^ish.
In New York it rains and drizzles a
great deal, bat it does not rain in
toirents as in Havana.
In Madrid day breaks yery eariy and
night falls very late in summer.
In Havana day breaks and night fidla
at the same houra ereiy day m the
year.
In Brazil it does not snow ; but it thun-
ders and lightens much whenever it
rains.
In Havana there is no ice, because it b
not cold enough to freeze; and for
that reason they take it from New
York.
In New York it has frozen and snowed
much this year ; but last year it
snowed and froze very litUe.
Is it very warm in this countiy?
In the months of November, December
and January it is very cold; bat jn
June, July and August it is very
wann.
What Und of weather is it?
It appears it is gohig to rain, because
it is very windy and hot.
I havei not seen my father for four
years.
But you (have) hope to see him soon ;
for he will arrive tCHiay m New York
by the steamer **Etna*' (that is)
coming from Europe.
In summer I go to walk every mocning
at daybreak.
LESSON XXX.
137
jYa y. & k cftoia temprano?
No, aefior, tarde ; & la media noche.
4€kime V. ol medio dia?
No, se&or, como al anocfaecer.
^VaV. &laHabaiia?
No, sefior, voy & Francia.
La Francia es maa alegre qpe la lnf^
terra.
El muchacho estodia mucho.
El estudio de la gram&tica es neceearia
El hombre neoesita trab^jar.
La oonTerBadon es may iitil para spmor
der ma lengna.
Bo yoa go to bed early ?
No, sir, late ; at midnight
00 yoQ dine at noon ?
No, sir, I dine at nightfalL
Are you going to Havana ?
No, sir, I am going to France.
France is more pleasant than England.
The boy studies moch.
The study of grammar is necessary.
Man requires to work.
Conversation is very useful for learning
a language.
EXPLANATION.
142. IicPEBSONAL TEBBS are those which are used only in
the infinitive mood and in the third person singular of all the
tenses, and have no definite subject ; as,
Uueve.
Tronar&.
Nevaba.
It rains.
It will thunder.
It was snowing.
148. The yerbs anumecer and anochecer are sometimes
used in the three persons, both numbers ; but then they are
not impersonal, but neuter ; as,
Yo amane<rf en Nueva York, y ano- 1 I was in New York at daybreak, and
checi en Filadelfia. | in Philadelphia at night&U.
144. Habeb and haceb are often used impersonally, and
are in such cases to be rendered into English by the corre-
sponding tenses of the verb ^o &«. •
The verb AaJer, when conjugated impersonally, has the
peculiarity of taking a y in the third person of the present in-
dicative; as.
There is much fruit
There will be many men.
Hay mucha fruta.
Habr& mucfaos hombres.
Hi^frio.
Hace muchos aflos.
It was cold.
Many years ago.
N. B. — Md is sometimes elegantly used for hay; as,
Doce afios h6, or hay doce alios. | Twelve yean ago ;
138
LBSSON XXX.
bat it is to be observed that M always follows the tune, while
hay precedes it.
There are many other verbs which, although not impersonal,
are sometimes used as such ; as,
Efl muy tarde. It ia very late.
£8 predso. It is necessary.
Es menester. There is decessitj.
Pareee. It seems, it appears.
Conviene. It suits, it is proper.
Baata. It is sufficient, it will do.
145. As it may have been observed, the pronoun it^ which
accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated into
Spanish.
Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article ; as.
El mucfaacho estodia, I The boy studies.
El estudio de la gramitica es iitil. | The study of grammar is usefuL
Nouns used in their most general sense are preceded by the
article ; as,
El hombre neoeaita trab^ar.
La conversadon es muy ii^ para
aprender una lengua.
Man requires to work.
Conversation is very usefiil for learn*
inga language.
146. Names of nations, countries, provinces, mountains,
rivers and seasons, generally take the article; as,
Ia Espafia. Spain.
La Inglaterra. England.
El inviemo. Winter.
147- Nations, countries and provinces, when preceded by
a preposition, do not take the article unless they are personi-
fied; as,
Las provindas de Espafia. I The provinces of Spain.
El valor de la Espafia. | The courage of Spain.
Nevertheless, the article is employed under all circumstances
with the names of some places ; as.
ElBraail
Ia Habana.
ElFerroL
LaChma.
El Japon.
ElPerii.
BnudL
Havana.
FerroL
China.
Japan.
Peru.
LESSON XXX. 139
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qa6 tiempo haoef Ahora haoe calor ; &ntes hada frlo.
2. I lioverd mafiana ? Creo qn6 nevar4.
8. iUaevemnchoenNneyaTork? liaeve y Uoyizzia bastante ; pero
raramente dilavia.
4. I Hace mncho frio en la Habana en d mes de Enero ? Hace alga-
no, pero nxmca nieva ni Mela.
6. ^Relampagaea? Belampagaea y llovizna.
6. iPorqn6 escribe Y. tantos ejerddos ? Porqne para aprender una
lengoa no basta bablarla, esnecesario tambien saber escribirla.
7. I Nieva mncbo en el Brasil ? En el Brasil no nieya, mas que en las
montafiaS) donde baj nieve todo el afio.
8. ^Qniere Y. tomar un belado? No, sefior, los belados no soq
buenos en este tiempo.
9. I Ou^to tiempo bace que no ve Y. & sn familia ? EI dos de Setiem-
bre pr6simo bar4 once afios.
10. ^Porqu6 no vino Y. anocbe 9 Porque llovia y bacia mucho yiento.
11. |Tiene V. miedo de los truenos ? Cuando relampaguea mucbo, si
sefior.
12. ^Porqu6 no fh6 Y. anocbe al ooncierto? Porque Doviznaba j
estaba nevando.
18. 2 A qu6 boras come Y. ? Al amanecer tomo chocolate; al medio
dia como, y al anocbecer tomo el t6.
14. jSe levanta Y. al amanecer todos los diss ? Ouando es menester,
'si sefior.
15. I A qu6 bora 8ali6 Y. del teatro el s&bado ? A media nocbe.
16. ^Ou^do salieron sua bermanas para el campo? Ayer al medio
^a.
17. ^Cu^doTolver^f Pasado mafiana por la nocbe.
18. I A qu6 bora amanece en el yerano? En verano amance i las
cinco J anocbece & las siete y media.
19. I Porqu6 se maroba Y. tan pronto f Porque ea menester.
20. |Es menester salir al amanecer 9 No, basta salir al medio dia.
21. |Haj muoboB Alemanes en Nueva York? Si, sefior, bay mucbi-
simos.
22. I Gustos diss bace que no le ye Y. ? No bace mas que uno.
23. jHay algunFrances en sucasa de Y.9 Hay ouatro Franceses y una
Francesa.
24. ^Oniindo yinieron Yds. ? Ayer al medio dia.
26. lOree Y. qa6 lloyerd boy? Pareoe que si, porque bace mucho
yiento y mucho calor.
140 LESSON XXX.
26. iJAoT\6 mncho aqui el afio pasado? Aqui ]loyi6 mncho, pero en
la Habana llovi6 mas.
27. i Kieya mncho en este pais ? En el mviemo nieva mnoho.
28. { Se hiela el agna? Mnchas veces.
29. I Habr4 mnoho hielo el afio pr6ximo ? £n el umemo habrd mn-
cho hielo.
SO. j Hace mncho frio f Si, sefior^ y al amanecer llovia y granizaba.
81. |Porqn6hacetantoMohoy? Porqne ney6 ayer.
EXERCISE.
1. Is it raining ? I do not know.
2. Yon do not know 9 How, are yon stiU in bed?— Yea, and I shall
be there nntil T o'dock.
8. At what o'clock did yon go to bed? At midnight.
4. What is it necessary to do in order to learn Spanish? It is neces-
sary to stndy a good grammar, talk a great deal vrith Spaniards, and read
the works of good authors.
6. What were yon doing in the garden this morning at daybreak ?
I was walking.
6. Have yon read the Spanish newspaper yet that I lent yon ? Yes,
sur, here it is. Thank yon.
7. What language do they speak in Brazil ? Portogaese (portu{^v£i).
8. Do yon see that lightning ? Yes, it is li^^tetdng and thundering
Tery much.
9. Is it proper to have the windows open when it thunders? Ifo, it
is better to have th^n shut.
10. I think (it appears to me) it will soon rain. Yes, I think so too ;
it is already drizzling.
11. John I Su". Is there any water in my room ? — No, sur, but if you
wish, I shall take some there now.
12. In what months of the year does it freeze most in New York?
During (durante) the months of Jannary and February.
18. I believe there is a great deal of ice nsed (m ma) in New York
during the summer. A great deal, and it is very cheap.
14. It appears that there will be lit&e ice next summer. Very little,
the winter has not been cold enough to have much.
15. What watch is that you have there ? It is the one I always had.
16. I thought yon had given your watch to Charles, and bought your
(the) neighbor's ? No, Charles has a very pretty little watch.
17. What o'clock is it by your watch ? It is just four o'clock (wn loi
euatro en punto).
LB8S0N ZXXI. 141
18. THio knocked at the door just now? It was Mrs. Martixiez ; it is
thnndering, and you know she is afraid of the lightning.
19. Why did she not come in ? She did not like to (would not) disturb
yovL {mcUstarla d F.) madam.
20. Do jou know whether Alexander has sent the papers to his
brother yet? I think he has (mepareee que ^).
21. Did you take him the two volumes I showed him yesterday? I
took them to him this morning.
22. Was he in the house when you went ? No, madam, he had Just
gone out.
23. Win you open that window, if you please ? With pleasure. *
24. And this one also? No, thank you; it is better to have that one
shut
25. Whatkindof weather is it to-day? Very bad; it has been raining
and hailing ever since (deade) daybreak.
26. Itfadam, here are two beautiful bouquets that Mrs. Garcia has sent
you from her garden. She is very kind (buena).
27. Who brought them ? Her servant (Jem.).
28. When did she bring them? Tou had no sooner gone out than
she came.
29. How windy it was last night I Yes, and it rained in torrents the
whole night, from nightfall until daybreak this morning.
80. What news is there from Europe? I do not Imow; I have not
yet seen the newspapers.
LESSON XXXI.
Gustar. I To like.
FBBSENT,
(A mQ me gusta or gnstan.
(A to te gusta «
(A 61) le gusta '<
(A noeotros) nos gusta, or gnstan.
(A vosotros) 08 gusta, "
(A ellos) les gusta. '^
I like it or them.
Thou likest it or them.
He likes it "
We like it "
You like it "
They like it "
IHFEKFEOT.
(A mi) me gustaba or gnstaban. I I liked it or them.
(A ti) te gustaba, etc. I Thou likedst it^ &o.
142
Guatarde.
Gnstode.
Gnstaade.
Gnstade.
Gnatamoa de.
Gnstaiade.
Gnatande.
Gnatabade.
Goatabaa de, etc
LSBSON XXXI.
'l To be fond oC
I am fond o£
Thou art fond oil
He ia fond ot
Bello.
Fosible.
Imposible.
Foeta.
Pintor.
Esonltor.
Placer.
Dios.
Fesar.
Melon.
Melocoton.
Arte.
We are fond oil
You are fond oil
Thej are fond oL
I waa or uaed to be fond ol
Thou wast or used to be fond
O^ ^DO,
Gnstar.
1 To taste.
Flacer.
Fesar (impenanaT).
Fesar (in aU iU persons).
Faltar or hacer fialta.
Faltar.
Acomodar.
Oonvenlr.
Importar.
To please.
To regret
To weigh.
To want
To &i], to be wanting or mifisiDg.
To suit^ to aooommodate.
To suit, to be oanVenient
To be important.
Oerca.
L6J08.
Dentro.
Fuera.
Near.
Far.
Within.
Without
Foet
Fainter.
Sculptor.
Pleasure.
God.
Regret, sorrow.
Melon.
Peach.
Art, skill.
Beautifhl, fine.
Possible.
Imposnble.
Poesia.
Pintura.
Escultura.
Prosa.
Fruta.
Manzana.
Nara^ja.
Artes (plu.).
Arroba.
Poetry, poem.
Fainting.
Sculpture.
Prose.
Fruit
Apple.
Orange.
Arts.
Arroba.
LBSSOK XXXI.
148
COMPOSITION.
jLegostaiV. lafrataf
Si, sefior, me gostan las nanzgaB y loa
meloiies.
A mi me gostan loa melooottmea y las
manrjinaa
{Cuil de las bellas artea la gnata & Y.
maa?
He gnatan todaa, la mi^ca, la poeala,
la pintora y la eacultura.
iVa Y. & la 6pera muy & meQudo f
y oy doB 6 tres yeoea por semana.
He parece qae Uoreri pronto, y me
gosta porqne tengo un gran placer en
Tcr Hover.
lEs poaible I A mi no me gnata yer
Hover; pero me gnsta mnchiaimo
verneyar.
iLe acomoda & V. eae caballo ?
No me conyiene, porque ea mny yi^o,
aai qne no lo comprar6.
jFive v. cerca 6 l^joB de aqni?
Vho muy oerca.
i Viye v. dentro 6 fuera de la dudad f
Ahora en la dudad ; pero en el yerano
yiyo en d campa
iQo6 le <a k V. para ser feHz?
No me falta nada, graciaa k Dioa.
Deseo oonooer al pintor cuya pintora
tiene V. en an coarto.
iLe peaa k V. de no haber eatado en d
conderto?
He peaa mudio de no haber estado,
porque no tuye el placer de yer k su
amigo de V.
A ml me peaa de ello tambien.
Do you Uke fruit f
Yea, dr, I like oiangea and melons.
I like peacbea and apples.
Which <^ the fine arts do yon like
beat?
I like them all, moaic^ poetry, painting
and Bculptore.
Do you go to the opera yery often?
I go two or three tunea a week.
It H>pearB to me that it will soon ndn,
and I am glad of it (I Uke it)^ becanae
I find (haye a) great pleasure m aee-
ing it rain.
Is it posdble 1 I do not like to see it
ndn; but I like to see it snow.
Does that hoiae suit you ?
It does not suit (or answer) me, because
it is yery dd, so that I ahall not
buy it
Do you liye near here, or fkt away?
I liye yeiy near.
Do you liye in or out of town ?
In town now, but in the country in
summer.
What do. you want (is wanting to you)
to be happy?
I want nothing, thank God.
I desire (or wish) to know the painter
whose painting you haye in your room.
Do you regret not haying been at the
concert?
I deeply (very much) regret not haying
been there, for I had not the pleasure
of sedng your friend.
I regret it too (also).
EXPLANATION.
148. GusTAB, derived from the noan gnsto^ pleasure, and
signifying literally to giveplecuure tOj is the yerb by which we
144 LXSSOK XXZI.
translate to like; bat in passing from English to Spanish^ the
nominative case or subject becomes the objective, and the
latter is preceded by the preposition d; as,
^Legosta&y. lapoesia? I Do joulikepoetiyf
Me gosta (or & ml me gnsta) macho. | I like U rery mnch.
149. GusTAB, followed by the preposition de^ means to be
fond qfy and sentences in which it is used are constracted as
in English; as,
To gusto de la mMca. I I am fond of music
£1 gosta de la poesia. | He is fond of poetry.
150. GusTAB, used as an active verb, means to Uute^ and
governs the objective, without the aid of any preposition what-
ever; as,
i Gusta v. la sopa ? I Do yon taste the soup f
Ko, sefior, gusto la came. | No, sir, I taste the meat
151. The verbs j9e«ar, to regret; faUar^ in the sense of to
want, or hacer/cUtay to have need of; (xcomodar^ to suit ; em-
veniVj to suit ; importar^ to be important ; placety to please,
and some others, require the same idiomatic construction of the
sentence as that explained in the case of gustar; as.
Nos falta (or nos hace ialta) dinero.
A v. le importa ese negodo.
Macho me place.
We want (or are in want of) money,
that businesB is important to 70a.
It pleases me mnch.
This last verb is defective, and is very little used, except in
the present and imperfect of the subjunctive mood, as will be
seen in the proper place.
152. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret^ generally
takes the preposition de after it ; as,
Me pesa de ello. | I am sorry for it
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. |Le gusta & V. la 6pera? Ouando era j6ven me gostaba mas qne
ahora.
2. jVendrd V. mafiana & comer con nosotros? Si, sefior, no £altar6.
8. {Necesita V. hoy su reloj? Hoy no me haoe falta, mafiana me
convendr& tenerlo.
4. I Qoiere Y. saber lo que he heoho hoy ? No me importa saberlo.
LBSSON XXXI. 145
6^ iCompra V. el caballo del ingl6s? No, sefior, no me oonviene:
es may caro. -
0. Dicen qne es muj bneno. No importa.
7. iPorqnS viveY. tan l^jos de la dndad? Porqne no me gostan
Tecdnofl.
8. lAnte^vivia Y. o6modamente c^rca de la pobladon? 6i; pero
ahora no me gnsta.
9. I Odmtas arrobas pesa Y. f Peso ocho arrobas y oinco libras.
10. ^Ha yisto Y. & sn prima? No, sefior, j me pesa mncho de ello.
11. I Caimto pesa sn nlfio de Y. ? No s6, porqne no lo bemos pesado
ann.
12. iQniere Y. ir & paseo con D. O^los, nnestro vecino? No qniero
ir con ^1 porqne babla mucho, j no me gostafi los babladores.
13. No obstante, el afio pasado estaba Y. en buena amistad con ^L
Si ; pero abora me pesa j me pesar& siempre. -
14. iNnnca ser^ Yds. amigos otra vezt Jamds : es imposible.
15. jPorquef No pnedo declrselo & Y.
16. |Eso no le gnstar^ 4 61 ? Nada me importa.
17. ^EsSn Yds. comiendo pan? No, sefior, estamos comiendo fruta.
18. I Gnsta Y. ? Si, corner^ xma manzana.
19. |No le gostan & Y. los melomes? No, sefior; pero me gnstan mas
los melocotones y las narasjas.
20. iQni^n es aqnella seflorita tan bella qne paseaba ayer con Y. en
el parqne? £s nna amiga mia.
21. I Qq& son los bombres qne vinieron intes de ayer con Y. ? El nno es
poeta, el otro pintor y esonltor el otro.
22. lOu&L de las bcllas artes le gnsta & Y. mas? Todat^ me gnstan;
pero la x>oesia mas que las otras.
23. iJjQ gnsta i Y. leer nna bella poesia? Si, sellor, me gnsta
mncbo.
24. |Hace mncbo Mo boy? Fnera bace bastante; pero dentro de
casa bace mny poco.
25. 2Porqn6 no fU^ Y. al balle anocbe? Porqne no me gnstan los
bailes.
26. |Es pomble qne siendo tan j6yen no le gnstan d Y? A mi me
importa estndiar; nobailar.
27. iPorqn6 no qniere Y. bailar? Porqne estoy oansado.
28. iQn6 es lo qne le bace falta & Y. para ser feliz? Nada me bace
falta por abora, gracias & Dios.
29. 2jQn6 le fUta & Y. ? Me &]ta el sombrero.
80. Aqni est4. 480 marcba Y.?— Si, sefior, si V. no manda otra
cos^
146 LSSBON XXX I.
EXERCISE.
1. Are your brothers and sisters foDd of study t They are not so
fond of it as some children I have known.
2. Do they ever read poetry? Sometimes, but not very often.
5. Do yon nnderstand Spanish poetry? Not yet; hvttd, understand
prose perfectly welL
4. Do you ever eat fruit? Tes, I am very fond of apples, oranges,
peaches and melons.
6. Is that gentleman a sculptor? No, madam, he is a painter, and
eigoys a high reputation.
6. Do you know that it is raining ? Raining! no, I did not (know it).
7. Do you think it is going to thunder ? I think it is (I think so).
8. Then it is imposible to go out? By no means {de ningun modo) ;
we are not afraid of lightning.
9. Does it always lighten when it rains? Not always.
10. Good morning, Mr. RetortiUo, how do you do? Very weS, thank
you ; and how are you (and you)?
11. What do you wish? I have come to see if this letter is correctly
written. It is perfectly correct
12. Who wrote that letter? A Mend of mine, yrho writes Spanish
very well.
18. Why do you not learn Spanish yourself? I have no time, and I
regret it very much.
14. What profession (profenan) do you like best? Of all professions I
like that of a physician best
15. When did you see Miss Md^ndez ? I had the pleasure of seeing
her the other day.
16. How do you like (gui taT) your new piano? Very much.
17. Who is your music teacher? I have none just now; but I used
to have a German teacher.
18. How much do you weigh? I weigh a hundred and «xty-five
pounds (lUnw),
19. Does Charles weigh as much as Alexander? No, sir, Alexander
weighs twenty pounds more.
20. Is Mr. Martinez at home? No, or, he is out
21. When will he be in ? I do not know; he did cot say (it) when he
was going oi^t (al salir).
22. Does your uncle live in or out of town ? In summer he lives out
of town.
28. WhenJie is in town where does he live ? In Twenty-second street
near Fifth Avenue.
LESSON XXXII.
147
24. How did yon spend your time when yon were in the country? I
walked morning and evening, and during the day I read the beautiful
pocma of Zorrilla and Espronceda.
25. Have you ever read any of Martinez de la Rosa's poems? Yes,
but I do not like them so well as those of Mcl^ndez.
26. Which is the greatest Spanish painter? Spiun has had a great
nmnber of excellent painters, but the most celebrated of all are Murillo
and Velazquez.
27. Are your cousins pleased with their new house? I believe so;
bat they say they liked the old one better.
28. Where did they live before taking the house in which they reside
now ? In Fourteenth street, near Seventh avenue.
29. Are they not comfortable in the new one? It is not for that;
but they are very fond of flowers, and they have no garden now.
30. Will you come out i^nd take a walk with me ? Yes, if Emanuel
oomes with us ; if not, I shall go and practise on the piano.
LESSON XXXII.
Poder. {See thU verb at the
end of the look,)
Esperar.
Gastigar.
Engafiar.
Qnemar.
Tratar.
Tratar de.
Tratar en.
Segair. {See this verb at the
end of the booh.)
To be able ; may, &o.
To expect, to wait for, to hope.
To punish.
To deceive, to cheat.
To bum.
To treat ; to have intercotfrse with.
To endeavor, to try, to treat of.
To deal in.
To follow.
ADYBBBS AlTD ADTEBSIAL PHBA8ES.
Gasl
£0u4nto1iempo?
Cuanto dntes.
DeModa.
Debalde. )
Gratis. )
De cnando en cuando.
Almost, nearly.
How long?
As soon as possible.*
. Fashionable.
Gratis; for nothing.
From time to time ; now and then.
148
LB880N ZZXII.
De improviflo.
Do veras. )
Yerdaderamento. )
En lo sacesWo.
Hastano mas.
Poco 4 poco.
For sapuesto.
Tal vez. )
Acaso. )
Picaro. Rogae (roguish).
Bribon. Rascal.
i^emplo. Example ; instance.
Bnddenly, unexpectedly, un-
awares.
Indeed, truly.
In future.
To the utmost, to the extreme.
Little by little, by degrees, gently.
Of course.
Perhaps.
Coqneta.
Sociedad.
Politics.
Coquette.
Society.
Politics.
COMPOSITION.
tfi hermano es castigado algunas veces
por no saber sus lecciones.
Y su amigo de V. Alejandro, ^lo es al-
gunayez?
Lo es de coando en caando ; pero mi
hermana no ha side castigada jam&s,
porque sabe nempre sus lecciones.
i Ha sido V. engafiado alguna rez ?
Hasta no mas, porque hay muchos p(-
caros en la eociedad.
Esta casa est& bien sitoada.
La carta estaba mal escrita.
Manuel es amado de {or por) Margarita.
£1 Ubro ha sido escrito por un Frances.
Se quem6 (or fu6 quemada) la casa.
Esta casa se hlzo en seis meses.
i En cu&nto tiempo se hlzo la do V. f •
En cosa de tres meses.
i Co&nto tiempo necesita Y. para escri-
biresa carta?
Est4 casi acabada ; cstoy con Y. en un
minuta
Poco k poco; va Y. muy apriaa.
Tal vez ; pero tengo prisa y quiero aca-
bar pronto.
My brother is sometimes punished for
not knowing his lessons.
And your fiieud Alexander, is he ever
punished (ever so) f
He is, now and then ; but my sister has
never been punished, because she
always knows her lessons.
Hare you ever been deceived ?
To the utmost, for there are a great
many rogues in society.
This house is well situated.
The letter was badly written.
Emanuel is loved by Margaret
The book was written by a Frenchman.
The house was burnt
This house was built (made) in six
months.
How long was yours in building (mak-
ing)?
About three months.
How long shall you be in writing that
letter?
It is almost finished ; I shall be (am)
with you in a moment (minute).
Gently : you go very quick.
Perhaps so ; but I am in haste, and I
want to get done (finish) soon.
LBSSON XXXII.
149
^Deverafl?
For supaesto : tengo que ir al corrco.
Dio3 est4 en todas partes, lo Babe y lo
paede todo, j nos perdonar& si trata-
mo8 de hacer nueetro deber.
i Es Ba reloj de Y. de moda?
Si, seiior ; pero no me gosta, porqne cs
may pcqueno.
Indeed ?
Of course : I hare to go to the post-
ofBce.
God is everywhere; He knows all
things, and • nothing is impossible
for Him (can do all); and He will
pardon us, if we endeavor to do our
duty.
Is your watch {ashionable ?
Yes, sir ; but I do not like it, because
it is too smalL
EXPLANATION. .
15 3. Passive Voice. — ^This voice is formed by the different
tenses of the auxiliary ser added to the past participle of the
verb, care being taken that the participle agree with the sub-
ject, in gender and number, like an adjective ; as,
Soy annado.
HemoB sido amado«.
Habeis sido amadou.
Ser&s amado.
I am loved.
We have been loved.
You have been loved.
Thou wilt be loved.
(a). The passive voice is, however, formed in Spanish, by
estor, instead of «er, when the past participle is used adjective-
ly, that is to say, when the state or condition of the subject is
described without any reference to an action ; as,
£sta casa edd bien tUuada. | This house is well located.
La carta egtaba mal escrita. | The letter was badly written.
164. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in
the present and imperfect of the indicative mood, only when it
is designed to express a mental act ; as,
Manuel es amado de Margarita. | Emanuel is loved by Margaret
When a mental act is not expressed, the passive verb being
in the present or imperfect of the indicative mood, eatar is the
auxiliary to be used, and not 8er\ as.
El libro ha sido escrito por un Fran- The book was written by a French-
ces, or el libro estd escrito por un
Frances (instead of es eserilo),
165. When the action of the verb refers to the mind, the
150 LEBBON ZXXII.
preposition de or por may be used after the passiTe verb, before
the agent, and j9or only, when otherwise ; as,
Manuel es amado de (or por) Marga- 1 Emanuel is loved by Uai^ret
rita. I
156. The passive voice in English is very frequently
turned into Spanish by putting the verb which is in the parti-
ciple past in English, in the same person and number as the
auxiliary to he in the English sentence, and placing the pronoun
96 before it.
167. The latter form is preferred when the object, or re-
ceiver, of the action is. an inanimate thing, or when the sub-
ject, or agent, remains undetermined ; as,
8e quem6 la caaa.
Esta caaa «e hizo en eeis meses.
The house was burnt
This house was built (made) in six
months.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jNo puede V. esperar ? Esperar6 un poco.
2. I No me engafiar&Y.? For sapnesto que no; yo no soyningon
picaro.
8. Bnenos dias. ^De qu6 estan Yds. tratando ? — ^Estabamos hablando
de modafi.
4. ^Paede Y. decirme si mi sombrero es de moda ? No es de la tilti-
ma (moda).
5. I Cadnto tiempo hace qae pas6 esta moda ? Habrd ya nn mes, pooo
mas 6 mi&Dos.
6. i Qoiere Y. qnemar las cartas de esa sefioritat Si, sefior, porqae
es xma coqneta.
7. jDe veras? Yo cl'eia que era mia sefiorita de mncha circuns-
peccion. Ilace algrai tiempo lo era ; pero poco & poco ha ido siguiendo
el ejemplo de otras.
8. I Tal voz el ser coqneta es de moda en la sociedad del dia ? Asi lo
creo.
9. Y. debe excusar k las nifias ; ellas son inocentes j no creen haccr
mal en eso.
10. iHa side Y. engafiado alguna vez? Hasta no mas; porque hay
mnchos picaros.
11. iHan sido castigados sns nines do Y.? Si, senor, ban sido casti-
gados por no saber sos lecdones.
LB8»>ON XXXII. 161
12. I Y aqael criado tan baeno qne V. tenia? Es an bribon; no lo
qaiero ni de balde.
13. |De Veras? Y. lo trataba mny bien. Acaso por lo mismo qne
JO lo trataba bien, me ha tratado €1 tan mal.
14. |Le gnsta & V. la sociedad f SS, sefior, de cnando en coando.
15. iPorqa6 no vive Y., ent6nce8, en la cnidad? Porqne se me qaem6
lacosa.
16. ^Oo&ntotiempohace? Casi nn mes.
17. Y ahora, j no va Y. nnnca all4 ? Yoy de cnando en coando.
18. £so es verdaderamente on gran mal ; pero en lo sncesivo tendrd
y. mas cnidado. — Por snpnesto que sL
19. J No pudo Y. aaber qni6n le quem6 la casa? No; pero creo qne
fu4 on bribon, qne me queria mal.
20. 4 Qniere Y. acabar ya? Si, onanto ^tes ; no pnedo esperar mas.
21. I Qa6 piensa Y. haoer ahora ? Trato de casdgar al qne me qaem6 la
casa.
22. I Y despnes? Despnes ver^ si pnedo hacer otra.
28. j Y no tiene Y. ahora ningnna aM ? Tengo una hecha de impro-
viao.
24. Poco 4 poco ir4 Y. hadendo otra. Asi lo espero.
25. A Por snpnesto que' sn sefiora Tivir4 en la dndad? 81; pero ra
sM de coando en coando ; el otro dia Degd de improviso, cnando m^nos
laesperaba.
26. ^ No poede Y. rolrer mafiana por aqni ? Mafiana tal vez no, pero
pasadosi.
2T. Ent6noes lo espero 4 Y. Mn falta ? Puede Y. esperarme ; no faltar6.
28. |Ird Y. hoy 4 la comedia 6 4 la 6peraf Tal vez ir6 4 la 6pera,
porqne es mas de moda.
29. I Nnnca Ta Y. 4 la comedia ? Si ; roy de cnando en coando.
80. I Sabe Y. que se ha quemado la Academia {academy) de Mtisica ?
Si; anoohe lo lei en los peri6dioos.
EXERCISE.
1. Pax>a, may I go out f Yes, you may go out for half an hour.
2. How long is it since your house was burnt ? Only three weeks.
8. Why does that woman punish her children so much? She al-
ways punishes them when they do wrong (pbrar mctl).
4. Does she reward {reeampeMor) them when they do right? I be-
lieve she does.
6. Why do you bum all that young lady^s letters ? Because she is
only a coquette.
152 LEBSON XZXII. '
6. I think yon are not right ; I haVe known her along time^ and I
believe she is very circmnspect (cireumspecta). .
7. Why do your family always live in the country ? Becaose we do
not like society.
8. And is it not possible to live in town without going into society ?
It is impossible.
9. We always live in town, and yet (Hn embargo) we never go into
society.
10. Peter, can yon write that letter for me now? I can.
11. When do yon want it? As soon as possible.
12. Havje you ever been deceived by that man? Yes, very. often ; he
isarasoaL
18. How long have yon known him ? I^ot long ; but each time I have
had business with him, he has deceive! me.
14. Indeed ! What business is he in ? I cannot tell you.
15. Do you often go to the theatre ? Never to the theatre ; I go to
the opera now and then.
16. Can you tell me whether my hat is fashionable ? Yes, it is in the
latest fashion.
17. Is Peter^s the fiashion too? No, those hats went out of fGLshion
last year.
18. Where is your old servant? He lives* with us no longer.
19. Did you give Charles the fruit you were to buy for him ? No, he
came for it the other day, but I had not had time to buy it.
20., Why did you come so late to-day to your lesson ? My exercise
was very difficulty and I could not finish it in time. '
21. Well, I hope you will come in time in future ? Yea, in future I
shall come at four o'clock precisely.
22. I hope you will not deceive me ? Of course I shall not ; I never
deceive anybody.
23. Will that young gentleman be at the concert with you to-morrow
night ? Perhaps he will come with us.
24. Does he not go every night ? Indeed I do not know.
25. How long is it since you began to take lessons ? About (eerea de)
four months.
26. And do your brother and sister take their lessons at the same hour
as you? No, my brother takes his at ten o'clock, and my aster at
twelve.
27. Where did you become acquainted with the gentleman who danced
last with your cousin (fern,) yesterday evening ? I made his acquaint-
ance in Madrid the year before last
28. Has this young man deceived you aii often as his fSather ? He has ;
LESSON- XXXIII.
153
7011 know children almost always follow the example of their parents
QMu2re»).
29. Do you think Charles is loyed by Louisa? I think she loves him
as mnch as it is possible to love.
30. What did you tell the tailor ? I told him yon wanted your coat
and Test for the day after to-morrow. *
LESSON XXXIII.
Lavar^^
'E&heTse lavado.
Haber.9« de lavar.
LaT4ndo9«.
Habi6ndo86 lavado.
Habi6iido«0 de lavar.
KEFLECnVE VERBS.
LNFIMITIVE MOOD.
To wash one^s sel£
To have washed one^s se]£
To have to wash one^s self.
QJSRTJITD,
Washing one's self.
Having washed one^s self.
Having to wash one's sel£
DIDIOATIVE PBESBNT.
(Yo) me lavo.
(TA) te lavas.
(£l) se lava.
(Nosotros) nos lavamos.
(Vosotroe) os lavais.
(EIlos) se lavan.
I wash myself.
Then washest thyself
He washes himselfl
We wash ourselves.
You wash yourselves.
They wash themselves.
{The other simple tenses a/re conjugated in like tnanner.)
FBETSBIT JU^DKFLNITE,
(Yo) me he lavado.
(Tti) te has lavado.
(Cl) so ha lavado.
(Nosotros) nos hemes lavado.
(Vosotros) OS habeis lavado.
(EUos) se han lavado.
I have washed myself.
Thou hast washed thyself.
He has washed himself.
We have washed ourselves.
You have washed yourselves.
They have washed themselves.
{The other compound tenses are conjugated in like manner.)
Cortar.
Cortarw.
Aftttar.
To cut.
To cut one's self; to be ashamed.
To shave.
154
I.E880N XXXIII.
Afeitane.
Lerantar.
Levantarj^.
Cansar.
GansarM.
^Descansar.
Contentar.
Ck)Dt6ntarM.
Bnrlar.
BorlarM.
Pregnntar.
Responder.
Engafiaratf.
Temer.
Arriba.
Ab^o.
Detr^
Encima.
Debi^o.
Lnego.
Qu6tal?
Descansadamente.
De borlas.
Descansado.
Oontento.
Barbero.
Cansancio.
Descanso.
Oontento.
Bespondon.
Caohillo.
Barber.
Weariness, fatigue.
Best
Oontentment.
Ever ready to reply.
Knife.
Pelo 6 cabello. ^air.
To shave one's sell
To raise, to lift.
To get up, to rise.
To weary, to fi^igae, to tire.
To tire one's sel^ to get tired.
To rest
To content, to please.
To content one's sel£.
To mock, to jest
To jest, to make jest of, to laugh at.
To question, to ask, to enquire.
To answer.
To deceive one's selC
To fear.
Up.
Down.
Behind.
Upon, above.
Under.
Presently.
How ; how do you do?
Easily.
In jest.
Bested.
Content
Pregunta.
Bespuesta.
Burla.
Declinacion.
Derivacion.
Disposidon.
Una.
Question, query.
Answer.
Jest
Declination.
Derivation.
Disposition.
NaU (finger).
COMPOSITION,
^ A qu6 bora se levant6 Y. ayer ?
He levants temprano; me levanto al
amaneoer todos los dias.
i Qa6 hizo Y. entOnoes ?
He afeit^ y sail
At what o'clock did you get up yester-
day?
I rose early ; I rise at daybreak every
morning.
What did you do next (then) ?
I shaved myself and went out
LBSSON XZXIII.
155
^Se lava V. katen de afdtarae?
tf e afetio Antes de lavanne.
I Son fadles de aprender las palabras
dedinacion, deiivacion, y disposicion ?
Son facilfmmafl, porque casi todas las pa-
labras que acaban en cion son lo
mismo en ingl^ cambiando la c en f.
Tengo nn barbero qne afeita muy bien,
pero es carislmo ; i qu6 tal afeita el
deV.?
El mio no afeita muy bien; pero es
baratisimo, porque me afeito yo
misma
Ahora me afdta el barbero, porque me
he cortado la mano y no puedo afei-
tarme yo mismo.
i Porqu6 se l>urla Y. de su amigo ?
Me burlo de 41 porque se levanta muy
tarde.
(Se ha caziaado Y. de estndiar ?
No, Befior, porque cuando me canso de
estodiar, deecanso escribiendo.
I Ama Y. & su hermano ?
Xos amamoe el uno al otro.
iLe gusta k Y. mas pr^guntar que res-
ponder?
No, senor, yo no Boy pregunton, y me
guata haoer fimbas cosas.
To no trsbigo mucho, lo hago descan-
sadamente.
I Se engafia Y. & si mi«ano alguna Tez ?
Y. habla de burlas ; i puede uno enga-
fiarse k sf mismo jam&s ?
For Bupuesto que sL
i Est& su amigo de Y. abijo 6 arriba ?
i £st4 mi libro debijo 6 endma de la
mesa?
*Qu6 tal le gosta 6 Y. Nuera York ?
Do yon wash yourself before shaving
(yourself)?
I shave before washing myself.
Are the words declination, derivation
and disposition easy to learn ?
They are very easy, because all words-
ending in don are the same in Cng-
lish, changing the e into t
I have a barber that shaves very well,
but he is exceedingly high (dear);
how does your's shave ?
Mine does not shave very well ; but he
is very cheap, for I shave mysell
The barber shaves me at present (now),
because I (have) cut my hand, and I
cannot shave myself.
Why do you make fun of your friend ?
I make fhn of him because he gets up
very late.
Have you got tired of studying?
No, ear ; because when I get tired at
study, I rest myself writing.
Do you love your brother ?
We love each other.
Do you like better to ask questions
than to answer ?
No, sir, I am not inquisitive ; I like to
do both.
I do not work much ; I do it at my ease.
Do you ever deceive yourself?
Tou speak in jest; can one ever de-
ceive one^s self? .
Certainly (so).
Is your friend up^ituis or down-stairs ?
Is my book upon or under the table ?
How do you like New York ?
EXPLANATION.
158. Rbplbctiye Vkebs.— Almost all active verbs may
become reflective in Spanish, and be used as pronominal
The
156 LB880N XXXIII.
pronoun object most be of tbe same person as that of the sub-
ject, and each person is conjugated with a doable personal
pronoun. However, the pronoun subject is almost always im-
derstood in Spanish, while in English it is expressed ; as,
InfinUU/e. Amane. I To lore one's selfl
FarL Pra. Am&ndotB. | Loving one's sdC
IKDXCAIITB
Heamo.
Teamas.
Beania.
Nosamamos.
Oa annus.
Seaman.
I loTe myselfl
Thou lovest th jBel£
He loves himself.
We love ourselves.
You love youra^ea.
They love themselves.
And in the same manner in all the other tenses.
159. When an agent performs an action upon a part of
himself, the verb is made reflective ; and tbe possessive pro-
nouns, my, hiSf etc., are translated into Spanish by the article
d^ Igj loSj iaa; as,
Me corto d cabello. I I cut mj^ hair.
Sc corta ku nfiaa. | He cuts his nails.
160. When the verb denotes a reciprocity of action be*
tween two or more individuals, it is formed, in Spanish, in the
same manner as the plural of reflective verbs ; as.
I^Toa amamoB,
(h engaiiadeU,
Se temerdn.
We love one another.
You deceived each other.
They will fear eadi other.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jSe ha afeitado Y. ? Ni me ho lavado ni afeitado.
2. ^ Oo^ntas veces lava la criada & los nifios ? Los lava por la mafiana,
al medio dia y 4 la noche.
8. I Oa^do les corta las nfias ? Se las corta los midrcoles y los s&bados.
. 4. ^ Se lavantan temprano ? A las sets en verana, y & las siete en in-
vierno.
6. jPorqu6 no se levant6 V. hoy mas temprane ? Porqne el criado
no me despert6.
6. 2 No despierta Y. temprano ? Ouondo estoy cansado, no.
7. {EstabaY.mny cansado ayer? Si, senor, el paseo me can86 mucsho.
LB8BON ZXZIII. 157
a Entdnces, iqaerri V. doecansar hoy todo el dia? No^ he desean*
sado ja bastante durante la nt)che.
9. I Con co^nto dinero ae oontenta Y. ? Yo me contento oon pooo.
10. jSe contentard V. oon diez pesos ? Se bnrla Y. de mL
11. No, yo Bolamente pregonto. — Y. me pregonta j 70 respondo que no.
13. I Habla V. do bnrlas 6 de veras ? Hablo de veraa ; 70 no me con-
tento con m^09 de den pesos.
13. jSe burla Y. de mi? No, aelLor, 70 nnnca hablo de bnrlas; 7 Y.
tendr4 qne contentarse con lo que se le ha dado 7a.
14. Y. es qnien se engafia.— El engafiado ser& Y., 70 no.
15. I Para qn6 llama Y. al barbero ? Para afeitarme.
16. I Porqn6 no se afeita Y. mismo ? Porqne tengo miedo de cortarme.
17. iD6ndeest&elcndu]lo? Est& sobre la mesa.
18. £Ad6ndevaY.? Y07 & cortarme el pelo.
19. iD6nd6 idve bu barbero ? Yive dethb de la iglesia.
20. 4Pregnnt6 Y. al criado por mis botas ? Si, sellor, me dyo que es-
taban bi^o de la cama.
21. 2 Sale Y. ahora&paseo? Ko, setior, saldr6 despnes.
22. I Qu6 tal est6 sn amigo de Y. ? Ahora est4 mas contento.
2*^- I Qa6 tal es el criado que tiene Y. ahora? Es mn7 respondon.
24. 2D6iide eetd sa padre de Y., arriba 6 abigo ? Antes estaba ab^o,
ahora me parece que eStk arriba.
25. I Q116 tal ha pasado Y. la noche ? Mn7 descansadamente ; he dor-^
mido muy bien.
26. I C6mo estan escritos los ^erdcios de sn gramdtica de Y. ? Estan
por pregnntas 7 respuestas.
27. I Hizo Y. la pregunta qne le dije ? Si; pero no me dieron respuesta.
28. (De qu6 trata la lecdon de ho7? De la dedinacion 7 derivadon
de los nombreS) 7 de la dispoddon de las palabras en la compodcion.
29. I Qn6 est^ Y. l67endo? Las dispoddones del re7 Oarlos UI.
80. I Aprende bien d espanol su amigo de Y. ? No, sefior, tiene mu7
poca dispodcion para las lengnas.
81. 4 Qu6 hizo Y. a7er despnes que se levantd ? Me laT6 7 me afeita.
82. (Se cana6 Y. muoho a7er? 81, sefior, me cans6 mncho d paseo al
parque-
88. I Neoedta Y. descanso ? Descanso bastante de noche.
EXERCISE.
1. Wh«re do 7on deep? In the small room on the third floor (piso).
2. At what o'dook do 70a get up every morning ? I generall7 rise
at ax o'dock.
158 LESBON XXXIII.
8. At what hour do jour children rise in Bommer 9 Thej rise at day-
break.
4. At what time do they go to bed? At nightfall.
5. Where do you wash yourself? I wash myself in my own room.
6. Do you wash yourself in hot (calierUe) or cold water ? I wash
myself always with cold water.
7. Why do you not wash sometimes with warm water? Because
cold water is much better for the skin (ct^^is).
8. Where do you go to get shaved ? I go to the barber's.
9. Where does your barber live? In Broadway, near Broome
street
10. Are you tired ? No, sir, I never tire myself writing.
11. Are you speaking in earnest or in jest? In earnest; I am not in
a humor to jest.
12. It seemed to me you were in a humor to jest a whDe ago ? Not
at all ; on the contrary, it was my brother that was making fun of me
because I had cut my hand.
13. Well, no matter ; I know you are fond of jesting and laughing at
everybody. You deceive yourself my dear su* (sefior mio),
14. Oharles, can you go to the trior's to tell him I wish to see him ?
It is impossible for me to go out now, I am expecting Mr. Yalero.
15. No matter, I shall send John. John cannot go either ; he has to
be here at the same time as L
16. WiU you go to the post-office and ask if there are any letters for
me ? I asked this morning when I took father's letters, and they told
me there were none.
IT. Did you see the newspaper I was reading when your cousin came
in ? There it is on the table, behind the dictionary.
18. Why did you get your hair cut {haeene eortar)^ Because it was
too long (largo).
19. Indeed I I thought you Uked long hair ? On ladies, yes ; but it
is not very suitable for a man.
20. Where is Peter ? I think he is up-stairs.
21. Will you do me the pleasure to call him ? Certainly.
22. Was the muracian contented with what you gave him ? He did
not appear to be contented.
28. How do you like the vest that my tailor made for you ? Pretty
(bastante) well ; but I like the work of my own tailor, better.
24. How is your unde to-day? The physician came to see him this
afternoon, and he smd he was much better.
25. What are those gentlemen doing over there ? Do you not see that
they are resting?
LESSON XXXIV.
169
26. How do yoa know they are tired f They have been walking all
the morning.
27. Then they are Tery right {hacer muy him) to rest. Of course ;
rest is sweet {grato) when one is tired (m estd eantado).
LESSON XXXIV.
mREGULAB VERBa
Acertar.
To guess, to make out, to hit
the mark.
iNDiCAti VK. — Present.
Aeierto,
Aeiertas.
I guess.
Thou guessest
Acierta.
Acertamos.
He guesses.
We guess.
Accrtais.
You guess.
Aeiertan.
They guess.
nfFEBATIYE.
Acierta tti^
-Guess thou.
Aeierte 61.
Let him guess.
Aoertemos nosotros.
Let us guess,
Acertad vosotros.
Guess.
Acierten ellos.
Let them guess.
BUBJUTTonvB. — Present.
Aeierte.
I may or can guess.
Aeiertes,
Thou mayest or canst gneas.
Aeierte,
He may or can guess.
Aoertemos.
We may or can guess.
Aoerteis.
You may or can guess.
Acierten.
They may or can guess.
Oalentar.
To warm, to heat.
Cerrar.
To shut, to close.
Confesar.
To confess.
Despertar.
To awake, to wake.
Gobernar.
To govern.
160
LBBSON ZZZIY.
Merendar.
Negar.
Pensar.
Qaebrar.
Sentarse.
ToliinclL
To deny.
To think, to iutend.
To break.
To sit down.
Verhi that are regular, although email changes are made to preeerte the
pronunciation of the i^finityoe.
To vanquish, to overcome. -
Veneer.
Resaroir.
Pagar.
Delinqnir.
Escoger.
Poseer.
Proveer.
Hair.
Argtdr.
Fuego. Fire.
Jardinoro. Gardener.
Motivo. Motive.
Sofl Sofa.
To indemnify.
To pay.
To commit a fault, to transgress.
To choose.
To possess.
To provide.
To flee, to fly.
To argae.
Aver.
Let ns see.
Qniz&.
Perhaps.
Delinoaento.
Delinquent, offender, transgres-
sor.
Inooente.
Innocent.
Franco.
Frank, open.
Coalquiera.
Any, any one, some one, what-
ever, whatsoever.
Cnalqtdera parte.
Any place.
Consecnenda.
Prndencia.
Verdnras.
Deuda.
Oonseqaence,
condosion.
Prudence.
Vegetables.
Debt.
COMPOSITION.
^Le gusta k Y. calentane al Aiego?
Si, sefior, me gusta calentarme al fuego
en el inviemo cuando hace mucho
frio.
I Qu6 calienta el criado ?
EstA calentiuido el caf6.
^ A qu6 hoia despertd V. ayert
Do you like to warm yourself at the fire ?
Tes, BUT, I like to warm myself at the
fire in winter when it is very cold.
What is the servant warming ?
He is warming the coffee.
At what hour did you awake yesterday.
LBS80K XXXIT.
161
jATOTsi adertaV.f
No s6, quizi despertd Y. & laa cinoo.
Despierto todas laa mafianas k las cna-
troy media.
^Cierra V. la puerta 6 la abre ?
He cerrado la puerta 7 abierto la yen-
i E9 delincnente aqnel hombre ?
Lo creo, porque huye.
Xiego la consecuencia ; Y. no argaye
bien, 61 paede aer inocente y huir
por piudenda.
^SepTOyey6 Y. de florest
Me prorei de fruta 7 mi hermana de
Terduraa.
«Pag& Y. por ellas al jardinero ?
To le pagu6 la frata 7 mi hermana le
pag6 las yerdnras.
jFiensa Y. ir & Eoropa este yerano P
Beseo irme £ alguna parte, porqne con-
fieso que tengo macho miedo del c61era.
Hajmuchos que niegan tener miedo;
pero 70 teogo el yalor de confesarlo
inncamente.
i A qix6 bora se desa7una Y. P
He de8a7ano & laa ocho, mcricndo & las
dos 7 Gomo k laa seis.
itfe promete Y. yenir & comer conmi-
goho7?
Entre comer 6 merendar con Y. escojo
el merendar, porque Y. come dfttia-
siado temprano.
* Words printed In 4taUc9 do not
Lei US see if 70U eon* gneas/
I do not know ; perhi^ 70a awoke at
fiye o'clock.
I awake eyer7 morning at half-past
four.
Are 70a shutting the door or opening it ?
I haye shut the door and opened the
window.
Is that man a transgressor ?
I think so, for he flees.
I den7 the conclusion ; 70U do not
argue correctl7 (well) ; he ma7 be
innocent and flee (or fl7) from pra-
dence.
Did 70U proyide 70ur8elf with flowen ?
I proyided m7Self with fruit, and m7
sister with yegetables.
Did 70U pa7 the gardener for them ?
I pud bun for tKe fruit, and m7 sister
paid lum for the yegetables.
Do 70U mtend to go to Europe this
summer?
I wish to go somewhere, for I confess
I am yery much afraid of the cholera.
There are man7 who den7 being afraid ;
but I haye the courage to confess it
frccl7.
At what hour do 70U breakfast ?
I breakfast at eight, lunch at two, and
. dine at six.
Will 70U (do 70U) promise to come and
dine with me to-da7 ?
Between lunching and dining with 70a,
I choose lunching, for 70a dine too
eari7.
reqoixo to be txandated Into Spaniah.
EXPLANATION.
161. iBBEGtTLAB Vekbs. — All verbs that are not conju-
gated throagbont according to tbe model verbs already given
(hablaTj aprendery eacrilnr)^ are called irregtdar.
162. It 18, however, to be observed^ that although some
verbs undergo slight changes in their radical letters, they are
162 LSB80N XZXIV.
not to be considered as irregular on that account, inasmuch as
those mutations take place in order to preserve throughout the
whole conjugation the pronunciation of the root as sounded in
the infinitive. This' observation should be carefully borne in
mind, so as nc^ to take for irreguLir verbs those which are
really not so.
Many verbs ending in car^ cer^ cir^ gar^ for instance, undergo
respectively such mutations as above alluded to : those in car
change the c into que before e ; as,
Tocar. I To toudu
To^6 (instead of toc^). | I touched ;
in those in cer and cir, the c is changed into z before a and o;
as.
°>
Venoer.
Veiu50 (inatead of tciwo).
Resarcir.
Reaarso (instead of resareo).
To vanquish.
I yanquish.
To indemnify.
I indemnify ;
and lastly, those in gar take a u after the g and befote e ; as,
Pagar. I To pay.
Pagv6 (instead of pag6). | I pud.
For the same reason delinquir changes qu into c, before a
and ; as, delinco^ ddinea^ ddincamos ; and escoger, to choose,
changes the g intoj before a and o ; as, eacqfoj escqfa.
163. The verbs which terminate in ecr, as creer^ to believe ;
leer J to read; poseeTj to possess; proveer^ to provide, in those
terminations which contain an f, change it into f/ whenever it
is to be joined with another vowel ; as, creij creyS ; fei, let/eron ;
po8e\^po8ey€re\ provei, provet/erem^y &c.
164. The same change is made in the verbs ending in tiir,
when the u and the i make a part of two diffisrent syllables.
Thus AmV, to fly, makes, in the third person of the preterit defi-
nite, huyd ; argUir, to argue, makes argugS, &c.
165. The irregular verbs, about ^tje hundred and Jifty in
number, may be divided into seven classes, presenting each a
certain regularity in their irregularity ; that is to say, whose
irregularities occur in. the same persons and tenses, so that
when the pupil has learned seven verbs, or one of each of those
LESSON XZXIY. 168
gronps, he will be able to conjugate almost all the* SpaDish
irregular verbs, save a few that confine their irregularities to
themselves and their compounds, and of which the majority
have been already introduced in previous lessons, such as haher^
tener^ &q, ; but the learner can find them all^coagugated at the
end of the book.
Aeertar may serve as a model for the conjugation of the
first of these seven classes of irregular verbs, just as hdblar does
for the first conjugation of the regular verbs. The irregularity
oi aeertar^ and of all those conjugated like it, consists in taking
an % before the last e of the root, in, the firsli^ second and third
persons singular, and the ^Aerc^ person plural of the present of the
indicative mood, in the pi^sent of the subjunctive, and in the
imperative. {See list of the irregular verba at the end of the
book,) In all the other tenses and moods those verbs are regu-
lar, and the learner can easily form them according to their
respective conjugations.
166. Pagab may take for its direct object either the value
paid or the thing paid for, while the person paid is the indi-
rect object. JPor may be used before the thing paid for ; as.
Pago lo8 caballofl, or pago por los
cabftUos.
Pago xnH pesos /Mr los cabaUoB.
Pago al comerciante mil pesos por
lo8 cabdllos.
I pay for the horses.
I pay a thousand doQars for the
horses.
I pay the merchant a thousand dol-
lars for the horses.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Acertar& Y. la casa de sa prima? Si, senor, yo la acertar6.
2. iPodr& V. aeertar qm6n estuvo aqui ayer? No acierto.
8. I No entiende sa hermano de Y. lo que le digo ? SS, senor; pero
no acierta d responder.
4. iSe calienta Y. al ftiego ? Si, sefior, porqne hace macho frio.
5. |Porqa6 no cierra Y. ent6noes la paerta? Confieso que no habia
pensado en ello.
6. j A qu6 hora de8pert6 Y. esta manana? Despert6 4 las diez.
7. jEl que gobierna ana casa y ana fanulia, no debe levantarse tem-
prano? No lo niego.
8. ^Piensa Y. merendar hoy? Si, sefior, nosotrosTnerendamos todos
los dias.
164 LBSSON XXXIY.
9. iPorqa6 no b6 sienta Y. en aqneUa sOla, qne es mc^jor? Porqne
tengo miedo de rompcrla.
10. jLepag6V. dsucriado? Si,8eflor,lepagn6ayeryhoy8ehahuido.
11. iNo le perdonar^ V. ? No, sefior, porque quien delinqui6 una vez
delinquira dos.
12. i Y no se re8afci6 de su trab^jo? Si, senor, dntes se provey6 do
ropa en mi casa.
18. I Qa6 lengnas posee 61 ? El ingles, el frances j el italiano.
14. jQai^nposeeaboralacaBadecampodeY.f Elamericanolaposee.
15. 2 Se la ha pagado & V . ? No^ sefior, no me pag6 nada.
16. iCompr6 V. flores al jardinerot Le compr6 yerdoras 7 mi bei^
mana le compr6 florca.
17. ^Le pagaron Yds. al jardinero por elks? Yo le paga6 las verda-
ras 7 mi hermana pag6 por las flores.
18. I A qai6n le gustan mas las flores, 4 Y. 6 d sa hermana ? Oreo que
k clla le gustan mas las flores; pero & mi me gosta mas la frnta.
19. 2 Qn^ ^ta le gosta & Y. mas ? Me gostan las naraigas 7 las man-
zanas.
20. jPaga Y. dempre bus dendasf Las pago cnondo tengo dinero.
21. I Piensa Y. ir d campo este Terano ? Deseo ir 6 cualqniera parte,
porqne confleso ^ne tengo macho miedo del c61era.
22. I No tiene Y. vergaenza de confesarlo? Ha7 muchos qne niegan
tener miedo ; pero 70 tengo el yalor de confesarlo francamente.
23. i A qn6 hora despert6 Y. a7er? A7er, creo que despert^ & las
cinco. Despierto todos los dias & las cuatro 7 media.
24. 2 Y & qu6 hora se de8a7una Y. ? Me desa7uno a las siete, meriendo
k las dos 7 como k las seis.
25. 2 Me promete Y. renir ho7 k comer conmigo? No paedo prome-
t^rselo, porque no s6 si tendr^ tlempo.
EXCKHCISE.
1. How cold it b this morning I Yes, it is vety cold.
2. Will 70U not come and warm 7ourself at the fire? No^ thank
70U ; I do not like to warm m78elf at the fire.
8. In that case it is better to shut the doors and the windows.
Perhaps it «.♦
4. Do 70U intend remaining {eita/ne) here during the winter? If m7
uncle remains, I will too.
5. WiU 70U not choose other rooms if 70U remain ? Yes, I intend
to do BO.
« SngllBhvordfl printed in <te{ie« do not rapiira to be tnndated Into BjM^^
LBBBON XXZIY. 165
6. Good eYeniQg, Charles; will jon not sit down for a few minntes f
With pleasure.
7. Did yoa find oat (make oat) the moMcian^s hooae yesterday ? I
made ont the house without much difficulty, bat I did not see him.
8. How was that ? He most have been oat, for I knocked at his
door. •
9. At what hoar do yoa dioe? I generally dine at six o'clock.
10. Then yoa lanch at noon ? Yes, ^, I generally lanch about that
hour.
11. Do you eat ftuit every day at dinner? Not every day.
12. Did your brother pay for the fruit he bought last week ? No ; but
ho has to go out to-morrow, and perhaps he will go and pay for it
13. Let us go and take a walk. Where do you wish to go 9
14. We can go to the Central Park. Very well, let us go there ; I
think it is the finest promenade in the city.
15. At what time do they ope^ the park in the morning? I believe
it is open in summer at five o'clock.
16. And at what time is it shut? At eleven o'clock, I believe, or per-
haps a little later.
17. In that case it will be better not to go there until to-morrow ; it
is now rather too late {algo tarde).
18. How too late? It is only half-past seven, so that we have three
hours and a half for walking.
19. Where are they taking that man to ? They are taking him to
-prison (la edrcel)»
20. What are they taking him to prison for? He must be guilty of
«ome misdemeanor (delinquir).
21. Has the servant taken the letter to the pianist yet ? He took it to
him yesterday afternoon.
22. Have you seen the news this morning ? No ; what news is there?
23. There was a great fire last night in Fourth street, and twelve
houses were burned.
24. Where is Alexander ? He is up stairs.
25. Have any of you seen my Spanish dictionary? Yes, I had it this
morning in my room.
26. What were you doing with it? I was lo(ddng for a new word
which I met with* while reading the history you lent me.
27. How did you manage (aeertar) to wake so early this morning ?
My brother awoke me sm^ng in my room, at five o'clock.
28. At what time do you generally wake ? If no one comes to inter-
rupt (interrumpir) my sleep, I never wake before nine.
• EiiftUsh words in itaUes do not reqnire to bo tranalAtad.
166
LEBSOK ZXZY.
29. fs it not better for the health to rise early ? Certainlj; but then
it is necessary to go to bed early also.
80. Why do yon not go to bed early ? I am fond of reading and stady,
and so I rarely go to bed before two o^dock in the morning (de la ma-
drugada).
LESSON XXXV.
IRREGULAR VERBS— C<m^n«ed
Aoostar. | To put in bed*
TsmoATivn, — Present.
AeuestOj acueetoA, cieueeta. I I pat in bed, Ac
Aoostamos, acostais, aetiestan. \ We pat in bed, &o.
IMPEBATITE.
Aeueata tti, aeueste 61, aooste- Fat in bed, &&
mos nosotros, acostad yobo-
tros, acuetteniXLoA.
flUBjTJNonvB. — Present
Aeueste^ aeuestes^ acuesU^ acos- 1 I may, or can, pat in bed, &g,
temos, acosteis, (umesten.
Acostarse.
Aprobar.
Almorzar.
Gontar.
Oonsolar.
Encontrar.
Mostrar.
Probar.
Recordar.
Reprobar.
Rogar.
Sofiar.
Delicioso.
Espacioso.
Indastrioso.
Religioso.
OONJUGATED UEX AOOSTAB.
To go to bed, to lie down.
To approve.
' To break&st
To coant; to relate, or teH
To console.
To meet
To show.
To prove; to try; to taste.
To remind ; to remember.
To reprove.
To entreat
To dream.
Delicioos.
Spacioas.
Indnstrioos.
R^igioas.
LESSON XXZY.
161
Arifltoor4tico.
Aristooratio.
Glisico.
ClasBio.
FanMco.
Fanatic.
Monirquico.
Monarchical.
Tir&nico.
TTrannicaL
Tragico.
Tragic.
Portico.
Poetical
Analitico.
Analytical •
BAtirioo.
Satirical
illo66fico.
Phnosophical
C6mioo.
Ck>micy comical
£coii6inico.
Economical
Lac6mco.
Laconic.
Met6diG0.
Methodical
Cr6nico.
Chronic.
Yaao. Tumbler, glass.
Taza. Cap.
Sermon. Sermon.
Moral Moral
Mundo. World.
Rept^bHca. Eepublic.
Independencia. Inde^ndence.
Religion. Religion.
COMPOS
mON. "
Manuel, aca^state tempranoy lev&ntate
temprano tambien.
Alejandro, cu^ntame lo que te dijo Loiaa.
Ayadate y Dies te ayudaHL '
AsDA & t& projimo como & tf mismo.
S4 leligioso, pero no seas fan&tico.
S4 indostrioso y eoon6mico y no ser&a
pobie.
Sent6mono8, que estoy cansado.
Amaos como hermanos y no hableis
mal nno del otro.
Entrc v., Dn. Pedro, y tome V. a^ento,
or si^ntese Y.
No puedo, estoy de prisa.
Juan, cierra la pnerta, pero no derres
laventana.
Caballeros, entren Yds., y les mostrar^
mialibros.
Alejandro, confieea tu fUta y te la per-
doDar6.
Emanuel, go to bed early and rise early
too.
Alexander, tell me what Louisa told thee.
Help thyself^ and God will help thee.
LoTe thy neighbor as thyself.
Be reli^ous, but not a fanatic.
Be industrious and economical and thou
Shalt not be poor.
Let U8 sit down, for I am tired.
Love each other as brothers, and speak
no eril one of another.
Come in, Mr. Peter, take a seat, or be
seated.
I cannot, I am in a hurry.
John, shut the door, but do not shut
the window.
Come in, gentlemen, and I shall show
you my books.
Alexander, confess your fault, and I
will pardon you.
168 LBSSOK ZZXV.
Ko lo8 ofendamoB.
Amigos, cantemoB y bailemOB j seamos
feUoes.
No tomar&s en vano el Kombre del Se-
fior tu Dioa
Let us not offend thenu
My fiiends, let us ong, danoe and be
merry.
Thou fihalt not take the Name of the
Lord thy God in vdn.
EXPLANATION.
167. The verb acoatar changes the radical o into ue in the
flame tenses and persons as those in which the verb acerUxr Is
irregular; i. e., in the present indicative, the imperative and the
present subjunctive. (See this verb and those cw^ugated like
it at the end of the book).
168. Thb dcpebative hood is not used in the first person
singular ; nor is it used in Spanish for forbidding ; that is, it is
not employed in the negative form; but the persons of the
present subjunctive are used when a negative command or a
prohibition is expressed ; as,
No lo hagas. I I •. .
Nolohagai8.f | I>onotdoBo.
169. As has already been said, the s of the first person
plural, and the d of the second, are suppressed before nos and
08; as,
Am6mono9. | Let ua Ioto each other.
Amaos. | Love one another.
170. When the imperative is negative in English, as the
subjunctive is employed in Spanish, the objective pronouns are
placed before it ; as,
No lo digas. t Do not tell it
No los ofendamoa. | Let us not offend them.
171. The future of the •indicative is often used for the im-
perative; as,
No tomar&8 en vano el Nombre I Thou ahalt not take the Name of
del Sefior tu Dies. | the Lord thy Qod in vain.
172. Many adjectives ending in ous are rendered into
Spanish by changing this termination into oso ; as,
Delidow. I DeliciouB. '
Espadoi^. I SpadooB, &a
I.BSSON ZZZV. 169
173. Many nonns and adjectives ending in English into
or icai have in Spanish the termination ico ; as,
Fanittco. i Fanatic, fanatical
Portico. I Poetic, poeticaL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Lnisa, estadia bien tn lecdon do espa&ol j escribe los ejercicios.
2. 2Qa6 me dork Y., pap&i si la estudio bien j no hago faltas en los
ejercicios ? Te Uevar6 conmigo al Parqne OentraL
3. Pap^ I no llevar4 Y. 4.Al^andro j & Manael con nosotros? 8i
son bnenos muchaohos j estndiosos los llevar^ tambien.
4. Alejandro, yen ac& j cn^ntame qn6 hidste ayer en el campo.— ,0on
tnacho gosto. For la mallana me levants temprano, mo lav^ j almorc^ j
despnes me ful & pasear. Yolvi muj cansado j me aoost^ 4 las nneve.
5. I Juan! • ^Sefior? Mafiana me despertar&s & las cinco, me limpia-
ras las botas y me traeras el caballo temprano, porqne quiero ir 4 dar nn
pa'teo y tomar on vaso de leche en el hotel del Parqne Central.
6. Amigo mio, no seas fan^tico, pero s^ religioso. No seas satirico
ni hablador, pero b6 pmdente, econ6mico 6 industrioso j serds feliz.
7. Por DioB, Don Pedro, no faable Y. mas, le prometo 4 Y. estudiar 7
ser baen mnchacho.
8. No seas respotfdon, haz tn deber, ajtidate j Dios te ayndard.
9. Don Pedro, 4 mi no me .gnstan los sermones largos, si^nteso Y. j
hablemos de otra cosa.
10. Mire V., Dn. Jnan, d aqnella senorita que estd en la ventana del
vecino ; jla conoce Y. ? Si, setter, la conoci en Filadelfia.
11. jQu6 tal le gnsta d Y.? Mnchisimo; es ima seflorita perfecta, y
habla el espafiol tan bien como el ingl6s.
12. 4 Quiere Y. Uevarme d su casa? Tengo deseo de conocerla.— Oon
mucho gusto, pero dntes necesito sn aprobacion.
13. jLe aman d Y. mucho sub nifios? Me aman y yo los amo; y toda
la familia nos amamos los nnos d los otros, asi es que somos felicisimos.
14. ^Se aman Yds. los nnos d los otros tanto como se aman Yds. mis-
mosf Oreo que si.
15. Hable Y. alto y despacio si Y. gnsta y ent6noes entender6 todo lo
que Y. dice. — Asi lo har6 ; pero Y. no pensard en otra cosa que en lo
que yo digo, porqne si no, no hablarS mas.
16. jLe conviene d Y. comprar aqnella casa? No me conviene, por-
qne es muy cara y estd mny 16jo3 de la ciudad.
17. iQn6 le parece d Y. del tiempo? Hoy es d cuatro de Julio do
8
170 LBSSOK ZXXY.
1866, 7 por snpnesto liace calor; pero haoe mny bnen tiempo para la
celebracion de la independencia de esta gran Beptiblica.
18. I Cndntos alios hace hoj que los Estados XJnidos celebran sa inde-
pendencia ? Noventa y un afios.
19. I Parece imposible ! £n m^nos de cien afios ha llegado esta nacion
& ser una de las potencias (powers) mas grandes del mundo.
20. Eso debia ser asi, y no dade Y . que llegari nn dia en qne la liber-
tad y la reli^on reinar^ en el mondo haciendo felloes & todas las na-
dones como 4 otras tantas familias qne tienen un mismo padre.
EXERCISE.
1. Did yon get np late to-day ? No; I got np at daybreak to go and
walk in the oonntry.
2. Where did yon walk? I went first to the Central Park, and then
to Harlem.
8. What ia the first thing we read in Telemachns? We read that
Oalypso could not console herself for the departure {partida) of
Ulysses.
4. Where have you been all this time, sir f it is more than a week
since you last came to see us ; that is not right (eatar Men), I confess I
am rather negligent (negligerUe) sometimes.
6. You have doubtless already gone to see your old Mend? Yes,
and he wanted to make me spend a month with him at his country house.
6. What part of the country does he live in ? On Long Island, about
ten miles from the city.
7. Was he not glad to see you ? We looked at each other for about
ten minutes without being able to say a word ; at last (en Jin) he broke
the silence (rompiS el eilencio), and said to me : '* What I is it you, my
dear friend? After seven years^ absence (atueneia) I How glad I am.
8. Did he know you as soon as he saw you ? Yes, and I knew him,
though I met him at some distance from his father's house.
9. Doubtless he asked you about your travels (voyages)? Of course.
"Whore have you been ? " said he. " What have you done ? what have
you seen? are you rich? are you happy? Tell me all you have done
since you went away (irae) ; all your adventures. I wish it; I desire it;
I beg of you; it will give (you will do) me the greatest pleasure."
10. All that proves his joy at seeing you. Yes, I know that; but how
many questions 1
11. Did he want an answer to each one of them? Of course; and I
answered them as well as I could.
12. What did you tell bun? I told bun that after having left France^
LS880N XXXVI. 171
I went to Spain, and from there into Fortagal {Portugal), and that after
a few months passed in Lbbon {Lulbod) I went on to Italy, where I re-
mained fonr years.
13. What are the hoars for breakfast and dinner amongst the Italians?
The Italians, like the French, usually (generally) breakfast at eleven
o'clock, and dine from five to seven in the evening.
14. And do they never eat anything before the breakfast hour? Al-
most everybody takes a cup of coffee or chocolate in the morning soon
after rising.
15. What kind of governments are there in Europe? In Europe we
find almost every form (/armd) of government, repablican and monar-
chicaL
16. What is that book you have in your hand? An analytical treatise
(tratado) of Spanish poetry that I was going to show to your cousin.
17. Have you seen Boileau's satirical poems? My unde has promised
to bring me that work from Paris.
16. Are you fond of reading? Yes, I take (find) great pleasure in
reading books of all kinds, classical, poetical, religions, analytical, satiri-
cal, philosophical, Ac
19. Do you remember the peaches our friend sent us from the country
last year? Of course I remember them, and that they were delicious.
20. (>harles, go and take your breakfast; I want to take you to see
the fine horse your unde has bought for Alexander.
21. Will you not buy one for me, too, papa? If you are a good boy
I probably will.
22. Do you ever dream? Very often; last night I dreamed I was
travelling.
28. Indeed! Where were you going to ? I do not remember now.
24. What was your fether saying to Peter when I came in ? He was
reproving him for not having written his exercise yesterday.
2d. Can you tell me what day this is? To-day is Wednesday, July
4th, of the year 1866, and the mnety-first of the Independence of the
United States.
Bespetar.
Parar.
Mover,
LESSON XXXVI.
To respect.
To stop.
To move.
172
LSSSON XXXVI.
mDiOATPTK — Present
Muevo, mueves, mueve, move- | I move, &c
mos, moveis, tnueven.
IMPERATIVE.
Muete tt^ mueuoa 61, movamos
nosotros, moved vosotros,
muecan ellos.
Move, &G.
Mueoa, muevas, mueva, mova- 1 I may or can move, Ac
mos, movais, mvetan, |
Verba conjugated like movee.
Uover.
To rain.
Morder.
To bite.
Doler.
To grieve, to pain, to ache.
Volver.
To turn, to return.
Antes que.
Before.
Annque.
Although.
Como.
Since, provided.
Para que.
A fin de.
ando.
In order that,
in order ta
Todo el mi
Everybody.
Principalmente.
Principally, chiefly.
Antagomsta. Antagonist,
Atrocidad.
Atrocity.
Artista.
Artist.
Gapacidad.
Capacity.
Materialista.
Materialist.
Glaridad.
Oleameas,
Katuralista.
Naturalist
light
Organista.
Organist.
Crueldad.
Crudty.
Violinista.
Violinist.
Dificultad.
Difficulty.
Purista.
Purist
Etemidad.
Eternity.
Escritorio,
Office.
Facilidad.
Facility,
Oima.
Climate.
Noticias.
News.
Dolor,
Grief, pain,
ache.
COMPO
Guerra.
SITION.
War.
Be dice que Maiimiliano ha partido de
H^jico.
It is said that Mfl^^'T"'^^*" has left Mex-
ico.
LESSON XXXVJ.
173
jSecreeeso?
Aqui lo cree todo el mundo ; pero en
Francia no se cree.
I Cree Y. qae se podr& pagar pronto la
deuda de los Estados Unidos ?
No se har& muy pronto ; pero se hadl.
AquI 86 habla espafioL
Aqai se rende bnen vino.
Se perdona algunas veces & los delin-
cuentes, pero no siempre.
£1 hombre se engafia & si mismo.
iEnvid V. el violin al violinista ? .
Se le envi^.
i Tocan bien el piano en Espafla ?
En Espana se toca bien la guitarra.
iSc babla bien el espafiol en la Ameri-
ca del Sur f
Lo hablan j pronunclan bien.
i Le daele k Y. la cabeza ?
Si, sefior, mucho.
i G6mo se llama Y. ?
He Uamo Juan.
i C6mo se llama eso en espafiol ?
i C6mo se dice eso en espa&ol f
U> niismo que en ingl6s.
Do they belieye tbat ?
Here everybody believes it ; but in
France it is not believed.
Is it thought that the United States
debt can soon be paid ?
It will not be accomplished (done) very
soon ; but it will be done.
Spanish is spoken here.
Good wine is sold here.
Transgressors are pardoned sometimes,
but not always.
Men deceive themselves.
Did you send the violin to the violin-
ist?
I sent it to him, or did send it to him.
Do they play well on the piago in
Spam?
They pli^ the guitar well in Spun.
Is Spanish well spoken (or, do they speak
good Spanish) in South America ?
They speak it and pronounce it welL
Does your head ache ?
Yes, sir, very much.
What is your name ?
My name is John.
What is that called in Sj^ish ?
How do you (or, do they) say that in
Spanish?
The same as in EngUsh.
EXPLANATION.
1 74. MoYEB, to move, changes the radical o into tie^ in the
same tenses and persons as the verb acostar; i, e,y in the
first, second and third persons singular, and the third plural
of the present indicative, and present subjunctive, and in the
imperative. (See this verb^ and those conjugated like it, at the
end of the hook).
175. Se is the indefinite personal pronoun of the Spanish,
referring to a personal agency in such a manner as to leave un-
determined both the sex and the number of the persons repre-
Bented. It corresponds, in this respect, with the English vye^
th^^ people or one; in fact, with all expressions which mention
Sedice.
JSe cree.
No M hard,
Aqui $e vende yino boeno.
Aqui 96 habla espafioL
174 LESSON XXXVI.
persons thas vaguely and indefinitely. It is used with the
third person singular of the verh ; as,
It ifl naid, or they say.
It is beUeved, or they beUere,
They (people) will not do it, or it
will not be done.
Good wine is sold here.
^Muiish is spoken here.
1 76. The pronoun se has now been seen used in the four fiinc-
tions in which it can be found ; it may be well to mention them
all again, in order that these different offices of the pronoun ee
may be well distinguished, and to avoid all confusion. They
are the following :
Ist. As an indefinite subject, as has been seen in the pres-
ent lesson ; as,
8e dice. | They say.
2d. To form the passive voice of verbs (see Lesson
XXXIL) ; as,
Se perdona algonas Teces & los delin- 1 Transgressors are someUmes par-
cuentea. | doned.
Sd. As a reflective pronoun ; as,
Manud se engafia. | Emanuel decdves himseUl
4th, and lastly, the objective pronoun «6, for the sake of
euphony, takes the place of the objectives le^ la^ lo, les (see
Lesson XXVIL) ; as,
Se lo pagar^ & Y. mafiana. | I will pay it to yon to-moirow.
177. Many nouns ending in English in fy, are rendered in
Spanish by changing these letters into dad\ as,
Acixndad, I Activity.
Gapacidiad | Capacity.
N. B, — All nouns of this termination are feminine. Many
nouns ending in English in iat^ are rendered into Spanish by
adding to these letters an a ; as,
Artidta. I Artist
Oiganista. | Organist, &a
LESSON ZXXVI. 1V5
178. DoLEB. — ^Thisverb is used in the same manner as the
verb guslar^ to like (see Lesson XXXI.) ; as,
I Le dude & Y. la cabeza ? | Does your head ache?
The same may be expressed in the following manner :
I ^leue Y. dolor de cabeza ? | Have you a headache ?
CONYERSATION AND YERSION.
1. iSe vendo bucn vino en Nneva York ? Se vende bneno j male ;
pero mny caro.
2. £Qn6 noticiaa hay? Se dice qne la Alemania j la Italia estan en
gnerra.
8. I Se cree eso ? No solamente se cree, sino qne se sabe que la gner-
ra ha principiado ya.
4. {Se habla espafiol en Nneva York? En Nneva York se hablan
todas las lengnas, pero prindpalmente d iogl^ el aleman, el francos j
el espafiol.
5. {Se aman los Franceses y los Ingleses? Greo qne no se aman
oomo hermanos; pero se respetan.
6. 2 A qni^n se ama mas en este pais, 4 los Franceses 6 4 los Ingleses ?
Es cosa qne no sabr^ decir.
7. I En los Estados Unidos se respetan las iglesias de todas las religio-
ncs? Si, sefior, porqne hay libertad de reli^on;. es ana cosa mny bne-
na para el pais, y yo la deseo para todas las naciones del mnndo.
8. Hablemos de otra cosa, porqne todos no son tan liberales como Y. ;
7 no se hard Y. amigos si habla tan francamente.
9. Convengo con Y. en eso, ademds no se debe decir todo lo qne se
piensa; pero para aprender nna lengna se debe practioar mncho y se
debe hablar de todo nn poco.
10. Y. tiene razon en eso, j ima conversaclon en qne no se habla, sino
de '^si hacc calor 6 fiio, si ha estado Y. en el teatro, en el conderto, 6 en
la iglesia, y de si tiene Y. el sombrero y d fnsil, y el vino, y el dinero de
Y. 6 del vedno'^ es mny cansada.
11. For snpncsto; pero Y. debe saber qne lo qne se Hama en ingles
»m€dl talk es mny de mods. — Lo s6, es mny de moda, y hasta necesario
algnnas veces.
12. {Le d\]o Y. eso 4 sn amigo? No se lo d^e, porqne mi hermana se
lo habia dicho ya.
13. I Forqn6 no me lo dyo Y. 4 mi ? Porqne mi hermano me ha dicho
qne se lo dir4 4 Y. mafiana.
14. |Toca Dn. Pedro bien d piano? No, sefior, pero se engafia 4 si
mismo j cree tocarlo mny bien.
176 LESSON XXXYI.
15. V^ngase V. esta tarde por aqui, 6 ir^mos i dar un paseo. — ^Bien,
si V. me espera hasta las seis, vendr6, pero no dntes, porqne no puedo
solir del escritorio hasta esa hora.
16. 2 Qu6 tal tiempo ha hecho hoy en la ciadad ? Hoy ha hecho bnen
tiempo y ayer hlzo bnen tiempo tambien ; pero maflana hard mol
tiempo.
17. iQ6mo sabe Y. que hard mal tiempo manana? Porqne en Naeva
York no hace nunca buen tiempo por t^es dias.
18. ^y. cree qne no hace buen tiempo mas que (aino) en la Habana?
Perdone V. no me gusta el clima de la Habana ni el de Nneva York.
19. Ent6nces, {qu6 clima le gosta & Y.? El de Espafia, porqne alii
tenemos verdaderamente las cnatro estaciones.
20. I Qu6 quiere Y. deeir ? Quiero decir qne en E^afia hace calor en
verano annque no mnchisimo ; en inviemo hace frio, pero no nos hela-
mos ; en otono hace nn excelente tiempo de otofio, y en la primayera
tonemos primavera.
21. ^Bien, jr no es lo mismo en Nneva York? Escdseme Y.; en
Nneva York no he conocido la primavera ; hay mny pocosdias de otoflo,
nn invierno larguisimo y un verano calurosisimo.
22. i Y en la Habana ? Eu la Habana hay todo el afio el verano de
Nneva York.
23. ^ Yo pensaba qne d Y. no le gnstaba hablar del tiempo? Y. no
me ha entendido; creo qne dobo hablarse dc todo, pero no siempre del
tiempo.
EXEUCISE.
1. Why do yon not come quicker when I call yon ? I cannot come
any quicker, my head aches.
2. Where do yon think Spanish is spoken best? In Madrid, and in
all parts of Old and New Castile {Costilla),
8. And is it not well spoken in South America? There is some
difference in the pronunciation; but, in general, persons of education
speak correctly, whether they be South Americans or Spaniards.
4. William, will you be good enough to take this letter to the post-
office when you are going to take your lesson ? I shall take it in the
afternoon, I have not time now.
5. Are there many organists in the United States ? Yes ; and in New
York, principally, there are a great many excellent organists and pianists.
6. Do you like that man^s manner of speaking? No, I do not; he is
too much of a* purist.
7. Is your brother studying natural history? I cannot tell you
* Engliah words In Ualict not to be innelAted into SiMmlah.
LBSSON XXXVI. 177
whether he is studying it or not ; but I know he has just bonght the
complete works of Buffon.
8. Who is Buffbn? A celebrated French naturalist.
9. What did that man do that was taken to prison this morning?
They say he was arrested {arrestar) for cruelty to animals.
10. Will he be punished for it? Of course; transgressors of that
kiud are rarely let off unpunished (pardoned).
11. What is the matter with Alexander ? A dog bit him in the hand.
12. Come here, Alexander; show me your hand. Is this the one?
No, it is the other.
13. Does it pain you much? It was very sore (pained) when I got
bitten, hut now it is less painful.
14. 1 have always told you how necessary it is to take care with dogs.
I know that ; and I shall do so in future.
15. Does your new watch go well ? Not very well ; it stops (itself)
three or four times a day.
16. Is your son getting on well in his studies ? Pretty well ; he has a
great deal of capacity, and is fond of study.
- 17. Look here, Charles. What do you wish?
18. Count from one to a thousand in Spanish. Oh ! I can do that
with the greatest ease.
19. Well, let us see? One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,
nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen,* sixteen, seventeen,
eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty-one, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy,
eighty, ninety, a hundred, a hundred and one, two hundred, three hun-
dred, four hundred, five hundred, six hundred, seven hundred, eight
hundred, nine hundred, a thousand.
20. How do they write that last word in Spanish ? I do not remember.
21. What is that? you do not remember! Did you not learn in the
lesson on pronunciation, at the beginning of the grammar, that in Spanish
every word is written just as it is pronounced ? Oh, yes, now I remember.
22. Tell me, if you please, Mr. R., is French as easy to pronounce as
Spanish ? They say it is much more difiScult, on the contrary.
23. But it is not impossible to learn French pronunciation ? I did not
say that ; I only said that they say it is more difficult than Spanish pro-
nunciation.
24. How do I pronounce ? Very well ; but, when reading or speaking,
take a little more care with the z,
25. Please to pronounce the name of that letter again (to return to
pronounce)? With the greatest pleasure; it is called z.
26. What other letter (letra) is pronounced like (the) zt Gy when it
comes (finds itself) before an e or an i.
8*
178
LESSON XXXYII.
LESSON XXXVII.
Subir.
Atender.
To go, or come up, to ascend.
To attend.
nmioATiTB — Present.
Atiendoy atiendea^ attende, aten- | I attend, &c.
demos, atcndeis, atienden. I
IMFERATiyE.
Atiende td, atienda ^\ atenda- Attend, dca
mos nosotros, atcnded voeo-
troa, atiendan ellos.
BUBJUNonvK — Present,
Atienda, atiendas, atienda, aten- I I may, or can, attend, dra.
damos, atendais, atiendan. I
Verbs conjugated like atendeb.
Ascender.
Descender.
Defender.
Entender.
Encender.
Perder.
Alegrarse.
Cbarlar.
Hallar.
Llegar.
Enviar.
Preparar.
Con tal que.
Puesto qnc.
Dado caso que.
Hasta que.
Ann oaando.
Por tanto.
Por coanto.
A m6nos de. )
A m^nos qne. f
To ascend, to monnt.
To descend.
To defend.
To understand.
To light, to kindle.
To lose.
To be glad, to rejoice.
To prattle, to chat.
To find.
To arrive.
To send.
To prepare.
CONJUNCTIONS.
On condition that ; provided
(that).
Since, inasmuch as; supposing
that
In case.
Until, till.
Even, although.
Therefore.
Seeing that, for.
Unless.
LESSON XXZYII.
170
Tambien.
Adem^
Ya.
Tampoco.
.Ojal4.
Steamer.
Balloon.
Cold.
Also, too.
Moreover, besides.
Whether, either.
Neither,
Would to God, God grant
Vapor.
Globo-
Resfriado.
Altura. Height
Friolera. Trifle.
COMPOSITION.
Deaeo qae est^ estadiando sa leccion.
Creo que la est& estudiasdo.
i Pienaa V. qae tiene razon ?
Kg pienao que la tenga.
No lo creer^ aunque me lo digan miL
Lo crco aunque ^1 lo niega.
Dodo que Tenga hoy.
Dado que baya yenido.
Dado caao que Y. no me encuentre en
casa, esp^reme Y. haeta que Tenga.
Asi lo bar^ con tal que Y. me prometa
Tolver pronto.
Yolver^ tan pronto como pueda.
Temo que no haya recibido mi carta.
I Ojal4 no la reciba I pero yo temo que
la redbidL
A m6nofl que Y. venga primero k ret-
me, yo no ire 4 verlo 4 Y.
Puesio que 61 baya yenido, i le hablar4
Y.?
Aunque haya yenido no le hablar6 An-
tes que 61 me hable.
I wish that he may be etudying his
lesson.
I think he is studying it
Do you think he is right f
I do not think he is.
I will not believe it though a thousand
tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it
I doubt whether he will come to-day.
I doubt his haying come.
In case you should not find me at home,
wait for me till I come.
I win do so, on condition that you
promise me to come back soon (or
quickly).
I shall return as soon as I can.
I fear he has not received my letter.
God grant that he may not receive it!
but I fear he will (receive it).
Unless you come first to see me, I will
not go to see you.
Supposing that he has come, will you
speak to him?
Although he may haye come I will not
speak to him before he speaks to me.
explanation;
179. ATENDBBy to attend, and all the verbs conjagated like
it, take an i before the last e of the radical letters, in the same
tenses and persons as the verb acertar^ and the same tense in
which {xcostar and mover change the o into ue ; i. e., in the first,
' ,.- :: — -rr — n _L 3, ~7 - "- .^ _c iiiii±:in-»»s»ii:s ittoo^
^ ^ -.^^ 'TIT — =•* .=: -iL'i_zi iir TL%. iLi ri: '-%ii=:^ ra sacli a^
'"' " - ji...- _:r - r- . -«- L r -^ -Ht^^iirLzLAte, as ixs
-^'^ - ^.^-' - ^ '^~ ^ r i X ^zTut-I^ -cFtilly witli tliie
-^ - . -* ; =£L -SI. jh^-- — - mil 12^ ilriff t^crs^s of tlie
■ '* ^ _ - I 1^ ^ i-"^ - ^i — • — -L 't^ ili*-'^** cf »be indica-
-"^ ^ -J -» ' .- — ^ i=-w :it ^ "xn-iTr^TiiZL. 7« *-T ^2je ixifimtive,
1^ . — — -- T 2L-T. J. iliE-i^rj :rL ^^-r — -~= ~^ w^ben tlie
*" ^ "^ ^ -_r - ^ - ' 1 ' - *^ - ^ ^if "tIij^ Ti.»-»>i, ^ ^bole volume
' ,, -J ^t . 1-^^ 1 v-c - f. ^cir^ i l*i.r>* ^Vj^se izkost likely
.^TT'v:-!"^' Ti.-i^ f' ■ "-- '^ ^'^V «r- T^ ^<r^>^^ consent,
' >'*-* -"*"• *" "^ "'••^f^ '".rFioramcf^ prefer-
»^ -- - ;-'"; •-. ^.v^
T:- ^; i:- • ^**"*^.'"? '"*''^^ ^>:^-^iTvi l>ec3iuse t^o are not
^.-^ • Tii: -^i-^ ^' ^-sx o. ^iiziii^a^ Jcc^ will be aecom-
^ .::.•: i- "3: si^* ^ - ^ TI^ c-^yvems tbe siiboTOiiiate one
.1 i'7- c - .i : -^^"^ **"/"* ^ ;^^>^*lT*e^ ^w-l^n the accomplish-
.. .. .. ::. i - ^ :::i':V^ G-.-vcms i^ in any of tbose of
-.f .: : ..:. : vl^ t-^ »^'-— ^ t^^^axdoa as certain to take
^- V ^..^,. .^.^^^ ^^ i^ to tbosc ^irtio (may) have
1^:=^.' T 4 3* ra«r '^ ^^^^ I ^^^<^ >* to tbe foxir wbo bave (or aw)
fc ibe fim example, the verb is put in tbe subjunctive 1)0-
LBS80N XXXVII. 181
cause the speaker is not positive how many have come, or
whether any have as yet come. In the second, the indicative
is employed, because the speaker is certain of the arrival of the
persons alladed to, and also of their numher.
182. There are in Spanish certain conjunctions which re-
quire the subjunctive mood after them, on account of the in-
delinite and uncertain meaning which they commonly have.
Some of them, however, it will he seen, occasionally occur with
a positive signification, and may, in that case, he used with the
indicative after them ; as.
No lo cTeer6 aunque me ) ^
lodiganmn. \ Contingent
Lo creo aunque 41 me |
loniega. \ Certain.
I win not believe it tboiigh a thou-
sand tell it to me.
I belieye it, although he denies it (to
me).
183. Finally, there are other parts of speech, and even
whole phrases, which, on account of their indeterminate and
doubtful, or contingent, meaning, require the subjunctive after
them.
184. Thb pbesent tensb of the suBJUNcnvB marks a
contingent action as going on at the present moment, or to take
place at some future time ; as,
Dudo que yenga. | I doubt whether he wUl coma
N. B. — Another use of this tense has been already noticed
when treating of the imperative. (See Lesson XXXV.)
185. The pebfect tense expresses a doubtful or contin-
gent action or event, as having been completed some time past,
or that will have taken place before the completion of another
ftiture action or event ; as.
Budo que haya vcnido.
To le dar6 8u libro cuando H me
haya dado el mio.
I doubt whether he haa come.
I shall giye him his book when he
will have given me mine.
CONVEBSATION AND VERSION.
1. i Espera V. que llegue hoy el vapor de Eoropa? Oreo que ha lle-
gado esta mafiana.
2. To dudo que haya llegado todavia. i Quiere V. enviar su criado
4proguntar si ha Degado el vapor? Con mucho gusto, porque yo tam-
bien deseo tener noticias de Europa.
8. I Oree V. que llegarA un dia en que podamos ir 4 Europa en globoe
182 LBS80K XXXVII.
aereosMUiooe? Macho me alegnir6 qne Ilegae ese dia, pero creo qne no
lo yer^aam nosotros, porque es may dificil, j qmzik imposlble, el hallar la
direcdon de los globos.
4. iSuben mnj alto los globos ? No creo qne snban i mas de dos 6
ires mil pi6a, pero si se qniere pneden sabir hasta la altora de qoince 6
diez J seis mil pi6s.
6. Dado caso que Degoe hoy el vi^r; |espera V. & sa amigo ? For
sapnesto qae si, pnesto qne me escribe qne Uegard en este nusmo vapor.
6. Ojal4 llegne, pero temo mncho qne haya tornado otro vapor j qne
no llegne hasta la aemana pr6zima.
7. ^Dnda Y. qne haya eetncUado sn leccion ? Dndo qne la haja estn-
diadado, porqne es mny holgazan.
8. A m6no8 qne Y. estndie bien las leociones j haga con mncho cni-
dado los ^erdcios de la gram&tica, no aprender4 Y. el espafiol.
9. Si, pero 70 creia qne se podia aprender nna lengna con la pr^ctioa
solamente. — ^Asi es; pero ent6nce8 se necesita practicar todos los dias
con qnien la hable may bien.
10. ^£n cn4nto tiempo piensa Y. qne hablar6 70 el espafiol ? Y. lo
hab]ar4 cnando sepa bien todias las lecciones de la gram^ca, 7 ba7a
practicado 7 escrito los ejercicios.
11. Y despnes qne ha7a aprendido toda la gram4tica, practicado, 7
escrito los ejercicios, |hablar6 perfoctamente el espafiol? No, sefior;
pero hablard Y. bastante correctamente para Uevar nna conversacion, es-
cribir nna correspondencia, 7 poder hacer negocios en esta lengna.
12. Yo pensaba qne el espafiol era nna lengna mn7 faciL — Yerdadera-
mente lo es para aprender lo qne acabo de decirle 4 Y. ; pero para har
blarlo perfectamente como Y. qniere, todas las lengnas son difioiles.
18. Y si Y. no lo cree, h&game el favor de dedrme si habla Y. sn pro-
pia lengna 7 la escribe perfectamente.— Yo confieso qne todavia tengo
algo que aprender en el ingl6s.
14. Cr6ame Y., amigo mio, el estndio de nna lengna no es nna friolera.
— Creo qne tiene Y. mncha razon ; pero ha7 mnchos qne qnieren aprenderlo
todo 7 mn7 pocos qne qnieran estndiar.
15. jMe promete Y. venir 6 verme cnando venga 4 la cindad? Ann-
qne venga 4 la cindad no podr6 venir 4 ver 4 Y. 4 m^noa qne acabe tem-
prano mis negocios.
16. jSabe Y. hacer frases (gentenees) en espafiol con todos los tiempoa
del modo indicative? Sf, sefior, 7 tambien con el imperativo, el presente
7 el perfecto de sabjnnctivo.
17. Mn7 bien, ent6nces hdgame Y. ocho frases con los ocho tiempos de
indicative, nna con el imperative 7 dos con el presente 7 perfecto de
snbjnnctivo de cnalqniera verbo.
LESSON XXXVII. 183
18. lEstdV. malo? iHaestado Y.boy en elescritorio? jEstabaV.
en stt cosa cuando sn amigo fd6 4 verle ? i Habia V. estado en el teatro
^ntes de ir al baile ? i Estuvo Y. ayer en la ciudad? |Qa6 bizo Y. asi
quo hnbo estado algnn tiempo en el botel ? i Estard Y. en casa mafiana
todo el dia ? i Habr4 escrito Y. sn ejeroicio ^tes de las onatro ? £6ta-
dia tus lecciones y escribe los ejercicios. No pierdas el tiempo. jDada
y. qno yo sepa mi leccion? £ Duda Y. que yo la baya estadiado?
EXERCISE.
1. Jobn, tbere is some one at tbe door ; go and see wbo it is. Yes, sir.
2. Is Mr. Retortillo in ? Yes, sir ; wbo sball I say wisbes to see bim?
Tell bim tbat Mr. Perez wisbes to speak to bim a moment.
8. Mr. Perez wisbes to see yon a moment^ sir. Let (^tie) bim come up.
. 4. Ob! i am so glad to see yonl How are yon? bow bave you
been? wbcn did you return?— I arrived by tbe nA/^amer Napoleon IlL^
on Wednesday last.
5. Did you receive all tbe letters I wrote you during {durante) my
absence ? I received one in Marcb, dated from Borne.
6. How did you spend tbe time ? did you pass tbrougb Spain, as you
bad intended ? No ; wbile I was still in Paris, and preparing to set out
for Madrid, I learned tbat my brotber was very ill in Florence.
7. Indeed I I am very sorry to bear tbat. Wbat was tbe matter
witb bim Cwbat bad be) ? A beavy (strong) cold, tbat be bad caugbt on
tis way from Turin to Florence.
8. He had not, I believe, enjoyed very good bealtb for a long time be-
fore leaving borne ? No, be bas always been sickly ; but principally for
about a year before bis voyage to Europe, be bad colds almost every
month, and I may say tbat be was never witbout beadacbes, day or
night.
9. Had be an Italian physician to attend bim ? No, Dr. Perez, bis
family physician, wbo was travelling tbrougb Italy tbat same winter, just
arrived at Florence tbe same dax as my brotber, and, bearing of bis ill-
ness, went at once to see bim.
10. How long was be ill? Nearly three weeks.
11. How ? Are you going away so soon ? Sit down and let us chat
for half an bour about your famOy. Thank you ; I cannot stay any
longer now, but I shall have tbe pleasure of seeing you again to-morrow.
12. Where are your brothers ? They are gone to see tbe balloon that
is to go up this afternoon.
13. Indeed ? I thought tbe baHoon was not to go up until Saturday.
It was not to have gone up before Saturday; but, on account of tbe fine
weather, it is to go up this afternoon.
184' LBSSON ZXXTIII.
14. Will many persons go up in it? Very few, I think; people in
general do not like to go to sack a height.
15. Do yon understand all that is said in Spanish ? I understand more
and more every day ; but there are still many words and constructions
tliat I do not know.
16. How long do you think it will be before I can understand all, and
speak like a native? That is a hard question to answer; provided you
study with attention, read a great deal, and practice with Spaniards, you
will soon understand and speak with ease ; but it is difficult for a foreigner
to speak any language exactly like a native.
17. But do you believe it to be impossible ? No, I do not say it is im-
possible, but it is very difficult ; and, besides, I do not think it is neccs-
sary. All that is required (wanted) is correctness, and to be able to con-
verse with ease.
18. Has John's servant lighted the fire ? Not yet ; John does not wish'
it to be lighted until he returns.
19. Well, Charles, have you found out* the meaning of the word yoa
asked me for yesterday? No, sir; I have searched for it in all the dic-
tionaries, and it is not to be found in any of them.
20. Why do you not ask your teacher ? he can tell you at once. Yes,
I know th&t very well ; but I do not like to ask him so many questions :
every day he comes I have a new one to ask him.
21. Do not stop at trifles of that kind; your teacher is very glad to be
able to answer all questions, knowing that by that means (medio) you
will learn better and more quickly.
22. I am very glad to see you defend him, for Alexander said he was
not fond of answering questions, and did not like inquisitive persons. —
Neither he does ; but an inquisitive person is one thing, and a person
who asks questions in order to gmn knowledge is another.
LESSON XXXVIII.
Sentir. (Look far the eonjugatum I To feel, to be sorry for.
of thia verb at p, B96), I
Verba conjugated like sentib.
Arrepentirse. L To repent.
Consentir. To consent
Preforir. To prefer.
• EngllBh words itaiieUed not to be tnuuhtod.
LK880K XXXYIII.
185
Animar.
Desanhnar.
Ajndar.
Enfermar.
Exi^.
Quedar.
Pepfecciouar.
Usar.
Generalmcnteb
De memoria.
Ambos.
De continno.
Pere^oao.
Examen.
Oficio.
Alberto.
Norte.
Sur.
Este, oriente.
To secure, to insure, to assore.
To animate, to encourage, to in-
duce.
To dishearten, to discourage.
To aid, to help.
To fall (or get) sick, to make
sick.
To exact, to require.
To remain.
To perfect, to finish.
To use, to wear.
Generally.
By heart.
Both.
Continually.
Lazy.
Occidente.
Examination.
Trade, office.
Albert
North.
South.
East
West.
Ilelena.
Persona.
Lectura.
Profcsion.
Escuela.
Muerte.
Vida.
Promesa.
Ellen.
Person.
Beading, lecture.
Profession.
School.
Death.
life.
Promise.
List of the present participles or verbal nouns and adjectives formed from
' introdticed.
Viviente.
Estudiante.
Escribiente.
Residente.
Tocante (en 6r-
den &).
Keinante.
Saliente.
Amante.
Practicante.
Princlpiante.
the verbs already
Living being.
Student.
A lawyer's clerk,
a writer in a
commercial
house.
Resident
Concerning.
Reigning.
Salient
Lover.
Practitioner.
Be^ner.
Paseante.
Creyente.
Conveniente.
Lnportante.
Tratante.
Cortante.
Gobernante.
Contanto.
Doliente.
Walker, passer-
by, promeuader.
Believer.
Convenient, suita-
ble.
Important
Dealer.
Sharp, edged.
Governing.
Ready.
Sad, afflicted,
mournful.
186
LESSON XXXVIII.
COMPOSITION.
Tocante 4 lo que V. me d^o d otro <fia,
deseo que no ae hable mw de ella
Entraron canUnda
Le encontraron lejcnda
I Qa6 est4 V. haclendo ?
Eatoy leyenda
Vengo de comer.
TnilNiJa sin deacansar.
El trabiyar ea boeno para mnchaa
El deacansar deapnea de trabajar es
neceaaria
La Timoa bailar.
Emanad ea mi estadiante industrioso.
^ Ea y . reaideote de loa tSatadoa Unidos ?
ti ea baen creyente^
Ckmcening what you told me the other
day, I wiah no more to be said
abont it
They came In singing.
They fomid him reading.
What are you doing ?
I am reading.
I am coming firom dinner.
He labors without resting.
Work la good for many things.
Rest after labor is necessary.
We saw her dandng.
Emanad is an industrious student
Are you a reddent of the United States f
He is a good bdieyer.
EXPLANATION.
186. Present Participles. — Many Spanish verbs have,
besides the past or passive participle, another called the present
or active participla Those formed £rom verbs of the first con-
jugation end in ante; as, amante^ loving, lover; and those
formed frbm the second and third end in iente or erUe\ as, asis-
tente^ assistant, obedienCej obedient.
Participles of this kind cannot be formed firom all verbs,
and indeed those already in existence can only be regarded as
mere verbal noans or adjectives, inasmuch as, with the excep-
tion of a very limited number to be found in use, such as to-
carUCy they do not follow the regimen of the verbs from which
they are derived.
187. GERUNDa — ^Instead of the present participle, as a part
of the verb, the gerund is now employed, and it corresponds,
therefore, exactly to the English progressive form in inff\ as,
Entraron cantando. | They came in singing.
Le encontraron leyenda | They found him reading.
188. The verb estar^ as has already been mentioned, can
iisssoir zzxYiii. 187
be used with the gerund in Spanish, as in English the verb to
fc, with the present participle ; as,
To esioy Uyendo. | I am readiiig.
£IIos aian eseribiendo. \ They are writing.
189. The i N Fm r A i vE is used in Spanish when in English
the present participle, preceded hj a preposition, is used ; as,
Se fii^ tin verle. | He went away without seeing him.
Trabaja «n deacanaar. | He labon without resting.
190. The rNFiNTnYE is also used as a verbal noun or pres-
ent participle, in which case it takes the masculine definite
article before it ; as,
El trabajar es biieno pant la salad.
Bl descansar despnes de trabajar
mncho es necesaria
Work ia good for the health.
Rest is necessary after much work.
191. The iNTnnrnns is often rendered in English by the
present participle, when in Spanish it is governed by another
verb; as, «
Ia vifno9 bailor. \ We saw her dancing.
CONVERSATIOX AND VEBSION.
1. (Le. gosta k Y. mas leer que escribir ? He gostan 4mbas cosas,
pero creo que leyendo se aprende mas que eseribiendo.
2. |Es estudioso ese machacho ? No, sefior, pero hoy estadia mucho
porqne mafiana tienen ex^enes en sn escnela.
8. 2 Piensa V. que sea conveniente ese negocio ? Yo pienso qno lo es,
pero qoiza no lo sea.
4. I Qa6 est& Y. haciendo ? Estoy estadiando mi lecdon de espafiol.
6. I Sintid Helena mncho la maerte de sa amiga ? La sinti6 tanto que
eiiferm6.
6. I G6mo se siente ahora? Est& an poco m^*or.~Me alegro qne est6
mejor, porqne es may baena machacha.
7. ^Paede Y. prestarme trescientos pesos ? Paedo prest&rselos d Y.,
pero no me gosta el prestar dinero.
8. 1 06mo se aprende 4 hablar el espaftol ? Hablando se aprendo &
hablar; delmismo modo qao bailando se aprende & baUar y haciendo
zapatos se q)rende & zapatero.
9. {Se arrepinti6 aqacl hombre de sa mala accion ? No lo creo por-
qne es on pfcaro qae vive de engafiar.
10. {Qae profesion t. ofido tieue? No tiene ni oficio, ni profesion
ningana, es an pasoante.
188 LESSON XXXTIII.
•
11. jDe d6nde viene V. ? Vengo de comer.
12. ^De d6nde viene el viento? Yiene dd Sur, pero esta mafiana
venia del Este.
18. I liaeve en Nueva York cuando est& el viento al Este ? No, sellor,
generalmente Uaeve cuando el viento est& al Oeste.
14. Alberto, animate, 86 estadioso j aprende de memoria la leccion
para manana. Pap&, hace macho calor 7 estoj cansado.
16. Bien, no te desanimes, descansa nn poco 7 vuelve 4 trabiyar des-
pnes. — ^y. qniere que yo estS trabfgando continuamente.
16. No, querido, no qniero que trabiges demasiado ; pero aca^rdato quo
en este mnndo no se logra nada sin trabigar. — ^Bien, papd, yo b6 que V.
tiene aempre razon, descansar6 nn poco ahora y despues acabar^ de esta-
diar mi leccion.
17. i 8e qued6 mucho tiempo su amigo de Y. en el condcrto ? Ambos
nos quedamos hasta que se acffb6.
18. ^Tuvieron Yds. ayer ex^menes en la escnela? Ayer tnvimos ex^
men de gramdtica, dntes de ayer de Mstoria, hoy de espafiol y mafiana
lo tcndr6mos de aritm^tica.
19. Manuel, lev6ntate y vete k la^esouela. |No sabes qu6 bora es?
Ko, sefior, yo pensaba que era temprano.
20. I G6mo, temprano ? Ya son las siete y media y todavla tienea que
lavarte y almorzar; jvamos, vamos, perezoso, arribal — ^Alla voy papdi^
alia voy ; y exctiseme Y., no sabia que era tan tarde.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you heard any more conoeming the matter we were speak-
ing of the other day? Nothing tother ; but I expect by to-morrow to
be able to tell you something more.
2. When does your fiiend intend setting out on his travel to the
South ? Probably by the latter end {i&Uimas) of November, or beginning
of December.
8. Is he to be long absent ? He knows nothing as yet of how long
he may be absent.
4. Concerning books to be read in order to perfect one's self in a
language, what kind do you think the best? There is little difference
between books to be used for that purpose (propdsito).
6, Are there not some better than all the others? Not that I know
of: each student will prefer those that treat of the subject he is
fondest of.
6. But beginners cannot do so, for there are many books too difficult
for them; is it not so? Certainly; I thought it needless to say that
beginners must search for books easy to be read.
LBSSON xrxVIII. 189
7. It seems to me that newspaper reading is very useful; what do
joa think? Yea» aad especially for those who take pleasure in studying
the politics of the day.*
8. Do you think I shall be able to understand Oeirantes' great work
ifter I h&ve gone through (reeorrir) the whole of the grammar? No,
sir, you will not ; you will have to read and study a great deal before
you will be able to understand thoroughly the writings of any of the
Spanish classic anthers.
9. Who is that young man we met when walking, and to whom you
spoke ? He is a lawyer's derk.
10. Does he make much money at that occupation? I cannot teU you;
but he is nndonbtedly a man of talent (talento).
11. Are the children gone to school yet, Louisa? All but Henry,
who wishes not to go to-day, if you will consent to it.
12. I am a&aid he is a very lazy boy; he is continually asking not to
be sent to school.
13. How can he expect to learn if he neither goes to school nor studies
St home ? He wants to study at home ; he says that if you consent to
his staying at home, he will study anything you please.
14. Wen, I shall give him something to learn by heart, and we shall
see what he does. — ^Very well ; but do not give him too mnch to do at
the beginidng, for he is easily disheartened.
15. I never require of any one more than he is able to do. — ^That is
perfectly right.
16. Tell Charles and Albert that I want to see them, and that I have
two books for them. — ^I need not go to tell them ; here they are coming.
lY. Come here, boys. — ^Well, papa, what do you want us for ?
18. To give you these two books: one for each.— How beautiful!
— ^Yes, that is true; but they are something more than beautiftil : they
are good.
19. What do they treat of? This one treats of man in life and of all
Vuing beings ; and that one of man's state after death.
20. Now, I wish you to read a chapter each one in his book every
day, after your lessons ; and then yon may go out and walk for an hour.
— ^Thank you, sir ; and we can assure you that we shall do so with the
greatest pleasure.
21. Tell me, Albert, where did you buy that hat? That is one of those
hats that were worn three summers ago. I know that very well, for I
bought it at the time they were being worn, and I have worn it ever
since.
22. This author seems to have travelled a great deal ; have you read
any of his travels ? Yes, and I like them exceedingly (muchmmo).
190
LISBON XXZIX.
23. I am going to read ibem, too, as soon as I have tiineu In what
ooantries did he travel principally ? He has been^in nearly every cona-
try in the world, East, West, North and South.
24. What is the trade or profeanon of that person, Jnst gone out ? He
is a phyidcian ; he has been in this dty f(v now nearly ^yq yean. He is
an excellent practitioner.
LESSON XXXIX.
Pedir. (Looh for ths conjugation 1 To petition, to ask for.
qfthuwrbatp.B9fi,y I
Verbs e&f^ttgated like fedib.
Oompetir.
To contend, to compete.
Elejir.
To elect, to choose.
Medir.
To measore.
Renh*.
To qnarrel, to scold.
Segidr.
To follow.
Bendlr.
To render; to exhaust, to do out^
to wear out
Bepetir.
To repeat
Servir.
To serve.
Tefiir.
To dye.
Vestir.
To dress.
Divertirse. "^
To amuse one^s self.
Oa9arse. •
To marry; to get (or be) married.
Besar.
To kiss.
Enamorarse.
To fall in love.
Oelebrar.
Oenar.
Presentar.
To celebrate, to praise, to be glad.
To sup.
To present, to introduce one per-
son to the acquaintance of
Beconooer.
another.
To recognize, to examine closely.
Agradeoer.
To estimate, to value, to esteem.
To thank, to be tliankful, to be
obliged.
En hora buena.
Adasl.
It is weU, well and good.
So so.
I.B8SOH XZXIX.
101
TalcoaL
Middling, io 80.
Hastalavista.
nil I see yon again.
Hastalaego.
Good-bye for a while.
Sin novedad.
Well, in a good state of health.
Mediaiuunoate.
Middling.
I Ah I (m^)
~AhI
lOhl (wU.)
OhI
Eespetablo.
Belicado.
Delicate, weak.
Infinito.
Infinite.
Junto.
Near, dose to.
IKsoreto.
Discreet
Favor.
Favor.
Tertnlta.
t
Party, soiree.
Beso.
Kisa.
Novedad.
Novelty.
ServidOT.
Servant
Oelobradon.
Celebration.
Pi6u
Foot
Servant
Honor.
Honor.
Ocasion.
Occasion.
Vcstido.
Dreaft.
Coroplacencia.
Complaisance.
Espoao.
Husband.
Bondad.
Goodness, kind-
Aaento.
Seat
ness.
Oapitola
Chapter.
Esposa.
Wife.
Orden.
Order, command.
Memorias.
Regards.
Enhorabuena.
Oongratnlatiox^
COMPO
smoN.
iQn6 1e i^de 4 Y. ese hombre?
Kg me pide nada; me pregmita que
bora 68.
Beso 4 Y. la mano, caballero.
Beso 4 Y. la suya.
iC6mo e6t4 si^fazmlia de Y. ?
Todos estan bien, gradas; ^ y la de Y. ?
Asi asi; loB nifios estan may bnenofl,
pero mi esposa no se siente bien.
A los pi6s de Y., seflora.
Beso 4 Y. la mano, caballero.
A la 6Tden de Y., Don Ped^.
What is that man asking for ?
He is asking me for nothing ; he is ask-
ing me what o'clock it is.
(A Sfpaniih expremcm of courtesy^ rued
at meeting or parting. No equivalent
in Engliah,)
{Reply to the above,)
How is yoor family ?
AH are well, thanic you ; and yours ?
So so ; the children are very well, but
my wife does not feel well.
{Spanith expreuion of courtesy^ uted to
ladies. No JSnglish equivalent,)
{The lady^B reply to the above,)
At your service, Mr. Peter.
192
LBSSON ZXXIZ.
Yaya V. oon Dios, Don Juan.
Buenos dias, Dofia Luisa, i c6mo lo pasa
V.hoy?
Bien, para aervir 4 V. ; i y V. ?
Sin novedad k la dispoddon de V.
Sefior D. M., tengo el honor de pre-
sentarle al Sr. D. P.
</abaIlero, oelebro la ocasion de conocer
4V.
Tenga V. la bondad de darme el cu-
chUlo.
Con mucho goato.
MUgradas.
H&game V. d fkror de dedrme, c6nio
ae Uama esto en espafioL
• Sfrvase Y. tomar asiento.
Lo dento macho, pero no puedo, tengo
que marcharme.
Tenga V. la complacenda de ponenne
4 los pi4s de su esposa de V.
Ood be with you, Mr. John.
Good morning, Miss Looisa, how da
you do toHiay?
Wdl, thank you ; and you ?
I am yery well too, thank you.
Mr. H., I hare the honor to intiodace
(or present) you to Mr. P.
I am happy to make your acquaintance,
sir.
Have the goodness to gire me the knife.
With much pleasure.
Thank you.
Be kind enough to tell me what you call
this in Spanish.
Please to take a seat
I am very sorry, but I cannot, I must
be off.
Have the goodness to present my re-
gards to your lady (or wife).
EXPLANATION.
192. Pedib. — ^A paradigm will be found at the end of the
grammar, showing the tenses and persons in which this verb
and all those conjugated like it change the e of their root into e.
193. The usual forms of salutations, among gentlemen
in greeting each other, are the following :
Beso & y. la mano.
Servidor de V., caballero.
A la 6rden de Y.
Vaya V. con Dios.
Tenga V. muy buenos dias.
I kiss your hand.
Tour servant, sir.
Your most obedient
Adieu, or Qod be with you.
Good day to you.
This last expression is used from the earliest part of the
morning till two or three hours after meridian ; from which
time till dark is used, ^
Buenas tardes. | Good afternoon ;
and from dark until the following morning, both on meeting
and taking leave,
Buenas noches. | Good night
All these expressions are always used in Spanish in the
plural number.
I.SSSOH XZXIX.
193
In saluting a lady, the first expression most frequently made
use of is : «.
A Io3 pi^ de Y., sefiora. | Madam, at your feel
The lady's reply is :
Beso i Y. la mano, caballera | I kiss your hand, sir.
To inquire after another's health :
C6mo lo pasa Y. f or c6mo esU Y. ? | How do yon do f
To answer :
Hedianameate bien.
Perfectamente bien. •
Para seryir & V.
May bien, gradas.
ijsl asi, or tal coal; y Y., i c6mo lo
pasa?
&inoyedad,
A la dispoaidon de Y.
Middling well
Perfectly well
At your service.
Yeiy well, thank yoo.
So so ; and how do yoa do?
Always well
At your seMoe.
For introducing one person to another:
Scfior Don M., tengo el honor de pre- I Mr. M., I have the honor of intro-
sentaxle al Sefior Don P.
And the reply is :
Ciaballero, celebro la ocasion de cono-
cer & v., or
B6con6zcame Y. per un servidor
sayo.
For asking or requesting :
Tenga Y. la bondad de darme.
H&game Y. el fiivor de decirme.
Sirvase Y., or tenga Y. la compla-
oencia de.
And for returning thanks :
Ifilgracias, or
Machlsimas gradas.
Se k> agradezco & Y. infinito.
dadng Mr. P. to yon.
Sr, I am happy to make your ao-
quaintance.
I am entirely at your service.
Have the goodness to ^ve me.
Do me the favor to tell me.
Have the kindness to.
A thousand thanks.
Many thanks.
I am very much obliged to you.
CONVERSATION AND YERSION.
1. Sefior D. Juan, jqa6 le pide & Y. mi mnchacho? No me pide
nada; me pregnnta qn6 hora es.
2. Yo creia qae le'pedia & Y. dinero, porqne Q. est4 dempre pidiendo
194 LE8BOK XXXIX.
centavos k todo el mundo. — ^Yaya! no lo rifia Y. ; & todos los nifios les
gasta que les den centaros. — ^Verdad es, pero & mi no me gasta que los
mios los pidan.
8. Digame Y., D. Pedro, i qni^n es aqnella sefiorita qne est4 sentada
en el sofd junto d sn esposa de Y. ? Esa es ana sefiorita muj amable,
hija del Sefior D. Lois Martinez, {iamilia may respetable 4 quien conoci
haoe machos afios.
4. % Qaicre Y. haoerme el &vor de presentarme & ella ? Con mncfao
gasto; pero le advierto que no ee enamore de la Sefiorita Martinez, poi^
que est4 para casarse.
6. Pierda Y. cnidado; yo solo deseo conocerla para gozar de sn dis-
oreta conversacion. — En hora buena venga Y. y lo presentar^.
6. Sefiorita Martinez, tengo el honor de presentar 4 Y. al Sefior Don
Juan McLeren. — Oaballero, celebro la ocasion de conooer 4 Y. — Sefiorita,
recon6zcame Y. por so servidor.
7. I Ah 1 aqoi viene Don Alberto y so esposa.^Sirvaose Yds. posar
adelante.
8. I Oh I Sefior Don*Pedro, me alegro mocho de encontrar 4 Y. por
ac4. Mil gradas, sefiora, soy may feliz en volver 4 yer 4 Yds.
9. A los pi^s de Y., Sefiorita Martinez. — ^Beso 4 Y. la mano, caballero.
10. Dofia Margarita, i c6mo est4 so Emilia de V. ? To^os estan bicn,
gracias, ^y la de Y. ? Asi asi ; los nifios estan may baenos, pero mi esposa
est4 delicada.
11. Slrvase Y. tomar as&ento, D. Alberto. — ^Lo siento mncho, pero no
paedo; he prometido 4 mi madre volver pronto para cenar con ello.
12. Sefioras, 4 los pi6s de Yds. Beso 4 Yds. la mano oaballeros.
18. A la 6rden de Y., D. Pedro. 'Yaya Y. con Dios, D. Joan.
14. |Tenga Y. may boenas noches, Dofia Loisa, o6mo lo pasa Y. hoy?
Bien, para servir 4 Y., jy Y. ? Sm novedad, 4 la disposicion de Y.
15. Baenas noohes, D. Pedro; basta mafiana. Hasta mafiana, p6n-
game Y. 4 los pids de sa sefiora.
16. D6 Y. memorias de mi parte 4 toda la fEonilia.— De so parte de Y.
lo estiraar4n mncho.
17. Adios, Manael, |4 d6nde yas tan de prisa? Yoy 4 acompafiar 4
mi hermana al teatro, y desde aUi ir6mos 4 la tertolia dd, Sefior MarracL
18. Celebrar4 qoe te diviertas macho. Yo tambien pienso ir 4 la ter-
tolia del Sefior Martaci ; con qoe, asi no te digo adios, ya nos yer^mos. —
Uasta la yista. — ^Hasta loego.
EXERCISE.
1. Good morning, Oharles I Are you neyer going to set op f^Why,
how late is it?
I.ESSOK XXZIZ. 195
SL It is near nine oMock ; bnt it Ss nothing new to see jon in bed at
tittt hpur. Ah ! yon are always making fhn of me for lying so long in
the morning^ and I think I rise very early.
3. Up, then, and dress yourself as quickly as possible, I want yon to
eome and breakfast with me.
4. Indeed ! What good things are you going to ^ve me ? You will
hsve a first-rate breakfast, with excellent wine, followed by delicious
chocolate.
5. Tell me, my dear/eUow : I can never remember the name of that
jonng lady that I met at your raster's parfy ; what is her name ? Oh,
no matter ; my sister has invited her to dine this evening, and if you
wait for dinner with us I wiU intvoduoe you to her.
6. Papa, here is my friend Mr. N., whom I have the pleasure to pre*
9wt to yoo. I am very hi^py to know you, dr.
7. Be kind enough to take a seat, and excuse me an instant; I shall be
Uck immediately. Certainly, su-.
8. How are your old Mends the Retortillos? TJiey are very well,
t^k yoa; they are to be here this evening, so you can have a chat
with them.
9- Why ^d you not introduce me long ago to your &ther ? I am
^^ Borry for not having -done so^ and my father has often scolded me
for my n^ect (negligeneia).
10. Do jgn expect your uncle to-day ? I do not ; but if he comes,
wen and good, we shall be glad to see him«
11. Win you be good enough tp give me that newspaper that is on the
cihair next tiie window ? With the greatest pleasure.
12. What news is there this morning? I see that a new president
iprencUnte) has been elected in one of tiie provinces of 8onth America.
13. They might have chosen auother occasion for electing him, I think.
Ah, of course; they are at war ^irith Spain.
14. How much do they ask for the house that is for sale in Fifteenth
street? Father was saying yesterday that they are asking a very high
price.
15. What do you understand by a high price? More than the house
is worth (valer).
16. You seem very much dissatisfied at the price ; have you any in-
tention of buying the house? Tes, unless it has already been sold.
17. What news have you from Boston ? is Miss Guevara married yet?
I have not heard from the family for a month ; but I suppose she must
be married by this time; she was to bcnnarried in July.
18. Will you come and take a wsSk before dinner? Ah, you must ex-
cuse me ; believe me, I am worn out with fatigue.
196
LESSOV XL.
19. What is that you said, Emanael? 1 have told yon once, and I
shall not repeat it
20. Do yon know that young lady who is fflttlng on the sofa beside
your niece ? Yes ; I- will introdnce yon to her, if yon wish.
21. When will yon introdnce me ? Jnst now, on condition that yoa
win not fall in love with her.
22. Wen, will yon promise ? I will ; yon know I am going to get
married, and I only wish to enjoy her charming conversation.
23.' Miss Yeleta, allow me to have the honor of introdndng to. yoa
Mr. Romelio. How do yon do, sir ? I am very happy to know yon, miss.
2^ Well, John, what do yon think of her? That she is chaiming;
and I am exceedin^y obliged to you for introdncing me.
25. Oh, Louisa! come and look at this beautiful dress. — Oh, how
beautiful ! How much did it cost ?— Only a trifle of $120.
26. How much did yon pay for that last coat of yours, Alexander ?
^Only eighty dollars. — Not very much aiali(noMfne haee caro).
LESSON XL.
Condndr. {See eonjuffotion ^ this | To conduct, to lead, to drive.
verb in at p. Z98.)
Producir.
Traducir.
Introducir.
Verbt eor0ugaU(
i like ooNDuciB.
To produce.
To introduce.
Obrar.
Envidiar.
Olvidar.
Exi«t.ir.
\.
To act
To envy.
To forget
To exist
Segun (prep,).
Siqmera (eonj.)
Colectivo.
Particular.
According to.
At least, even.
Collective.
Private, particular.
^ K0X7NB.
IS^rcito.
Gentio.
Rebafio.
Army.
Crowd.
Flock, herd.
Tropa.
Gente.
Multitude
Troop.
People.
Multitude.
I.SSSOH XL.
Pkr.
Pair, couple.
Docena.
Dozen.
CenteoAres.
JELmidreds.
Centena.
A hundred.
Thoosazids.
Mitad.
Half.
Bterdo.
The third.
Lateroera.
The third.
Qcoarto.
The fourth.
La cnarta parte.
The fourth, &<
n dozayo.
The twelfth.
Una infinidad.
An infinity.
Qdoble.
The doable.
E^
Kg.
Conciencia.
Conacience.
Caricter.
Character.
Circonstancia.
Circumstance.
Habitante.
Inhabitant.
Uva.
Grape.
Gobiemo.
GrOTermnent
Especie.
Species, kind.
BecoTBO.
Becoorse, resonr-
Karanja.
Orange.
sea.
Castafia.
Chestnut.
Konte.
Mountain,
Nuez.
Nut
Boaqne,
Wood (forest).
Cuestion.
Question.
Bio.
River.
Producdon.
Production.
lago.
Lake.
Libertad.
Libertj.
Kombre.
Nonn, name.
Gansa.
Cause.
Camero merino
. Merino fiheep.
Irlanda.
Ireland.
Natoraleza.
Nature.
COMPOS
3inON.
197
Obr& aegon sn ooncieDcia.
Babla segon las drcunstaneiis.
Lo caento segun me lo ban contado.
E&tr6 (or oitraron) en la ciadad una
tropa de soldados.
En d ejSrdto de los Estadcn Unidoe
haUa soldados de todas las nadones,
£1 tercio (or la tercera parte) de esos
hombres no aaben escribir.
£1 gentio era tan grande que no pudi-
moB pasar.
Un par de caballos americaaos vale por
dos pares de caballos m^jicanos.
He acted according to his conscience.
He speaks according to circumstances.
I tell it as it was told to me.
A troop of soldiers came into the city.
In the Uidted States army there were
soldiers of all nations.
The third of those men do not know
how to write.
The crowd was so great that we could
not pass.
A pair of American horses are worth
two pairs of Mexican horses.
^ EXPLANATION.
194. CoNDUCiR, to conduct, and the verbs conjugated like
it, take a z hefore the radical c in the terminations beginning
with ooTCU They also take the tenmnaXiouBjeJisteJoJimoBf
108 LESSON XL,
jtsteis,Jeronj &c., as may be seen in tbe conjugation oi candu'
ciVj at the end of the grammar.
196- Segxtnt. — ^We class this word among the prepositions,
in conformity to the general practice among Spanish gpram-
marianSy and because it sometimes has the character of such ; as,
Obr6 Mgwuwk concienda. I He acted According to his coDsdence.
Habia segun las circunstancias. | He speaks according to circumstances.
Nevertheless, in other cases it is employed as an adverb ; as,
Lo cuento aegun me lo han contado. | I tell it as it was told to me.
196. Collective nouns, in the singular, generally agree -with
verbs in the singular number ; but when the collective noun
is taken in its most extended sense, custom allows the verb to
be in the plural, for in such case the numbers concurring' to
form the whole, rather than the whole itself, are considered; as,
Entr6 (or entraron) en la dudad una I A troop of soldiers came into the cit j.
tropa de soldados. |
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Prodace Espana baena fruta? Espofia produce excdente fruta
de todas especics.
2. I Ga^ es la mcjor fhita de Espafia ? Ko sabrS decir d Y., porqne
toda es buena y hay centenares de especics, por ^cmplo : las nvas son de
las mejores del mundo ; los melocotones y los melones son tambien muj
buenos, sin contar con las naraiijas, las hlgos, los castafias, las nueces y
otra infinidad de frntas.
8. ^Es Espafia un pals caro 6 barato? Ea demasiado barato. Con
nn peso se pnede vivir mcjor en Espafia que en Nueva York con cuatro.
4. ^Bien, ent6nces porqa^ se vino Y. & vivir en los Estados Unidos?
Esa es ya otra caestion. Espafia no tiene que envidiar 4 ningun pals del
mnndo en onanto 4 sa clima ni 4 sns producoiones, ni m6uos en cnanto al
cardctcr de sus habitantes ; pero btgo su gobiemo no se goza de la misma
libertad que se goza biyo el de la Reptiblica de los Estados Unidos.
5. lEs esta la causa por la cndl Y. se vino & resl^ en este pals?
Hay mucbas otras. Por ejemplo, es verdad que en Espafia no se conocen
las hambrcs que hay en Irlanda, Alemenia y otros paises, y que, como
he dicho, se vive n[i^or alii con nn peso qne aqni con cnatro ; pero tam-
bien es verdad, qne en cualqniera profesion A oficio es mas faoil ganar
cuatro pesos en los Estados Unidos, que uno en Espafia.
6. 2 Por tanto Y. cree que los recursos de los Estados Unidos son
LESSON XL. 199
ZDSS gnndes qae los de otros paises? For sapnesto que si. Aqni la
jiMdm es grande ; la libertad es grunde ; los montes, los rios, los lagos,
Jos boBqnes son grandes ; la nataraleza es grande ; todo es grande ; Nue-
n York es grande y los bombres mlsmos son tambien grandes ; pero no
mss grandes qne los £spafioIes.
7. Hablando de esto, Y. se olvida que en este Cjercicio tiene V. quo
practicar con los nombres colectivos.— V. tiene razon, se me babian olvi-
dddo los nombres colectiyos bablando de las dos naciones que maa amo
en el mnndo.
8. En cnanto 4 los nombres colectiyos, sa pr^tica es muy facil j todo
se rednce 4 decir : qne en Nneva York bay multitnd de gentes de difo-
rentes naciones, millares de mi^eres j cosas bnenas 7 centenares do
hcmbres y cosas mft^ft^.
9. |Pero y qn6 dice Y. con respeoto & los rebafios, cj^rcitos, etc ?
Qae en Espalla bay rebafios de cameros merinos qne, lo mismo qne sn
^ercito, no tienen snperiores en el mnndo.
10. iSegnn eso Y. cree que todo lo m^jor existe en Espafia? Todo
no, pnesto qne mis nifios son Americanos.
11. Yamos, Y. se bnrla. — ^No, sefior, yo bablo de veras para practicar
d espanol.
12. Y. babla segnn las oircnnstancias.— No, sefior, yo bablo segnn mi
concienda.
IS. Acn^rdese Y. qne segnn Y. obre con los demiis asi obradm ellos
con Y. — Mny bien y asi como yo bable de ellos, asi bablar^ ellos de mi ;
pero yo no debo bablar de ellos mejor qne de mi mismo.
1^ iQniere Y. pagarme la mitad, el tercio 6 el cnarto de lo qne Y.
me debe? Ki lo nno ni lo otro, porqne no tengo dinero ahora.
15. Deme Y. & lo m^nos nn par de pesos. — Mafiana le dare & Y. nna
dooena de pesos, pero boy ni tan siqniera nn centavo. ' ^
16. A Bios, Gdrlos, me canso de cbarlar y me voy & acostar. Bnenas
nocbes, Lnis» np olyide Y. de pagar sns dendas.
EXCERCISB.
1. What is the name given to a large nmnlierof sheep together?
It is called a flock.
2. What were yon doing so long in the street! I went to see the
reason of the great crowd at the comer of the. next street.
3. Well, what was it ? I conld not see any thing ; but it seems there
was a fire in some of the streets near here.
4. You seem to be very much of a Spaniard ; why did yon ever come
to the United States? I will not deny that I like the government; yet
iliat is not the only reason I bad for coming here.
200 LESSOK XL.
6. Con jon tell me some of the oiherof Undonbtedly; altJioii^li
living b higher here than there, buedness of all kinds is better, and. it is
easier to make money here, not only than in Spain, but than, any other
oonntry in Earope.
6. I am very glad yon think so ; how long have yon been here ? It
will be fonr years next September.
7. Will you be good enough to tell me something of your coantrj' ?
That will give me much pleasure.
8. Ton talk so much about Europe in general^ and about Spain in
particular, that I cannot help (no puecio mhi09 de) thinking you intend to
go there. You are very right; it is very possible that my brother and
I shall take a trip (eiaje) to Spain next falL
9. Well, in order to be able to enjoy yourselves aa much as possible,
it will be necessary for you to know how to speak the language perfectly
before starting. That we intend to do.
10. Do you think all the soldiers in the army are Americans ? Noy
nor even the half, and perhaps not even the third.
11. How many inhabitants are there in thi^ city? I am not able to
tell yon exactly ; but there cannot be much less than a million.
12. Which city in the world has the most inhabitants ? London ; it
has about three millions of inhabitants.
18. Ah I you are jesting; or else you are an Englishman. I am not
Jesting, neither am I an Englishman, but a Frenchman ; after London
comes Paris.
14. Who is that book by ? This is the celebrated Don Quixote (Qui-
joU\ by Oorv&ntes.
15. In how many parts is. it ? Two, the first containing (cMitener)
some fifty-two chapters, and the second about eighty-four.
16. What effect (tfecto) does the reading of Don Quixote produce upon
you ? It makes mo admire, and even leads me to envy the genius (genid)
of its author.
17. Ah I I see ; you say that to please me, because you know that I
too admire the grand work of Cervantes. Pardon me, sir ; I never speak
according to circumstances, but always according to my conscience.
18. But, have you forgotten your promise already? What promise is
that ? I do not remember any.
19. No matter; I see you have completely forgotten it I am very
sorry.
20. What are the best fruits that Spain produces? Spain produces
so many kinds of fruit, and so deliciouB, that it is almost unposaible for
me to tell them all : You have excellent grapes, melons, peadies, apples,
oranges, and an infinity of others.
LESBOH XLI.
201
21. Hato the soldiers that came into the city last night gone awaj
jet ? They marclied this morning at daybreak.
23. How was oar old friend Hamero when yon kst heard from him ?
He was in Boston, entirely without mean^, haying been deceived by a
{kad man wbo took the whole of his money from him, and from whom
he was unable to recover (reeobrar) even the fourth part
LESSON XLI.
Soler.
To be accustomed to, to do, or
be, usually.
Bendecir.
To bless.
Caer.
To fall, to see (understand).
Dormir.
To sleep.
Korir.
To die.
Errar.
To err.
Jngar.
To play.
Oir.
To hear.
Oler.
TosmelL
Contradecir,
To contradict
Poner.
To put
Podrir.
To rot
Reir.
To laugh.
Valer.
To be worth-
Yacer.
•To He.
{See the comjugalion of thest
verbs at (he end of the book.)
Beposar.
To rest, to repose.
Premiar.
To reward.
Examinar.
To examine.
Desde.
Since, from.
Contra.
Against, towards.
Sobre.
Above, over, about
Tras.
After, behind, besides.
Pues.
1 Well, then ; therefore, Ac
HeloaquL
Here he (or it) is.
Desde ahora.
Henceforward, from now, just
now.
9*
202
LESSON ZLI.
Desdeaq
oL
From here.
Enefecto.
Indeed, in effect, in fect> really.
Etemo.
Eternal
Afortnnado.
Fortunate.
Gonvicto.
Convicted.
Defigraoiado.
Unfortunate.
Inforttmio.
MLsforinne.
Carlota.
Charlotte.
Reo.
Criminal.
Creacion.
Creation.
Grito.
Cry, scream.
Caridad.
Charity.
Cocbe.
Carriage.
Prenda.
Pledge, quality,
Vicio.
Vice.
accomplishment.
FraOe.
Fraj, friar.
Virtud.
Virtue.
Diego.
James.
Tristeza.
Grief, sorrow.
Verbo.
Verb.
Experiencia.
Experience.
Prindpio.
Beginning, prin-
ciple.
. P^igina.
Page.
COMPOI
SinON.
i Suele V. levantarse temprano ?
Saelo IcTantanne tarde.
^Solia v. ir k pasear & caboUo el afio
pasado?
No, sefior, solia pasear en coche.
Flegue k Dios que teDgamos pronto lo
que deseomos.
Desde ahora prometo serrirle & V. en lo
que pueda.
£1 hombre ha obrado mal para con Dios
y consigo mismo desde la creadon del
mundo.
Desde Nueya York k fHadelfia hay
ochenta y ocho millas.
To juego contra tt
Esta casa e8t& contra el Este.
La ciudad e8t& sobre un montc.
La caridad es sobre todaa las virtudes.
Voytrastl
Sufre la pens pues lo quieres.
Tras la primavera Tiene el yerano.
Tras set culpado, S es el que levanta el
grito.
Leer^ este libro pues Y. me dice que es
bueno.
Do you usually rise early f
I usually rise late.
Used you to ride on horseback last
year?
No, mr, I used to ride in n carriage.
God grant we may soon have wbat we
desire.
From this moment I promise to serre
you as far as I can.
Man has acted .wrong before God and
to himself since the creation of the
world.
It is eighty-dght mUes from New York
to Philaddphia.
I play against you (thee).
This house faces the East
The dty is built upon a mountam (or hill).
Charity is before all Tirtues.
I go after you (thee).
Suffer the consequences (pain), since
such is your (thy) will.
After spring comes summer. *
Notwithstanding he is guilty, it is he
that raises the cry.
I Drill read this hock shice you tell me
it is good.
LESSON XLI. 203
EXPLANATION. ^
197. Depectivb vebbs are those which are not employed in
all their tenses and persons. PodHr^ to rot, placer^ to please,
and yacer^ to lie, belong to this class, and are found used in the
following tenses and persons :
PODBIB.
ImptT, 2d penon plural
Podrid.
Rot
Subfunc, imp. Sdperton ting, Fodriria.
He would rot
JnfiiUL Freaent
Podrip.
To rot
ParHcip,
Podrido.
rULCEB.
Rotten.
IndieaL Fret, Zd peraon
rififf. Place.
It pleases.
ImperfecL
Placia.
It did please.
Fer/ect ind.
Plugo.
It pleased.
Suijunc, FreaenL
Plegue.
It ma J please.
Imper/eeL
Pluguiera.
' Pluguiese.
It might please.
Future imp.
Plaguiere.
It may please.
These persons of the subjunctive mood in this verb are only
used in the following expressions : pleffue^ or pluguiera, or plu'
guiese d Dios, would to God ; and si me pluguiere^ if it should
please me.
198. Tackb. — "So part of this verb is used except the
third persons of the present indicative, yace and yaceth chiefly
at the beginning of epitaphs.
199. SoLEB is used only in the present and imperfect of
the indicative mood. This verb has the peculiarity of never
being employed except as a determining verb, governing the
determined verb without the aid of any preposition, and al-
ways in the present infinitive ; as,
Sudopaaear temprano. | I osnally go early to walk.
200. Desde, from, points out the beginning of time or
place; as,
Letdi la ereacton del mmido. . I From the creation of the world.
Detdi Nueva York k FJaddfia. | From New York to Philadelphia.
For this reason it forms a part of several adverbial expres-
sions which signify time or place ; as,
Deade ahora. I From this time.
Ihade aqui | From hence.
204 LE8S0N XLI.
201. CoNTBA is used in all cases as the English against.
202. SoBBEy upon, above, <&c., serves to denote the superi-
ority of things with respect to others, either by their material
situation or by their excellence or power ; as,
La ciudad eBt4 Bobre un monte. I The city is on a moimtaiiL
La caridad ea aobre todas las yirtadea. | Chant j is above all Tirtaes.
It has also the signification of ademdSy moreover, or ademds
dCj besides ; as,
Sobre ser reo con^cto qtuere que le I Besides being a convicted criminal,
premien. | - he wishes to be rewarded.
It also signifies time ; as,
H»blar sobre mesa. | To talk during dinner.
Security; as, ^
Prestar aobre prendas. > | To lend upon pledge.
203. Tbas, behind, after, &c., signifies the order in which
some things follow others ; as,
Voy tras tL ' I ^ follow you.
Tras la primayera viene el verano. | After spring comes summer.
It also Signifies besides ; as,
Tras ser culpado, 61 es el que levan- I • Besides being guilty^ he remonstrates.
ta el grito.
204. The conjunction pubs, since, is used to account for a
proposition brought forward ; as,
Leer6 este libro puea Y. me dice que I I will read this book nnce you idl
es bueno. I me it is good.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^ Sobre qn6 qniere Y. que hablemos hoy ? No b6; de cualqoiera
cosa, con tai qne practiquemos con los verbos defectiTOS y las preposi-
ciones eontra^ desde, sohre y trcu.
2. Que me place ; pero digame Y., i cree Y. que tenemos mucho que
praoticar con el verbo yacerf No, sefior, puesto qne es nn verbo que
solo sirre para ponerse en los epitafios.
3. Pues si Y. gasta Ic har^mos un epitafio y pasarSmoa d practicar
con otro verbo que no sea tan triste.— Soy d© su opinion d© Y., porque
no me gostan las cosas tristes.
LSSBOK XLI. 205
4. Helo aqnf :
" Aqni yace el rerbo yaeer,
Otn coaa no aablendo haoer."
5. Ese epitafio me hace reoordar d mi otro, oigalo Y. :
** Aqni Fry Diego repoaa,
T jiun&s hizo otn oosa.^
6. Hombre, tenga Y. caridad de ml 7 no me haga Y. reir hablando de
epitafios, que es cosa mas bien para hacer Uorar qne para bacer reir.
iSaele Y. tener siempre tan buen bmnor? No siempre; pero no se gana
nada con estar triste.
' 7. En efecto, mas yale estar alegre que triste, pero no siempre se
puede estar alegre, | y ent6nces que bace Y. ? Ent^nces mando 4 pasear
al mal bamor.
8. Esc cs mas fl&cil de decir que de bacer; ^qmere Y. dedrme como
lo bace Y. ? Convengo con Y. ; pero coando el bombre qniere verda-
deramente nna cosa la logra casi siempre.
9. Plegae d Dios que 70 logre estar siempre oontento pnesto que estar
contento es ser feliz. i Qn6 es lo que Y. bace para estar siempre con-
tento ? Yd no le be dicbo d Y. que estoy siempre contento, pero pro-
cure estarlo y asi logro no estar triste.
10. I C6mo lo bace Y. ? Obro segun las circunstancias. Examine la
causa de mi tristeza 6 mal bumor ; si es mi falta me consuelo porque creo
que Dios me castiga para que yo me corr^a, y me baga mejor con la ex-
periencia.
11. Bien, i y cuando Y. es inocente y le sucede un infortunio ? Ent6n-
ces me consuelo tambien, porque creo que todo lo que Dios nos envia es
para nuestro bien.
12. Ent6nces i es Y. fil6sofo ? No, sefior, i^ejor que eso ; soy reli^oso.
13. jTiene Y.*miedo de la mucrte? No, sefior, porque s6 que todos
bemos de morir, y que tras la muerte viene la vida eterna.
14. I Cudntos niflos tiene Y. ? Oinco ; dos nifios y tres niflas.
15. I C6mo se llaman ? El mayor de los nifios se Uama Alejandro y el
menor Manuel.
16. 2 Y las nifias ? Las nifias son Luisa, Oarlota y Margarita.
17. 2 Ouanto tiempo bace que no ba estado Y. en Espafia ? Hace veinte
afios que sail de Espafia.
18. J Y no ba vuelto Y. ? No, sefiora, y creo que nunca volver6.
19. iPorqu6 ? No porque no lo baya deseado, sino porque las circun-
stancias no me lo ban permitido.
20. Porqu6 babla Y. tanto de si mismo en sus conversaciones, ^no
piensa Y. que eso puede cansar d sus oyentes ? Asi es la verdad, sefiora ;
pero para mi es la materia de conyersacion mas interesante que puedo
encontrar.
206 LBS60N XLI,
EXERCISE.
1. James, do yon know where Gliarlotte has gone to? I saw her
going oat, bat I do not know where she has gone.
2. Can yon not help yoor brother in his misfortane f yon know he re-
lies (eantar) npon yonr aid. I shall do all in my power to serve him ;
bnt yon know that is not mnch.
8. Margaret, go and call Charles; tell him he has played enongh, and
that I want him to attend to his mnsic lessons. Why, he has be^i at his
lessons for the last half honr I
4. Ah I that is another thing. Where is he then ? Here he is, here.
6. Well, Charles, how are yoa getting on with yonr masic ? Very
well, papa; but I think Jane will have to help me with my Spanish ex-
ercise.
6. My dear boy, always do yonr own exercises, then yon will be snre
they are well done. Oh, yes, I know ; as they say: " Help yourself and
Heaven will help yon."
7. How beantifbl that lady is! Yes; bat, my dear sir, her accom-
plishments are much superior to her beauty.
8. I do not doubt it at all; but how do you know that? have yon
known her long? Long enough to find out her good qualities, which, in
my opinion, are of more value than all the beauty in the world.
9. Have you found time yet to examine the books I put on your table
the other day ? I have, and the examination caused (produced) me a
great deal of sadness.
10. How so? From the commencement, page after page, I found that
the author has not the least experience of the world ; and, beades, he
contradicts toward the end what he has given as a general rule at the
beginning of his work. *
11. I am very much grieved (sorry) that such is your opinion. So am
I ; but you know it is better (worth more) to tell the truth, even though
it shonld offend the author himself.
12. Can you read that epitaph? I beHeve itisin£n£^. Tes; it
says: "Here lies Pedro Gutierrez."
18. Is that all it says ? No, there is a great deal more ; but I cannot
read it
14. Ah, mdeed 1 I see ; you do not read English as well as you thought
I do not ; and I proipise you that from this moment I will study it at-
tentively until I know it thoroughly.
16. What is that you are smelling? The book that Charles has Just
bought
16. What smell has it? It smells like new paper.
LX880K XLII.
207
IT. What was that man rewarded for f For having returned fdevoher)
fire hundred dollars, which he fonnd in the park, to the person that had
lost them.
18. I am very glad that he has heen rewarded ; but virtue is alwajs
rewarded, sooner or later {tarde que tempram).
LESSON XLII.
Adqnirir.
To acqnlre.
Aair.
To seize.
Caber.
To contain, to hold*
Cocer.
To cook.
Erguir.
To erect.
Satisfaoer.
To satisfy.
Traer.
To bring, to carry.
(See eonjugatioti of these i
erbt at the end of (he book,)
Gonsegnlr.
To succeed, to get
Callar.
To be silent, to hold one's tongue.'
Eeprender.
To reprehend, to chide.
Divisar.
To perceive, to descry, to espy.
Pumar.
To smoke.
Establecer.
To establish.
Saber {imp. verli).
(In the Hgnificatitm of) to taste.
or to savor.
Sorprender.
To surprise.
Entrambos.
Both.
Solo.
Alone.
Ir 4 caballo.
To ride on horseback.
Iren coche.
To ride in a carriage.
De todos modos.
At all events, by all means.
De ningnn modo.
By no means, not at alL
Manos 4 la obra.
To work I
Por mi parte.
For my part
AsSsea.
So be it, let it be so.
iC^spital (int).
Wonderful I too bad I
iVayal (int.).
Come, now I indeed I go away I
208
LBSBON XLII.
OONJUNOTIOKB.
Thej are clasdfied as follows :
Copulative.
Qne.
Tambien.
8ea que.
Tampoco.
That.
Also.
Or, either,
whether.
Whether.
Neither.
Ademis.
Y(w6.
NL
Disjunctive.
For cuanto.
Para que.
Afinde.
Moreover.
And.
Neither, nor.
Whereas.
So that) in order
that.
In order that.
Advenative.
M^ pero. Bat.
Ann cnando. Even.
Aunqne. Although,
thongh.
Causal.
Porqne, qne. Because.
iPorqu6? Why?
Pnes, pnes qne. Since.
Por. For.
Por tanto. Therefore.
Conditional.
SL tt
Sino. But
Con tal que. Provided.
Am6no8de. ) ^^^
A m^nos que. )
Continuative,
Pnes, pnesto qne. Since, inasmuch
as.
Comparative.
Oomo, asi como. As.
AsL So.
Antes de.
Before.
L6J0S de.
Far from.
£n lugar de.
Instead of, in place ot
Porfaltade.
For want ot
De miedo de.
Por temor de.
For fear of.
Oomo quiera que.
However.
Fuera de quo.
Besides.
luego que, or
As soon as.
tan pronto como.
De manera que.
So that
Desde que.
Since.
Acuerdo.
Advice, or opin- I
ion. I
Marca.
Fortuna.
Brand, mark.
Fortune.
LEBSOir XLII.
209
Dafio.
Harm, damage.
Partida.
Party, game, de-
Ajcdrez.
Chess.
parture.
Cigarro.
Cigar.
Opinion.
Opinion.
Cigarrillo.
Cigarette.
Pipa.
Tobacco-pipe,
Tabaco.
Tobacco.
pipe.
Jaqne.
Check.
Compafila.
Oompanj*
Caso.
Case.
COMPOSITION.
Conjunetions governing the Hihjunetwe,
Dado que me escriba no le responder^.
Ck>n tal que el trabaje.
A m6nos que me pague.
Sea que se vaya 6 que se quede.
Galle Y. no sea que nos oiga.
Granted that he should write me, I will
not answer him.
Provided he works.
Unless he pays me.
Whether he sets out or remains.
Be silent lest he should hear us.
Conjunctions governing the indicative.
Al instante que recibi la carta le res-
pond!.
De suerte que (or de modo que) no
pudo conseguirlo;
De manera que no e8t& nada satisf echo.
i Qa6 ha hecho Y. desde que le he y\&-
to & V. ?
Llegu4 tan pronto como pude.
Mi^ntras quo Y. juega 61 estudia su leo
cion.
Yo reprendo & Y. sus faltas porque le
quiero.
As soon as I received the letter I an-
swered him.
So that he could not bring it about
So that he is not pleased at all.
What have yon been doing since I saw
you?
I got here (or there) as soon as I could.
While you play, he studies his lesson.
I reprove you for your faults because I
love you.
Conjunetumt governing the infinitive.
Yo trabajo & fin de ganar dinero.
No le visitar^ &ntes de conocerle.
L6J0S de amarle le aborrece.
I work in order to earn money.
I shall not visit him before making his
acquaintance.
Far from loving him, he abhors him.
EXPLANATION.
205. CoNJxnsrcnoNS. — ^The learner is already acquainted
with the greater part of the conjunctions ; but in this lesson
they are again given, so that he may see how they are classified.
Besides the conjunctions introduced in this lesson, there may
210 LB880K XLII.
be formed a yariety of expressions which answer the same end
as conjunctions ; as.
Como quiera qae, I Howerer ;
Fuera de que, | Besides ;
and a large number of others.
206. It would require too much space to specify aU the
conjunctions that govern verbs in a given mood ; more is to be
learned from the teacher, and by constant practice in reading
and conversation, than from all the rules that could be given.
207. The subjunctive should be used after the following
conjunctive expressions : Dado que^ granted that ; con ted quCy
pro^-ided that; d m&nos quCj unless; no sea que^ lest, for fear;
dniea quCy sin que, sea que, &c. ; as,
Dado que me escriba no le respon-
derd.
Con tal que 61 trab^e. *
A mhwi que me pagne.
Granted that he should write to me,
I shall not answer him. '
ProTided that he works.
Unless he pays me.
208. Other expressions having cfe, instead of que, require
the verb in the infinitive mood ; such as^ dfin de, in order to ;
d mhios de, unless, &o.
20d. Finally, other compound conjunctions govern the
indicative ; as, al instants que, as soon as ; de manera que, so
that| &c,
CONVERSATION AND VEESION.
1. Buonos difls, Don C&rlos. — ^Tdagalos Y. mny felloes, Don Enrique;
al instante que lo divisS desde la ventana lo reconocL
2. i C6mo estd toda k familia? Todos buenos ; aoaban de salTr.
8. ^De manera que estd Y. solo ? Si, sefior, en logar de salir quise
quodarme & esperar 4 Y. pnes sabia que habia Y. de venir.
4. |Qm6a se lo dyo dY.? A que no aciorta Y.— Yerdaderamente
no s6 qui^n puede hab^rselo dicho d Y.
6. Fa6 Helena, sa h\ja de Y., que acaba de salir d pasear con mi esposa
y Margarita, mi hija.
6. Y nosotros, jqud har^mos? Lo que Y. gnste.
7. Mi opinion es.que jnguemos una partida de f^odroz, que fhmemos
un cigarro, bcbamos un vaso de vino de Carinena, y vayamos despues d
Borprender dlas selloras al parque. ^Estd Y. de aouerdo? Perfectld-
mamente.
LESSON XLII. 211
€. Pues bieD, iiiaii066 Utobn; ijuega V. macho t Medianameate ;
pero porno no lo practioo temo que me gane V.
9. I Q116 hombre ! ri hace lo m^nos dos ancs qne 70 be jagadO| fnera
de que jamas be ado may (herte.
10. |CiiMesqmerey^]asnegTas6]asbLiiica8t Coalesquiera, de todos
modos be de perder.
11. Jaqne k b& reina Don Enriqne. — ^Pnes creo qne est4 perdida. — Si,
sefior, no pnede bnir — ^yaja paes le doj d Y. la partida, puesto qne sin
reina es casi imposible ganar.
12. I Qoiere V. qae en Ingar de jngar mas vajamos d ver ha sefloras ?
Si, sefior, Inego qne bebomos del vino de Carifiena.
13. I Hombre,. sS, lo habia oMdado! aqni estd, 7 aqai tiene V. tambien
pipas, cigarros de la Habana, cigarrillos de la marca do la Honradez 7
tabaco de Virginia para la pipa; |qa6 prefiere Y.? To prefiero los
cigarrillos.
14. A sn salnd de Y., Don Cdrlos. — ^A la de Y., Don Enriqne. — ;Oafr-
pita! iqnd bien sabe el de Carinena!
15. {Le gosta &Y.? iQn6 si me gnstat desde qne vivo en Nneya
York no be probado vino mejor.
16. Pnesto qne le gnsta ^porqnd no repite Y. ? Por temor de qne me
baga dafio, no snelo beber mncho, 7 temo qae me pcmga nn poco alegre.
17. Aqni tiene Y. fuego; iqa6 tal le gastan 6 Y. esos cigarrillos?
Excelentcs.
18. Sefior; ^Qn^ qnicres Jnan? Los caballos cstan listos.
19. \ Qa6 1 I Yamos 4 caballo ? Si, sefior, las senoras ban ido en cocbe.
20. iQnd camino tomar^mos? Ir^mospor la Qointa avonida, qne es
la calle mas hermosa de Nneva York.
21. Tenemos bnen tiempo, D. Enriqne. — Hcrmosisimo, 7 con csto, bnena
salad, amigos fides, nna lurga familia 7 xma baena fortima, iqix^ mas
podemos desear ?
22. Tiene Y. razon, Don Odrlos, por mi parte 807 feliz 7 solo desco qne
Dios me de nna larga vida para ver 4 todos mis b\jos bien establecidos. —
Asi sea, Don Enriqao, lo desco para entrdmbos.
EXERCISE.
1. Does 7our brother never go oat on horseback? Sometimes; bnt
not ver7 often.
2. What can be the reason of that ? I thonght he was ver7 fond of
horses and riding on horseback. So he is; but he docs not often take
exercise of that kind for fear of falling.
5. How docs he go to the Central Park, in that case ? Wh7, in a
carriage of course.
212
LBS80K XLIII.
i. Goawaj! What carriage does he go in f In hia coa^^s, of ooarse,
for want of one of bis own.
6. Who will give me a cigarette ? No one here ; there is nobody
here that smokes any thing bnt cigars or pipes.
6. Too bad I May I ask whj none of you nse the cigarette? Cer-
tainly; and we shall tell yon with the greatest pleasure: at one tune
we all smoked what you call ^^ cigarette," but what we call a '* poor
man's cigar,'' until one day Henry came (you know Henry is something
of a doctor), and, with his head erect, said with a voice of thunder :
^' What's this ? smoking cigarettes ? "
7. Weill what more did he say? "Don't you know that what you
are smoking there is nothing more than paper ? You will all be sick I '*
8. What did you do then ? We were at first surprised ; but very
soon we promised never to smoke such a thing agmn, for it was good for
nothing, and only tasted of paper.
9. Be that as you please ; for my part I shall always prefer the dga-
rette to the cigar (tdbaco). Perhaps you are right ; each one has his
taste, and so we shall say no more about it
10. What news do you bring from Boston ? Some good, and some
bad : my cousin has been very fortunate in that affair I spoke of to you ;
but he met last week with an unfortunate accident.
11. Ah! how was that? He was out riding in company with some
friends, and in returning home he fell off his horse.
12. I am very sorry indeed ; and I hope he may soon be able to attend
to his business.
18. What do you think of playing a game of chess ? I am ready to
play one, if you wish ; but you will not find my game very good.
14. Why do you not practise more than you do ? I have practised
very much, with a desire to become perfect in the game, but have not
been able to succeed.
Advertir.
Coiyugar.
Desconfiar.
Oometer.
Distinguir.
LESSON XLIII
To take notice, to observe, to
warn.
To coigugate.
To distrast, to mistrust.
To oommit.
To distinguish.
I.X8S09 XI.III.
213
Fonnar.
DeTolver.
Descmdait
Perteneoer.
liolestar.
Besoltar.
{7%e learner mi^ <y Ifttf Ume k> kmm
the regular amd ike trrtgtdar mrh$ ; tkomUkedt
To lamiy to sliape.
To retezny to gire 1m^ [mind.
To ne^ed, to be at ease in one s
TobdoD^.
To molest, to trouble.
To result, to turn out.
ea At cotg^^^hmM^haUmf
time he ei m iem Jar mtm
pari of a «er6, kf mag refer lo Ae wmjmgaiiome ai Ike emd of Ae
)
Gada.
I Erery, eacb.
Sindnda.
Gertamlj, witboat doabt
lAdeUntel
GoqdI goabeadi come in!
Eaadeiante.
HeneefOTtb.
Cknopnesto.
Ck>mpoimd.
Irregular.
Irregular.
Gompleto.
Complete.
Varioa.
Various, diTera, severaL
Simple.
Snnple.
Segoro.
Secm^ sore.
Obvio.
ObTioua.
Lodemis.
Thereat.
Oonodmieiito.
Jos^.
Articnlo.
Pronombre.
Participio.
Genmdio.
Adverbio.
Ptesente.
Imperfecto.
Perfecto.
Future.
Pluscamperfecto,
Infinitive.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Subjuntive.
I Bin of lading.
I Knowledge.
Jesepb.
Article, section.
Pronoun.
Participle.
Gerund.
Adverb.
Present.
Imperfect.
Perfect
Future.
Pluperfect.
Infinitive.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Subjunctive.
Condicien.
Navidad, or \
Natividad. (
Relacion.
Duda.
Yentsya.
Prase.
Prentitud.
Sentencia.
Coi^ugacion.
Verdad.
Imprudencia.
Prepesicien.
Coignncion.
Inteijeccion.
Paz.
Condition.
Nativity, Cbrist-
mafi.
Relation.
Doubt.
Advantage.
Phrase.
Promptitude.
Sentence.
Conjugation.
Trutii.
Imprudence.
Preposition.
Conjunction.
Interjection.
Peace.
214
LEBSON XLIII.
COMPOSraON.
DescmdeY.
I Ca&ntoB tiempofl tiene d modo indicar
tivo?
Ocho: cuatTO simples y cuatro oom-
puestos.
Bueno fuera {or seria) no descoidarse.
Conyimera (or oonTendria) que se hicie-
sc la pax.
Aunque dijeras (or dijeses) la verdad,
no te creeria.
I Ojal& cesara {or cesase) la guerra! asi
seriamos mas felloes.
Pens^ que estadiaras.
Ko crei que estudiase Y.
Ju2gu6 que estudiaria Y.
Bije que leyeras.
Dijo que leexias.
Dyimos que leyese.
Deseaba que ganaras {or gonases).
Quiso que te casaras {or casases).
No 86 si iria 6 no.
Si tuvicra {or si tuviese) buenos libros
leeria.
Seria imprudencia ir con este tiempo.
Ko qui86 ir.
Debemos perdonar&nuestros enemigos.
Y. puede hablar, pero yo no lo puedo.
i Si hubiera {or bubiese) Y. redbido los
libros me los habria Y. prestado ?
Si los hubiera {or hubiese) recibido se
los habria prestado; pero no los he
recibido aim.
En lugar de venir & yerme me escribi6.
£l no jugar& por temor de perder su
dinero.
I Quiera Dios que se oomja I
Make yourself easy (or be at ease in
your mind).
How many tenses has the indicatiye
mood?
Eight: four simple and four compound.
It would be wen not to be off one*s
guard.
It would be well if peace were made.
Though thou wert to tdl the truth, he
would not believe thee.
Would to God the war would come to
an end I we should then be happier.
I thought thou wouldst study.
I did not think you would study (or
were studying).
I judged you would study.
I said thou wert to read (or wouldst
read).
He said thou wouldst read.
We said he was to read.
Hfe wished thee to win.
He wished thee to get married.
I do not know whether he would go or
not
Had I (or if I had) good books I would
read.
It were imprudent to go in this weather.
He would not go.
We should forgive our enemies.
You can speak, bntJ cannot
Had you received (or if you had re-
ceived) the books would you have
lent them to pe?
If I had received them I would have
lent them to you ; but I have not re-
ceived them yet
Instead of coming to see me, he wrote
tome.
He will not play, for fear of losing his
money.
God grant that he may change 1
liESSOH ZLIII.
215
tAslBea! Lo deseo para entr&mboa.
Bebo k U salad de Y., Don Enrique. •
A la de V., Don G&rlos.
Sefiores, manos 4 la obra, no sea que
no podamos acabar 4 tiempo.
De todos modos creo que no lo conse-
goirdzbos.
So be it I That is my desire for both.
I drink to your health, Mr. Henry.
Tour health, Mr. Charles.
To work, gentlemen, for fear we should
not be able to finish in time.
At all events, I do not think we shall
succeed.
EXPLANATION.
210* Impeepect astd Plup^epect op the Subjunctive. —
Although it has been deemed expedient, in the example of the
conjugation of verbs in the subjunctive mood, to give but one
English equivalent for each of the three terminations Wa, ra,
se^ it is not to be inferred therefrom that they may be used in-
discriminately. Indeed, the correct application of each of
these terminations presents as much difficulty to the student of
Spanish as does that of the English signs might, could, shoiUdj
toould to the foreigner learning English. The following rules
will, however, serve as a guide in all ordinary cases, and enable
the pupil to surmount not a few of the most serious obstacles
* to the right use of the terminations in question.
Ist, When the sentence begins without a conditional con-
junction, the verb may take either the first or the second ter-
mination (ria or ra) ; as,
Bueno seria ((tr fiiera) no descuidarse.
It would be well not to be off one*s
guard.
It would be wdl if peace were made.
Oonvendria {or conviniera) que se bl-
dessUpaz.
2d. In sentences beginning with si, sino, aunque, hien que,
dado que, &c.j or with an interjeistion expressive of desire,
either the second or third termination may be employed {ra or
se) ; and were it necessary to repeat the same tense in the
second clause of the sentence (in order to shojir what would
take place as the result of the condition expressed in the first
clause), the first termination {rki) may then be used ; as, *
Aunque dijeras {or dye8cs)laverdad, I Thougb thou toldeflt (op wert to tell)
no te cieerto. I the truth, he would not believe thee.
' 3d. When the imperfect of the subjunctive is preceded by
a verb in the preterit definite of the indicative, signifying pen-
I did not think you were studying, or
I did not think you would study,
I judged you would study.
I said you would read.
He Bidd you were to read.
We said be was to read.
216 LESSON XLIII.
BOT^ to think, deevr^ to say, or such like, any of the terminations
may be used ; but it must be observed that the idea conveyed
will be different, according to the termination employed ; as,
Pens6 que estudiara Y., or que estn- I thought you would study.
diaria Y.
Ko cref que estudiaie Y.(or estudiara)
Y.
Juzgtt6 que estudiarui {pr estudiara)
Y.
Dije que leycra (or leerta) Y.
Dgo que leyeic {or leyera) Y.
Dyimos que leyera (or leyese).
4th. But if this tense be preceded or governed by a verb in
any of the past tenses of the indicative, signifying deseoTj to
desire, guerer, to wish, or by any verb of such nature, then the
second termination {ra) or the third (se) must b^ used, and
never the first {ria) ; as,
Deseaba que ganara {or gana«e) Y. I He was desirous that you might win.
QuiflO que Y. se casara {or casaM). | He wished you to get married.
A glance at the foregoing rules and examples will suffice in
order to observe that the first and second terminations {ria and
ra) may be used one for the other, without any change in the
sense of the phrase ; that the second may also be used for the
third (that is to say, ra for se)y but that the first and third are
of an entirely different meaning, and, in consequence, can never
be substituted one for the other. Another peculiarity of the
first {ria) is, that it can never be preceded by a conditional con-
junction, while the second and third may.
6th. When, in translating into Spanish, tchether is to be
translated by si^ would or e/iotdd must be rendered by the ter-
mination ria ; as, .
No 86 M Iria, . | I do not know whether he would go.
6tL The inverted forms had J, hadhe^ &c, meaning \f I
hadj if he had^ &c., are always to be turned into Spanish by
either of the terminations ra or w, preceded by the conjunc-
tion si ; as,
Si tuviera (or tnyieae) buenos libros, 1 Had I (or if I had) good books, I
leeria. I would read.
LBS80H ZLIII. 217
7th. Were^ used in the place of toould be^ may be translatecl
hj either ria or ra, never by se ; as,
Serta (or fuera) imprudencia ir con I It were imprudent to go in this
este tiempo. I weather.
211. The English auxiliaries, mayy mighty cariy cauldy toitty
would and should are sometimes to be translated into Spanish
by principal verbs of the same meaning, and not merely ren-
dered by corresponding terminations ; as,
No quuo ir. 1 He would not go.
V. puede hablar, pero yo no lo puedo. | Ton may (or can) speak, but I cannot
In the first example we see, that by would not is conveyed
the idea of the want of toiU or desire on the part of the person
alluded to, and not the idea of that person's going or not going ^
as dependent on a condition. Had the latter been the sense
intended, we should then have rendered toould by the teraod-
nation ria of the verb %r, to go ; thus,
ti no trio. | He would not go ;
for, in that case, the object would have been simply to predict
that he toould not gOy as dependent on some such condition as,
if I did not go too, si yo nofuese tambien. Hence, the closest
attention is required, in order to find the real meaning of the
auxiliaries above mentioned, before attempting to translate thero.
212. The imperfect of the subjunctive denotes a contingent
action that took place some time ago, or that is taking place at
the present time, or that will take place after the completion
of the action expressed by the determining verb.
213. The pluperfect represents a contingent action as com-
pleted before some period of^ time already past, or before some
other action which is now also completed, or which would be
now completed had it taken place.
The closest attention to the foregoing remarks is essential,
in order to avoid thMmproper substitution of the tenses of the
indicative for those of the subjunctive, which all foreigners, and
especially the English, are most liable to commit.
10
218 LESSON ZLIII.
CONVERSATION A^^) VERSION.
1. I Dnda Y. que se haga la paz este verano ? Convendria (or convi-
niera) qae se hiciese la paz; pero temo qne no se haga.
2. I Iria y. & Enropa si taviera (or taviese) tiempo? No iria annque
taviera tiempo, si no tuviese dinero.
8. lOjaUI tuviera Y. (or tayiese) mnoho dinero, porqne ent6nces
me prestaria Y. algnno ; |no es asl? Si tnviera mncho le prestaria 4 Y.
algono ; pero con la condicion de qne me lo devolviese pronto.
4. ^Temo Y. acaso qne no se lo devolyieraf Todo pndiera saoeder,
amigo mio.
5. Si Y. me hnbiera (or hnbiese) prestado algo, 7 yo no se lo hnbiese
(or hnbiera) devnelto, Y. tendria razon en desconfiar. — Todo eso est4 mnj
bien ; pero si, en logar de ser Y., fhera 70 el qne necesitara dinero, 7 Y.
el qne lo tuyiera, | me lo prestaria f For snpnesto qne si.
6. Pnes con todo- eso 70 no s6 si Y. lo baria.— |Porqn6 piensa Y. tan
mal do mi ?
7. ^Ha olvidado Y. 7a qne el afio pasado, por Nayidad, fnf & pedirle 4
Y. cien pesos 7 me los neg6 Y. ? lial pndiera 70 prcst^rselos & Y.
cnando 70 no los tenia ; pero est4 Y. segaro, Don Jos^, qne yo hnbiera
tenido un gran placer en hab^rselos prestado & Y. si los hnbiera (or hn-
biese) tenido.
8. 1^1 Y. snpiera nsar oorrectamente los tiempos 7 modos del verbo,
sabria Y. hablar espafiol ? Si, sefior, con los conocimientos que 7a tengo
de las dem&s partes do la oracion, creo qne hablaria bien el espafiol si sn-
piera nsar bien los tiempos 7 modos del verbo.
9. ^Qn6 es lo mas importante al aprender nna lengna? El conoci-
miento de todo lo qne hace relacion al verbo.
10. £porqn6 cree Y. qne el verbo eslo mas importante? Porqne sin
los verbos no se pnede formar nna sola sentencia.
11. iLnego, segnn eso, bastard aprender la coi^ngacion de los verbos
regolares 6 irregnlares para hablar nna lengna? No, sefior, si nno sabe
coi^ngar los verbos como regnlarmente se coi\jngan en las gram&ticas ;
pero si sabifindolos conjugar como se debe.
12. iPues qn6, ha7 olgnn otro modo de coiyngar los verbos? Los
verbos beben conjagarse formando sentencias cmnpletas en todos bus
modos 7 tiempos.
18. iQn6 ventjyas resnltan de esto? Las vent^as son obvias, pnes
formando sentencias completas con cada tiempo 7 modo se aprende 4 dis-
tmj^ir ^tos ti^pos 7 modos, acabando por nsarlos oorrectamente.
*.« f!li* 1 "^ "^"^^ hablaria bien el espafiol d pndiese hacer sentencias
en todos los tiempos 7 modos del verbo? Sin dnda algnna, nna vez qne
LESSON XLIII. 219
y. forme estas sentendas con prontitad y sin cometer faltas, hablar& Y.
espafioL
15. Paes manos 4 la obra, iqaiere Y. que baga algnnas en el roodo in-
dicativo ? No, sefior, en las lecciones pasadas ha practicado Y. bastante
con ese modo, haga Y. algonas abora con el modo snbjuntivo.
16. Presenter {Desea Y. que yo aprenda el espafiol? jEs correcta?
Perfectamente; adelante.
17. Perfecto de sabjnntivo : Temo qne la gaerra no baya acabado en
Earopa. |EistA.bien? Si, sefior, est4 may bien; pero no necesita Y.
pregantarme d cada sentenoia qne baga, si estd correcta, porque yo ten-
dr6 buen cnidado de advertirselo & Y. cnando no sea asi.
18. Plnscnamperfecto : Si yo bnbiera creido qne esto le molestaba & Y.
no se lo habria pregnntado. — ^Esto no me molesta de ningnn modo y espero
qne Y. no se moleste tampoco por lo qne yo acabo de decir.
19. Imperfecto: |Seria snfidente bacer nna fraae en cada tiempo?
Seria snfidente si cada tiempo se nsase en nn solo caso ; pero como bay
mncbos y mny varios, convendria practicar en todos tanto como fnese
posible.
EXEBCISE.
1. Before going out, Henry, I wish to give yon a piece of advice.
Well, go on I
2. What is that advice yon have to give me ? Hold yonr tongue, and
hear what I have to tell yon.
8. Did yon warn yonr cousin not to lend bis carriage to that young
man who asked him for it ? Tes, but he said he would do so, and that
he did not distrust that young man at all.
4. Do you know how to cocgugate all the verbs in the Spanish lan-
guage now ? I am not sure ; my memory is not very good ; and so I al-
ways like to look at my granmiar, for fear of making (committing) mistakes.
5. Oan you tell me how many coi^ugations of regular verbs there
are in Spanish ? Tea, sir, there are three.
6. When you see a new verb, how do you know to what coigugation
it belongs ? By the termination of the infinitive mood.
7. Oan yon tell me to what coi\jugation the verb comprar belongs ?
Certainly; it belongs to the first.
8. How do you know that ? I see the characteristic termination of
the first conjugation, which is ar,
9. And of which coiyugation is entender f The second ; its termina-
tion being er,
10. Yery well. Now, if I say exiatiS, can you tell me all about that
verb ? Yes, sir, it is a regular verb, third person singular, of the preterit
220
LB880N XLIY.
definite tense of the indioatiye mood ; it belongs to the third conjagation,
its infinitive being existir.
11. Are there in Spanish no other conjugations than those which jon
have just told me ? Yes, very many. TTiose I have mentioned (meneio-
nar) already are the three regular verbs.
12. What do you understand by " regular verbs " ? Begular verbs are
those which are conjugated in all their moods and tenses exactly like the
models {modelos) given in different parts of the granmuir.
13. And *^ irregular verbs,'^ what are they ? Those whose conjugation
is different from the models.
14. If you could speak Spanish as well as English, do you think you
would prefer it to your own language ? I would like to be able to speak
it as well ; but there is no language in the world that I would prefer to
my own.
15. If I were to lend you this phrase book would you return it to me
next week ? I would if yon wanted it, and that I promised to return it
to you at that time.
LESSON XLIV.
Aprozimar.
To approach, to draw near.
Apurar.
To perplex, to press.
Aullar.
To howl.
Ladrar.
To bark.
Ouidar.
To take care of.
Dejar.
To leave, to let
Emplear.
To employ.
Mnt^r.
To kill.
Permitir.
To permit.
Robar.
To rob, to steal
Imponer.
To impose.
Tantico.
Somewhat; a little.
Vaya de cuento.
To begin my story.
Oomo iba diciendo de mi
As I was saying Cm my story).
cuento.
A mi costa.
At my expense, to my cost.
Ya le veo 4 V. venir.
I see what you are at.
Venir d pelo.
To suit exactly, to be apropos.
LESSON XLIY.
221
De sopeton.
Cuanto mas.
\ Por DioB 1
Unexpectedly.
The more.
For Heaven's sake I
jHel
Hoi hoa! What?
iOigal
Indeed! Just listen!
Gliioo.
Little, small.
Revoltoso.
Noisy.
Caliente.
Hot, warm.
Apurado.
Embarrassed.
Borlon.
Jester, scoflfer.
Natural.
Natural.
Aomentativo.
Augmentative.
Diminntivo.
Diminutive.
Picaro.
Rogue, rascaL
Satiafecho.
Satisfied, contented.
Cuento.
Oorro.
Oojo.
Brazo.
Ademan.
Francisco, Paco
(dim.).
Jos^P6pe (cZim.).
Galdo.
Calducho.
Pistoletazo.
Poetastro.
Lugar.
Grarrote.
Garrotazo.
Canon.
Oafionazo.
Ladron.
Tale, story.
Group of persons.
Lame.
Arm.
Attitude.
Francis, Frank.
Joseph, Joe.
Broth.
Poor broth.
Pistol shot.
Poetaster.
Place.
Bludgeon.
Blow of a bind-
.geon.
Cannon.
Cannon-shot
Thief, robber.
An6cdota.
Casuca.
Mosca.
Necesidad.
Piema.
Boca.
Maria, Mariqui-
ta (dim.).
Concepcion,
Concha (dim.),
Pistola.
Estratagema.
Josefa, P6pa
(dim.).
Francisca, Paca
(dim.).
Costumbre.
Gaae.
Anecdote.
Miserable house.
Fly ; tiresome
person.
Necessity, need.
Leg.
Mouth.
Mary.
(2^0 Bnglish equiv-
alent.)
Pistol.
Stratagem.
Josephine.
Frances, Fanny.
Custom.
Class.
COMPOSITION.
Lo aprendi k mi costa.
Antes no le habia comprendldo k Y.,
ahora ya le veo venir.
t\ me did la noticia de sopeton. .
I learned it to my cost
I did not understand you before, but
now I see what you are at.
He gave me the news unexpectedly.
222
LESSON XLIY.
I For Dios ! D. Frandsco, no hable Y.
dceso.
i Conoce Y . & aquei hombron f
Sf, sefior, ea el marido de mi yednita
Hariquita.
Y. me Borprende. i Es posible que eea
aquel bombronazo el marido de esa
mujercita I
i Eb ese hombre oojo ?
Si, sefior ; en la iiltima gaerro redbid
un piatoletazo en mia pienuk
i Ha matado Y. alguna vez & algono ?
Si, Befior, el alio pasado mat6 de un
garrotazo al perro de mi vecino, por-
que no me d^aba donnir, aullando
todita la noche.
Ese hombre es un picaronazo, que no
hace Bino beber y no atiende & las
*'neceBidade8 de bu familia.
Este perro ee chiquito, pero yo tengo
uno chiquirritito.
Carlotita, ye & cuidar de tu hermanita.
Ese nifio es un picarillo.
Esta nifia es una coquetiUa.
Mi pobrecico hijo e8t4 muy mala
P^pe, I has visto mi caballito ?
Si ; pero yo en tu lugar, Paco, le Uama-
ria caballejo, porque creo que no
merece el nombre de caballito.
Pdpe yino callandita
Mi amigo est& apuradillo.
Esa niiia eaik muertecita de fno.
Tu casa est& lejitos.
ti no es poeta, sino poetastro.
For Heaven's sake! Mr. Frands, do
not speak of that
Do you know that big man t
Yes, sir, he is the husband of my little
neighbor Mary.
You surprise me. Is it possible that
that enonnous man is that little
woman's husband 1
Is that man lame f
Yes, sir ; in the last war he received a
pistol shot in one of his legs.
Did you ever kill any one ?
Yes, sir ; last year I killed my neigh-
bor's dog with a bludgeon, for he
would not let me sleep, howUng the '
whole night over.
That man is a great rascal who does
nothing but drink, and does not at>
tend to the wants of his family.
This dog is pretty small, but I have a
very little one.
Charlotte, go and take care of your lit-
tle sister.
This child is a little rogue.
This little girl is a little coquette.
My poor little son is very sick.
Joe, have you seen my little horse f
I did; but if I were you, Frank, I
would call it a nag, for I think it is
not worthy the name of (little) horse.
Joe came in softly.
My friend is a little embarrassed.
That little girl is almost dead with cold.
Your house is pretty far away.
He is no poet, but a poetaster.
EXPLANATION.
214. AuGMEm'ATivB AOT) DiMrNTTnvB NOXTNS are those
derivatives which serve to augment or diminish the significa-
tion of their primitives ; not only in regard to size, but also to
esteem, charactep^ dignity, importance, &c.
They are formed by adding various terminations to the
primitive nouns, dropping generally the vowel, if it end in one.
LBS80K ZLIY. 223
The tenninations which are nsed are very namerons ; bat those
most frequently adopted are azOj on, ote for the augmcntive
masculine, and aza^ ona, ota for the augmentive feminine nouns.
These terminations are equivalent in their meaning to the Eng-
lish words big^ ^rge^ stout^ taU^ and such like ; as,
FRIMrriTXS. DEBZYATiySS.
Hombre. A man.
Mtycr. A woman.
Hombron, horn- A tall, or large,
broso, hombro^ man.
Mi\jerona, mu- A tall, or large,
jera2a,mtuero^ woman.
But the nouns which have those terminations are not al-
ways augmentatiyes, since the nouns pistoletazo^ pistol shot;
caiUmazo^ cannon shot ; garrotazo^ blow of a bludgeon, do not
augment the signification of their primitives, pistola^ cafion
and garrote^ and consequently are not augmentatives.
Familiar use has introduced many other augmentative and
diminutive terminations ; as,
Hombronaa>. I A very large man.
Ficaronozo. | A very great rascal
The terminations most used as diminutives are in^ iUo^ itOj
icOy etc, udo or ^o, for the masculine ; the feminine are formed
by adding a to the termination iuy and by changing the final
vowel of the others into a.
Many of the diminutive terminations may acquire a still
further diminutive signification, by adding other terminations
to them ; thus,
Chieo. Small
Ghiqaifo. Very smalL
Chiqmrrittto. Very, very smalL
The manner of applying these terminations, as much for
their different meanings as for their various orthographical ac-
cidents, admits of so much variety that practice seems the only
means of acquiring the proper use of them ; as,
Mi bermantfo.
Un hombrecifo.
Un viejecfto.
£l es mi picari^.
Carlott^a.
Hy dear little brother.
A dear little maa.
A dear little old man.
He IB a dear little rogue.
Dear little Charlotte.
224
LESSON ZLIV.
Una pobre viejectfti.
Ella es una coquett/Ztk
Mi probrecMo higo (or mi pobre
hpo).
Un caball^o.
Un pobreto.
Un hidroiDzuelo,
Un reyezu«^.
A poor dear little old wom^n.
, She is a dear little coquette.
Mj poor little son.
A miserable little horse, a nag.
A poor useless creature.
A petty youn^ thie£
A petty king.
216. Besides the terminations mentioned, there are many
others which may he called irregviJUxr^ inasmuch as they can be
affixed to certain nouns only, among them the most irregular
are those of persons ; as,
Francisco, Paoo, etc
CoQcepcion, Concha, etc
Jo86, Pepe, etc
Harla, Mariquita, etc
Frands, Frank.
{No eqmvaleni tn jEnglish.')
Joseph, Joe
Maiy.
-216. Although the diminutives proceed in general from
substantive nouns, as we see by the preceding examples, they
are also formed, in familiar style, from adjectives, participles,
gerunds, and even from adverbs ; thus we not unfrequently
say:
BeToltoRt22o ee el muohacho.
Huertectto de frio.
TodUo el dia.
Pan calentifo.
ApandiUo estuvo.
Vino callandifo.
L^'i^os est& tu casa.
The boy is rather turbulent
Half dead with cold.
The whole day over.
Warm bread (slightly warm).
He was somewhat embarrassed.
He came softly.
Tour house is pretty far away.
217. Primitive words, ending of themselves in any diminu-
tive termination (such as cepiffo, brush ; aban^co, fan ; esp^'o,
looking-glass, &c.), cannot take an additional termination simi-
lar to their own, without producing a disagreeable sound, which
ought always to be avoided. Words ending in ito or ita are
excepted.
The same tehnination may often serve t^ express affection^
pity^ contempt^ Ac, being in this respect like the interjec-
tions, and it is consequently very difficult to classify them.
Very often their real meaning can be distinguished only
by the nature of the conversation and the intonation of the
LESSON XLIV. ^ 225
voice. * They are, nevertheless, not to be used too profasely,
because when they come too close together they render the
discourse monotonous, in consequence of the similarity existing
between them.
218. There are in Spanish other derivatives, formed more
or less at fancy, and which are not augmentatives or diminu-
tives, although they may appear to be such; these might be
called depreciatives {despreciativaa)^ because there is always in
them something of censure, maliciousness, or mockery ; as.
Casa, casuca.
Poeta, poetastro.
Caldo, calducbo.
' Houae, miBerable-looking house.
Poet, poetaster.
Broth, poor broth.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Tiene Y. liLstima de aqnel pobrete ? No tengo l^ima do 61, por-
que es nn ladronzuelo.
2. ^Le ha robado 4 V. algo? No, sefior, 61 sabe may bien que si so
atreviese 4 robarme yo lo mataria de an pistoletazo.
8. Y |porqa6 no do un garrotazo, 6 on caflonazo ? iPorqn6? No s6
porqa6, probablemente he empleado la palabra pistoletazo porqae tengo
una pistola y no tengo ni garrote, nl cafion.
4. No, senor, esa no es la razon ; ^qniere Y. qne yo se la diga? Bien,
veamos.
5. Y. no tiene valor para matar una mosca caanto mas & an hombre ;
pero Y. qaeria practicar con las palabras matar y pistoletazo y esta es la
sola razon per la caal Y. iba & cometer on homicidio.
6. Yaya, Don Francisco, Y. es poeta, hombre do ingonio y de baen
hamor y qaicre divertirse d costa'mia, ^no es verdad ? Ya lo veo 4 Y.
venir, Y. qaiere hacerme decir qne no soy poeta sino poetastro introdu-
ciendo esta palabrita mas de la leccion.
7. Solo le faltaba & Y. llamarso Quevedo para serle pareddo en todo,
hasta en el nombre. — ^Mil gradas por el honor de la comparacion, pero
Yolviendo & lo del pistoletazo.
8. I Por Dios I D. Francisco, no sea Y. tan barlon y d6jeme Y. estar
en paz. — ^Lo dejar6 4.Y., Bon Pepe, si me permite contarle on cuentecito;
y para que le parezoa 4 Y. mas interesante, se lo contar6 4 Y. introdncien-
do tantos aomentativos y diminativos como me sea posible.
9. Oon esa condicion le escacho 4 Y. — ^Paes bien ; vaya de cnento :
Habia un hombrecillo en derto lugarcillo. — ^Y observe Y., D. Pepito,
que para el caentecito lo mismo habiera dado que el hombre hubiera udo
10*
226 # LSS80K ZLIY.
hombron y el Ingor logaron. — ^Adelante con el caenteciHo que me va gas-
tando na tantico. Paes es el caso que esto hombron, hombrecito, hom-
brecillo, hombrote, hombrecico, hombrasso, hombronazo, hombracho, 6
como V. qniera llamarlo. . . .
10. To no qaiero Ilamarle nada, Y. lo ha llamado ja saficiente ; pcro
al cuento, id cacnto 6 se acabard el ejercicio sin que llegnemos al fin.—
Paes este hombrezuelo no sabia mas que un cnentecillo ; pero lo contaba
& todo el mundo que encontraba.
11. Pero 70 no comprendo como podia hacer que su cuento vinieso &
pelo 7 y. sabo que no se cuenta an cuento asl de sopeton, como se dan
los buenos dias. — Al principio, el viejote se encontraba apuradillo para
conscguirlo ; pero el picaruelo invent6 despues una estratagema por me-
dio de la cual hizo que su anecdotiUa viniera 4 pelo siempre.
12. jOigal I J quo estratagema fu6 esa? Oigala Y. ; pero dntes debo
advertir d Y. que en su an^cdota habia algo que hacia relacion 4 cafiona-
zos 7 pistoletazos.
13. I H6 1 I Ta Yuelve Y. 4 los pistoletazos ! Pues bien, como iba di-
ciendo de mi cuento, se aproximaba el buen Tiqjecito callandito 4 cnal-
quier corrillo que encontrase 7 poni^ndose el dedo indice sobre la boca
en ademan de imponer silencio, les preguntaba. '^ | Han oido Yds. un
cafionazo ? " No, sefior, era naturalmente la respuesta ; pues bien, res-
pondia mi hombre ma7 satisfecho. — Ahora que hablamas de cafionazos
les C/0ntar6 4 Yds. una an^cdota .... 7 aqui contaba su cuento.
14. To no veo la aplicacion de su cuento do Y. todavia, Sr. D. Fran-
cisco. — I C6mo I D. Pepe, ^no ha oido Y. un pistoletazo ?
EXERCISE.
1. How did 70U like that stor7 by Fornan Caballero which I lent
70U? Yer7 much indeed; it gives a ver7 good idea of the manners,
customs and language of the low classes in Andalusia (Andalucid),
2. What did that man want? He is a poor lame man asking for a
piece of bread, or a few cents to bu7 some.
8. He is lame, 70U sa7 ; how did that happen to him ? He saTs he
was at the war and received a pistol shot in the leg.
4. What does the ph7sician give to 70ur cousin since he has been
sick? Hehasg^ven him some medicine (fnedieina\ and 8a78 he must
take broth three times a da7.
6. Do 70U like broth ? Yes, ver7 well ; but not such poor broth as
the7 make for m7 cousin.
6. How does that poor man make his living since he lost both his
arms ? He can do nothing in the world, and lives on what little money
he gets from his brother, who is rather embarrassed himself just now.
LESSOK XLY.
227
7. Ck>me nearer to the fire, Louisa; it is a little cold this morning.
Thank 70U, I do not feel the cold mnch ; hnt I would be obliged to you
if 70a wonld call Fanny in to warm herself; 'she is half dead with cold.
8. Is Henry going to be employed by that merchant to whom yon
spoke for him some time ago ? Tes, I think it is probable, and I shall be
very glad, for the poor fellaui^ is a little embarrassed, and has been so
for a long time.
9. If I were in yonr place I wonld not allow that dog to howl so the
whole night over. My father will not let me speak abont it to onr neigh-
bor, who lives in that miserable old honse next to onrs ; it is his dog, and
he onght not to let it howl in snch a manner.
10. Jnst listen to him I as if I wonld not go and kill it with a bind-
geon. — Elll it I There wonld be no necessity for killing it ; jnst give
him one good blow with the bludgeon you talk of and he wonld let you
sleep in future.
11. Have yon ever read Don Quixote? No ; why? If you take the
trouble to read it you will find a very good anecdote of a madman (loco)
and a dog, in the first chapter of the second part of that justly celebra-
ted work.
12. Have you paid attention to what is said in to-day's lesson on ang-
mentativcs and diminutives ? Tes, madam ; and it seems to me that the
proper use of them must make a language expressive and elegant in a
high degree (grado),
13. Is Concepeian a very common name for ladies in Spain ? There
are a great many called by that name ; the diminutive is Concha.
14. Is your mother satisfied with her new servant ? Very much so.
15. Why did she let the other one go away? She was very glad to
see her go away, because she used to steal everything that came to her
hand.
16. Is that coffee warm? No, sir; but I could warm it in a few
minutes, if. yon wished.
LESSON XLV.
[know.
Avisar. To advise, to notify, to let one
Admirar. To admire.
Acons^ar. To counsel, to advise.
Apremiar. To urge, to compel one to do any
thing by order of court.
• BeoMmto tiitl Si]«]]di WQfds ItoltoiMcf are not to be tni^
228
LESSON XLY.
Afectar.
Compadecer.
Convertir.
Desertar.
Empefiar.
Ezplicar.
Fosilar.
Guardar.
Ubrar.
Mentir.
Mencionar.
Pennanecer.
Relatar.
Santificar.
Sncedcr.
Sonar.
Volar.
To feign, to affect
To pity.
To convert
To desert.
To pledge, to engage.
To explain.
To shoot
To guard, to observe, to keep.
To free, to liberate^ to deliver.
'To lie.
To mention.
To remain.
To relate.
To sanctify.
To happen, to succeed.
To sonnd.
To fly.
lAh bahl
Oh, pshaw I
jTomal
Indeed I
Ancho.
Wide, broad.
False.
False.
Oalvo.
Bald.
Famoso.
Famous.
Notorio.
Notorious, well known.
Cr^dulo.
Credulous.
Crftlco.
Critical.
Formal.
Formal, straightforward.
Snpersticioso.
Superstitious.
Esc6ptico.
Skeptic, skepticaL
De todo corazon.
With all my heart
En su interior.
In his mind.
Ya caigo.
I see (or understand).
Bien venldo.
Welcome.
A dial mas.
Vieing with each other.
De buena f6.
In good faith.
Estoes.
That is.
Ya lo ve V.
So you see.
Sol.
Amor.
Sun.
Love.
Oracion.
Tierra.
Prayer.
Earth, hind.
LESSON XLY.
229
Oielo.
Sky, heaven.
Calm
Baldness, the bald
Reino.
Kingdom.
part.
Fin.
End, purpose.
Ana.
Ann.
Deudor.
Debtor.
Voluntad.
Will, choice.
General.
General
Profecia.
Prophecy.
Caervo.
Bayen, crow.
ilsonomia.
Physiognomy,
Agaero.
Omen.
countenance.
Interior.
Interior.
Tentacion.
Temptation.
Kspiritn.
Spirit
Sinceridad.
Sincerity.
Lodo.
Mud.
Ii^ustida.
Injustice.
£1 padre nnestro. The Lord's Fi«7er.
Kidiculez.
Bidicule.
Compaaion.
Compassion.
Materia.
Matter.
F6.
Faith.
Bolsa.
Purse.
Ezoepcion.
Exception.
Frente.
Forehead,
Formalidad.
Formality.
OOMPOi
51T10N.
Dios te lo premie.
Si para fines de aflo no hubiere pagado,
le apremias (or apremiale, or le apre-
miar&s).
. S yiene {or como yenga) ser& bien re-
cibido.
Qoien tal diga miente.
Si asi lo haces, Dios te lo premie.
Si al salir de tu casa vieres yolar cuer-
yos, ddjalos volar y mira tii donde
pones los pi^s.
Todo hombre calro no tendr& pelo ; y
si tuviere alguno no ser& en la calya.
Le perdonarfin todo lo que hidero. ,
Le eseribir6 & Y. lo que me d^ere.
Si permaneciere aqul algun tiempo se lo
ayisard.
Le eacribir6 k V. lo que diga.
May God reward yon for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.
If he comes, he shall be well received.
Whoever says such a thing lies.
If you do so, may God reward you.
If on going out of your house you should
see crows fly, let them fly, and look
where you put your own feet.
Every bald man will be without hair ;
or if he should have any, it will not
be on the bald part
They will forgive him every thing he
may do.
I will write to you what he may {hvp-
pen to) say to me.
If I should (or should I) remain here
any time, I will let you know.
I will write to you what he may say to
me.
230
LEB80N XLT.
Le perdonar&n lo que haga.
Si habiere salido cuando Y. llegae.
Atmque hubiere Uegado Antes qae re-
clba la carta.
Aunque haya llegado Antes qae reciba
la carta.
El general mandd que todos los que
desertaran faesen fuailados.
El general niand6 que todos los que
hubieran desertado ftiesen fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que desertaren sean fosUados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que hubieren desertado sean foakr
dOB.
Quien lo d^ere mienie.
Si viniere, serA bien recibido.
Si asl lo hideres.
They will foi^ye hun every thing he
may do.
If be should hare left when you arrive.
Although he may have axrived before
he receives the letter.
Althou^ he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
The general ordered that all those who
might (happen to) desert should be
shot
The general ordered that all those who
might have deserted should be shot
The general has ordered that all those
who may desert (t. e, may happen to
desert) should be shot
The general has ordered that all ihoee
who may have deserted be shot
Whoever should say so will lie.
If he should come, he will be well re-
ceifed.
If you should do so.
EXPLANATION.
219. The FimrBE simple of the Babjunctive mood repre-
sents a contingent action as to take place some time hence ; as,
I will write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.
They will forgive him everything he
Le escribir6 & Y. lo que me d^ere.
Le perdonar&n todo lo que hidere.
Siperfnaneeiere aquf algun tiempo se
lo avisar^.
may do in future.
If I should (or should I) remunhcre
any time I shall let you know.
220. The pbesent of the subjanctive may be substitated
for the foregoing tense, except when the verb is preceded by
the conditional 8% ; as, JOe escribiri dVilo que diga ; Leperdo-
nardn lo que haga.
221. The futube coMPOxn!n>, which is not so much used
as the simple, denotes a contingent action subordinate to a
future event ; as.
Si Austere m2k29 cnando Y. llegae- | If he should bare left when yoa
arrive.
LESSON ZLY.
231
Amiqae hubiere Uegodo intes que
reciba la carta.
Although he may baye arriyed before
be reoeiyes the letter.
222. The compounb pbbsent of the sabjanctive may be
snbstitated for the above tense, except when the verb is pre-
ceded by the coqditional si ; as, aunque haya llegado dntes que
reciba la carta.
223. In order that the imperfect and pluperfect of the sub-
junctive, which also express a future contingent action or
event, be not misapplied, as too frequently they are, and con-
founded with the future simple and compound future of the
same mood, the following distinction must be attentively
observed :
1st. That the imperfect and pluperfect may be employed
when the actions or events expressed in the sentence are future
only in reference to some other time expressed, or merely im-
plied, in the sentence.
2d. That the future simple and compound future must be
nsed when the contingent 'action or event implied' in the sen-
tence is future with regard to the action expressed by the
determining verbs ; as.
El general mandd que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.
El general mand6 que todos los que
hubieran dnertado fuesen fusilados.
£1 general ba mandado que todos los
que deteriaran sean fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que huburea desertado sean fbsi-
lados.
224. The future simple and the compound future of the
subjunctive also act as determining verbs ; but they govern the
subordinate verb only in the present or the future simple of the
indicative, and in the imperative ; as,
Quien lo d^ere^ miente. Wboever should say so will lie.
^vinitreierd blen redbido. If he should oome, he shall be well
xeoeiTed.
The general ordered that all those
who should (might happen to) de-
sert should be shot
The general ordered that all those
who had (might baye) deserted
should be shot
The general has ordered that all those
who desert (t. e, may happen to
desert) shall be shot
The general has ordered that all those
who baye deserted shall be shot
232
LESSOK XLY.
SI as! lo hieiera. IHoB te lo premie. If joa do bo, may God reward joa
for It
Si para fines de afio no hubierepagar If at the end of the year he has not
do^ le opremtcu, or aprhniale^ or paid you, compel him to do bo.
le apremianU.
These determining sentences of tbe future simple of the
subjunctive may be turned to the present indicative in certain
cases, and to the present subjunctive in others ; as.
^ rtefi«, or como venga, Ber& bien re-
dbido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si aaf lo haeet^ DioB te lo premie, etc.
If he comes, he shall be well re-
ceived.
Whoever says so lies.
If you do so, may God reward you
for it
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jos^, me han dicho que es mal a^ero al salir uno do sn casa
T6r volar ouervcft; |qa6 piensa Y. sobre ello? To pienso como Don
Francisco de Qaevedo.
2. ^T qu^ es lo que pensaba ese famoso escritor sobre esta materia?
Oiga Y. lo que ^1 decla.
8. Si ol saHr de tn casa vieres volar cnervos, d^jalos volar, y mira it
donde pones los pi4s.
4. I Ah I {bah \ Qnevedo era xm criticon que no perdonaba nada,
pero alld en sn interior qniza creia nn poqnito como todo el mundo en
los agtleros ; |no cree Y. asi ? | Qa6 si creia 1 Por sapnesto que a. Yea
Y. aqui otro de los agtieros en qaoVreia.
6. Si vas d comprar algo, y al ir d pagar no hallares la bolsa adonde
Uevabas el dlnero, es agtlero malisimo, y no te sncederd bien la compra.
6. jTomal Esa es mia verdad de Perogrullo, y ya veo que Y. no
oree en los agtleros pero al m6nos Y. creerd en las profecias ; ^ no es ver-
dad, Don Jos^? lOI si, sofiora, macho, sobre todo en las de Pero-
grullo.
7. 4Qu6 profecias son esaa, que nunoa las he oido? Sefiora no podr6
relatdrselas 4 Y. todas, pero le dir6 d Y. algunas si Y. lo desea.
8. Con mucho gusto, hdgame Y. el favor. Pues bien, oiga Y. : " Si
lloviere habrd lodos." " El que tuviere tendrd."
9. I Ah ! ya caigo ; es por esto que se llama cnalquiera verdad que es
muy notoria, verdad de Perogrullo. | Yamos I aqui viene Don Enrique,
puede ser que 61 crea en algo, porque Y. no cree en nada.
10. A los pi68 de Y., Dofia Anita.— Beso d Y. la mano Don Enrique.
LBS80K XLY. 233
11. A las 6rdeiies do V., Don Jo86, — ^Bien vcnido, Don Enrique. — ^Aqui
tiene Y. 4 Dofia Anita empefiada en hacerme snpersticioso.
12. Y V. es tambien esc^ptico, no cree V. en snefios, en espiritua, en
fisonomias, jen que cree V., Don. Enrique? To, sefiorita, aoy un hombre
mnj cr^dolo, creo en todo, creo hasta las mi\)eres.
13. Mil gracias, Don Enrique ; yo creia que la ranoeridad estaba siempre
de parte de la mi^er y no del hombre, puea son Yds. todos 4 cual mas
iaiso. — Sefiorita, 6 Y. nos hace una iiyusticia, 6 yo soy una ezcepcion ;
pero ycdviendo 4 lo de las creencias, confieso de buena f6 que soy un poco
superstidoso. — ^Me alegro mucho, de ese modo me ayudar4 Y. 4 convertir
4 Don Jos6 que no oree en nada.
14. Perdone Y., sefiorita, yo creo en una de las cosas que Y. ha men-
cionado, esto es, en las fisonomlas. — \ Bien, bien I ezpliquenos Y., ent6nce8,
su significado.
15. El que tuviere la frente ancha tendr4 los ojos deb^jo de la frente,
y Yivir4 todos los dias de su vida, — ; Por Dios 1 Don Jos^, hable Y. for-
mafanente.
16. Pues bien, con toda formalidad. Todo hombre calvo no tendr4
pelo, y si tuviere algnno no 8er4 en la calva.
17. ) Ya lo ye, Y. I se burla de todo, y no cree en nada, es un esc^ptico
completo. Defi^ndase Y., amigo Don Jos6, 6 quiz4 es verdad que no
cree Y. en nada. Ent6nces le oompadezco 4 Y. de todo corazon.
18. I Hombre I d^jeme Y. en paz, y guarde Y. su compadon para
tod4s esas pobres gentes que oreen, 6 afectan creer, todas esas ridiculeces ;
yo creo lo que veo ; creo lo que raento, y creo lo que mi razon me acon-
sqja creer; por eso crdo en el sol, en el amor, en Dios.— ) Yamos! ahora
va 4 hacemos creer que es hombre muy religioso.
19. Sefior Don Jos4, esta sefiorita y yo tenemos grandes deseos de
aprender el Padre nuestro en espafiol ; i lo sabe Y. ? No solamente lo b4,
siuo que es una oracion que me gusta mucbo.
20. ^Quiere Yi hacemos el favor de declmosla? Con mucho gusto,
h6lo aqui.
21. ** Padre nuestro, que est4s en los cielos, santificado sea tu nombre,
venga 4 nos el tu reino. H4gase tu volimtad, as! en la tierra como en el
cielo. El pan nuestro de cada dia d4nosle hoy. Perd6nanos nuestras
deudas, como nosotros perdonamos 4 nuestros deudores. Y no nos dejes
caer en tentacion. Y libranos de maL" Amen.
22. Mil gradas, Don Jos6 ; voy 4 aprenderlo de memoria porque me
Buena muy bien en espafiol.
234 LESBOK XLT.
EXERCISE.
1. At what o^dock does the son rise at New York in the month of
September t The son rose here this morning at twentj-seven minates
past five o'clock.
2. What did your teacher say to yon to-day when your lessons were
finished? Nothing to me in particnlar; he spoke to all of ns about
reading good books, as very necessary in order to acquire the love of
truth and sincerity in all our actions.
8. Here are the works of Francis de Quevedo ; have you ever read
themt Yea, very often; and I admire very much his profoxmd knowl-
edge of the human heart.
4. He is also somewhat of a jester; is he not? Yes, but for a very
wise end ; he shows all the ridicule of the belief in auguries, omens — ^for
instance, the flight (puelo) of crows, &c.
6, What do you think of his prophecies? The only end of his
prophecies seem to be to divert his readers, telling them that all bald
persons will have no hair, or if they should have any, it will not be on
the bald place.
6. Do you know what the general has ordered ? He has given orders
that all the soldiers that desert shall be shot
7. Do you pity that poor soldier who is to be shot ? I did not know
there was one to be shot ; what crime did he commit ? He deserted.
8. What win they do to that robber if they find him? He will be shot.
9. Do you not think he deserves to be shot? There can be no doubt
of it : he who kills a man must die by the hand of man.
10. Are there still superstitious people in the world? Yes, a very
great many; and I must say, that, even amongst the learned, we find a
great number whose education would lead us to have a higher opinion
of them.
11. Has that gentleman paid you yet the money he owed you such a
long time ? Not yet ; indeed I begin to fear he will never pay me.
12. If he should not pay you before he leaves the country, compel him
to do so. 8o I intend to do.
48, How long does your father intend to remain in Germany ? Perhaps
two or three months ; but should he remain longer, he will write for me
to go to him.
14. Welcome, 3ilr. Martinez I how long have you been in town? Only
a few days; and I shall return home as soon as I hear firom my brother.
15. What a fine forehead that young lady has I I have never seen
such a beautif\al countenance, with the exception of that of a lady whom
I met in Spain a few years ago.
LESSON XLYI.
235
LESSON XLVI
Adivinar.
To guess.
Acordar.
To agree, to tune.
Acordarso.
To recollect, to remember.
Colocar.
To lay, to place.
Meter.
To put^ to make (noise).
Peinar.
To comb.
Picar.
To prick, to chop, to hash.
Perdstir.
To persist
Boznper.
To break.
Coger.
To take.
Esconder.
To hide, to cpnceaL
SOTZOKB.
lAyl
Ayl •
iZape! Heaven preserve
lEal
Gheer upt come,
us!
• comet
I Victoria! Tictory!
lEht
Oht ahl
(Ctoo! How!
iHuyl
Whew!
lAnda! Go! go away!
lOxI
Get you gone!
iGaUe! Strange!
]Sas!
Gome! come!
lGhito(orchi- Hush!
|Uf(whnf)l
Ugh!
ton)!
iHolal
HaUoal
jDiantrel The deuce!
I Tate!
Take care!
(Lookout!
iGmdadoI ^Takecare! [us!
|Gat
Pshaw!
iVival
Hurrah!
{Diosnoslibre! Heaven preserve
{Dale!
Go!
iVamos! Gome!
lQn6hoiTorI
horror!
iVuelta! Turn about (or
round) !
Finalmente.
finally.
Llevar & cabo.
To accomplish.
Ueyarse chasco.
To be disappointed.
CabaL
Just, exact
Fresco.
Gool, fresh.
listo.
Ready, quick.
Restante.
Remaining, remainder.
Telegrdfico.
Telegraphic.
Extraordinario.
Extraordinary.
Dichoso.
1
Happy.
236
LBS60K XLYI.
Aire.
Oambio.
Alfiler.
AU^ntico.
£zito.
Buen 6zito.
Gable.
Peine.
Prosidente.
Roido.
Obasco.
Patio.
Tratado.
Dolor.
Asombro.
Maollido.
Gato.
Air.
Change.
Pin.
Atlantic.
Issue.
Success.
Cable.
Comb.
Preffldent.
Noise.
Disappointment
Yard, pit (theatre).
Treaty, treatise.
Pain, griefl
Amazement
Mewing.
Cat
Camisa.
Cuenta.
Empresa.
Cualidad.
Austria.
Palangana.
Prusia.
Prooesion.
Oonstancia.
Prueba.
Tranquilidad.
Victoria.
Gaoeta.
Shirt, chemise.
Account
Enterprise.
Quality.
Austria.
Wash-basin, wash-
bowL
Prussia.
Procession.
Constancy.
Proof; trial.
Tranquillity.
Victory.
Gazette, news-
paper.
CJOMPOSmON.
I Ah I quedesgracial
\ Ay de mi I
I Oh 1 dolor 1
lAh! briboul
lAhl queal^rial
I Oh! asombro!
I Ay, d le cojo !
I Oh! ya nos ▼er6moB 1
I Bah 1 no babies de esa manera !
I Hay ! me quemd con el dganillo !
lUfl quecalorazo!
I Ea, & trabi^ar !
I Tate I tate 1 no pase V. por ahi, que
yeo on hombre escondido 1
I Zape 1 ese gatazo no me d^a dormir
oon BUS mauUidoB 1
] Toma I toma ! eso ya lo sabia ya
\ Viva la libertad I
iDiantre de muchachosi y qu6 raido
meten!
iHola! D. Francisool dicH^sos los
ojoe que lo Ten & Y !
Ah I how unfortonate !
Woe is me I
Ah! how sad!
Hal rascal 1
Ah I what joy !
Oh! wonder!
Let me get hold of bim !
Oh ! I shall see you again !
Fhaaw I don't talk that way !
Whew I I have burned myself with the
cigarette !
Oh ! how warm it is !
Come to work !
Take care ! donH go that way ; I see a
man hiding!
Heaven preserve us 1 that confounded cat
will not let me sleep with its mewing!
That's all, eh ! I knew that much myself
Hurrah for liberty I
Did you ever hear such children ? what
a noise they make !
HaUoa I Mr. Frandsl it is good for
sore eyes to see you !
LSBSOK ZLYI.
237
jQa^mes^yof
La cuenta eatA cabaL
Espero no Uevanne chasoo, 7 qae lle-
T9x6 k cabo mi empresa.
How can I ten f
The aoooant is exact (correct).
I hope not to be liiBappoiiited, and that
I shall carry oat my midertaking.
EXPLANATION.
225. IiTTEBJECTiONS are words which serve to express the
different emotions and affections of the sooL There should be a
separate interjection to express each passion or emotion ; but this
not being the case, we often use the same ones to express joy,
grief, affright, astonishment, mockery, anger, &c., the significa-
tion of each interjection changing according to the voice, ges-
ture and manner of the speaker.
The exclamations that are properly called interjections in
Spanish, inasmuch as they have no other use, and because they
consist of only one wor^ are the following : Ah^ ay, bah, ca,
eA, hui/y oh, ox, SU8, uf, ea, hola, qfald, tate, zape, and a few others.
Ah, ay and 6 are used indifferently to express pain, joy,
mockery, surprise, scorn, anger, or admiration ; as,
/Ahf que desgrada 1 Ah ! what misfortune 1
/Oh/ dolor!
/Ah/ briboni
/Ah/ que alegria t
/Oh/ asombro !
/ Ah / que nedo I
/AysWe cojo !
/Oh/ ya nos yerdmos ! etc, etc.
Woe is me !
Ah I how sad 1
Hal rascal!
Oh I what joy 1
Oh I wonder!
Ah I what a fool 1
Let me get hold of him I
Oh ! I shall see you again I
226. J Bah I expresses displeasure, and sometimes wonder
and admiration. {Hit besides being used to attract the atten-
tion, is often employed in the sense of alas 1 / Sua ! serves
only to encourage. jHuy! is an exclamation expressive of
pain. jEa! serves to encourage, and sometimes to call the at-
tention. We use iholal to call our inferiors, and intimate
friends, and to manifest joy and surprise. / Tate I expresses
surprise, and serves to warn any one of some danger. / OJdldl
serves to manifest ardent desire for something.
238 LBSSOir ZLTI.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. (Eal eat macbaohos, arribat qne ja ea hora de levantane. —
^Paes qa6 hora es, pap&? Ta son las seia y quiero qae os vistaia, laveis
y tomeis el caf<§ prontito, para ir & tomar el aire fresco de la mallana en
la plaza de Madison.
2. i Sob I arriba I y el que se me presente primero ILsto ir4 & comprar-
me el JBeraldo y tendr& el centavo del oambio. — Helena, ppnme agna
para lavarme. — ^No, Helena, no ayndes k Al^aadro que ese ya puede ves-
tirse solo, aynda k Oarlotita y k Manolito.
8. Luisa, dame mis zapatos y mis medias. — ^64soalos t4 mlsniD, yo no
▼oy k ayndarte para que te vistas &ntes que yo.
4. I Ouidado I | no veis que Tais k romper esa palangana ? £s este
Manuel que todavia no se ha puesto mas que una media y un zapato y se
quiere lavar 4nte8 que yo, que me he puesto ya la camisa, los zapatos y
el pantalon.
6. I Ay I ay t-— |Qu6 es eso, Luisa? Me he picado con el alfier qne
estaba poniendo en mi vestido.
6. I £n d6nde eatk el Jabon? Qu6 me s6 yo.
7. i Oarlota, me quieres dar el peine, 6te\aak estar peinando todo el
dia ? D^jame en paz, ahora aoabo de principiar.
8. Mam&, mire Y. que Alejandro no me d^a ayudar k vestir k Manncl.
I Mam^ en d6nde esta mi sombrero ?
9. Pap&, ya estoy listo, d6me Y. el dinero para comprar el Eeraldo. —
No, no, pap4 ; mire Y. que se ha puesto el sombrero sin peinarse.
10. i 06mo ! eso no, Alejandro, no se sale k la calle mn p^narse.— Papd,
ya estoy listo. — ^Y yo. — ^Y yo.
11. I Ohiton I I Diantre de muohachos y que ruido metent Aqui te-
nds diez centavos, cnatro para el Eeraldo y de los seia restantes uno para
oada uno, cuenta cabal, metraeis ^\ Eeraldo y despues os vais k la plaza y
no Tolvais, k lo mdnos en un par de boras.
12. Margarita, ahora que tenemos tranquilidad tr^me la pipa, &ntes de
ponerme k escribir, fumar6 un poco y leer6 las noticias en el patio al fresco.
18. Hola I grandes noticias I j Qq6 hay de nnevo ? El Oreat Eastern
ha llegado, y se dice que el gran cable telegrdfico ha sido finalmente colo-
cado, uniendo asi la Europa y la America.
14. I Es posiblel ent6noes pronto tendr^mos noticias todos los diss de
Earopa. — Asi lo espero, pero no debemos estar muy segnros de ello, por-
que ya te acordards del chasco que Uev&mos anos pasados.
16. I Ah I si, ya me acuerdo ; en 1858, cuando se celebr6 el ^xito del
cable telegr^co con aquella grande procesion, y se vendia por la calle la
gaceta extraordinaria con el parte telegr^co de la Beina Victoria al
LESSON ZLTI. 239
Fresidente de los Estados ITziidos. — ^Espero que no nos llevemos ahora el
mismo chasco.
16. iiLaeztraordinariatl n La gaceta eztraordmaria 1 1 lEhlmucha-
cbo, aqni, aqnl.
17. ^CointOYale? Diez centayos.
18. I Victoria I Viva I Viva I iQu6 dice de nnevo? El cable del
Atl^Qtico ha tenido bnen ^zito, el primer pari;e recibido por 61 es el trata-
do de paz cntre el Auatria j la Prosia.
19. Esta es una praeba mas de lo qne pnede Uevar i cabo el bombre,
si tiene constaDoia y peraiste en nna empresa. — jCree V. que jo tambien
tendr^ bnen 6zito en mi empresa ?
20. I Qa6 empresa es esa ? { C6mo ! | no la adivina V. ? La empresa
de aprender el espaliol.
21. I Ah I No dado qne V. hablard espafiol si persiste y tiene cons-
tanda ; pnesto qne con estas onalidades se ha logrado que hable el cable
del Atl&ntico.
EXERCISE.
1. Can yon teU roe what kind of weather we will have to-morrow t
Oh, what a question I Do yon suppose that I can guess the weaker we
will have before it comes?
2. Did the pianist say he would come to tune the piano ? He said he
would come to-morrow, but that he could not come to-day.
3. Have you seen that the Atlantic telegraph cable is laid at last?
Yes; I am glad to see that the undertaking has been so successful.
4. Do you know who sent the first dispatch by the cable ? I am not
sure; but I remember that the first, at the time of the former cable, in
1858, was that sent by the President of the United States to the Queen
of England.
5. What was the reason of laying a second cable? Ah, come now I
do you not know tiiat the first one, having broken shortly after it had
been laid, became entirely useless (inutil) t
6. Have you seen the news to-day by Atlantic telegraph ? No ; what
is the news? That a treaty of peace has been signed (celebrar) between
Prussia and Austria.
7. Charles, go and find the comb, wherever you put it when you had
done with it. I have not seen it since Henry was using it; and even if
I had, I would not tell you where it was.
8. Ah, yon little rogue ! there, you have broken the wash-basin. It
is not my fi&ult, Henry wanted it first, and I had already commenced to
wash myself; but he persisted and would take it from me.
9. O horror t ju9t look at the state his hair (pelo) is in t Go this
240 LESSON, ZLYI.
instant and get the oomb and comb yonr hair before yon dare to appear
before me.
10. Have yon a pin to |^ve me f Yea, here is a paper of pins ; take
all yon want and gLve me back the rest.
11. Did yon know yonr lessons well this morning? Yes, very well,
and the proof is that papa allowed me to go to see the procession.
12. What did yon kill that poor little fly for? Have I not told yon
many times that I don't wish yon to catch or kill flies ?
18. Is that bread fresh ? Yes, sir, the baker has jnst brought it a few
minntes ago.
14. We were to have gone to the yard to play at twelve o^clock. Yon
may go now ; bnt do not make much noise.
15. Where were yon going when I met yon? We were coming home
to dine.
16. Has the shoemaker sent yon his bill ? Yes, bnt it is not correct.
17. Has not yonr uncle ^pitten to yon since he went away? He has
sent several telegraphic dispatches to my father on business ; bnt he has
not written to us once (una sola vee),
18. Is there not to be a new opera to-night ? No ; but I understand
there is to be a new play (eomedia) at the theatre.
10. That is nothing extraordinary ; there are new pieces very often now.
20. If Louisa were a little taller would she not be handsomer than
Jane ? She would at least be quite as handsome.
21. Would you wish to have the window opened ? I think it wonid
be much cooler if it were open.
22. Would yon not like me to repeat to you that story I told you the
other day ? If you had lime I should be much obliged to you to tell it
to me once more.
28. Would not quietness be much better for that gentleman than so
much noise ? He could not live without noise.
24. Might you not have broken your arm or your leg when yon fell
out of your carriage ? Yes, if I had not taken care.
25. If I had wanted money when I was in the country would you not
have brought me some ? If I could have got {eoMeguir) it I would.
26. Would your aunt not have been disappointed if she had not been
in time to take the three o^dock train ? She would have been terribly
disappomted, for she was going to spend the day at a firiend^s, about ten
miles out of town.
LESSON XLVII.
241
LESSON XLVII.
Acompafiar.
Cargar.
Curar.
Dafiar.
Deleitar*
Incomodar.
Incomodarse.
Eqnivooar.
Evitar.
' Instruir.
Oonpar.
Padecer.
Solicitar.
Acento.
Bolsillo.
Autor.
Esfuerzo.
Efecto.
Fastidio.
Ciudadano.
Hospital.
M6todo.
Trabtgo.
Napoles,
Real
Sonido.
Ohelin.
To accompany.
To load, to charge.
To core, to attend (as a physician).
To iignre, to damage.
To delight
To inconmiode.
To get out of temper.
To mistake.
To avoid, to shmu
To instruct.
To occQpy.
To safer.
To solicit, to apply for, to m'ge.
Dimes y dir^tes.
Ifs and ands.
El no s6 qa6.
An inexplicable something.
Dolor de cabeza.
Headache.
Mascnlino.
Mascnline.
Amable.
Amiable.
Agradable.
Agreeable.
Extrangero.
Foreign, foreigner.
Interesaato.
Interesting.
Moribnndo.
Dying.
Valiente.
Valiant, arrant.
Femenino.
Feminine.
Accent.
Purse.
Author.
Effort, bravery.
Effect [ness.
Unease, nneasi-
Gtizen.
Hospital.
Method.
Labor, work.
Naples.
Real.
Sound.
Shining.
Alma.
Comedla.
Vara.
libra.
Manteca, or
Mantequilla.
Calidad.
Cantidad.
Soul.
Comedy.
Bod, yard {mea»-
ure).
Pound.
Butter.
Quality.
Quantity.
n
242
LESSON XLTII.
COMPOSITION.
El porqa6 de todas las cosas.
Lofl ayes del moribundo.
Los dimes y dir^tes.
£1 cuando.
£1 no b6 qu6.
£1 tener amigos no dafia.
Hay bombres de on saber eztraordi-
nario.
Un nada le incomoda.
La constancia y el tralMgo son neoesa-
rios al bombre en todas sua empresas.
La America es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nadon mny poblada.
El clima de Espaiia.
Los esfUerzoB de la Espafia.
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Treinta centavos la docena.
Dos Teces al dia.
Cuatro pesos por vara.
La f6, la esperanza y la caridad.
£1 Sefior De Vargas tieoe tres nifios.
La Se&ora Martinez ea muy prudente.
Ella me di6 la mano.
Puso la mano en el bolsUlo.
Mucbos caballeros solidtaron mi mana
El caballero & quien yi6 Y. ayer en mi
The why and the wherefore of all
things.
The groans of the dying.
The i& and ands.
The time.
I know not what
It is hurtful to no one to have fiiends.
There are men of extraordinary knowl-
edge.
A mere nothing incommodes him.
Constancy and labor are necessary to
mankind in all their enterprises (or
undertakings).
America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous natioxL
The climate of Spain!
The bravery of Spain. '
Four dollars a yard.
Two reals a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
Four dollars a yard.
Faith, hope and charity.
Mr. Vargas has three cldldien.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
She shook hands with me.
He put his hand in his pocket
Many gentlemen have solicited my
hand.
The gentleman whom you saw yesterday '
in my house.
EXPLANATION.
227. Use ov the Abticle.— All or any of the parts of
speech, and sometimes even whole sentences, may. be used as
nouns, and as such admit the article, as has just been observed
in the Composition of the present lesson, in which we see exam-
ples of verbs, adverbs and interjections preceded by the article,
and treated in every respect as nouns substantive.
228. The defikits abticlb is to be used before all com-
LESSON XLVII. 243
mon nonns, taken in a general sense and in the full extent of
their signification ; as,
La constancia j el trabajo son neccsa- I Ck)nstanc7 and labor are necessary to
lios al hombre en todas bus empresas. | mankind in all undertakings.
229. The article is expressed before the names of the four
parts of the globe : before the names of empires, kingdoms,
provinces and countries j and before the four seasons of the
year; as,
America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous nation.
The winter in the South is more agree-
able than the summer.
La America es mayor que la Europa.
La Franda es una nacion muy po-
blada. •
M inviemo en d Sur es mas agradable
que el verano.
But it is omitted before the names of kingdoms, provinces,
Ac, when they are preceded by a preposition ; unless they be
personified, as has been observed in Lesson XXX. ; as,
£1 clima de Espalia, I The climate of Spain.
Los esfuerzos de la Eapaiia, \ The bravery of Spain.
Kingdoms bearing the same name as their capitals do not
admit the article ; as, Ndpoles^ Naples.
230. Nouns of measure, weight, ifec, when preceded by
the indefinite article in English, as an equivalent to ecichj re-
quire the article ; as.
Cuatro pesos la vara,
Dos reales la libra,
Treinta centavos la doeena,
Dos Teccs al dia.
Four dollars a yard.
Two reals a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
If the preposition por be used, we omit the article ; as,
cuatro pesos por vara^ &c.
231. The article is generally repeated before every noun
enumerated, especially if they differ in gender; as,
La U, la esperanza y la caridad. I Faith, hope and charity.
Los dias y la» noches. I The days and nights.
232. The definite article is used before nouns indicating
rank, office, profession or titles of persons, when these are spoken
of, but not when spoken to ; as.
El General Sheridan es valiente.
El Sefior De Vargas tiene tres nifios.
La Scnora Martinez, es muy prudente.
General Sheridan is brare.
Mr. De Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
Puflo lamano en d bolsillo.
244 LEB80N XLTII.
233. The definite article is used instead of the possessive ad-
jective when the possessives refer to parts of our own body ; as,
lie be cortado la tnano. I I have cat mj hand.
lie duele la eabtza, I My head aches.
This applies even to parts of the body of other persons ; as,
Ella me dio la mono. She gave me her hand (or shook hands
with me).
He put his hand in his pocket
But the pronoun must be used when the personal article would
occasion ambiguity; as,
Machos caballerossolicitaron mi mano. | Many gentlemen solicited my hand.
234. The definite article is also employed, as in English,
before nouns taken in a particular or definite sense ; as,
El caballero k quien Ti6 V. ayer en mi | The gentleman whom you saw yesier-
casa. I day in my house.
We forbear from adding many more rules which we might
give, if they were not subject to numerous exceptions, and,
especially, if we were not of opinion that practice and reading
will teach better than any rules when to employ and when
to omit the article.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Cn41 de las partes del mnndo es la mayor 9 El Asia es la mayor.
2. ^Es Asia nombre masculino? No, sefior, es femenino.
8. £nt6nces, £porqa6 le pone Y. el articnlo mascolino? For evitar
el mal sonido que resnltoria de-poner dos a juntas,
4. ^Luego, v. pone siempre el articnlo mascnlino delante de todo
nombre femenino que empieza por a? No, sefior; esto solo sucede en
singular, y cuando sobre dicha vocal carga el acento de la palabra.
6. 4 Ha leido V. el si de las nifias de Moratin ? Si, sefeor, lo lei hace
muchos afios; pero & mi me gusta ttih a la oomedia nueva del mismo
antor.
6. |Qu6 tal le gusta & V. sn nueva vecinita? Dicen que es muy
bonita. — ^En efecto lo es ; poro & mi no me gusta, pofque anda siempre en
dimes y dir6tes, y un nada la incomoda.
7. ^Oiiales son las virtudes del alma? La f6, la esperanza y la ca-
ridad. •
8. jTiene V. olguna cosa interesante que dedrme hoy? Mucbisimas
LE8S0K XLYII. 245
interesantlsimos 6 iraportantisimas para practicar y aprender el
9. I Uf ! ya va V. i principiar con sus adverbios, preposiciones y arti-
culos; va V. & decirmo, por snpueato, que estas partes de la oracion nnas
veces sc ponen dntes las nnas qne las otras, y vice versa ; que las nnas
gobicrnan d las otras y las gobernadas gobieman & sn vez & otras, que
se acuerdon 6noentre sf. |Cre6 Y. quo todo eso scrd interesante para
mi con el fastidio que tengo, y el dolor de cabeza que padezco? ; CaUo I
ent6nce8, caballerito, V. ha equivocado la casa. . .
10. 4Qu6 quiere V. decir con eso de equivocar la casa? Quiero decir
que, en lugor de venir a la dase, debi6 V. ir boy ol hospital y de aUi al
teatro.
11. 2 Para qu6 ? Para qne le curasen en una parte de sns dolores y en
la otra del fastidio.
12. Si; pero, Sefior Profesor, yo si^mpre creia qne el mejor m^todo de
ensefianza es aquel que "instruye deleitando." V. tiene mil razones,
pcro ha olvidado una peqnefia cireunstancia que requiere sn m6todo.
18. I T cual es esa cireunstancia? Que no pnede aplicarse sino cod
aquellos discipulos qne se deleitan aprendiendo.
14. Y ahora volviendo al articulo. — Senor Profesor, V. mo escnsar^
pero no volvamos al articulo porque no puedo quedarme mas aqui hoy.
15. iC6mo es eso? el tiempo de la leccion no ha acabado todavia. —
V. tiene razon ; pero hoy es necesarip qne me vaya temprano, porque he
^rometido acompafiar & nnas sefioritas 4 la opera.
16. I Oh I ent6nces es necesario no faltar d sn palabra. — Sefior Pro-
fesor, bnenas noches (este buen sefior me fastidia con sns explicaclones).
— Divi^rtase V. mucho, Sefior Don Pepito (este amable j6ven aprenderd
espafiol, para el tiempo que yo compre una casa en la Qninta Avenida,
ensefidndolo).
EXERCISE.
1. If I should come for yon this evening, would you come with me
to see the Martinez ? I would, with great pleasure, if Charlotte would
accompany us.
2. How does that lady speak French ? They say she speaks very
correctly, though with a slightly foreign accent,
8. Might he not bo cured if he called in a good physician ? He is of
opinion that physicians do more ii\jury tHan good to mankind.
4. Do yon know any thing of the author of that play ? Yes, I have
read (or heard) all his plays ; they are very interesting, and delighted
me exceedingly. •
6. What is death ? The separation of soul and body.
246 LEBSON ^Lyii.
6. Can one be a citizen of the TJnjf^ States without having been
born (nacer) in the country ? Yes, after having resided in the United
States a certain number of years any one may become a citizen.
7. Where is that poor man going ? To the hospital ; he has broken
his leg.
8. Pardon me, I think you are laistaken ; it is rather his arm that is
broken, for if his leg were* broken he could not walk.
9. Do you remember the name of the principal city of Kaples ? Yes,
the naioe of the principal city is that of the kingdom also.
10. Did you silake hands with that young lady ? Yes, as soon as she
saw me she came towards me and gave me her hand.
11. Is that cloth (pafto) sold very high? Not very; it costs only
three dollars a yard.
12. How often do you take your Spanish lessons ? Twice a week.
13. Would you not learn faster if you took a lesson every other day
(un dia »i y otro no) ? My teacher says I would ; but I have not time to
take lessons so often.
14. Would you like summer to return again ? No, thank yon, I am
glad it is past, for I assure you I havo suffered enough with the heat.
16. How sad it is on the field of battle (eampo de hatalla) to hear the
groans of the dying I Yes ; and, notwithstanding, men will persist in
killing each otner for a foot * of grQund {terreno).
16. How is butter sold a pound? Thirty cents for one kmd, and forty
cents a pound for the best
17. Do you think it can injure any one to have Mends? No, it can
injure nobody to have friends.
18. Is not that person very amiable and agreeable? Yery rarely, for
a mere nothing incommodes him.
19. Are there many learned men in that country ? There have been
and there are at present men of extraordinary learning.
20. Which are the three principal virtues ? -Paith, hope and charity.
21. Is Miss Cabargas married yet? Not yet, although a large number
of gentleman have solicited her hand.
22. I suppose you. have all read some Spanish comedies? Several
Spanish and some French comedies, by the best dramatists.
23. Which of all the French comedies that you have read do you like
best ? Those of Moli(3re.
* i\i;mo (literally a Bpan).
LESSOR XLYIII.
247
LESSOW XLVIII.
Afinnar.
Aflig^r.
Admitir.
Atreverse.
Oriticar.
Condescender.
Convenoer.
Dedarar.
Depender.
Disponer.
Diferenciar.
Edifioar.
Entretenerse.
Fabricar.
Suponer.
Nombrar.
Inflmr.
Ocnltar.
Observar.
Obede«ir.
Proporcionar.
Pretender.
Publicar.
Qaejarse.
Beg^nlarizar.
Reflexionar.
Ridiculizar.
Refonnar.
Lo qne s6 decir.
Sin qne V. me lo diga.
Volver d las andadas.
Para mi tengo.
A tmeqne.
Sin embargo.
C&ndidamente.
De modo.
To afSrm.
To afflict
To admit, to accept
Tod^e.
To criticise.
To condescend, to consent
To convince.
To declare.
To depend.
To dispose, to arrange.
To differ.
To edify, toT)nild.
To amnse.
To constmct, to make, to build
To suppose.
To name, to appoint
To inflnence, to affect
To conceal, to hide.
To observe.
To obey.
To proportion, to jtrocnre, to
offer, to afford.
To pretend, to laj claim to, fib
aspire to, to sne for.
To publish.
To complmn, to moan.
To regulate.
To reflect.
To ridicule.
To reform^
What I know.
Without you telling me.
To do so again, to return to
(one's) old habits.
It is my opinion.
On condition.
Nevertheless, notwithstanding.
Candidly.
In such a manner, that, so that
248
LESSON XLVIII.
I Bravo!
I Very good 1 Bravo I
Bruto.
Brutish.
Oierto.
Certain.
A6reo.
Airy, aerial.
Angi^csJ.
AngelicaL
Ideal.
Ideal.
Interior.
Interior.
Incompleta,
Incomplete.
Imperfecto.
Imperfect. /
Exterior.
Exterior.
Extrtfio.
Strange.
Igual.
Equal, the same.
Hmmmo.
Humane.
Positivo.
Positive.
Real.
Real, royaL
Arquitecto.
Anoiano.
Oiego.
Oal y canto.
Bruto.
Idiota.
Espacio.
Oomplemento.
Gooe.
Mai.
Material.
Objeto.
Palacio.
P^aro.
Enfermo.
Prisionero.
Pensamiento.
OastilloB en el
aire.
Arbhitect
Old man.
Blind.
Stone.
Brute.
Idiot
Space.
Complement.
Eigoyment.
EviL
Material
Object
Palace.
Bird.
Sick.
Prisoner.
Thought
Castles in the air.
Oarrera.
Desgracia.
Diferencia.
Curiosidad.
Exageracion.
Franqueza.
Juventud.
Ilusion.
Felicida^.
Risa.
Realidad.
Ruindad.
Riquezas.
Career.
Misfortune.
Difference.
Curiosity.
Exaggeration.
Fra^jknesa.
Youth.
Illusion.
Happiness.
Laugh, laughter.
Reality.
Meanness.
Riches.
COMPOSITION.
Adivino el motivo por el coal nos ha-
bian adolado los mismos que des-
pues nos critican, criticaban, critica-
ron, ban criUcado, criticar&n.
Ldamos ima noticia que acababa {or
acaba) de publicarse.
I gueas the motive for which those same
persons who bad flattered us before^
criticise, did criticise, criticised, have
criticised, will criticise us afterward.
We were reading some news just pub-
lished (that had just been published,
or has jost been published).
LESSON XLYIII.
249
Contaba la desgracia que los afligid.
No ser^ 70 el primero qae se atreva.
Apiended vosotit)8,'los que os quejais,
quejabsus, qu^aflteis, habeis quqjado,
quejar^ifl.
tl qaiere jugar.
KosotroB queremos estadiar.
tl hubo de condescender.
Tengo qae callar.
Ellos deben estar muy ocapados.
Quiero {or pienao) eallr.
Afirmo (or declaro) que Baldr6.
Digo que Baldr6.
£s litil estadiar las lengoas.
ConTiene & los hombres inBtruirse.
El estudio de las lenguas es iiUL
La instraccion conviene & lo3 hombres.
Conyiene que yo estudie.
Es iitil que los hombres se instruyan.
J
Les mandd callar.
Les maud6 que callasen.
Impedir que se cometan injusticias es cl
objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me comprendas.
No lograr&s que le castiguen.
Se le ayudar& si fuere necesario.
He sentido que no se conyenza (con-
yenciera or convenciese).
Habr& llamado para que le abran (abrie-
ran or abriesm) la puerta..
Creo que le oonyencer^ facOmente.
Reflexionar^ lo que he de hacer.
Pens6 que iba 4 matarla.
Pens^ que enyiara (or enyiaiia) la carta.
He was tellmg the misfortone that afiOici-
edj;henu
I shall not be the first to dare.
Know, you who complain, were com*
plaining, complained, had complained,
wiU complain.
He will (is determmed to) play.
We will study.
He had to consent
I haye to be silent.
They must be yery busy.
I wish (or intend to) go out
I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out
I say that I shall go out
It is useful to study languages.
It is man's interest to acquire knowl-
edge.
The study of languages is usefuL
Knowledge is useful to man.
It is my hiterest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.
He ordered them to be silent
To preyent the commission of ii^justice,
such is the .object of laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in haying him
punished.
He shall haye help if it be necessary.
I was sorry he should be conyinccd (or
was conyinccd).
He knocked, of course, in order that
the door may (or might) be opened.
I think I shall conyince him easily.
I shall reflect on what I shall do.
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send the letter.
EXPLANATION.
235. C0BBB8PONDBNCE OP THE Tenses with each othee.
—When one verb is connected with another by a relative, there
are many combinations in which the determining and the cfo-
11*
250
LBSSOK XLYYII.
termined verbs may be fonnd ; both may be in the indicative
or in the subjunctive mood, or one in the indicative and the
other in the subjunctive ; but both cannot be in the infinitive
or in the imperative ; as,
I guess the moUTe for which those same
persons who have flattered us before,
criticise, did criticise, criticised, have
criticised, will criticise us afterward.
We were reading some news that had
(or has) just been published.
He was telling the misfortune that
afflicted them.
I shaU not be the first to dare.
Learn, you who complain, were comr
plaining, complalned,had complained,
will complain.
236. The determined verb is put in the infinitive whenever
it has the same subject as the determining verb ; as,
Adivino el motivo por el cual nos ha-
bian adulado los mismos que nos
eritican^ erUicabatk, criiicaron, han
eriiicado, criticardn,
Leiamos una noticia qi*e acababa (or
aeahd) de publicarse.
CorUaba la desgracia que los ajiig%6.
No serk yo el prlmero que se atreva.
Aprended vosotTOB los que os qwjais^
quejabais, quefasteis, haheis quefado,
quejarHs,
t\ quiere jugar.
Nosotros queccmos estudiar.
He wishes to play.
We wish to study.
This is the reason why the auxiliaries hdber de, tener que,
deher, always require the governed verb in the infinitive, be-
cause the subject, or nominative, is the same for both verbs ; as,
fA hubo de condeseender,
Tengo quo ecUlar,
Ellos deben ettor muy ocupados.
He had to consent
I have to be silent. .
They must be very busy.
An exception to this rule occurs when the determining verb
expresses a firm and decided affirmation; arid so we say:
Quiero (or pienso) sdHr. I I wish (or Intend) to go out.
Afirmo (declare) que aaldrS. \ I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out.
We must also except the verb decir, which cannot govern
another verb in the infinitive, because whenever we employ it
to announce our own actions it is not with the purpose of re-
lating them, but to manifest our resolution to execute them ; as,
Digo que saldri, | I say I shall go out
237. When the determining verb is ser, or any imperson-
LESSON XLYIII.
251
al verb, and the gbvemed verb has no subject, the latter is
placed in the infinitive ; as,
£s 6til edudiar las lengoas. It is useful to study languages.
Conviene & los hombres inttruir$e. It is the interest of mankind to acquire
knowledge.
And such is the natural construction, because the true sub-
ject of this proposition is the very infinitive itself, which stands
there as a noun, an office that cannot be performed by the
other moods. The above sentences are equivalent to these :
£1 esiftdio de las lenguas es iitil
La instruecian conyiene & los hombres.
The studj of languages is useful.
It is the interest of mankind to acqtiire
knowledge.
238. But if the determined verb also has a nominative, then
it must be placed in the subjunctive ; as,
CouTiene que yo estadie.
Es iitil que los hombres se inttruyan.
It is my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to
knowledge.
Those verbs that express command, govern either of the
two forms, since we say equally well :
Les mand6 caUar. \ I „
Les mand& que caUasen. \ | ^^ ^"^^'^^ ^^^ ^ ^ «^«^*-
239. When the determining verb is in the infinitive, in
the present or fixture of the indicative, or in the imperative,
connected with the governed verb by a conjunction, this latter
verb is put in the subjunctive mood, ordinarily in the present
or in the future ; as.
Impcdir que se comeian iigusticias es el
objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me comprtndas.
No lograrda que le auliguen,
Se le ayudard Afiiere necesario.
To prevent the commission of ii\iustice,
such is the object of the laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He will have help if it be necessary.
240. The preterit indefinite and compound future of the
indicative govern the determined verb in the present or impei^
feet of the subjunctive ; as.
ffeseniido que no se eorwenza {convert
dera or conveneiese),
Habr& llamado para que le aJbran
{abrieran or abrieten) la pnerta.
I was sorry he should not be (or was
not) convinced.
He knocked, of coune^ in order that
1h$ door may (or might) be opened.
262 LBS80N XLYIII.
241. When the determining verbis in the iadicative, it gen-
erally governs the determined one in the same mood, if the
nominative is the same for both verbs ; as,
Creo qae le anvfeneer^ f&cilmente. I I think I shall conrinoe Mm ensSlj.
Rejlaionari lo que he de haoer. | I shall reflect on what I have to do.
But if each verb has a different nominative, the second
verb may be placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive ; as,
Peme qae iba k matarla. I thought he was going to kUl her.
Pemi que me enviara (or eiwiaria) la I thought he wouffi send me the letter,
carta.
Much more might be said upon this subject, did we not fear
to exceed the limits prescribed by the nature of the present
work.
CONVERSITION AND VERSION.
1. Dofia Lnisita, |Le gnsta 6 Y. formar castillos en el aire f Macho ;
pcro creo qne forme demasdodos.
2. Me alegro mncho qne, como k ml, le gaste 4 Y. el mundo de las ilu-
siones, y taq;Lbiea apruebo sa franqueza de Y. en confeBarlo. — Y jporqa6
lo habia de ociiltar ? 4 Qu6 mal hay en eso 9
8. No 86 si hay mal 6 no, lo que s^ decir es, qne todo el mnndo afccta
no formarlos y con cierta risita bnrlonn pretenden ridicnllzar 4 los que,
como Y. y yo, confesamos c&ndidamcnte qne los hacemos.
4. 2 Y cree Y., D. Jos6, qne esas gentcs vivon sin ilnsiones de ningnna
especie? No, sefiorita, no lo creo. Dies ha dado k todo hombrc, &
diferencia del bmto, nn mnndo ideal interior adem^s del mnndo positivo
exterior, d excepcion de los idiptas.
6. I Cndnto me alegro de oirlol iporqne yo tenia tanta vergtLenza de
mis pobres castillos on el aire I i De modo es qne Y. cree qne yo no soy
sola ? De ningnn modo, todo el mnndo los forma, la diferencia solo existe
en la mancra.
6. I Ah 1 Don Jos6, Y. me va pareciendo nn bnen arqnitecto de casti-
llos en el mro y uno de estos dias voy 4 pedirle qne me mnestre nno de los
mnchos qne habr4 edificado. — Oon mncho gnsto, sefiorita, 4 trueqne, sin
embargo, de qne Y, me admita en nno do sns palacios a^reos.
7. No, 680 no, jam4s podria yo poner en evidencia mis c^illos; pero
Y. dice qne la diferencia solo existe en la manera de formarlos ; expliqu^
me Y. esto, qniza asi lograr4 reformar los mios, porqne he observado que
son incompletos ; siempre lea falta algo.^Pues es extrafio, sefiorita, por-
LESSON XLTIII. 258
que 70 creia qae solo las oosas hamanas eran imperfectas y sus ilnsiones
de V. siendo
8. Por supuesto, jangelicalesl iVamosl d^jese V. de CTnnplimientos,
ya sabe V. que no me gustan, y resp6ndame V. 6 mi prcgonta m V.
gusta, porque tengo coriosidad de saber c6mo forman otros sus castdllos.
— Obedezco, sefiorita, y para principiar debo decir que yo me equivoque
cnando dge que solo se diferenciabau en la manera, porque tambien in-
flnye mncho el material.
9. I G6mo el material ? { si se fabrican en el aire ! i Espero que no los
fibrique V. de cal y canto I — No, seliorita, no de cal y canto; pero se fa-
brican; y si se fabrican, de algo se fabrican.
10. jPero de qu6, seflor, de qu6 ? Yo formo castiUos, pero no necesito
n.'.da para bacerlos ; vuelo mas que los p4jaros, mando basta en las yo-
luntades de los otros, bago volver al tiempo en su oarrera, dispongo del
espacio, de la fortuna, y bago que me obedezca basta el amor. — ^£so lo
creo sin que V. me lo diga, sefiorita,
11. I Dale I no yuelva Y. 4 las andadas, y cu6nteme Y. qu6 materiales
son esos de que Y. me hablaba. — Y. misma acaba de norabrar algunos.
12. I CuMes ? 1 06mo I 2qu6 mas materiales quiero Y. para formar un
Castillo en el aire, que poder disponer, como Y. dice que puede, de las
voluntades de los otros, del tiempo, del espacio, la fortuna y basta del
amor?
13. {Tomal Pero yo no poseo ningnna de esas oosas en realidad, y
sin embargo mis castillos me entretienen y divierten mucbo.— Perdone
Y., sefiorita, Y. las posee y con ellas forma Y. ese bonitomondo interior,
que le proporciona 4 Y. los goces que no le da el exterior.
14. Y en eso tiene Y. razon, que mis ilusiones, 6 sea como Y. la Dama,
mi mundo interior, me consuela mucbas veces de la rulndad del mundo
exterior. — ^Eso sucede & todo el mundo, de ese modo, el ciego ve, el en-
fermo goza de salud, el prisionero de libertad, el pobre de las riquezas y
el anciano de la juventud, las ilusiones bacen los males menores. — £n este
mundo ideid es en donde los bombres son verdadcramente ignalcs, y para
ml tengo que no es ilusorio, sino real, puesto que de ^1 depende nuestra
felicidad.
15. i No cree Y. que bay alguna exageradon en lo que Y. dice ? No^
seflora, pero si, creo, que debemos tener buen cuidado de regularizar
nuestros pensamientos y de basar siempre nuestros castillos en el aire en
la virtud y la religion.
16. I Bravo I bravo ! muy bien, asi me gustan & mi los castillos en el aire.
254 LS8S0K ZLVIII.
EXERCISE.
1. Who bnilt the house yon are living in at present? An excellent
architect, a friend of my father.
2. Are yon certain it was an old man that was suing for her hand?
I cannot affirm that it was an old man.
8. What a misfortane that he will not study! It would be B real
misfortune if it were true ; I think it is not true.
4. Do you ever build castles in the air? Seldom ; for, in my opinion,
real castles built of stone are to be preferred to the atrial ones you speak of.
6. What a pretty bird you have there I does it sing? It sings the
whole day long.
6. Do you think our young friend is really as happy as he appears to
be? No, there must be some exaggeration in what he says.
7. In what respect do these two authors differ from each other ? Read
the works of both, and you will observe for yourself.
8. Do they both write equally well? No, one of them arranges his
thoughts in a very strange manner, so that it is sometimes impossible to
understand his meaning^* and at all times disagreeable to read hinu
9. Is Peter punished now in school as often as formerly ? As often
as ever ; but it is useless to punish him, for though he is good for a few
days, yet he always gets back to his old habits.
10. Does that man always say what he thinks ? lam sure I cannot
say; but it seems to me that there is in his manner of speakiog a some-
thing I cannot explain that hides his real thoughts.
11. Is he liked in general by those who know him ? On the contrary,
everybody hates him and ridicules him for his meanness.
12. Have you any curiosity to see the interior of a royal palace? If
the occasion offered (presented itself), I would like to see it; otherwise I
am perfectly content with the interior of my own house.
18. You are wise for that; happiness is not at all times to be found in
palaces. Ah I I see you aret something of a philosopher.
14. How is this, sir ? your exercise is incomplete. I confess that had
I wished I might have finished it; but you wiU find that, as far as it goes,
it is not imperfect
• 15. That is to say that the quality does not depend on the quantity.
Precisely bo ; you may complain of my not having done the whole of the
exercise, but I do not think you can critidse the part I have brought to you.
16. What sizet is the book your friend has just published ? The same
size as the one he published before^
* Xo fliM qvkn ^ackr. t Tiene V. t Tama§o.
LESSON ZLIX.
265
LESSON XLIX.
Acndir.
Anadir.
Componer.
Contener.
Incluir.
Facilitar.
Ofrecer.
Artificial.
Anterior.
Aborrecible.
Celeste, azul celeste.'
Celestial.
Calico.
Chinesco.
Creible.
Despreciable.
Familiar.
Gigantesco.
Terrestre. '
Territorial.
Terroso.
Terrado, terrero.
TerrenaL
Terron.
To basten (to a place), to refer.
To add.
To add.
To compose, to mend, to fix.
To contain.
To inolade.
To facilitate.
To offer.
For instniido qne sea.
However learned he m
Anteriormente.
Formerly, previously.
Comparativamente.
Comparatively.
Corriontemente.
Currently, fluently.
Fltiidamente.
Fluently.
Suficiente.
Sufficient.
£n general.
In general.
Generalmente.
Generally.
Consi4erablemente.
Considerably.
Farticularmentc.
Particularly, privately.
£n cuanto L
As to, as for.
Artificial.
Anterior, previous.
HatefuL
Celestial, sky-blue.
Celestial, heavenly.
Celestial, heavenly.
Chinese.
Credible.
Despicable.
Familiar.
Gigantic.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Territorial.
Terreous, earthy.
Terrace.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Lump (or clod) of earth.
256
LESSON XLIZ.
•
Ricacho.
Very rich*
Picaresoo.
Roguish.
Patr6nimioo.
Patronymic.
Propio.
Proper^ own.
Mudable.
Chargeable.
Verbal.
Verbal
Arenal.
Bandy (ground).
Arboleda.
Grove.
Ascenso.
Promotion.
Ascension.
Ascension.
Alvarez.
Alvarez.
Carnuza.
Bad meat.
Calvinista.
Oalvinist.
Creencia.
Belief; credence,
Catolicismo.
Oatbolicism.
Ciencia.
Science.
Diccionario.
Dictionary.
Gentualla.
Rabble.
Escobtyo.
A bad broom.
Madrastra.
Btep-mo£her.
Boticario.
Druggist, apothe-
Terminacion.
Termination.
cary.
Dicha.
Happiness.
Bomin^ez.
Dominguez.
Xsla.
Island.
Fernandez.
Fernandez.
Educadon.
Education.
Idiotismo.
Idioms.
Escoba.
Broom.
Filosofaatro.
Philosophaster.
Excusa.
Excuse.
Ilgastro.
Step-son.
Explicacion.
Explanation.
nermanastro.
Step-brother.
Espada.
Sword.
Ilombracbo.
Corpulent.
Exclamacion.
Exclamation.
Libraco.
A contemptible
Firma.
Signature.
book.
Gota.
Drop.
Pigarraco.
An ugly bird.
Figura.
Figure, appear-
Latintgo.
Dog Latin.
ance.
Manzanar.
Apple orchard.
Faccion.
Feature.
Pinar.
Pine grove.
Factura.
Invoice.
Protestante.
Protestant.
Facultad.
Faculty, power.
Padrastro.
Step-father.
Adquisicion.
Acquirement.
Significado.
Signification,
meaning.
Astronomia.
Astronomy.
Vinacbo.
Bad wine.
Protestantismo.
Protestantism.
Ilabanero.
Ilavanese.
Madrileno.
Madrilenian.
Rodriguez.
Rodriguez.
Sanchez.
Sanchez, [heart.
Amante.
Lover, sweet-
Arbol.
Tree.
Amador.
Lover.
LESSON XLIZ.
257
COMPOSITION.
^FoTqii6 lee V. ese libraco ?
Porqne no tengo otro ; pero Y. se equi-
Yoca, es un libro cl4sico excelente.
i Oonooe V. & aquel ricacho f
Le conozco ; pero no le trato, porque es
un hombracho que solo le gu8ta tra-
tarse con gentnalla.
Joan, no barras con ese esoobajo, que
ensacia mas que limpia.
La came buena se venae & treinta cen-
taToa la libra ; la camuza 4 veinte.
Ese estudlanto sude decir latuugos,
pero no sabe Latin.
En la America del Norte hay mas pro-
testantes que cat61icos.
Los boticarios en los Estados TJnidos
no solo yenden mcdicinas, sine per-
fumeria, cigarros y otras mncbas
cosas.
i Yiye el Sefior Fernandez con su pa-
dre?
No, sefior, porque no quiere vivir con
su madrastra y bermanastros.
i Es V. madrileflo ?
No, sefior, soy Habanero.
Aquel filosofastro es despreciable.
Esa sefiorita es muy amable ; pero muy
mndable. •
Why do you read that contemptible old
book?
Because I have no other ; but you are
mistaken, it is an excellent classic
(book).
Do you know that rich man ?
I know him ; but I have no intercourse
with him, because he is a low man,
whose taste is to associate only with
the rabble.
John, do not sweep with that old stump
of a broom ; it dirties more than it
deans.
Good meat sells at thirty cents a pound,
poor (bad) meat at twenty.
That student is in the habit of reciting
dog Latin, but he does not know
Latin.
There are more Protestants than Catho-
lics in North America.
In the United States the druggists sell
not only medicines, but perfumery,
cigars, and many other things.
Does Mr. Fernandez live with his
father?
No, sir; because he does not wish to
live with his step-mother and step-
brothers.
Are you a Madrileman ?
No, sir, I am a Havanese.
That philosophaster is a despicable
(man).
That young lady is very amiable, but
very changeable.
EXPLANATION.
242. Debivative Nouns. — ^These nouns constitute one of
the chief sources of the richness of the Spanish language ; we
have already introduced some of them in previous lessons,
when treating of augmentative and diminutive terminations.
258 LESSON XLIX.
These terminations are very numerous, both for the sub-
stantives and adjectives, and each one of them determines the
general signification of the derivative noun. As it would be
impossible to give in this place a complete list of all these
terminations, we shall endeavor to lay before the student such
of them as are to be found in most common use.
243. The terminations aco^ achOy dHa and uza, denote in-
feriority; as
JAhToeo,
Yhiaeko.
Qentxtalla.
GamtoMi.
A contemptible old book.
An ugly bird.
Bad wine.
Rabble.
Bad meat «
The termination acho is sometimes augmentative ; as,
Rica<:Ao. | Very rich.
Hombrae^. | A big (or corpulent) man.
244.. ^0 implies meanness, and the consequent contempt
inspired by it ; as,
Escobo/o. I An old stomp of a broom.
LaUnq/o. | Dog LaUn.
245. The terminations aly ar, ego^ icOy U^ iscOy in adjectives,
commonly denote the quality of the thing ; as,
ArtiflcidL
Familiar.
Gigant£9<».
Picaretco.
ClkUeo,
Chineseo.
ArtificiaL
Familiar.
Gigantia
Roguish.
Olassic.
Chinese.
246. In substantives the same terminations, a?, ar, and
also eda and edo^ serve to form collective nouns ; as.
Arbolftia.
Arena/.
Manzanar.
Pinar.
Grove.
Sandy groimd.
Apple orchard.
Pine grove.
247. The terminations arUCy ario^ entCy erOy Uta and or are
LB8S0N XLIX. 259
for the most part expressive of use, sect, profession, trade, or
occupation; as,
Estadlante,
Boticario.
Zapat^ro.
OrgAnista,
Protestan/«.
CaMsxista.
Pintor.
StudeDt.
Druggist.
Shoemaker.
Organist
Protestant
Calvinist
Painter.
248. The termination astro signifies inferiority in a super-
lative degree ; as, filoaofoBtro^ a despicable philosopher ; poetaa-
trOy poetaster ; and it is curious to observe that it also serves
to express the degrees of relationship existing between those
persons who more generally hate than love each other ; as,
Hermanc»/ro.
Hij<u/ro.
Padros^ro.
HadroMra.
Step-brother.
Step-son.
Step-father.
Step-mother.
249. JBle corresponds to the same termination in English ;
as.
AborreciJfe.
Creible.
Mada620.
Axnahle.
Hateful
Credible.
Changeable.
Amiable.
250. Ismo corresponds to the English termination Mm; as,
CatolicMfTKh- I Catholicism.
Protestantismo. | ProtestantisnL
251. The names of nationalities are also derivatives, and
have their terminations in ero, eSj eflo ; as,
Haban^o. I HaTanese.
Frances. French, Frenchman.
Hadriltfjio. I Madrilenian.
252. Many patronymic, or family, names are also deriva-
tives ; for instance, Alvarez^ Domtnguez^ JFhmdndeZj HodrlgueZy
SdncheZj <fcc., were the names that were given to the sons of
the Alvaros, Domingos, Femandos, Rodrigos, Sanchos, &c.,
changing the final o into ez.
260 LEB80N XLIX.
CONVERSATION AND VEESION.
1. |Es necesario para hablar ana lengna aprender todas las palabras
que contieno dicba Icngua? De ningcm modo, ademds, jo no creo que
ezista un hombre, por instruido que sea, que las sepa todas.
2. I Cu4ntas palabras picnsa Y . que sean snficientes para poder hablar
el espafiol corrientemeute ? De tres & cuatro mil palabraa primitiyas con
BUS derivodos es todo lo que se requiere, para bablar una lengua fltiida-
mente.
8. Si, pero probablemente los dcrivados acrdn en tanto 6 mayor
ntimero que los primitivos. — Asi es, i)ero una vez que se conocen las
terminaciones, cs muj fadl el formarlos, aunque nunca se hayan visto an-
teriormente.
4. {Esposiblel ent6nces esto debe facilitar mucbo el estudio de la
lengua. — ^Muchisimo, porque, como ya hemos dicho, sabiendo los primi-
tivos no tiene mas quo afiadirseles las termlnaciones, segun el significado
que quiera ddrseles.
6. iQuiere Y. hacerme el favor de formar algunos deriyadosf Si,
sellor, con mucbo gusto ; d6me Y. los primitivos.
6. I Cudles son los derivados de cielo? Celeste y celestiaL
7. iDe tierra? Terrestre, terrenal, y otros.
8. ^Porqu^ no me los da Y. todos? Porque me parece mejor que
aprenda Y. primeramcnte los de mas uso, pues sobre baber mncbos, los
bay do poco uso comparativamente.
9. Cuales otros se pudieran formar de cielo y tierra? C^iioo ; terroao,
terronj y otros muobos.
10. |Se pueden formar derivados de los vorbos? Si, sefior, y d estos
so les da el nombre de verbales.
11. |Ou&les se derivan del verbo amar? Amador, amante, amado,
amable.
12. jDe ascender? Ascenso, ascendon.
13. iDe creer? Creyente, creencia, creible, cr^dulo, cr6dito.
14. ^De estndiar? Estudiaute, estudio; pudiendo agregar adem^los
aumentativos y diminutivos que tambien son derivados, como estudian-
tilio, estudianton, etc.
15. I De qu6 se derivan los nombres de familia GonzMez, Dominguez,
etc. ? Se derivan de los nombres propios Gonzalo, Domingo, etc.
16. jCudntas palabras cree Y. que contendrd esta gram&tica? Mas de
tres mil palabras primitivas y un gran ntiraero de derivadas.
17. 2 En acabando la gramdtica podre traducir y bablar sobre cual-
quiera materia que se ofrecza? Podrd Y. hablar de todo y seguir una
conversacion en general como Y. ve que ya lo hacemos ; pero para tra-
LBSSON XLIX. 261
dadr j hablor de cnalquiera oioncia, arte i& oficio en paiiiotdar, tendr^ Y.
qne acudir al diccionario, porqne es imposible introduoir en nna gram^ca
todas las palabras neoesarias para'x>oder bacer esto.
18. Y en caanto 4 los idiotfsmos de la lengua, | so ballardn todos en
esta graradtica? Tampoco, puesto que se podrian componer tres 6 cuatro
yoltimenes coino este j quiza no inclnunan todos los de la lengaa.
19. 2G6mo los aprender6 ent6nces? En la conyersacion de personas
instroidas 7 en la lectnra de bnenos libros.
EXERCISE.
1. Did Charles go to another regiment at the time of his promotion I
Yes, he left the 71st and went to the 7th.
2. What do 70a know about the names Sdnchez, Domingaez, and all
those ending in «? That they mean son of Sancho, son of Domingo,
and are formed from those names by adding the termination yon have
just mentioned.
3. To whom does that magnificent pine grove belong ? To the step-
son of the gentleman who owns that pretty little house yod see over
there in the distance (d lo dejos),
4. What contemptible old book is that you are reading so attentively ?
It is no contemptible old book at all {ninguno\ it is the dictionary; I
always go to the dictionary for a word of which I do not know the
meaning.
5. Do you know the names of all the heavenly bodies ? Ko, nor you
either; the science of astronomy is still imperfect, and there are besides
many of the heavenly bodies hidden from human sight.
6. Is not that young gentleman a great lover of the sciences ? Yes,
but most particularly of the exact sciences.
7. Why do you sweep with that old stump of a broom ? It is the
best I have.*
8. Did you say he was a philosopher? No, on the contrary, I said
he was but a miserable philosophaster.
9. How does that rich fellow amuse himself? Beading hbtory in
general, and that of his own country in particular.
10. I observe that you speak German very fluently now ; have you
changed your book? No, I have still the same one, but I myself study
more than I did formerly.
11. Do you know whether your cousin speaks as fluently as your
sister? Mrs. Alvarez says that in familiar conversation they speak
equally fluently.
12. Do you do any compositions? Yes, our father requires us to do
two compositions a week on the idioms of the language.
262
LISBON L.
18. Is it not a despicable habit to offer to do ttungs we nerer intend
to perform (Uevar d edbo) ? I should say it is more than despicable, it is
even hateAiL
14. Does not the study of grammar considerably facilitate the acquisi-
tion of a language? Tes, but that alone is not sufficient: something
more is required.
16. Have yon much fruit at your house in the country? We have a
very fine orchard of apples.
16. What language was that your young friend spoke in a moment
ago ? What he takes for Latin ; but what is not in reality any thing but
dog Latin.
17. Would not that letter have been better if you had not added that
last word ? It appeared to me to be necessary to add that to what I had
already said, so tiiat the meaning might be more easily understood.
LESSON L.
Amenazar.
Apoyar.
Disgustar.
Recurrir.
. Saoar.
A pesar de.
T dioiendo y haciendo.
I Todo sea por Dios I
Tomar las de villadiego.
Sobre todo.
Desproporcionadisimamente.
Adverbial
Antisocial.
AntepentUtima.
Intitil.
Gomponente.
Izquierdo.
Derecho.
Pentiltima.
Superlativo.
To threaten, to menace.
To lean upon, to support.
To displease, to disgust, to grieve.
To recur, to have recourse.
To take out.
In spite ofl
And suiting the action to the
word.
I hope all will be for the best !
To take to one^s heels, to make off.
Above all.
Without any proportion.
Adverbial.
AntisociaL
Antepenultimate.
Useless.
Component.
Left.
Right.
Penultimate.
Superlative.
LEBSOK L.
263
Anieojos.
Agnardiente.
Barbilampifio.
Correveidile.
Bienhechor.
Director.
Dolor demuelas.
Dentista.
Disgnsto.
Ilazmereir.
Condiscipnlo.
Pisaverde.
Pormenor.
Pnntapi6.
ParasoL '
Paragnas.
QuitasoL
Socialismo.
Sacamaelas.
Pueblo.
Vicerector.
Spectacles.
Brandjr.
Beardless.
Tell-tale.'
Benefactor.
Director.
Toothache.
Dentist
Disgast, grie£
Laoghing-stock.
Schoolmate.
Fop, coxcomb.
Detail.
Kick.
Parasol.
Umbrella.
Parasol.
Socialism.
Tooth-drawer.
People, town.
Vice-rector.
Eqnivocacion.
Granapierde.
Barberia.
La derecha.
La izqoierda.
Sinrazon.
Particula.
Qn^jada.
IGstake.
A game in check-
ers.
Barber-shop.
The right hand.
The left hand.
Injustice.
Particle.
Jaw.
COMPOSITION.
No le e8t& bien 4 un aadano el ser pisa-
verde, eso es propio de barbilampifios.
iQm^n hft dado un puntapid & aqud
muchacho ?
Yo se lo he dado, porque es un corro-
YcidHe.
Este hombre juega muy bien 4 las da-
mas, sobre todo 4 la ganapierde.
i Tiene V, un quitasol 6 un paraguas ?
Tengo 4mbo8.
Ese j6yen bebe mucbo aguardiente y no
hace caso de los consejos de su bien-
hechor.
Esa es la razon porque es el hazmerdr
de todo el muodo.
i Tiene V. bucna vista ?
No, sefior, y esta es la razon porque
uso anteojos.
Ifi condiscfpulo Manuel me ha ayuda*
d<^4 haeer la composicion.
It is not becoming to an old man to be
a fop ; that belongs to beardless boys.
Who gave that boy a kick f
1 did, for he is a tell-tale.
This man plays very well at chess, and
especially at ganapierde.
Have you a parasol or an umbrella ?
I have both.
That young man drinks a great deal of
brandy, and pays no heed to the ad-
vice of his benefactor.
That is the reason why he is the laugh-
ing-stock of every one.
Have you good sight ?
No, sir, and that is the reason why I
use spectacles.
My school-feUow Emanuel has helped
me to do my composition.
264
LS8B0N L.
Eg inutil qae me caente V. lo8 ponne-
norefl.
£1 director y el yicerector de la escuela
son hombrea excelentea.
Me disgustan las smrazones.
£1 socialismo, & peaar de la opinion de
loe que lo apojan, es antisocial 6 im-
pofiible.
It is useless for yon to tdl me the de-
taila.
The director and sub-director of the
school are excellent men.
Unreasonableness disgusts me.
Socialism, in spite of the opinion of
those who Support it, is antisocial
and impossible.
EXPLANATION.
263. Compound Nouns. — ^These are very namerous in the
Spanish language ; some are formed of two nouns, as barbilafjv-
piflOf beardless ; puntapiiy a kick ; (zgt£ardient€j brandy ; others
are formed of a noun and a verb, as quUa$oly parasol ; 9000-
mitelaSy tooth-drawer; others of an adjective and a verb, as
piaavercky coxcomb ; others of a noun and an adverb, as bien-
hechoTy benefactor; others of a noun and a preposition, as anr-
teqfosy spectacles ; others of two verbs, as goiiapierdey a mode
of playing draughts ; others of two verbs and a pronoun, as
Kamureiry laughing-stock ; three verbs, a pronoun and a con-
junction enter into the formation of correveidiley tale-bearer ;
and, finally, others are composed of a noun and some one of
the following component particles : a, aby abSy ocZ, untBy atUiy
circuin or circuriy cw, citray cOy corny coUy contrOy <fe, <fe«, c?t, cK»,
c, cm, eriy entrey equiy es or eXy extray tm, in, t »/ra, tnfer, intrOy o,
Oby pCTy pOTy p08y pTCy prktCTy JWO, VCy TC^W, «« Or ZUy SCy BCmiy
sesquiy airiy «o, aobrCy «on, aoSy suy «m6, siipery sus^ trOy trans or
traSy ultra, and vice or vi ; as,
^nlisociaL
Composicion.
Condfscipulo.
Director.
Dtfgusto.
/mposible.
/nutil.
Pormenor.
Potpuesto.
Hnrazbn.
Ftccrector.
AntisociaL
Composition.
School-fellow.
Director.
Displeasure.
Impossible.
Useless.
Detail.
Post-fixed.
Unreasonableness.
Sub-direotor.
LESSON L. 265
We call them component particles^ becanse the majoiity of
them — although they are true Latin and Greek prepositions-
have no signification in Spanish, except as prefixes, in which^
case they serve to augment, diminish, or modify the significa-
tion of the simple word in proportion to the strength or value
they have in the languages from which we have taken them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jos6, 1 sabe V. el significado de las palabros pentiltima y ante-
pentUtima ? Si, sefior, porqae corresponden & las palabros inglesas penul-
timate y antepenultimate.
2. Pnes bien, ahora, que hablamos de '^ cafianazos,^' quiero decir, ahora
que hablamos de estas palabraa, le contar6 d V. mi cuentecito. — ^Muy bien,
k mi me gustan muoho los caentos, sobre todo caando no son largos y
vienen & pelo.
8. Paes este viene & pelo 7 no es largo. — ^Ent6nces cnent^melo V.,
Don Pedro, escucho con la mayor atencion.
4. Paes vaya de caento : Un caballero tenia nn fiierte dolor de mnelas,
y fn6 d an sacamuelaa para que le sacase una.
5. {Hombrel ij porqae no fa6 4 casa de on dentistaf Porqae en
aqnel pucblecito no habia dentistas y tuvo que ir k ana barberia, cuyo
barbero unia d su oficio el de sacamnelas.
6. I Pobre hombre I adelante. — ^Este barbero, 6 sea sacamnelas, pero
qne de ningon modo era dentista, le pregant6 :
7. " iQu6 maela le daele a V. ? " "La perMtima del lado izquierdo de
la qaijada inferior."
8. "May bien," y diciendo y hacieudo le sac6, no la pentiltima, sino la
tiltima.
9. " I Hay I 2qa6 ha hecho Y., hombre? yo le d^e d Y. que me sacase
la pentiltima, y Y. me ha sacado la tiltima." — " \ Callel paes yo creia que
pen^tima y tiltima era todo ana misma cosa."
10. "No, hombre, no; la pentltima es la que estd dntes de la tiltima."
— " \ Diantre I Mil perdones, y si6ntese Y. que esta vez no me equivocard."
11. "iYamos,y todo sea por Dies I" "jAy! ay I hombre dado d
BarrabasI"
12. "{Tomal ^y ahora porqa6 se queja? ^ no vengo de sacarle la que
estaba dntes de la tiltima?" "Si ; pero Y. olvid6 contar la que me 8ac6
anteriormente, de modo qae abora me ha sacado la antepentiltimay — La
ante .... jqa^? Pero no importa, dqjemos estos malditos nora-
bres, que han side causa de mi equiyocaoion, y si^ntese Y. que yo le ase-
garo d Y. que." ....
12
266 LB8B0N L.
18. Pero el parroqniano, dindolo & todos los diabloa, tom6 las de villa-
diego, J 86 cree que nonca mas recurrio 4 on saoamnelas para que le aa-
case la pentUtima muela.
14. jCaal es la palabra compnesta mas larga en espafiol? Detpro-
porcionadmmamente,
15. ^De qu6 palabras se compone? De la particula oomponente de»y
el nombre proporei(m^ la terminadon saperlatiya iima j la termininaoion
adverbial tnenU,
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon Dse spectacles because it is fashionable with some people to
wear (ffottar) them, or because jon cannot see without them ? Because
I cannot see without them.
2. My toothache is not any better jet Then you had better go to
the dentist^s and get him to extract {taear) the tooUi.
8. Do yon often see the beardless youth who came to walk with us
without being asked kst evening ? Not often, nor do I care to see him
very often, he is too much of a fop for my taste.
4. Which way do I turn here to go to the new hotel ? Turn to the
right ; it is not more than two streets to the hotel.
5. What did he do when you said that? He took to his heels, and I
have neither heard of nor seen him since.
6. What were your two school-fellows doing at the door a few
minutes ago ? One of them had told the director of a mistake in the
other's exercise, and this one threatened to punish him for his trouble
{fnole$tia) ; so, suiting the action to the word, he gave him a kick, and
called him a despicable tell-tale.
7. Has your brother bought the house yet that he intended to buy ?
No ; when he came to examine the details he found the price of the house
entirely out of proportion to the value.
8. Do you always take an umbrella when it rains ? I seldom use an
umbrella; when it rains I never go out, if I can avoid it
0. What a strange man that is! Tes, he is the laughing-stock of
every one who knows him.
10. What kind of wine do they ^ve you in your hotel ? They give us
very poor wine, and so I drink very little of it ; I prefer water.
11. Do yon often play at draughts (or checkers) ? Very often; but I
prefer the losing game.
12. What is that man's business? He keeps a barber's shop in Sixth
or Seventh Avenue.
18. I want you to be good enough to translate this letter for me. Oh I
LBSSOK LI.
267
it is useless to talk to me of translating any thing jost now {por ahara\
for I have a headache.
14. Where is that family living now ? In a small town in the western
part of the State.
LESSON LI.
Atravesar.
To traverse, to cross.
Atropellar.
To run over, to hnrry one's self
toomaoh.
Gansar.
Tocanse.
Correr.
Tonm.
Calcnlar.
Tocalcnlate.
Dividir.
To divide.
Exponer.
To expose.
ExtrafLar.
To wonder at
Hospedar.
To lodge and entertain.
Incendiar.
To set fire to.
liorar.
To cry, to weep.
Manifestar.
To manifest, to show, to inform.
Ordenar.
To order, to arrange.
Oponer.
To oppose.
Proponer.
To propose.
Parar.
To stop.
Procurar.
To procure, to try.
Besistir.
To resist.
Rivalizar.
To rival.
Simpatizar.
To sympathize.
Ni con macho.
Far from, far firom it
A decir verdad.
To say the truth.
En lo qne respecta.
With respect to.
En morcha.
Let us go, let us start
A lo largo.
Lengthwise.
A esta parte.
Within the last
Api6.
On foot
En frente.
In front, opposite.
Oontinuamente.
Oontinually.
Perpendicularmente.
Perpendicularly.
Alrededor.
Around.
268
LESSON LI.
Admirable. |
. Admirable.
Apto.
Apt
Carioso.
Curious.
Desocapado. {
Disengaged,
unoccupied.
Direoto.
Direct.
Indirecto
.
Indirect
Figurado
Figurative.
Inepto.
Unsuitable.
Gramatical.
Oamplemento.
Complement.
Academia.
Academy.
Oosmopolita.
Cosmopolite.
Admiradon.
Admiration, won-
Oami^e.
Carriage.
der.
Delito.
Crime.
Arquitectura.
Architecture.
Dibcyo.
Drawing.
Construccion.
Construction.
Individuo.
Individual, mem-
Belleza.
Beauty.
ber.
Erase.
Phrase.
Literato.
Man of letters.
Distancia.
Distance.
Gozo.
Enjoyment.
Esquina.
Comer.
Maseo.
Museum.
Liigrima.
Tear.
Paseo.
Promenade.
Laboriosidad.
Industry.
Panto.
Point, place.
Marcha.
March.
Edifioio.
Edifice.
Metr6polL
Metropolis.
Peligro.
Danger.
Madurez.
Ripeness, maturi-
Omnibus.
Omnibus.
ty, prudence.
Soltero.
Bachelor.
Permanencia.
Permanence, stay.
P&blico.
Public
Sorpresa.
Surprise.
Trascurso.
Course (of time).
Vista.
Sight, view.
yjx,j Rincon.
' .Tablerode da-
Co^er,
Orilla.
Bank, border.
Checker-board.
Batalla.
Battle.
mas.
COMPO
Remuneradon.
smoN.
Remuneration.
Oriente y Ocddenta
East and West.
Ciclo y tierra.
Heaven and earth.
El hombre discreto ordcna siempre las
The sensible man always arranges his
cosas con madurez.
affairs with prudence.
La casa de Juan
se ha inccndiado.
They have set fire to John's house.
Un individuo incpto para escribir puede
An individual that is unsuited for wri-
ser apto para <
;>tras cosas.
ting may be apt at other things.
El reo, & quien se castiga, ha cometido
The culprit that is bemg punished has
grandes delitos.
committed great crimes.
LESSON LI.
269
Un hombre pobre es muy diferente de
iin pobre hombre.
Hemos dado un gran paseo.
Hemos dado un paseo grande.
Lo que Y. dice es una cosa cierta.
To he observado cierta cosa.
Madrid, & 23 de Agosto de 1866 {or
Madrid, Agosto 23 de 1866, or Ma-
drid y Agosto 23 de 1866).
To so y quien probar6 que tu te cqui-
Yocas.
Dios es admirable en todas sua obras,
pues todas ellas manifiestan su poder
y su bondad {or admirable se muestra
IHos en todas bus obras ; su poder y
6U bondad manifiestan todas ellas).
Solo Dios es grande, hermanos mios.
A^os, Juan ; ^ qu^ tal f
Hasta mafiana. Buenos diaa.
Nuera York, ciudad de los Estados
Unidos.
Yo mismo le vi Uorar l&grimas de
gozo.
Pronto se calmar&n las borrascas que
agitan la nave del Estado.
I Ha estado Y. alguna vez en el Museo
de Nueva York ?
A poor man (a man in poverty) is very
di£Eerent from a poor feUow.
We have had an excellent walk.
We have taken a long walk.
What you say is certain.
I have observed a certain thing.
Madrid, August 23d, 1866.
It is I who shall prove that yon are
mistaken.
God is wonderful in all His works, for
they all set forth his power and His
goodness.
God only is great, my brethren.
Good morning, John ; how do you do ?
I shall see you to-morrow.
New York, a city of the United States.
I myself saw him shed tears of Joy.
The tempests by which the ship of
State is tossed shall soon be calmed.
Have you ever been in the New York
Museum?
EXPLANATION.
Notwithstanding we have already made some general ob-
servations relative to the place etfch part of speech occupies in
sentences, we deem it expedient to add here a few niles which
the learner will find of considerable utility in composition.
254. The natubal construciion demands* that the sub-
stantive be placed before the adjective, because the thing is
before its quality ; that the governing word precede the one
governed, for it is natural that the former should present itself
to the mind before the latter; that the subject precede the
verb ; that the verb precede the adverb by which it is modi-
fied ; that the complement come after the verb and the adverb,
if there be one ; and that when two or more things are to be
2(0 LESSON LI.
expressed, of which one, from its natare, comes before the
other, this order be preserved ; as,
East and West
Heaven and earth.
Oriente y Occidente.
Gelo y tierra.
Norte y Sur.
Este y Oeste.
North and South.
East and West
266. FiGUBATivE CoNSTBTTCTiON. — ^Thc genius of the Span-
ish language, and, above all, use, allow us to depart in some
cases from the above rules ; thus avoiding the monotonous uni-
formity which would otherwise take place, and leaving the
writer more latitude for the construction and arrangement of
his periods. So loug as sense and perspicuity do not suffer,
there is ordinarily no fixed position for any of the parts of
speech. Therefore :
1st, Personal pronouns subjects of verbs may, with a few
exceptions, be expressed or suppressed at wilL
2d. When the pronoun subject is expressed, it may be
placed either before or after the verb.
.3d. The same liberty exists with respect to the verb, adverb
and complement.
4th. Nevertheless, for the sake of clearness in our sentences,
it is essential that certain words which together form a whole
(such as adjectives with the substantives they qualify, or parts of
sentences, acting the part of subject or complement) should be
arranged in the same order as that in which the ideas they ex-
press are naturally presented to the mind.
6th. Thei'e are also certain words which, when placed be-
fore certain others, have a signification very di^<^ent from that
which they have when placed after them.
Of all the modem languages the Spanish is certainly the
most flexible ; indeed, in no other can the same idea be ex-
pressed with the same words in so endless a variety of con-
structions.
Let the following sentence serve as a proof of the truth of
this assertion :
Esta Befiorita era hya de Don Hanuel I This young lady was the daughter of
S^chez. I Hr. Emanuel Sanches.
Isi inversion.
2d
a
M
u
M
u
m
u
eth
u
lih
((
m
((
LESSON LI. 271
256. Words which, firom their nature, cannot be separa-
ted : £J8ta seflorita, De Don Marvad Sdnchez.
Nahiral Construction, Esta sefiorita era hija de Don Manuel S&nchez.
Era esta sefiorita hija de Don Manuel S4nchez.
Era hija esta sefiorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.
Era-de Don Manuel S&nchez hija esta sefiorita.
De Don Manuel Sanchez era h\ja esta sefiorita.
Hiya era esta sefiorita de Don Manuel S&nchez.
H\ja de Don Manuel S&nchez era esta sefiorita.
Hija de Don Manuel S&nchez esta sefiorita era.
De Don Manuel S&nchez hija era esta sefiorita.
257. The natural constmction is, of course, the most gram-
matical, but the best writers generally give preference to the
figarative, as being more easy and elegant, and as giving at
the same time more freedom to imagination and genius, and
finally, as being better suited to express the grand emotions of
the souL '
CONYERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Oh I amigo mio, V. por Naeva York I \ Cadnto lo celebro ! Si,
sefior, aqni me tiene V., Don Fernando, no he podido resistir la tentacion
de venir & ver la America.
2. \ Me alegro infinito I i Pero porqn6 no se vino Y. 4 hospedar 4 mi
casa ? En primer lagar, porqne llega6 anoche may tarda ; y en seguido,
porque 4 los solteros nos gusta la libertad y la vida del hotel.
8. Bien, no me opongo, 4 condicion do que yendr4 Y. 4 pasar con
nosotros algonos dias. — Lo har6 asi con macho gasto, ademds, Don
Fernando, que, como no s6 hablar ingl^ y esta ciadad es tan grande,
tengo miedo de perderme si salgo solo, y qaisiera qae, darantc mi per-
manencia en ella, taviese Y. la bondad de ser mi cieerans, de modo es que
me propongo, pasar la mayor parte del tiempo en sa compafiia.
4. £n eso me hara Y. macho placer, ademds de que yo gozar^ tanto
oomo Y. con la sorpresa y admiradon que le caasardn 4 Y. las vistas de
esta metr6poli. ^Ha estado Y. jam4s en L6ndres 6 en Paris ? No, se-
fior, Jamds he salido de Espafia hasta ahora.
5. iCudndo qaiero Y. que principiemos nuestros paseos? Cuahdo Y.
guste ; ahora mismo si est4 Y. desocapado, porqu^, 4 decir verdad, tengo
una gran curiosidad.
6. iQuiere Y. que vayamos 4 pi6 6 en coohe? A pi6, si Y. gusta;
me parece que podr6mos vei; mas o6modamente; pero tomar^mos un
coche cuando haya que salir de la ciadad.
272 LESSON LI.
7. Pnes en marcha, venga el brazo. — ^Yo temo que voy k molestar 4 V.,
Don Fernando, porque soy mny carioso, como dicen loa franceses, soy un
flaneur, y me llaman la atencion hosta las cosas mas peqnefias.
8. £nt6nce9 siinpatizar^mos^ porque & mi me gosta obsenrarlo y criti-
carlo todo. — i Qa6 calle es esta en que estamos ahora ? £sta es la Onarta
Avenida, y esa que la atraviesa es la caUe Veinte y tres.
9. {C6mo es eso? Las calles en Nuera York estan divididas en
avenidas, que son las que atraviesan la ciudad 4 lo largo, y en calles, que
la atraviesan de occidente 4 oriente, cortando las avenidas en 4ngulos
rectos y fonnando toda la ciudad como un tablero de damas, de modo
que sabiendo el ntimero de la calle 6 avenida y el de la casa 4 donde se
va, puede calcularse facilmente la distanda.
10. Y esto edificio de arquitectura tan curiosa de la esquina, 4qu6 es?
Esta es la nneva academia de dibngo, donde se exponen al pdblico muy
bucnas pinturas.
11. ^ nay aqui tan buenas pinturas como en el museo de Madrid ? No,'
ni con mncho ; este pais es aun nucvo, y aunqne puedan baoerlo en otras
cosas, todavia no pueden rivalizar en lo que respecta 4 las bellas artes
con £uropa.
12. \ Hombre, qu6 bermosa plaza I Esta es la plaza de Madison y todoB
estos bellos editicios que V. ve 4 su alrededor, y la plaza misma, ban »do
hechos do Teinte afios 4 esta parte.
18. 2 Qn6 edificio es aquel de enfrente que es tan grande como un paZa-
do ? Ese es el botel do la Quinta Avenida, y en efecto Y. tiene razon en
compararlo 4 un palacio, porque los hoteles son en realidad los paLacios de
los Estados Unidos, y se dice que son los mejores del mundo.
14. I Caidado I bombre, por poco se dqja Y. atropellar por d 6mDibu8.
— I Ciispita ! | qu6 miger tan bermosa I
15. Si ; pero no debe Y. pararse 4 admirar las bellezas, en medio de
Broadway en su punto de reunion con la Quinta Avenida, porque corre Y.
peligro do ser atropcUado por los carru^jes de todas espedes que contir
nuamente lo atraviesan.
16. Bon Fernando, | son todas las sefloras en Nueva York tan hermo-
sas como esa que acaba de pasar ? No s^, porque yo solo mir6 d6nde
ponia los pi^s, procurando escapar al mismo tiempo de los oarrucjes;
pero si podr^ decirlo 4 Y. que mnjeres mas bermosas que las que be visto
yo en Nueva York no creo que se encuentren en ningnna parte del
mundo.
17. lOiga Y. I ino bablan cspafLol esos que van delante de nosotros?
Eso no debe Y. eztrafiarlo ; esta es una ciudad oosmopolita; en eUa bay
gentes de todas las nadones y Y. oir4 en, el trascorso de poco tiempo
bablar aleman, espafiol, francos y otras mucbas lenguas.
LESSON LI. 273
EXERCISE.
1. What do yon understand by the complement of a verb ? It is a
phrase or a part of a phrase that serves to complete the idea expressed
by the verb. •
2. Can yon tell me what a cosmopolitan is ? A cosmopolitan is one
who is not a stranger in any country, a citizen of the world.
8. Where does that gentleman live ? In Fifth Avenue, on the comer
of Twenty -second Street.
4. How long has your uncle been a member of the Royal Academy
of Madrid ? He is not a member of the Royal Academy of Madrid ; but
he ^as been a member of the Academy of Sciences for the last ten years.
5. Take that book from Charles and give it to Peter. I will give him
some other book, because if I took that one from Charles he would cry.
6. Is your friend a married man ? No, sir, he is a bachelor.
7. Have you ever seen Da Vinci's celebrated panting of " The Last
Supper " ? No ; but I have seen the engraving of that painting, made by
Morghen, and it is a truth admitted by every one, that, notwithstanding
the absence of coloring, that engraving is a happy expression of the
ori^nal. .
8. How long does it take to go from here to the Central Park ? But
a short time ; the distance is not very great.
9. Could you run there in as short a time as one could go in a car-
riage ? I do not doubt that I could, if I started from the same place and
at the same time as the carriage.
10. How are the several States of the Union divided ? Into Northern,
Southern, Eastern, and Western.
11. Is that not the tallest man you have ever seen? Far from it; I
have seen several much taller.
12. Have they been able to fill that office (or position) yet ? I believe
not; I understand that one of our friends was about to apply for it {pre-
tenderlo)j but his father was opposed to his doing so, and so he wouldtiot
persist
13. How far did you go before yon found him? I walked about half
an hour by the river side, inquiring of every one I met whether he had
seen a young man on horseback ; and at last an old man told me he had
seen him cross the river, nearly opposite the new building they are put-
ting up (erecting), at a short distance from the entrance to the public
promenade.
14. Are there any fine public walks in the metropolis? About seven
or eight beautiful ones, the most of which have been made within the
last five years.
12*
274
LSSBON LII.
LESSON LII.
Acons^ar.
To counsel, to advise.
Aproveohar.
To profit, to embrace (profit by).
Consistir.
To consist.
Oolorir.
To color (paintings).
Citar.
To quote, to cite.
Oostar.
To cost.
Oomnnicar.
To communicate.
Demostrar.
To demonstrate, to point out.
Beteriorar.
To deteriorate.
Expresar.
To express.
Freir.
To fry. (oxy.
Grabar.
To engrave, to fix (in the mem-
Tomarse (el trabiyo).
To take the trouble.
Prender.
To take up, to arrest.
Perfeccionar,
To perfect.
Merecer.
To merit, to deserve.
Reunir.
To gather, to assemble, to re-
unite.
Remunerar.
To remunerate.
Visitar.
To visits to search.
Por ejemplo.
For instance.
Que 70 sepa.
For all I know.
List of the Irregular Poet Participles of all the Verbs already intr educed.
Abicrto. Opened.
Frito. Fried.
Bendito. Blessed.
Hocho. Done.
Contradicho. Contradicted.
Impuesto. Imposed.
Convicto. Convicted.
Mnerto. Died.
Compuesto. Composed.
Manifiesto. Manifested.
Dicho. Said, told.
Oculto. Hidden, con-
Devuelto. Given back, re-
cealed.
turned.
Dispuesto. Disposed.
Opuesto. Opposed.
Preso. Taken, arrested.
Escrito. Written.
Electo. Elected.
Expreso. Expressed.
Expuesto. Exposed.
^i«^- Seen.
Puesto. Placed, put.
Provisto. Provided.
Roto. Broken.
Satisfecho. Satisfied.
Vuelto. Returned.
LESSOK LII.
275
Amplio.
Ample.
ActaaL
Present.
Antiguo.
*
Ancient, old.
CoDtempordneo.
Contemporary.
Enemistado
•
At variance, on bad terma.
Dramdtico.
Dramatic.
Modemo.
Modem.
Honroso.
Honorable.
Politico.
Political.
Cocinero.
Cook.
Amenidad.
Agreeableness,
Capitan.
Captain.
amenity.
Acierto.
Success.
Biblioteca.
Library.
Colorido.
Coloring.
Cena.
Supper,
Grabado.
Engraving.
Comedia.
Comedy, play.
Fresco.
Cool, refreshing
Costumbre.
Custom, habit.
air.
Erudicion.
Erudition.
Empleo.
Employment,
Puente.
Fountain.
Drama.
Drama.
Existencia.
Existence.
Estilo.
Style.
Elegancia.
Elegance.
J6ven.
Youth.
Instrucdon.
Instruction, learn-
Mercader.
Dealer.
ing.
Paisano.
Countryman.
Ignorancia.
Ignorance.
Hecho.
Action, fact
Mencion.
Mention.
Siglo.
Century.
Literatura.
Literature.
Verso.
Verse.
Medianla.
Moderation, me-
Soldado.
Soldier.
diocrity.
Prosa.
Prose.
Novela.
Novel.
Politica.
Pontics.
Tragedia.
Tragedy.
Vasija.
Vase, vesseL
COKPO
BmON.
los
Esth, enemistado con so primo.
Golocmdo en vasijia.
Ha cantado una amckm espsfiola.
Los cabaDos que ban comprado
meicaderes no sonbnoios.
Los cabaHoa qoefneron oompradoa por
loamercaderes sc
Estan {cr qnedan)
He is on bad tenns with his eoarin.
Placed m vases (or vessek).
He has song a ^nidi song.
The horses the dealers have boo^t are
not good.
The hoTMS that were boo^t by the
dealers are good.
These troths are (or renuuD)
stiated.
276
LBSSON LII.
La cocinera habia frito (or frddo) el
pescado.
Han prendido {or preso) al culpable.
No b6 81 babr&n ya proveido {or pro-
Tisto) el empleo.
Has roto el vaso.
i Ha Tisto Y. un caballo muerto f
No, pero he yisto un caballo matado.
I Qtti^n ha muerto & ese caballo ?
Un paisano le ha muerto.
El capitan fu6 muerto por sua soldados.
El se ha matado.
El Be ha muerto.
Ese es un j6yen muy lddo» muy apro-
yechado y muy callado.
Es un hecho que la Cena de da Yind esik
felizmente expresada en el grabado
de M6rgben, no obstante que le falta
el colorido de la pintura.
Aunquc el fresco de la Cena, hecho por
da Vinci, e8t& mal colorido y dcterio-
rado, ha sido grabado con acierto por
M6ighen.
The cook had fried the Ml
We have arrested the offender.
I do not know whether they hare al-
ready provided (a person to fill) the
oflice.
You haye broken the glass.
Have you seen a dead horse ?
No, but I have seen a horse with a sore
back.
Who killed that horse?
A countr3rman killed it
The captain was killed by his soldiers.
He killed himself.
He died.
That young man is well read, makes
the most of his opportunities, and
talks little.
It is a fact that Da Ymci's "Last Sup-
per ** is happily expressed in Morg-
hen^s engraving, notwithstanding the
latter lacks the coloring of the paint-
•mg.
Although the fresco of the "Last Sup-
per," made by Da Vinci, is badlj
colored, and deteriorated, it has been
engraved with success by Morghen.
EXPLANATION.
258. Past Pakticiples. — Some past participles retain the
regimen of their verbs ; as,
Encmistado eon su prime. | On bad terms with his cousin.
259. The past participle must agree in gender and number
with the subject or determining verb, except when that de-
termining verb is haber ; in which case the past participle is
indeclinable, whatever be the gender and number of the sub-
ject; as,
Ha cantado una cancion. | He has sung a song.
Los cabttllos que han comprado Ids The horses that the dealers have
mercaderes. " I bought
But the past participle, if it comes after the auxiliaries ser.
LESSON LII.
277
estar^ quedar^ or any other, except Tiaher^ agrees with the subject
in gender and number ; as,
Los caballos que fueron comprados
por los mcrcaderes.
Estan {pT quedan) demostradoa estas
verdades.
The horses that were bought by the
dealers.
These truths are (or remain) demon-
strated.
260. Some verbs have two past participles, one regular and
the other iiTcgular. These are used very differently, since the
irregular one, being a true noun, is employed in an absolute
sense only, and never signifies motion, whether in the active
or in the passive form. For this reason the latter may be
accompanied by the verbs «er, estar^ gtcedar^ and others, but
never by the auxiliary haber ; inasmuch as it would be im-
proper to say : hiibo convictOy he contractor instead of, hubo
convenciuoy he contraido.
261. The irregular participles /rito^ fried; preeOy taken
prisoner; provistOj provided, and rotOj broken, are the only
ones that can be used with the verb haher^ to form the com-
pound tenses ; as,
La cocinera habia frUo (or frdJo)
el pescado.
^QXiprendido {or preto) al culpable.
No b6 ei habr&n ya proveido {or pro-
viUo) el empleo.
The cook had fried the fish.
They haye taken (or arrested) the
offender.
I do not know whether they haye
already proyided (a person to fill)
the office.
Ton haye broken the glass.
Has roto el yaso {aounda belter than
has rompido el yaso).
262. The verb matar^ in the sense of to take away life, has
the extraordinary irregularity of appropriating for its past par-
ticiple that of the verb morir; the participle ma^aefo being
used to express wounds or sores in animals, resulting from the
rubbing of the harness, or from cruel treatment ; as.
Un caballo matado.
Un caballo mtierio,
Un paisano le ha muerto.
£1 capitan fu6 muerto por bus soldados.
A horse with a sore back.
A dead horse.
A countrynum killed him.
The captain was killed by his soldiers.
But in speaking of a person that has committed suicide, we
must say :
Se ha matado (and not So ha muerto), \ He has killed himself.
278 LESSON LII.
263* Some past or passive participles take an active signifi-
cation, but only referring to persons ; as,
Un Jdven leido, aprowchado^ eaUado. \ A well read, thrifty and silent youth.
264. Past participles may sometimes take the place of
substantives, and the difference can be known only by the ante-
cedents and subseqnents, as in this sentence :
Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vhici
esti felizmente expresada en el
ffrabado de M6rgben, no obstante
que le falta el eolorido de la pin-
tura.
It is a fact, that " The Last Sapper "
by Da Yind is happily expressed
in the engraving of Morghen, not-
withstanding the latter lacks the
coloring of the painting.
Where the words Jiecho^ grabado and eolorido^ are substan-
tives. The same words appear as participles in the following
phrases :
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, heeho
por da Vinci, e8t& mal eolorido y
deteriorado, ha sido grabado con
acierto por M6rghen.
Although the fresco of **The Last
Supper,'* made by Da Yind, is
badly colored and deteriorated, it
has been engraved with success by
Morghen.
266. Other grammarians add one more tense in the infini-
tive mood ; as,
Haber de amar. | To have to love.
Habiendo de amar. | Havhig to love.
But such a classification is no longer essential, nor even correct.
In early Spanish literature that form frequently occurs, per-
forming the office now almost exclusively filled by the regular
terminations of the tenses, and chiefly those of the future indic-
ative and the imperfect of the subjunctive.
CONYERSATION AND YERSION.
1. iQa6Iegasta4y.mas,laconversadon61alectara? Ambas cosas
mo gostaa mucho.
2. £Qa6 g^nero de lectnra le gosta 4 V. mas? La historia, la come-
dia, y la novela.
8. jPrcfiere Y. la prosa al verso? No, sefior, la poesia me gosta
mas ; pero ha de ser may bnena, porqne en poesia no me gosta la me-
4. Qae aotores, en la literatora modema, me aoonseja V. que lea
LESS017 LII. 270
para perfedonarme en el espafiol.— En historia j politioa lea Y. 4 La-
foente, j 4 Mifiano.
5. |Y para la comedia? A Moratin, Breton de los Herreros j Don
Ventara De la Vega.
6. ^No tienen Vds. otros ? Si, sefior; pero yo le cito & V. solamente
los' mejores j solamente 4 los contempordneos.
7. jY poetas? Zorrllla, Espronceda, Hartzenbosch, y otros mn-
chos.
8. 2 Tienen Yds. algnn bnen critico contempor4neo por el estilo del
antigao Qaevedo? Yocreo que no pueden encontrarse dos Qnevedos;
pero, sin embargo, tenemos criticos de costumbres mny bnenos, tales como
LaiTa (Rgaro), Don Ramon de Mesonero Romanos, Pelegrin, y otros.
9. ^Tienen Yds. bnenos antores para la tragedia y el drama ? Si,
sefior, mtiy buenos, por cgemplo, Martinez de la Rosa, Garcia Gutierrez,
Gil y Z4rate, etc., etc.
10. Yo no sabia qne taviesen Yds. tantos antores bnenos en la litera-
tnra actual. — Yo pndiera citarle 4 Y. otros mncbos ; pero bi Y. remie
las obras de los catorce mencionados lograr4 Y. tener una peqnefiita
libreHa de literatnra modema, qne le ensefiara 4 Y. mas espafiol que
todas las gramaticas y m^todos qne se ban compnesto para ensefiar esta
lengna basta el dia, y qne le remnnerardn 4 Y. ampliamente por el tra-
b£go que le ha oostado el aprenderla, con el placer y la instruccion que
le comunicar4n.
11. jEs posible ! Yo babia oido decir, y asi lo babia llegado 4 creer
yo mismo, qne Espafia no poseia nada qne mereciese mencion en su litera-
tnra moderna, y 4 decir verdad, los tinicos libros bnenos que creia que
Yds. poseian eran el Don Qugote de Cervdates y las obras dram4ticas de
Calderon de la Barca. — Asi lo be oido yo decir tambien, y en verdad
qne es una cosa que no pnedo coraprender, esa general ignorancia de la
existencia de nua literatura espafiola contempor4nea, que ba producido
mas y mejores obras que las que se ban producido en algunos siglos no
solamente en Espafia sino en otras naciones.
12. |Se oonocen en Espafia nuestros antores ingleses contempordneos ?
Se conocen mucho mas de lo que aqni son conocidos los espafioles ; la
prueba es que la mayor parte estan traducidos al castelJano, y Yds. no
tienen ninguna traduccion, que yo sepa, do todos esos antores que acabo
de citarle 4 Y.
13. Probablemente consiste en qne los Americanos 6 Ingleses no apren-
den mucho el espafiol. — Entre los Americanos debo hacer tres honrosas
excepciones, que son : Washington Irving, Prestcott, y Ticknor. Estos
distingpiidos escritores no solo aprendieron el espafiol, sino que vi^aron
en Espafia, visitaron nuestras mejores bibliotecas y quiz4 adquirieron en
280 LESSON LII.
aqnellas fiieiites mucho del saber, la erndicion, el gasto 7 la elegancta en
el dedr que comunican 4 sos obras taato iDter^s y amenidad.
EXERCISK
1. Ought we not to make the most of (profit by) every occasion that
offers for acquiring knowledge ? That is the only way to arrive at the
possession of knowledge.
2. Tell the cook I do not wish that fish to be fried. It is too late to
tell her so; she has already fried it.
8. Has that work been translated into Spanish? Not that I know ;
but It was translated with success iuto French, by M. de TOrme, a few
years ago.
4, Is not that gentleman to whom you introduced me a short time
since a dramatist? He is, and his plays might serve as a model of ele-
gance for many dramatists of higher pretensions (pretensumea) than he.
6. Have they found out yet who set fire to your uncle's house ? Yes ;
and the offender has been arrested and convicted of the crime.
6. Would you be good enough to lend me that novel of which you
read a chapter to me the day before yesterday? I would with great
pleasure if it were mine; but it belongs to Alexander; and, as we are on
bad terms at present, I should not like to ask him for any favors.
7. Would that painting be deteriorated by being exposed to the heat
of the sun {Hoi) ? Oertunly ; and the heat of a strong fire would produce
the same effect upon it.
8. Did your friend, the captain, return with his regiment from the
war ? No ; he was killed in the first battle that took place after his
arrival at the seat (teatro) of war.
0. I saw no mention made of his death in the newspapers. No ; I
believe his name did not appear in the list (ZMto) of the killed ; but the
sad news was conmiunicated to his brother by an officer of the same
regiment.
10. Do you like to walk in the garden in the morning before breakfast?
I generally go to the garden every morning and evening to read and
smoke in the cool air.
11. I wish you had bought that work on English literature. So do I ;
it would have been very useful to Louisa, who is so demons of becoming
perfect in that language.
12. Did your father think Peter merited the remuneration he received?
I do not know whether he did or not; but, at all events, Peter must have
merited some remuneration, or else he would have got none.
LESSON LIII.
281
13. Are yoa going to have joor luime engniTed on jonr watch ? I
shall only have my initials (inicial) engrayed on it
14. What kind of literature does yonr annt like best ? Ha I yon ask
me more than I can tell yon ; I really cannot say whether She has any
taste in the matter; for the fact is, never having taken her for a woman
of much eradition, I have not taken the trouble to ask her.
LESSON LIII.
Agradar.
To please.
Agnantar.
To bear with, to put up with, to
suffer.
Alcanzar.
To reach, to overtake, to catch.
Alimentar.
To feed.
Armar.
To arm.
B^jar.
To go (or come) down.
Corretear.
To run about.
Conceder.
To concede, to grant.
Distar.
To be distant
Descomponer.
To decompose, to put out of
order.
Determinar.
To determine, to induce.
Echar.
To throw, to put (in).
Exceder.
To exceed.
Hinchar.
To swell.
Nadar.
To swim.
Prohibir.
To prohibit
Qoitar.
To take off, to take away.
Contrario.
Contrary.
Descompuesto.
Decomposed, out of order.
Dotado.
Endowed, gifted.
Exceleote.
Excellent.
Indigno.
Unworthy.
Improviso.
Improvised, unexpected.
Terrible.
Terrible.
Antojo. Desire, longing,
Alabanza. Praise.
whim.
Apariencia. Appearance.
Alcance. Reach.
Estocada. Thrust
282 LESSOK LIII.
Conscjo. Counsel.
Busca. Search.
DiscoTBO. Speech, discourse.
Comida. Dinner.
GatiUo. Pincers (dentist's).
Custodia. Keeping.
Juioio. Judgment, trial.
Edad. Age.
Juramento. Oath, affidavit.
Hermosura. Beauty.
Mar. Sea.
Obligadon. Duty.
Navio. Ship.
Vela. Sail, cnndle.
Piso. Floor, story.
Trayesura. Trick, pertnesa.
Tiro. Shot
C:k>rridadetoro8. Bull-fight
Precepto. Precept
Oposicion. Opposition.
Torero. Bull-fighter.
Toro. Bull.
Tribunal Tribunal, court
COMPOl
3ITI0N.>
To nm about the streets.
Habl6 de (or sobre) ese nQgocio.
He spoke about that ailair.
^Qu6e8t&y. haciendo?
What are you about f
Estaba para dedrselo & V.
I was about to tell it to you.
No alcanzo & comprenderlo.
It is aboye my comprehension.
Hace las cosas & su antojo.
He does thhigs after his own fiincy.
Iba en bosca de un amigo.
I was in search of a friend.
Me opuse & eUo.
I set my face against it
A lo largo del rio.
By the riyer side.
Venga V. conmlgo.
Come along with me.
No b6 qa6 detenninar.
I am at a loss how to act
Be ningun modo.
Not at all
Esti comiendo.
He is at dmner.
£ntr6 por la yentana.
He came in by the window.
Belante de mi ventana.
Before my window.
Ante el jaez.
Before the judge.
Antes de ahora.
Before now.
Tales acdones son indlgnas de un ca-
Such actions are beneath a gentleman.
balJero.
Parecia fuera de sf.
He appeared to be bedde lumsel£
Ezcede & toda alabanza.
It is beyond all praise.
Sin duda alguna.
Beyond all doubt
Dedia.
By day.
Uno & uno.
One by one.
g Per d6ndele vino & 7.?
How did you come by it t
Luego.
By and by.
Por mar.
By sea.
A la mano,
At hand.
Lsssojr I.III.
283
, Echelo y. en tierra.
£n cuanto 4 mt
Digaselo Y. de mi parte.
A consequenda de eao.
De acuerdo oon.
Tenia esperanza de que serriiia,
Bajar al jardin.
Todoa nosotroa.
Le pido & V.
i Ca&Dto dista ?
De improTiso.
•Quitese Y. el Bombieo.
Se la lleT6.
Le dej6 ir.
For ese motiyo.
Adelante.
Sobre mi palabra.
•Al contrario.
No se tratan.
Lea impuso esa obligacion.
Alimentarse de esperanzas.
Yenga Y. el doce de Mayo.
Al {or del) otro lado.
Sc acabd.
Yuelva Y. & Icerlo.
De miedo.
Fuera de peligro.
Faera de>casa.
£st& dn (Onero.
Descompuesto.
Perdi6 el juido.
For coriosidad.
Estar de mal humor.
Fa3ar6 & su casa de Y.
Fas&mos por Francia.
Le atravesd de parte & parte.
Por6L
For medio de 61.
De dia en dia.
Segun las apariencias.
£so est& aun por venir.
Diez contra mio.
Hasta hoy.
El navio eflt& & la vela.
Throw it down.
As forme.
Tell him that from me.
In consequence of thai.
In accordance with.
I was in hopes that it would da
To go down to the garden. .
All of OS.
I beg of you.
How far is it?
Off-hand.
Take off your hat
He carried her oS
I let him off.
On that account
Goon.
On my word.
On the contrary.
They are not on good terms.
He imposed that duty upon them.
To live on hope.
Come on the 12th of Kay.
Over the way, on the other dde.
It is all oyer.
Read it oVer again.
From fear, for fear.
Out of danger.
Out of doors.
He is out of money.
Out of order.
She is out of her mind.
Out of curiosity.
To be in bad humor.
I will go round to your house.
We passed through France.
He ran him through.
Through (t. e., on account of) him.
Through (t. e., by means of) him.
From day to day.
By all appearances.
That is yet to come.
Ten to one.
To this day.
The ship is under siuL
284
LB8S0K. LIII.
£s menor de edad«
Bajo de Juramento.
Hacia all&.
^ Estan levantados ?
Al segundo piso.
Que suban la comida.
Le pusieron en custodia.
Hincharee de Boberbia.
No la puedo aguantar.
Armeae Y. de pacienda.
Su hermosura me Borprendi6.
No la conozco.
Dotado de Tirtudea.
He agrad6 bu (^carso.
A tiro de pistola.
A mi alcance.
No bay nadie en <
ne is under age.
Under oath.
Up that way.
Are they up ?
Up two flights of stalra.
Let them bring up the dinner.
He was taken into custody.
To be puffed up with pride.
I cannot put up with her.
Arm yourself with patience.
I was struck with her beauty.
I am not acquainted mih her.
Endowed with virtues.
I was pleased with his disconise:
Within pistol-shot
With my reach.
There is nobody ?rithin.
EXPLANATION.
266. Idioms are certain peculiar modes of expression which
cannot be translated literally into another language. TVe have
already introduced some Spanish as well as English idioms ;
but they are very numerous in all languages, and it would be
as unnecessary to give within the compass of a grammar all
those peculiar to the Spanish language, as it would be to intro-
duce all its words. The learner will find them in the several
dictionaries, and principally in the works of good writers.
However, we have introduced in the " Composition " of this
lesson as many as the limits of this book would allow ; giving
examples of phrases in which the English preposition differs in
meaning from that which most generally constitutes its proper
signification, and consequently must be translated by words
corresponding to those in whose place it stands ; as.
No 66 qu6 determinar. I I am at a loss how to acL
De ningun modo. | Not at alL
CONVERSATIOJi^ AND VEBSION.
1. 2 En d6nde estd Alejandro ? £st& corriendo per las calles.
2. ^Porqu6 no me lo dgiste &ntes? Estaba para decirselo d Y.
LSSSON LIII. 285
8. Yo no qniero que ande oorreteondo calles. — Creo qne iba en bnsca
de sa amigo.
4. Se lo tengo prohibido ; pero el no me obedece, 7 hace las cosas 4
TO antojo. — ^Yo me opuse d ello, y le dye qu6 V. queria ir 4 paseo con
todos nosotros.
6. Don C4rloB, si V. qniere, ir6 4bnscarlo. — ^De ningnn modo, V, no
lo encontraria; lo que temo es qne haga alguna traversnra qne le caeste
cara.
6. Yo creo qne snbiendo 4 lo largo del no lo enoontrar^, porque si no
me engafio le oi decir que qaeria ir 4 nadar. — ^No b& qn6 determinar, pero
no, m^or 8er4 dqjarlo, y4monos nosofxos' 4 paseo.
7. Sa hermano Mannel es may diferente, ezcede 4 toda alabanza 7
dempre obedece los preceptos de sa pap4. — Sin dada algnna Mannel es
nn exoelente mnchacho.
8. |Holal aqni viene Jnanito. ^YieneV. al campo con nosotros?
Con mncho gusto ; pero 4ntes tengo que pedir 4 V. nn favor.
9. D^lo v. por concedido. — ^Palabra de honor? — Sobre mi palabra.
£Qu6 es?
10. Qne perdone Y. 4 Alejandro. — \ Yaya I sea asi, puesto que di mi
palabra; ^pero d6nde est4? Se e8Condi6 7 no se atreve 4 presentarse de
miedo, pero ahora lo veo asomado 4 una yentana en el segundo piso de
6u casa de Y.
11. Yo creo qne ha perdido el juicio ese mnchacho ; venga Y. aca,
sefior mio, 7 cudntenos qu6 ha hecho en todo este tiempo quo ha estado
faera de casa. — Pap4, perd6neme Y., que no lo volver^ 4 haoer otra
vez.
12. Bien, bien, dejdmoslo asi por esta vez.
13. i Don Jos6, oomo est4 su hermana de Y. ? Est4 mejor 7 esperamos
que 7a e6t4 fuera de peligro.
14. 2Mat6 el torero al toro 4 la primcra estocada? Si, senor, 41a
primera estocada lo atrayes6 de parte 4 parte.
15. ^No se trata Y. con su yecino? No, senor, es un hombro Ueno
de soberbia, 4 quien no puedo aguantar.
16. 2 So di6 el navio 41a yela para la Habana? Si, senor, el nayio
e8t4 41aye]a.
17. jPuderon al culpable en custodia? No, sefior, le dejaron bsjo
juramento de que se presentaria en el tribunal.
18. I Conoce Y. 4 la Sefiorita S4nchez ? Hace poco tiempo quo hicc
su conoclmieuto, su hermosura me sorprendi6 7 es una sefiorita dotada
de grandes virtudes.
19. lYiajd Y. el yerano pasado por mar 6 por tierra? Por supuesto
por mar, puesto que fui 4 Europa.
LS880N LIII.
20. iPasaron Yds. por Francia? 8S, eefior, paskaos por Franda, y el
doce de Majo entrdmos en Paris.
21. |£st& y. de mal humor? 8i, aetior, malisimo, porque tengo nn
terrible dolor de mnelas.
22. Le acons^o 4 V. que se arme de paciencia.— MU gracias, por ea
baen consejo, pero creo que aerd m^or armarse de un baen gatiilo.
EXERCISE.
1. How does that man spend his time? He seems to do nothing bat
ran about the streets.
2. Is your unde^s sight not good? No, mr; and that is the reason
why he wears spectacles.
8. Is that the way you spell (eseribir) that word ? Oh, no, of coarse
not ; I must take out one of the e^a,
4. Does your watch keep good time (andar hien)^ Yes, when it
goes, which occurs very rarely* ; it gets out of order about twice a month.
5. Did you see the Spanish man-of-war (ship of war) that came into
port (jmerto) last month? Tes, I saw it the day it set sail (dane d la
Mia) to retam to Spain.
6. Did you go to see a ball-fight daring your stay at Madrid ? I did ;
and although I do not like it myself, yet I coold not help {no poder menos
de) admiring the amazmg dexterity of the men (bull-fighters) who dared
to expose their lives attacking the furious animaL .
7. How many stories are there in the hoase you live in ? Three ; 1
generally sleep on the third floor.
8. Can you not indace him to stay at home? No, he wants to go ;
it is a whim of his, and he will not bear with any Opposition.
9. Were you in court at the time of the trial ? No, I could not go
down town that day.
10. How far had he gone before you overtook him ? I caught up with
him at the comer of the street.
11. How is your couan getting on ? Pretty well ; but his arm is still
swollen, and to all appearance it pains him very mach.
12. I wonder how he can bear up under so much snffering. He lives
in the hope of getting better one day or other.
18. Did that man swear he had not been there ? He made {prestar)
affidavit that he had never sot (put) his foot in the hoase.
14. What a beantiful yonng lady that is 1 That is trae ; but her learn-
ing by far exceeds her beauty.
LESSON LIY.
287
LESSON LIV.
Apegarse.
To adhere to, to be attached.
Oriar.
To raise (breed), to bring np.
Concebir.
To conceive.
Contdnnar.
To continue. .
£ncerrar.
To shut up.
Gnardar.
To guard, to take care, to keep/
Rntar.
To paint.
Presidir.
To preside.
Ponderar.
To make much o^ to praise.
Combatir,
To combat.
Heducir.
To reduce.
Rbdar.
To roll.
Sacadir.
To shake, to shake off.
Tirar.
To pull, to draw, to throw, to
throw out (or away).
Llenar.
TofilL
EntuBiasmar.
To render enthasiastio.
Al cabo.
After all, finally, at the end.
De repente.
Suddenly, on a sudden.
Ko obstante.
Notwithstanding.
Siacaso.
If at all, in case.
8i bien.
Although.
Amarillo.
YeUow.
Aznl.
Blue.
Anaraigado.
Orange.
Atento.
Attentive.
Confaso.
Oonflised.
Feroz.
Rerce.
Bondadoso.
Kind.
Favorite.
Favorite.
Griego.
Greek.
Anil.
Indigo.
Ugero.
Uglit, slight, speedy.
Ueno.
FuU.
Montaraz.
Mountaineer, wild.
Vist08o.
Oonspiouous, showy.
Colorado.
Red.
288
LESSON LIY.
Bomano.
Roman.
•
Particukr.
Particnlar, private, rare.
Picante.
Pungent
,
Temerario.
Daring, rash.
Violado,
Violet (color)
.
Verde.
Green.
Prism4ti<
X).
Prismatic
Oabo.
End.
Algazara.
Shouts (of joy).
Circo.
Siege, circna.
Autoridad.
Authority.
Color.
Color.
Confusion.
Confusion.
Bullioio.
Bampas, noise,
Carc%}ada.
Burst of laughter.
bnstle.
Corrida.
light (bull), race.
CeremoniaL
Ceremony.
Violeta.
Violet (flower).
Espoctro solar.
Solar spectmm.
Diversion.
Diversion.
Goce.
Delight, joy.
Clase.
Class.
Dieho.
Saying.
Lifancia.
In&ncy.
Desierto.
Desert
Idea.
Idea.
Interns.
Interest
Fiesta.
Feast, festival
Gaante.
Glove.
Guifiada.
Wink.
Leon.
Lion.
Ocupacion.
Occupation.
Local.
Sitnation.
Corrida detoros. Bull-fight
Entnsiasmo.
Enthnsiasm.
Pelota.
BaU.
Enemigo.
Enemy.
Plaza de toros.
Arena.
Doros.
Tears, cry.
Proeza.
Prowess, exploits.
Paso.
Step, pace.
Sonrisa.
Smile.
Priam.
Valentia.
Bravery.
Rnmor.
Bumor.
Jaula.
Cage.
S^r.
Being.
Tr^'e.
Dress, costmne.
Recibimiento.
Reception.
Saelo.
Groond.
Grito.
Shout, cry.
COMPO
srnoN.
Lob yfinos cnando entrabsmos.
We saw them as we were going in.
Si no habiera sido per mi, le habrian
But for me, they would have killed him.
matado.
To ilia si no creyera que fiiese mutil.
I would go, but that I think it useless.
Piga y. si Tendr& 6 no.
Say whether you will come or not
Qoe venga 6 que ]
no vcnga.
Whether he come or not
Dado que lo sepa.
I doubt whether she knows it -
LBSSON LIY.
289
* For atentos y bondadosoa que seaa {or
no obstante lo atentos que son) y per
bondadosoa que sean.
£s menester que se cuide V., porque si
no se enfennar&.
Es menester que obedezca Y. las 6rde-
nes ; de lo contrario sufrir& las con-
secuencias.
yo tengo razon 6 61 la taene.
Ni proxnetas ni obres sin pensar.
No lo haria si me importara la vida (t. «.,
aunque, or por msfl que me importa-
ra la vida).
Taliente si los hay.
TuTO el valor, si talnombre merece una
accion temeraria de combatir solo
contra tantos enemigos.
Quiero saber si emplea bien el tiempo.
1 Si habr& llegado el correo ?
Mira si viene.
No s6 si lo haga.
Si (es que) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) 61 al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga.
Ap6nas si se oia el ooniiiso rumor de
los pasoB.
However attentiye they are, and how-
ever kind they may be.
You must take care of yourself, for if
you do not you will be ill.
You must obey the orders ; for if you
transgress them, you will suffer the
consequences.
Either I am ri^t or he is.
Neither promise nor act without think-
ing.
I would not do it, though my life were
at stake.
A valiant man, if there are any in the
world.
He had the courage, if the rash action
of fighting alone against so many
enemies is worthy of such a nama
I wish to know whether he employs his
time profitably.
If the nuul should have arrived ?
See if he is coming.
I do not know whether to do it or not
I have but just come in.
For, after lUl, he must come.
But that is not it
But I said so.
For I do nothing at alL
The confused tramping of feet could
scarcely be beard.
EXPLANATION.
267. There are seYeral conjanctions in English that are
frequently used as substitutes for other words ; these conjunc-
tions are generally rendered in Spanish by the words which
they stand in the place of; as,
Los vimofl euando entrabamos. I We saw them as we were going in.
Diga y. M quiere venir 6 no. | Say whether you will come or not
268. The Spanish conjunctions are also often used as sub-
stitutes for other words of very different meanings. Let »i and
que serve as examples :
13
2M I.S8SOK LIT.
Si^ as an adrerb, k, as we hare already observed, affirmative,
except when employed ironically.
Sij as a conjonction, may be employed in a variety of signi-
fications. The following are some of its principal nses :
IsL To denote the condition on which depends the accom-
plishment of an action ; as,
& qoieres afompaJLinne, T07 k eaJSr, I If yon wiU aooomptny me, I am go-
I ingoat.
2d. To express indispensable conditions ; as,
Tendrifl d cabiUo it b pagas. I Ton will hare the horae if you pay
I for it
3d. In the sense of although, or even thongh ; as,
No lo haria it me importan la vida I I would not do it, eren though my
(l e^ aunqme or por mat que, me I life were at stake,
importara la Tida). I
4th. In fisimiliar conyeisation this conjunction is often em*
ployed in meanings very different from those we have just ex-
plained. For instance, it is often used instead of es que^ it is
because ; cuando, when ; porque^ because ; and not uofreqaent-
ly instead of yo, already, as we read in one of Moratin's come-
dies:
Si (es que) acabo de oitrar.
& (coando) &. al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eaa
Si (ya) Ip dye;
& (porque) no bay coea qae yo haga.
I hare but juiit eome in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that Is not it
But I said so (or did say so).
For I do nothing at aU.
6th. It is often used redundantly ; as,
Ap^nas it Be oia el coofuso rumor de I The confused tramping of feet could
los paaoB. I scarcely be heard.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. 2 Iria Y. & ver 4 sa hermano si tuviera tiempo ? Yo iiia n no ere-
yera qne faese inttil.
2. Diga V. fli vendrA 6 no. — ^Amigo mio tomo salir, porqne hace mal
tiempo, y es menester qne mo onide porqne si no cnfermarS.
8. I Estavo y. ayer & ver el recibimiento del Presidente? No, se&or,
mis ocupaciones no me lo permitieron.
LESSON LIV. 291
4. I Ou^es son lo6 colores en que se descompone el espectro solar ?
Violado, anil, azul, verde, amarillo, anaranjado y rojo.
6. I De qu6 color tine V, sus guantes ? Los tin© de amarillo.
6. I Qu6 tal le gusta 4 V. este ejercicio ? No me gusta de ningun
modo, y si contintia tan interesante como hasta aqui, creo que me harik
dormir.
7. iQue costumbres le gustan 4 V. mas, las de Espatta 6 las de los
Estados Unidos? Naturalmente, como espafiol, me gustan mas las de
Espana.
8. Pero 4 cu41es son las mejores ? No 8abr6 decirselo 4 V., cada nacion
tiene las suyas y cada individuo se apega desde bu infanda 4 las de su
propio pais.
9. I Ou41 es la diversion favorita del pueblo espafiol ? Las corridas de
toros; esto se entiende hablando del pueblo en general y aun de muchos
oabaUcros de la pnmera olaso de la sociedad; pero no de todos, porque
hay muchos, principalmente, senoras, que jam4s han visto una corrida de
Toros.
10. Debe ser una diversion muy cruel y muy peligrosa.— No deja de
ser peligrosa, pues los toros de Espana son mas feroces y ligeros que los
de ninguna parte del mundo, criados con este objeto montaraces, de modo
que cuando de improviso se encuentran en la plaza muestran una feroci-
dad y una valentia en nada inferior 4 la de un leon de los desiertos del Afri-
ca, que se encontrase de repente en estos circos Uenos de sdres humanos.
11. i Quiere Y. haoerme el favor de relatarme una corrida de toros f
Lo haria con mucho gusto ; pero 86 que no podria hacerlo como merece
esta antigua diversion, en algo scmcjante 4 los circos de los Griegos y
Komanos.
12. I V4mos I pruebe V. — ^Pero si es imposible, y aunque Uegara 4 pin-
tarle 4 Y. el local, los vistosos tr^yes, tanto del pueblo como de los tore-
ros, los curiosos ceremoniales de la fiesta, las autoridades que la presiden,
los tropas que la guardan ; la mlisica, el bullicio, los dichos picantes, las
sonrisas, las guinadas, los lloros y carcigadas, todo esto no serviria de
nada para hacerle 4 Y. concebir una pequena idea del gozo y entusiasmo
que anima al pueblo espanol en una corrida de toros.
13. [Es posiblel jOon que todo eso hay I pues yo creia que se redu-
cia 4 una camioerfa de vacas y caballos. — ^Pues si Y. estuviera en Madrid
le sucederia como 4 todos los extrangeros, que 4 pesar de criticamos esta
diversion, jaiB4s pierden una corrida de toros.
14. Pero I en qu6 puede consistir ese goce que Y. me pondera ? i Goee !
hombre, he visto yo tirar 4 la plaza el baston, el bolsillo y hasta el reloj,
entusiasmado de la proeza de alguu toreador. Eso era lo que yo le decia
4 Y. que no era facil de pintar, porque no consiste en la cosa misma por
202 LESSON LIV.
mas interds qne tenga sino en la digposicion particular y el entosiaffliio de
cada uno. T si do digame V. en el jnego del fragata americano en
que no se ve otra cosa que una pelota que rueda por el suelo, 6 se eleva
por el aire, despedida por un garrote inQ^^ ^ lo qne mueve
toda aquella algazara y ruido y confusion y gritos de, Uola I ! ! Willie 1 ! I
Obarleylll Herelll Herelll Runlll JamesIII Hurralll Hurra!!!
15. Ila, ha, ha ; V. me hace reir con sn corrida de toros. lYaya! me
alegro, algo se ha ganado, porque al principio yo creia que Y. se iba &
dormir.
EXERCISE.
1. Had you not better leave a line for him in caso he should come?
I think it would be better ; notwithstanding that it seems impossible for
him to get here to-night.
2. Do the boys still continue to take lessons ? One of them still con-
tinues, although tlie least studious of the three ; the other two gave up
all of a sudden last month.
8. What shouts are those I hear up-stairs ? Charles has some friends
with him, and they are getting enthusiastic on the occasion of the Presi-
dent's visit to the city.
4. Do you know how to keep a secret ? I want to know that before I
tell you this one.— I do.— Well, so do I.
5. I suppose they gave the General a grand reception when he re-
turned from the war ? A magnificent one, fit for a king; it was Peter's
uncle that presided at it
6. Can yon tell me how many prismatic colors there are, and their
names ? I shall try ; let us see : Green, blue, violet, red, orange, yeUow,
indigo.
7. What is the best time for learning a language with the least
trouble ? During infancy; in that age the study of languages is reduced
to its simplest expression.
8. What would the earth be without the light and heat which we re-
ceive from the sun ? A perfect desert ; man nor no living being could
exist, and there would be no vegetation, for all animated nature is sus-
tained by the vivifying (vivificador) effects of the sun.
9. What is the use of ttie piism ? It possesses the power of decom-
posing the sunbeam (rayo del sot), thus enabling (poder)xiB to see separate-
ly the rays of different colors which unite to form what is called light.
10. Where are you going now ? it is not yet time for the theatre. Why,
it is half-past seven, and the play begins at eight precisely.
^ 11. If my friend should have come while I was out? Oh, I imagine
that if he had come he would have left some word (d^ar dicho) for you.
LESSON LY.
293
12. What is that confased tramping of feet^ that I hear in the street ?
A crowd of people ronniDg to see a fire in the next street.
18. Do yon hear how that lady praises the courage of the man who has
jnst got into the Iion*s cage {jaula) ? I do, and I was just thinking she
might find an occupation of more interest ; hesides, I do not see any
proof of courage in such a rash action as to shut one^s self up with a fe-
rocious animal like the lion.
14. What sort of a dress did Miss H. wear at the hall ? A hlne silk
(seda) dress, with yiolet and orange trimmings (guamicionea). Can yon
conceive of any thing more detestable ?
LESSON LV.
Afianzar.
Conqnistar.
Construir.
Fundar.
Medir.
Portarse.
Tirar.
Auxilio.
CasteUano.
Arabe.
Crimen.
Catalan.
Chniento.
Dialecto.
Fulano.
Gallego.
Hodelo.
Help.
Castilian.
Arab.
Crime.
Catalonian.
Foundation.
Dialect
Such a one,
and so.
Galician.
Model.
To secure, to fasten, to prop.
To conquer.
To construct, to build.
To found, to go upon (a principle).
To measure.
To conduct one's self, to behave.
To throw.
Desigual.
Unequal.
Eztremado.
Extreme.
Horrendo.
Horrific.
Distinto.
Distinct.
Bidiculo.
Ridiculous.
InmemoriaL
Immemorial
Recto.
Right, straight.
so
AndalncSa.
Costilla.
Catalufia.
Corona.
Avila.
Galicia.
Isabel.
Imperfeccion.
Irregularidad.
Guipuzcoa.
Andalusia.
Castile.
Catalonia.
Crown.
Avila.
Galicia.
Elizabeth, Isa-
bella.
Imperfection.
Irregularity.
Guipuzcoa.
294
LSSSOK LT.
Defecta
Defect
Ignaldad.
Equality.
M^rito.
Merit
Medida.
Measure.
Reino
Kingdom.
Pesa.
Weight (for
Terreoo.
Ground.
weighing)
•ntolo.
Title.
Nobleza.
KobDity.
Yascaence.
Basque.
Persona.
Person.
Zatano.
Sach a one.
Moneda.
Coin.
Escntorio.
Office.
Regnlaridad.
Regularity.
Valencia.
Valencia.
Vizcaya.
Biscay.
Universidad.
University.
COMPOSITION.
Tratemos abora de descansar que seri
lo mejor.
Si DO hay rirtades, que son el cimiento
de la libertad, no se afianzar& esta en
loB pueblos.
I Qu^ hermosa que estis I
£86 si que es un modo de portarse con
honor.
Que llanntn
Que me deje en paz.
i Qu6 me matan I
En muchas obras no se encuentra otra
{or mas) m^rito que el estilo.
Es que estoy ocupado.
Es que se encuentra sin ningun auzilio.
Con la p^rdida de su madre esti todo
el dia Uora que llora.
I Qu6 no lo hubiera yo £abido 1
i Qu6 siempre has de ser un holgazan ?
I Qu6 bermoso cielo I
I Qu6 hoirenda noche 1
i Qu6 cielo tan hermoso I
A que si.
A que no.
A que lo digo.
A que lo bago.
I Qu6 de crimenes se Tieron 1
I Qu6 de iiy'usticias no se cometen 1
lQu6I ^noTienes?
Let us try to rest now ; that will be
best
If there are no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, the latter will
have no firm foothold among nations.
How beautiful you are !
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting.
Some one is calling (knocking).
Let him let me alone.
Murder 1
Many works are Toid of all merit save
the style.
WeQ, but I am busy.
Well, but he is entirely forsaken.
She does nothing the whole day over
but lament the loss of her mother.
Ah 1 could I but have known it I
Are you always to be a sluggard I
What a beautiful sky t
What a horrific night I
What a beautiful sky I
I will bet you it is.
I will bet you*it is not
I will bet you I can say it
I will bet you I can do it
How much crime there was 1
How much iiyustice is there not com-
mitted!
What I are you not coming ?
LESSON LT.
295
iFulano!— iQa6?
Ir6 & paseo, que no eetard siempre me-
tido en casa.
Qu6 qniera que no qolera.
No es hijo mio, que si lo fuera ....
Saohaonel What!
I shall go and take a walk, for I will
not be always stuck in the house.
Whether he will or not
He is no son of mine, for if he were . . .
EXPLANATION.
269. Que, as a conjunction, is employed in so many differ-
ent ways and meanings, tending to perplex the learner, that
we deem it essential to mention here some of its principal uses :
It is employed as a copulative ; as,
Tratemos ahora de descansar, que Ber& I Let us go to rest now; that will be
lomejor. I best
It sometimes serves to introduce an incidental proposition
dependent on the principal one ; as.
Si no hay yirtudes, que son el cimiento
de la libertad, no se afianzari esta
en los pneblos.
If there are no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, the latter will
have no firm foothold among nations.
It is employed instead of stnoj but after either of the ad-
jectives otro or mas ; as,
En muchas obras no se encnentra otro I Many works are void of all merit ex-
. (or mas) m^rito que d estUo. | cept the style.*
It is employed instead of pero^ but in the phrase es que^
with which we convey the reasson why something is or is
not done ; as,
Ee que estoy ocupado. | But I am busy.
& que se encuentra sm ningun auxilio. | But he is entirely forsaken.
The conjunction que^ placed between two words of the
same meaning, besides uniting them as a conjunction, gives
more energy to the expression ; as.
Con la p6rdlda de su madre estA todo I She is the whole day over lamenting
d dia llora que llora. * | the loss of her mother.
At other times it serves to confirm more and more the ex-
pression; as.
/ Qui hermosa que est&s I {indead of,
/ Qui hermosa est4s !)
I Ese si que es un modo de portarse con
honor I {imUad of \ Ese sf es un mo-
do de portarse con honor I)
How beautiful you are I
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acUng!
Some one 4fi calling.
Let him let me alone.
Moiderl
296 LESSON LY.
The coDJonction que^ at the beginning of a sentence, implies
a proposition going before it ; as,
QM^Uaman.
Que me dq'e en paz.
/ Que me matan t
In all these examples a proposition is understood before the
qtie ; as, mirady in the first ; deseo or quiero^ in the second ; and
reparad or sabed^ in the third.
When the sentence is interrogative or exclamatory, que
denotes desire and expostulation ; as,
/ Qui no lo hubiera 70 Babido 1 I Ah I could I but haye-known it 1
/ Qui Biempre has de ser un holgazan I | Are yon always to be a sluggard !
In an exclamatory sentence, and when it precedes a noun
adjective, it is equivalent to cudn ; as,
/ Que hermoso cielo I I What a beautiful sky I
/ Qui horrenda noche I | What an horrific night I
But if in these sentences the substantive comes first, the particle
tan must be put between, because we cannot say: / Qui cielo
/^ermoaof but, / Qu& cido tan hermoao/
In some sentences a determining verb is understood ; as.
Ague si
A que no,
A que lo digo.
A que lo hago.
I win bet you it is.
I wHI bet you it is not
I will bet you I can say it
I will bet you I can do it,
in which is understood the present indicative apuestOy I bet.
In other sentences it is equivalent to a collective noun or a
plural adjective, and requires to be followed by the preposition
de; as,
/ Qui de crfmenes se yieron 1
/ Qui de injusticlas no se oometen I
How much crime there was I
How much ii\justice is there not com-
mitted!
instead of saying : / Cudntos crimenea ! j Cudntaa injusticias t
or, / Qai mitUitud de crimenes ^ injusticias/
It also denotes surprise, and is used as an interrogative, and
for answering ; as,
/ Qui/ ^no Tienes? | What! are you not coming?
LSSSON LY. 297
and is equivalent to an entire proposition answering; as,
I Fulano I i QuSf {i, e, f Qui quieres ?) I Such a one ! What ? (t. e. What do yoa
I want?)
At Other times it is employed instead of the adversative
sinOj and the copulative y, in periods where the second member
denotes opposition to what is expressed in the first ; as.
He will not get it, bat will remain with
the desire.
I shall go out to walk, for I will not be
always stuck in the house.
Ko lo consegiur4 ; gw se qaedar4 con
el deseo (iiuiead of sino que se que-
dari, etc.).
Ir6 & paseo, que no estar6 siempre me-
tido en casa (ituUad of yno estar^,
etc).
It is not unfrequemtly used in the place of a disjunctive con-
junction; as.
Que qulera que no quiera (t. e,, quiera I Whether he will or not.
6 no quiera). |
It is sometimes substituted for one or other of the causals,
pueSy porgrue, pttes que ; as,
No es hijo mio, que si lo fiiera . . . (t. e., | He is no son of mine, for if he were . . .
porque or puee^ si lo fuera). |
In this meaning it is more used in poetry than in prose ; as,
** Que quien se opone al delo,
Goanto mas alto sube, Tiene al suelo.**
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Se habla el castellano en todas las provincias de Espatl^ ? En lea
tribunales, universidades, y oficinas pUblicas, si seflor ; pero el pueblo ha-
bla diferentes dialectos.
2. iQu6 dialectos son estos? El Catalan, que so habla en Catalufia;
el valendano, en Valencia ; el gallego, en Galioia ; y el yascnenoe que se
habla en las provincias vascongadas, que sou Alava, GuipAzcoa y Vizca-
ya ; se cree que este tUtimo es lengna madre 7 una de las mas antiguas
do Eoropa.
3. iEn d6nde se habla el castellano ? En las dem&s provincias, Oas-
tilla, Aragon y Andalucia.
4. iPorqu6 no se habla el espanol en toda Espafla ? Porque Espafla
estuvo anteriormente dividida en varies reinos ; de estos algunos fueron
conquistados per los Arabes, otros pertenecieron 4 Francia, y otros final-
mente permanecieron indepeudientes por muchos siglos, hasta que Fernan-
13*
208 LESSON LY.
do 6 Isabel, echando & los Arabes de Espana, reunieron las coronas de
Aragon y Castilla.
6. tSondiferenteslascostnmbrefldelaBprQvinciasdeEspafiaf Ma-
cho; no solamente no se habla la misma lengna en todas, sino que hasta
poco tiempo hace cada provinoia tenia leyes diferentes, y aun hoy dia
tienen pesas, medidas, tr^je y basta caract6res mny distintos.
6. Paes eso dobe ser muj inc6modo; en los Estados Unidos tenemos
la ventcga de hablar una misma lengna y tenemos las mismas pesas, me-
didas y monedas. — ^Yerdad es, pero tambien es cierto qne Yds. ban becbo
todo esto con la experiencia adquirida en el antiguo mnndo.
7. {Tporqud no lo bacen Yds. as! en Espafia? Porqne nosotros
tenemos ja cstablecidas estas cosas de tiempo inmemorial, y no es £&cil
cambiar oostumbres arraigadas por tantos siglos.
8. Goando Yds. ftmdan nna cindad en este nnevo mnndo, eligen el
terreno necesario, tiran Yds. lineas rectas y trazan calles y plazas ; para
esto no siguen el modelo de nna antigaa cindad de Enropa, pero las an-
tiguas cindades de Enropa con sns imperfecciones 6 irregnlaridades les ban
mostrado & Yds. d modo de constmir cindades, cnjo solo defecto con-
siste en sn extremada regularidad.
9. ^Yno cree Y. qne de esta ignaldad resnltan grandes yenti^as?
Sin dnda algnna, y seria de dese^ qne en todo el mnndo se.bablase la
misma lengna, bubiese la misma moneda, pesas y medidas, 7, tanto como
el clima, las costnmbres y otras circnnstancias lo permitiesen, las mismas
leyes.
10. Tambien me ban dicbo qne bay en Espafia varias dases de sode-
dad; (no es asif Si, sefior; pero eso sncede en todaslas nacionesdd
mnndo.
11. No en los Estados Unidos. Y. v6 qne aqnl no se dan titnlos de
nobleza, no bay diferencia en el tr^e, y decimos Mr. Jobnson, bablando del
presidente, and Mr. jQbnson, bablando de nn camicero, y d mismo Presi-
dente Jobnson era dntes sastre, de modo qne la ignaldad existe en las
pcrsonas como en las cosas.
12. No olvide Y., sin embargo, qne Dios no ba becbo dos cosas ignales
en el mnndo, y qne los bombres son qaiz4 mas designales entre si qne
las mismas cosas. — Concedido, y no bay cosa qne mas ridicnla me parezca
que las lavanderas vestidas de sefioras, y los rowdies dd Bowery afectan-
do ser caballeros.
EXERCISE.
1, Did yon meet tlicm as yon were going in, or as yon were coming
ont? As we were going in.
LESSON LTI.
209
2. What is the name of that province in Spam in which thej epeak
the Oatalonian Lmgoage or dialect ? Catalonia.
8. In which province do they speak the Basqne ? In the three Bas-
que provinces.
4. And do these dialects differ very materially* from the Oastilian
langnagef Yes, very materially; in general they are more like the
French than the Spanish.
5. Have you ever heard the Spanish name for the natives of Galicia?
Tes, sir, for I am well acquainted with several Galicians living in New
York.
6. Can yon tell me the weights and measures principally nsed in the
Peninsula (FenifiBula) f The principal weight, entirely different from all
those of the United States, is the arroha.
7. How many Isabellas have there been on the throne of Spain?
Two ; the first was Isabella the Catholic, and the present queen is Isa-,
bellan.
8. By what event is the reign of Isabella the Catholic distinguished
from all other reigns f By the discovery of America by Christopher
Columbns (jDruUlal Colon), in the year 1492.
9. Was there not some other very important event tha^ occnrred about
the same time ? Ah I yes ; at the commencement of that queen^s reign ;
you mean, I suppose, the conquest of the Arabs, and union of the crown
of Castile and Aragon.
10. Are railroads very common in the Peninsula? Not so common as
in other European countries ; but of late years the spirit of enterprise
seems to be revived in Spain, and to the few which now exist we shall
soon see a large number of others added.
11. Let us sit down and rest for half an hour, for I am very tired, and
you must be so too.
12. How beautiful the sky looks (h) to night 1 That is true ; but how
it rained all day!
13. How long has that newspaper been published? Ten years, for it
was established (founded) in 1856.
LESSON LVI.
Apreciar.
Apresurar.
Favorecer.
Invitar.
To appreciate.
To haste.
To favor.
To invite.
*Mueho.
300 LSS60N LYl.
Apredable.
Appreciable.
(
Corriente.
Corrent, fluent
Estimado.
Esteemed.
^
EzceleDtisimo.
Very (or most) excellent
1
Favoredda.
Favored.
Invariable.
Invariable.
1
Intiino.
\
Fino.
Fine.
Servidor.
Servant
MeroantiL
Mercantile.
Comerdo. Commerce,
trade.
-T —
Atencion. Attention.
Corazon. Heart
Oorrespondcncia. Correspondence.
Oonvite. Invitation,
feast,
Esquela. Note.
banquet, party.
Formnla. Form, formula.
Formiilario. list of formulas.
Expredon. Expression.
Kespeto. Bespect
Estmctura. Structure.
Sobrescrito. Address.
Intimidad. Intimacy.
Corresponsal. Correspondent
IniciaL InitiaL
Residencia, Besidence.
CX)MPOi
3inON.
Sefior D. Jo86 Romero.
Mr. Joseph Romera
May Sr. mio.
Dear Sr, My Dear Sir.
Hny Sr. naestro.
Dear Sir.
Muy Sres. mios.
Gentlemen.
Muy Sres. nuestros.
Gentlemen.
Sefiora Da. Isabel Jim^es.
Mrs. Isabella Jlm6nez.
Muy Sra. mia.
Madam.
Muy Sra. nuestra.
Madam.
Hemos recibido su ap^^, apreciable
We have received your favor (or your
{or su est^, estimada, or an
favoi^,
esteemed favor).
J
fa7orecida).
Las de V. del 2 del corriente (w
-cor**).
Your favors of the 2d instant
4 del pp*® (pr6ximo pasado).
4th ult
Se repite 4 las 6rdeDeB de Y.
"
S. S. S.
(Su seguro serndor).
Q. a M. B.
.
Yours very truly.
(Que ea mano besa).
M. De. T
Q. & P. B.
•
( To ladies, que bus pi^s besa). ^
t
LBSSOK LVI.
801
Muy Sr. mio 7 amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Uande Y. con toda franqueza & su in-
yaxiable amigo 7 S. S.
£1 Sr. A. De L. presenta (or ofrece) sua
reapetoB al Sr. D. L De H., 7 le haoe
saber que.
Sr. D. J086 Martinez,
Del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. D. Francisco SAncfaez,
Hermanos 7 Ca., C&diz.
Sefiora Da. Teodora Jimenez 7
Arteta, Calle Ma7or N«. 10,
Zaragoza.
Al Ex™*". (Excelentfsimo),
Sr. D. Juan Yalero 7 Arteta.
B. li. M.y
AlSr.DeV.
a a a,
A-DeT.
M7 Dear Sir and Friend.
M7 Dear Friend.
Command with freedom 70iir true
friend and faithful aenrant.
Mr. A. De L. presents his compliments
to Mr. L De H., and begs to infonn
him that
Mr. Joseph Martinez,
Merchant, Madrid.
Messrs. Francis S&nchez Bros, k Co.,
CaduB.
Mrs. Theodora Jimenez 7 Arteta,
10 Ma7or Street,
Saragoasa.
To His Ezoellenc7, John Yalero 7
Arteta.
(Form of addressing letters, notes, &c.,
to persons living in the same place as
the writer.) ^
EXPLANATION.
270- Epistolabt Cobbespondencb. — ^We could not, with-
out overstepping the limits of a grammar, give here all the
terms peculiar to mercantile correspondence ; those desirous to
become perfect in that branch may consult the sereral works
written on the subject, among which we particularly recommend
Mr. De Veitelle^s "Mercantile Dictionary," published by D.
Appleton & Co. We merely give here the general forms for
beginning and ending letters.
In addressing persons of different classes of society, except
those having titles, letters begin as follows :
Mu7 Sefior mio. M7 Dear Sir.
Mu7 Sefior nuestro. Sir ; Dear Sir. y
Mu7 Sefiores mios. )
Mu7 Sefiores nuesteos. f Gentlemen.
And to ladies :
Mu7 Sefiora mia. | Madam.
These expressions are most generally abbreviated thus : —
Mut/ Sr. mio; Muy Sr. n«>; Muy Sres. mios ; Jfwy Sres. n'^;
Muy Sra. mia; Muy Sra. nr^\ Muy Sras. nw.
302
LEBSOlf LTI.
In the body of the letter, su of/^ (sa apreciable), or 8u
€8t^ (su estimada), or suyavor^ (su favorecida) — cartas letter,
bemg understood — ^are equivalent to your favor or your es-
teemed letter.
Such expressions as these are translated thus :
Yours of the 2d inBt; 4th alt ; 8th
of Hfty, &0.
Las de Y. del 2 del oor«* (corriente) ;
4 del pp^ (prdzimo pasado) ; 8 de
Ma JO, etc
The following forms are employed at the end of letters :
Se repiie & las drdenes de Y.,
(Su segoro serridor).
Q. & M. Bi.
(Que su mano besa).
Manden Yms. cuanto gustea k
S. S. S.|
Q. S. H. B.
I am, Dear Sir,
Yours respectfully.
Command at pleasure your faithful
senrant
To a lady, the form is the same, only changing the letter
M, into P., thus :
Q. S. p. B.
(Que BUS pUs besa).
In a more familiar style :
Huy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Maude Y. con toda franqueza & su
inyariable amigo y S. S.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and fidthftil serrant.
JEkqtielaSj notes, are also written in Spanish, as in English,
in the third person ; as,
£1 Sr. A. De L. presenta {or ofrece) bus
respetos alSr.Dn.LDe H., y le
hace saber que, etc.
Mr. A. De L. presents his respects to
Mr. L De H., and begs to acquunt
him that, &c.
The most usual manner of addressing letters is :
Sr. Dn. Jos6 Martinez, del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. Dn. Fran«> S&nchez, Heimanos y Ca., C&diz.
Bra. Dfia. Teodora Jimenez y Arteta, Calle Mayor N^ 10.
Al £z»> Sr. D. Juan Yalero y Arteta, Madrid.
LESSON LVI. 303
In the city: .
TO A GIZmSlCAV. TO A LADT.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. D. P.,
s. a a,
A-T.
B. L. P.,
A la SnL Da. F. V.,
a a a,
A-T.
CONVEBaiTION AND VERSION.
1. jLe guBta & V. eeoribir cartas? Me guste escribir & mis amigos
Intimos ; pero me gnsta mas recibir cartas que escribirlas.
2. Yo no a& bien el ceremonial 6 fonnulario de cartas, iqoiere V.
hacermo el favor de decirme o6mo se principia nna carta? Con mncho
gusto, preg6nteme Y. aqaello qne no sepa.
8. iC6mo se principia nna carta dirigida 4 nna persona cnalqniera
con qaien no tenemos intimidad? Si es nn caballero, principiamos con
la f6rmnla de Muff 8r. mio^ y ifi es nna sefiora con la de Muy Setlora mia.
4. jY para acabar? Escribiendo 4 nn caballero solemosdedr entre
otras mnchas ezpresiones^ ** Qaeda de V.,
a 8. 8.,
Q. a M. B.,.
¥nlano de tal."
6. i Y si es nna sefiora 4 qnien escribimos ? Lo mismo, solo cambia-
mos la iniclal de mano, M., en la inicial de pie$y P., aaS,
"Quedade v.,
a 8. a,
Q. a p. B.,
Fnlano de taL"
6. ^Ycnindoesdnnlntimoamigo? Ent6ncesesmasparecidoalingl6s
J principiamos didendo : " Qnerido amigo," j para acabar, cnalqniera de
las mnchas expresiones qne se nsan, oomo :
'*Tu amigo que te ama de corazon,
Fnlano de tal."
7. I C6mo se escriben las esquelas de invitadon, etc., & las personas
que yiven en la ciudad ? Se escriben, oomo en ingl^ en la tercera persona.
8. I Qniere V. escribirme nna esqnela invit^ndome 4 comer ? Si, se-
fior, yea Y. asi: "Los Sres. De Y. presentan sus respetoe 4 los Sres. De
T., y les snplican que les hagan el honor de venir 4 comer con ellos el
m4rte8 4 las cinco. Ltines, Abril 8 de 1866."
9. Yeamos ei Y. puede responderme en espallol. — Yea Y., "Los Sres.
De T. se apresurar4n 4 acudu* al amable convite de los Sres. De Y., y les
presentan sus mas finas atendones."
304 LS880N LYI.
10. Mnj bieiif maj bien^ahora solo falta poner la direcoion (el sobre).
— ^Estondo las personas 4 quien me dir^o en la ciadad, creo qae el sobres-
crito debe ponerse asl :
B, L. M.
Al St. De V.
8. 8. 8.,
A. De T.
11. {Oree Y. qne podr6 abora tradacir ana carta mercantil en iDgMs?
Si, senor, 7 escribirla tambien, pnesto qne Y. sabe ya la estrnctnra de la
lengna, adem&s de poseer nn gran ntimero de sns giros, idiotismos 7 pala-
bras mas neoesarias; pero todavia tendr& Y. necesidad de acndir al dic-
cionario, porqne no es posible introdncir en nna gramitioa todas las pala-
bras 7 frases qne reqniere nna Gorre^ondenda mercantlL
EXERCISE.
1. Do yon ever do an7 of the correspondence in yonr office (eBeri-
torio) ? Not often, for I do not know how to write letters in Spanish,
and the greater part of onr correspondence is carried on (Uevar) in that
langaage.
2. Ton onght, in that case, to make that branch the object of par-
ticular stud7 for a time.* That is what I desire to do ; and I wonld be
obliged to yon to gire me some instructions (vMtruir) in the forms most
observed in Spanish houses.
8. I shall have much pleasure in showing you all I know myself; but
as I have never been in business, there are many points of wluch I am
ignorant (ignorar).
4. What is Ae first thing to write in a letter? In Spanish, as in
English, the date is generally the first thing ; it is written thus :
Cadiz, October 1st, 1866.
5. What comes next ? The name and residence of the person we are
writing to, thus :
Messrs. Lafukntk, Sows & Co., Malaga:
6. So far there is little difference between the two language. Yery
little ; we next go on to say {luego sepone) :
Gentlemen (or 8ir, or My Dear Sir, or Dear Sirs, or, if we write to a
lady. Madam) :
7. Ah ! there I observe a decided difference : is that the form always
followed for conmiencing letters? For business letters, yes; but for fa-
miliar correspondence, we have many others ; indeed, they are mostly
always suited to the taste of the writer.
8. Be good enough to show me one or two? With the greatest
LESSON LYII.
305
pleasure : My Dear Friend : My Very Dear Alexander : Esteemed Friend :
My Ever Dear Mother, &c., &c., &c.
9. How do yon acknowledge (aeuaar) the receipt of a favor ? In this
manner : I have dnly received your esteemed favor (or letter) of the 17th
instant.
10. As for the body of the letter, the form depends entirely on the
nature of the business ; and, in general, aU that is required is to say just
what is necessary and nothing more, and to avoid obscurity {odcuridad)^
in order that our ideas may be completely understood by our corre-
spondent (eorrespanml).
11. The usual manners of closing a letter are :
I am, dear or,
Your most obd't'ser't ; or,
I am, fflr.
Yours very truly.
12. And for familiar letters:
I am, dear Charles,
Your true Mend and loving cousin ;- or.
With kindest expres^ons to your brother,
Beiieve me to remain your ever faithfnl and loving friend.
LESSON LVII.
Abalanzarse.
Concordar.
Gumplir.
Conversar.
Entregar.
Escapar.
Honrar.
Participar.
Kegir.
Auziliar.
Honrado.
Plural.
Singular.
To rush, to spring.
To agree.
To fulfQ, to keep, to do (dutyj.
To converse.
To give, to hand, to deliver.
To escape.
To honor.
To participate, to partake.
To govern.
To help.
Honest, honored.
Plural.
Singular.
306
LSSSOX LVII.
Baron.
Baron.
Alh^a.
Jewel.
Or6dito.
Credit
Agudeza.
Wit, witty say-
Encargo.
Gommisfflon,
ing.
charge, order.
Oocina.
Kitchen.
G^nero.
Kind, doth.
Oonfianza.
Ck>nfidenoe.
Empleo.
Employment,
Espada.
Sword.
office.
Fnga.
Flight
Plato.
Plate, diflh.
Gracia.
Favor, good
graces.
Ntimero.
Number.
Mania.
Regimen.
Regimen.
Promesa.
Promise.
Tema.
Theme, exercise.
Pretension.
Pretension, daim.
Diptongo.
Diphthong.
Oonoordanda.
Concord, agree-
Triptongo.
Triphthong.
ment. '
Varoru
Man:
Version.
Vermon,
Error.
Error, mistake.
Tema.
Whim.
OOMPO
srrioN.
Aoordarse con algano.
To agree with anj
one.
Acordarse de alguno.
To remember any
one.
Caer & la plaza.
To front on the square (said of a house).
Caer en la plaza.
To faU in the square.
Caer de la grada de alguno.
To fall fiom any (
one's fevor (or good
graces).
Caer en gracia & algano.
To get into any one's favor (or good
graces).
Contar una cosa.
To relate, to teU a
tWng.
Contar con una cosa.
To count upon a thing.
Conyenir & uno.
To suit (to be convenient for) any one.
Convenir con uno.
To agree with any one.
Cumplir con uno.
To do one's duty toward any ona
Cumpllr por uno.
To act in the place of any one.
Dar algo.
To give any thing.
Dar con algo.
To find any tMng.
Dar en una cosa.
To be obstinate.
Dar por algo.
To give for any thing.
Dar cr^to.
To give credit, to believe.
Dar & cr6dito.
To give on credit
Dar la mano.
To give the hand (
or to shake hands).
Dar de mano.
To lay aside, to abandon.
Dar en m^nos de.
To faU into the hands of.
Dar con el pi^
To despise, to scoin, to make light of.
Dar por el pi6.
To overthrow.
LBSSOK LVII.
807
Dar fin {mr cabo) k una cosa.
Dar fin de una cosa.
Declararse & algono.
Declararse por alguna
Dejap haoer algo.
Dqjar de hacer alga
Desbacerse alguna coea.
Deshacerse de alguna cofla.
Disponer sua alhajas.
Disponer de sua allugaa.
Echar tierra k una cosa.
Echar un g6ncro en tierra.
Entender una oosa.
Entender en una ooea.
Entregaree al dinero.
Entregarse del dlnera
Escapar k buenaa.
Escapar de buenaik
Estar en alguna cosa.
Estar sobre alguna oosa.
Estar k todo.
Estar en todo.
Estar con cuidado.
Estar de cuidado.
Estar enst
Estar sobre sL
Estar con alguna
Estar por alguno.
Estar en hacer alguna cosa.
Estar para hacer alguna cosa.
Estar por hacer alguna cosa.
Estar alguna oosa por hacer.
Gustar un plato.
Gustar de un plato.
Hacer confianza k una persona.
Hacer confianza de una persona.
^Hacer una cosa con tiempo.
To bring to an end, to finish.'
To destroy.
To confide one^s secrets to any one.
To side with any one, to declare one's
self in fayor of any one.
To let any thing be done.
To leave any thusg undona
(Speaking of thmgs) to be destroyed.
To dispose of (or part with) any thing.
To arrange one's jewelry.
To dispose of one's jewelry.
To forget any thing, to cast it into ob-
livion.
To throw any thing on the ground (or
down).
To understand a thing.
To be a judge of a thmg.
To make a god of one's money.
To receiye, to take charge of money.
To make the best of one's escape.
To make a happy escape.
To be aware of any thing.
To push an affair.
To be ready for whatever may come.
To pay attention to every matter.
To be anxious, solicitous.
To be dangerously ilL
To have complete consciousness.
To be proud.
To be with any one, to be of any one's
opinion.
To favor any one.
To be resolved (or disposed) to do any
thing.
To be about to do any thing.
To be inclined to do something.
To remain to be done.
To taste a dish (of any kind of food).
To be fond of a dish.
To tell a secret to any one.
To make a confident of any one, to
trust to any one.
To do a thing at one's leisure (so as not
to be pressed for time).
308
Hfloer QUA com en tiempo.
Haoene & una cosa.
Hacene con una cosa.
Haoene de una coea.
Hallane algo.
Ilallarse con algo.
Irconalguno.
Ir sobre algono.
Mayor de edad.
Mayor en edad.
Participar una cosa.
Participar de una cosa.
Poner una cosa en tierra.
Poner una cosa por tierra.
Poner con cuidado.
Poner en cuidado.
Preguntar 4 uno.
Pn^untar por uno.
Quedar en haccr una cosa.
Quedar una cosa por haoer.
Responder una cosa.
Responder de una cosa.
Saber & cocina.
Saber de cocina.
Salir con una empresa.
Salir de una empresa.
Salir & su padre.
Salir con su padre.
Salir de su padre.
Salir por su padre.
Ser con alguno.
Ser de alguno.
Ser para alguno.
Tener consigo.
Tener para si.
Tener de hacer algo.
Tener que hacer algo.
Tirar la espada.
LESSON LVII.
To do a thing in time, at a soitable tixst.
To get used to a thing.
To get (or procure) a thing.
To provide one*s self witb a filing
To find any thing.
To be in possession of (or hMv^e) aaj
thing. *
To go with anybody, to be of an j aoes
opinion, to be on any one's side, to
listen to any one.
To fall upon (or attack) any one.
To be of age.
To bo older.
To communicate any thing (to another).
To participate in any thing.
To lay any thing on the ground.
To make little of a thmg.
To put (or place, or lay) with car&
To alarm, to give anxiety.
To ask any one (interrogate).
To ask (or inquire) for any thing.
To agree to do any thing.
To remain to be done (speaking of
things).
To answer something (ghring an answer).
To answer for any thing.
To smell (or taste) of the Idichen.
To be skilfbl in (or to understand)
cooking.
To carry out an enterprise.
To give up an enterprise.
To resemble one*s father.
To go out with one's father.
To be released from the wardship of
one*s father.
To go bail for one's father.
To be of any one's opinion.
To belong to any one's party.
To be for any one (of things).
To have with (or about) one.
To be persuaded.
To be going to do any thing.
To have to do any thing.
To throw down (or away) one's swori
LESSOir LYII.
300
TFlrar de la espada.
TCratar de vinos.
Orator en Tinos.
"Vender al contado.
"Vender d? contado.
Volver & la razon.
Volver por la razon.
Tolver en razon de tal cosa.
To draw one's sword.
To talk- about winee.
To deal in wines.
To sell for cash.
To sell on the instant
To recover one's reason.
To stand np for reason (or what is
right).
To return for such a reason (or motive).
EXPLANATION.
271. It is a general cnstom, amongst authors of Spanish
grammars and Spanish methods, to copy entire the forty pages
devoted by the Spanish Academy in its Grammar to a list of
verbs requiring certain prepositions after them. But we, not-
withstanding our most profound respect for the body just
mentioned, refrain from following in the footsteps of our pre-
decessors, and that not merely on account of the useless-
ness of the list, but for the more potent reason that we believe
it to be calculated to misguide the student at every step. An
example : — ^Any one not thoroughly acquainted with Spanish
syntax would, on reading the very first article in the list above
referred to, AbcUamarse & los peiigros^ nsLtuTdXij conclude there-
from that the verb abalanzar governs at all times and under
all circumstances the preposition d» Now that would be
absurd, for nothing is more usual than to see, and hear the ex-
pressions : — Abalamarse contra {or sobre) su enemigo^ abalan-
zarse con {or sin) juicio^ abalamarae para 8a<yudir^ de repente,
&c. And so of all the other verbs, each of which may, accord-
ing to the idea to be conveyed, govern almost any preposition
in the language.
It would be vain to attempt to give, in a work of the
nature of the present one, a complete set of rules for determin-
ing the various significations of every verb as decided or
modified by the attendant preposition; but, as much can be
done, even here, toward helping the student through the most
difficult parts, we could not resist giving in this day's Composi-
tion a list composed of those verbs which are at the same time
of most frequent occurrence in general e very-day conversation.
310 LESSON LYII.
and susceptible of the greatest diversity of meaning, accaitiuig
to the preposition by which they are followed.
Before dismissing this subject we deem it convenient to re-
mark that a large number of English verbs, to determine the
meaning of which a preposition is indispensable, are rendered
in Spanish by a verb alone. For example :
B&jtr. To go down.
Entrar. To oome in.
Sallr. To go out.
Subir. To go up.
Sacar. To draw out.
Partir. To set out.
Caer. To fall down.
This may be the reason why many Spanish granmiarians
have thought that in Spanish the same thing does not exist.
We regret that the dimensions of our book do not allow of our
giving a more complete list in corroboration of the fact that
Spanish verbs too enjoy that transition of signification which
is so frequent in English verbs.
CONVEKSATION AND VERSION.
1. I A qu6 lado caen las ventanas de sn caarto de Y. ? Tres caen &
la plaza de Madison j las otras tres caen d la calle YeiDte 7 dnco.
2. ^Le cae & Y. en gracia esc machachito? SS, senor, porqne res-
ponde oon mucha agadeza.
8, |Paedo contar con sn promesa do Y. ? Y. pnede contar con ella,
porqne yo complo siempre lo que prometo.
4. J Da Y. cr6dito 4 todo lo que eye? No, sefior, 4 m4nofl que
oonozca las personas.
5. ^Da Y. la mano 4 aqnel pobre? SS, sefior, porque aunque pobre
es honrado.
6. I Ha dado Y. fin d su tarea ? Todavia no ; pero pronto dar6 de mano.
7. 81 Y. deja esos libros en manos de ese muchacho, pronto dard fin
de ellos. — ^Aai lo creo ; pero es necesario quo los nifios tengan algo para
entretenerse.
8. I C6mo ha dispnesto Y. de sus alhajas ? Las he guardado, porqae
pude enoontrar diuero sin venderlas.
9. I Qu6 se hizo de aqnel mal negocio en que se meti6 su primo de
Y. ? Se le ha echado tierra, y nadie se acuerda mas de 61.
10. I En qn6 se ocnpa su amigo de Y. ? Entiende en vinos; pero es
oosa que no entiende.
LSSSOK LVII. 311
11. 2 06mo est4 sa esposa de y . ? Ellaest&decmdado,770coiicaidado.
12. ^Estd y. en hacer aqael negocio ? Estoy para haoerlo.
18. ^Qaeda y. en hacer ese encargo por mi? Qucdo en hacerlo j
pierda y. coidado, qae no se quedard por hacer.
14. ^Es y. mayor de edad? No, senor, todavia no; pero soy mayor
en edad con respecto 4 mis hermanos.
16. No ponga y. eso por tierra. — No lo pongo por tierra, sino en tierra.
16. iPiensay. salir con sa empresa? No, sefior, pero pienso salir
pronto de ella.
17. I 'Ilr6 ese homhre de la espada ? Tir6 de la espada, porqne la sao6 ;
pero el miedo le hizo empren^er la faga y la tir6.
18. Don Juan, jle gosta 4 y. vender al fiado? No, sefior, me gosta
. vender al contado y de contado.
19. iyolvi6 D. Francisco por la razon? No, sefior, D. Francisco no
ha vnelto & la razon, y por consigoiente no volvi6 por la razon.
20. I Se acnerda ese hombre con sn esposa? No, sefior, no se acuerdan.
21. 1 8e acuerda y. de lo qne le d^e d y. ayer ? No, sefior, lo he
olvidado.
22. I Gonviene y. ahora conmigo en qne el espafiol es mas fdcil qne el
ingl6s ? Convengo con y . en ello.
23. jLe conviene & Y. hacer eso ? No, sefior, no me conviene.
24. I Di6 y. por fin con lo qne bnscaba ? No, sefior, todavia no lo he
encontrado.
25. Este hombre ha dado en la tema de qnerer aprender sin estndiar ;
I no le parece & y. qne es nna pretension mny ridicola ? Eidicnlisima.
EXERCISE.
1. Has the Baron given np his project ? He told me he wonld like to
give it np, if he conld do so honorably.
2. I understand he is an honorable man? Ye8,*and he is therefore
respected by all who know him.
8. Has yonr brother come to an agreement with that dealer for the
purchase of the horse he was speaking of? It appears not, and that, on
the contrary, he desires to get rid of the one he has.
4. Did yon inform the merchant of the order yon received from the
West ? Not yet ; but I intend to let him know of it this very day.
6. Does that woman understand cooking? She says she does; and
she handed me a letter from a lady with whom she lived two years.
6. Did the captain draw his sword as soon as he heard his antagonist's
reply? He had already drawn it; but when he heard the reply he
threw down his sword, and ran and gave his hand to the man whom, a
few moments before, he was resolved to kilL
812
LS880K LYIII,
7. Has your brother sent yon the books he promised joa f Ko*
that need not soiprise yon, for I can never rely (count) oa him for
thing.
8. That is to say, he never keeps his promise ? That is
what I mean to say.
9. Do past participles always agree in gender and nnmber with
subject of the verb ? Yes, always, except when governed hj the
ary to hate.
10. Are there not some participles, past and present, that do not i^
tain the regpmen of the verbs to which they belong I — ^There are tot*
many; and, if you like, I will mention some of them.— Be good enoo^
to do so.
11. I hope you have provided yourself with every thing neoeasary for
your journey? Every thing, except one or two artides which I have
been unable to find.
12. How do you advise me to arrange (dispose) all these books? I
have only one advice to give you in the matter, and that is, t^ <fiiqM?^
of them as quickly as you can.
18. Woald you like to taste this dish ? No, thank you, I am not Ibod
of it
14. Is he not of your opinion ? Not at all ; he always goes (aides)
with his father.
LESSON LVIII.
Notar.
Cazar.
Ohancear.
Combinar.
Concertar.
Ooncluir.
Enfriarse.
Encargar.
Flotar.
Improvisar.
Inspirar.
Repartir.
Saltar.
Trinchar.
To note, to observe, to perceive.
To hunt, to chase.
To jest
To combine.
To concert, to agree.
To conclude, to finish.
To cool, to get (or grow) cold.
To charge, to commission, to
order.
To float
To improvise.
To inspire.
To divide.
To leap, to jump.
To carve, to cut
LESSON LYIII.
813
A lo 16joe.
Acnestaa.
A la espafiola.
Atras.
Abanic<f.
Apetito.
Aficionado.
BaoL
Buey.
Brindia.
Carro.
Oanasto.
CoDdnctor.
Pretezto.
Pefiaaoo.
Embarcadero.
Piropos ipl)>
Pasiye.
Sitio.
Salon.
Vooabnlario.
Fan.
Appetite.
Amatenr, one
fond ot
Trunk.
Ox.
Toast
Car, cart
Basket
Conductor.
Pretext.
Book.
Ferry.
Sweet tilings.
Fare.
Place, spot
Saloon.
Vocabulary.
At a distance, in the distance.
On one*8 back, on one's slioulder.
In the Spanish fkahion.
Backward, ago, bebind.
Blanco.
White.
Bonito.
Pretty.
Durable, duradero.
Durable.
Elocuente.
Eloquent
Galante.
Gallant
Bello sexo.
Fair sex.
Magnifico.
Magnificent
Negro.
Black.
Bodeado.
Surrounded.
Vado.
Empty.
Botella.
Caza.
Chanza.
OinuL
Colina.
Dama.
Iniaginaoion.
liave.
MiUa.
Pechuga.
Fuensa.
Suerte.
Tarea.
VocaL
Yoz.
Sombra.
Elocuenda.
Wing.
Bottle.
Hunt
Jest
Top, summit
HOL
Lady.
Imagination.
Key.
Mile.
Breast (of fowl).
Force, strength.
Luck, sort.
Task.
VoweL
Voice, word.
Shade, shadow.
Eloquence.
COMPOSITION.
Qued&mos en qae saldriamos 4 las
dnco.
Este canasto es superior 4 mis fiierzas.
A la salad de las sefioras.
14
We agreed (or appointed) to set oat (or
start) at five o'clock.
This basket is more than I am able to
To the health of the ladies.
314
LESSON LVIII.
Dedr piropos 4 las Mfioritta.
Sinrue Y. pagar al oonducior.
I Hire Y. qa6 grada !
^Qu^tallegttsta&Y.?
Fongamoe los canaatoa k la acmibra.
La subida de la oolina con un gran
canaato k cueatas, me ha abierto el
apedto.
He alegro de ver k Y.
Se al^gr6 de la notlda.
Lo dento mncha
Me peaa modio aaberla
i CuAntaa peraonaa cabea en eata igle-
ria?
No cabiamoa todoa en el aalon.
^Puede caber en ta imaginadoii tal
Cabe mncfao en eate banL
No caber de pl68.
A mf me capo en aaerte venir 4 la
. America.
No caber de goio.
To say sweet things to the young latSea.
Please pay the conductor.
Only think I
How do you like?
Let us set the baskets m the shade.
Coming up the bill with a large baalrft
on my back haa sharpened my aippe>
tite.
I am {^ to see yoo.
He waa rejoiced at the news.
I am very sorry for it (jL e^ I fed it
much).
I am very sony to know it ^t. «l, it
grieves me much to know it).
How many persona doea this dnxrcfa
hold?
The saloon could not hold na alL
Gan SQch a thing enter your imagina-
tion?
This trunk holds a great deal
To have no room to stand.
It was.my lot to crane to America.
To be OYCijoyed.
EXPLANATION.
miOMATIO UBS OF GBBTAIN YEBBS.
272. Alegeabse. — ^The verbs to be glad and to be r^oieed
ai are translated by the reflective verb €degraree\ as,
Me aUgro de ver 4 Y. I I am glad to see you.
Se alegrd de la notida. | He was r^oioed at the news.
273. Sbmtib and pesab. — To be sorry and to grieve^ ars
translated by these verbs ; as,
Lo siento mucho.
He peea mucho saberlo.
J am very sony for it (i. 0., I fed it
much).
I am very sorry to know it (i. e., it
grieyes me much to know it).
274. Cabee, to be capable of containing, &c. — ^This verb
is employed* in different manners in Spanish ; as,
I Cu&ntas personas eaben en esta I How many persons does this chorch
igleda ? hold (or is it capable of oontaizi'
I Sng)?
LBBSOlf LYIII.
815
Ko eabiamo9 todoB en el salon.
^Puede eaber en ta imagiaadoa tal
Cixbe macho en este bauL
No caber de pi68.
A mf me a^ en suerte venir k
America.
Nocoier enaf.
No caber de gozo.
The saloon coold not hold us alL
Can sQch a thing enter your imagina-
tion?
This trunlK holds a great deal.
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to iimerica.
To be well satisfied with one^s self!
To be OTerjoyed.
GONYEBSATION AKD VEBSION.
1. Baenos £as, sefiores, iconque ya todoe estan listos? Paes no
Iiabiiunos de estar, d son ya las seia j qaedimos en qne saldriamoa k las
cinco.
2. Habriamos estado aqni de los primeros, si no habiera side qne, des-
pnes de haber andado doe 6 tres Tnanyamaa, echo de yer mi esposa qne
habia olvidado la Have del cnarto, el paragnaa, el abanico, y yo no b6
onintas otraa cosas mas ; pero en fin ya estamos aqni, ^cn^do partimos ?
Estamos esperando el carro qne va al embarcadero de la calle Treinta
y tres.
8. Sefioras, eaten Yds. prontas, porqne veo yenir el carro.— Don Mar-
tin, aytideme V. k Ueyar eate canasto, porqne es superior k mis fnerzaa —
Dame Y. 4 Don Pepito, qne no hace mas qne dedr piropos k las sefio-
ritas, porqne yo tengo ya dos pardgnas y tres nittoe de qne cnidar.
4. Don Pepe, Y. qne no tiene nifios, ni canastos, etc., dryase Y. pagar
al conductor. — (j £1 diantre del hombre 1 ahora me pesa no haber tomado
nn canasto.)
5. (El pasige caballerosi |Cn&nto8 somos? nno, dos, tres, cnatro,
caballeros; nna, dos, tres, coatro, siete sefioras, esto es: once personas
mayores y catorce nifios.
6. Papi, I est& may l^jos el sitio 4 dondo yamos 4 pasar el dia? No,
Lnislta, solamente nnas diez millaa
7. jDee8telado6delotrodelrio? Delotro,defldeaqnilopnede8yer.
8. I No yes all4 4 lo l^jos, en la cima de aqnella colina, nna casa blanca
en donde. flota la bandera americana? Si, sefior, es mny bonito dtio y
debe tener mny bnenas yistas.
9. Caidado con los nifios al saltar en tierra, no se calga algnno al agna.
—J Estan todos ftiera ? jNo se ba olyidado nada?— No, sefior.— Pues en
marcba.
10. Don Pepito, tome Y. ese canasto, y cnidado no lo dqje caer y
rompa las botc^las qne contiene. — i Hombre, i)or IMos I con el pretexto de
qne yenia con las manos yacias, me ba hecho Y. pagar los carros y el ya-
816 LBBBOK LTIII.
porcito por veinte 7 ires personas^ y ahora me qniere Y. hacer cargar
con el oanasto del vino.
11. Yamos, Don Pepito, USvelo Y. ahora hasta la cima de aqneJIa 00-
lina, que & la vnelta & oasa yo me encai^ de Uevarlo. — i Mire V. que
gracial i la ynelta! qa6 es I0 que qaedar4 de ima doceoa de botellas,
despaes de beber veinte 7 tres personas.
12. Nada ; el que no ayade k Uevar los canastos no participar4 de sa
contenido. — Sres., repartamos la tarea; que los hombres lleven los cft-
nastos, las mamds 4 los nifios, los nifios los paraguas, y las sefioritaa 4
Don Pepito.
18. Da. Delfina | qa6 tal le gosta 4 Y. este sitio f i Oh ! es delicioso;
I qn6 vistas tan bonitas I
li. Pongamos los canastos i la sombra de ese hermoso 4rboL — Si, y
pongimonos nosotros tambien 4 la sombra, qae al sol hace calordto.
16. I No le parece 4 Y., Don Enrique, que es tiempo de poner la mesa?
Asi me pareoe, porque la subida de la oolina con un gran canasto 4
cnestas me ha abierto el apetito.
16.* Sres., la comida est4 en la mesa. — Selloras, |qu6 es lo que Yds. di-
cenf (en la mesa I ] Ahl si, ya vemos, sobre un gran pefiasco 4 la sombra
de aquel 4rbol jmagnifica ideal
17. Don Pepito, traiga Y. un par de ^as mas, que faltan para dos
sefioras. An4yoy, ic4spita con las sillitasl cada una pesa cienlibras;
pero, eso si, son durables, no haya miedo de que se rompan. — ^Tomen
Yds. asiento, sefioras.
18. Pase Y., Don Martin, primero. No, sefior, despues de Y. — Sefio-
res sin cumplimientos que se enfiia la comida.
19. |Qui6n quiere sopa? {Hombre, sopal yo, yo, slrvame Y. un
plato, Don Enrique.
20. Poco 4 poco, Don Pepito, en el campo, no tenemos sopa. — ^Pues yo
crei que Y. me la ofrecia. — To pregunt4 por saber qui6n era aficionado
4 la sopa.
21. Sefior Don Pedro | quiere Y. hacerme el favor de trinchar ese
polio ? Oon mucho gusto.
22. Da. Margarita |voy 4 mandarle 4 Y. un pedazo de pechuga? No,
sefior, gracias, m4ndeme Y. el ola 6 la piema, que me gusta mas.
28. Don Pepito, un brindis, vamos un brindis. — Ezctisenme Yds.,
sefiores, yo no s4 hacer, y m4nos improvisar brindis.
24. Pero hombre, { eso dice Y. que es tan galante y elocuente con las
damasi ^No le inspira 4 Y. ajgo el beUo sezo de que se halla Y. ro-
deado ? Pues bien, 4 la salud de las sefioras. — ^T | porqu4 no f
LBS80N LTIII. 317
EXEKCISK
1. Has the baker not come yet ? You are in a jesting mood (humor)
this morning ; he came long before yon were np.
2. Never mind; I have got change enough to pay for all. — Ton are
too late, I haye already paid ; the conductor has no time to wait half an
hour collecting the fare of each passenger.
8. Tonr appetite seems to be a little better to-day than nsnal ; how
do yon account for that ? Beally you flatter my appetite beyond what it
deserves ; I am happy to say that it is at all times in excellent order.
4. Do yon not find it good exercise to climb to the top of the hill
with that heavy basket on your arm ? The fact is I shall have to give it
to some one else for a while, for my strength is not equal to the task.
5. I wonder who you can giye it to ; you see that we have each of us
something to carry. Well, in that case, I must change with some one
that has a lighter- burden (earga) than my own.
6. Does not John intend to become a soldier ? He does, though en-
tirely contrary to the will of his father, who set his face against it in the
most determined manner.
7. How many trunks is each passenger {poiojerd) allowed to keep
with him in his berth (camarote) ? Only one, supposed to contain the
articles he will require to have at hand during the passage.
8. Did you ever go to a lion-hunt while you were in South AfHca?
Several times, and I can assure you it is a most interesting and exciting
9. Did you go there entirely for pleasure ? No, I managed to com-
bine bufflness and pleasure, otherwise I should probably never have seen
that country, for you know that such a voyage as that costs a great deal
of money.
10. Did they drink many toasts during the dinner! A good many,
and the first one I proposed was to the £Eur sex.
11. Nothing surprising in that ; I know it would scarcely be possible to
surpass you in gallantry. Yon are flattering me now, for the ladies agree
on all hands in callmg you the most gallant young gentleman in the
country.
12. Just try if your eloquence wiU not succeed in persuading your
young friend to come with us to-morrow. With all my heart; but un-
fortunately he does not speak French, and you know how much my elo-
quence loses in English.
18. Does the art of pleasing depend on what we do and what we say?
It does not, in my opinion, depend so much on what we do and say as on
how we do things and how we say them.
318
LESSON LIX.
14. Is it not sarprising that jour mster has not jet oome ? I b^iere
she has gone round to see her jonng Spanish friend (/em.\ althongii sbe
left me bat half an hour ago, under pretext of haying to write a letter.
15. Do jou general! J dine in the Spanish fashion at home? We gen-
erallj eat in the French fashion, notwithstanding we are aU very fond
of the Spanish manner of cooking.
LESSON LIX.
To menace.
Oojear.
To be lame, to limp.
Oolgear.
To hong.
Oorregir.
To correct
Cubrir.
To cover.
Cubrirse.
To put on one^s hat.
Descubrir.
To discoYcr, to uncover.
Descubrirse.
To take oflF one's hat
Despedir.
To send away, to put awaj
fi^veup.
Definir.
To define.
Durar.
To last
Rodar.
To roll, to run on wheds.
Prestar.
To lend.
Veneer.
To conquer.
Oosade.
About
Oapaz.
Capable, able.
Oondicionol.
Oonditiona].
Gariredondo.
Roundfaced.
Oasero.
Household, familj, domestic
Compaflero.
Oompanion.
Claro.
Clear. -
Oopulativo.
Copulative.
Generoso.
Generous.
Defectivo.
Defective.
Libre,
Free, unembarrassed.
Vulgar.
Vulgar, common, usual.
Vistoso.
Showj.
LSBBON LIZ.
31S
Ase^o.
Assassin.
Barba.
Beard, chin.
Axunento.
Increase, aagmen-
Carci^ada.
Burst of laughter.
tation.
Decena.
About ten.
Cerrojo.
Bolt.
Definidon.
Definition.
Campo.
Held, conntry.
Evidencia.
Evidence.
Ck>iTedor.
Broker.
Espalda.
Back.
Bedo.
Hnger.
Gana.
Desire, mind.
Dialogo.
Dialogue.
Hoja.
Leaf.
Dolor de costado. Pain in the side.
Loteria.
Lottery.
Deseo.
Deore, wish.
Llave.
Key.
Descaido. ^
Carelessness.
Pena.
Difficulty, pain.
Qrito.
Shout.
Pera.
Pear.
Gemido.
Groan, moan.
Pobreza.
Poverty.
Pagai^.
Promissory note.
Pascua.
Easter.
Presidio.
State-prison.
Bodilla.
Eniee.
Peral.
Pear-tree.
Vuelta.
Turn, change.
P6same.
Condolence.
Posicion.
Portion.
Premio.
Prize, premium,
reward.
Excusa.
Excuse, apology.
Salto.
Jump, spring.
Semblante.
Look.
Trago.
Draught, drink.
COMPOS
3inON.
Sa pagar6 de V. cae el mes que viene.
Le ha caido la loteria. ^
Este edificio cae al (or h&cia el) Norte.
IGb yentanas caen & la mano derecha.
Este vestido te cae bien.
No cay6 en la caenta.
Ta caigo en ello.
Estaralcaer.
Gaer de pl^ de rodillas.
Lo doy por hecho.
Lo dieron por libre.
Me doy por venddo.
Le di6 im dolor de costado.
La lectora de ese libro te dar& ganas
de dormlr.
Alfin di6 en la dificultad.
D«r loB baeaofl dias.
Du las pascuas.
Tonr note falls due next month.
He has won a prize in the lottery.
This building looks toward the North.
My windows are on the right hand.
This dress fits her well.
He did not see the drift (of what was
said).
Ah, now I see I
To be about to take place.
To fan on one's feet, on one's knees.
I take for granted it is done.
They let hun free.
I give it up.
He took a pain in his side.
Reading this book will put you asleep
(or make yon sleep).
Fmally he fell upon the difficulty.
To wish one good day.
To wish a happy Easter.
320
LSSBOir LIX*
Dar el p^flam&
Dar la enbonbueiui.
Dar gritoa.
Dar gemidos.
Di6 una caro^ada.
Bar & comprender.
Darse & oonooer.
Bar miaTaelta.
Bar pena.
Bar gnstOb
Bargana.
BarsaltoB.
Bi6 que decir.
Eato no dice bien oon aqaeOo.
£1 bianco dice bien con el azoL
8u Teelido dice an pobreza.
£1 semblante de Joan dice bien ea mal
genio.
Este peral echa machas peras.
Esta planta no ha echado hojaa.
He echado un trago.
Eche y. la Have k la puerta.
Echar pi6 k tierra.
Echar el oerrqjo.
Echario k Ju^go (or chanza).
Hoy echan la comedia nueva.
Ha echado ooehe.
Echar & presidio.
Echar por los campoa.
Echaron k oorrer.
Lo ech6 todo k perder.
Echar &.rodar.
No echo de ver este defecto.
I Echa V. de m^nos algo ?
No, sefior; echo de m6no8 4 Alguien.
Me ech^ & dormir.
8e ech6 k reb.
Se ech6 k corredor.
Lo puBO de patitas en la caHe,
To ezprew coodolenee.
To congratulate.
To give Bhouta. '
To utter groaoB.
He burst out laughing.
To give to understand.
To make one'a self known.
To take a turn, to go round.
To cause displeasure.
To give pleasure.
To have a mind ; to take the notioii.
To Jump about •
He left room for talk.
This is not in strictT accordance with
that
White goes Tery well with blue.
Her dress tells of her poverty.
John's bad temper is pictured on his
countenance.
This pear-tree bears a great many pears*
This plant has not had any leaves.
I have taken a diink.
Lock the door.
Tq, dismount
To draw the bolt
To take it in play (or hi Jest).
The new play comes out t04ii^l
He has bought a carriage.
To send to State-prison.
To set out across the fields.
They set out running.
He spoiled all.
To send rolling.
I do not percdve the defect
Bo yon n^ any thing? •
No, sir ; I miss some one.
I went asleep.
He b^an to laugh.
He became a broker.
He threw hun mto the street
EXPLANATION.
276. The verbs eaer^ to fall; dar^ to give; dedr^ to tell,
or to say ; echoTy to throw ; differ from the EngUsh in meanuig
LBSSON I.IZ. 821
as conyeyed by the sentences which are given in the Composi-
tion, and to which we refer without putting them here, in order
to avoid repetition.
There they are to be found, with their English translations,
which is the only explanation they admit of.
CONVERSATION AND VEBSION.
1. Don QonzslOy ^le ha caido 4 Y. la loteriaf Ko, se∨ pero mi
pagar^ ha caido.
. 2. Luisita, | qoi^n ha heoho ese vestido que te cae tan bien f Mi maiii&
lo oort6 J yo lo cosL
8. I No sab^ y. porqa6 me hace ahora tantos cumplimientos Don En-
rique ? No, sefior, no s6 qu6 motiyo tenga para ser ahora mas politico
con v. que lo ha sido hasta aquL
4. I No sabe Y. que me ha caido el preraio de los den mH pesos en la
loterfa de la Habanii^ Si, sefior ; ya me lo ha dioho Y. ^tes.
5. Paes bien, juo cae Y. ahora en la ouenta? { Ha I ya oaigo en ello,
Don Enrique quiere pedirle & Y. dinero prestado.
6. {Han dado las doce? Estan al caer.
7. iDierou garrote k los asesinos? No, sefior, al fin los dieron per
libres, porque no habia evidencia sufidente para sentendarloe.
8. iQu6 ha tenido su hermauo de Y. que no lo he visto per tanto
tiempo ? Le di6 un dolor de costado y ha tenido que guardar cama por
una semana.
0. {A que no adivina Y. lo que acabo de hacerf Seguramente que
no lo adivinard, porque Y. es capaz de haoer mucbas cosas buenas y malas.
10. 1 8e da Y. por vencido f Me doj.— Pnes veugo de eohar un trago.
11. jQn6 comedia echan hoy? Hoy dan la tragedia de "Medea," en
donde representa la Sefiora Bistori ; ^ird Y. ?
12. Siendo en italiano no ir6, porque no comprendo el italiaifo y me
' daria ganas de dormir.
18. Sr. D. Alejandro, vengo & darle & Y. los buenos dias.— T6ngalos Y.
muy buenos.
14. {No me quiere Y. dar alguna otra cosaf Si, sefior, le doy 4 Y. la
enhorabuena por el aumento que ha tenido Y. en su familia. — ^Yiva Y.
mil afios.
16. Todo eso es muy bueno, D. Pepito; pero sea Y. generoso y deme
Y. alguna cosita mas. — ^Hombre, si Y. no se da & comprender yo no s6
qu6 mas darle 4 Y. iHa! Bi,yacaigoI qua. estamos en tiempo de. . . .
Doy 4 Y. feHces pascuaa
16. Dale, Dale, d no es eso, yo hablo del dinero que presto 4 Y. haoe
14*
322 LSBSOH LIX.
mas de nn afio.--iHaI Sellor D. Al^andro, no crea Y. qae 70 lo haya
echado en saco roto.
17. Pues bien; {porqu6 Ho me lo da Y. ? {PorquSl hombre, abora
ha dado Y. en la dificultad, 7 esta es qae yo no tengo dineroi j por consi-
goiente no pnedo darlo.
18. Ent6nce9, i qn6 es lo qae Y. paede dar ? { 1 en caanto k eso jo
paedo dar machas cosas.
19. I Ha t me alegro macho, veamos lo qae Y. paede dar. — ^Ed primer
lagar paedo dar gemidos.
20. |PafI (/»Aaip).—Tarabien paedo dar gritos.
21. I Dale 1— Paedo dar, .... qaedecir.
22. No lo dado.— Paedo dar on p^same.
28. {Diosmelibrel — Paedo dar saltos.
24. Vaya aoabe Y., hombre, acab^ Y. — Paedo dar 4 oomprendcr.
25. Si, eso si, demaaado comprendo. — Paedo darme 4 conocer.
26. Ya, ya, oonozco de qa6 pi6 cojea Y. — ^Paedo dar ana vaeka.
27. Paes va61vase Y., por donde ha venido y nanca d^ Y. mas vaeltas
por esta casa.— Y todavia mas, paedo dar ana carcigada.
28. I Jaan 1 Jaan I echa & ese hombre de casa, y despaes echa la Haye
y ol cerrojo 4 la puerta. } Haya picaro I lo he de echar 4 on presidio I
29. I Has eohado 4 ese hombre 4 la calle ? Si, senor, ya lo pose de pa-
titas en la calle.
80. Y I qu6 d\jo ? Primero se echo 4 reir, yo le amenac6 qae lo echaria
4 rodar y ent6nces echo 4 correr.
81. El diantre del hombre siempre est4 pidiendo dinero prestado y
Bobre no pagarlo se viene 4 reir de ano en sas barbas.— Sefior, ^manda
Y. algana otra cosa f No, to pnedes ir, yo voy 4 echarme 4 doimir, ese
bribon me ha dado an gran dolor de cabeza.
EXERCISE.
1. IM there any thing in the papers this morning relative to the trial
of the marderer of Smith ? I anderstand his trial is not to take place
before a month from this time.
2. Why did yoa not bring yoar friend with yon? He is not able to
walk very far to-day, owing to a pain in his side, whidi has troubled him
for the last three days.
8. Did yoa tell the servant to draw the bolt of the door? No, but I
told him to lock the door.
4. Who is that I hear groaning? Yon hear no one groaning; it is
some one shouting in the distance.
5. How did your cousin lose his situation? He owes that miafortane
entirely to his own oardessness.
LESSON LZ.
323
6. Charles, are yoa not going to say good morning to that gentleman?
I need not say good morning to him now, for I have already wished him
a happy Easter.
7. Did^that merchant pay hik correspondent at Malaga after all? He
did not pay hun ; bat he gave him a note at three months.
8. What do yon understand by parlor plays (household comedies) in
Spun ? They are plays represented by private individuals, sometimes in
private honses, from which circumstance they take their name.
9. Do you know that round-finoed little man who is sitting next to
your unde ? That is one of the principal actors (aetor) in the parlor
plays given at Mr. Gutierrez'.
10. What became of the offender? The evidence not being sufEldent
to prove the crime of which be was accused, he was let off; otherwise
lie would have been sent to State-prison.
11. Did they refuse to g^ve him the things he wanted on credit? Of
course they did, because no one can rely on him nor give credit to any
thing he says.
12. Will that young man probably obtain the employment he has ap-
plied for ? Most probably he will, because he has had the good fortune
to get into the prendent's &vor.
18. Hot^ 1 do you not attend your classes this week ? No, I am not
very well ; and so a friend of mine was good enough to offer to act in
my place.
14. Was the error corrected before the letter was dispatched ? Ko^ it
was not discovered in time to be corrected.
LESSON LX.
Decidir.
Ijecutar.
^ercer.
i^Buciar.
Enemistar.
Escuchar.
Ezagerar.
Ezhibir.
Eztrafiar.
Enfriarse.
To decide.
To execute.
To exercise.
To dirty, to soil.
To put at enmity.
To listen to, to hearken to.
To exaggerate.
To exhibit
To ponder at, to find strange.
To grow odd, to get (become)
cold.
824
LESSON LX.
Sncftrgflr.
Exclamar.
Ezceptoar.
Esforzar.
Estrechar.
Sospeohar.
Tardar.
AtoUadero.
Camino.
Astr6noino.
061era.
Cometa.
Cofre.
Gapriclio.
Oaello.
Cargo.
Exterior.
Extrai^ero,
Embarcadero.
Espejo.
Estreoho.
Elemento.
Gobemador.
Grado.
To 0(»moiaBioDy to ocder, to ^ve
charge.
To exclaim.
To except.
To endeavor, to make effort,
TopresBu
To BUflpect.
Todelfl^.
Extra.
Extra.
Empero.
Bat
Ellptico.
Elliptical.
Agrio.
Sour.
Estrecho.
Close, narrow.
Predso.
Essential, indispensable, predse.
Elocaente.
Eloquent.
Tonto.
Foolish, stupid.
Trayieso.
Mischieyous.
Entr&mbos.
Both.
Entretanto.
In the mean time. *
Excepto.
Except
Difficulty.
Boad, way.
Astronomer.
Cholera.
Comet.
Chest. '
Drawer, box.
Caprice.
Neck.
Cargo, charge.
Exterior, outside.
Foreigner.
Landing.
Mrror, looking-
glass.
Strait
Element
Qovemor.
Grade, degree.
Casaca.
Colocacion.
Civilizacion.
C61era.
Corte.
Cometa.
Cita.
Charla.
Claridad.
Compafiia.
C^a.
Cartilla.
Calentura.
Cafiualidad.
Cantidad.
Capa.
Cara.
Coat, dress-coat
Situation.
Ciyilization.
Anger.
Court
Site.
Appointment
Chat
Clearness.
Company.
Box, case, cash
(comm&reial).
Primer.
Fever.
Chance.
Quantity.
Qoak.
Face.
LBSSOK LX.
825
Homo.
Oven.
Oarga.
Charge (of a gun,
Luto.
Moarning. •
Ac).
Litro.
Litre*
Ouchara.
Spoon.
Matem&tico.
Mathematicifln.
Culpa.
Fault, blame.
Tond.
Cask.
Oriatura.
Oreature, infant
T6nii6in6faro.
Thermometer.
Ck>sta.
Cost, coast
Ferro-oarriL
Railroad.
Disculpa.
Apology.
Fruto.
Fmit (result).
Eetacion.
Season.
Fondo.
Bottom.
Existencia.
Existence.
Fl^do.
Fluid.
Fragata.
Frigate.
M^iscara.
Mask.
Tontera.
Foolish action.
Preteofflon.
Fretenmon,
daim.
Yerba.
Grass.
00HP02
3inON.
Hoy entra la primavera.
Mafiana entra d mes de Octabre.
Entra en d niimero de los sables.
Eiitr6 k reinar k los quince afios.
Este tond hace den litres.
No le bago tan tonto.
To le hada mas rico.
Has per yemr.
Hace de gobeniador.
Esa pobre muchacfaa e8t& hadendo de
madre k bus hennanos.
A eso voy.
Yoy de paseo.
Yan de m4scara.
Ya de luto.
Le va en die la yida.
Yengo en ello.
i Cu4nto me lleva Y. por esto ?
Estos dos amlgos se Uevan muy bien.
No nos Ilevamos blen.
Este camino Uevafr Madrid.
Le Uevo dos afios y medio.
Me Uerd diasco.
Spring commences to-day.
The month of October commences to-
moirow.
He is of the number of the learned.
He b^an to rdgn at fifteen years of age.
This cask holds 100 litres.
I do not take him for such a fool.
I took him to be richer.
Try to come.
He is acdng as govemor.
That poor girl is acting the part of a
mother to her brothers and sisters.
That is the point X am coming to.
I am going for pleasure.
They are going in masks.
He is in mourning.
His life is at stake.
I agree to that
How much will you charge me for this^
These two fiiends agree very wdl to-
gether.
Wc do not agree well together.
This road leads to Madrid.
I am two years and a half older than he.
I was disappointed.
• Equal to 8.118 Amerloan ^tSi
826
LX880V LX.
Umi
4UfriHceM.
Se hiso i la Tda.
llanda que no6 tnugan el dmneno.
Hari que nos lo tnigan.
i Haoe Y. tef&ir sa vestido de axal ?
NOy selior, lo he mandado tefiir de yerde.
Saldri baen matem&Uco.
8ali6 mny traTieeo.
Ta he salido de todoe mis gnnos.
He aatid una buena colocadon.
Este negodo me ha eaJido bien.
Le 8ali6 mal sa empreea.
Este nifio ha salido k sa padre.
Sali6 de la regla.
Pronto 8aldr6 de hyo de Emilia.
Esta capa me sale en dncucnta pesoa
Se 8ali6 con su pretension.
Siire al rey.
No sirve para nada.
Sirvase Y. admitir mis discolpas.
il tarda mncho en decidir.
iGu&nto tarda enresponderl
I Adios I Yolveri 4 ver 4 Y., y le T<d-
Ter6 4 hablar de esa
Este Tino se Tuelre agrio.
Se Tolver4 baeno con el tiempo.
Este melon sabe 4 melocotoxL
Este Tino huele 4 vinagre.
D. Jnanhace un gran papel en la corte.
Napoleon III hace un gran papel en la
polftica del mundo.
He wem a eoiti inade in ihe
He set sail
Order the breaUut to be aenred i^
I shall have it bron^t to us.
Are yon getting yoor dress dyed bine?
No, sir, I have ordered it to be djed
green.
He shall torn oat (to be) agood maiiie-
matician.
He (or she— the cldld) turned oat r&y
naughty.
I have got rid of sU my grain.
A good situation tunied up for me.
This business has turned out weD fiirme.
His undertaUng turned out badly.
This child resembles his fiUher.
He departed from the rule.
I shall soon be of age.
This cloak cost me fifty doIlax&
He obtained what he desired.
He serres the king.
It is good for nothing.
Be good enough to accept my apology.
He is slow in deciding.
How long he is in answering !
Good-by I 1 shall see you agun, and
talk more to you on the subject
This wine is turning sour.
It will become good again in time.
This jnelon has the taste of a peach.
This wfaie smeDs of vmegar.
John makes a great noise at court
Napoleon IIL plays a great part m the
politics of the world.
EXPLANATION.
276, lo tbe Composition of this lesson we give the princi-
pal idioms with the verbs enirar^ to go (or come) in ; hacer, to
do, to make; tr, to go; Uevar^ to take, to charge; mandar,
Tictcer^ in the sense of to order, to cause to be done ; oler (f, to
to smell of; and 9aber d^ to taste of; «a2tr, wrvir^ tardar and
volver.
LESSON LZ. 327
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^OnAndo entra la primayera? Debo oonfesar franoamente que no
86 el dia preciso en que entra y sale cada estaoion.
2. £nt6noe8 V. no entra en el n^mero de los sabioa, pnesto qne no
■eabe cailndo estamos en inviemo y cnando en verano.— Poco d poco,
sellor Don Pedro, eso seria hacerme entrar en el ntunero de los idiotas.
3. iPnes no acaba Y. de decirlof To aoabo de decir qne no sd el
dia preciso en que entra cada estadon ; pero cnando veo crecer la yerba
y las bojas de los drboles, y abrirse las flores, sospecho qne estamos en la
primayera.
4. I Hal V. sospechal Yamos, ya es algo.-~Si, settor, y del mismo
modo, cnando yeo el term6nietro en la sombra, qne maroa OS"", creo
adiyinar que estoy, una de dos, 6 eyi nn homo 6 en Nueya York en la
estaoion del verano.
6. Yamos, yo le hacia 4 Y. mas ignorante de lo qne en efecto es;
^y c6mo adiyina Y., 6 sospecha, que se encnentra Y. en el otofio?
Cnando los melocotones se acaban y las hojas caen.
6. {Bienl bicnl ^y el inyierno? Cnando por la mafiana no puedo
layarme por hallar que se ha helado el agua en la palangana.
7. Ya yeo que es Y. nn sabio perfecto. Yeamos en historia i& qu6
edad entr6 4reinar el Bey Pepino? — i Coital Senor Don Pedro I es
mas facil oriticar que qjecutar, y mas f4cil hacer pregnntas qne respon-
derlas, y sino resp6ndame Y. que la echa de sabio.
8. I Cndntos litros hace ese tonel ? ] Hombre ! yo i qn6 he de entender
demedir toneles?
9. Pnes cambiar6 de materia, iqnidn haoe de gobemador en Manila?
I Y 4 ini qu6 me importa I
10. I Yayal ese es un bnen modo de salir del atolladero. — ^No, sefior, sir-
yase Y. recibir mis disculpas, tengo qne irme ahora, pero yolyer6 4 yer 4
v., y yolyerdmos 4 tratar de esa materia. Adios, sefiores.
11. jQn6 le pareoe 4 Y., Don Enrique, de ese caballero? Me parece
que este j6yen saldr4 bnen matem4tico, porque ha salido en todo 4 sn
padre.
12. {Sabe Y. si sali6 bien 6 mal de sn empresa? Es nn negodo que
le ha salido mny bien.
IS. £ Se Ueya bien Luisa con sus hermanos ? Si, sefior, y annqne no les
Oeya mas de tres 6 cuatro afios, les sirye de madre.
14. |Cn4nto le cuesta 4 Y. esa capa? Me sale en nnos dncnenta
pesos.
15. |Cn4nto tardar4 la fragata en haoerae 4 la yela? No sd, creo que
el capitan es hombre que tarda en deddirse.
428 LBB60V LZ.
16. |De qa6 color haoe Y. tefiir sa vestido? Lo mand^ t^lir de
amiurillo.
17. Don Mannelf maade Y. que no8 saban el almnerzo. — Hai^ qne nos
lo traigaiL
EXERCISE.
. 1. When does Spring commence? It commences in Msrch and ends
in Maj.
2. Has yonr yonng fiiend passed his examination yet? The exami-
nations have not taken place; bnt when they do, he will prove to be the
best Spanish scholar in the country.
8. In what month does the cold weather generally commence in the
North of Spain ? Winter nsnally sets in abont the middle of November.
4. How much does this cask hold? It holds from 100 to 12Q Gtrea.
5. How soon do you set out for Europe f As soon as the fine weather
tets in.
6. Are you going on business, or for pleasure f For pleasure only.
7. How are they going to the ball ? They are going in masks.
8. How much did your tailor charge you for that coat? It cost mo
forty-five doUars.
9. What age do you take my cousin to be ? I would take him to be
about the same age as his friend.
10. You had better guess again. I give it up.
11. How old is he, then ? He is two years and four months older than
his friend.
12. Dp you know whether the pianist's brother succeeded m obtaining
the position he applied for? He did not; but an excellent situation
turned up for him a short time after.
Id. How long will you take to dye this dress for me ? About a weeL
14. What color do you wish it to be dyed ? I wish to have it dyed
blue.
15. Do you think this boy will turn out to 1)0 as good a musician as
his father ? I have not the least doubt about it, for he resembles him in
every respect (en todo),
16. Be good enough to accept my apology for not having come yester-
day as I had promised. Certainly, sir; I know very well that you have
a great deal of business to attend to.
17. Who is Mr. Terrero in mourning for? For his unde, who ^ed
about a year ago in Manila.
LSBSOlf LXI.
829
LESSON LXI.
Felicitar*
Rar.
Ignorar.
Lastimar.
Improvisar.
Inqnieiar.
Intentar.
Interrogar.
Invertir.
Interesar.
Invitar.
Imprimir.
Obligar.
Behasar.
Lboijear.
Ueyar.
De Zeca en Meca.
Aciegas.
A gatas.
£n el Interin.
To feUcitatOy to congratulate.
Totrost
To be ignorant o^ unaware oil
To hurt, to wound.
To improvise, to do (any thing)
off-hand.
To make nneasy, to cause anjdetj.
To attempt, to intend.
To interrogate, to question.
To invert, to invest
To interest, to be of interest
To invite.
To print
To force, to oblige.
To refuse.
To flatter.
To carry, to take^ to charge.
Descuidado.
Careless.
Final.
Final.
Ignorante.
Ignorant
ImpersonaL
Impersonal.
Increible.
Incredible.
Indefinido.
Indefinite.
Inexplicable.
Inexplicable.
Ingenioso.
Ingenious.
Inmediato.
Immediate, close by, next
Inquieto.
Uneasy, restless.
Justo.
Just, right
ITllamo.
Last
lisoi^ero.
Flattering.
Espedero.
Grocer.
Loco.
Mad.
Lento.
Slow.
Solemne.
Solenm, cruel.
To and fro.
With one's eyes shut
On all fours.
In the mean time.
830
LXSBOV LZI.
Ampo dela Die- WhitenetB of
Anchuras {f.pt\ Ease.
ve.
snow.
Cuba.
Cask, toper.
AflQO.
Am.
dnmkmrd.
Deecnido.
Carelessness.
Cara.
Face.
Haeso.
Bone.
Cartilla.
Primer.
Golpe.
Blow, stroke.
Calabaza.
Pumpkin, refbsaL
Dare« y tomares. Digpate.
Imaginacion.
Imagiuadon.
Indioe.
Index.
Intencion.
Intention.
Ingenio.
Genins.
Interrogacion,
Intenx>gati(HU
Iiuecto.
Insect
Invernon.
Inversion.
Instinto.
Instinct
Justida.
Justice.
Instromento.
Instroment
Llave.
Key.
. Question, note of
Uuvia.
Rain.
interrogation.
Dsta.
List
Italiano.
Italian.
Lisoi^a.
Flattery.
Arcoiris.
Rainbow.
Moon.
Galicismo.
Gallioism.
Lur.
Light
Hierro.
Iron.
latitud.
Latitude.
Juego.
Plaj.
Longitud.
Lon^tnde.
Looo.
Madman.
Legua.
League.
Lugar.
Place.
Letra.
Letter.
Latin.
Latin.
limosna.
Alms.
Sonido,
Son.
Sound.
limpieza.
LSnea.
Cleamiees.
line.
Pico.
Beak.
Levita.
Frock-coat
Levita.
Levite.
Rama.
Branch.
Uso.
Use, custom.
T^a.
Tile.
Objeto.
Object
Ocasion.
Occatton.
Oido.
Ear, hearing.
YergHenza.
Shame.
Olfkto.
SmelL
COMPOS
HTION.
Anitftardar.
AtUtest
A media palabn.
At the slightest Unt
A medida de sub (
leaeoB.
According fb one^fl
wishes.
A 808 anchunifl.
At one's ease.
Al descuido j ood
cddada
Stttdiottsly careless.
Abrirelojp.
To be upon the alert
AM Be las haya.
Let hhn look to that
Andar & ctegas.
l!o grope in the dark.
Andar k gatas.
To creep on all fouis.
A todo coirer.
With all speed.
LESSON LZI.
331
"Vaya V. con Dios.
£1 va de capa caida.
£1 va de Zeca en Meca.
Ir de puntillas.
Andftr en dares y tomares.
Andarse por las ramas.
De tejaa abajo.
Ajsir la ocasion por los cabellos.
Sailar al son que se toca.
Beber los ures or los vientos.
Beber como una caba.
Blanco como el ampo de la mere.
Bocado sin hueso.
Burla burlando.
Buscar cinco pids al gato.
No caber de gozo.
No caber en si
No cabe en 6L
Caer de su asno.
Ca^rsele & uno la can de Yerg&enza.
Callar el pico.
. Ghanzas aparte.
Con mO amorea.
Con su pan se lo coma.
Conque, hasta la vista.
Cosa que no e8t& en la cartilla.
Dar & alguno con las puertas en la cara.
Dar & kiz.
Dar por supnesto, or por sentado.
Dar chasco.
Dar el si.
Dar golpe una cosa.
Dar caJabazBS.
No se le da nada.
Go in peace.
He is crest-fallenu
He goes roying about, to and fra
To go on tiptoe.
To quarrel
Not to come to the point
Humanly speaking.
To take time by the forelock.
To go with the stream.
To desire anxiously.
To drink like a fish.
White as the driren snow.
An employment without labor ; a dne-
cure.
Between joke and earnest
To pick a quarrel
To be oveijoyed.
To be bursting with pride.
He is not capable of such a thing.
To acknowlecige one's fault
To blush with shame.
To hold one's tongue.
Jesting aside.
Most willingly.
That is his own business.
I hope we may soon meet again.
Bomething out of the common way.
To shut the door in one's face.
To publish ; .to give birth to.
To take for granted.
To disappoint
To ooDseDt
To strike one with admiration, or as-
tonishment (said of things).
To giro the mitteu.
He cares nothing about it
CONVEBSATION AND VERSION.
1. jLe salen d Y. las cosas k medida de sua deseos? Ohanzas aparte,
Don chian, Y. sabe bien que de tejas abcgo eso nanca sncede.
2. Si, pero como Y. baila al son qne se toca y sabe asir la ooadon por
los cabeHos, siempre est4 k sua anohnras y tiene siempre algan bocado
sin hneso. — ^Amigo, caiga Y. de sn asno y confiese de. bnena f6 qne si
\
832 LB880N LXl.
anda de oapa oaida, es porque va siempre de Zeoa en Heca, jr porqae
bebe mas qne nna caba.
8. Adios, Don Pedro, me voy, porqne no qpieio buscar oinco pies tl
gato. — ^Vaja Y. con IMos, Don Joan.
4. Don Pedro, me parece qne Y . ba dado oon la pnerta €3i la cara i
Don Juan. — No, sefior, Don Enrique, & otro se le oaeria la cars de rer-
gnenza, pero & ^1 no se le da nada, j prouto lo volvedl Y. & ver por ack
6. Ent6nce8 61 no entiende 4 media palabra. — ^A mas tardar lo Te»
Y. aqui otra vez dentro de media bora.
6. El pobre bombre anda & ciegas, y n no abro el ojo, ird 4 parar a
nn bospital. — Con su pan se lo coma, y all4 se las baya; yo lo siento so-
lamente por su nifia, que es una senorita perfecta.
7. Me ban dicbo que Y. queria casarse oon ella, ^es yerdad, Don En-
rique? — Si, sefior, y lo bubien^becbo con mil amores, porque ademis de
ser muy amable 6 instruida, es muy bonita, tiene ojos negros may h^-
mosos y estan blanca oomo el ampo de la nieve.
8. Pues 4porqu6 no se caa6 Y. con elk? Por una peqaefia difi-
cultad.
9. Quiz4 Y^se andaria por las ramas y no sabria asdr la ocasion por
los cabellos. — ^No, sefior, nada de eso, ^tes al contrario yo lo daba todo
por supuesto, porque Y. sabe que soy rico, y crei que la nifia me daria
el si ein baoerse de rogar.
10. (Pues qu^ no se lo di6 ? No, sefior, no me di6 el si, pero me di6
oalabazas.
11. iMiren la rapazuelal ^y Y. qu6 bi7x>? Yo que bebia los vientos
por ella, y creia que sus oalabazas eran cosa que no estaban en la cartilla,
recurri & su padre, creyendo que 61 no me negaria la mano de su bga.
12. ^T bien y qu6? Que me lley6 un solemne cbasco, el padre me
rebus6 la mano de su bya ni mas ni m^nos que ella lo babia becbo.
18. I Pero qu6 razon le di6 & Y. para eUo? Me d^jo que su bya, aun-
que pobre, era b^a de un caballero y que ni eDa querria ni 41 la obligaria
jam^s & casarse con un espedero comun 6 ignorante ; que el dinero era
una gran cosa, pero que no lo compraba todo.
14. 2 Y Y. qu6 d^o? To, por no andar en dares y tomares y dimes
y dirties, me call6 el pico y sali de su casa 4 todo correr.
EXERCISE.
1, Would you not be more likely to obtain wbat yon wish, if you
came to the point at once? Perhaps I would ; but the matter is an im-
portant one, and I conddered it necessary to enter into some explanation
relative to it.
LSSSOK LZI. 333
2. Do yon think lie would nnderstand me? Of course he would, at
the slightest hint.
8. How did jonr consin Oharles sncceed in that affidr f Eyeiy thing
tnmed out according to his wishes.
4. How soon do yon snppose this book will be published? I hope it
will be published in a very short time; I know they are working at it
with all possible speed.
6. Have you ever seen "a more active man than that merchant?
ITever; and I have never seen a less active man than his brother, he
always goes with the stream, and troubles himself about nothing.
6. Ought you not to have shown that letter to your brother? I
would have done so, of course, but I took for granted that he had already
heard the news.
7. You had better tell your friend to be upon the alert, and not get
into a quarrel with that man. That is his own business, let him look to
it himself.
8. Is it possible that he could be capable of such an action? Tes,
but the worst of all is, that he is not ashamed to acknowledge it to every
one he meets.
9. When is Peter to be ^married? I cannot say certainly; but I
suppose in about a month at latest.
10. I don^t know any one who has a better position than your uncle :
plenty of money and scarcely any thing to do. That is a fact, his situ-
ation is a real sinecure.
11. What has occurred to that gentleman ? he looks quite crest-fallen.
Do not be astonished at that ; he has been unfortunate in business, and
has lost almost all he possessed in the world.
12. Are you trying to pick a quarrel with me? No, I assure you,
jesting aside, that the matter stands exactly as I say.
18. How was he received by the lady's &ther ? He was not received
at aU, they shut the door in his face.
14. If you desire so anxiously to see him, why do you not go to his
house? I cannot make up my mind (decidirme) to do that; you know
he is bursting with pride, and he would very probably refuse to receive me.
15. Well, I hope we may soon meet again ; present my respects to
your family. With the greatest pleasure. — ^Please not to forget the letter.
16. That I care nothing about ; all I desire to know is whether he will
be here in time or not. I think you may rely on his being punctual.
17. I have been told that your brother was about to be married to
Miss Ramirez ; is it true ? I really cannot say how the matter will turn
out ; so far every thing seems to go on according to the desire of both
parties.
834
LXSBOK LXII.
LESSON LXII.
Aplioar.
Oebane.
Eohar & perder.
Errar.
Oconir.
Mannunir.
Madragar.
Medir.
Montar.
Madar.
Naoer.
Sazonar.
Rennirse.
Modlfioar.
To apply.
To feed, to gloat
TospoiL
To err, to misa.
Toooonr.
To murmur, to gromble.
To rise earlj.
To measoie.
To mount, to amount.
To oihange, to move.
To be bom, to spring op, to pro-
ceed.
To season, to ripen.
To miite, to collect togetlitf, to
assemble.
To modify.
Despreyenido.
Unawares, unprepared.
Intachable.
Unimpeachable, unquestaonable.
Maldito.
Perverse, confounded.
M&y^acala,
Capital (letter).
Small (letter).
Numeral
Numeral
Noble.
Noble.
Nominatiyo.
Nominative.
Neutro.
Neuter.
Masculino.
Objetivo.
Objective.
Qnieto.
Quiet^ at rest
Gumpleafios.
Menoscabo.
Pique.
Rayo.
Socio.
Sabor.
Menudo. ^
Birtbday.
Detriment, less-
ening.
Point, verge.
Thunderbolt
Associate, partner.
Taste, savor.
Change, small
change.
Apariencia.
Bravata.
Botica.
Fiesta.
Centella.
Siesta.
Suerte.
Appearance.
Bravado.
Drug store.
Feast, holiday.
Spark, flash.*
Siesta (aftenioon
nap).
Luck, fortune,
chance.
LS880K I»XII.
335
Meridiano.
Meridian.
Mnrmnracion.
Mmmnnngs.
MetaL
ICetaL
MaHcia.
Malice.
Miembro.
Member.
Mente.
Mind.
MmeraL
Mineral.
Mnestra.
Sample, sgn.
Momento.
Moment.
Manera.
Manner.
Mozo.
Yonth, waiter.
Manteca,^man
-Batter.
Macho.
Male.
tequilla.
"NTaoBtro.
Master, teacher.
Medida.
Measure.
Mannscrito.
Ollapodrida.
Sort of mixed
Sea.
dish.
Olor,
Smell, odor.
Ostra.
Oyster.
Olivar.
Olive gronnd.
Kegacion.
Negation.
Osdon. (See
Oyster.
Mar.
Sea.
Ogtra.)
Negatiya.
Negative.
Palo.
Wood, stick.
Nota.
Note.
Polvo.
Dust, powder.
Zaga.
Rear-guard.
Banc.
Cloth.
Parabien.
Felioitation, con-
•
gratnlaticm.
OOMPO
smoN.
De buenas k primeras.
Without oeremonj
r.
De bnena f6.
With sinoerity.
DemalafS.
DeceitfiiUy.
Deintento.
Onpnrpose.
Deoidas.
By hearsay.
. Dedr por decir.
To talk for the sake of talking.
Dcjar & ono oolgado.
To frustrate one's
hopes.
D^ar &"iiiio ea la ealle.
To strip one of lus alL
D^ar atraa loa Tientos.
To go quicker Ihan the whid.
Dejar correr.
To ^0 with the world.
Dejar el campo libie.
To yield to one's <
[x>mpetitor8.
D^ar en bianco.
To leave blank.
B^arae algnna cosa en el tbtero.
To forget to say something.
Bia de cmnpleafioi
).
Birthday.
Saber algo de buena tinta.
To know any thing on good authority.
Dedlaendia.
From day to day.
De nn dia para otro.
From one day to another.
De hoy en ocho dias.
This day week.
TTn dia si 7 otro no.
Every other day.
Hoy dia.
Now-«4ay8.
Diefaoybedio.
No sooner said than done.
836
LB880H X.XII.
Donntr & piama sndto.
Bonnir la aiwta.
Ecliar & perder t|ga
Ediar bmTilM.
Ediar imyos y oenteUai.
Ediar la culpa 4 algima
Echar siiertes.
EmpeSarse en haoer a^
Empefiane por algimo.
En on abrir 7 oerrar de cjoa.
Enceadene en c61enL
Errardtiro.
Eire i|ii6 efTQ.
Escannentar en cabeia agena.
Estar & pique de perderaeu
Estardecaaa.
Estar de fiesta.
Estar en aseuas.
Estar en lo qne se dice.
Estar & BUS anchuras.
Estar sobre sL
Estar desprevenido.
Estar mano sobre mana
i EstAs en tus dnoo sentidos f
To sfeq> al one^ <
To take an afteraoon Dap.
To spoil aiv thing.
To brag, to boasL
To be forionSi enraged.
To throw the blame on any one.
To cast lots.
To insist upotk doing an j *htwg ,
To interest one's self for any odcl
In the twinkling of an eje, in a tnoe:
To flj into a passion.
To miss one's aim.
Obstinately.
To take warning by others* uusf ot iu i K a,
To be within an ace of being lost
To be in disbajwlte.
To be merry.
To be upon thons. *
To oomprehend.what is sftid.
To be at one's ease.
To be on one's goard.
To be oflT one's guard.
To be idle. ^
Are you. hi your senses t
OONVEBSATION^ AND VERSION.
1. Sefiores, dcjen Yds. el campo Hbre, qne aqui viene Don Pepito
echando bravatas j rayoa y oentellas. — ^Bien venido, Don Pepito^ ^qpk
trae Y. de nnevo, qne pareoe estar faera de si?
2. No, sefior, yo estoy en mis cinco sentidos, pero hay gentes de mala
f& qne hablan por hBblar y se ocapan de oriticar al pr6jimo. — lY eao i
qn6 viene?
8. Yo no lo digo por Y., Don Enriqne, pero Y. sabe que hay mnchos
desocopados que se vienen & sn botioa de Y. y oritican & todo elmnnda —
I Yamos, vamos I Don Pepito, qne i Y. tambien le gnsta on poqnito la
mnnnnraaoii.
4. CSertamente, porqne sino |qn6 seria de la oonyeraaoion sin nn po-
qnito de critica qne la sazone y le d6 interns ? Mny bien, pero entdnoes
no eche Y. la culpa & nadie de hacer lo mismo qne Y. haoe.
6. Si, pero yo hablo sin malicia, de bnena ^ y digo lo qne me. oonrre
por decirlo, nada mas.— Afd pneden declr los demka,
6. Si, pero yo no soy como Don O&rloa, qne viene aqni de dia en dia,
LB8S0N LXII. 837
Y de la inafiana d la tarde hablando mas que nn saoamnelas y sin dejar d
nadie hneso sano. — 81, pnes apliqnese Y. el onento.
7. No, sefior, yo no soj ni tan hablador ni tan mnrmnrador como
nin^no de los que se reonen aqni, y si no, observo Y. un poqnito 4 cada
nno de ellos, D. Gronzalo, por ejempio, ^ha venidoJioy ? No, sefior, no
ba venido, ni vendrd, porqne es el dia de su compleaflos y lo celebra con sa ,
f ftiniUft en el oampo, por consiguiente pnede Y. cebarse en ^ 4 sn sabor.
8. D. Gonzalo es hombre de bnenos sentimientos y hombre honrado,
no haya miedo que yo diga nada en menoscabo sayo, pero tiene un
moldito geniq qne le hace ecbar 4 perder toda conversacion.
9. Pnes yo no babia observado eso. — \ C6nio hombre I pnes si viene
aquf nn dia si y otro no, k criticar k los qne se rennen en la botica de la
esquina, y los dias qne no viene aqni va & la botica de la esquina 4 criti-
camos 4 nosotros. "
10. jY qn6 es lo qne le hace echar 4 perder las conversaciones como
decia Y. pocos minntos h4 ? Que en un abrir y cerrar de ojos se en-
ciende en c6Iera.
11. Bien, por D. Gonzalo, jy nnestro vecino, D. Alberto, ese si que es
iatachable,.no le parece 4 Y. ? { Ho I en efecto es un excelente hombre,
14stima que errase el tiro.
12. jQu6 quiere Y. decir con eso de errar el tiro? Hablo con respecto
4 BOS negocios.
18. Y bien, 4 qu6 le sucedi6 ? Que escogi6 malos socios, y le han de-
jado en la calle.
14. Pero eso no pnede ser, Don Alberto goza de muy buena reputa-
don, Y. habla de oidas. — ^No, sefior, que lo s6 de buena tinta, y hoy dia
est4 4 pique de perderse.
16. Pnes 61 parece dormir 4 pierna suelta. — ^Est4 obligado 4 hacerlo asi
por gnardar las apariencias.
16. i No se ha dejado Y. algo en el tintero ? Sin duda que me he de-
jado, pero es tarde y voy 4 dormir la siesta.
EXERCISE.
1. Is the custom of taking an afternoon nap as common in Spain
now-a-days as in former times ? It is quite as common now-a-days as it
ever was, not only in Spain, but in almost every country of Europe.
2. Are yon perfectiy certain that he acted with sincerity in that mat-
ter f I am quite sure, as I know it on good authority.
8. Who told yon that young man had acted deceitfully toward your
cousin? I do not care to say much in the matter, especially as all I
know respecting it I only know by hearsay.
15
338
LS8BON LXIII.
4. Can yon tell me how that merohant^s enterprise turned out t Verj
badly; for shortly after he had engaged in it, he heard <rf bis brother- s
misfortune, which frustrated all his hopes.
5. Did Alexander manage to pay his debts after all? No, be did not;
and although his intentions were strictly honorable, his creditors (aeree-
dare$) would wait no longer, and they stripped him of all he poaaessed in
the world.
6. What date do you wish me to put here f Just leave a blank, and
Charles will put in the dote before he sends the letter off.
7. When do you think they will be able to give me some of the
papers? Probably by this day week.
8. What did he say when he saw how the tailor had qK)]led his coat ?
Fortunately for the latter he was in a merry mood, and did not fly into a
passion as he usually does when any thing occurs to displease him.
9. Are you in your senses, my dear friend? are you not aware that
such a thing is impossible?
10. Did he shut the door on purpose ? Tes, but he sent liis servant to
take us into another room, for he was in dishabille, and did not wish to
be seen until he had dressed.
11. How often do you go to dine at your unde^s? I generaBy go
every other day.
12. Have your friends returned yet from the country ? No, they have
been putting it off from day to day for some time, and I shall not be in
the least astonished if they do not return before November.
18. Why did you not bring your sister with you ? I did all I iK>s»bly
could to persuade her to come, but she insisted upon staying at home.
14. How did they decide on who should go first? They cast lots for iL
LESSON LXIII.
Retirar.
Pegar.
Pesoar.
Posponer.
Preceder.
Promoter.
Razonar.
Resfriarse.
Regalar.
To retire, to withdraw.
To stick, to adhere, to beat.
To fish.
To place after.
To precede.
To promise.
To reason.
To take cold.
To regale, to present
LESSON LXIII.
d39
Xnfrente. )
Frente por frente. f
De hito en Lito.
De grado.
Por fas 6 por nefas.
In front, opposite.
Fixedly, witli open eyes.
By £Edr means.
Justly or nnjustly.
1 Cascaras I
Dear me I OhI
Afortnnado.
Fortraiate.
Ageno.
Foreign, belonging to others.
Formal.
Formal, steady, respeotable.
Pasivo.
Passive.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Personal
Personal.
Poseavo.
Possessive.
Potencial.
Potential
Precise.^
Precise, necessary, obligatory.
I^reliminar.
Preliminary.
Pret^rito.
Preterit.
PontnaL
Partitivo.
Partitive.
Radical
Badical
Raro.
Hare, cmions.
Redproco.
Reciprocal.
Reflexivo.
Reflective.
Rnbio.
Fair (of the hair and complexion).
Rnin.
Mean.
Alarde.
Bnlto.
Ganso.
Bledo.
IMente.
Desafio.
Fspadaohin.
Estribo.
Mequetrefe.
Pasi^e.
Pedazo.
Perro.
Plazo..
Plomo
Boast.
Bulk, bundle.
Goose.
Straw.
Tooth.
Challenge, duel.
Bully.
Stirrup.
Trifling fellow,
meddler.
Passage.
Piece.
Dog.
Term,
Lead.
Bulla.
Baza.
ITudspeda.
Puntuacion.
Puntualidad.
Paciencia.
Paja.
Polvora.
Perseverancia.
Porcion.
Prenda.
Pronunciacion.
Noise, uproar.
Trick (card-play-
ing).
Hostess.
PunctuatioQ.
Punctuality.
Patience.
Straw.
Gunpowder.
Perseverance.
Portion, number.
Good quality,
jewel.
Pronunciation.
340
LB880N LXIII.
PorquA.
Reason whj.
Propiedad.
Propriety, prop-
Pdblioo.
PubUc.
erty.
Prmcipla
Principle, beg^-
Polgada.
Inch.
ning.
Raiz.
Root
Rasgo.
Trait
Rebanada.
SUce.
Recado.
Message, errand.
Reforma.
Recibo.
Receipt
tion.
Rector.
Rector, director.
RegbL
Rnle.
Refran.
Proverb.
Reina.
Queen.
Rel&mpago.
Flash of light-
Repeticion.
Repetition, re-
ning.
hearsaL
Relojero.
Watchmaker.
Resolncion.
Resolution.
Regalo.
Present
Rosa.
Rose.
Reposo.
Rest, repose.
Rutina.
Routine.
ResfHado.
Cold.
Soma.
SUHL
ReamatiHino.
Rheumatism.
Satileza.
8ubtilt J, finene^
Rev^s.
Wrong side, back.
Salida.
Departure.
Rincou.
Corner.
Silaba.
Syllable.
Rolsellor.
Nightingale.
Soledad.
Solitude.
Snstancia.
Substance.
Subida.
Rising ground,
going up.
Suegra.
Mother-in-law.
OOMPO
SITION.
Faltar & su pal&bra.
Guardarse de alguna cosa.
Hablor k bulla
Hablar & tontas y & locaa.
Hablar al aire.
Hablar al oido.
HablarUahna.
Hablar entre dientes.
Hablar per boca de ganso.
Hacer & one perder los estribos.
Haoer de las suyas.
Hacer alarde de.
Hacer la cuenta sin la hu^speda.
Hacer case de.
Haberla {or hab^rselas) con alguno.
Irse de la memoria.
Irsele k uno la cabeza.
To break one's word.
To take care not to do a thing (not to
attempt to do a thing).
To speak at randoixL
To speak without rhyme w reason.
To talk ragnely.
To whisper into one's ear.
To speak one's mind.
To mutter.
To echo what another has said.
To make one lose his temper.
To show off one's triclu.
To boast of.
To reckon without the host
To pay attention (or respect) to.
To dispute (or contend) with any od&
To escape one's memory.
To lose one's reason.
LB880N LZIII.
841
Tan cien dnros & que es derto.
Llevar k maL
Hal de su grado.
Mai que le pese.
Manos & la obra.
Meter bulla.
Meterse & caballero.
Meterse k sabio.
Meterse con alguna
Meterse en camisa de once yara&
Meterse en todo.
Meterse en vidas agenas.
Mlrar de hito en hito.
Mostrar las suelas de los zapatos.
Kacer de pi6B.
Nada se me da de ello.
No dejar meter baza.
No cabe mas.
No estar para fiestas.
No le pesa de haber nacido.
No se me da un bledo.
No tener arte ni parte en alguna cosa.
Perder cuidado.
Por ce 6 por be.
Por fas 6 nefiaui.
No llegar& la sangre al no.
I wager a hundred dollars that it is true.
To take cmy thing amiss.
Unwillingly.
In spite of him.
To set about a work.
To make a noise, a bustle.
To assume the gentleman.
To affect learning and knowledge.
To pick a quarrel with any one.
To interfere in other people^s business.
To meddle in every thing.
To dive into other people^s affairs.
To look steadfastly at
To take to one^s heels.
To be bom to good luck.
I care nothing about it.
Not to allow one to slip in a word.
Nothing more can be desired.
To be out of temper.
He has no mean opinion of himselC
I do not care a straw.
To have no hand in any thing.
Not to fear, to make one^s self easy.
Some way or other.
Right or wrong.
There is nothmg to be feared.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. D. Pepito ha fiiltado k sa palabra, 6 |oree Y. qa6 Yendr6 todavla?
I Qa6 ha de yenir I Si 61 habla siempre k tontas j 4 looas.
2. Pues 70 crei qae prometi6 formalmente venir hoy. — ^Don Pepito
no habla ntmca formalmente.
8. (De qn6 manera habla ent6noes? De mnchas, 61 habla al aire,
k bulto, al oido, entre dientea, por booa de ganso; .pero nnnca habla
al alma.
4. Esto hark perder 4 onalqniera los estribos. — ^A esto le Uama 61, ha-
ciendo alarde, hacer de las suyas.
6. Si ; pero 61 se las habrd conmigo, porqne ha hecho la cuenta sin
la hn^speda. — ^D. Ltlis, no haga Y. caso, es un meqnetrefe, n Yds. qnieren
yo ir6 k sa casa 7 le har6 yenir mal de sn grado, 6 mejor dioho, mal que
le pese.
6. No, sefior, no vaya Y., es nn hombre qne se mete en todo. — T en
eso tiene Y. razon, porqne 61 se mete con todo el mmido.
342 LBSSON LXIII.
7. Y hasta se meto & sabio y & cabaUero. — Lo peor es que mete
macha bulla.
8. iVamos, sefiorea, en qTi6 mas se mete el pobre D. Fepito? Se
mete en camisa de once yarais, en vidas agenas, etc^ etc.
9. Pero, sefiores, no olviden Yds. qne si per ce 6 por be, lo Degase 4
saber, D. Pepito, j por fas 6 por nefas habiese nn desaf io, do lo olviden
Yds., Tuelvo & r^etir que Don Pepito es nn gran espadacliiD. 2 Yaja !
pierda Y. cnidado, que no llegar4 la sangre al rio.
10. {Don Pepito espadacliin I O^ficaras I — ^Yan cicn pesos 4 qne a le
miro de hito en hito, mnestra las snelas de los zapatos.
11. Y. no debe Uevarlo 4 mal, annqne Don Pepito sea tan sn amigo;
pero es muj hablador 7 no deja & nadie meter baza. — ^Yo no tengo arte
ni parte en cUo 7 no so me da nn bledo.
12. ^Se acord6 Y. de decir aquello & sn yecino el Sr. Foster? Ho, se-
fior, se me fu6 de la memoria.
13. i Es nn j6yen mn7 afortonado ? Si, sefior, ba nacido de pi6s ; pero
86 qne no le pesa de haber nacido.
14. Y. no debe criticarlo, porqne ahora no estd para fiestas. — ^A mf no
se me da nn bledo de que est^ 6 no de mal hnmor.
16. Hable Y. bago 6 h^bleme Y. al oido, porqne veo al SeDOr Foster
all! en frente 7 Y. debe gnardarse de qae le oiga bablar de ese modo,
porqne lo llevaria 4 mal. — ^Pierda Y. onidado qne no Uegard la sangre al
rio.^
EXERCISE.
1. Does that man alwa78 keep his word? I hare never known blm
to break his word on a single occasion.
2. Peter is yerj sorr7 that Alexander went awa7 without him, and
I do not know what he would have done if John had left him.
8. John took good care not to start at the same time as his elder
brother, for he well knew that he would have been obliged to show him
ever7 thing worth seeing in the cit7.
4. He ver7 often talks for hours together without rhTme or reason,
to the ver7 great anno7ance of those who have to listen to him.
6. Believe me, it is no proof of talent to talk awa7 at random for an
hour at a time, without saying any thing that could be called either new
or agreeable.
6. I cannot support a man who is so ignorant as to come and whisper
something in my ear while I am engaged in conversation with another.
7. iN'ot one of those ideas is his own, he onl7 echoes what he has
heard said b7 oth^%
8. I would advise 70U to pa7 no attention to aD7 thing he tells 700.
LBSSON LXIY.
343
9. Judging bj his manner of speaking, one would say he had lost' his
reason.
10. I will wager fifty dollars that not one word of all you have read
and heard on that score (sobre esa materia) is trae.
. 11. I suppose you haye ab*eady heard of my good fortune ? I have;
and I need not tell you how glad I was to know you had succeeded.
12. Did you hear all the president said ? Every thing; he spoke yery
loud, so that all those that were present might not lose a word. •
13. Although he affects gi'eat learning and knowledge, I have had oc-
casion to find out (discover) that he is a very ignorant man.
14. I know very well that he has no mean opinion of himself; but,
after all, his greatest fault is to dive a little too much into other people^s
affairs.
LESSON LXIV.
Alumbrar.
Soltar.
Suponer.
Situar.
Significar.
Saludar.
Sobrar.
Sonreirse.
Soplar.
Sonrojarse.
Sufnr.
Suplicar.
6uspirar.
Rasgar.
Reb^ar.
Rebanar.
Recitar.
Recomendar.
Referir.
Regular.
Remendar.
Remediar.
To light
To loose, to let go.
To suppose.
To situate.
To signify.
To salute, to bow to.
To remain over, to be too much,
too many.
To smile.
To blow, to prompt
To blush.
To suffer, to bear.
To supplicate, to beseech.
To sigh, to long after.
To tear.
To lower.
To cut in slices.
To recite.
To recommend.
To refer, to teD, to relate.
To regulate.
To mend.
To remedy, to help.
344
LES80K LXIY.
Repasar.
Representor.
Kesolver.
Zafar.
De gorra.
Deperilla.
Gaacos & la gineta.
A raja.
A solas.
Siquiera.
EnBiima.
Santo.
Satil.
SUencioso.
Sordo.
Sustantivo.
Sucio.
Atrevimiento.
Ouerpo.
Inconyeniente.
Esfncrzo.
Descaro.
Fondos (pi).
Matrimonio.
Modismo.
Provecho.
Yugo.
Trapo.
Saber.
Sacaoorchos.
Saldo.
Salto.
Assurance, dar-
ing.
Body.
Objection.
Effort, endeavor.
Barefacedness.
Funds.
Matrimony.
Idiom.
Profit, benefit.
Yoke.
Rag.
Learning, knowl-
edge.
Corkscrew.
Balance.
Leap, jump.
To look over (a leaacm, &^y.
To represent, to lay before.
To resolve.
To disembarrass.
Sponging, at the ezpeiiBe of others.
To the purpose, at the prop^
tune.
On one's high horse.
Within bounds, at baj.
All alone.
Even, only.
In a word, in fine.
Holy, saintly.
Subtil, fine.
Silent.
Deaf.
Substantive.
Dirty, filthy.
Blanca.
Bula.
Flaqueza.
Gorra.
Osihas(/em,ph).
Pieza.
Trastienda.
Tienda.
Tigeras.
Taijeta.
Traza.
Trampa.
Traducdon.
Mite.
Bull (of the Pope).
Weakness.
Cap, lady's bon-
net.
Breeches.
Piece.
Back shop.
Store, shop.
Scissors.
Card (vidting or
business).
^en, appearance.
Trap, cheat.
Translation.
COMPOSITION.
Quedarse en bianco.
Qtiedarse hecho una pieza {or helado).
To be left in the lurch.
To be thunderstruck, to remiun
tonished.
LESSON LZIY.
345
Querer decir.
Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza.
Sacar provecho.
Sacodir el yugo.
Salir &laz.
Salir oon algo.
Salir los colores & la cara.
Saiga lo que saliere.
Salirse con la suya.
Santo J bueno.
Sin mas ac& ni mas all&.
Sin qu4 ni para qn^.
En nombrando al ruin de Roma luego
asoma.
Sobre la martha.
Tan daro como el sol {or oomo el agua).
Tener & m^nos hablar & uno.
Tener & uno & raya.
Tener algo en la punta de la lengua.
Xener buen diente.
Tener bula para todo.
Tener el pi6 en dos zapatos.
Tener los cascos k la gineta.
Tener su alma en su cuerpo.
Tomar el delo con las manos.
Tomar la ocasion por los cabelloi<.
Tomar las (calzas) de YiUadiego.
Yamos claros.
Yenir & m6no8.
Yenif al caso.
Yenir con las manos lavadas.
Venir de perilla.
Yenir una cosa pintada.
Verse n^gro.
Yestirse con veinte y cinco alfileres.
Dicho y hecho.
To mean.
To make a virtue of a necessity.
To turn to account
To shake off the yoke.
To be produced, to be published.
To gain one's end.
To blush.
Come what may.
To have one's own way, to accomplish
an object
Well and good.
Without ifs and ands.
Without rhyme or reason.
Speak of the devil, and his imps ap-
pear.
Off-hand (instantly).
As clear as daylight
Not to deign to speak to one.
To keep one at bay.
To have any thing on the tip of one's
tongue.
To have a good appetite.
To have permission to do what one
likes.
To have two strings to one's bow.
To be hare-brained, to have little judg-
ment
To do what one thinks proper.
To be transported with rapture, to be
enraged.
To profit by the occasion.
To take to one's heels.
Let us understand one another.
To decline in any way.
To come to the point
To wish to ei^oy the fruit of another's
labor. *
To come at the nick of time, or to fit
exactly.
A thing to suit (or fit) exactly.
To be afflicted, embarrassed.
To be dressed in style, to be decked
out
No sooner said than done.
15*
846 LBSSON LZIV.
ViTir de gomu
Yivir & sua uichAS (anohoraB).
Zofaree de alguoa cosa.
To U^e at another's expense.
To live at one's ease.
To get dear (or rid ot) any thiqg.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. (Qa6 qtuere decir quedarse en bianco f Quiere decir lo miano
que qaedarse & la lona de Valencia, esto es, qnedarse sin nada.
2. I T qnedarse hecho nna pieza 6 helado, qn6 qniere dedr f Son
modiamos qne indioan admiracion 6 sorpresa.
8. I Qoiere V. ezplicarme algnnos modismoe espafioles ? Xo tengo
inoonveniente, preg^nteme V. el aignificado de los que no oomprenda V.
— ^Muy bien.
4. Sacar fherzas de flaqneza, | qn^ qniere decir? To creo qne es Imoer
esfherzos ; pero tambien signtfica) hacer de la necesidad yirtod.
6. Sacar provecho, oreo qne no necesita ezplicacion 7 a la ocasion ae
presenta, creo qne sabrd sacarlo. — i Y qn6 me dice V. aoerca de saeadir el
yngo ? Qne aqnellos qne tengan algnn mal yngo que sacndir deben ha-
cerlo Aobre la maroha.
6. Santo 7 bneno, pero V., i no tiene ningnn yngo qne sacndir? No,
sefior, es verdad qne e6to7 bigo el yngo del matrimonio ; pero no deaeo
zafarme de 61, porqne para mi annqne es yngo, es nn yngo santo qne me
ha hecho mn7 feliz 7 bijo el cnal deseo vivir todavia mnchos alios.
7. I No le parece 4 V. qne aqnel hombre vive do gorra ? Si, sefior,
aqni se venia todos los dias con sns manos lavados 7 so nos comia nn coda
8. 4 Y porqn6 no lo ech6 V. de an casa ? ; Asi lo hice ayer, y a V. lo
hnbiera visto I parecia qnorer tomar el ciolo con las manos I
9. I Va7a nn atrevimiento I Al fin me yi obligado 4 amenazarle con
nna silla, y ent6nces tom6 las de Villadiego.
10. Oreo qne dntes era rico, pero ahora ha venido & m6nos. — No, lo qne
es tener, todavia tiene.
11. No hombre, si no tiene sobre qn6 caerse mnerto. — ^Perdone V^ si
V. qniere qne, para practicar en los modismos del verbo tener, le diga a
V. lo qne ese bnen senor tiene, se lo dir6 4 V.
12. Santo y bneno. — ^Pnes ent6nces alld va sin qn6 ni para qa6.
18. Pero hombre, ipara qn6 sacar & la colada los tmpos de ese buen
hombre ? Si eso es tan daro como el sol qne nos alnmbra.
14. Vamos daros, | qniere V. 6 no qne le diga lo qne ese sefior, quo
se viste con veinte y cinco alfileres, tiene ? Pero si no viene al caso.
15. Entonces se aoabar& el qjercicio sin poder introdncir en la pr&ctica
la mitad de los modismos qne tenemos en la leccion. — ] Ah I si, si, tiene
V. mil razones, escncho, | qn6 es lo qne ese bnen sellor tiene ?
LBSSON LXIir. 347
16. En primer Ingar tiene bnen apetito y buen diente. — { Oaspita I qu6
si lo tiene I IJ & quien se lo cnenta Y. ?
17. Tiene siempre algo en la ponta de la lengna y nonca tiene noda^en
el bolsillo.
18. T Begun el descaro* con que obra, parece tener bnla para todo ;
tambien tiene los cascos & la cpneta y con tanto tener oreo que es mas lo
que le falta qne lo que tiene.
19. To no s6 c6mo tenerlo & raya, | no me har& Y. el favor de aconse-
jarle que no venga mas por aqui ? Amigo mio, digaselo Y. mismo, por-
qne yo tengo d m6nos hablar 4 nna persona de sn especie.
20. T sin embargo, yea Y., 61 tiene el pi6 en dos zapatos, ^y qn6 mas
tiene ? '
21. D^jeme Y. pensar, ) ah I si, el pobre sefior tiene todavia otra cosa
mas. — ^Bien, pnes, digala Y., que se acaba el ejercicio.
22. Tiene sn alma en sn cnerpo. Hombre, calle Y., qne aqni viene
41 en persona. — Si, en nombrando al ruin de Boma, Inego asoma.
23. Buenos dias, D. Juan. — T^ngalos Y. muy buenos, D. Periquito,
I qu6 se ofrece ? Yengo 4 pedirle & Y. diez pesos prestados, que me yen-
drian de perilla, ] porque me yeo negro I
24. Hombre pidaselos Y. al Sr. De Y. que estd en fondos, en cuanto&
mi me encuentro sin blanca.
EXEBdSE.
1. I understand your brother was left entirely in the lurch ? Not at
all ; on the contrary, he came. off (turned out) much better than I did.
2. How did he feel when he learned that I had heard of the whole *
matter ? He was thunderstruck, and could not g^ve me any reply.
3. How are you going to manage in such a case as that ? I have only
to make a virtue of necessity, and take the small one.
4. I think there is little danger of his not succeeding ; what do you
think (what appears to you) ? Not the least ; he is very prudent, and
knows how to turn every thing to account.
5. Bo you remember when that article was published? I do not re-
member exactly ; but it appears to me it must have been some time in
last November.
6. You see that is what I told you the other day would take place.
Tos, that is true ; but you seem to have forgotten the condition I men-
tioned to your friend as he was going out.
7. Is Mr. Martinez not going to be here, as he promised ? I am ex-
pecting him, — yfe shaft wait until seven o'clock ; if he comes before that
.time, well and good ; if not^ we shall go on with the bunness of the
evening without him.
348
LESSON LXT.
8. Well, let ns understand each other before going any fartlier. It
seems to me we understand each other perfectly ; the thing is as dear &s
da^ht
9. Oh, Charles 1 I am so glad to see yon ! yon have just come at the
nick of time ; we shall have the pleasure of *yonr company at diimer.
Ton are very kind; bnt really yon mnst excuse me; I have a fiieod
waiting for me.
10. Yon lost your ooatf how did yon come home in the cold withomt
it ? Alexander lent me one of his that fitted me exactly.
11. No sooner said than done ; he took his hat and went out in search
of him, notwithstanding it rained in torrents.
12. Yon may be at ease in your mind on that score ; I shall manage to
get rid of him very soon.
18. I wish yon would come to the point, for up to the present I have
been unable to find out what yon mean.
14. One would have said, from the manner in which he was (eiendolc)
decked out, that he was going to the theatre or to a ball instead of td
the office.
LESSON LXV.
Aventurarse.
Apretar.
Cobrar.
Desafiar.
Escaldar.
Enhebrar.
Enzarzar.
Enfadarse.
Hilar.
Jnntar.
Madmgor.
Prevenir.
Belucir.
Sustentar.
Trasqnilar.
Tapar.
Trampear.
Tragar.
To venture.
To tighten, to urge.
To collect.
To challenge.
To scald.
To thread (a needle), to link.
To sow discord.
To get angry.
To spin.
To join.
To rise early.
To warn, to inform.
To shine.
To sustain.
To shear.
To cover up, to dose up.
To impose upon, to deceive.
To swallow.
LSSBON LXV.
349
Trasnocbar.
Tenninar.
Tolerar.
Tomar.
Tranqoilizar.
Tatear.
To sit up all night.
To terminate.
To tolerate.
To retoTD, to do over again.
To tranquillize, to make any one's
mind easy.
To address any one in the second
person singular, to speak &-
miliarly to.
ExpresiTO.
Expresdye.
Jasto.
Just.
Duro.
Hard.
Necio.
Silly, foolish.
Practico.
Practised, experienced.
Ciego.
BUnd.
Tuerto.
Blind of one eye.
Triguefio.
Dark (of the complexion).
Tin to.
Colored, red.
Tonto.
Foolifth.
Tramposo.
Deceitftd, swindling.
Terminante.
Decided.
Tranquilo.
Tranqnil, quiet
A borbotones.
Bubbling, hurriedly, confusedly.
Palabras mayores.
Offensive words or expressions.
No ser rana.
To be able and expert.
iCarambal
Dear me \ Hah I
Asador.
Oopo.
Entendedor.
Herrero.
Menosprecio.
Hortelano.
Dado.
Proverbio.
Sayo.
Pecho,
Spit (for roasting).
Flake (of snow).
One who under-
stands.
Blacksmith.
Scorn, contempt.
Gardener.
Dye.
Pnoverb.
Sort of loose coat
. or jacket.
Breast.
Cola.
Donza.
Divisa.
Familiaridad.
Miel.
Mona.
Fama.
Moderacion.
Oveja.
Necesidad.
Pareja.
Bana.
Tail.
Dance.
Motto.
Familiarity.
Honey.
Monkey.
Fame, notoriety.
Moderation.
Sheep.
Necessity.
Pair.
Frog.
350
LB880H LXT.
Raton.
Mouse.
Viga.
Beam.
Tio.
Uncle.
Tenacidad.'
Tenacity.
Bebedor.
Toper, tippler.
Tos.
Cough.
(AU Aae are mMeuline.)
SolUoqiuo.
Soliloquy.
Tirabuzon.
Corkscrew.
Snegro.
Father-in-law.
Trineo.
Sldgh.
Sngeto.
Person, indi-
Tacto.
Touch.
Yidoal.
Talento.
Talent.
Sobrino.
Nephew.
Tel6grafo.
Tel^raph.
8m6nimo.
Sjnonyme.
Tenedor.
Fork.
SUencio.
Silence.
T^rmino.
Term.
Sentido.
Sense.
Trigo.
Wheat.
Semblante.
Countenance,
Term6metro.
Thermometer.
looks.
Tomo.
Lathe.
Secreto.
Secret
Toque.
Touch, ringing
Trato.
Intercourse,
(of bells).
treatment.
Tltulo.
Tide.
Travis.
Breadth (of a
thing).
COMPOS
Trago.
ffinON.
Draught, drink.
A buena gana no hay pan doro.
A lo hecho pecho.
A quien se hace de miel las moscas se
lo comen.
A quien madniga Dies le ayuda.
Al baen entendedor con media palabra
basta.
Al fin se canta la gloria.
Antes que te coses miia lo que haoes.
Antes cabeza de raton que cola de leon.
Aunque la mopa se yista de soda mona
se queda.
Bien yeogas mal si vienes solo.
Cada oyqa con su par^a (or Bios los
cria y ellos se juntan).
Cada uno juzga por su oorazon el
agena
Cada uno hace de su capa un sayo.
Hanger is the best sauce.
What IB done cannot be helped.
Smear yourself with honey, and yen
will be deTOured by flies.
The early bird catches the worm.
A word to the wise is sufficient
Boast not till the yictory is won.
Look before you leap.
Better be the head of a mouse than
the tall of a lion.
A hog in armor is still but a hog-
Misfortune never comes alone.
Birds of a feather flock together.
Every man measures other people's
com in his own bushel
Every one may do as he likes with his
own.
LESSON LXV.
351
Gada uno sabe donde le aprieta el zar
pato.
Cobra buena fama y debate k doimir.
Como el perro del horteUno, que ni
come ni deja comer.
Cuenta y razon suBtentan amistad.
Del mal el mdnos.
Deb^jo de tma mala capa se encaentra
un buen bebedor.
Dime con quidn andas, y te dird quidn
Donde foerea haz como vieres.
Lo mejor de los dados ea no Jugarlos.
En boca cerrada no entran moacas.
En casa del herrero asador de palo.
En ticrra de d^gos el tuerto es rey.
Gato escaldado del agua fria huye.
Ir por lana y volver trasquUado.
Hombre pre^enido nnnca fue vencido.
La caridad bien ordenada empieza por
uno mismo.
La mucha familiaridad es causa de me-
nosprecio.
La necesidad carecc de ley.
La tenacidad es divisa del necio.
Lo que no se puede remediar se ha de
aguantar.
Has vale tarde que nunca.
Mar Yale pfijaro en mano que ciento
Yolando.
MiSntras en mi casa estoy rcy soy.
Kadie puede decir de esta agua no be-
ber6.
No es oro todo lo que reluce.
No hay mal que por bien no Tcnga.
No la hagas no la temas.
Poquito a poco hllaba la vieja el copo.
Quien bien te quiere te hara llorar.
Quien mucho habla mucho yerra.
Every one knows where the shoe pinch-
es him.
Get the nfone of early rismg, and you
may h'e arbed all day.
Like the dog m. the manger.
Short reckoning and long friends.
Of two evils, the lesser.
We should not judge the book by the
cover.
Tell me your company and I will tell
you what you are.
When at Rome, do as Rome does.
The best throw at dice is to throw them
away.
A close mouth catches no flies.
No one goes worse shod than the shoe-
maker's wife.
In the land of the bUnd, the one-eyed
man is king.
A burnt child dreads the fire.
The biter bit
Forewarned, forearmed.
Charity begins at home.
Too much familiarity breeds contempt
Necessity has no law.
A wise man will change his mind ; a
fool never.
What canH be cured must be endured.
Better Uite than never.
A bird in the hand is worth two in the
bush.
A man's house is his castle.
No one can tell what is .to happen to
hun.
All is not gold that glitters.
It's an ill wind that blows nobody good.
Do no evil, and fear no harm.
Rome was not built in a day.
Spare the rod, and you will spoil the
child.
Who speaks much often blunders.
352
I.ESS02r LZV.
Quien no se aTentnra no pua la mtr.
Ya que la casa ee qaeroa caleni6moD08.
Temo0 la piga en el ojo ageno y no la
▼iga en d nuestro.
Tu enemigo es do tu oficio.
Never Tentore, never win.
Let MB make the best of a bad job.
We Bee the mote in onr neighbor's eje»
and not the beam in our own.
Two of a trade never agree.
COXVERSATTON AND VERSION.
1. I nay mnchos proyerbios en espafiol ? Uay muchisimos; en tod^s
las lengnos los hay, pero en la espafiola creo que hay tantos qne si se T&t-
nicsen todos formarian yarios voltimencs.
2. jLo gufltan d V. los proyerbios? Si, scfior, son muy expresivos,
pero debemos nsarlos, como decia D. Qnyotc, con moderacion y no a
borbotoncs como Sancho Panza.
8. En eso tieno V. razon, porqne qoien roucho habla mncho yerra.—
y. acaba de aplicar ese mny bicn ; pero es imposible que practiqnemos con
todos los qne trae esta loccion, en cete cyeroicio.
4. Sin embargo, al que madmga Dios le ayuda. — Y. dice bien, y quien
no so ayentnra no pasa la mar.
5. Espero que qnicn nos oiga conversar introdnciendo tanto refinan,
no diga de ellos lo qne se dice de los males. — iQn6 dicen de los males?
Bien yengas mal si yienes solo.
6. I Oh I no, seflor, en primer Ingar los proyerbios no son males^ y en
segundo Ingar 4 nosotros nos gnstan, y queremos practicar con ellos, para
aprondcrlos. — ^Y. estk en lo jnsto, y adcmds, cada nno hace de sn capa nn
sayo.
7. I Ola, amignito I Y. mo parcce prdctico en la materia, pero no piense
Y. qne yo soy rana, porqne del^yo de nna mala capa se encoentra nn
buon bebedor. — Caramba iqne no me d^a Y. meter baza! no se dir& de
Y. aqnollo de, en boca oerrada no entran moscas.
8. Yamos amigo, ese refran yino por los cabellos. — ^Pnes a yino por
los cabellos, 4 pelo yino, ademds, qne Y. me parece eer de aqnellos *qae
yen la pi^ja en el ojo agcno y no la yiga en el snya
9. No se enfade Y., amigo, qne qnien bien lo qniere le har& llorar. —
No, se&or, no me enfado, pero ya yeo qne no es oro todo lo qne relnce.
10. iBrayoI bravo I ya va Y. aprendiendo & tmnrr^ refiranes, lo
hace Y. cnal otro Sancho Panza, y yo, con toda mi pr&ctica, he ido por
lana y he ynelto trasqnilado. — Sn ^emplo de Y. me ird ensefiando; p^
qnito d poco hilaba la vicpa el copo, y dime con qni6n andas y te ^i^
qni^ eres.
11. iQa6 h(mibre ! n Y. va d ganar d loi maestro! pero no hay mal
qne por bien no venga; Y. me hace rm oon sns refiranes^ — Bien, dd mal
el mdnos, pero D. Mannd, |es poslble qne le haya de ganar sn disdpolo f
LB8SOK LZY. 353
12. No 8^, no pttedo decir de esta agaa no beber6, y lo que no sg pnede
remediar se ha de agaantar, y al fin se canta la gloria.— jZape, qomo los
onhebra I pero yo no me doy por vencido, s^or maestro, porqae yo ya
b6 aqnello de cobra buena fama y Achate & dormir.
13. La tenacidad es divisa del necio, y al buen entendedor'con m^a
palabra basta. — Si, pero esas ya son palabras mayorea, y & quien se hace
de miel las moscas se lo comen, y mi6ntras en mi casa cstoy, rey soy.
14. Espero, D. O&rlos, qne no me qaiera Y. poner faera de sn casa. —
No hombre, pero estos refranes son tan expresivos que le bacen decir 4
uno mas de lo que quiere ; pero 4 lo hecho pecho y ya que Y. me desa-
£6, siga la danza.
15. Bneno, si Y. lo qniere, ya qne la casa se qnema calent^monos; pe-
ro bien haria Y. &ntes que se case en mirar lo que hace, porqne cada xmo
sabe donde le aprieta el zapato. — ^Amigo mio, Y. no sabe de la misa la
media ; yo nunca doy mi brazo 4 torcer, y dntes quiero ser cabeza de
raton que cola de leon.
16. Si, setlor, pero aunque la mona se vista de seda, mona se queda, no
sea Y. oomo el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni deja comer, y acu6r-
dese Y. que cuenta y razon sustentan amistad y lo mejor de los dados ea
no jugarlos. — Basta, basta, hombre me doy por vencido.
17. No la hagas no la temas ; tu enemigo es de tu oficio. — Pero, D.
C&rlos, le repito. ... •
18. La caridad bien ordenada entra por si misma. — ^Pero si repito
que. . . .
19. Donde quiera que fucres haz como vieres. — Sefior, me rindo.— Mas
vale tarde que nunca.
EXEBCISE.
1. We]], Oharlea, so yon have come at last Yes, better late than
never, you know ; but if it had continued raining I would not have
come at aD.
2. Are yon going out? I thought we were going together to the
theatre this evening. — ^I must go out now ; but should I get hack as soon
as I expect, we shall still have time to go to the theatre.
8. If you undertake that journey, I should like to be your companion.
It is rather doubtful at present whether I shall; but if I do, I would be
delighted to have your company.
4. K the directors establish that as a general rule, very many persons
win suflfer great loss.
6. The conditions were, that if he did not discover the error, or i^
after having discovered it, he could not rectiijr it, he should lose his place.
364 LBS80K LXY.
'6. He said he would Laye no rest until he should hear some news of
tliAt poor young man«
7. He promised that I should have the place, if it were in his power
to procure it for me.
8. In case his efforts should not be attended with saccess, joa may
rely npon me to do all in my power to advance (jnwfUMter) yonr interests.
9. Their embarrassments will not cease so long as they do not intro-
dnce some system of reasonable economy.
10. Peter tells his stories so well, and with snch an appearance of
troth, that one is actually tempted to belieye them.
11. They made so many conditions, that it was dear they had no wish
to help OS.
12. Why did yon not take that book? I would not take it beoaase
some leayes were wanting.
18. If there is any tUng within On) my reach with which I can serye
joxijjttst^ let me know.
14. Whatever he may have been in his yonth, he is now a respectable
man, and beloved (loved) by everybody that knows him.
* English wordi la UaUet, not to be tmuUtod.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS
GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATICAL PECULIARITIES OF THE SPANISH LAN-
GUAQB, KOT HITHERTO TREATED OF IN THE GRAMMAR.
In order to acquire a thorough knowledge of a language, it
is necessary to compare carefully the different uses of the
several parts of speech in the native language and in the one
proposed.to be learned.
The sense of a whole passage is very often changed by the
undue suppression or omission of an article, a preposition, or a
conjunction ; by using one tense of a verb for another ; placing
an adjective before its noun when, in order to convey the idea
intended, it should go after it ; and not unfrequently by trans-
lating a certain part of speech by a word which, although its
appearance would lead us to take it for the equivalent of the
word to be interpreted, bears in reality no relation to the sense
designed to be expressed.
We have deemed it convenient, therefore, to devote a
few pages of our Combined Method to such general remarks
as are necessary to guide the learner, and which, if attentively
observed, will, after the study of the Spanish exercises con-
tained in the preceding lessons, enable him to compose purely
and idiomatically in the Castilian language.
Tba Definite Aztlole.
1. It has already been observed in previous lessons, which
are the most usual cases where the definite article is ex-
pressed in the Spanish language ; but there are many others
in which it would be altogether incorrect to express or omit it
356
GBAHMATICAL PBCULI ABITIES.
in Spanish, as in English, as may be seen from the following
examples, which may serve as a general role for all those of
the same kind :
I E8t4 el rey en palacio ?
Es costumbre en Espofia.
Su tio firmd por 61, en ausenda de
sa padre.
Decia verdad.
A tres de jtftiio.
TuTO Talor para responder.
A mediadoa de agoato.
I8 the king in the palace ?
liia the custom in Spain.
His unde signed for him, in (he absence
of his father.
He told the truth.
On ^ 8d of June.
He had the courage to answer.
In the middle of August.
2. In Spanish the article is at times accompanied by; a
preposition not required in English ; as,
Hace dd caballero. | He plays the gentleman.
3. The so-called indefinite article (more properly adjective)
is, as has been observed in one of the early lessons, frequently
employed in English; and when translating from the latter
language into Spanish, we either suppress it entirely or render
it by some other part of speech ; as.
Tiene derecho sobre este caudal
A distancia de . . .
C&diz es puerto de mar.
Es otro Alejandro.
En medio siglo (or dentro de medio
siglo).
yolver6mos dentro de media hora.
Las obras de otro {or obras agenas).
Hubo tiempo en que . • .
He has a right to (or a chum upon)
this capital
At a distance of . . .
Cadiz is a seaport (town).
He is another Alexander.
In half a century.
We shall return in half on hour.
The works of (mother (or onothei^s
works).
There was a time in which . . .
Personal aad PoflaeBsiTe Ptdnoims.
4. The use and repetition of the personal and possessive
pronouns are more frequent in English than in Spanish ; and
that seeming redundance is essential to the clearness and pre-
cision of the English language ; but Spanish syntax does not
OBAMMATICAL FECULI A BITIES. * 357
Bnbmit to stich encumbrances, and they are, therefore, generally
suppressed, as will be seen from the following examples :
£a Terdad.
Uueve.
E[ace frio.
iPorqu6 es menester?
£1 mismo principe.
Su miama madre.
£l mifitmo lo Tib.
It 18 true.
It id raining (or ii rains).
It is cold.
Why is U necessary ?
The prince Atmsel^
His mother heraeif.
He saw it Aifn^elf.
6. Before leaving the pronouns, it is proper to remark that
one and onea^ so often used in English composition, to avoid
the unpleasant repetition of nouns, have no eqmvalent what-
ever iu Spanish, and are hence to be left out in translating from
the former language to the latter; as,
i TIene Y. cabollos ? I Have you horses (or any horses) ?
Tengo dos baenos. | I have two good ones,
6. Pwsonal pronouns, when used redundantly in English,
as in the following example, are never expressed in Spanish :
Ambos perecieron. | Both of them perished (or were lost).
7. Even whole members of sentences are, not unfrequently,
suppressed in translating from English into Spanish ; as,
Todo no podia entrar en nn elogio, i All could not find place in a eulogy,
mas sf en una s^tira. | but ail could find place in a satire.
Observe that the repetition of the words italicized in the
English sentence is avoided by means of the adverb si in Span-
ish, which serves to correct the negation expressed in the first
member of the phrase, thus rendering the latter at once shorter
and more elegant.
EUlpflds.
8. There are certain short modes of expression, certain
grammatical laconicisms, peculiar to the English language,
which are not admissible in Spanish ; the ellipses must in sUch
cases often be filled up; as.
Jam&s hubo orador ^ue hablase
mejor.
De ahl dimanan estos errores.
Never did orator speak better.
Hence these errors.
858
GBAHHATICAL PBCULI ABITIS8.
No paede penflar en Aoeer maL
La dadad reducida 4 cenizaa.
No va mal para aer niiio.
8a madre hahada en l&griznaa
Awnqm todos estuviesen juntos.
Esto ei por to que toca d sa persona.
En pro y «n contra.
C<m /a espada en la mano.
He cannoi think of eriL
The city in ashes.
Not bad for a child.
Her mother in tears.
They were all together.
8o much for his person (or personal
appearance).
For and against
Sword in hand.
N. B. — ^It is also correct to say, JEipada en mono.
Sxivaralosi*
Although we have spoken at some length, in Lesson IX, on
the subject of inversion, we imagine the learner will not be
displeased to meet here a few well-chosen examples which will
give him a still clearer idea of the order observed in Spanish
for the expression of ideas, and the consequent difference of
construction between that language and the English.
9. The substantive often precedes its adjective ; as.
Es d hombre mas perfecto del
mondo.
LlaTe falsa.
Testigo falso.
Sahyomasj67$n.
He is the most perfect man in the
world.
False key.
False witness.
Her youngest son.
10. Instances occur, however, of the inversion taking place
in English, while the natural construction is followed in Span-
ish ; especially in the case of past participles acting as verbal
adjectives ; as,
This foundation bong once destroyed,
the whole (edifice) comes to the
ground.
This liberty (being) once admitted, man
may . . .
11. In all cases similar to that of the following example,
the possessives mio, tuyo, myo are placed afl;er the substantive,
and then, of course, they retain their final syllable; as,
El otro hijo nayo. \ His other son.
12. The same ideas are in not a few instances presented in
Una vez destruido este fundamento,
todo se vicne abigo.
Admitida esta llbertad, el hombre
puede • . .
GBAHMATICAL PBOULIABITIKS.
359
Spanish in an order very different firom that followed in Eng-
lish; aSy
It 13 not to destroy that he has come,
but to build up.
I see (very) well that . . .
If you had an agreement to make.
1^0 ha veiiido para defltruir, sine para
edificar.
Bien veo que < . .
Si tuviese Y. que hacer una contrato.
iff ycu had to make an agreemerU would, of course, also he an allowable construction
in Si^^UsIl)
No ttnia razon aquel fildsofo que
decia que . . .
Toca remunerar los seryidos al que
los recibi6.
Entre los Gri^os, los que . . .
£l que mas hablaba.
Gien reoes mas quisiera yo que . . .
Solo Dios es inmutable.
lliat philosopher who said that . . .
was wrong.
It is for hun who recd^ed the services
to reward them.
Those amongst the Greeks, who . . .
He who spoke the most
I would prefer a thousand times that . .
God alone is unchanging.
Votms.
13.«There is a striking difference to be observed in the use
of nouns in the two languages; we sometimes meet nouns in
the singular in English, while in Spanish they are used in the
plural only, and vice-versd :
PluraL Angular,
Mlrar con malos oJ€$.
Fuso ha ojo8 en ml,
Dar oidoB & . . .
Prestar ouiSos.
"Depih k cabeza.
For iodatpatiea,
Ju^o de manot,
Se present6 con loa ojoi en el suelo.
Singular,
Api^ descalzo.
Estar en pie.
A remo y vda.
En toda tKurte de negocios.
No son duefios de «f.
To look with evil eye.
He set hiB eye on me.
To give car to .• .
To lend an ear.
From head to foot
In every direction.
Sleight of hand.
He came forward with downcast eye.
Plural.
With hsre/eet (or in (his) haxefeei).
To stand on (one's) /eei.
With oara and aaila.
In an sorts (or kinds) of business.
They are not masters of themselves.
One Fart of Qpeeoh tsxr Axiother.
14. It is not uncommon, in comparing English and Spanish
composition, to see adjectives translated by substantives, ad-
360
OBAHMATICAL PSCULI ABITIS8.
verbs by substantives, substantives by verbs, and vice-versd.
Sometimes, in translating, difficulties, appearing at fiist si^bt
almost insurmountable, are overcome by the simple substitu-
tion of one part of speech for another.
AdUaotlTW toot Substanttyee.
PSca de guo^ (or preBomido de
guapo).
Es acusado de impio,
Se pone/tfruwo.
He piques himBelf on hu bravery.
He IB accused of impiely.
He gets into a /itry.
BahukaaitivmB tar AdwrlM, and vto^-veisa.
Aunqne iddlatras de <n'fffen.
Come fxeetiveanente.
Tu7o la <ftdka de salvarse.
For detffraeia nada oyeron.
Although imginaUy idolaters.
He eats to exeew.
HappUy for him he escaped.
Unfortunately they heard nothing.
8alMtaiittT«s Cor Verbs, aad vioe-veraa.
Habl6 lo m^or quepudo.
Debe probar su dieho,
Gomo aeoitunUtra.
Despues de almorzar.
Antes de comer.
He spoke to the best of his ability^
He must prove what he m^
According to his custom.
After hreakfiut.
Before dinner.
Verbs fbr Frononns.
Hay historiadores que aseguran I Some liistorians assure us that . .
que . . . I
Of Verbs In General.
15. We very often find verbs active with the indefinite ««,
and sometimes the passive verb with the particle «e, used in
Spanish to express the same idea conveyed in English by
passive, and sometimes also by active verbs ; one tense trans-
lated by another different tense, one number substituted in the
place of another, one person for other persons, and at times
even the same person translated by any or all the others, ac-
cording to the sense desired to be conveyed.
PaaslTe In "RngHab*
El concilio se eelebraha en Pisa.
El libro que m le airibuye,
Esto K enderra en la proposicion.
Esto debe eotitane per nada.
Cuando ae les mega que respondan.
The council was held at Pisa.
The book which is ailrUnOed to him.
That is contahied in the proportion.
This is to 6« counted for nothing.
When they are requested to answer.
GBAMMATICAL PECULI ABITIES.
361
AotlvBln BngHah.
Yiene k Juntane con bu familia.
Se eatd con la duquesa.
&e hicieran k la Tela.
He comes to join his familj.
He married the duchess. '
They get sail.
The IndioatlTe or Sa1]iiTmotiTe fbr the InflnltlvB.
Le mand6 que adlaae,
Es reputado por hombre que nada
posee.
Jlspero me retporuki Y.
He ordered him to hold his tongue (or
to be silent).
He is supposed topo89eu nothing.
I expect you to annoer me.
OnsTenaefto Another.
^Te habrS yo dado un derecho que
no tengo ?
^Porqu6 solo los hombres habrdn de
dcgenerar?
Cuanto mas hagan^ m^uos ganar&nl
Que un muerto rtnucite^ no es cosa
comuD,
Have I then given thee a right which I
do not possess myself?
Why must mankind alone degenerate ?
The more theycfe, the less they will
gain.
It is no common thing for a dead (man)
to retnudtate.
One Niu&ber ft>r Anothftr In Verbs.
Son las seis. I It t> six o'clock.
No le qiudan mas que tree h^os. | He Aot only three children left
One P w on fox AnotiLer.
Kosotros 9omo9 los birbaros. I It u we that are barbarians.
Si hubiefen sldo eUos los vituperadoa | If it had been they that they had bUimed.
Uode of Aairtwg. QoeetlonB and fbrminff Negationa with Yerbe.
16. The auxiliary do^ used in English in asking questions,
whether negatively or positively, is to be lost sight of in trans-
lating into Spanish, inasmuch as the simple form of the verb
contains all that is required for that purpose, as may be seen in
the following examples :
i Van Yds, algunas veces 4 la 6pera ?
/ Sabia Y. que debiamos venir tan
temprano?
No creia que debiesen Yds. renir
hasta las tres.
Do you sometimes go to the opera?
Did you know that we were to come so
early?
I did not think you were to come until
three o'clock. «
17. Nor is it to be translated into Spanish when it stands
16
362 GBAMlfATICAL PECTJLI ABITIB8.
in the English sentence merely for the purpose of giving more
emphasis to the expression ; as,
To creia qae no ib«n nnnct al teatro. I I thoaght thej never went to tlietlie«tiCL
Si, sefior, van k menudo. | Yes, sir, ihej do go oIUd.
18. It sometimes takes the place of a verb, to avoid the
repetition of the. latter; in all such cases it is to be rendered
into Spanish by a simple particle (positive or negative, as re-
quired by the sense), or else the verb expressing the action
must itself be repeated ; as,
^Escribe V. todos los riteses & sa tio ? Do you write to your unde every month?
8(, sefior {or le escribo todos los Yes, sir, I do.
meses)L
19. To what has already beeif remarked relative to conju-
gations, we have but a few words to add, respecting a limited
number of verbs of the third conjugation. Those which have
either of the letters cA, Uy or fl, immediately preceding the ter-
mination, make their past participle in endo^ instead of iendo ;
as, ciflendOf mitUendOy riflendo, hinckendo^ brufiendOj grufiendOj
taflendoy instead of cifAendo^ muXRendo^ Hfiiendo^ hinchiendd^
brufiitndOj grufiiendOy tafliendo.
For the same reason the i is also suppressed in the third
persons singular and plural of the preterit definite of the indica-
tive, and in all the persons of the second and third terminations
of the imperfect subjunctive, and of the future of the same
mood ; as, cifld^ rnuUdj rifleron^ hinchera^ bruflese^ grufiere^ in-
stead of cifixdy mylCidy rifiieron^ hinchiera^ brufiieaey gruniere.
There is but one exception allowable to this rule, and that
occurs in the verb henchiry which generally retains the % in the
third person singular preterit definite of the indicative, making
it hinchiSy in order to avoid confounding it with hinchd^ same
person and tense of hinchary a regular verb of the first conju-
gation.
The reason of the suppression of the i in the cases pointed
out above is obvious, inasmuch as the letters cA, K, or /I, when
forming a syllable with e, cannot be sounded without the con-
currence of the i element to a certain extent. If, therefore, the i
were retained in those combinations, a forced and disagreeable
sound would be the result.
6BAMMATICAL P ECULI ABITIBS. 863
20. There are in Eoglish certain verbs of very frequent
occurrence, and whose signification, if not determined by some
other part of speech, it would often be difficult to explain.
Amongst this class, the. verb to get plays a very important, if
not the most important part, and English persons are some-
times at as great a loss to know how exactly ^o translate it into
a foreign language, as foreigners are to know how and when
to use it idiomatically in English. This verb {to get) has no
exact equivalent in Spanish, but there are in that language
many verbs of something of a like nature, and by which it may
at times be correctly rendered, according to the signification in
which it is used. We venture to say that, in the most knotty
cases, a little thought, a moment's reflection would go far in
removing all difficulty.
Before making some uncouth makeshift of a translation,
pause a moment, and look what is the real meaning of ^o get in
the case before you ; then see what other verb would serve in
its place, or what other form of expression*you can substitute
for the one proposed to be translated. This you will soon dis-
cover, for perhaps in no language can an instance be found of
the impossibility to express the same idea in more than one
way. For instance, let it be required to translate into Spanish,
To GET IN by the window ; here is a difficulty just as great as
any other case where the verb to get can be used.
. Let us now see how else we can express that idea : To oo
IN", or to eome in by the window ; that is to say, we have to
convey the idea of motion into. This same idea is to be ex-
pressed thus : To BNTEia by the window=BinitAB por la venr
tana ; enibab then is the standard and usual verb expressive
of motion into. Let us now change the preposition and reverse
the sense, for the preposition in determines the signification of
get in the case under consideration.
Required to translate: To get our by the window; the
same^process as above gives us motion oiU; hence, SAUBj^or
la ventana^ salib being the standard and usual Spanish verb
expressive of motion out.
This mode of reasoning will in all cases lead to the desired
end. Let your object be to find some verb in English which
864
GBAMMATICAL PE CTTLI ABITIES*
alone will mean the same thing as get and its detenninmg prepo-
sition together.
Got, used in connection with adjectives, is no more difficolt
to be disposed of than when accompanied by prepositions, and
it may in general be turned into Spanish by one of the three
verbs ponene, haceru, or 'ool^er9t (according to the nature of
the case), and an adjective coirespondmg to the English one
determining ^et; as.
ViAnent cieponarte rojo.
Ptmene fiirioso.
To^ rccL
To gd furious.
These ideas in Spanish may be expressed by single verbs
derived jfrom each of the adjectives respectively; as,
Enriquecerse. I To get ricb.
Enrojecerse. I To ^rrf red (i. €., to redden).
Enfttieoerse. I To gel furious.
21, To GET, as an active verb, is usually translated into
Spanish by any of these : conaeguir^ obtener^ procurar^ hacerse
dey hacerse con^ according to the sense ; as.
Coftsiguid lo que deseaba.
Obiettdrdn el privilegio.
^Puede v. etnueguirme or proeurar-
fM un ejempkr de ese libro ?
Se hho de un cftballo para el viaje.
He got what he wanted.
They will get the patent'
Can you ^ me a copy of that book?
He gi}t (t. 0., bought) a horse for his
Journey.
22. As for to gety used redundantly (and incorrectly) with
^the verb to have^ it disappears in the Spanish translation ; as,
Tcnemos uno. | We have got one.
23. The above remarks are equally applicable to all verbs
of the class alluded to, as for instance to become ; which latter,
as well as to get^ is often elegantly translated by Uegar deer; as,
8e Auo ciudadano de los Estados
Unidos.
Uegd d ter hombre muy distinguido.
He became a citizen of the United
States.
He became a very distinguished man.
EECAPITULACION
D£ LAS BEGLAS DE LA GBAMItIOA.
LEOOION I.
1. j En qTi6 letras acaban Iob infinitivos de todos los verbos en espafiol ?
— iOndntas co^jugaciones hay?
2. I G6mo 80 llaman las letras qne anteceden (jmcede) & las termina-
clones or, eTjirf
8. |C6mo 80 forman las coigagaeiones de todos los verbos regnlares
delalengna?
— I So pnede snpriznir el pronombre nominaiiyo ?
— jPorqu6?
— I Puede snprimirse d pronombre Usted t
4. I En qn6 persona so pone el verbo cnando so emplea el pronombre
U9tedt
— I En qn6 cases se emplea la segonda persona del verbo? estoes,
I cn&ndo se tutea en espanol ?
>
LEOOION II.
5. ^ Qndsigmfioa la palabra«0fk>r cnando sensa en vocativo? ^
— iQndpalabrasedebeemplearenlngardef^/l^enelcasoyooatiyo?
~ i On4ndo se emplea la palabra 9enor t
— I Oo^do 80 emplean las palabras settorOf tenorita j Beflorito f
6. ^De qn6 modo se nsan los Tocablos (toorcU) Don j Doflaf
7. |En d6nde se colooala negaoion no^ con respecto al verbb?
LEOOION III.
8. iCo^do se oambla la coqjmidon y por la vocal if
9. |(Mndo se escribe d acentofiobre d quef
860 BECAPrrTJLACIOK.
11. I En qn6 caso se tradace hut por pero t
12. iPneden las palabras eipafioly /ranees^ hien, j otras mnchas^
pertdneoer 6 diferentes partes de la oracion (fipeeeh) ?
LEOOION IV-
18. I On&ado ligen Iob yerbos actiyoB & sa objeto con aynda de la pie-
posicion^/
14. Qu6 prepodoion drre para denotar la posedon 6 latnateiiade
qne una cosa estd hecba ?
16. I Qa6 nombres determina d articnlo elf
— i Qq6 yariadon aofre el articnlo el cnando yiene despnea de la pre-
po8ioion^6(20/
16. iDelante de qn6 parte de la oracion se coloca el articnlo indefini-
dounf
— |0n^ es el nso de la palabra unof
LEOOION V.
17. ^Odintos g^neros bay en espafiol ?
— I On&ndo se emplea el articnlo femenino una f
18. 406mo8e tradnoeyot/r/
LEOOION VI.
10. I En qn6 letra aoaban todos los yerbos en la primera persona de
indicativot
— ^En qa6 se diferencia la segmida coi^ugacion de la primera, en
el presente de indio(itiyof
20 1 06nio se traduce muy f
21. i 06mo se forma la terminacion femenina de los nombres acaba-
dos en /
LEOOION VII.
22. |06mo forman sn terminadon femenina los adljetiyos que acaban
^mo, antionf
BBCAPITtTLACIOir. 367
— ^Y.IosgeDtalicios?
— ^En d6nde so colocan generalmente los a4Jetiyo9 con respecto &
los sQstantivoB ?
— I En d6nde se oolooon los acyetivos nsadoa metaf6ricam6nto (meta-
phoricaUy) ?
— iPierden algnnos a^jetivos sa ^tuna letra6 sllaba coando so colo-
can delante do los snstantiyos?
LEOOION VIII,
28. 4 En qa6 se diferencian las terminaciones de la segonda y tercera
conjngacion en el presente de indicativo ?
24. I Oodndo se cambia la corjnndon 6 per la letra iSi t
25. |06mo8etradncentf«^A^ynof r
26. I G6mo se fonna el plural de los nombres ?
27. jConcnerda el acyetivo con el sustantivo?
28. jConcaerda el articnlo con el nombre & qne se refiere ?
— iQa6 nombres femeninos toman el artionlo masculino ?
29. lOoiado se nsa el articnlo nentro lot
LEOCION IX.
80. 1 06mo forman el plnral los nombres papd^ matnd jpiet
81. 1 06mo forman el plnral los nombres de mas de nna sflaba que
acaban en «, tales como Mnes^ mdrtes^t
— I Ou4l es el plnral dejuez^ Upis^ j dem^s nombres que acaban enzf
82. iC6mo se forma el plnral de los nombres compnestosf
83. I Co^do toman articnlo los dias de la semana ?
84. |Qn6 lugar ocupan en la oracion los adverbios i^n^^^, addnde j
eudndoT
85. |Cn4ndo requieren el acento los adverbios donde, adonde y
ciuindot
LEOOION "X.
86. AQn6sonyerbosirregnlares?
— |Qn6 se advierte aoerca de tener y los dem^s verbos anziliares f
368 BE CAP ITU LA CI OK.
— |06mo 86 tradnce los pronombres, r^^en direoto de un Torbo
ingl68f
87. |06mo 80 iiaar& del £0 y el 2o en el oaso acosativo^ esto ea, oomo
regimen directot
— I C6mo 86 tradacen en algnnos casos Ujiof
88. lEeqmerea el articnlo los pronombres InterrogativoB ^Un^ eudt^
^uSf de quiin f
89. Caando en una pregimta est& regido un pronombre interrogatiYo
por nna preposidon | qa6 debe haoeroe en la respneeta t
LEOOION XI.
40. I Ga6ndo 86 emplea dlguien^ j cdmdo dlguno t
— |En qa6 oaso so tradacir& amy tme, 6 anybody por eualquieraf
41. |C6nio 86 nsadeno^Zid 7 nin^no/
42. I (Mndo pierden dlguno 7 ninguno la o final ?
48. |En qa6 oaso so osari de algo 7 alguna com f
44. I Gn^do se nsar^ de nada 7 ninguna eosa t
45. iQa6 negadones se colocan delante del verbof
— I Qa6 efecto producen en eepafiol, dos negativas en la misma bct-
tendaf
46. |En qa6 eases no se traduce d articnlo indefinido a 6 cnf
LEOOION XII.
47. i Oa&ndo se nsa dd verbo haber 7 cn^ndo dd yerbo tenerf
— i06mo se tradaoen los aiudliareB to have jtole segnidos de on
infinitivof
48. |£n qnS oasos se emplea ^Lpr^hito ind^nidot
LEOOION XIII.
49. |De qa6 modo forman sn terminacion femenina los pronombres
mhy tuyoj euyOy nueetro^ fmeetro f
60. i Qa6 ooncordanda tieil^n los pronombres posedvos ?
61. ^En d6nde se oolooan 7 qa6 letras pierden caando se nsan como
a^jetiyos pronominalesf
BBC A PI TULA CI ON. 369
52. ^£n d6nde se oolooa el pronombre mio^ onando se nsa en el oaso
vocativo?
58. iQa6 conoordanda tieneu los a^etivos posesivos onando se usan
como pronombres ?
— iBequieren el artfonlo en esta caso ?
54. I Qu6 articnlo reqnieren cnando se nsan de nn modo indefinido ?
55. I Ou4ndo se omite el articitio con los pronombres posesivos ?
56. I Cn4ndo se emplean los pronombres vue$ti^ j tuestra t
LEOOION XIV.
57. |Qa6 6rden se dgne en la formadon de los nlimeros oompnestos?
58. 2 Oo&les son los ntuneros dedinables ?
59. I Ca4ndo pierde uno la letra o t
60. I Qa6 conoordanda tiene eiento j codndo pierde la tiltima sflaba ?
LECWION XV.
61. 2Qn6 ooncordancia tienen los ntimeros ordinales y d6nde se oolo-
can?
— ^Qa6 ntimeros ordinales pierden sn tiltima letra?
62. I Qa6 ntimeros ordinales se nsan j cn4ndo ?
LECOION XVI.
68. ^Ondndo se nsa el preterito d^nidOj y en qn6 se diferenda del
pretirito indefinido t
64. 2 Qn6 significa la prepoddon anftf /
65. ^06mo se nsan los adverbios mas y mhkOB^ y en d6nde se colocan
en la oracion ?
LEOOION XVII.
66. jDe qn6 modo se emplea el pronombre relativo quient
67. I Ondndo se tradnce who por que y onindo por quien t
68. i Cual y que pneden refbrirse & personas y cosas?
16*
870 BSCAPITITLACIOV.
69. ^Conqn^palabraconcnerdftmrytf/
— I Qa6 espede de pronambre es ?
70. I Se osa del pronombro relaliTo ea espafiol dd mismo mddo que
en iDgl68 ; esto ea, precedido 6 no de una prepoadon ?
71. |Paede Buprimine el pronombre relatiTof
LEOOION XVIII.
72. |06mo se dedlnan los pronombres demostratiyos este, mey aqudf
78. |£n qu6 caso se emplea €9U t
74. iQa^ snoedia en lo antiguo cnando este j e$e preoedian al BdjeAivo
ctrot
75. i06mo se emploan los pronombres dcmostratiyos en sa calidad de
a<^eUvo8f
76. |06mo se tradaoen las palabras the former j the latter f
77. i C6nio 80 tradace el pronombre demostrativo ingl4s thaiy segmdo
do la proposidon ^, 6 de cualquiera de los reladvos ioho 6 tcAieA /
78. 1 06mo 80 tradaoen generalmento los proi^ombres personales in-
glescs, cnando yan sogoidos de nn relatlyo ?
79. I Qn6 dlferenda bay entre el significado de los adyerbios aqu% j
allX, jacdr alUt
LECOION XIX.
80. I On4ndo debe nsarso de la preposicion para^ j coiindo de par f
81. iCo&l 08 d fflgnifioado de la prepoddon entre t
82. ^Ou^ OS d »gnifloado de la prepoddon hcuta t
LEOOION XX.
83. ^Onindo pierden los adyerbios tanto j euanto sd iiltima silaba ?
84. 206mo se forma d comparatiyo de igualdadt
85. jEnqn^oasopnedeemplearse (man f
86. |O6mo8efornuidoomparatayodeatipm0n(Zai/
BECAPITULACION. 871
87. 1 06mo se forma el comparativo de ii^ferioridad t
88. |Porqn6 IO0 ac(]etiYOs ma^or^ menor^ m^orj peor^ no necesitan
de las palabras fUM 6 minoi^ para formar sos grados de comparaoion ?
89. jEn qn6 caso se traditce th(m por dejea ca41 otro per que f
90. gPueden tambiea formar grados de comparaoion los nombres, ver-
bos 7 adverbios? •
LEOOION XXI.
91. 206mo se tradncen los snperlatiyps ingleses que acaban por est^
6 se forman con la palabra most t
92. I En qn6 caso se tradnce movt^ 6 movt qfi por la mayor parte f
93. i Qn6 preposicion corresponde en espafiol al in ingl6s despnes de
tin superlatiyo?
94. Los snperlativos qne se forman en ingles por medio de mott^ very,
&c,y I c6mo se forman en espafiol ?
95. I Cnilndo pierden los acyetivos la tUtima vocal ?
96. jDlgame Y. lo que se advierte acerca de los sapcrlativos en
irrimof
97. i Qn6 acyetivos cambian sas letras finales dntes de recibir la ter-
minacion \aimo f
98. iOoMes son los snperlativos en \»mo formados irregolannente ?
99. I Oa41es son los comparativos 7 snperlativos irregolares ?
100. I On^do itimiten grados de comparacion los snstantivos ?
LEOOION XXII.
101. I Qa6 se advierte acerca de los verbos ser y eatar t
102. I On^do se tradnce el verbo to he, por wr, y cndndo por eatar t
— I On&les son los verbos cnyos gemndios no admiten d verbo etiar
oomo auzUiar ?
LEOOION XXIII.
103, J Oudndo se emplea eiyi*^w «M»j?Ztf /
104. 1 06mo se nsan los nnmerales qne indican.las boras del dia ?
372 BECAPITULACIOir.
105. i Forqni6 palabra ae tndaoe wawn^ 6 night t
106. I En qii6 caso no rige al .BabjuntiTO la coojundon H f
LECCION XXIV.
107. I Cnimdo ee emplea f^futuro einnpwito f
* 108. i C6mo fle traduce en ing^^ acodar ^ f
109. jEn qa6 letra acaban en espafiol la mayor parte de las pakbras
qne en ingl^ terminan en turn t
110. I Ck>n qn6 nlinieros se cnentan los dias del mes ?
LEOOIOK XXV.
111. |Qn6 diferencia se encaentra en el significado de los rerbos
saber J conoeert
112. I Qa6 diferencia existe entre los adverbios aun, ya j todaoia f
— I C6mo se tradace once^ tmce^ etc. ?
— I Qa6 se observB en el nso de la palabras miedOj valor^ verguen-
tOj IdstimOj y Uempo t
118. Ooando el yerbo to he precede k los ac^jetiYOS hungry^ thirsty y
qfraid^ ashamed^ rights wrongy eoldy sleepy^ i qa6 yerbo se emplea en
114« 1 06mo se emplean jami< y nunea f
LEOOION XXVI.
116. 2 En d6nde se colocan los pronombres nominativos con respecto
al yerbo ?
116. 2 Qn4 pecoliaridad se nota en los pronombres personales ?
117. iEn d6nde se ooloca el eomplemento directo {objective ease)
cnondo no le precede una preposicion, y el yerbo est4 en Infinitiyo 6
imperativo ?
118. I En qu6 tiempos pierde el yerbo la letra final cuando se le afiade
uno de los pronombres iiMiiost
— 4 Con que objeto se hace esto ?
119. jCu&ndo podr4 colocarse el pronombre eomplemento directo
despues del yerbo en el modo indioatiro 6 subjuntlyo ?
BEGAPITULACION. 873
120. Cuando on verbo r\ja 4 otro en infinitiTO, i en d6nde se oolocar4
el proiiombre objeto ?
121. I Qa6 oaso rigen las preposiciones expresas ?
122. I Qn6 se nota caando la preposidon eon anteoede 4 los pronom-
bres mi^ tif ^f
128. I Oo^ndo se nsa de la preposidon entre con el oaso nominatiyo ?.
124. I Qa6 pronombre complemento (i. «., 1st objeotiTe or 2d objec-
tive case) se nsa despaes de los comparatiyoB ?
126. Cuando en ingl^ el caso objetivo de la primera 6 segonda per-
sona es d regimen dd verbo 6 de la prepoddon tOj t&dta (understood)
6 ezpresa, i c6mo se traduce ?
126. I C6mo se traduce d complemcDto indirecto ingles de la tercera
persona ?
LEOOION XXVII.
127. Cuando la tercera persona va regida de la prepoddon to en
ingles, tdcita 6 ezpresa, dendo el regimen dd verbo un pronombre de la
tercera persona, i por qu6 palabra se traduce ?
— I Cu41 es la razon de esto ?
128. En caso de encontrarse en una sentenda dos pronombres, uno
complemento directo 7 d otro indirecto, i<mil se coloca primero ?
129. I Y cu&ndo d regimen del verbo es un pronombre refleziyo ?
ISO. I Qu6 se observa cuando, para dar mas energia d la frase, se ponen
dos pronombres de la misma persona?
181. I Qu4 debe observarse con respecto 4 las frases, d il guiero^ d ti
amot
182. ^ Qu6 se debe tener presente para no confundir los pronombres
personales ilj la, lo^ los j lat^ con los u^culos el^ lOf lo, los j laa f
138. {Para qu6 sirve d a^jetivo mumot
LITCCION XXVIII.
184. ^Cu^doseusadm^tfi/ee^f
185. iQjJikAo^xia^Apluscuamperfectot
874 BXCAPITVLACION.
186. 1 06mo 86 tradnoen las ezpresioiieB to Aom jtat jtole Jtut de-
lante de un participio pasado?
LEOOION XXIX.
187. |Oa&ndo so naa el pret^to anterior?
188. |De d6nde se derivan los adTerbios de modo y oalidad f
189. ^ 06mo se forman los adverbios que se derivan de a^jetivos f
140. i Qa6 adverbios admiten grados de oomparadon ?
141. |Qa6 adverbios paeden sostitairse an cambiar de rignificado?
LEOOION XXX.
142. iQn^son verbosimpersonales?
148. |En qa6 caso se nsan los verbos amaneeer y anoehec&r en las tres
personas ?
144. 1 06mo se tradnoen en ingl6s los verbos hdber y h4xeer cnando se
nsan como impersonales ?
— I QuS se observa oon respecto & la primera persona del presente de
indicativo del verbo hahery nsado impersonahnente ?
— I Hay otros verbos qne pneden nsarse como impersonales ?
145. I En qn6 oaso no se tradnce el pronombre poseavo ingl^ iU f
— iBeqnieren arlicnlo los nombres tomados ensentido indefinido?
— I Toman el articitlo los nombres nsados en toda la extension de sn
significado?
146. ^Uevan articnlo los nombres de-nadones, paSses, provindas,
monies, rios y estadones ?
147. I Ooindo no admiten articnlo los nombiej de midones, paises y
provindas, etc.
— I Onfiles reqnieren dempre d articnlo t
LEOOION XXXL
148. 1 06mo se oox\Jnga d verbo anistar cnando dgnifica U please t
149. I Qn6 dgnifica el verbo gtutar segaido de la prepoddon de t
160. I Qn6 dgnifica y c6mo se coignga d verbo gustos como verbo
active?
BECAPITTJLACIOK. 875
151. |Qq6 otros verbos reqnieren la misina oonstraooion idiom&tica
del verbo ffustar f
162. I Qa6 se obseira en la coz\}agacion del yerbo jMsar cnando dgni-
fica to regret t
LEOOION XXXII.
158. 1 06mo se forma la voz pasiva ?
— I (Mndo se forma oon el verbo e^tar t
154. I En qui caso no podr4 nsarse la voz paava con el verbo ier en
el presente y el imperfeoto de indicativo?
156. I (Mndo se nBar& de la prepoedcion de j cu&ndo do par en la voz
pasiva?
156-157. I En qui oasos se forma la voz pasiva con el pronombre se t
LEOCION XXXIII.
158. I C6mo se coqjagan los verbos reflezivos f
159. I Ca&ndo se nsa la forma reflexiva ?
160. A C6mo se co^jngan los verbos recfprocos ?
• LEOOION XXXIV. •
161. I Qa6 oonstitaye la irregolaridad de los verbos ?
162. I Qa6 debe tenerse presente para no confundlr con loe verbos
irregnlares algtmos qne annqne snfren nn oambio ortogrMoo no dejan por
eso de ser regolares ?
168. ^Qa6 oambio sofiren los verbos que aoaban eueert
164. 2 Qa6 oambio se nota en los qne aoaban euuirt
165. ^En cn^tas dases 6 gmpos se dividen los verbos irregnlares?
166. I Qn6 se observa en la oonstmccion del verbo paga/r t
LEOOION XXXV.
167. i Ouiles la irregolaridad del verbo oe^tor/
168. I Odmdo se nsa el modo imperalivo ?
870 BBCAPITULACI027.
169. iQQ^letraspierde^yenqa^penonaBydmodoimperatiyocniaiido
86 le afiade el pronombres noBjaf
170. I En d6nde se oolooan los pronombres en espaflol coando el im-
peratiTO se usa en la forma neg^tivaf
171. iPnede nsarse el fntnro de indicatiyo por el imperatiyo?
172. |06mo se tradncen en espafiol los a^etiyos ingkses acabadoa
178. I T los nombres y a^jetiyos ingleses qne acaban en ie 6 ieal t
LEOOION XXXVI.
174^ I OoAl es*la irregularidad del yerbo m&oer t
175. Coando se nsa del m como pronombre indefinidOy ^ 4 qn6 palabras
corresponde en Ingl^ t
176. I Ou^es son las ooatro flmdonee qne desempefia el pronombre m f
177. |C6mo se tradncen en espafiol los nombres ingleses que acaban
en tyt
— i A qn6 g^nero pertenecen estos nombres ?
178. I Qa6 pecoliaridad se nota en el yerbo doler t
LEOOION XXXVII.
170. iOaSL es la firegnlaiidad del yerbo atenderf ,
180-181-182-188. I Oo^do se emplea d modo snbjuntiyo f
184. I OnAndo se nsa el presente de snbjontiyo ?
185. I Cudndo se nsa el perfecto de snbjnntiyo ?
LEOOION XXXVIII.
186. j Tienen los yerbos espafioles otro pardcipio adem^ del pasado ?
— I Qn6 terminacion tienen los participios presentee, y c6mo se nsan ?
187. I Oo^do se nsan los genmdios ?
188. lOnil es el anxiliar de los gemndiost
189. I G6mo se tradnce en espafiol el partioipio presente ingles, pre-
cedido de nna prepoddon ?
190. jPaede nsarse dinfinitiyo como nombreyerbal?
BSCAPITULACION. 877
191. i06mo Be tradaoe en ingl^ el infinitiyo espafiol, re^do por otro
verbo?
LEOOION XXXIX.
192. 2OaAleslairrQgiilaridaddelTerb6|70(2irf
193. i On&les son las formas mas nsuales para saladar ?
LEOOION XL.
194. 4 OaM es la irregolaridad del verbo condudrf
d95. I Qn6 se nota sobre la palabra tegun t
196. 1 06ino cononerdan Ips nombres oolectiyos ?
LEOOION XLI.
197. |Qii6 son verbos defectiyos ?
198. ^En qn6 personas y co^ndo se nsa el verbo yaeerf
199. I En qn6 tiempos se nsa el yerbo $oler j qn6 pecnliaridad se nota
en 61?
200. iQn6 eagnificadon tiene la preposidon desdef
201. 2 06mo se nsa la preposidon em^a / ^ •
202. 2 On&l es la significacion de la preposidon tdbref
208. 2 Oa&l es la signifioacion de la preposidon tra9 f
204. I On&ndo se nsa de la ooi\jnndon pue» f
LEOOION XLII
205. |En qn6 80 dividen las coi\]andones?
206. I Qn6 debe observarse acerca dd regimen de las co^jondones ?
207. I Qn6 conjnndones rigen d verbo al modo snbjnntiyo ?
208. i On&les le rigen al modo inflnitivo ?
209. I OdUes le rigen al modo indicativo?
378 SBCAPITVLACIOV.
LEOCION XLIII.
210. iCoindo M emplea d m^Mrfecto de flobjimtiTO, y coindo el
phneaamperfecto f
211. |C6mo 86 tndnoen ea espafiol loe anxOkres moffj mightj eon,
212. ^De qok manen ezproM U aocUxi del Yorbo el imperfecto de
satjimtiTof
218. ^De qii6 maoen It represenfta d ploscuamperfeotof
LECOION XLIV. ,
214. |Qii6 son nombreB onmeiitatiyos j diinmiitiyofi, y o6mo te
fomunt
216. jHay algonoe nombres qae fonnan ana diminntavos con otras
tenninadones diatiiitaB de las designadas par eate objeto ?
210. I Paedea formane diminntiyofs con otras partes de la oradon f
217. I Qq6 nombres pnmitiyos no admiten algonas de las termiaadonea
designadaa?
218. I A qja& noDcbies so deeigna o(xi el de dettprmaPiunf
LEOOION XLV.
219. I G6mo representa la aodon dd yerbo el fatoro ample de sab-
jontiyo?
220. iGoAndo pnede sustitoirae el presente de sabjtmtiyo al fiitiiro
simple f
221. 1 06mo. representa la aodon del yerbo el ftitoro oompneato de
aaljantiyof
222. 4 Cnindo pnede sostitnirsde el perfedx) de salgontiyo ?
223. I Qa6 debe tenerse presente para no confondir el imperfed;o y
plnscoamperfecto del modo snbjantiyo, con d fhtaro simple y compnesto
ddmismomodo?
224. Giiando d yerbo que est4 en fhturo simple 6 compnesto fnndona
oomo Yerbo detenninante ^4 qu& modo y tiempos pnede regir d yerbo
determinadof
BSCAPIXULACION. 379
LEOOION XLVI.
225-226. i Qu6 son coiyimoioneB, y cu£ es el signifioado de las prin-
cipales f
LEOOION XLVII.
227. i Qu6 partes de la oradon paeden llevar arUculo ?
228. ilievan artlculo los nombres comunes q|^e se nsan en toda la
extension de sn significacion ?
229. iSe pone articulo delante de los nombres de imperios, reinos,
provincias y paises ?
— ^Oudndo se omite?
230. I CdLndo reqnieren articulo los nombres de medidas, pesos, &c.
231. I Cn^do se repite el articulo ? '
232. I En qn6 caso se pone el articnlo delante do los nombres qne
expresan rango, oficio, profesion 6 titulo de personas?
233. 2 En qn6 caso se nsa el articnlo en Ingar del a^jetlvo posesivo ?
234. I En qn6 caso se nsa el articnlo, como en Ingl^ ?
LEOOIOI^r XLVIII.
285. I C6mo se corresponden los verbos cnando estan nnidos por nn
relativo?
236. ^ Cudndo se pone en infinitiyo el verbo determinado ?
237. Si el verbo determinante fnere ser, 6 cnalqniera de los imperso-
nales, i en qn6 modo se pondr& el verbo determinado, en el caso de care-
oer este de sageto ?
— |Porqn6 sncede esto asi?
238. T cnando dicho yerbo tnviere sngeto, i en qn6 modo se pondrd ?
— Los verbos qne expresan mandato, i & qn6 modo rigen el verbo
determinado ?
239. Cnando el verbo determinante est4 en infinitivo, en presente 6
futnro de indicativo, 6 en imperativo nnido al verbo determinado por
nna ooi\jnndon ^ en qne modo se pone este tUtimo ?
240. I A qn6 modo y en qu& tiempos rige al verbo determinado el
880 SBCAPITULACIOV.
deiermiiiBnte, cnando eete tlismo se enoaentra en el pret6iito indefinido
6 en el fhtnro oompnesto de indicativo f
241. CoAndo el nominatiyo es el mismo para lunbos verboB 7 d de-
terminante se encaentra en indicatiyo, i k qne modo rige este al deter*
minado f
LEOOION XLIX.
242. I Qq6 son nombres deriyados f
248, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252. sQo^ denotan, j
oo^e^jBon las principales terminaoiones ?
LEOOION L.
258. I C6mo Be forman loe tiempos compaestos f
LEOOION LI.
254. I Ondl es la constraocion natoral ?
255. jOoideslafigoradaf
266. I De cdtfitoe modos pnede conrtrairse nna frase ?
257. iQa^oonstraccioneBlapreferible?
LEOOION LII.
258. lOonserran alganos partidpios el regimen de sos yerboe?
259. i Ooiil es la ooncordanoia del participio pasado ?
260. Ooando nn yerbo tiene dos participios pasados, ono regular 7
otro irregular, i o6mo se emplean ?
261. I OnAles son los participios pasados irregnlares qne se pneden
nsar con el yerbo haber ?
262. i Qa6 irregnlaridad pecnliar tiene el rerbo morir f
268. I Ha7 algnnos participios pasados 6 pasiyos qne toman nna sign!-
ficadon actiyaf
BBCAPITULACION. 381
264. ^Paeden algonos partidpios pasados haoer las veoes de snstan-.
tlFO?
265. iQii6 86 debe observar acerca de otros tiempoa qne algnnos gra-
m&ticos agregan al modo infinitiyo f
LEOOION LIII.
266. I Qn6 son modismoB 6 idiotiamos i-
— I C6mo 86 tradncen en espafiol las frases en qne la preporaoion
inglesa toma nn signifioado diferente de aqnel qne generalmente se le
atribnje ?
LEOOION LIV.
267. I C6mo se tradnoen en espafiol las co^jnnoionea inglesas qne se
nsan freonentemente en Ingar de otras palabras ?
268. I Haj tambien en espafiol coignndones qne se nsan en Ingar db
otras palabras?
— I (Mies son los principales nsos de la ooi\jnncion n f
LEOOION LV.
' 269. ^ Odkles son los principales nsos de la ooxgnnoion que f
LEOOION LVI.
270. I On^les son las formas mas nsnales para principiar j acabar
cartas?
LEOOION LVII.
271. gQn6 se advierte acerca de las prepodciones qne cambian sn
signifioado de los verbos & qne se jnntan ?
LEOOION LVIII.
272. |06mo se tradncen los verbos to he glad ytohe refoieed atf *
882 BSCAPITI7I.ACI0K. 7
278. |06mo se tradnoen los verbos to he iorry j to ffriece f
274. i 06mo se emplea el verbo caber f
LECOION LIX.
276. I A qa6 modimos se prestan los verbos eaer^ da/r^ deeir j eekarf
LEOOION LX.
276. I Qu&Les son los principales idiotismos 4 que se prestan los Terbos
entrar^ hacer^ tr, Uecar^ mandar^ oUr d, edber d^ ealir^ seniVj tardar j
tolverf
COMPLETE LIST
Of THB
CONJUGATIONS OF AL L THB SPANISH VERBS, AUXILI AHY, E BQTJLAB, IS-
BBGULAB, BBFLBCnVS, DCPEBSONAL AND DEFBCTIVB, WITH
AN SXAHFLB OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
ATTXILIABT TBBB8.
nOTNrrnvB.
FBESEmr.
ToJum.
To he.
Haber.
Tener.
I Ser.
OEBUND.
Habiendo.
ITaving.
Teniendo.
Ead.
Habido.
1. He.
2. Has.
8. Ha.
1. HemoB.
2. Habeis.
8. Han.
Ihad.
1. Habia.
2. Habias.
8. Habia.
I
Being.
Siendo.
Tenido.
PAST PABTIOIFLB.
I 8idO.
INDIOATIVB.
PBE8SST.
Been.
IhOM.
lam.
Tengo.
Tienes.
Hene.
Tenemos.
Teneia.
Tienen.
Tenia.
Tenias.
Tenia.
Soy.
Erea.
Ea.
Somos.
Sois.
Son.
IHPEEFEOT.
I was.
Era.
Eras.
Era.
Estar.
Estando.
Estado.
Estoy.
Estas.
Est4
Estamos.
Estais.
Estan.
Estaba.
Estabas.
Estaba.
384
COKJUOATIOKB.
1. Habiamoa.
Teniamos.
Estabamos.
2. HabuiiB.
Teniaifl.
Erais.
EatabaiA.
8. Habian.
Tenian.
Eran.
Estaban.
FRETEBIT
Ihad.
/too*.
1. Hnbe.
Tuve.
FuL
Estave.
2. Hnbiste.
Taviste.
Fuiste.
Estuviste.
8. Hnbo.
Tuva
F116.
Estayoi.
1. Hnbimoa.
Tavimoa.
Foimofl.
Estayimos.
2. Hubisteis.
Tuvisteia.
Fnisteis.
EBtayistei&
8. HnbieroiL
Tuvieron.
Faeron.
Estayieron.
lOiall U.
1. Habr6.
Tendp6.
Ser^.
Estar^.
2. Habr^
Tendr^
Ser^.
E9tari0.
8. HabHL
Teudr4.
SeHL
Estar&.
1. Habr^mos.^ Tendr^mos.
2. Habr^ia. Tendinis.
8. Habr&Q. Tendr^.
SerSmos. Estar^mos.
Serbia. Estar^is.
Ser^ Estardn.
DfPERATIVE.
Let me hone.
1. Let me have. Tengayo.
2. Have thou. Ten tiL
8. Letbimbaye. Tenga^.
1. Letnsbaye. Tengamoe.
2. naye je. Tened.
8. Lettbemhaye. Tengan.
Letfnele.
E8t6.
S6. Estd.
Sea. Est6.
Seamoa.
Sed
Sean.
EstemoB.
Estad.
Eaten.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Imayha/te.
1. Haya. Tenga.
2. Hajaa. Tengaa.
8. Haya. Tenga.
1. Hayamos. Tengamoa.
2. Hayaia. Tengaia.
8. Hayan. Tengan.
I may he.
Sea. Estd.
Seas. Estea.
Sea. Est6.
Seamos.
Seais.
Sean.
Estemoa.
Esteia.
Eaten.
CONJUGATIONS.
885
DiPKBFKOT. — First TertninatiafL*
I icofUd hcvoe, I would h&.
1. Habria.
Tendria.
Sena.
Estaria.
2. Habrias.
Tendiias.
Senas.
Estarias.
8. Habria.
Tendria.
Seria.
Estaria.
1. Habriamos. Tendriamos.
2. Habrias. Tendriais.
8. Habrian. Tendrian.
Seriamos. Estariamos.
Serials. Estariais.
Serian. Estarian.
liDOuld ha/ee.
Second Termination,
I would he.
1. Hubiera.
2. Habieras.
8. Habiera.
Tnviera.
Tuvieras.
Tuviera.
Faera.
Faeras.
Fuera.
Estayiera.
Estavieras.
Estaviera.
1. Habieramos. Tavieramos.
2. Hubicrais. Tuvierais.
8. Hubieran. Tavieran.
Fueramos. , Estnyieramos.
Faerais. Estavierais.
Fneran. Estnyieran.
Third Termination,
IfihovXd haw,
1. Habiese. Tnviese.
2. Habieses. Tuvieses.
8. Habiese. Tnviese.
1. Hnbiesemos. Tuviesemos.
2. Hnbieseis. Tuvieseis.
8. Habiesen. Tnviesen.
I should he,
Faese. Estaviese.
Faeses. Estavieses.
Fuese. Estuviese.
Faescmos. Estaviesemos.
Fneseis. Estnvicscis.
Fuesen. Estuyiesen.
FUTUBB.
I might or should hwoe,
1. Habiere. Taviere.
2. Hubieres. Tuvieres.
8. Hnbiere. Taviere.
I might or should he,
Faere. Estaviere.
Faeres, Estavieres.
Faere. Estaviere.
1. Habieremos. Tavieremos.
2. Habiereis. Tuviereis.
8. Habieren. Tavieren.
Faeromos. Estavieremos.
Faereis. Estuvicreis.
Faeren. Estavieren.
* It wiU be obaeryed that, dlllbrent from almost all other gramman, we ^reriaas the
flnt termination, this order appearing to ns more logical and, abore al], more grammatical,
and more in aoootdanee with the slgDlflcatlon and oaes of the three termlnationB.
17
886
GOHJUOATIOKB.
K0DIL8 07 TfiZ TEBES BSaTTLAS OOHJTrGAXIOHS.
HIST CMJVCATEOV.
INFINITIVJI
Hablar. I To speak.
G8BUHD.
Hablando. I Speaking.
HaUada
1 8poken.
i
1. Hablo.
2. Hablas.
8. Habla..
INDIOi
FEES
Swgvltar.
lapeak.
LUVJB.
XBT.
JPluroL
1. HablazQOs.
2. Hablais.
8. Hablan.
1. Hablaba.
2. Hablabas.
8. Hablaba.
UCF8B
I spoke, was
speakiDg, &a
IFEOT.
1. HablabamoflL
2. Hablabais.
8. Hablaban.
1. Habl6.
2. Hablaste.
8. Habl6.
I spoke.
1. HabltooB.
2. Hablasteis.
8. Hablaron.
1. Hablar6.
2. Hablar^
8. Hablarl
IshaUorwiU
qieak.
RTMPIS.
1. HablardmoB.
2. Hablardis.
8. Hablarim.
2. Habla.
8. Hable.
IMPEB
Speak (thon).
ATIVK.
1. Hablemos.
2. Hablad.
8. HaUen.
CONJUaATIOKB.
SUBJUNOnVB.
FBBBENT.
1. Hable.
2. Hables.
8. Hable.
I may speak.
1. Hablemos.
2. Hableis.
8. Hablen.
1. Hablaria.
2. Hablarias.
8. Hablaria.
I should or would
speak.
1. Hablariamos.
2. Hablariais.
8, Hablarian.
aetmd Tmninatum.
1. Hablara.
2. Hablaras.
8. Hablara.
I might, could,
would, or should
speak.
1. Hablaramos.
2. Hablarais.
8. Hablaraa
Third Termination.
1. Hablase.
2. Hablases.
8. Hablaae.
I might, &c.,
speak.
1. Hablasemos.
2. Hablaseis.
8. Hablasen.
1. Hablare.
2. Hablares.
8. Hablare.
I might, ^.,
speak.
1. Hablaremos.
2. Hablareis.
8. Hablaren.
8B0OID €0V JVCIATiOV.
INPIOTTIVB.
Aprender.
1 To learn.
GZRTTSD.
Aprendiendo. • | Learning.
PAST PABnOtPLX.
Aprendido.
Leanied.
88?
888
COHJXrOATIONB.
INDICATIVE.
1. ApraDdo. Ileanu
2. Aprendes.
8. ApreDde.
1. Aprendemos.
2. ApreDdds.
8. Aprdaden.
1. Aprendia*
2. Aprendias.
8. Aprendia.
1. AprendL
2. Aprendiste.
8. ApreDdi6.
I learned, was
learning, &c
1. Aprendiamos.
2. Aprendiais.
8. Aprendian.
PBSTKBIT DSFOnTB.
I learned.
1. Aprendimos.
2. Aprendiflteia.
8. Aprendierom
FCTUBX BDIFLB.
1. Aprender6.
2. Aprender&8.
8. AprendeHL
2. Aprende.
8. Aprenda.
I shall or will
learn.
1. Aprender6mo6.
2. Aprender^s.
8. Aprender4n.
mPERATIVB.
Learn (thou).
1. Aprendamos.
2. Aprended.
8. Aprendan.
1. Aprenda.
2. Aprendas.
8. Aprenda.
SUBJUNCnVR
FBBSBNT.
I may learn.
1. Aprendamos.
2. Aprendais.
3. Aprendan.
iMPEBFEcrr. — First Termination.
1. Aprenderia.
2. Aprenderias.
8. Aprenderia.
I would or should
learn.
1. Aprgpderiamos.
2. Aprenderiala.
8. Aprenderian.
0ONJUOATI0N8.
88d
Second Termination.
1. Aprendiera.
2. Aprendleras.
8. Aprendiera.
1. Aprendiese.
2. Apr6ndiese&
3. Aprendiese.
I might, oonld,
would, or should
learn.
1. Aprendieramos.
2, i^rendierais.
8. Aprendieran.
Third Termination.
I might, &C.,
learn.
1. Aprendiesemos.
2. Aprendieseis.
8. Aprendiesen.
FUTUBE.
1. Aprendiere.
2. Aprendieres.
8. Aprendiere.
I might, &0.,
learn.
1, Aprcndieremos.
2. Aprendiereis.
8. Aprendieren.
Escribir.
Escribiendo.
Eacrito.*
THUD CONJUGATIOH.
iNFiNrnvE.
I To write.
OEBUm).
I * Writing.
PAST PABmCIPLB.
I Written.
INDICATIVR
1. Escribo.
2. Escribes.
8. Escribe.
1. Esoribia.
2. Esoribias.
8. Escribia.
I write.
1. Escribimos.
2. Escribis.
8. Escriben.
IMFEBFECrr.
I wrote, was
writing.
^TblsiltlMODlj
1. Escribiamos.
2. Escribiais.
8. Escribian.
of kregolarity in the Terb AoHMr.
890
OOHJVOATIOKB.
PuraunT Dsmnrx.
1. EaciibL
2. Efloribiste.
8. £0Gribi6.
1. EBdibif^
2. Efloribir^
8. ^oribird.
2. Eacribe.
8. Eflcriba.
1. Esoriba.
2. Escribaa.
8. Escriba.
1. EBoribiiia.
2. Escribiriafl.
8. Escribiria.
1. Esoribiera.
2. Escribieras.
8. Escribiera.
1. Esoribieae.
2. Esoribieses.
8. Esoribieae.
I wrote.
1. Eacribimos.
2. EacribistdB.
8. EaoribieroiL
FUTUBB St2fPLB.
I ahall (or wiU)
write.
1. Eacribirdmos.
2. Esoribir^u.
8. Eaoribir&iL
Write (thou).
Let him, ftc,
write.
IMPEBATTVE.
1. Eacribamos.
2. Escribid.
8. Eacriban.
SUBJDNCnVB.
I may write.
1. Eacribamoa.
2. Esoribua.
8. Eaoribanu
DCPBBFXcr.— 1^^ Termination,
I would (or
ahould) write.
1. Eacribiriamoa.
2. Eacribiriaia.
8. Eacribirian.
Second Termination.
I might, could,
would, or ahould
write.
1. Eacribieramos.
2. Escribieraia.
8. Eacribieran.
Third Termination,
I might, could,
would, or ahould
write.
1. Eacribieaemoa.
2. Eacribieaeis.
8. Eaoribieeen.
OOKJUGATIOHrS.
891
FUTUltX.
1. EsGiibiere. I ndght^ &c^
write.
2. Esoribieres.
8. Escribiere.
1. Escribieremos.
2. Escribiereifl.
8. Esoribiereo.
CfOMFOUND TBNBES.
These are formed hj joining the several tenses of the auxiliary hdber
to the past participle of the verb expressing the action.
INDICATIVE MOOD,
PBBTBBIT IfJDJU'lAlTJS.
IhtHewiUen.
To he escrito.
1. He \ hablado.
Hemos
hablado.
2. Has aprendido.
Habeisv
aprendido.
8. Ha J escrito.
Han
escrita
FLTJFE)
SFBOT.
Ihadepoken,
Ihad learned,
I had written.
1. Habia ^ hablado.
2, Habias L aprendido.
8. Habia J escrito.
To habia hablado.
To habia aprendido.
To hctbia eacrito.
Habiamos ^ hablado.
Habiais I aprendido.
Habian J escrito.
PBSTSBIT AKTEBIOB.
IhadapoJcen.
To hubi
\ aprendido.
I had written.
To hube escrito.
1.
Hnbe ]
hablado.
Hubimos
hablado.
2.
Hubiste
aprendido.
Hubisteis
• aprendido.
8.
Hnbo
escrito.
Hnbieron
escrito.
OOMPOITZn
Tohdbf
'i hablado.
I shaU have learned.
Tohdbt
6 aprendido.
lahaU have written.
Tohdbf
e eacrito.
1.
Habr6 ]
hablado.
Habr6mos ^
hablado.
2.
Habdb
. aprendido.
Habr6is
. aprendido.
8.
Habr4
escrito.
Habrto
escrito.
892
OOKJUGATIOKS.
THB tOSYSV PBnrCIPAL CLASSES OF DtSEGITLAB
▼ESB&
URsicuss.
ACERTAB.
1 To hit the tnari.
INDICATIVEL
PBBSXSi:
1. Acierto.
I hit the mark.
1. Acertamos.
2. Adertaa.
2. Aoertais.
8. Aderta.
3. Aeiertan.
mPKUATIVE.
1. Acertemos.
8. Aderta.
2. Aoertad.
8. Aderte.
8. Acierten
SUBJUNCriVE.
PBB8
KNT.
1. Aderte.
1. Acertemos.
2. Adertes.
2. AoerteiB.
8. Aderte.
8. Aderten.
The following wrbt^ and their compounds, are canjilgated Uke Aoertab :
Acrece&tar.
Toincreaae.
Derrengar.
To break the back.
Adestrar.
To render skllfuL
Despemar.
To cat off theirs.
AlenUr.
To breathe.
Despertar.
To awake.
Apaoentar.
To feed.
Besterrar.
To banish.
Apretar.
Tosqueese.
Empedrar.
To pave.
Arrendar.
To hire.
Empezar.
Tob^.
Asentar.
To place.
Enoerrar.
To lockup.
ABerrar.
To saw.
Enoomendar.
To recommend.
Aterrar.
To throw down.
Enterrar.
To bury.
AtesUur.
ToatoiC
Escannentar.
To take warning.
Atravesar.
TocroBB.
Fregar.
To rob.
Aventar.
To winnow.
Gobemar.
Togoyem.
Calentar.
To wann.
Hekr. «
To freeze.
Cegap.
Toblmd.
Henrar.
To shoe.
Ocprap.
To ehut
Inyemar.
To winter.
Gomenzar.
To commence. |
Hentar.
To mention-
Goncertar.
To agree.
Herendar.
To take a coDation.
Confesar.
To confess.
N^ar.
To deny.
Deoentar.
To taste for the |
Nerar.
To snow.
first time.
1
Pensar.
To think.
CONJUGATIONS.
38^
Quebrar.
To break.
Sosegar.
To quiet
Recomendar.
To recommend.
Soterrac
To bury.
Regar.
To water.
Temblar.
To tremble.
ReTentar.
To burst
Tentar.
To tempt
Segar.
To out down.
Tras^ar.
To rake.
Sembnir.
To sow.
Tropezar.
To stumble.
Sentar.
To set.
SECOND CLASS.
AooflTAB.
1 To put in led.
INDICATIVR
1. Acuesto.
I put in bed.
1. Acostamos.
2. Acnestas.
2. Aoostais.
3. Aonesta.
3. Acuestan.
IMPERATIVK
1. Acostemos.
2. Acnesta.
2. Acostad.
8. Acueste.
SUBJUl
8. Acaesteo
ACTIVE.
•
FREe
E29T.
1. Acueste.
1. Acostemos.
2. Acuestes.
2. Acosteis.
8. Acueste.
8. Acuesten
•
The following verbs, and their eompi
Acordar.
To agree.
Consolar.
To console
Agorar.
To divina
Oontar.
To count
Almorzar.
To breakfast.
Costar.
To cost
To grind.
DegoUar.
To behead.
Aporcar.
To hoe.
Demostrar.
To demonstrata
Aposta^
To bet
Descollar.
To surpass.
Aprobar.
To approve.
Desconsolar.
To discourage.
Asolar.
To waste.
Desolar.
To desobite.
Atronap.
To thunder.
DesoUar.
To skin.
Aveigoiizar.
To shame.
To be impudent
Golar.
To strain.
Emporcar.
To dirty.
Colgar.
To hang.
Enoordar.
To string.
Comprobar.
ToTerify.
Enoontrar.
To meet
17*
su
OOKJUOATIOKB.
Engroaar.
Foraar.
Holgar.
Hollar.
MoBtrar.
Poblar.
Piobar.
Reoordar.
Beooatar.
Begoldar.
Benoyar.
Beprobar.
ToengroflB.
To force.
To rest
To tread.
To show.
To people.
To prore.
Torenund.
To He down.
To belch.
To renew.
To reproTe.
To compensate.
HOTXB.
1. Mnevo.
2. Mueyes.
8. Maeve.
3. Haeve.
8. Maeva.
1. MiieYa.
2. Maevas.
8. Maeva.
BeaoUar.
Bodar.
Bogar.
Soldar.
Soltar.
Sooar.
Sofiar.
ToBtar.
Trocar.
Tronar.
Volar.
Yolcar.
To breathe.
ToroU.
To entreat.
To Bolder.
ToleBBen.
To Boond.
To dream.
To toast.
To barter.
To thonder.
To fly.
TooTertnnu
TBIBD CUSS.
To move.
INDICATIVE.
1. MovemoB.
2. Moveis.
8. Mueyen.
DCPEBATIVB.
. 1. Moyamos.
2. Moved.
8. Maevan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1. MoTamoB.
2. MoYais.
8. Mueyan.
ThefoUowifig terU^ and their eompoundi^ are e<mjugated like Motbb :
Absolyer.
Disolyer.
Doler.
Uoyer.
Holer.
To absolye.
To ^ssolye.
To grieve.
Tondn.
To grind.
Horder.
Betoroer.
Solver.
Torcer.
Volver.
To bite;
To twist again.
To solve.
To twist
To tain.
Atjbndib.
FOVEIB fXiflS.
I
To attend.
CONJUGATIONS.
895
INDICATIVE.
1. Atiendo.
2. Atiendea
8. Atiende.
FBBBENT.
1. Atendemos.
2. Atendeis.
8. Atienden.
2. Atiende.
8. Atienda.
DfFKRATlVE.
1. AtendamoB.
2. Atlffided.
8. Atiendan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1. Atienda.
2. Atiendas.
8. Atienda.
PBBE
lENT.
1. Atendamos.
2. Atendais.
8. Atiendan.
ThefoUamngverbSj and their eomj
08 At
Afloender. . To ascend.
Cemer. To sift
Condescender. To condescend.
Contender. To contend.
Defender. To defend.
Desatender. To neglect
Descender. To descend.
Encender. To kindle.
bndsb:
Entender. To understand.
Extender. To extend.
Heder. To stink.
Hender. To split
Perder. To lose.
Tender. To stretcb ont
Trascender. To transcend.
.Verter. To poor out
Sjemtul
nrra class.
1 To/eel
INDICATIVE.
1. Siento.
2. Sientes.
3. Siente. '
FBEC
KENT.
1. Sentimoe.
2. Sentis.
8. Sienten.
2. Siente.
8. Sienta.
TMFER.
ATIVE.
1. Sentamos.
2. Sentid.
8. Sientan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1. Sienta.
2. Sientas.
8. Sienta.
nuaa
BNT.
1. Sintamos.
2. Sintais.
8. Sientan.
396
OON.JUaATIONS.
IHFEBFBOT.
Mrst Termination.
1. Seotina, &c.
Second Termination,
1. Sintiera.
1. Sintieramos.
2. SintieraB.
2. Sintierais.
8. Sintiera.
8. Sintieran.
Third Termination,
1. Sintiese.
1. SintdesemoB.
2. Sintieses.
2. Sintieseis.
8. Sintiese.
8. Sintiesen.
FUTUBK.
1. Sinliere.
1. Sintieremos.
2. Sintieres.
2. Sintiereis.
8. Sintiere.
8. Sintieren.
The following verbs, and their eompoundsj hone the same irregvl
as Bentib:
Adherir.
To adhere.
Digerir. To digest
AdTertir.
To advert.
Herir. To wound.
Arrependrse.
To repent.
Hervir. To boiL
Aflentip.
To assent
Ingerir. To ingraft.
Conferir.
To confer.
Invertir. To invert.
Consentir.
To consent
Pervertir. To pervert
ContTovertir.
Preferir. To prefer.
Convertir.
To convert
Referir. To refer.
Diferip.
To defer.
Requerir. ' To require.
Diferir.
To differ.
8ULTU CLASS.
Pedib.
1 ToasK
INDICATIVE.
FSBSSNT.
1. Pido.
1. Pedimoa.
2. Pides.
2. Pedis.
8. Pide.
8. Piden.
FBETBSIT.
1. PedL
1. Pedlmos.
2. Pediste.
2. Pedisteis.
8. Pldi6.
8. Pidieron.
OOirJUQATIONS.
897
2. Pide.
8. Pida.
1. Pida.
2. Rdas.
8. Pida.
1. PidamoB.
2. Pedid.
8. Pidan.
SUBJUNCTIVB.
1. Pidiera.
2. Pidieras.
8. Pidiera.
1. Pidamos.
2. Pidais.
8. Pidan.
DCFEEFBOT. — First Terminatum,
1. Pediria, &c.
Second Terminatum.
1. Pidieramos.
2. Rdierais.
8. Pidieran.
Third Terminatum,
1. Pidiese. 1. Pidiesemos.
2. Pidieses. 2. Pidieseis.
8. Pidiese. 8. Pidiesen.
FUTUBB.
1. Pidiere.
2. Pidieres.
8. Pidiere.
1. Pidieremos.
2. Hdiereis.
8. Pidieren.
The following verba^ and their compounds^ have the eame irregularitiee
Of Pedis:
Arrecip.
To benumb.
Gemip.
Togpoon.
CeSir.
To belt
Medir.
Tomeasupe.
Colegir.
TocoUeci.
Begip.
To pole.
Competir.
To contend.
Bendip.
To pendep.
Concebir.
To conceive.
Befiip.
ToqnappeL
Ck>nstrefiir.
To constrain.
Bepetip.
Topepeat
DerreUr.
To melt
Seguip.
To follow.
Deeldr.
Todifisolve.
Servir.
Tosepre.
El^ir.
To elect
Tefiip.
Todya
Embeetir.
To attack.
Vestlp.
To dress.
808
CONJUGATIOXrS.
SEFEBIB CUflEf.
I
To conduct.
CkfsnxuoiB,
1. Oondnzco.
2. Condaces, &o.
1. Oondiige.
2. Oondi^jiste.
8. Oondiyo.
2. Oondnoe.
8. Oondiizoa.
1. Oondnzca, &o. | 1. Oondnzoamofl, &ol
iMFEBFXOT.— J¥ivt Termination.
1. Oondndria, &c \ 1. Condadriaznos, &c
Second Termination.
1. Condi^era, &c. \ 1. Condiyeramos, &c
Third Termination.
1. Oondtjes©, &o. | 1. OondnJeBemos, &a
INDIOATIVB.
FBESEBT.
1. Oondadmos.
2, Condads, &o.
FBBIKBIT.
1. Oondi^jimos.
2. Condi^isteis.
8. Gondiyeron.
IHFERATIVR
1. Condnzcamos.
2. Gondndd.
8. Oondnzcan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
FUTUKB.
1. Oondnjere, Ac | 1- Oondigeremoa, &o.
The following terbe are conjugated lihe Oonduoib .
Adncir. To adduee.
Produdp. To produce.
Dedudr. To deduce.
Reducip. To reduce.
Introdttdr. To Introdace.
Tradudr. To translate.
N. B.— Cbnooff*, and all tctIm ending in otr, of more than two eyllables, follow the
irregnlArity of Qmdudr tn tlie prawnt Indlcattye and BobJancttTe, and in tbe Inq^iative.
JOaewberer^giOar.
CONJUGATIOirS.
809
GQ
'i
r i
I I 1 1
B* o* a* ^
73
iiii
1
1 1.
f f ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
S' i
S i
o g
OQ
^
t 4 i i i i i
1 1
I I i s :s s
«•! f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ffffff-ff'sf
I
O* C W O"
^ ^ ^ ^
1
i
111
o« &• o« o«
_ 73 fO -O •«
E^ EH Eh
"•o S 2
iM ©I 00
*p9/Mdu^
400
CONJUGATIONS.
T
§ C
8?
^ ^
I
i
- 1 h
9 S 9 S
I
9 9 9 9
- ^ f
1
14 11
I
1
1
f
1
f
ill
9 9 I
I
9 9
I
3
I
9
I
I
i i s"
r
If
•a
^ ^ ^ ^ ^
4 I
9 9
a
1 I
I
!
9
I
i
1
1
1
I
i i €
III!
4 ^ ^ ^
(i; 'P9/ji9dvq
QQ
CONJUGATIONS.
401
il9l f fll^
-fill f Hill
«r 8 s
I -I %
i i ^'
I I I
i I I
1^
I fllll
fill i Hill
-H 1 1 I
11^
S 6 ^
t* n n
IS •e •e
•x m ee
» , '
402
I
s «
CONJUGATIOHS.
!
fill I
i
^
I
! i i
• « «
f 5 ^
I I I I I I I I 1 I
fill flit
lea 1 las
oaaJJ nnattn
I I I
!
9-1
III
si?
M M S
!!!
il
f
a
Mil
"^ H H
"S Tf TS
f-l M 00
* , '
I
CONJUGATIOKS.
403
II 11
li i i
i t
<3
i
an I
I
II
!!!
g 8 8
i i i
1. %
it \ Will
i i i
i i
I
I
i ?
I i
I I
.1 I 9^
n 8 8 6 8
-'I 1 8 g
li I U
I
^1
I
I
» I
I
f 8
f f 8
C i I I I
I 1 ? ? S
ti Eh t4
to •« "O
■H e« M
fot/Mdm/
404
COKJUGATIONS.
I
T
a
4
I I
I I I
I i
I
I 1
ii
JSi
g
. ^ i ?
1-4 g S g
f f ^ f f 1 1
6 6
S
gill i i i I I I
11 I i i i § i i I
J
it
tr
i i t
tt t* f-k
tS "e •a
-H « C9
« . ■
Tx/mAuj
OOKJUOATIONB.
406
1 1 1
4 I -sf
^
^ i i
s « «
!8 :9 ^
.rf f 1 I I
I I I I «
, € ^ f f a
il,l I llsss
i
I I
» ^ 1 1
''1 1 1
[^li^
I ^ .
4
4
4 M
III
t t i
I I I
r f I
<^ I s s s
J J J
Eh H H
•ptfjodmi
I
406
CONJirOATIOKS.
?
If
?
I
i €
i
I I I
Iff
i ? ?
f f f
? ^ ?
§
4J 4
I I
iili I lilll
!9
I
? I ^
-^liii I
f f r
? ? ?
? ?g
1.^
^ 5 ^'
H E-« bi
IS
00 b
TM/itfcTuif
OONJVOATIOirS.
407
o
4
1 1
•O '^
CO 9
I
1
I
!
I
TJ T> "O
I I
i
M s ^ "
•o ^ •o •o
f r f
^ 6 i
"8 "o •©
f99/u9dwi
408
COKJUOATIOKS.
T
4
B
§
1
}3
I I s
^
f I
■f ^ ^ I
i f J i
(J
I
I
i^
ii
1 1
t.
&
111!
fill
fill
I III
I '1.1 I
» M M M
III
III
f II
III
f i i 1 i
b fe" fe'
H H H
»-i wn oo g
CONJUGATIONS.
400
A I
-fill I !
t i i i I t ^ ^
i
i I
dl
"S o
III
(I
1 1
III
& 6 si
Eh Eh ^
^TfnpadujLi
18
410
CONJTTOATIONS.
T
o
§
s- I i"
I I
|J
I
11
u 5 n-
II
■8
a
I I
•f f I 1 1
IP I 2 2 «
I I I ^
^ •§ I
n
I i
I I
I I I 1 I I
tit
3 I I
3
^5-3 3 :
im
3 3
£
» M a a s
H E-« H
'p9/d9(huj
COKJTTGATIONS.
411
a;
I I i i t t
!
i i
t 'i
l5 5 fT •§
> n m A
i iJli
I i
i ^
i i i
i i i
* i ^
\\\
M n n
A ^ S
i ^
00 j
« I i j
nil
^ui
i
t
hill
t i i i i
i Hi
i a li
M M M
&-• H Eh
"S TJ t3
i-t 04 CO
»4
I
i»x«x&As::xs.
.sss S SSsss
w JS
1 jj«|-flx«5|
.- 1' .- I » 5 1 S" 1 1
I 1 I I I I I I I I I
5 «? s
« E • I ^ i £
.lllltll
%i.it I -rill I fiili
^ « I 1
— ^ 2? 2?
? i f I I I I I I I I
« ^ «.
c « «
« - ' 5 s' »
t« H e«
I 1 *• I I • • I
«
I i I
D
g
8 &
•3 3Q
CONJUGATIONS.
413
i i'i ^ i i I 1 1 1
o o o o
tiii
o o o
f
•§
f
'o
'O o ^
^ ^ ^
€ i i t t
§ 8 S g a
4 I
% i ^
I I
•^1 -I II -I I
i ^ i 4
^ -§ •§ -§
o o o o
1 1 ^
I
t
o o o
lllH
o o o o o
£ .f ^ f I
1 1 <^ <^ <^
iS 5' .§
E-« &-• &^
*p9/49dtUJ
S
414
OOKJUGATIONS.
T
a;
J
I I
i
— w o
^ 53 :g s
o o o o
^
fill I I
„ J J S
L o o 5 o
If
o o o o
f^ t € € i
f I i i i
I I I J I
o 5 5 S S 5
1
g
o
4
S
i
45
-I
j^l I HJJI
fill I fiiii
^1? I
o o o
I
I f If I
H o o 5 o
1^
1 1
s ^
S "^s f
11 « 00
OONJUOATIOHB.
416
• 8.
J
!
It
•s 'S g
P4 P^ ^
£
s.
sf
i"
I ! 1
p* p« p«
lit
p4 Q* Q*
i ^ €
(^ A4 C C £
■S -2 •*
&' I I
2 I "i
^ ^ a-
I I I
p« s. s*
-1
f
1
I -
' A4 £ A
^
1^ g
I :g I
§
S.
a g. E
^ I Iff
1 s ? ^a ^
g.
^ :§ ^
g. g. g.
ail
6 i i
H H H
5
' * ' J
416
COKJITGATIOKS.
I
T
1. it
P* o« P«
ft< ft< PL« »<
!l
If I
- I S 5
I I. I £
^ f
p4
If
fl
A £ I £
oi
lit
If!
p. & p<
1 1
r
f r f
:c s -c
.1
1 ^
4^
ill
A4 £ £
5" ^ J
H Eh El
S a S
^ . '
"I
1 «
It
OONJUOATIOSS.
417
I
• ■i
! I
•I
I
m
Ml-
g § 8 g
Pn ^ ^ ^
I
f i
I
I
f^ fri A<
HI
i € €
£ H^ £
1 1 ^
t- i I
^ I I
cu ^ ^
I I I
00 a
fi
f i
S. I
ii
I
I I I i
I
III
I I 1. 1 1 !
P^ P^
& M ^
H Bh tH
2 S S
> — , >
799/iMftcf/
18*
S
418
CONJUGATIONS.
I
it
&• o* o* o«
& o* cr o«
I I I I
I I ^ -9 I
f f f f
I I "i
& & I
^
g; 'i
III lllll
-nil ^^ nil
I C f
g-
cr cr
J » .
I
cr o* d* o* o*
s s s
H Eh H
'P»/MdlUJ
GONJTjaATIONS,
410
I
t -B
.1 II
^
s
t "fi t
€ I i i
•B t! t!
i € € i
s s s
«
i I
^ I I I 4 4
-iiii 4 I
L-l I
iS
•fi T tJ
t t
M s s s
i & &
H Eh H
i-t C9 CO ^
-ps/jifdwj
420
C0KJUGATI0K8.
T
g
I
I I
I I
1 1 S 8 S S S
I s -i
If f lllll
I
? 1 g e I
rf- f * f
111 I r||i 1
I » I I J I * * I
(2 m q8 n GQ (2
CQ QQ do
•^11 H I
A .1
i i i
I I s f g
II If I II ill
sals
4f C f
& A ax A
00 S SB « V
i
1
1
%
X
A
1
1
M
6
i
g
H
e<
H
S
s
i
COKJUOATIONB.
421
1
•a
1 1 I 1
V
f
I f
S
11111
i i i € €
111
8. 5 I
■S "S
I 3
I I
-ml I III II
«
^
ill
•3 -i
s s s s
s §
I r r r
f^ .S •S •S3
1 1 1 1
S n w ra
H H ti
'pg/Mduij
4»
COVJUGATIOSS.
T
}
I
.1
1 1
1.
3 f I f
%
-f
-I
I
1^
? I
iU II
I
?
I
III I
i § ii
? ? f I
^ 1 f ^ 1
I ? ? f I
f f f i
I I I I
S 3
11
?llf
s
? ? ?l
? ? ?l
& %' 6*
H E4 £4
to •o ns
'pM/Mdhui
ri
^- 1
I
CONJUGATIONS.
423
V
1 1
I
1 -g
111
f f ^
fill
^ ? I f I" f
Jill I I
§
•i g g
I s
-ill I I III II
I 1
11 ? I
>• >- >• >•
1^
1 1.
1
I I II II
t> p* t> r> P*
6 6 i
H H #5
'P9/U9€kui
4S4
OOHJVOATIOH8.
<3
T
§
i
^. 1 ^
I I I
t> > >
I . I
E I e
nil I run
'f
llf !
till
I I
i
i i € M
llll
* i^ s' f <
III-
I J I -s ^
. i ^ I 6 & I I I I
I
€ I
f> i> i> ►
f
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
>
^
>
^
i
^
g'
H
E-i
H
S
_2
1
*p9fjaduq
CON/VOATIOKS.
425
^A i i i i i i i i i
I Iff t III
€ i g i ^ fffif
> t> >. t» >.>>>>
1 1
.3 I -ij
"s I « I J Hill
t i ^1
U
^ 1 1 f f
tS t> p: i>: p
J
^
^
H
E^
H
^
*©
•a
vH
04
00
y»/Mdvij
I
43$
COVJUGATIOirS.
oomraAxnnr of a verb dt thb bselbctiye sqbx
IM'INITIVE.
I To waflh 006*8 adL
GEBTSD.
Urindose.
Uridon.
I Waaliiiig one's sd£
PASr PASnCEPLX.
I Washed one's self
EfDICATIVR
L llekfa
2. Te hTML
a. SekTB.
1. IfekyabiL
2. Te larabas.
S. SeUvaba.
IwashmjselE
I was washing,
washed, or nsed
to wash mjself
1. Noshmanofl.
2. Oskvais.
8. Sehvan.
1. Nos kyabamoa.
2. Oslayabais.
8. Sekraban.
FBSTERIT DXFESITB.
1. Me kT6. I washed mjnelL j 1. Nos kT&mos.
2. Xekvaste. 2. Oskrasteis.
8. Sekv6. I 8. Sekvaron.
FUTUBB SQCPLB.
1. ¥ekvar6.
2. Tekvards.
8. SekvariL
I shaD wash mj-
sell
1. No8 kyardmos.
2. Oskyar^is.
8. Sekvaiia.
2. L&vote.
8. lirese.
Wash thyself.
nCPEBATIVE.
1. Lay6mono&
2. Layaos.
8. L¥se.
C0KJU6ATI0KS.
427
1. He lave.
2. Te laves.
8. Selave.
1. Melayaria.
2. Telayarias.
8. Se lavaria.
1. He lavara.
2. Telavaras.
8. Se lavara.
1. Helavase.
2. Telavases.
8. Selavose.
1. Helavare.
2. Telavares.
8. Selayare.
sdbjukctive.
VBMBSST,
I may vrash my-
self.
1. Nos lavemos.
2. Oslaveis.
8. Selaven.
DCPBBFEOT. — Mrst Terminatioiu
I would wash my-
self:
1.' Nos layariamos.
2. Oslavariais.
8. Selayariaa.
8ec&nd Termination,
I might, could,
wonld, or should
wash myselfl
1. Nos lavaramos.
2. Oslayarals.
8. Selavaran.
Third Termination.
I mighty could,
would, or should
wash myself.
1. Nos layasemos.
2. Oslavasei^.
8. Se layasen.
FUTUBB.
I might or should
wash myself.
1. Nos layaremos.
2. Oslayareis.
8. Selayaren.
Ayudarse.
Ayud&ndose.
Ayud^ose.
INFINITIVE.
To help each other.
GSBT7in>k
I Helping each other.
PAST PASnOIPLB.
I Helped each other.
428
COKJtTGATIOHB.
1. Noe aynda- We he^ eaoh
mo8. other.
2. Osajudais.
8. Be ayudan.
INBICATIVB.
DfPEBFIOT.
1. Nob ajnda- We used to help
bamoe. each othec
2. OsajndabaSs.
8. Seayudaban.
FBSTXBIT DJEFLNITX.
1. Nos ayud4- We helped each
moB. other.
2. Os ayudaeteis.
8. 8e ayudaroD.
FDTUBB UMFLB.
1. Nob ajuda- We shall h
r6moB. each other.
2. Ob ajudar^lB.
8. Se ayndarim.
1. Ajnd^monoB.
2. AjndaoB.
8. AytLdense.
nCFERATiyE.
Let QB help each other.
Help each other.
Let them help each other.
1. Nob aynde-
moB.
2. Ob ajndelB.
8. Be aynden.
We may help each
other.
SUBJTJNOnVK.
ncFESFXCT. — I^nt Termination.
1. NoBayndaria- We would help
moB.
2. Ob ayndariaiB.
8. Be ayndarian.
Second Termination,
1. Nob aynda- We might, could,
ramoB. would, or should
help each other.
2. Ob ayudaralB.
8. Se ayndaran.
each other.
Third Termination.
1. Nos ayndase- We might, could,
moB. would, orshoaM
help each other.
2. OsayadaseiB.
8. Se ayndasexL
FUTUBK.
1. Nob ayndaremos,
2. OsayndareiB.
8. Se ayudaren.
We might or should help each
other.
OONJUGATIOHS.
429
Imperfect.
Pret Dff.
Fu,U Simple,
IXFEBSOH AI VEBB8.
Amanboeb. I To grow Ught.
INDICATIVB.
Sdiflb Txnbes.
It grows light
Amaaece.
Amanecia.
Aixianeci6.
Amaneoeri.
It was growing light
It grew light
It will grow light
Compound Teitoics.
Fret. Inc^f. Ha amaneddo..
Pluperfect. Habia amaneddo.
Anterior. Hnbo amaneddo.
Comp. Future. Habr6 amaneddo.
It has grown light
It had grown light
It had grown light
It will have grown light
Amanezca.
IMPERATIVB.
I Let it grow light
#
SUBJUNCTTIVE.
Sdcflb Tenses.
Present. Amanezca.
(Amaneceria.
Amaneciera.
Amaneciese.
Future. Amanedere.
It may grow light
r might, ^
It J should, or I grow light
[ would J
It should grow light.
OoMPouND Tenses.
Perfect. Haja amanecido.
'Habria 1
Pluperf . Hnbiera l«°«^^
[Hubiese J ^^^^•
Comp. Future. Hnbiere amaneddo.
It may have grown light
(might have, 1
should hav<y»rU'7^
would ha^ J ^'^^^
It should have grown light
N. B. — Anoeheeerj to grow dark, is conjugated in the same manner,
and has the same irregularity.
430
CONJUGATIONS.
Nbtah. 1 To mow.
INDICATIVE.
SmPLB TtaBKS.
Freient.
Imperfect.
Fret. D(f.
Future,
Nieva.
Nevaba.
Nev6.
Nevarl
It snows.
It was snowing.
It snowed.
It will snow.
OOMFOUKD TeZTSBS.
Fret. Ifkdef Ha nevado!
Fluperfect. Habia nevado.
Anterior. Habo nevado.
Comp. Future. Habr4 nevado.
It has snowed.
It had snowed.
It had snowed.
It will have snowed.
nCPERATlVK.
Meve.
1 Let it snow.
•
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.
Freeent.
Imperfect.
Future.
Nieve.
fNevaria.'
J Nevara.
[ Nevase, ^
Nevare.
•
It I
It
Itfi
nay snow.
' might, 1
should, or Isnow.
. would J
Jiould snow.
Compound Tenses.
Ferfect. Haya nev
Habria '
Flvperfeet. J Hubiera .
tmibiesej
Comp. Future. Hubiere n
ado.
nevado.
Levado.
It I
It.
Its
oay have snowed.
might have,
should have, or .snowed.
would have
hould have snowed.
K R — ffeUvr^ to freeze, is c(H\}agated in the same manner, and has
the same tenses irregular.
Tbokab.
OOKJUGATIOKS.
' I To thunder.
431
Present.
Imperfect,
Fret Drf.
Future,
INDICATIVE.
BiMFiB Tenses.
Traena.
Tronaba.
Tron6.
Tronarl
It thnnderB.
It was thundering.
It thundered.
It will thunder.
OoMPoxTNB Tenses.
Fret, Indef, Ha tronado.
Fluperfect Habia tronado.
Anterior. Hnbo tronado.
Comp. Future. Habrd tronado.
It has thnndered. "
It had thundered.
It had thundered.
It win have thundered.
Tmene.
mPEBATIVE.
I Let it thunder.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
SUBJUNCTIVR
Simple Tenses.
Tmene.
Tronaria.1
Tronara. I
Tronase. J
Tronare.
It may thunder.
' might, 1
It < should, or I thunder.
would J
It should thunder.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect, Haya tronado.
(Habria
Hubiera .tronado.
Hubiese
Comp. Future, Hubiere tronado.
It may have thundered.
(might haye, 1
should have, or I thnndered.
would have J
It should have thundered.
K B. — Llowr^ to rain, is coigugated like this verb, and chauges also
the o into ua in the same tenses. E8ecmh4i/r^ to freeze ; ^aniear, to
hail; Uovvsnar^ to drizzle; and relampaguearj to lighten, are all regular.
432
OONJTTGATIOKS.
Haoeb, to he (when employed in reference to time and weather).
INDICATIVE.
81MFUS TXNBES.
Present,
Imperfect.
Pret Def.
Future.
Hace.
Hacia.
Hizo.
Hard.
It is.
It was.
It was.
It will be.
CoMPomno Tenbbs.
Pret Indif. Ha hecho.
Pluperfect Habia hecho.
Anterior, Hnbo hecho.
Comp. Future. Habr4 hecho.
It has been.
It had been.
It had been.
It will have been.
DiPERATtVE.
I Let it be.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Sdcplb Tenses.
Present Haga.
(Haria.
Hiciera.
Hiciese.
Future. Hidere.
Perfect
It may be.
(mighty
should, or
wonld
It should be.
Ibe.
OOMFOXTND TEZnSBS.
Haja hecho. .
(Habria
Hubiera .hecho.
Hnbiese ^
Comp. Future. Hubiere hecho.
It may have been.
might have,
It H sliould have, or
wonld have
It should have been.
1
Habeb, when signifying there to he.
Hay.
Habia.
Huba
Eabrl
(There is,
I There are,
j There was.
( There were.
There will be.
Ha habido.
Habia habido.
Hubo habido.
Habr4 habido.
(There has been.
J There have been.
There had been.
There had been.
There ahaU have
been.
Haya.
Ilava.
Ilabria.
Hubiera,
Hubiese.
Hubiere,
CONJUGATIONS.
Haya habido
Let there be.
There may be.
r There might,
-j could, would, or
I should be*
There might or
should be.
Habria habido.
Hubiera habido.
Hubiese habido.
Hubiere habido.
433
There may have
been.
There might,
could, would, or
should have
^ been.
There might or
should have
been.
DEFECTIYE&
The following verba are found used only in the teraes and persons given
in the annexed examples:
Places.
To please.
INDICATIVE.
Present, Sdpers, sing., Place.
Imperf. " " Placia.
Fret. Drf. " « Plugo.
It pleases.
It was pleasing.
It pleased.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present. Bdpers.ySing.y Plegue.
Mperf. " « (Pluguiera.
{ Pluguiese.
Comp. Future. " Pluguiere.
SOLER.
It may please.
It would please.
It might please.
It should please.
To he wont.
Suelo.
Sueles.
Suele.
Solemos.
Soleis.
Snelen.
19
INDICATIVE.
PBESENT.
I am wont.
Thou art wont.
He is wont.
We are wont.
Ton are wont.
They are wont.
434
CONJUGATIONS.
DCPEBFECT.
Solla.
Solias.
Solia.
Soliamos.
Soliais,
Sollaa.
Yackr.
I was wont.
Thou wast wont.
He was wont.
We were wont
You were wont.
They were wont.
To lie dead.
No part of this verb is made nse of except the third persons of the
present indicative, yoM and yaeeny which are generally inscribed on
tombstones. *
coir JITGATIOir OF A VEBB IH TEE PASSIVE VOICE.
Ser perdonado.
INFINITIVE.
I To be pardoned.
GEEUND.
Siendo perdonado. | Being pardoned.
PAST PABTiarLE.
Ilabicndo sido perdonado. | Ilaving been pardoned.
INDICATIYE.
PRESENT.
1. Soy perdona- I am pardoned.
do.
2. Eres perdo-
nado.
3. Es perdonado.
1. Somos perdonados.
2. Sois perdonados.
8. Son perdonados.
IMPEKFECT.
1. Era perdona- I was or used to
do. be pardoned.
2. Eras perdonado.
8. Era perdonado.
1. Eramos perdonados.
2. Erais perdonados.
8. Eran perdonados.
CONJUGATIONS.
435
P22ETERIT DEFINITE.
1. Fui perdona- I was pardoned.
do.
2. Fiiisto perdonado.
8. Fu6 perdonado.
1. Fnimos perdonados.
2. Fuisteis perdonados.
8. Fueron perdonados.
FUTUBE SIMPLE.
1 . Ser6 perdo- I shall be* par-
nado. doncd.
2. Scrds perdonado.
8. Serd perdonado.
1. Ser6nios perdonados.
2. Serais perdonados.
3. Ser&n perdonados.
IMPERATIVE.
2. S6 perdonado. Be pardoned,
8. Sea perdonado.
1. Seamos perdonados.
2. Sed perdonados.
8. Sean perdonados.
SUBJUifCJTIVE.
PBESEirr.
1. Sea perdonado. I may bo par-
doned.
2. Seas perdonado.
8. Sea perdonado.
1. Seamos perdonados.
2. Seais perdonados.
8. Sean perdonados.
IMPEBFEOT. — First Termination.
1. Seria perdona- I would be par-
do. doned.
2. Serias perdonado.
8. Seria perdonado.
1. Seriamos perdonados.
2. Serials perdonados.
8. Scrian perdonados.
Second Termination.
1. Fuera perdona- I might, could,
. do. would, or
should bo par-
doned.
2. Fneras perdonado.
8. Fuera perdonado.
1. I^leramos perdonados.
2. Fuerms perdonados.
8, Fueran perdonados.
436
CONJtJGATIOKS,
Third Termination,
1, Fuese perdona- I might, could,
do. would, or
should be par-
doned.
2. Fuescs perdonado.
8. Fuese perdonado.
1. Fuesemos pcrdonados.
2. Fucseis perdonados.
8. Fuesen perdonados.
FUTUBE.
1. Fuere perdona- I might or
do. should be par-
doned.
2. Fueres perdonado.
8. Fuere perdonado.
1. Fueremos perdonados.
2. Fuereis perdonados.
8. Fueren perdonados.
Compound TenBe&
INDICATIVE.
PBETKRIT IXDETUnTB.
1. lie si do perdo-
nado.
2. Has sido per-
donado.
8. Ila sido perdo-
nado.
1. Ilttbia sido I
perdonado.
2. Ilabias sido
perdonado.
8. Ilabia sido
perdonado.
1. Ilubo sido I
perdonado.
2. Hubiste sido
perdonado.
8. Hubo sido
perdonada
I have been par-
doned.
1. nemos sido perdonados.
2. Ilabeis sido perdonados.
8. Han sido perdonados.
PLUPEEFECT.
had been par-
doned.
1. Habiamos sido perdonados.
2. Ilabiais sido perdoandos.
8. Uabian sido pcrdonadost
AXTE5I0R.
had been par-
doned.
1. Ilubimos sido perdonados.
2. Hubisteis sido perdonados.
8. Hubieron sido perdonados.
CONJUGATIONS.
437
1. nabr6 sido
perdoiiado.
2. Ilabriis sido
perdonado.
3. Uabrii sido
perdonado.
1. Ilaya sido
perdonado.
2. Ilayas sido
perdonado.
3. Ilaya sido
perdonado.
1. Ilabria sido
perdonado.
2. Ilabrias sido
perdonado.
3. Ilabria sido
perdonado.
1. Ilubiera sido
perdonado.
COMPOUND FUTTJBE.
I shall have 'been
pardoned.
1. Ilabrdmos sido perdonados.
2. IIabr6is sido perdonados.
8. Ilabrdn sido perdonados.
SUBJUNCTTYE.
PERFECT.
I may have been
l)ardoned.
1. Ilayamos sido perdonados.
2. Ilayais sido perdonados.
3. Ilayan sido perdonados.
PLUPEPJEOT. — First Termination.
I would have been
pardoned.
1. llabriamos sido perdonados.
2. Habriais sido perdonados.
3. nabrlan sido perdonados.
Second Termination,
2. Ilubieras sido
perdonado.
3. Ilubiera sido
perdonado.
1. Hubiesesido
perdonado.
I might, could,
would, or
should have
been pardoned.
1. Ilubieramos sido perdonados.
2. Hnbierais sido perdonados.
8. Ilubicran sido perdonados.
Third Termination,
2. Hubieses sido
perdonado.
3. Hubiesesido
perdonado.
I might, could,
would, or
should have
been pardoned.
1. Ilnbiesemos sido perdonados.
2. Hubieseis sido perdonados.
3. Hubiesen sido perdonados.
438
COKJUGATIOXS,
rUTURE COMPOUND,
1. Ilabiere sido I might or should
perdonado. have been par-
doned.
2. Ilabicrcs sido
perdonado.
8. Ilabiere sido
perdonado.
1. Hubferemos sido perdonadoau
2. Hnbiereis sido perdonados.
8. Hubieren ado perdonadoe.
LIST
OF THE PRINCIPAL ffiEEGULAR YEBBS IN THE SPAIflSH
IMGUAGE.
N. 'R.—Thejigwrea placed after each verb rtfer to (he page at which the modd conjugation
far that verb is to be found. For instance, the number 808 showe that Aduoib
is conjugated Wee CojXDVcm, found at page 39a
Absolver, 8M.
Abetraer, 422.
Acertar, 892.
Acordar, d9S.
Acostar, 893.
Acrecentor, 892.
Adeetrar, 892.
Adherlr, 895.
Adquirir, 399.
Advertir, 395.
Aducir, 898.
Ac:orar.393.
Alentar, 392.
Almorzar, 393.
Amolar, 393.
Asdar, 400.
Apacentar, 892.
ApoBtar, 393.
Aprobar, 393.
Aprctar, 892.
Arreclree, 300.
Arrcndar. 892.
Arrepentirflo, 395.
Ascender, SSH.
Asentar, 392.
Apentir, .^95.
Ascrrar, 302.
Asestar, 302.
ABir, 401.
ABolar, 393.
Apoldar, 383.
Atcndcr, 3M.
Atontar. .392.
Atcrrar (echar por tlcr-
ra), 392.
Atoatar (rellcnar), 892.
Atracr, 422.
Atravesar, 302.
Aventar, 392.
Aventaree, 392.
Avcrgonzar, 898.
Bendeclr, 408.
Ctiber, 408.
Caer, 422.
Calentar, 802.
Cegar, .392.
Cefiir, 890.
Ceraer, 394.
Ccrrar, 392.
Cimcntar. 892.
Cocer, 404.
Colar, 893.
Colesrir, 396.
Colgar, 803.
Comedirec, 896.
Comcnzar, 392.
Corapotir, 896.
Conccbir, .396.
Conccrnir, 395.
Concertar,'392.
Conconlar. 30.3.
Condcpccnder, 894.
Condolorec, 304.
Condncir, .398.
Conferlr, 895.
Confcsar, .392.
Conocer, 898.
Consetnilr, 306.
Consent Ir, .305.
Consolar. 803.
Conptrenir, 896.
Contar, 393.
Contener, like TENvn.
(See anzlliary yerbB.)
Contender, 304.
Contradccir, 406.
Controvcrtir. 395.
Contraor, 422.
Convert ir. 395.
Correglr, 396.
Bar, 40B.
Decacr, 423.
Decentar. 893.
Decir,406.
Dedncir, 896.
Defender, 301
Deferir, 895.
Dei,'ollar, 393.
Dcmoler, 394.
Dcmobtrar, 2SS.
Dencgar, .392.
Denoiitar, 893.
Derreni^r, .392.
Derretir, 396.
Deaaveulr, 424.
Descender, SM.
Dcecollar, 893.
Dcpcordar, .303.
Descomedirftc, 386.
Dcsflocar, 303.
Deebacer, 410.
Deehclar. .^02.
DePteir. :J96.
Deeembrar, S92.
Dc«olar, 393.
Deaollar, n03.
Dcsovar, .'>n3.
Dcppcdlr, .306.
Despcmar, 392.
Dcspcrtar, 3J%.
Desterrar, .309.
Dcflplesrar. 302.
DcsverRonzarso, 393.
Dezmar. i^2.
Dfpccmlr. 305.*
Difcrir, fm.
DIfirerir. 305.
Difconlar. :^01.
Di-^olver, r.f) l.
Divert Ir. mij.
Doler. .301.
Donnir, 407.
Elesrfr, 306.
Embertir, 806. '
Empedrar, 392.
440
LIST OF IBBSGULAB YEBBS.
Empesar, 391
Kmi)orcar, 393.
EDCUuder, ri]>l.
Kncensar, 2212.
Enccrrar, 'J»i.
KucumcuUiir. aOt.
Eucouirar, :393.
Eiicuniar, :jU3.
En^fruirse, 396.
Eiigrusar, 303.
Eumcudar, 393.
Enrodar, :^il3.
£nisaii;'rcutar, 39S.
Entcnder, :J9t
Enterrar, 392.
EiivcHtir, 396.
Ennilr, 408.
Errar, 409.
Escanuentar, 89S.
Efcocer, 404.
Eeforzar, ;)9^}.
EsTAB. (bee ftiudUaiy
vcrbn.)
Estrcnir, 396.
Expcdlr, :}96.
Extcudcr, 3^
Forzar, 393.
Frcgar, 392.
Gcmlr, 396.
Gobcrxuir, 392.
IlABint. (See anzlliarics
and ImpcrBOiuUs.)
Tlacir. 410.
Hodcr, mL
Ilclar, 392.
Ilonchir, 396.
Ilender, 391
Hcflir, 396.
Hcrir, 395.
ITcrrar, 392.
Hcn'ir,395.
Holijar, 393.
Uollar, 393.
Imped fr, 996.
lnccnpar,_892.
Indncir. 398.
Inferir, 896.
In^rir, 396.
Inqalrir, 399.
Introdncir. 396.
Invcrnar, 392.
Invertir, 395.
Investlr, 396.
Ir, 411.
UoTer, 891
Valdeclr, 402.
Blanireaiar. 392.
Haniencr, like Teneb.
(See auxiliary verbs.)
Medir, 396.
Mentar, 392.
Meotir. 395.
Merendar, 392.
Holer, 394.
Morder, 391
Morir, 407.
Moetrar, 392.
Hover, 896.
Necar, 392.
Nevar, 392.
Olr,418.
Oler, 411
Pedir. 396.
Pcnfiar, 392.
Perder, 3M.
Pervcrtir, 396^
Placer, 483.
Plcjmr, 392.
Poblar, tm.
Podcr 416.
Podrir, 416.
Poncr, 417.
Prefcrir, 395.
Probar, 393.
Produclr, 898.
Profcrir, 395.
Qnebrar, 392.
Qocrer, 41S.
Jiigar«418.
BecomeDdar, 392.
Recordar, 893.
Becofitar, 393.
Bednclr, 398:
Befcrir. J»5.
Bcear, 393.
Bej,dr. 396.
Besoldar, 892.
Belr, 419.
BemcDdar, 892.
Bcndlr, 396.
Benovar, 898.
Beflir, 396.
Bepetir, 396.
Beqaebrar, 392.
Beqoerir, 895.
Be8Coiitiar,a93.
BesoUar, 893.
BeteDtar, 392.
Beveotar, 392.
Be\ olcar. 3113.
liodar, 393.
Boer.
Bpgar, 393.
Saber, 490.
Balir, 421.
Sati6&cer, 410.
Segar. 892.
Sef,TiIr, 896.
Sembrar, 8D2.
Sentar, 892.
Betir, 895.
SsB. (See anxUiary
verba.)
Servir, 396.
Serrar, 392.
Soldar, 893.
Soler, 483.
Soltar, 393.
Solver, 894.
Sonar, 398.
Sonar. 393.
Sosegar, 39a.
Soterrar, 3I>4.
Sngcrir, 395.
Temblar, 899.
Tender, 894.
Tenkr. (See anxflimrr
verbs.)
Tcflir, 896.
Tcntar, 392.
Torcer, 404.
Tostar, 393.
Tradacir, 898.
Traer, 423.
Trascender, 394.
Trascordanie. 893.
Tra»et»ar, 392.
Trocar, 893.
Tronar, 893.
Tropezar, 39S.
Valer, 428.
Vcnir, 421
Ver, 426.
Verier, 3M.
Vestir, 896.
Volar, 898.
Volcar, 893.
Volver, 394.
Yacer,431
Z«herir,S05.
VOOABULAET,
CONTAIXIXG ALL THE SPANISH WORDS USED IN THE GRAMMAR.
N. B.—Thejlffures ctfter each definition r^er to the lessons in which the loords
have been explained in the Grammar.
A, ah, prep., to, at. In.— Voy A Francia, I
am goini? to France; a lo menos, at
leant ; d la vcrdad, indeed ; a la espanola,
in the Spanish fashion. L. 4.
Abajo, m-bah'-ho, adv., below, down,
down-Btairs. L. 38.
Abalanzar, ahbah-lan-thar*, to spring, to
rush. L. 57.
Abandonar, ah-ban-do-nar', to abandon, to
c^ive up, to leave. L. 53.
Abanico, ah-bah-ne'-oo^ s. ra., ftm. It. 68.
Abierto, afi-b^-air'-to, p. p. irr. of Abbib.
(which see). L. 62.
Abojrado, ah-bo-gah'-do^ s. m., lawyer, ad'
vocate. L. 49.
Aborrecible, a/i-bor-rai-thr-blai, adl., hate-
ftil. L. iM.
Abnl, ah-brf*fl\ s. m., April. L. 28.
Abrir, a'i-bre^r\ to open. Abrir»e, to be
opened, to blow (of flowerB). L. 28.
Acft, a'^-<ra', adv., here.— ^c</ y alhi, here
and there. L, 18.
Acabar, ah-cah-bar\ to finish, to cnd.—Aca-
barde, to be just, to have jii^t.— Ac I'/nr
con, to kill, to put an end to, to do.strov
L. 28. ''
Academia, ah-cah-dai'-md-a, a. f., academy.
Li. 51.
Acaao, ah-cay-Ao, adv., perchance by
chance.— Si acu^o. if at all.— Por bI acaso.
in case that. L. m,
Accidonte, ac-th^-daln'-tai, b. m., accident.
L. -lO.
Accion, ac-aa-One'^ s. f., action, share. L.
Accnto, ah-thfUn'-(o, s. m., accent. L 47
Aceptar, ah-tha'in-tar'. to accept. L 45 *
Acerca, afi'thair^-ca, prep, ^cerca de,'ab6ut.
Li. 49.
Acertar, ah-thalr-tar*^ to make out to hit
the mark, to succeed, to be right (/. e to
conjecture risrht). L. »4. v ^ , lu
Acierto. ah-thji-car'-to, b. m., snccess. L. 62
Acomoclar, ah-cd-mO-dar\ to accommodate.
to suit. L. 31.
Acorapaflar, ali-cl^m-pan-yar', to accom
pany. L. 47.
Aconsejar, ah-cdn-sai-har' . to coungel to
advise. L. 45. '
Acordar, ah-cdr-dar', to accord, to acree to
iuuQ.—Acordarse, to remember. L. 46
Acostar, ah-d^s-tar*^ to lay down.— .ievtf-
tor#€, to lie down, to go to bed. L. 85.
Actual, ac-lwal\ acy., present. L. 52.
Acudir, ah-coo-deer' , to haste, to run, to
turn (to), to refer (to). L. 49.
Acncrdo, ah-cwair'-do, s. ra., lUfrccment,
accord, decision (of a court). L. 42.
Acull4,, ah-cool-ya'y adv., there.— Aqul y
acvlld, to and ho: here and there. L. 18.
Adelantar, ah-dai-lan-tar', to advance, to
make process. L. 36.
Adelante, ah-dai-kui'-tai, adv., forward.—
En ctddante, henceforward.— /^tfe/a/ifo/
CO on I go ahead ! L. 43.
Ademan, ali-dai-tnan\ s. m., posture, air.
L. 41.
Adcmdfl, ah-dcU-mas', Prep., besides ; adv.,
moreover, besides. L. 37.
Adentro, ah-dain'-tro, adv., in, within, in-
side. L. 47.
Adivinar, a/i-dee-vee-nar'. to guess, to di-
vine. L. 46.
Ad}etivo, ad-hai-iee'-vo, s. m., acUective.
L. 43.
Admirable, ad-mee-rah'-btai, adj., admlro-
I ble. wonderfhl. L. 61.
Admiracion, ad-mee-rah-m-bfuf. e. f., ad-
I miration, wonder. L. 51.
, Admirar, ad-m^e-rar' , to admire, to won-
I dcrat. L. 61.
' ^^3^"?^' (SeeDoKDE.) L. 0.
A j^ , , ' ^-^^-re/^r', to acquire. L. ^o
Adverbial, ad^air-m-al', adj., adverbial.
iv. 60.
Adverbio, e. m.. adverb. L. 4.?
Advcrtir, Oil-rair-tfier' , to advlw. to mcn-
L 43 ^ °"*' *** ^^^' ^^ observe.
A^r«>, ah-ai'-rai-o. adj.. nrrinl. L. 4S.
^^^^^^o\(tf>-falk-(aJi'thZ-onr\ g. f., affec-
tation. L. 24.
Afectar, ah-faiJc-fnr', to affect. L. A^.
face)'' ^if^'^'^^^^ to «^a^'e, to paint (the
Afirmacion, ah.ffcr-mah-thc-dne\ b. f., af-
nrmatlon. L. 24.
Aflrmar, ah-feer-mnr' , to affirm, to make
A £^' ^ strcnirthcn. L. 48.
Aflijlr, ah-Jlee-h4fPr', to afflict. L. 4S.
Afortunado, ah-fbre-too-nah'-do, adj., fortu-
Date. L. 68. '
too't^2«!^''L:''&.*^" ^""^^^ belonging
442
VOCABULABY,
Agitacion, afi'hee4aM/a-l>ne', b. £, agita-
tion. L. M.
A^'nular, ah-grah-dar', to please. L. 63.
Aj^rudcccr, ah^^fraJi'iJUU-Uiair' ^ to tiiauk, to
be obliged lo. L. a9.
Agri'ifar, iUi-groi-gaT' ^ to add, to unite. L.
A^Tio, ah'-gri-o, a^., eoor. L. 83.
uVim, afi'-^wOy B. r., water. L. 7.
A^'uonur, a/i-tjwati'tar\ to eapport, to put
up with, to bear, to bear wiiii. L. 63.
AiTuardicnte, aii-^war-U^-cUn'-UtL, e. ql,
brandy. L. 6U.
AijHideza, a/i-goo-^iai'-tha, a. 1, wit, witty
Niying. L. 57.
A^iicro, ah-ffwai'^ro^ b. ol, angary, omen.
Aliora, aA-^(-n2, adv., now. L. 27.
Aire, i'-rai^ e. m., air. L. 46.
AJedrez, a/t-fuU-UraU/i^ b. m., cheas. L. 4S.
Ala. ah'-ia^ a. f.. win^. L. 68.
Alabonza, a/i-ia/i-UuV'tha, 6. f., pnUse. L.
63.
Aiarde, b. OL^IIaccr alarde^ to boast. L.
03.
Alberto, al-bair'-to, b. m., Albert. L. 38.
Alcaucc, al'kan'-t/ioi, 8. m., reach. L. 63.
Alcauzar, al-can^ior'^ to reach, to over-
take, to take up with, to catch. L. 63.
Alo'^T-ar, a/i'iiti-ffrar't to give joy, to make
k1"U. L. o7.
AU'i.Tc, ah-loi'-ffrai, a^., Joyful, glad, merry.
L. 21.
Alejandro, a/i-tai-han'-dw^ b. m., Alexan-
der. L. 3.
Alois, a/i4ai-lee\ 8. m., gllHflower. L. 9.
Alemon, ah-kU-tfuin', s. m., German (lon-
iTiia^'e). L. 2.
Aleman. 8. m., German ; a^., German. L. 3.
Alenianla, ah-lai-nuih-nl-a^ B.f., Germany.
L.9.
Ainicr, al-/c^4air\ 8. m. and f., pin. L. 46.
AliTAzara, (U-gaffUiah'-ra^ b. f., ehouta of
joy. L. 64.
Al;r')don, al-gd-dSne' , ». m., cotton. L. 6.
Al'-Tulcn, aV-fj<Vn, pron., Bomcbody, any-
body, 8ome one. any one. L. 17.
Aliuno, a, cU-fjoo'-no, acy., Bomc. L. 17.
AlLnmo, a, prbn. ind., and adj., aomcbody,
«omc one, anybody, any one, eome. L.
17.
Alhnja, a^-ah'-hn, p. f.. Jewel. L. 67.
Allinrntar. ah -l '-main-tar'^ to feed.— j4«-
fTiritfartte de cApcranzaB, to live on hope.
Allmonto, s. m., food. L. 40,
Alii, al-vrt\ adv.. thoro, yonder. L. 18.
Alnifi, al'-ma, p. f.. ponl. L, 47.
Ainncen, aJ-mnh-fhafyt\ b. m., ptore. L. 62.
Alnior/Jir. al-fnor-ffiar', to breakfast, to take
broakfliPt. L. 85. ^ ^^ ^
Almnorzo, al-mu-air'-ffit)^ B. m., brcaWaBt.
Alrodedor, al-rai-dai-d^, adv., around. L.
Altemclon, (d-tdh-rnh-th^-^ne', b. f , altera-
tion, chancre. T*. B6. ^ ^^
Alto, nl'-tfi, ndJ., hi^'h. tall. L. 21.
Altnra. al-too'-ra. b. f. heltrbt. L. 37.
Alnmhrar, ah-Ionni-f>rar'. to licnt. L. 64.
.xmable, ah-mah'-Uai, adj., amiable. L.
47. , ..
Amador, ah^mahrdSr*^ b, m., lover. L. 40.
Amancccr, ah-mah-nai-thair^, to get laortr-
in^, to be iu a place at dsjonsajL. «7
muming. L. 30.
Arnault;, ah-man'-tai^p. p. and s., lovir.^
lover, Bweetkcan. L. S8.
Amar^ a/t-jnar', to love. L. 21.
Amanllo, afi-nialt^n^'-jfd^ a^.,relknr. I_ r,L
Ambicion, om-M-^tc-^Ae', s. £., ambiuo:^
L. 00.
Amboa, om'-^Ar, pron., both. L. 2SL
Amenazar, tA-mai-nah-Vua^y to menace, to
threaten. L. 69.
Amenldftd, a/t-iiU2l-n^-<la&i', e. £., amenitr.
L. 32.
Amigo, <th-ml'-ffo^ b. m.^ fiiend. L.. 13.
Amitftad, tth-ttieeif^ath^ s. H, friciubhip.
L. 61.
Amor, ah-mort', b. m., love. I*. 45.
Ampno, am'-jM-o^ a4j., ample. L. 5S.
Ampo. 8. m., whiteness (of buow). L. 61.
Aualitico, aJi-nah-H'-il-w, ndj., analjtica2.
L. 35.
Anara^jado, aA-miA-fwi-AaA'-(29, a4}., or-
ange (color). L. 64.
Ancuo, an'-ctidy adj., wide, broad. L. 47.
Anchura, an-chou'-ray s. f., width, breadth.
L.61.
Anciano, ffn-ZW-oA'-no, adj. and a., oM, oStl
man. L. 4S.
Andar, an-dar', to walk, to go. I*. 44.
An(*cdota, aJi-ruuk'-dd-ta, a. C, anecdote.
L.44.
Anirel, an'-haU, b. m., angel. L. GO. ^
Angulo, an'goohlo, b. m., angle.— En dA^tbU
rectos, at right angles. L. CO.
Animal, alt'nl-fnal\ 6. m., animal. L. <H.
Animar, a/t-n?-»/kir', to animate, to eocour-
agc. L. 88.
Anoche, ah-rtv'-choL adv., lart nigfat. L. Sx
Anocheccr, ah-nd^fiai-ihair', to ijet n:_*tit.
to be (in such a place) at nlghtmll. L. : vX
AntAiToniBta, (m-ia/i-gO-rues'-fa, e. m., an-
tarroult^t. L. 90.
Ante, an'-tai, prep., before, in presence of.
L. 10.
Antcaycr, an-tai-ah-yair*^ adv., the day be-
fore yesterday. L. 16.
Anteccdcnlc, an-tai-Uiai-^iin'-tal, a. m.,
ant«!cdent. L. 01.
Antcnoche, aii-tai-nd'-cluiU tho night be-
fore last. L, 23.
Antcojo, an-tal^'-ho, b. m., eye-glass,—
Anf£(iJofi„ epectaclcs. L. 53.
Antepenfiltimo, an-t^-nai'nooi*-f^-rfio, adj.
ana p. m., antepenultimate. L. 50.
Anterior, an-tai-rP-or*, adj., preceding, fore-
coinix, previous, former. L. 49.
Antea,^ an'-taiss, prep.— -l/nZ-e* dc, belbrc
L.42.
Ante«, adv.. rather,1lrst, sooner than. li. K.
Antepuceto, an-tal-jrwaiB'-tOy p.p., prefixed;
p.. prcftx. L. 63.
Antiguo, an-d'-fftco, ac^., ancient, old. L.
AnTJaocial, an-n-s^^Z-aT^ a4j., antiPoc:aL
L. fiO.
Antojo, an-td'-ho, b. m., whim, lon::jin^.
L. 03.
A n.idir, an-vnJf-den', to add. L. 49.
Anil, on-f/reS\ B. m., Indliro (color). L. 51.
Aflo, an-w>„ a. m., year. L. 10.
Apariencia, ah-pah-T^^n'-i/il-a, a. f., ap-
pearance. L. 68.
VOCABULARY,
443
Apcgar, ah-pairgar^ to adhere, to attuch.
Ap^nas, afi-pai'-nas, adr., Bcarcely, hardly.
' X«. 29.
Aplicar, cih-ptS-car*. to apply. L. 62.
Apostar, ah-pO«-tar^ to bet, to wager. L. 68.
Apoyar, aJi-pO^ar'y to lean, to support, to
protect. L. 60.
Apreciable, ah-prahrtKR-ah'-Uaiy apprecia-
Dle, TeopocUble. L. 66.
Apremlar, ah-prai-mi'ar'y to preas, to urge.
Aprcnder, ah-prain-dair'. L. 6.
Apputar, a/trvrai-tar't to tighten, to press,
to urge. L. (S.
Aprisa, ah-prS'-ea, adv.. quickly. L. 6.
Aprobacion, ah-prd-ba/i'i/t6'one\ a. f., ap-
probation. L. !M.
Aprobar. ah-prd-bar'^ to approve. L. S5.
Aprovecuar. ah-pHHsaircnar'y to progress,
to make the most of. L. 62.
Aproximar, ' a/i-prd-ksS-niar'^ to approxi-
mate, to approach. L. 41.
Apto, ap'-tOt adj., apt, fit. L. 51.
Aparado, cUi-poo-ra/t'-do^ a4J., embarrassed.
Xi. 4-1.
Aqncl, ah-kaU\ pron., that one, he; the
former. L. 18.
Aqui. a/t'ki' adv., here. L. la
Arbol, ar'-dol. s. m., tree. L. 49.
Arboleda, ar-M-lai'-da^ s. f., grove. L. 4».
Arena], a/i-txU-ncU', s. m., sandy ground.
L. 49.
Ar^air, ar-goo-eer'^ to ar 'no. L. 81.
Arrrttocracla, a/i-reejf-iu-kraA''ChS-a^ s. f.,
aristocracy. L. CO.
Arlstocnitico, adj., aristocrat. L. 85.
Aritm6tica, ah-reet-mai'-tS-ka^ s. f., arith-
metic. L. 21.
Armar, ar-tnar\ to arm. L. 59.
Arpa, ctr'-pa^ s. f, harp. L. 15.
Arquitecto, ar-kf^tailr-lOy s. m., architect.
L. 48.
Arqnltcctura, ar-ki-taik-too'-ra^ s. f.. archi-
tecture. L. 51.
iWm^^lar, ar-ral-glar\ to regulate, to ar-
ranijc, to settle. L. CO.
Arrcpcntirse, ar-rcU-pain-tecr'-sai, to re-
pent. L. 33.
Arrcstor, ar-inis-iar', to arrest. L. 37.
Arriba, arrS'-Oa^ adv., above, up-etairs. L.
3;J.
Arto, 8. ar'-f'U, m. nnd f., art. L. 31.
Art fen lo, ar-t^.'-coo-lOy s. m., article. L. 43.
Artiiicial, aHc-fS-t/iv-cU', a4)., artificial. L.
40.
Arti-^ta, ar-kcs'-ta, s. m., artist. L. 36.
Aeador, s. m., enlt (for roastlni^). L. C5.
• Ascender, oft-tnain-dair' ^ to ascend, to
amount. L. 37.
Ascension, ds-thain-sS-l^ne^ a. f., ascension.
L. 49.
ABorrurar, ah-Md-goo-rar* ^ to secure, to as-
Buro. L. 88.
Asc^ino, ahsai-^'-no, a. m., assassin. L.
59.
Asi, a^-A?/, adv., so, thus. L. fHQ.—Ain que,
so that, as soon aa. L. fiQ.—Asi oH, so
so. L. 89.
Apiento, ah-n^-ain'-to^ s. m., seat. L. 89.
Aslr, aJirseer'^ to seize, to make the most of.
L. 42.
Asno, o^-fK), 8. m., aas. L. 61.
[1*.46.
Asombro, ahsdm'-bro^ 8. m., amazement.
Astronomia. tug^rG-nO-mi'-a. 8. f., astrono-
my. L. 40.
Atencion, oh-tainrtM-GM'^ 8. £, attention.
L. 56.
Atender, ah-tain-dair', to attend. L. 37.
Atlantico, at-lan'ti-ko, b. m. and adi.. At-
lantic. L. 46.
Atolladero, ah-a>l'ltfa-d(U''ro, e.m., difficul-
ty. L. 60.
Atraccion, oA-^raifc-fAWn*', 8.f:, attraction.
JL. 21.
Atr^, ahrinu^^ adv., behind, ago. L. 68.
Atrevcrse, ah-trcd-xakr''sai^ to dare. L. 48.
Atrevimiento. ah-(rai'Ve-rni'ain''(o, s. m..
assurance, daring. L. M.
Afaocidad, ahrtrO^/a-dath', 8. f., atrocity.
Lu 86.
Atropellar, a-tr^ipaU-yar'y to trample upon,
to run over. L. 51.
Aullar, ah-cU-yar', to howl. L. 44.
Aumcnto, ah-co-main'-to, s. m., augmenta-
tion, increase. L. 59.
Aun, a/fOon\ adv., still, yet. L. 26.
Aunoue, ah-con-ke'^ adv., although, though.
AnsenciA, ah-co-eain'-(Ja-a. 8. f., absence.
L. 36.
Ausente, ah-oo-ioin'-tai, ad)., absent. L.
69.
Antor. ah-co40r'y b. m., author. L. 47.
Antorldad, €ihrCO-U>-H-dath\ s. f., authority.
L. 59.
Auxiliar, ah-oo-ksl-ll-ar'^ s.m. and ad]., anx-
iliaiy. L.57.
Auxiliar, to help, to aid. L. 62.
Auxllio, ah-oo-hl'-U-Oy 8. m., help, assist-
ance. L. 55.
Avenida, ahrvai-nl'-da^ 8. f., avenue. L.
15.
Aventurarse, ah-vainrico-rar'-mi^ to ven-
ture. L. C5.
Avisar, ati-il-sar'y to inform, to let know.
L.45.
Ay I ah-€'. Int., alas! L.46.
Ayer, ah-yair'^ adv., yesterday. L. 16.
Ayudar, ah-yoo-dar\ io aid, to help. L.
Azui, ah-t1tJ0ci\ adj.., blue. L. 54.
Bailar, bah-i-iar', to dance. L. 28.
Dalle, bah-^-lal, s. m., dance, ball. L. 90.
Balar, bafi-ftar'y to go or come down, to
lower. L. 58.
B«0o» bah' -ho. acU-, low, base, mean. L. 21.
Banco, ban'-ko^ s. m., bench, bank. L. 31.
Bandera, ban-dai'-ra^ s. f., flog, standard.
L. 68.
Baflar, ban-^ar*^ to bathe. L. 49.
Barato, bah-rah'-to^ adj., cheap. L. 18.
Barba, bar'-ba, s. f, chin, beard. L. 60.
Barberfa, bar-bai-rr'a, s. f., barber's shop.
L. 50.
Barbcro, bar-bai'-rOy p. m., bather. L. 83.
Barbilamplflo, bar-bi-lam-peen'-yo^ adj.,
having a thin beard. L. 60.
Barco, s. m., vessel, boat L. CO.
Baron, bah-rdne\ s. m., baron. L. 61.
Barrer, bar-rair^, to sweep. L. 2t.
Basta 1 ba»'-ta^ int., enous^h 1 L. 80.
Bastanto, bas-tan'-tai, adv., enough. L. 25.
444
VOCABULABT.
BasUr, ba»4ar'^ to be enough, Buffldcnt
L. 30.
Baston, baf-fdne, 8. m., cane, atick. I* 10.
Baza, l>ih' t/ia, a, f., trick (at cards).— No
dcjar meter baza^ not to let any one put
in a Bin 'le word. L. 63. , , ^
BclHxlor, bai-b€LidOre\ a. m., tippler, toper,
driukor. L. <B. , ,
Bcber, bai-bair', to drink.— 5<s6*r loa vien-
tojf por alu'o, to M>llclt with much eaircr-
niMH, to desire ardently.— -Oeftcr como una
cnlxa, to drink like a fish. L. 7.
Bclk'za, baUyai''tha„ e. f., beauty. L. 61.
Bello, bail'-yo. a^)., iMsautiful, handsome.
L. 81.
Bendeclr, bain-<lai-theer\ to bless. L. 41.
Bondilo. bain-fif'-fo, adj., blessed. L, 5%
Bo««ar, mlitar\ to ki;**. L. 39.
Bt-o, b(U'-ito, s. m., kiss. L. 39.
Bibliotcca, bS-bH-d-tal'-ka, b. £, library. L.
5-2.
Bien, bi-aln' (pronounce In one syllable),
adv.. well. L. :J.— Esti bien^ very well,
all ri:;ht.— No bien^ scarcely, no sooner.
L. «).
Bifnhechor. bS-ain-ai-eMh^, e. m., benefiic-
tor. L. TiO.
Bien vouido ! b?-aia* rai-nS^-do, Int., wol-
co'iio I L. iV
BilK'tc, bi-tl-yM'-tai, s. m., note, ticket. L.
7.
Blanca, hhin'-li, s. f.— Encontrarse sin blan-
ca^ uoi to h:ivi' a cent. L. W.
Blanco, hl-in -ko, ai^j., white. L. 6S.
Blanro, s. in., mark (to aim at). — (^ucdftrse
en Manro, to be lell In the lurch. L. 57.
Bledo, b'al'-ffo, s. m., straw. — No 8o mo da
un b!e io^ I do not care a straw for it. L.
63.
Boca, M'-AvT, s. f., month. L. 44.— Tlablar
por boi'ti do •;anso, to repeat what another
lias said. L, (W.
Bocado, hnkftfi'-fJo, s. m., mouthftil, bite.—
lio'a'fo sin hueno, sinecure. L. 61.
Bolsa, 6r>/'-<'i, H. f„ pur*c. L. 46.
Boluillo, bj!-.<id'-yo^ s. m., pocket, purse.
L. 47.
Bondad, hOnf-fl(ith\ s. f., goodness, kiud-
ncHH. L. ;n.
Bouda(lo:«o, lM.w-dah-d0''9O^ ad)., good, kind.
L. 51.
Bonito, btynT'-fn^ a'lj., pretty. L. 58.
Borboton, bOr,-' O-fdnr.—X borbotone»^ bub-
blini;, hurriedly, confus(»dly. L. iY\.
Botfque, bOg'kal, s. m., wood, woody place.
L. 40. . — »/ *-
Bota, bd'-fa. s. f , boot. L. 10.
Boticii, M-:d-\'a, s. f., dru£j-storc. L. ©i.
Boticario, bo-tl-kah'-rT-o. s. m., dru''£:i8t.
L.49. "^^
Draviita, brah-rah'-fa, s.f, bravado.— Echar
braratany to bra^. to boast. L. iVi.
Bnivo, brah'-ro, adj., brave. L. 44.
llmvo 1 Int., bravo I L. 48.
i'razo, brah'-tho^ s. m., arm. L. 44.
lii-ibon, br^-bonl\ b. m., scoundrel, rascal.
L. ;«.
Bruto, brw'-tOy b. m., brute, ignorant per-
son. L. 48.
Bruto, adj., brutish, ignorant. L. '18.
Bueno, btral'-no^ ad(j., good. L. 7.— /?'/<r>?<M
dia««. good morning, good day.— De batnas
fi primeros, all at once. L. 61
Bney, ftipai'-?, b. m., ox. L. 56.
Bnla, bo(y4a. s. f.— Tener bvla pan tocbx le
act according to one's flmcy. L.. 61.
Bulla, boot'-ya, b. f., noise.— Meter ba^i.
to make a noise. L. 63.
Bullicio, boot-yS'-tAi-o^ s. m., bustle, col^,
uproar. L. 61.
Bnlto, bool'-to, B. m., bnndle. — HafcUr i
buUo. to Uik at random. L. 63.
Bnrla, wr'-te, s. f.. jest, joke.— Habjir de
bvrias, to i>peak in jest. I.. 33.
Bnrlar, boarAar^^ to jest.— iJw/Ttenw de a^-
guno, to make fun of, to laugh at any ai. -.
—Burin buriandOy half jest, half earee»i.
L. 83.
Burlon, boor-I5ne\ s. ni., wag, jester. L 44.
Busca, 6oa«r'-i(*a, s. f, search.- £ii b^tcxi dr.
in search of. L. 55.
Bnscar, bfjoi-kar'^ to sev^ch, to look for
L. A.—B^iscar cinco pics al gato, to pkk
a quarrel. L. 4.
Caballcjo, iah-bal-f/ai'-ho^ s.m. (dim. of Ca-
BAL.LO), nag, contemptible old horse. L.
49.
Caballcro, kah-bal-yai'-ro^ s. m., eentlenan.
knight.— Bneuo;» tardes, eaUuiera, good
aftenioon, sir. L. 2.
Caballo, kc^-bal'-yo^ b, m., horse. I*. 4.
Cal)cllo, kah-baii-yo, s. m., hair. L. 33.-
Tomar la oca^ion por lo.i cabcilaf, to prufit
- by the occasion. L. CI.
Caber, kah-bair'^ to hold, to contain.- N^
cabt r dc gozo. to bo overjoyed. — i Put-de
calhT en tu imaginaciony can snch :i
thing enter into your imagination > — ^No
cab^! mas, nothing more am be destnird.
L.42.
Cabe^a, kah-bai'-tJia^ s. f., head. L, 23L
C\i1)1o, kah'-biai, s. m., cable L. 46.
Cabo, kah'-bo. s. m., end. — ^Al cabo^ at last.
L. 61.
Cacla, kak'-da, pron.. each, ererj.—Ca^a
vez, every time.- Cat/a uno, each, every
one. L. 43.
Cacr. kah-air'^ to foil, to see, to understand,
to be, foil due. L. n.—CcuT de pies, to
foil on one's feet.— Ya cai^ en eUo, now
I sec, understand.— Las vcntanas oh^h a
la plaza, the windows look on the squarv*.
—Vacmele k uno la cam de vei^Qenza, to
blush with Bhame. L. 69.
Cafe, ka/i-/ai\ s. m., coli'ee, coflee-hoa«{!.
L.14.
Caja, kah'-ha^ s. f., case, box, cash (com-
luerclal). L. GO.
Cal, s. f., lime.— De e<d y canto, of atone.
L. 48,
Calabaza, kah-iah-bah'-tha^ s. f., pumpkin.
—Par ralaf>azajt, to give the mitten. L. (H,
Calcniar, kal-koo-lar\ to calcolate. L. 61,
CnUlo, kal'-do s. m., broth. L. 44.
Calducho, kai-doo'-c/io^ s. m., poor broth.
L.41.
Calentar, kah-lain-tar's to heat, to warm.
L. 81.
CaVntura, kah-lain-too'-rtu, s. f, fever. L.
t».
Calientc, kaJi-tZ-ain'-tai^ a4j., hot, warm.
L.4^1.
VOCABULABY.
445
Oallado, kal-yah'-do^ acU.* silent, tacltom.
Oallar, kal-yar'^ to be Bllent, to keep ^K-
\eiice,—C(Uiar sa pico, to hold one's
tongue, to say nothing. L. 4A.
Oulle, kal'-yal^ a. f., street— Dejar d uno en
la caUe^ to strip one of his all. L. 15.
Calor, kah.-UjT'y a. m., heat, warmth. L, 25.
Calva, kal'-va. b. f., hald place, bald part of
the head. L. 45.
Calvo, kal'-vo, acy.. bald. L. 45.
Culza, kal'-tJia^ e. r., stocking.— Tomar las
colzas de Villadiego, to make off, to make
a harried escape. JL. 60.
Cama, kafi'-ina, s. f , bed.— Guardar cama^
to be confined to one's bed. L. M.
Cambiar, katn-b^-ar' ^ to chani,'e. L. 59.
Cambio, kam'-dS-o^ s. m., clmngc. L. 46.
Camino, kah-rtU'-no^ s. m., way, road. L. 60.
Camii<a, kah-tnS^-sa, s. f., shirt.— Meterbe en
camisa de once varas. to interfere in other
people's affairs. L. 46.
Campo, kam'-jx)^ s. m., field, carap.— Dcjar
el campo libre, to leave the field to one's
competitors. L. 69.
Canasto, kah-nas'-io^ s. m.. basket. L. 58.
Candidamente, karh'-dl-dah-ntain'tai^ adv.,
candidly. L. 48.
Cansado, kan-sak'-dOy ac^., tired, tiresome.
— Estar can^ado^ to be tired.- Ser canm-
do^ to be tiresome. L. SO.
Cansar, kan-sar\ to tire, to Ihtignc. L. 33.
Cautar, kan-lar\ to sinff. L. 15.
Cautatriz, kan-tah'treeth', e. f., singer. L.
15.
Cantidad, kan-tS-dai/i^ quantity, sum. L.
60.
Canto, kan'-tOy s. m., singing, stone.— De
cal y canto, of stone. L, 48.
Cantor, kan-Uyr\ s. m,, singer. L. 15.
Canon, kan-ifS^ne.\ s. m., cannon. L. 44.
Caflonazo, Kan-yo-nak'-tho^ s. m., cannon-
shot, gim-shot. L. 44.
Capa, X:a/t'-»a, s. f., cloak. — Andar de capa
caioa, to be crestfallen. L. 60.
Capacidad, kafi-pah-ihl-daUi\ s.f., capacity,
capability. L. :36.
Capaz, ka/i'pafh\ adj., capable. L. 59.
Capitan, kah-pS-fan\ s. m., captain. L. 52.
Capricho, kah-pre'-cfWy s.m., caprice, fancy,
whim. L. GO.
Cara, kah'-ra^ p. f, fece.— Dar & alguno con
la pucrta en la cara, to shut the door in
any one's face. L. 60.
Caractcr, kak-rak'-tair (pi. caractdres), s.
m,, character, disposition. L. 40.
Caramba I kah-ram'-ba^ inter., strange !
zounds! L. 05.
Carcajada, kar-kah-hah'-da^ s. f., loud
laugh, burst of lath?htcr. L. 54.
C'lrcei, kar'-thail, s. f., prison. L. 84.
Carga, kar'-ga^ s. f., load, burden, charge.
L. 60.
Cargar, kar^ar'^ to charge, to load, to
heap. L. 47.
Cargo, kar'-goy s. m., load, employment,
change, office. L. 60.
Carid<3, kah-rl-dath\ s. f., ckarity. L. 41.
Cariredondo. kah-rl-rai-dom'-do^ a^).,
roundfacca. L. 59.
Came, kar'-nai^ s. f., flesh, meat. L. 7.
Camero, kar-nai'-ro, s. m., mutton, sheep.
L.40.
Camicerla, kar^'thai/r^'-a, s. f., butcher's
shop, meat market. L. 11.
Camicero, kar-ni-thai'-rOf s. m., batcher.
L. 11.
Garnuza, kar-noo'-tha, s. f., bad, disgust-
ing, spoiled meat. L. 49.
Caro, kah'-ro^ a^)., dear, at a high price.
L. 13.
Carplntero, kar-peen-tai'-ro^ s. m., carpen-
ter. L. 83.
Carrera, kar-rai'-ra. s. f., ciireer, course,
race, profession. L. 48.
Carro, kar'-ro^ s. m., car, wagon. L. 68.
Carruage, kar-roo-ah'-hai^ s. m., carriage.
L. 51.
Carta, kar'-ta^ s. f., letter. L. 7.
Cartilla, kar-Uel'-ya^ s. f., primer.— Cosa
qao no esta en la cartiUa^ somctliiug
strange or uncommon. L. 61.
Casa, ka/t'sa, s. f.. house. L. 9.
CiViicaras I kas'-kafi-rasy int., oh ! dear mc I
L. 63.
Cascro, kah-sai'-ro^ adj., domestic, house-
hold. — Comedia camera, parlor play. L. 59.
Casi, ka/i'-d^y adv., almost. L. 3d.
Caso, kuh'-i^y s. m., case, event.— No haga
V. caso de eso, take no notice of that.
L.60.
Castafla, kas-fan'-ya, ». f., chestnut. L. 40.
Castellano, kas-lail-yafL'-no^ s. m., Castilian
luuiHiage. L. 55.
Castellano, adi., Castilian. L. 55.
Castillo, kas-iitl'-yo^ s. m., castle.— Hacer
castUm en el aire, to build castles in the
air. L. 48.
Ca:*ualidad, kah-€00-ah-tl-dath\ s. f., casual-
ty, chance, hazard. L. 60.
Casucha, kah-mo'-cha^ s. f., contemptible
old house. L. 44.
Catolicismo, ka-to-lMft^xsa'-mOy s. m., Ca-
tholicism. L. 19.
Catorce, kah-tor'-thai, num. adj., fourteen.
-Luis Catorce. Louis the Fourteenth.
L. 14.
Causa, kah'-oo-m^ s. f., cause.- A causa dc,
on account of. L. 40.
Causar, kah-oo-sar'^ to causae. L. 51.
Caza, kah'-tha^ s. f., chanc, hunt, hunting.
— Ir ji la caza, to go hunting. L, 58.
Cazar, kah-thar', to chase, to nunt. L. 58.
Celebracion, ihai-hd'tfraJi-thl-One\ s. f.,
celebration. L. 39.
Cclebrar, thai-lai-hrar\ to celebrate.— Cc/c-
hro que V. haya venido, I am glad you
have come. L. 89.
Celeste, thai4ais'-fai, adj., heavenly, celes-
tial.— Los cuerpos celestes, the heavenly
bodies. L. 49.
Celestial, tliai-laift-n-al', adj.,. celestial,
heavenly. (See Celeste.) L. 49.
C61ico, thaf-li-ka, adj., heavenly (used In
poetry only). L. 49.
Celo, tncU'-io, s. m., zeal. L. 55.
Ccna, thai'-na^ s.f., supper, Last Supper.
L. 52.
Conar, tfiai-nar'^ to sup, to take supper.
L.39.
Centavo, iham-iah'-vOy e. m., cent. L. 14.
Centolla, thain-tuU'-ya, s. f., flash, spark,—
Echar rayos y centeUas^ to foam with rage.
L. 62.
Centena, thain-tai'-na^ s.f, about a hun-
dred. L.40.
446
VOCABULAEY.
Centcnar, (Aain4ai'nar', fl. m., a hnndred,
L.4U.
Ccrca, thair''ka^ ady., near, close by. Cer-
ca de sa casa, near his houtto. L. 31.
Ceremonial, thai-rui-mO-ni-al' , a^lMCcremo-
niaJ, ceremonioaa. L. 54.
Cerrar, thair-rar'^ to shut, to close. L, SL
Ccrrojo, thair-rO'-ho. s. in., bolt, L. 69.
Ceneza, Uiair-vai'-tha, s. f., ale, beer. L. 7.
Clialcco, chah-lai'-ko^ s. m., vest. L. 10.
Cbaucear, chaiv-thai-ar'^ to Jest, to joke.
L. 58.
Chanza, chan'-tha^ s. £, Jest, Joke. L. 63.
Charla, char'4a^ s. f., chit-chat, prattle.
L. 00.
Cbarlar, charAar'^ to chat, to prattle. L. 37.
Chasco, chas'-ko^ s. m.. dit»ppointment. —
Llevarf c un cIiaiKO solemno, to be greatly
disappointed. L. 40.
Chc'iin, chai4een\ s. ra.. shilllnj?. L. 61.
Chico. cJic'-ko^ aflj., little, f^mali. L. -14.
Ctiiquirriilco, chi-kter-rt-t^'-ko^ adj., very
pniall, very little. L. 44.
Cliito ! chZ'-to, Int., hui^h 1 silence 1 L. 10.
Chocolate, cJuy-ki>4ah'-tai. s. m., chocolate.
L. 14.
Cii'ijo, th7-ai'-nOy 8. m. and a^j., blind,— A
ci 'jat, blindV, lu the dark. L. 48.
Ci'lo, th^-iii'-lo^ e. m., heaven, sky.— Tomar
ci cnlo con liis inanos, to be tranpporied
witli ioy, prief, or passion. L. 45.
CI en, (h^-ain\ niira. adj., a hundred.— (See
ClENTO.) L. 14.
ri.'ucia, th7-ain'-(fi7-a^ s. f. , pclcnce, L. 49.
Ci -nto. th?-ain'-(o, nam. adj., a hundred. —
(SceCiEV.) L. 14.
Cicrto. tht-air'-fo, adj., certain. L. 48.
Ciniicnto, thc-7nl-ain' -iOy s. m., foundation.
L. 5«J.
Cinco, thfcn'-ko, num. adj., five, fifth. L. 14.
CinciK-nta, ^/^e.,rt-Aica^"/i'-^a, num. adj., lift>',
lif.icth. L. 14.
Circiinsncccion, thccr-koon '!<t-paik-t?i(i-dnt\
H. f., circumspection. L. '21.
Cir^!un.«tancin, i/n/ r-kwn^a-tan'-th^-a, b. f.;
circumstnnco. L. 4(k
Cita, t/u'-tay a. f., appointment, quotation.
L. m.
Citar. th^-tar', to make an appointment
(with any one), to quote. L. M.
Ciu'.iatlaiio, thZ-oo-dah-Ualt'-ttOy ciiizcn. L.
47.
Civili/^acion, thi-r7-f7-thah-th^-one\ s. f.,
^ civili/^ti.,n. L. CA
Claridad, klah-r'-dath\ s. f., clearness, pcr-
^picnitv. L. .'JO.
Claro. Kh)!t'-ro, adj., clear, bri:,dit. L. 69.
CIa.-»<', klah'-mi, 8. f., chiss. L. 51.
Ci:i-ieo, klak'-ifZ-kOy adj., clausjic, classical.
L. .'«).
Clasificacion, klahs7-fZ-ka'thl-one\ e. f.,
class iiicalion. L. 24.
Cliina, kf?'-ma, s.m., climate. L. 40.
Cocir. krf-fftair'y to boil, to cook. L. 42.
Coclie, ko'-cfiai, B. m., coach, carrlacrc in
ijciu'ral.— It en cochCy to go in a carriaia*.
L. 4>.
CiK'incro, kJi-th'-nai'-rOy e. m., cook. L. 11.
Cofrc, ku'-r'raf, e. m., chest, trunk. L. W).
Cou'cr, ko-hair'y to catch, to take, to pick
up. L. 10.
Cqicar, kO-hai-ar', to limp, to walk lame.
L, 39.
Coto. Jt^-Ao, a^. and 0. m., lame. L. 44.
Colada, kd-lah'-iia, ».£., etilleniiig of doibe-
— Todo saldra en la ooUida^ all vnll k
brou;^t to light. 1^ G5.
Colecuvo,A:J-^aii-^'^e^, a4j., collectrre. L
40.
Colgar, kdle-gar', to ban^. Ir. 69.
Colina, k^-na. s. r., tuTl. I-. 5S.
Colocacion, kd4^kiiA't/i^-^h»^\ *. t, ra-
plojrmcnt, place, eituatioD. Lu GO.
Colocar, kiHO-kar'y ta put, to arrange, to
place, to employ. X^. 46.
Colorado, kMoTah'-Oo^ a4j., red. JL 51
Colorido, 4-W5-r2'-<to, s. m., colorins^ (jisini-
Ing). L62. • "^^^^
Color, kd-ldr'y s. m., color, L. 62.
Combatir. kSfM-bah-t^^^ ^ to combat, to
fight. L. 54.
Combinacion, kdme-M-nah-thi-^n^^ s, U
combination. L. 94.
Combinado, kbrM^j/h-iMth'-dtOy p.p. azida4/-,
combined. L. 68w
Combinar, kdme4ti-nar', to combine. L.
68.
Comedia, ki^^mai'-di-€L, ». T., comedy. L. S
Comer, klhmair'y to eat, to dice. H 7.
Comerciante, kd-mair^^AS-an'^al, e. m.,
merchant. L. 6.
Cometa, kO-mai'-ta, b. m., comet; a A
kite (toy). L. 60.
Cometer, kO-niai-lair'y to commit. L. 4H.
C6mico, kd'T/ii-ko. s. m., BctoT, comedian.
L. 6:3.
Comico. adj., comic, comica]. L. 35.
Como, ko'-tnOy adv., how, as. — ^ Como e«td
V. ? how are yon ?— Yo 8er6 tan ricoccM^.?
61, 1 Phall be as rich as ho. L. 15.
Coniodidad, ko-mo-iit-daih\ ». t., comicodi-
ty, convenience, comfort. L. 29.
C6inodo, kd'-mD^iOy adj., commodlozifi, com-
fortable. L. 29.
Couipafiero, kSnic-pan-yai'-ro^ s. m., com-
panion, comrade. L. 60.
Compailfa, kOfM-pan-yl'-a^ s. f., company.
L. 00.
Coniparativo, kdrnK-pah-roA-tt^-va, adj.,
comparative. L. 61.
Conipat«Ion, kQfme-pah-si-dne*^ a. f, compas-
sion. L. 45.
Complacencia, kdme-plah-thaln'-thl-(Xy s. l,
complacency, pleasure. L. 39.
Corai)lcmento, k&i7u-plai-ttiain'-iOy s. m.*
complement. L. 51.
Componente, kome-iiu-nain'-taiy part., com-
ponent. L. 49.
Coniponcr, kDifu-p^nair'y to compose, to
mend, to arrange, to compound. L. 49.
Compos icion, ko7fie-jH>^^-t/il-oJUi\ s. f., com-
position, mending, arranging, compouuJ-
ing. L. W.
Comprar, kdme-prar'y to buy, to pnivhs^.
L. 4.
Comprcnder, kume-praln-dair' ^ to compr^
heud, to understand, to comprise. L. M.
Con, kdMy prep., with, by. L. 10.
Conccbir, kDue-UiOi-beer' ^ to conceive ol.
L. 54.
Conceder, kdM-t/iai-dair', to grant, to con-
cede. L. 5:1
Concertar, kdne-thair-tar' ^ to concert, to
n-reo. L. 58.
Couciencia, kOne-thl-ain'-tKha^ b. f , con-
science. L. 40.
VOCABULAEY.
447
CoQciorto, kdne-tM-air^-to, b. m., concert,
agreoiaent. L. 17. , ^ * ^
Coucluir, kOne-doo-eer'^ to conclade, to An-
iah, to 1)0 over. L. M.
CoiicortLmcia, kSfu-kore-dan' -thl-a, b. f,
coacordanco, .agrceuicnt. L. 60.
Condoicender, laae-dais-tham-dair^ tocou-
de^ccud, to agrco. L- 4ij.
Coadiclon, kOne-dS-t/iS-vue , s. f., condition.
Coudicional, Jane-(R-thl-^ne-al\ aclJ., con-
ditionaL L. 6!).
Conducir, kdM-doo-theer', to conduct, to
convoy, to lead. L. 10.
Confonar, kdihe-fai'8ar\ to confess, to ac-
knowlcdjfe, to avow. L. 34.
Confu!4o, KJ ^i-foo'sOy acU., confkised, con-
foiiuJoi. L. 54.
Coujii^iuion, kOtha-fioo-gah-Vii-dm^ s. f.,
co.ija^.itlon. L. I'j.
Conjuj'.ir, k:>ii.fi-Jioo-fjar\ to conjugate. L.
4i.
Coajaiicioa, k^na-fiOon-tJiZ-One\ 8. f., con-
junction. L. 43.
Cjii n .f >, fc5/w-//i3'-70, pron., with me, with
mynjif. L. 20.
Canoe jr, it) /w-^/ioir', to know, to bo ac-
qiuiiit ;il with. L. 25.
Con )'/i,ii'iontj, kJ-nO-L'iS-mS'Oin'to^ s. m.,
ku»vlxi>i.;j, biii of ladine (commerce).
L. a.
Cjnijcuencla, kon^-^icU-kwaln'-thZ-a, b. f.,
con-ic.j^iiciico. L. ;>1.
Cjn-jo^uir, kf)/ie'iftjU-y.'ir''jir', to obtain, to
tfet, to aaccovid. L. Ai.
Coaajjo, k'iiui-sal' -fu)^ s. m., counecl, ad-
vice. L. 53.
Coa^ijatir, k'iie-sa^'i-tcir'^ to consent, to
a<fs5j ^to). L. .3S.
Coasi^tir, k'jni-^.'^<^-Ucr\ to consist. L. 52.
Ct)nHohir, k^ft^s-fO-l'tr', to console. L. 35.
Condtjrici2&, koi^^-taih' 'L't^-Of s. f., coustoucy,
8t3lllIHJ-J3. L. 'I4i.
C ).ntra.:cion, k^m-tr09k-t/iS-Diic\ constmc-
t on. L. 51.
Co into, km^-tan'-ftlf s. m. and adj.,
Tiiilf monoy. L. 3S.
Co Uar, kj.i'i-tar' ^ to count, to relate, to teU.
L. 3,.
Contener, kd/i^^-t^i-nair', to contain, to re-
Ktr.iiii, to -itop, to cncivii. L. i'J.
Coat jni lo, koi^-tai-ikni'-dj^ s. m., contents.
L. 4>.
Coatjatir, kHfie-t lin-tar' ., to content, to
in lie 5 i;Ul. L. 31.
Contcito, klni-t.i> '(.'-*■». ad)., content, con-
t.Mi^; 1, 2fla 1, rfan i 1 > I. L. J.
Conti ; >, kj,nfe'-/>, pro i,, with thee. L. 26.
Co.jtia:iar, kj/i^-tB-itJj'ar\ to continue. L.
C).itri. *ltj'-/rj, prep., a^ins^t. L. 41.
Co!i'ri.l;clr, koi^ylra.'L'du-Uicvt''. to contra-
di't. L. 41.
Co,i;r.irIo, kr)fi-i.traJi''79-o, ad,i., contrary.—
Wcmfr.irh, on the contrary. L. 6:^.
C).ivjaojr, kdne'Vain'thalr\ to convince.
L. H.
C.)i/.«nlr, hl^.-vil-nefr' y to suit, to becon-
v'.'ii.»nf, to a^reo. L. 30.
C)r.'.«ruvMon, kdm-viir-^taA-thi-dM', s. f.,
r )nv ^r-iation. L. 34.
Cxr.'criir, konc-vair-sar^ ^ to converse. L.
Convertlr, kSne-vcdr-tter', to Convert. L. 45.
Convicto, koiut-veek'-tVy irr. past part, ^of
CoNVENCEK), convicted. L. 62.
Couvile, kOiui-cte'-(ui^ n, m., invitation, feast
or banquet to wiuuh any one is invited.
L.50.
Copulalifo, kD-poo-lahrtl'-vo^ acy., copula-
tive. L. 69.
Coqueta, k&kai'-ta^ s. f., coquette. L. 32.
Corazon, kO-ra/i^t/tone'^ s. ui., heart. L. 00.
Corbata, kOre-bidt'4a, cravat. L. 10.
Corona, kO-rd'-na. s. f., crown. L. 5G.
Correcto, kiOr^uik' -to^ ad)., correct. L. 29.
Corrcdor, kur-rai'dirrc\ s. m., corridor,
broker. L. 49.«
Correj^ir, kOr-rai-heer'^ to correct.— C5?rrtf-
gine, to mend. L. &9.
Correo, kur-rai'-o^ s. m., courier, post. — Ca-
sa de correm^ poBt-ofhce. L. 20.
Correr, k^r-roir'^ to rsoi.—iXjrrervc^ to be
QHiiamed or confhsed, to blusii. L. 51.
Corretear, kOr-rai-UU-ar' ^ to run about. L.
5;i.
Corrcveidiie, k^r-nU-cai-i'di'-laL s.m., tale-
bearer, tattler. L. 50.
Corriente, kor-rS-iUn'-faiy adj., current;
B. m., al corrierifti de, aware of; s. f., cur-
rent, Htream. L. 50.
Corrientemente, k<yr^^-ain-tai-main*'taL,
adv., currently, fluently. L. 40.
Corro, kdr'-ro^ s. m., circle of people col-
lected together for talking. L. 41.
Cortante, kdn^-tan'-taiy adj., cuttin-', sharp,
ed-ed. L. 88.
Cortuplumas, kOre-tah-pUxf^mass^ penknife.
L. 0.
Cortar, kore-tai-*^ to cut. L. m.
Corto, kore'-to, adj , short. L. 21.
Co;?a, ko'->^a^ e. f., tiling. — A cum de las seis,
al)out six o'clock. L. 11.
Coijcr, k5-^air\ to sew. L. 21.
Cortuiopolita, km-riuj-pO-Ut'-Ui^ s. m., cos-
mopolite. L. 51.
Costa, kocti'-ta, s. f., cost, coast.— A co-'^ta
mia, at my expcuae.-— A cov(u de, at the
expense of. L. 00.
Costado, ko'^-talt'-dOy s. m., side. L, CI.
Coatar, ko.<-tar\ to cost. L. Gl.
Costumbre, kds4oorn'-t/raiy s. f., custom,
liabit. L. 51.
Creacion, knti-ah-tlid-utie', s. f., creation.
L. il.
(Year, krai-ar', to create. L. 41.
Crotiito, knu'-ul'toy s. m.; creoit, credence. «
L.57.
Creoncla, krai-ain'-tM-a^ s. f., credence, be-
lief. L. 49.
Crecr, ktai-air', to bclleye, to think. L. 27.
Crcyeute, krai-yain'-tai, present part, lof
UuEKu), B. m. and f., believing, oeliever.
L. 38.
Criado, krl-aJt'-do^ s. m., servant. L. 17.
Criado, past part, of Criar. L. &1.
Criar, hS-ar, to breed, to bring up. L. M.
Crlatura, kri-a/i-too'-ra, s. f., creature, in-
fant. L. 60.
Crfmen, krS'-main, s. m., crime. L. CD.
Critfcar, kfd-f7-kar\ to criticise. L. 43.
Crftico, krl'-d-ko, s. m„ critic. L. 45.
Cronologista, kr!hno-lo-Ji£tss'-tCL chronolo-
gist. L. 36.
Cmeldad, krtXHUl-dcUh^ b. f., cruelty. L.
448
VOCABULABY,
Cuadcrao, cioah-dair^-na, 8. m., copy-book.
L. 4.
Cual, cn'ol^ pron., which. L. 10.
CuuiiOud, cuii^i-U-(i<i''/i , ». f., qua.lity. L.36.
Cua-i-iuicrti, cuiU-/.e-ai -iu, piou. uud a^j.,
lUi} uiic, whurocver, boiuc one. L. <^
Cnuii, <''/u/», adv., how, att ^ui>cd only bc-
lore uujc( ti\ cd or other adverb?;. L. 14.
Cuando, ttr<//t -</<>, adv., whou. L. 9.
tu.uito r i'((iH'-u>y adj., how much? how
u\.,iiy t—Luanto jiiiU,-, at ouce, iminedi-
uuiy.— Por tM6i/./o, iiia.-imKh aj». L. 14.
Cuarto, iivur'-toy ord. adj. and b. m., fourth,
rooia, chamber. L. iu. «
Ciiutro, c-i (//V-//0, num. adj., four. L. 13.
CuIki, k'Hj -Ui^ b. 1'., ca&k, tub. — Cuba ^leUiud
(.1 I, L. Gl.
i\r rir, ki»^(,mt\ to cover. L. 59.
('lit n.iru, ki-'-i./i ih'-ni, e. f., t-poon. L. 00.
C'lu liiilu, hr^dutl -^>, t.. 111., Kiiite. L. u3.
V\u Uu, ( /' .4<' -yf*, h. m., utcK, collar. L. GO.
C'lu ina, 0' ''/■/( -/t/, H. f., actoimt, lull. L. 4G.
t'lnnio, C''-ii/ii'-t<t^ f. m., flory, lalo, L. 'U.
t'lUTiKi, c 'iUt -jtu^ B, HI., body. L. G4.
<''i'r\o, ('imur'-t<K 8. m., crow. L. 4j.
Cn '-1:1, rc-ii,.^^ -Ut, H. r, hill.— A i"uti.% on
i».ii''~ back or I'lumldtiH. 1,. r»;i.
I'.h ~iju;j, mui -iZ-vitc , a. f., (question. L.
C'uuiado, cr-T'fhih'-iln^ p. m., care— Tl-^t.'.r
di' ci.l I / >, tu bi" daii:_<Tou-ly iil.— i. lur
con <• t I :•( , U) In- M.i> aKxIuas, L. '^'^.
Cuular, c«. «-/*../ , louuJ, lo latwc caio. L.
•n.
Culpa, A^* /'-;«/. p. f.. fault, blame. L. GO.
I'ulp.ir. Li"'-, >\ to blauu'. L. GO.
('iilii>ar. /m^ r-^(//', t<M uIt!\ato. L. G>.
C'unipleario"*, A^i-/a-^7(//-u/* -y-.*, b.m,, biilh-
(1 ly. L. G4.
Cuuiijliniirnto, h.o7V'i.!^-inl-aln'-k\ 8. ni.,
conipliniciit. L. 4S.
Cuiup.ir, k'f'/'i-jtf'fr', to nccomidi^h. to fr.l-
lil.— (//;/<;////• j)()r otio. to act lor or in
tin- naujc of anotluT. L. 57.
Cuiuulo. a, l>-t>n-jiiIi-d(K (iu ». m. n:id f.,
bri»{h»T-in-l:>\v. hi-^tir-in-law. L. GL
Cui »()»(», k(ii>-n-i'>;''f^ adj., curious, worthy
of notf. L. 51,
Cur-'O, k,H»'-M>, H. m., conrHC. L. GJ.
Ci! lodia. hi -/<■/-. t-u, K. f., cu^t(Kly. L. .'".3.
(.'.'iti^. /."f''-<'f< v.;, H. ni. and f, el.ln. 'li. Gl.
C'uyo. kf>'')ju, i)r()n., oi' whom, of which,
\N hosc, which. L. 17.
T).";o ! r/'.-'V-/,//, Int., liavc at It 1 L. 01.
Jj;i .ij, {{•■h'-ih'U P. f.. lady, darac. — JJumoSy
111 aiiu'litt^, or checkers, L. iS.
l).i:./.a, (i'lu'-tfm, b. f., dance. L. 61.
D.iiar, (Jan-i/ii/\ to daina^'e, to hurt, to
liarm. L. 47.
D.iiM), t/iiu'-tjo^ B. m., damage, hurt, liarm.
L. 1>.
Lar, to L'ivo.— Mr/Yvytomarep, di^putc.'^, jfs
and i\ud»,—J/at\t a la vela, to bet Bail.
L, iJ»;.
I)e. ^A//, prop., of, from.—Dc dia, by day.—
J^t Intento, on purporse. L. 4.
Deber, </</<V.,?/r', 8. ui., dutv. L. 28.
Deber, to owf», mu^t,— Aiin per las ocho,
it must bo ciijht o'clock. L. '2S.
Dccena, dalr-thal'-na^ a. f., aboat ten. I- 39.
liccidir, d^ii-thl-iietr' ^ to dccJt.c. Lu G'*.
Itccimo, (ku'-(hlrrnAt onl. adj., aiul h. q:l.«
tenth. L. 15.
Dccir, dai-Uutr', to Bay, to tell. L 27.
Ueciarar, dai-ciuJi-rar\ to declare. L. 4^*-
Dedal, dai-dal\ b. m., thImbJe. 1.. :tL
Dedo, dai'-do, e. m., linger. L. &*.
Defectivo, dai-j'aik-Ce-vo^ a4j., deiecti-r«_
L. G3.
Dcfecto, dai-fait-to^ «. xn., defect, Cailiis^.
L. 53.
Defender, dai-fain-dair' , to defend. L. flT-
Dellnlcion, dai-jl-hl-thl-on<i\ e. L, dt-ixi..-
tion. L. 59.
Deflnir, d'u-Tl-rve<r'. to define. L. 59.
Dejar, dcU-Zlar'^ to leave, to let, to a3c»w-
L. 44.
Delante, dai-ian'-tai, prep. — Dti*inU dc, be-
fore, in the pre^cnce of. L. 16.
I)t kitar, dai-uii-Z-tar'^ to dcli«;ht, L. 47.
Ddicado, dai4t-kaJt'-d0y adj., delicate. L.
Delicloso, dai-U-thl-o'-K)^ a^j-, dclicioiis.
L. H5.
Ptllucuente, rf..v'-A r.-^fahi'-tal^ b- m., dc-
Iin(iueut, tran-,4ri.--<jr. L. ol.
I>( linquir, dui-i.x.,-ktcr„ to tran!?gTe<a. I*.
Delito, dai-^'-to, e. m., crime, tram^zn:*-
^:(m. L. 51.
IJcja:'.!*, rf(.'<-/?uf.'-A', adv., over and nlKJvo. t'>'i
luiich; adj. uenendly u.^e<l wUti Iv», l_-c,
l.i I, the rest, the ollur*. otben*. L. 4.;.
I)v ; .a--iado, dui-}iuh-H-nh'-<lo^ ndj. and
u I v., loo much, too. L. ii5.
IV a; ro, r/' ,''■/<-/'? t), prep., ju, within. Inside
(.:i\\ ayi* followed by ux i. L. M.
Dc:-. I lio, diii-Ku'-cho^ ai^., ri;,-ht, even,
^tla^'ht. D. 5«).
Di-ailar, dai-^Mt-ft-ar'y to cluillen^e. L.
G.j.
Di . afio, dai-HiJi-fZ'-Oy p.m., challenge, dueL
L. ('►;>.
Dc. ..nimar, ff-u-sah-f'?-mar'^ to dishearten,
to di-coura_:e. L. :x
I\- cauf^adauunto, tinJ.<-X'an:oafi-^/(ift-r7i. u'^*'-
t L adv., eaeily. at one's ta-e. L. J>J.
Di . can^ado, dai.^-koh-.^uh'-uc^ adj., t^>y,
q-.;iet, refreshed. L. .>J.
Dl cnuKir, ({ii:.y-k\m-far'^ to rcj^t. L. rv?.
i;e-tanso, d<iu-kau'-tO^ b. m., rest, re]>o:fC,
ca'^c. L. .'.3.
Dt -euro, duU-kafi-ro^ B. m., barcliccdness..
L. Gt,
Descender, dci^'t?iain-<i>ur\ to dcs?cend. L.
;37.
Dcr^componer, dats-kZyr.i-jKt-TirJr', to dls.ir-
ranirc, to diDConipofcC, to put out of order.
L.53.
Dc^compnoFto, daK^-h'jJif jrjrahf'-to, nd'.,
(liHarran^'td, di.-C(>niposed, out of onit r,
di^•orde^ly. L. 5.1.
DeHCLUillnr, dai^-koiu-fZ-ar', to dlstru.<t, to
mi.'truh't. L. 4;}.
DcM^racia, dah-grah'-tll-a^ 8. f., ml&for-
luue, ill-luck. L. 48.
Def^lL'iccr, dah-nl-f f'ir\ to undo, to de-
Ftrov, to take or jnit asunder. L. 57.
Dc-^ierto, dui-.l-ch'-to, e. m., desert, wil-
derness. L. 51.
Dcfij^al, d'ii-tZ-gwai\ adj., uneqaal, un-
even. L. 53.
VOCABULABY,
4^9
Dceocnpnr, dcU-sd-koo-wir'^ to quit, to
evacuate, to empty. L. 5(5.
J>t:r>paclo, (iaiA-pah'-tM-o^ adv., elowly. L. 6.
X)cv3pcdir, tlai^-jXii-dtt.r' y to diauut<i«, lo Bond
or put away, to dihchargc. L. 5!J.
Dcsjportar, dal^-iKitr-tat ^ to awake, to
tiwukcn, to arouse, to roaee. L. o4.
Dcspiorto, daiifijie-air''to., aty., awake,
bridlv, pprighlly, lively. L. 52.
DcHproporcionadiBimaniente, </<;&s7?r5-j55r«?-
t/f<i-0fte-<ih-di'-6i-mahfnaln-tai^ adv., out
of all proportion. L. 50.
Dcapuea, dais-nwaie^' ^ prep. and adv., after,
afterward. L. 16.
Determlnante, dai-tair-m^-nan'-tal^ aclj.,dc-
• temiining. — Verbo d<:tffmwiwitt\ deter-
mining verb. In 5.3.
Detcrminar, dai-UUr'ffii-nar'^ to determine.
L. 63.
I>ctn\3, dai-trass\ prep, and adv., behind.
L. 33.
Dcudor, dai-at-d&r€% e. m., debtor. L. 45.
Dcvolver, daJ-ioit-viUr'^ to return, to give
back. L. 4.3.
Dia, </2'-a, 8. m., day.— Do f//Vf, by day, in
tlio daytime.— Dar los <//«.•, to say good
niomint? (to any one). L. 1).
Diablo, dS-<iU'-fjUj, n. m., devil. L. rCi.
Dialccto, dS-a/i4aik''tOy 8. m., dialect. L.
55.
X)iiklop:o, dl-ah'-l&-gOy B.m., dialo;^ue. L. 59.
Diantrc, dl-an'-lraly b. m., deuce. L. IfJ.
Dibujo, dl-boo'-lio^ b. m., drawing, dcsi^.
L. 61.
Diccionario, tf^^A:-^/i?-t?-waA'-r?-o, b. m., dic-
tionary. L. 49.
Dicha, dl'-cha^ 8. f., happiness, good luck,
pood fortune. L. 04.
Die ho, dl'-i:ho. e. m., paying. L. 54.
Diciembrc, de-t/ii-aim'-lraiy s. m., Decem-
ber. L.*l.
Diente, dl-ain'-tcdy a.m., tooth.— Ilablar cn-
tre dknt(\% to mumble, to mutter. L. 03."
Diez, di-aWi\ num. adj., ten. L. 14.
Diferencia, dl-fai-rain'-tM-a^ 8. f., differ-
ence. L. 4S.
Diferenciar, d^-fai-rain-thZ-ar^^ to differ.
L.48.
Dillcil, di-fl'-fhaf, adj., difflcult. L. 21.
Dificultad, d?-/2-kool-taai\ 8. f., dilliculty.
L. 86.
Digno, dicf-nOf adj., worthy, deserving.
L.68.
Diluvlar, di-loo^i-ar'^ to rain like a deluge,
to pour. L. J».
Dimes, rfZ'-mafo#,— Andar en dlmfJt y dir6-
tcs, to use ifo and onds, to quibble. L. 47.
Diminativo, d2-r/i2-»w^'-w, b. m., diminu-
tive, L. 4.1.
Dinero, di-nui'-ro^ e. m., money. L. 13.
DioB, dli-oce\ e. m., Qod. L. 31.
Diptongo, deep-tdne'-go^ 8. m., diphthong.
Dircccion, dl-raik-tM-fhie' ^ e. f., direction,
address. L. S4.
Dirccto, (R-raik'-to, adl., direct. L. 51.
Director, dd-raik-tor'^ director. L. 50.
Dirigir, di-re-hur'^ to ^ieci.—JHrigirs€^ to
apply. L. 6-'J.
T)\id^\i\!0,dre.s-thl'-poo4o^ 8. m., pupil, dis-
ciple. L. 18.
Diecrcto, de£S8-krai'4o^ a^J., discreet, cir-
cumspect. L. S8.
Discalpa, decst-kool'-pci^ e. f., apology, ex-
cu»e. L. (X).
Discurso, dtess-koor'-so^ e. m., discourse,
speech, course. L. 53.
Di^i^^u^Ulr, du\'ii^'{/ou6-iar' , to disgust, to
ui.-plcai«e. L. 50.
I Dij*ijUBlo, det{<s-aot*8'-tOy s. m., disgust, dis-
pkubure, unpleasantness. L. 5U.
Di^poner, d(<ifii-po-iiair\ to dispose, to lay
out, to arrange, to prepare. JL. 48.
Disposicion, dtfi's-jjO-u-tUl-Cm'^ 8. f., dis-
position, arrangement, distribution. L.
83.
Diiitancia, deess-tan'-thZ-a^ s. f., distance.
L. 51.
Distantc, dee8^-tan'-taf„ adj., distant. L. 88.
Ditftar, detfi<-tar\ to be distant, tor from.
L. 53.
Dii<thiguir, deees-teenrgheer' ^ to distingnish.
L. 43.
Dlvertir, d^-rair-Uer' ^ to divert, to amuee.
L. 39.
Dividir, ai-rl-d€€r\ to divide. L. 51.
Divisar, dS-Td-.^ar\ to cleVcry, to perceive,
to catch a glimpse of. L. 42.
Doble, do'-buiiy adj., double. L. 40.
Doble, s. m., double. L. 40.
Doce, dv*-t/iai, num. adj. and 8. -m., twelve,
twelfth. L. 14. '
Doccna, do-thai'-na, p. f., dozen. L. 40.
Dolcr, dd-lair' .— M( rlo & nno la cnbeza,
los dleutes, to liavo & headache, locth-
ache. L. :«.
Dolor, du-lort\ s. m., pain. L. 60.
Domingo, do-vuu^'-ao^ s. m., fc^unday. L. 9.
Donde,\/(/;2<f'-</o/, adv., where. L. 9.
Dona, dune'-ya^ s. f., lady, madam, Mrs.
L. 2.
Dormir, dure-meer'^ to sleep. L. 41.
Dos, dOce. num. aili. and s. m,, t^^o, second.
L. 14.
Drama, drah'-tna., a. m., drama. L. 52.-
Dramiilico, dra/i-ma/i'-tZ-ko, adj., dismatic.
L. 52.
Duda, doo'-da, s. f., doubt. L. 48.
Dudar. d(jo-d(tr\ to doubt. L. 28.
Durable, daj-rah'-blul, adj., durable. L. 68.
Durante, doo-ran' -tai^ pres. part., daiing.
L. 59.
Durar, doo-rar\ to la^t, to continue. L. 59.
Duro, doo'-rOy acU. and e. m., kaid ; dollar.
L.CO.
Ea I ai'-a, int., Eay I hollo 1 L. 4G.
Echar, ai-ckar', to throw, to put, to cast.—
Fx^har de ver, to notice, to obscne. —
Echar a correr, to run avi&y.—JKfiar &
perder, to spoil. L. 63.
£con6mico, ai-kO-nd'-mhko^ a^j., economi-
cal. L. 85.
Edad, 8. f., aze. L. 53.
Edicion, aidi-m-one\ e. f., edition. L. GO.
Edificar. cU-dl-ft-kar' ^ to edify. L. 48.
Efecto, ai-faik'-to, 8. m., efitct. L. 47.
EJccutar, ai-hai-koo-tar' ^ to execute, to put
into execution, to put into practice. L.
CO.
£;jemplo, ai-haim'-pU)^ e. m., example. L.
82.
i;]ercer, ai-hair4ft<Ur'^ to exercise, to prac-
tise. L.flO.
450
VOCABULABY.
Qercicio, ai'hair-ihr-tM'C, s. m., exercise.
El. la, lo, los, la^ def. art., the. L. 1.
EL cila, oily aU'-ya, pe». pron., he, she, It
EJeccion, ai-laUt-t/ii'^ne'f 0. t. election,
choice. L. 24.
Ele^'ancia, at4airgan'-tKHiy 8. f., elegance.
L.6-i.
Elc'juite. ai4ai-gan'-tal, a^j., elegant. L. 65.
£K%'ir, <u4ai-heer'. to elect, to choose. L.
Elemento, txi-iai-main'-to, s. nL, element,
contttitncnt part. L. GO.
Elena, ai-lai'-wiy s. f., Helena, Ellen. L. 19.
Elipiico, aiUeiy-a-ko^ adU., elliptic, ellipti-
cal. L. 60.
Enilmrcadiro, aimbar-kah-dai'-TO, s. to.,
lauding forty. L. 58.
Emlwr^'o, aim-dar'-go^ ». m., erobar??o.— Sin
tm'xirgo^ notwithstanding, -however. L.
EmpoAar, tUm-pain-yar'^ to ensage, to
pfedife, to bind.— /;/«yjf/iar.v, to bind
ouo'b self, to persist, to desire eagerly.
li. 45.
^mpero aim-pcU'-ro, coi\J., yet, howcTer,
Einpl««ar, aimplaiar', to employ. L. 44.
I'.mpleo, aiin-ntai'-o. %. m., employ, cm-
pfoymont, omco. L. 57.
Ell, <«•'<, prep., in, at, on. L. 8.
l-naraorar, ai'HaA-r?i^rar'^ to court, to
make love io.—Kni.norarst de, to be
cnainoureJ of, to full in love with. JL 3a
EiK'irjo. ari-k tr'-'j.\ s. m., char-'e, com-
ini-lon, con. mill. L. 57.
Encarja*. a •i-Ur-jar' ^ lo charge, to com-
mi-nion, to o dir. L. 58.
^H*!^'""^!*' .''"*""^ li'^'dalr'y to Uijht, to kin-
cue. j^. i)(.
Encorrar, ain-thrtlr-rar', to shut up, to con-
tain, to comproliciid. L. 03.
Eucliua* aiU't.'ih'-ttia, prep, and adv., above,
over. L. SJ.
Enconirar, ain-kD/u-(rar\ to meet, to find,
EneinL'o, al-n if-mr-To, s. m., enemy. L. 5 1.
l:.iifiai.HUir. m-n i--i/i^-^<H-tar'^ to set at on-.
mAy.^A'uifu^far u alijuno con otro, to
aSithUr ""h. m. """^^^ "^^^^ ""' ^^""^
Enrr-iji, ai-ndlr-hZ'^, ». f., energy. E. 61
^^^^J^T^al^fair'7mr', to bccSmo or get
Enjormo, aL-fair'-mo, a^J., sick, 111. L. 48.
^m 'L!at ^'''^^' *^^- opposite; u;
^"n*^'*;ij"^^'*'^^'^* *° deceive, to take
Eiihi^rai-; i/i-oi-ftrtir', to thread, to link.
Enhorabucno. Ql-nd-mh-fncai'-na * f
con;?ratulation, felicitationr L ft) '
Enrimie, oin-r^'-kaK s. m., Henry. L 1J5
Eiweftar, ai/<-«ai/i-yar\ to showf to teach.
^?o a «^£-X'^'^. to dirty, to son,
Entcnder, aUi-iain-dair*^ to midast&l
L.87.
Entonces, ain-tdne'-ihaiss, adv., then. L ^
Entrambos, cU/i-tmrn'-dCoe, pron. pl^ tr^u.
L. (iO.
Entrar, ain-trar*^ to enter, to begin, 's
commence, to come or go in, to ^: jl
^tre, ain'-trai^ P«P-. 1)cnreen, la i:.
course of. r«. 19.
Entretanto, ain'4rai'tan*'4a^ adv., in tlir
mean time. Lu 60.
Entieteucr, ab^rai-tai-nair^y to eotntth.
to amuse, to divert. — £ntreUh(nf.. tj
spend one s time, to be enga^^ in. 1^ i-
£ntusia:;mo, cUn-too^B^-as^'-ziku, s. m, w
thnsiasm. L. &1.
Envlar, (Wi-ti-ar^, to eend. L 14.
iiuvidiar, ain-citii-<ir\ to envy. L. 40.
Kquivocacion, cu-ke-vd-kcUi'tM^^ ^ e. f,
mistake, misoonceptiou. I*. 50.
Equivocar, ai-ki-vC-JUir'y to mistAke.-£:^-.-
rocoriie, to be mistaken. !•. 47.
Erguir, air-gheer'^ to hold erect (as it.
head, &c.). L. 43.
Errar, air-rar^^ to err, to miss. L. 41.
Erudicion, airroonlZ (Ai-</ne% e. £, ^niJ.-
tion. L. 63.
Escaldar, aiaa-keU-ii^xr', to ecakL L. S>.
Escena, dsf-t/Kii'-na^ s. f., ecene. L. 65,
Efrceptlco, aiss-^/uMip'-a-lOy a4|., skeptiii.'.
L. 45.
Escoba, aistt-kd'-lxi, 8. f., broom. L. ©.
Escobajo, alki-Ja-l/ah'-/io, s. m. (an„Tneara-
tivc of Escoba), stamp of a brooni. L
E*coTCr, aiag-kd-haJr', %o cfaooste. L.65.
Escribano, aUa-kti-bah'-no. s. m., nouiy.
L. 19.
Escribiento, aixs-kT^^'/tin'-/ai, *. au
amanuensis, clerk, writer ,<in an olfice.'.
L. 3S.
Escribir, aivf-krhbeer', to write. L. &
Escntor, avw-fcre4&re\ s. m., writer, ac-
thor. L. 19.
Escritnra, (Uss-lr^-tW^ra, b. f., write
document, convej-ance. L. 19.
Escnchar, aUa-kofxhar', to hesarkcn, to ft*
ten. L,60. '
Escuela, ai-^-kwai'-fa, s. f., school. L. 21,
Escultor, oiw-too^-^f^.. m., sculptor. L ;
31.
Escultuia, ais8-hool4oo'-ra, b, f., sculpture^ |
Esforzar, aUft-f^frt^har', to strwisthco. to
exert.— i^orsar», to make cflbrt, to en-
deavor. L. 60.
Esfiicrzo, aisf^/trair''(fu>, s. m., cfTort €0-
dcavor (pi.), couraffo, bravery. L- 47. ^^
Espacio, ai<s^}MJi''tJi^^^ p. m., space. L, 4&
raE*^'*' «^-lw*'-rf«, B. r, swoii. L. 57.
Espadachln, aiss-paJi-dah-cheen', s. ni.,
Dullv. L. 63.
ifack'*' L^'?^'-*^ *• 'm shoulder, (pU
Ej^pafji ai».^n'.yn, s. f., Spal». L. 9. ^ ^
-ti-paflol. atis-jmn-volfi', b. and adj.. Pj>«o^"*
the Spanish foshlon. L. a.
^specie aivf-pai'-t/a-ai, s. f., species, kind,
sort. L. 40.
^*£^oro, aiss-pca-m-ai'^, 0. m., ffocff.
VOCABULABY.
451
EepeJOf aiss-pai'-hOt b. m., looking-glass.
J-., ou.
Cbl>cr^nza, aisn-pai-nrn'-Uia^ a. f., hope. L.
l!:^pera^, ais9-pairraf y to hope, to await, to
^> ait for. \4,M,
Ks^piritu, aign-j/i'-rS-ioOy 8. m., I|)lrit. L. 46.
KtspoHO, (jUtm-po'-sa, b. t, spouue, wife. L. iH).
Kttpobo, ausi-pO'-My s. m., epouBe, liusbaiul.
i.. »».
Ktf^iuela, ai8s-kai'-lay s. f., note. L. 66.
Ji»t|uma, ai«f-Ac'-mi, b. f., comer. L. 51.
iiidiablecer, aiiu-tah-Uai-l/uiir'y to cBtablieh.
la, 4^
Eauicion, atsa-tah-thl-^ne^ a. f., station,
bcason. L. 60.
Etitudo, aUs-Ca/i'-dOy s. m., Btatc, State.—
Loa JuitaU(j6 Uniaos, the United btates.
L. 19.
EBtur, aiss-tar". to be, to understand.—
J'^itar para salir, to be about to sot out.—
Ji^iar por aI;;uuo, to be for, or in favor of,
any one.— ^ J^td V. Mo you understand ir
L. 22.
Ettte, aiss'-taiy s. m., east. L. 22.
Kbte, esta, euto, dcm. pron., this, thlB one.
L.18.
Estilo, aLiS-tl'-lo^ s. m., style. L. 62.
Estimable, aiss-il-rnu/i' -blai^ a^., eBtimable.
L. \Q.
Estimar, ais$-(l-fnar'y to esteem, to esti-
mate. L. 39.
Esto, ai8s'-to. (See Estb.) L. 18.
Estocada, aisa-tO-ka/i'-Ua, s. f., stab, thrust.
L. 5;3.
EstraQo, aiss-iran'-yOy acJij., strange, foreign.
L. 48.
Estratacrcma, (dfts-trah-tak-hai'-ma^ s. £,
BtratUj^'ciQ, ruse. L. 44.
Es*trechar, aus-trai-dtar', to tighten, to
make narrow, to squeeze, to press. L. 60.
Estrecho. am-frai'-c/io, adj., narrow, tight,
close, intimate.- ^'//trc/to, s. m., strait.
L.60.
Estribo, tusH-tri'-fto, s. m., stirrup. L. 88.
Estudiante, aiss-too-dZ-an'-toL, s. m., stu-
dent. L. 38.
Efttndiar, al<^-foo-d7-/tr'j to study. L. 8.
Estudio, cdss-UxZ-Oi'd, s. m., study. L.
25.
Etcmidad, (a'tair-Ta-dath', a. f., eternity.
L.36.
Etemo, ai'fair*-no, adj., eternal. L. 41.
Evidcncia, airxZ-dain'-the-a, s. f., evidence.
L.59.
Evitar, ai-rT'-far*, to avoid, to help (do
otherwise than ha<< brni done"). L. 47.
Exnsrcraclon, cUk-f^aJ-hai-rah-thl-dne'^ s. f,
cxagseratlon. L. 48.
Exaiierar, aik-sah-hai-rar'y to exaggerate.
L.60.
E^camen, aih-tah'-main^ s. m., examination.
L. 3«.
Examlnar, aik-foh-mi'nar'^ to examine. L.
41.
Exceder, ail-'^hai-dair'. to exceed, to over-
ptop, to pnrpa««». L. 63.
Excclcnto, niks-thai-iain'-tai^ a^J., excel-
lent. L.*B3.
Excopclon, (TiJts-thaip-thl-ane'y s. f., excep-
tion. L.46.
Exceptuar, aiks-thcUp-UxHor^^ to except. L.
60.
Exclamacion, aiJts-klah^mah-thd-^ne'^ e. f„
exclamation. L. ^.
Exclamar, rnks-kia/i-tnar', to exclaim. L.
Excusa, aik8-koc/-ta, a. t, excuse, apology.
Li. 60.
Excusar, aiks-koo-sar'^ to excuse, to apolo-
gize, L. 27. 1 *~
Exhibiclon, aik^i-bS-tia-^ne', s. f., exhibi-
tion. L. 48.
Exhlbir, aik-s^-beer', to exhibit L. 60.
Exigir, aik-ite'h€€r', to exact, to require, to
demand. L. 88.
Existencia, aik-seess-tain'-Ua-a, s. f., exist-
ence, (pl.) stock. L. 52.
Exist ir, aik-neess-teer', to exist. L. 40.
Exito, aik'si-tOy s. m., result, issue.— Con
buen exito^ successfully. L. 4il3.
Expcrlcncia, aiki:-jjai-ri-ain'-Uit-a, s. f., ex
porience. L. 41.
Explicacion, aikif-pR-kaA-tM-lhie\ s. f., ex-
planation. L. 48.
Explicar, aiks-pRkar', to explain. L. 46.
Exponer, aiks-pd-nair'. to expose, to ex-
pound, to explain. L. 51.
Exprcwir, aiks-jtrai-aar' ^ to express. L. 62.
Expresion, aih-pnUse-dne', s. f., expres-
sion. L.66.
ExprcsiTO, aiks-praUV-vo^ a^j., expressive.
Exterior- aiks-tai-riSn!', exterior. L. 48.
Extra, athf'-ira, adv., extra. L. 60.
Extrangero, cUts-tran-hai'-ro^ s. m., foreign-
er. L. 00.
Extrafiar, aik»'lran-yar* ^ to wonder at, to
find (a thing) strange. L. 60.
Extrafio. aihu'tran'-yo^ adj., strange. L. 48.
^xX raordinario, am-trah-urc-dZ-iidft'-rl-O^
adj., extraordinary. L. 46.
Extremado, aiks-lrai-nia/i'-do, acU., ex-
treme. L. 55.
Fabricar,/a^-*r?-Xor', to make, to manu-
facture, to build. L. 48.
Faccion, /aA-<A*-5i»<', s.f., feature; ihction.
L. 85. '
FdcW.fah'-Oieel, acU., easy. L. 21.
Facilidad, faft-Uil-U-dath', s. f., Ihcillty,
ease. L. 36.
Facilitar, faIi'thi-19-iar', to flicilitate, to
make easy, to procure. L. 49.
Facilnientc, fa/i'-t/itel-mainrtai^ adv., easi-
ly. L.49.
FactTira, fak-too'-ra. s. f., invoice. L. 03.
Facultad",/a;<-Aoo/-/a/A', s. f., faculty, power
of doing any thing, liberty to do any
thing. L. 63.
Falso, faV-m^ a4J., flilse. L. 45.
Falta, >a/'-^a, s. f., fault, want. L. 27.
Faltar,//T/-tor', to want, to lack, to be lack-
inir. L. 31.
Fama./a/i'-fwa, s.f., fiune, reputation, re-
putc. L. 65. ^ „ ^ ^
Famnia,/a//-w?'-/?-<i, s. f., flimilv. L. 23.
Familiar. /a/<-w^-^-«r', atlj., mmiliar. L.,40.
Faniil!ari(iad,/aA-m«-^-a/i-re-</a^/i', s. f., fa-
miliarity. L. 65.
Famo<o,/<7A-'7«5'-/w, aqj., famous. I*. 45.
FanaUco,/aA-n<i/t'-i2-to, a(y., flinaticaK L.
85.
452
VOCABULARY,
Fas, fa.xs.^'PoT fat 6 por n£fa«, right or
wrolu'; ju»tly or apjubtlj. L. IW. .
Fa^llaio,yaA*-rt'-<i«-(;, u. m.| trouble, aiino7-
aiicc. L. 47.
Favor, ^WA -ivre ', B. m., favor, mercy, help.
— Ayi/'Vyr dc, m bciuilf of. L. ISJ.
Fa\ orccur, ja/i-vO-rai-Utair'^ to tavor. L.
Favorite, /a// -r.>r8 '-to, at^., tovoritc. L. M.
Fc, /'<//, p. f., la nil. L. Ab.
WhciiiOsj'ui-Wai'-rOy t. ra., February. L. 34.
Ffcha, fai't'/id^ ». f., dote. L. 20.
FclicidIid,^<«-/r-/A2-tii.'/«', g. f., happmess,
fdiiiiy. L. 48.
Feliciiur,/<ii-'«-Me-/ar', tofeJiciUtc, to con-
grotulaLo. L. 01.
Fdiz, j\iiUitU\ a<y., liappy, fortanate,
luckv. L. 'Jl.
Ti.h'/.u.cn\i.\ftu-leif^i'mcun'-(ai, adv., happi-
ly, ft-nunuu'l^', luckily. L. 4'J.
Fciacuiuo, jat-ifuu'iti -lU)^ a^j., feminine.
L. 47.
Ft'o,ya«''-o, a(\J.. nglv, nnbcccmlnir. L. 7.
Fcrt)Z, /«/-/ J///, at^j., ferocious, ncrce, rav-
onoii!*. L. 51.
Viin\Ka.Tr\\,j>j*r-rO-carrcd\ s. m., railroad.
L. (X).
Flatl'),/r-f//<'-7o, adj., conndent, trusting.—
Al Jt'i'4-t, ou crt'dil, ou trust. L. 01.
Fiar, flr\ to lru^t, to l>ail. L. 01.
Fill,./ r.(/7'. adj., faithful. L. 21.
Fi. -la. /f-cv^sV'/, s. f., fcaxt, feblival.— Dia
d''./'/.7./. holiday. L. li'i.
Fii;ui a, ./■«"-;/""'-/«, ». f., fl^nrc, form, ehapo,
—llac'er y/yura, to make, to eut a fl^^ure.
L. (W.
Fiifurado, fl-goo rah'-do, a^)., figurative.
L. 51.
YWo^iSn'^tTO^'Io-s^/aits'-tro^ 8. m., philoso-
1)1 latter. L. 49.
Filohofo, fv4u'-^'fOy B. m,, philosopher. L.
4U.
Fin, ftrn^ p. m., end, object, point.— A fin
di", iu order to. L. ATt.
Final, j7,.nl\ 8. m. and a^., end, termlna-
11111"; I'liial. L. 01.
Final nK-nie,/?-/j«/-//wz//i'-/ffA adv.* finally.
L. 4y.
Fino,/f'-no, adj., fine. L. 56.
Flnua,/tcr'-;/<a, b. f., nlmiature. L. 60.
Fifonomia, /t"-*{J-7k?-wr^'-a, 8. t, pliyi»iogno-
niy. L. 45.
Flaquc'za, fiali-kai'-Uia, p. f., leanness,
Wiakm'ps, foible, frailty. L. (M.
Foudo, fofte'-</o, («. ni., bottom, gronnd
(of coiorcd articles); pi., IhndB, cash,
money. L. GO.
Formal, fl>r<'-mal\ acU., formal, reliable,
ret«pcctable. L. 45.
Formalldad./7Jn'-7/i«A-/?.r/a^A', fl. f., formali-
ty, reliablllly, reypoctability. L. 43.
Formar,/<?r<'-wiar', to form, tonbapc. L. 43.
Fortuna, fOrt'too'-na^ e. f., fortune, luck.
L.4)J.
rra;,'ata./mA-f7<iA'-te, B. f., IHgate. L. 00.
Fraile, /ra/i'.?-/aA b. f., Mar, X. 41.
Franeep./ra;j-^//a/A<?', e. m. andac^., French
(lan'juacre), French. L. 8,
Francia,yran'-^/(e-«, s. f.. Franco. L. 9.
I'ranclsco, fran-theest'-kOy b. m., Francis.
L.44, "^
Franco, fran'-ko, a^J., ftank, free, open-
bearteci, intimate. L. &t
Franqaeza, fran-hU'-fha^ b. C, Crsnkn:*-
opt^-heanedness, intimacy. L>. 4a.
Frd&^yjra/i'-iiaiy s, il, piiraee, ecnten^. L
51.
Yni}%frah''i, 8. m., friar, L. 41.
Frt-cucute, jriU-AtciUu-iai. adj., ftx-i u.ll
Frcir Jyai-etr', to f^. L. 62.
Frente, fnun'-tui, ». f., forefacad, fttst-—
Enfixnle^ opposite. L. 45.
Fresco, jrOMT-ko, acU., frc«h, cool.— P5it3-
ra al jresoo, tneco paintizif^. L. 4*.
Fresco, 8. m., cool breeze, cool, re^elil::^
air, freeco (painting). L. 46.
Frio,/?e'-<J, aO]. and 6. m., cold. I*. 25.
FrIolera,/rt-c-^M '-ra, b. f., trifle. L. ST.
Fruta,y;M/-te, 6. f., fruit. L. 31.
Fruto, /;t»'-/o, e. m., fruit ipiodocc). L
40.
rue<»o,/«ral'-^, b. m., fire. L. W.
Fueuie, J'wain'-Lai^ s. f., fouzitulD, ^riiii^,
source. L. 52.
Fucra, yVioi'-ra, adv., ouL — JTuttti dc qcj,
be.-^iaea. L. 81.
Fuera 1 inter., out ! be cone I awaj I L .11
Fuerza, fwair'-tha, t. fi, force, strcne'ih-—
A fita-za de, by dint of. JL. 68.
Fui,'a./<»'-^, B. f., flight, CMapc. L, 57.
Fulano, foo-lafi'-uo^ b. m. . ibuch a one. L. S.
Fumar,/oo^jar', to emoke. L. 4:i
Fu?il,y«>-jv^/', B. m., gun. L. 49.
Fusilar,/o(Me-/ar', to i»hoot (military). L
45.
Futuro,/<»-too'-ro, e. m.. futnrc (tense;. L.
43.
Futuro, adiJ., ftiture. L. 43.
O.
Galan, gah-lan\ b. m. and a^)-, gallant, ac-
tor ; gallant. L. 58.
Galan to, ga/i-la7i'-tai, a4j., gallant, courtlT.
L. 58.
Galicismo, ffah-U-tAecfs'-mo^ a. m., galli-
cism. L. 01.
Gallcgo, gal-yai'-ffo, b. m., Gaiician. L. 55.
Galliua. (jal-yt'-jia^ b. f., hen. L. fi.
Gana, tjah'-na^ b. f., desire, will, appetite.
L. 69.
Ganapierdc, gah-nah-pi-air'-dq^, s. ro .
came of draughts, or checkers, at ^hlch
the loser wins. L. 60.
Ganar, gah-nar'^ to gain, to win. L. 27.
Gan^o, gan'-«>, b. m., «)obc.— llablar por
boca de gannOy to ccIio what has bcH;n
Baid by others. L. 03.
Garrotazo, gar-td-tah'-tfU^^ s. m., blow with
a cudgel. L. 44.
Garrote, gar-n>'-taJ, b. m.. cvdgel. L. 44.
Gastar, gafx-lar", to waste, to use, to spend,
to expend. L. 50.
Gatillo, g(ih'Uel'-yOy b. m. (dim.), Uttle cat,
trigger of a gun. L. 63.
Gato, gah'-to, s. m., cat. L. 46,
Geniido, hai-ml'-tlo. b. m., croan, lamcnia-
tion, moan, howling. L. 60.
General, hainai-ral\ 8. m. and a4)., gen-
eral. L. 45.
G^nero, hai'-nai-rOy b. m., gender, gena^,
kind, sort, cloth. L. 67.
Gentiiicio, hainrti-tS'-l/ii-^, a^}., peculiar to
a nation. L. 49.
VOCABULABY,
453
Ocatfo, hain-iS'-dy B. m., great crowd, mnl-
tltade. L. 40.
Oentaalla, hain-too-al'-ya, 8. f., rabble,
dregs of the people. L. 49.
Ocrundio, halrroo/i'-de-d, s. m., gerund. L.
43.
GIffiintesco, h^-gan-icuss''fy>y a^., gigantic.
C. 49.
Oineta, hi-nai'-ta.—T(mcT loa cascos & la
oineta, to be hare-brained. L, G4.
Qlobo, glO'-bo^ ». m., globe, balloon. L. 37.
Oobemador, go-batr-nah'aQre\ a.m., gov-
ernor. L. G^
Oobemante, g^-dair-nan'-taiy pres. part.,
povemin:?. L. 33.
Oobcmar, g<>^ir^nar'y to govern. L. 31.
Oobicmo, gO-bH-air'-nOy b. m., government,
C3occ, gd'-f^iai, b. m., enjoyment. L. 54,
Gtolpe, goU'-pai, b. m., blov/, Btroko. L. 61.
Gonzalez, gOne-thah'-l'uth, s. m. (dim),.
Spanish proper name sli^nifying son or
uonzalo. L. 49.
Gorra, gdre'-ra^ b. f., bonnet.— Vivir do
gorray to live at others' expense, to
sponge. L. 61. .
Gozar, gd-thar', to enjoy. L. 23.
Gozo, gS'-thOy B. m., Joy, Batidfiictlon, pleas-
ure. L. 51.
Grabado, grah-bah'-do. b. m., engraving,
cut (picture). L. 53.
Orabar, grah-bar', to engrave. L. 52.
Gracia, grah'-th:-a, b, f,, grace, favor, grace-
ftilnes^, pardou. h. 51.
Qrncias, h. m. pi., thank you. L. 23.
Grado. grah'-ao, b. ra., erratic, degree. — De
groflo, willini'ly. L. 00.
Oramatica, grah-nuili' -Q-Im^ b. f., grammar.
L. 5.
Gramatical, grdh-mah-i^'kai'. adj., eram-
matical. L. 51.
Grande, gran' -flat, adj., great, larre. L. 7.
Granizar, grah-nMhary to hall. L. 30.
Grato, grah'-to^ adU., grateful, pleasing,
agreeable. L. 56.
Grito, grl'-tOy e. m., cry, shout, scream. L.
69.
Guerra, gair'-ra, e. f., war. L. 56.
Guiflada, gfum-yah'-fln^ s. f , wink. L. 51.
Gnlpuzcoa, qh^-prx>*h'-kira, b. f , Guipuzcoa
(province in Spain). L. 55.
Gudtar, goo<ii-tar\ to like, to please, to
taste, X. 31.
Gusto. j70o.<«'-to, B, m., taste, pleasure.— Con
mucho gustOy with great pleasure. L. 23.
H.
Habana (La), Idh-ah-bah'-na^ b. f., Havana.
L. 12.
nabanero, a/i-fxih'nai''rOy a4). and s. m.,
navanese. L. 49.
naber, ah-bair', to have (uped only as an
auxiliary verb in this Bljnlflcation ; for
exceptions see Lesson »>); impersonal
verb, there to be.— //ay dos J§lc»!ia3 en
esta calle, there arc two churdR in tliis
street. L. 12.
nahil, ah'-bfel, adj., able, skilful, expert,
clover. L. 21.
n.jbllidad, ak-bT-tH-dafh', b. f., ability, skil-
fulness, cxpcrtncss, cleverness. L. 86.
Habitante, ah-^-tan'4aiy s. m., inhabitant
L. 40.
nablador, ab4ah-d^re\ adj. ands. m., talka-
tive ; talker. L. 20.
Hablar, ab-lar', to talk, to speak.— Z/o^r
a bulto, to talk at random. L. 1.
ILiccr, ali-thair'y to do, to make.— /7af<?r
muy bicn, to do well or right, to be rigUi.
— Hijuxr de, to act as. L. 19.
Hucia, ah'-thi-a^ adv., toward, towards. L.
19.
Hallar, al-yar'y to find. L. 87.
llambro, am'-brai, b. f., hanger.— Tener
hambrey to be hungry. L. 25.
nasta, aas'-ta, adv., until, till, as Air as,
even. L. 19.
Hazmcreir, ath-mal-ral-eer' ^ b. ra., lau^jhing-
stock. L. 60.
He! ai, inter., ho! what? what do you
8a V? L.44.
necho, ai'-cfto, s. m., action, fbct. L. 52.
Hclar, ai-lar'y to freeze. L. 30.
Helena, al-lai'-na, s. f., Helen, Ellen. L. 19.
UermanaAtro, air-mah-nass'-tro, p. m., aug.,
Btep-brothcr, half-brother, L. 49.
Hermano, air-mah'-no^ b. m., brother. L. 6.
Uermoso, air-tnd'-eo, ad}^ beautiful, hand-
some. L. 7.
Hermosura, air-md-Mo'-ray b. f., beauty,
handsomeness. L. 53.
Herrero, air-rai'-ro, s. m. , blacksmith. L. 65.
Uielo, yai'-lo, s. m., ice, frost. L. 30.
Hicrro, yair'-ro, 8. m., Iron. L. 61.
Iligo, I' -go, s. m., flg. L. 40.
Hilastro. l-fiass'-tro, b. m., step-son. L. 49.
Hijo, 2'-Ai9, s. m., son. L. 6.
Hilar, J-Zar', to spin. L. 63.
Hilo, I'-lo, s. m., thread. L. 21.
Hlnchar, ten-char's to swell. L. 53.
Historia, eess-((y-r?-a, s. f., history. L. 15.
Uoja, D'-ha, s. f., leaf (of a tree or a book).
L.59. .
Hola I d'-ia, inter., hallo ! L. 46.
Holgazan. Ole-gah-(han\ adJ. ands. m.. Idle,
lazy, loitering; idler, loiterer. L. 6.
Hombre, Dme'^rai^ s. m., man.— Es mas
fu)7ni)}'e que su hermano, he is more of a
man than his brother. L. 6.
Honor, d-n&re\ s. m., honor. L. .^.
Honroso, dne-rd'-m, a<y., honorable. L. 62.
Hora, d'-ra, s, f, hour. L. 23,
Homo, &re'-m, s. m., oven.— Coccr en A<?r/w>,
to bake. L. 60.
Horrendo, Ore-rain' -do, a^j., horriflc (poet.).
L. 55.
Hortelano, Ore-tai-lah'-nOy s. m., gardener.
L. 63.
Hospital, dce-pS-ial', s. m., hospital. L. 47.
Hotel, O-iali', 8. m., Iiotel. L. 17
Hueso, wai'-so, s. m., bone.— Bocado sin
"^fiff^. sinecure. L. 61.
nu6spod ivaL'is'-paid, s. m., ffucst, host..—
Ecliar la cnenta Bin la huUneda, to reckon
withont the host. L. 63.
Huir, weer, to flee, to make off. L. 31.
Humano, oo-mnh'-no, adl., human. L. 4fi.
Humor, oo-miUrt' s. m., humor, wit. L. 27.
Idea, ^-ffai'-a, n. f.. ideal. L. 51.
Ideal, l-dcU-al', adj.. Ideal. L. 48.
452
VOCABULABY,
Fas, fa.^.— Vox fat 6 por nffos, right or
\\n*ii^'; justly or unjut^tly. L. G3. .
Fa>(idi(j,ya«.s-/e'-u«<<;, b. m.| trouble, onsoy-
uncc. L. 47.
Fu\or,yi/..-r</n', 8. m., favor, mercy, help.
—\juiori\v, iu bciuilf of. L. :X).
Fa\orcccr, yaA-tv-/t4^-Wia«r', to favor. L.
Favorlto,/a/<-r«%;2'-to, acy., fiivorite. L. 5L
>V,ya/, n. f., laiih. L. 45.
Fi l)rcro,yiii-6/-t/i'-n>, i«. in., February. L. ^
Fecluj,/</i'-c7«/, t>. f., date. L. A).
Ft'licid.id,^(/<-/r-/Atni/.'A', 8. f., bapphiess,
felicity. L. 48.
Felk ilar,/(W-.7'7/#r-<ar', to felicitate, to con-
CTalulato. L. 01.
Feliz, jui-Utfh\ a<y., happy, fortunate,
lucky. L.^»l.
Fdiza.oiite, niiktth'mam'-titi, adv., happi-
ly, loriuuuiely, luckily. L. 49.
Feiticuiuo, jaHnai-nc -iu>, a^j., feminine.
\j, 47.
Feo,./k/*'-o, aty., uply, nnbocoralns:. L. 7.
Feruz, /a/-# t"//« , adj., ferocious, tierce, rav-
euuii!(. L. 51.
Ferroc:irril,yu«/--r(>-car^r«/', b. m., radroad.
L. CO.
Fiado./i'-r.'/j'-Vo, adj., confident, trnpting.—
Al /*,'-/ », on cri'dii, ou trubt. L. Gl.
Fhir, ;r- r\ to tru~t. to bail. L. 61.
Fitl.y t"-(/ .". adj., faithful. L. 21.
Fi«.ft.i. rt-i'^^>-f", B. f., fea.-'t, febtlval.— DIa
d'- j! \/ '^ luiliday. L. IW.
Fijjrra,yt-.7' *>'-/(/, p. f., fi;?ure, form, phape.
— liaccry/yt/za, to make, to cut a figure.
L. <».
Fiiairado, fl-goo rah' -do, a^J., flgurative.
L. 51.
FilO}«t.raf>tro^-/<><!^a«r'-^/T>, e. m., philoso-
plia.^tcr, L. 49.
FiK'-hofo, /t-/t/'-*^o, 8. m., philosopher. L.
4U.
Fin, ftcn^ p. m., end, object, point.— A >fn
f.U\ in order to. L. 45.
Final, i2-..-il\ e, m. and ac^., end, termina-
tit \\\ r.nal. L. fil.
Fi urtl : noil te, fl-tuil-main '-tci^ adv., llnally.
L. -lU.
Flno,/?'-no, adj., line. L. 56.
FIriua,/<fr'-;/jtf, ». f., hl„-uatare. L. 66.
Flbonouiia, ft-i^no-ini'-a^ 6. t, physiogno-
my. L. 45.
Flaqueza, jfah-lai'-iha. 8. f., leanness,
Wiakncp**, foible, frailty. L. 64.
Fondo, fOtu'-ilo, »». m., bottom, gronnd
(of colored articles); pi., fUnds, cash,
money. L. GO.
Formal, /vn-mal', a^., formal, reliable,
respectable. L. 45.
Formalidad,/5nf-/7»<//<-/?-'^a'A', e. f., formali-
ty, reliability, retyped iiJility. L. 43.
Formar,/or<^wiar', to form, to chape. L. 43.
Fortuna, Jore-too'-na, e. £, fortune, luck.
L.42.
FraMta, /mA-(7aA '-/a, s. f., IHjrate. L. 60.
¥miU\/rah'-Hai, s. f., War. L. 41,
France}«,./>a/j-^Aa/>!^, e. m. andat^., French
(lan^ua:^'\, French. L. 8,
Francia, fran'-thT-ft, p. f., France. L. 9.
Francisco, /ran-t/itci>sf'-ko, e. m., Francis,
L. 41.
Franco, fran'-ko, ac^)., JVank, flrec, opcn-
hcartod, intimate. JL ai
Fnmqocza, firan-lttV-iha^ e. t, ftanknces,
open-heart cdue8«, intimacy. L. 4tj.
Frutc, J rah'- bill, a, f., phraae, eenten^i. L.
Fray,/raA'-?, s. m., IHar. L. 41.
Frceueute, jrai-kwaiii'-tai^ a^}., frequent.
Freir, /roi-err', to f^. L. 52.
Frente, jrain'-tai, e. f.» forehead, tront. —
KuyW /</*-, fippobite. L. 45.
Frebco,/ra^*'-X», a^j., fhssh, cool.— Plntu-
ra al jrct^, tnaco painting. L. 46.
Frebco, b. m., cool breeze, cool, refreshing
air, frewro (painting). L. 46.
rrio,y>-e'-<5, ai^j. and e. m., cold. L. S5.
I l'riolera,/rt-o-/r«"-ra, e. f., trifle, L. 87.
¥Tn\&,jttM*'-ta, B. f., fruit. L. 31.
I Fruto, jixx)'-tOy 8. m., fruit (produce). L.
I 40.
■ Ywe^^fwai'-go, b. m.. Are. L. 3-1.
Fueuic, Jnain -lai^ s. f., founttdn, Bpriiig,
Mnircc. L. 52.
F\u'Tn./uai''ra, adv., out— rutra de que,
bf.-itlos*. L. 81.
Fuera 1 inter., out ! be gone ! away ! L. 31.
Fuerza. fa'air^-tha, f-. f., force, t^trength. —
j A jui iza de, by dint of. L. 68.
Fu::a.^«>'-^, b. t, flight, escape. L. 57.
I Fulano,jrc«^aA'-no, tf.m.. euchaonc. I*. 55.
Fumar,/<x)-war', to smoke. L. 42.
I Y\.\^\\,joo-t<€tl\ B. m., gun. L. 49.
Fusilar,/ot)-6't -/ar', to Bhoot tmilitaxy). L.
45.
Fu turo, /oo-too'-n>, e. m.. ftitnre (tense). L.
43.
Futuro, ac^., fhture. L. 43.
Galan, ffah-lan\ s. m. and a^., galhint, ac-
tor ; gallant. L. 58.
Galante, ga/t-lan'-tai, a^j., gallant, courtly.
L. 68.
Galicitimo, ffoh-R-thet^s'-mo^ b. m., galli-
cism. L. 01.
Galk'go, gal-yai'-go, s. m., Galiclan. L. 65.
Galliua, gal-yi -ua, e. f., hen. L. 5.
Gana, (juh'-ua, s. f., desire, will, appetite.
L. 69.
Ganapierde. gah-nah-p^-air^-dQ^ a. m.,
Sme of draughts, or checkens, at which
c loser wins. L. 50.
Ganar, gah-nar', to gain, to win. L. 27.
Gant^o, qau'-^ s. m., eoosc.— Hablar por
boca ae ga/uto, to ccuo what h&s been
said by others. L. 63.
Qarrotazo, gar^rO-tah'-tJU^^ b. m., blow with
a cudgel. L. 44.
Oarrote, gar-rv'-tai^ s. m., cudgel. L. 44.
Gastar, ga/nt-tat ', to waste, to use, to spend,
to expend. L. 50.
Gatillo. gah'ted'-yo^ s. m. (dim.), little cat,
trigger of a gun. L. 53.
Gato, gah'-to. s. m., cat. L. 46.
Gemido. />ai-m7'-f/o, s. m., groan, laxnenta-
tion. moan, howling. L. 69.
General, /ifiitiat-ral^ ». m. and acy,, gen-
eral. L. 45.
Genero, hai'-nai-ro. b. m., gender, genus,
kind, sort, cloth. L. 57.
Gentilicio, kain-ti-fl'-thl'd^ a4)., peculiar to
a nation. L. 49.
YOCABULABT.
455
Tnteileccion, eenrtair-haVb4ia'dne', s. £, In-
t;enection. L. 43.
Interrogacion, eenrt<Ur^/iygah-tM-dne\ 8. f.,
Interrogation. L. 61.
Interrogante, eenrtcUr-rd-gan'-taiy B.m., note
of Interrogation. (Free. part, of Ikteb-
XIOOAB.) L. 61.
Interrogar. een-tair-rd-gar', to interrogate,
to question. L. 61.
Interrumplr, een-tair-room-peer'^ to inter-
mpt. L. 64.
Intiniidad, ten-thfia-dath'^ s. £, intimacy.
X.. 66. .
Xntimo, een'-il-mo^ ad}., intimate. L. 66.
Iiitroduclr, een-trO-oUlhtheer^, to introduce.
i. 40.
Iniitil, em-co'-ted, acU., useless. L. 60.
Invariable, ecrtrvah-rl-ah'-Uai^ adj., invari-
able. L. 56.
Inversion, e«yi-t?atr->«Wn«', e. f., inversion.
L. 61.
Invertir, een-vair-teer' ^ to invert. L. 61.
Iiiviemo, een-vl-fUr'-no^ s. m., winter. L.
^.
Invitar, eenrvl-tar', to invite. L. 66.
Ir. eer. to go. L. 18.
Iris, 2'-f€««w, 8. f., rainbow. L. 61.
Irlanda, eer-lan'-da^ s. f, Ireland. L. 40.
Irregular, eer-r<d-go<>4aT^, a<3iJ., irregular.
L.43.
Irrcgnlaridad, eer-rairgoo4cJir^l-daUi,\ s. f.,
irrcinilarity. L. 55.
Isabel, l-sah-baU', b. t, Isabella, Ellzabcth-
L. 65.
Isia, €^ii''la^ p. f., island. L. 61.
Italia, g-/aA'-/?-a, 8. f., Italy. L.40.
Italiano, 2-^aA-/e-aA'-n<?, 8. m. and adj., ItaU
ian. L. 61.
Izquicrdo, eeth-Ja-air'-do, a^., left-handed.
— Mano izgyterda, left hand. L. 50.
J.
Jabon, hah'bone', s, m., soap. L. 6.
Jamris, hah-mass', adv., never. L. ^.
Jaque, hah'-kaU check (at chess). -Ja<7M^ 7
mate, checkmate. L. 42.
Janlin, har-deen', s. m., garden. L. 18.
Jardincro, har^-nai'-ro, s. m,, gardener.
L S4.
JosC', ///V/^al', s. TO., JofJcpb. L.4n.
J6vcn, ho'-vniv^ adj. and s. m. and f., young,
vonne man, youncr woman, i.. u-
Juan, vA/rw. s. m., John. L. 17.
Jnana, whah'-na, s. f., Jane. L. 17.
Jnc£fo, tohai'-go, e. m., game, play, set. Li.
Jndvcfl. whaV-miss, P.m., Thursday. L. 9.
Jnez, ?r;>a/^A, H.m., Indge. I.. 9.
Jn^r, Aoo-ry/ir'. to play. L. 41.
Julcio, ^rhr-thl-d, s. m., judgment, sense,
trial. L. 53. ^ , , ^n
JuHo, fioo'-n-d, 8.m., July, (prop, name)
Julins. L. 24. , ^
JnnUr, hoon-tar', to join, to place together.
L. 65. , X >r «A
Junto, hofm'-to, adv., near, close to. L. ^,
Jnramento, ho(hr<i-m(Un''U>^ s. m., oath, affi-
davit. L. 53. . . „ . n*
Juflticia, hoosfha'-tM-a, s. f, justice. L. 61.
Jupto. ^oos^-to, adJ. Jnst, ripht. L. 61.
Juventad, hoO'Ven4ooth', s. t, yontn. L.. 48.
La, def. art. f. sing., the. L. 6.
La, pron. f. sing., ner, it, L. 8.
Laconico. lah-ko'-ra-ko, aclj., laconic. L. 38.
Laboriosidad, lah-bo-rd-d'tB-dai/i^ s. f., in-
dustrv. L. 51.
Lacre, lah'-krai^ s. m., sealing-wax. L. 5.
Lado, lah'-do. s. m., side. L. la
Ladron, lah-ardM\ s. m., thief. L. 44.
Lago. lah'-go, s. m., lake. L. 40.
Lfigrima, tah' -gr^-ma, s. f., tear.. L. 51.
liLpiz, lah'-peeth. b. m., pencil. L. 51.
Laigo, lar'-go, adj., long.— Xargo tiempo. a
long time.— A lo largo, alongside. L. 21.
Ldstima, lags' -thma^ s. f.. pity. L. 25.
Lastimar, lam-V^-mar'^ to hurt, to wound,
to ofTcnd. L. 61.
Latin, lah-teen^ s. m., Latin. L. 61.
Latinajo, lah-d-nah'-ho^ b. m. aug., Dog-
Latin. L. 49.
LaUtud, lak-a-too(h', 8. f., width, latitude.
L.61.
Lavandera, lah-tanrdai'-ra^ 8. f., waBhcr-
woman. L. 5.
Lavar, lah-rar', to wash. L. 84.
Le, lai, pron., him, it ; to him, to it. L. 10.
Leccion, laik-thi-one' , s. f, lesson. L. 8.
Leche, lai'-chaU b. f., milk. L. 7.
Lectura, laik^too'-ra, s. f., reading. L. 88
Leer, lai-air', to read. L. 7.
Legiia, lai'-mca, s. f., league. L. 61.
Leido, lai-r-do, adj.— Hombre blen Uido, a
well-read man. (Past pt. of Leer.) L.52.
Ldios, lai'-hCcei adv„ far off.— A lo l^os, in
the distance. L. 81.
Lengua, UUn'-gwa^ b. f., tongue, language.
L.23.
Lcnguage, laiti-gwa'-hai^ s. m., language,
manner of speaking or writing. L. C6.
Lento, lain' -to, adj., Plow, tardy. L. 61.
Leon, lai-dn€\ s. m., lion. L, 64.
Lctra, lai'-ira, s. f., letter (character), hand-
writing, letter (of credit) ; pi., letters, lite-
rature.— Bellas letroif^ Belles-lettres. L.
Levantar, lal-ran-tar' , to raise, to lift up.—
Levantarse. to' rise, to get up. L. 33.
Levlta, lai-ii'-(a, b. m., Levlte. -Zei«a,
8. f, frock-coat. L. 61.
Lov lai'-9, s. f., law. L. 8.
Liberal, ll-bai-raV. adj., iib<;ral. L. 62.
Libcrtad, li-bair-iath' . s. f., liberty. L 40.
Libra, Ce^-bra, s. f., pound. -Xa^r7'a esteriina,
pound sterling. L. 47. ^ _, ,,
LiTbrar, /2-AjW, to free, to deliver: (com-
mercial) to draw. ^L. 45.
Libre, W-lrrttU adj., free. L. 69.
Librerla, U-irai-rr-a. s. f., bookstore, book-
seller's shop, book-trade. L.11.
Librero, n-trrai'-ro, s.m., bookseller. L. II.
Libro, W-trro, s. m., book. L. 4.
Lieeri, li-hai'-ro, ac^j., light, swift. -A la
«7«ra, liphtly. L. 46. .
Limopna, U-mdc^-na, s. f., alms. L. 61.
LJmpiar, fc^-pg-gr', to clean ^^^,^^,^3
Llmpioza, leem-pS-ai'-tha^ s.r., cieaunucBD.
Limplo,foem'.p8-<J, adj., clean, cleanly. L.
Lfnea, B'-na<-<i, b. f., line. L. 61.
Lisboa, le^M-W-a, s. f., Lisbon. L. 55.
Ll8oi\Ja, Rsdfie'-ha, 8. f., flattery. L. 61.
456
VOCABULARY.
LltoqJear, U-Onf-hai-ar*^ to flatter. L. 81.
Lisoujero, U-^One-hai'-ro^ a4j. and s. m.«
flattering, flatterer. L. 61.
LI*ta, ttt*?tit, 6. t, Itat. L. 61.
Li^to, Uest'-(o^ acU., ready, obaip, quick. L.
Litenito, Q-tai-rafi' 'tOy b. m., man of letters,
liter itud. L. 51.
Lltoraiiira, H-tai-rah-too'-ra, b. t, litcratare.
L. 54.
Lltro, fl'-^ro, 8. m., litre. L. 60.
Lo, art. neat., tlie. (See explanations in
Lc4!»oa8.)
Lo. pn>n., it, (and sometimes) him. L. 26.
Local, U^-hiF, a(y., local. L. 54.
Loco, W-fei, a'lj.. mid —A tontas y k loca^,
in .'onaiderately, wilhoat rodectiou. L. 61.
Loc }, A. m., muhniQ. L. 61.
Lo lo, W-'/j, e. m., ra id, miro. L. 45.
Lo 'rai; lO-yrar', to saccacd, to obtain. L.
L^ndres, Idn^'-^rahn^ a. m., L3n'Jon. L. 19.
Lon:/itud, tjtu-M-iojt/i'^ s.f., leajtb, lonjl-
tu K L, 61.
Loteria, W/.ii-rB'-a, g. f,, lottery. L. 65.
I.ucip, h>f'i T', to 0hlne, to flitter. L. G>.
Lut'.'o, lt»'t*y\ adv., by and by, ImtujJi-
at 'ly ; — c )aj ., then, therefore. L. :J ).
La^.ir, U))gir\ b. m., place, village.— En
Ittjar dc», insteid of, L. 2J.
Luis, ln)<'ii\ a. m., L.^wis, LouU. L. 15.
Luisa, txhi'-H'i, s. f., Ljui^a. L. «.
Luna, too'-ni, s. f. m >5n. L. 61.
Luto, h)'-to^ A. m., m>uraiu^. L. 6).
Lu^. A»'4, s.f., H^ht.— Dir a /uj, to pub-
lish, to give birth to. L. 61.
I«L.
Llamar, /yi^-mir', to call, to know. L. 27.
Llive, Iri'i'-rai. a. f., key. L. 5'J.
Llc^ir, fi/ii-j.ir', to arrive.— Ir.Vyar i ser, to
b'»con». L. 37.
Lljuar, lyiinar'^ to All. to falfll. L. 61
Llono, Iv'U'-no, ac^., full. L. 54.
Llevar. lyal-txir'^ to Uko, to carry, to bcsar.
to brln.r forth. L. 14.
Llorar, fynrar', to cry, to weep. L 51.
Lloro, /yj'-ro, s. m., tear, act of crying. L.
Llovor, iiy^vair', to ram.— Ltoivr icantar-
roH. to pour. L. 3). »w»uwr
Llovlzuar, l^y-vyth-naf, to drizzle. L. 30.
Lluvia, lyo^-iia, a. f., rain. L. 30.
^mJle 'T'^G^^' ^•'°' °**^° <«' animals),
""luSr'l'r'-^"^ '' '- ^^> "™^^'»
^J?.'*L."i9!"^^''''*^*''^ ^' '- etep-moth.
Madre maA'-rfro/, s. f, mother. -Lcngua
ma ire, an ori rinal lanffua?c. L. 6.
Mac rid. mah-rircfh', s. m„ Madrid, L. 12.
Al^dnlcflo. mah'^ir?.Min'-yo, 8, m.. Mad rile-
nlan, native of Madrid. L. 49.
Midni^icla. mah-fimfi'Qah'-da^ §. f., that
pirt of the night fVom 12 p. ¥. until sun- I
rise. L. 65. 1
ICadrugar, matirdroo-gar^^ to rise -very earr
L. 62.
Madurcz, mah-<ioo-ruUh\ s. £., laaturr/.
npenetis. L. 51.
Maestro, inah-oies'-tro^ b. m.<, master, c^..^
cr. L. 62.
Magniflco, mag-ia''fl4a>^ adj., ma^iSoc^L
L.5a
Mai, s. m., evil, harm, disease. L. 4SL
Mai, adv., badJy.— J£a/ de so grado, m t;<a:
of him. L. 3.
Maldito, mal-(£i^-tOy adi., aocoreed. povr^:
L.d2.
Malicia, inaA-£^-£A^-^ a. £.. malice. w<ck.^j
ness. L. 62.
Malo, maA'-io, tO}., bad, ill. wicked.— E-.r-
maio^ to be sick.— Ser maio^ U> be b&^x. c^
be wicked. L. 7.
MamA, mah-ma\ a. f., Tnamma L^ 5.
Mandar, man-cUa^y to send, to comznand, tt?
order. L. 17.
Manera, moA-noi'-ni, s. f., manner.- Dc*
manera que, so as, bo that. L. 42.
Mania, ma^-tiT-ay e. f.. mauta, whim. L cT.
Manifestar, fnah-ra-faisa'tar'^ to manii'cti,
to show. L. 51.
Maniflesto. tnah-nH-fl-aisa'-tOt^ ad}., nuni-
,feat. L. 52.
Mano, r/uih'-no, s. f., hand, quire ((^ paper*.
— Venir con frua tnanat larada.«, to wi-L
to enjoy the fruit of another's labor. L
28
Manteca, man-tai''ta. b. f., batter, lard
(South America). L. 62.
Manteqnilla, man-tai-keel'-ya^ s. f., butter
(South America), lard. L. 02.
Manuel, mah-7wo-aU\ s. m., Emanud. L. 2.
Manuscrito, mah-nooss-kri'-lo^ ». m.. maoo.
script. L. 62.
Manzana, man'thah'-na^ 8. f., apple, block
(of houses). L. 81. •-•'•' ^
Manzanar, man-thah-nar^t b. m.. apple-or-
chard- L. 49.
Maflana, man-yah'-n€u e. t, momini:. to-
morrow.— Paaado maSlana^ the day after
to-morrow. L. 80.
Mar, s. m. and f., sea.— Qnien no w arrie*
Si no pasa la mar, flihit heart never woa
ir lady. L. 62.
5Ja!S' '"«'^-i^ *• f., mark, brand. L. 4i
Marcha. mar'-cha, s. f., marrh.— Sobre la
marefia, ofT-hand, on the spot L. 51.
Marchar, fiwr^^r'. to march. L. 1ft.
Margarita,, mar^oA-fg'.to, s. f., Margaret
Li. o.
Maria, maA.r?'-<j. s. f., Mary. L. 44.
Maries, mar^'taiif, s. m., Tuesday. L. 9
Marzo, mar'thd, s. m., March. L. 24.
Mas. fwi>f.«, adv., more.— Jf(» que (or dc\
more than. L. 16.
Mascara, mOfuf'.kah-m, s. f., mask, L, GO.
Mapculino, fnoM-koo-U'-no, a^j., mascnhne.
L. 47.
Matar, mah-tar', to kill. L. 44.
Matom^tico. mah-tni-mah.''f?'1»^ e. m.,
roathemaliclan; at^., mathematical. L.
60.
Materia, mahfai^'r^a, s. f., matter, subject.
aflair. L. W.
Material, malt-tai^ial^ adj., material. L.
46.
Materialista, tnnh'tai-f^-ah4ees8'4€L s. m,.
materialist. L.36. --, ,
VOCABULARY.
457
HatrimoniOf moA-M-md'-n^-oi, 8. m., matii-
mouy, wedlock, marriage. L. W.
lliAuilido^ rnah'i»i'}/i'-dOt ». m., mew (or a
cai). L. 46.
Haximo, maf-^S-mo^ &d}. (auperlatiye of
Ubamue;, chief, principal, very great.
L. ai.
Hayo, mah'-yo^ s. m., May. L. 3^1.
Mayor, rtiaii-yore' ^ adj., jireatcr, larger.—
ill uiayur^ ttie greatest, tnc largest. L. "iii.
HayCitM:ula, iiui/^'yuosb'-Lou-Ui^ acg., capital
(bald of letters). L. U2.
Me, riiaiy prou., uie, to me. L. 26.
Mcca, tnoi'-ka^ s. f.— Dc zeca en meca^ from
pillar to poidt, to and fro. L. 61.
Media, tnai'-cCi-ay b. f., Btocking. L. 10.
Medlanamcnte, mai-di-a/i-na/i^main'-tai,
adv., middling. L. a9.
Mediania, niai-a3-a/i-ni' -a^ 8. f., mediocrity,
moderation. L. 52L
Mediano, rmUrdi-a/i'-no^ adj., mediam, mid*
dling, moderate. L. S9.
M6dlco, mai'-iihko^ b. m., physician. L. 19.
Mcdlda, mai-dl-fia, b. f., meauarc. L. 55.
Medio, mai'-iil-Os adj., half. — JI/«</iodia, mid-
day, noon.— i/€rf/onoche, midnit^ht. L. ao.
Medio, 8. m., middle, means.— I'or tnedio
de, by meauB of. L. 37.
Medlodia, mai-dl-O-dl'-a^ e. m., noon, mid-
day, south. L. 30.
Mcdtr, mai-d^T^y to measure. L. 39.
Mejicano, mai hhkali'-iu>^ b. m. and a^)..
Mexican. L. 47.
Meiico, mai'-hl-kOy s. m., Mexico. L. SO.
Mcjor, mai-h&re'. a(y. and adv., better.
—El mOory the bcfit. L. 20.
Mclocoton, mai t&-LO-tOne\ b. m., peach. L.
31.
Melon, mat4dm'^ b. m., melon. L. 31.
Memoria, rnai-mo'-re-a, b. f., memory, re-
collection.— Aprender do metiwria^ to
learn by heart. L. 38.
Memorias, mai-nU>-ri-<u^ 8. f. pi., my com-
plImcntB. L. 39.
Mencion, main-th^-^ne'. 8. f., mention. L.
52.
Mencionar, main'thi-O-nar^^ to mention. L.
45.
McncBtcr, mai-naiits-talr' , b. m., need, want,
necesBlt V. — Ser menester^ to be necessary ;
mnst.— liaber menesUr^ to want, to re-
quire. L. 30.
Mcnor, mcd-nlire', adj., less, smaller, minor,
youn^r : s. m., minor. L. 20.
MenoB, mai'-nucf, adv., less.— A lo men/w,
at looBt.— Ni mas mi menos^ neither more
nor IcBB. L. 16.
Mcnoscabo, mai-n/icf-kah'-bo. b. m., detcri
oration, detilment, prejudice, diminu-
tion. L. 62.
Menosprccio, mat-nl^c^prai'-thl-ii, b. ra.,
contempt^ Bcom.— Mncha tomlltarldad cs
cauPA dc mer.ottprffio. much familiarity
breeds contempt. L. 05.
Mento, main'-fai^ b. f,. mind. L. C2.
Mentlr, main^€er\ to lio. L. 45.
Mcnndo, mai-rw&'do. ndj., small, picnder,
mean.— A fiwnvdo, oft on. L. 25.
Meqnetr*fe, mcd-kof-irai'-fai, 8. m., trifler.
Jackanapes. L. 63.
Mercader, rn<jir kah-dair' . b. m., dealer,
trader, shopkeeper. L. 65.
Mercado, mair-kah'-do^ s. m., market. L. 17.
20
Mcrcantil, mair-kan-teel', acU., mercantile.
L.5tt.
Mercccr, mcU-rai-Uialr' ^ to merit, . to de-
serve. L. 62.
Merendar, mai^rain-dar', to lunch. L. a<.
Mcridiauo, tfutl-te-dS-ah'-tiO^ a. m., merid-
ian. L. 62.
Merino, nuu-ri'-no, a. m., merino (sort of
bpauitih sheep). L. 40.
MciiLo, vi<u''jflo, 8. m.. merit. L. 55.
Mes, »MtiMf, B. m., moutn.— Al me^^ by the
month. L. 16.
Mc8a. iruW-aQj 8. f., table. L. 14.
Metal, tmiHal\ s. m., metal. L. 62.
Meter, nuU-tcUr', to put, to place. —J/e/<rr
ruldo, to make noise. L. 40.
Mctodico, mai-to'-dS-kOy ac^., methodical.
L. 35.
MC'todo, mai'-td-do. s. m., method. L. 47.
MetT6poli, mai-ir^ pO-^, 8. f., metropolis.
L. 51.
}(It, mi, pron., me. L. 25.
Mi, poss. prun.. my. L. 5.
Miedo, mc-ai'-ao, s. f , fear.— Tener mkdo,
to be afraid. L. 25.
Miel, mv-ail', 8. f., honey. L. 05.
Miembro, mi-ai/n'-lfro, o. m., member, limb.
L. 62.
Miercolcs, mi-air' -k^ialim, s. m., Thursday.
L. 9.
Mil, tneel, num. adj. and 8. m., a thousand,
one thousand. L. 14.
Milla, ffied'-m, s. f., mile. L. 62.
Millar, mea-yar'^ s. m., the number of a
thousand, tliousand. L. 40.
Millon, med-yOne\ num. adj. and s. m., mil-
Won.— MiUones de pesos, miliiona of dol-
lars. L. 40.
Mineral, nu-nai-ral', s. ra., mineral. L. 62.
Minuscula, mf-nooce'-koo-la, adj., snmll
(said of letters), as opposed to capital.
L. 62.
Minnto, mi-noo''to, b. m., minute. L. 23.
Mio, mia, mi'-d, ml'-a, poss, pron. and poss.
adj., mine. (As a poss. adj., mio is al-
ways placed after the substantive.) L. 13.
Mlrar, mi-rar\ to look, to look at, to ob-
serve. L. 29.
Mismo, imc8s'-mo, adj., pame, pelf, self-
same.— El mismo^ he himself L. 27.
Mitad, mhiath\ s. f., half L. 40.
Moda. md'-da, s. f., fistshion. L. 25.
Modelo, md-dai'-lo, s, m.. model. L. 56.
Moderaclon, md-dai-rah-tM-dne', s, f., mod-
eration. L. 65.
Modemo, md-dair'-no^ a^j., modem. L, 52.
Modiflcar, md-di-fl-kar^ to modify. L. 61.
Modismo, md-deegft^-mo, b. m., peculiar
manner of expressing the same ideas
in the same language. L. 64.
Modo, md'-do. b, m., mode, manner.- T>n
ningun modo. by no moans.— Dc modo
que, so that. L. 42.
Molcptar, mfi-fofftHar' , to molest, to dis-
turb, to trouble. L. 43.
Momcnto, md-main'-fo, s. m.. moment. L.
62.
Mona, m/y-na^ b. f., female morkey.-c-Ann-
que la m4ma se viPta de perin. mora se
qncda, a hog in armor is still but a hog.
MonArqniro. mo-nar' -khko^ ad)., mooarchi'
cal. U35.
453
VOCABULABY.
Moneda, m^-nai'-da, b. f., money, coin,—
Papcl moneda^ paper money. L. 66.
MoDur, tfidM-iar', to mount, to asceDo, to
nde (on horseback). L. 62.
MouUtrass, tni>ne-Uth-raik\ a4)., moontam,
wild. L. M. „ ^
Moute, mdne'-lai, s. m., monntam.— iiOMe
dc piedad, pawn-oflice. L. 40.
Mordcr, imrtd<ur'y to bite, to nip.— No ee
tnutrde iod labioa, lie speaks out hia mind.
L. 36.
Moribuudo, mOH-boon'-do, ad^., dying. L.
47.
Morir, md-reer*, to die. L; 41.
Moiica, mdce'-ka^ b. f., ily. L. 44.
Moatrar, vUke-trar* ^ to show. L. 85.
Motivo, md-U'-vOy 8. m., motive. L. 34.
Mover, nU>-vair', to move. L. 36.
Mozo, mo'-tho, b. m., youth, young man,
waiter. L. 02.
Muchacha, mochchah'-cha^ %. f., girl. L. G.
Machacho, mocxtuUi'-cttOy b. m., boy. L. 6.
Mucho, moo'-c/iOy adj. and adv., much, a
great deal, very. L. 8.
Httdable, moo-dah'-Uai, a^)., mutable,
changeable, llclde. L. 40.
Hudar, fnoo-dar', to change.— Jftfdarw, to
move (from one place to anotlicr). L. 62.
Muela, nwo-ai'4a, ». f., back tooth.— Dolor
dc tnuelas, toothache. L. GO.
Mucrtc, moo-air'-taiy b. f., death. L. 88.
Hucrto, nuxHur'-to, paat part, (of Monm),
dead, killed. L. 6l
Muestra, mocxUsa' tray b. f, Bample, sign.
L. 02,
Miijcr. moo-hair'^ b. f., woman, wife. L. 6.
MiUtltud, tnool'O-UjoUi'y a. f., multitude. L.
40.
Mundo, moon'-dOy b. m., world.— Todo el
mundOy everybody. L. 35,
Munnuraclon, moor-rnoo-rahthlSine' y b. i.|
murmuring, backbiting. L. 62.
Murmurar, rrwor-moo-rar' y to murmur, to
backbite. L. 62.
MiiHco, moo-mi'-dy s. m., mupenm. L. 61.
Mfi«ica, mo(/'8?'kay b. f., muBlc. L. 16.
M(iMcb, moo'sd-kOy a. m., musician. L. 16.
Muy, moo'-^y very. L. 6.
N.
Nacor, nah'thcdr'y to be bom.— A'iKvr de
n\6»y to be bom to good luck. L. 62.
Naclon, nah-thi-dne'y «. f., nation. L. »4.
Nada, ruth' -da. adv., In no degree.— :^ada
m^noB, nothincr lew. L. 11.
Nnda. b. f., nothins. nonentity. L. 11.
Nadnr, nah-dar\ to Bwim. t. 53.
Nadic, nah'-dS-aiy ind. pron., nobody, no
ono. li. 11. V «
Nftpolc«», nah'-j)^-laiMy b. f, Nnplc*. 1^-f «.
NamnH, nnh-mn'-hn, 8. f.. ornnire. L. 31.
Nntnral, vnh-ton-raV. a. m. and adj., natu-
ral; native. L. 44.
Naturalojia, ndh'(oo-rah4ai' -tha^ b. f., na-
ture. L. 40.
Natnraliflta. nah-too-rah4ee8s'-tay b. m., na-
_^ turallst. L. 36. _
i7avarra, nah-var'-ray b. f., Navarre. L.
55.
Navarro, nah-wtr'-ro. fl. m., Navarreae (na-
tive of Navarre). L. 65.
Navegadon, nah-toHfah^hi'tne' , a. £, navi-
gation. L. 24.
Navidad, nah-vl-dath* y a. t, nativity, Christ.
mas. L.43.
Navio, nuh-vi'-d^ a. m., ehip. L. 63.
Neccaario, nai-thai'sah'-rl-Oy adj., neces-
aary. L. 27.
Necealdad, nal-thaisi'daih', a. t, neceesity.
need, want. L. 44.
Necesltar, nai-thai-ii'iar\ to be neceeeary,
to necessitate, to require, to want. L. 5.
Necio, nai'-UilrOy acy. and a. m., foott^li ;
fool. L.65.
NefiiB, nai''/at».—VoT fae 6 por nrfof^ right
or wrong. L. 63.
Negaclon, nai-gahrthl-dne', a.f, negation.
Ncgar, nai-gar'^ to deny, to refuec. L. 34.
Negativa, nai-gahti'-iOy s. f., negation, neg-
ative, refusal. L. 62.
Negligente, fuii^ll'Aain''taiy a4}^.negii>
gent. L. 60. , .
Neeocio, nai-gd'^tl-^y a. m., bnaineaa,
affair, matter. L. 27.
Negro, nai'-grOy a. m. and adij., negro ; blaclc
L. 62.
Ncutro, ncA'-oo-trOy adj, neuter. L. 62.
Kevar, nal-tor'y to anow. L. 80.
Ki, nly conj., neither, nor.— A'/ maa rd m©-
noB, neither more nor le&a. L. 8.
Nieve, nl-ai'-T€dy a. f., enow. L. SO.
Ninguno, neen-goo'-nOy pron.. no one, no-
body.— Hinguna coea, nothing. L. 11.
Nifia, neen'yay s.f., little girl, young girt,
maiden. L. 17. . ^ , » .._
Ni&o, netn'-yo, a. m^ child, Inliint. L. 17.
No, adv., no, not. L. 1. , , ^
Noble, n&'-llaiy a(«., noble. L. 62.
Nobleea, nD-Hai' IhOy a. f., nobleness, no-
bility. L.B6. . ,.. „
Noche, nd'-chaiy a. f., evening, night.— Bue-
naB noc/ugy good evening, good nipnt,—
Ik'oehe buena, Chriatmaa eve. — Ancche,
laPt night. L. 28.
Nombrar, nUme-brar'^ to name, to appoint.
L.48.
Nombre, rwme'-braiy 8. m., name, nonr.—
ycmbre propio, proper name, proper
noun. L. 40.
Noniinatlvo, fi^mJ-noA-ff -to, a. m., ncmi-
native. L. 62. , , ^„
Nono. (SceNoviNO.) L. 15.
No obsUnte, ''t^^-^Sf^'-^f^^^^!.-; TS"
theless, notwithatanding, hov e\er. I-. bi.
Norte. nCre'-taiy a. m., north. L. 2».
Nop nOce. pera. pron., ua. to ua. L,. 26.
No'otroa, lo^l/'trccty pron., we, oun:elvee.
Nota, W-fa. p. 1, Bote. .^- J?- ^ t 59
Notar, nS-tar\ *o««t^V*° ^dcrnew^' Pl
Notlcia, TiTi'tr'thl-a. e. f., notice, new^ , pi.,
Noveclcntop. vd-voi-m-edn -tOce, nura. i^w ,
nine hundred. T^.J*- . ^^^ritv trouble.
Novrdad, nO-rai-dalh' y B.f., novcnj,
NoveU, n^J.rai'-/o, a. f., novel, f omancc. L.
Noveno, pd^cA'-nOy ord. aOJ. "od *• ™-
ninth. L. 16. ., ^,„_*- r
Novcnta, nd-vain'-tOy num. adj., ninety. *-
14.
VOCABULABY.
459
Novlembre, n^-vl-aim'-^rtxl, s. m., Novem-
ber. L.^.
Naestro, noo-aisi'-tro^ po8s. pron., onr, ours.
L. 13.
Nnera, noo-ai'-va, b. f., news (generaJly
used in the pi). L. 60.
Naeva York, luxhoi'-va^ s. f., New York.
L.9.
Naeve, noo-ai'-vai, nnm. at^., nine. L. 11.
Naevo, noo-ai'-vo^ a^)., new.— De nuevo,
anew. L. SI.
Naez, jvxHiitA', a. f., walnut. L. 40.
Nameral, noo-mai-ral'^ atU-* numeral. L.
Ndmero, na/^mai-ro^ e.m., number. —^ Quo
numero ticnc bu casa de v. ? what 1b the
number of your bouae ? L. 14.
Nunca, noon'-ka^ adv., never. L. 85.
O, conj., or, either. L. 8.
O t inter., oh ! L. 39.
Obedecer, (^-daircUU-thair*, to obey. L. 48.
Objetivo, Obe-AairO'-vo^ a^}. and s. m., ob-
. lective. L. 6*2.
Obieto, Sbe-hai'-to^ b. m., object. L. 48.
Obligacion, O-bH-gafirUa-^ne' , b. f., obliga-
tion, duty. L.§1.
Obligarf^^a-^ar', to oblige, to force, to
compeK L. 61.
Obra, o'-'bra, b. f, work (any thing made, as
a book, a doubc, <fec.). L. 15.
Obrar, d-brar*^ to work, to act, to operate.
L.40.
Obaervar, Sbe-sair-var'^ to observe, to re-
mark. L. 48.
Obstante, Sdesian''i€il, present part.— No
obstante. (See no obstattte.) L. M.
Obvio, Sbe't^-b^ a4i., obvious. L. 43.
Ocasion, d-kafirsS-bne', b. f., occaBlon, oppor-
tunity.— Tomar la oca4ft>n por los cabailoB,
to take time by the forelock. L. 39.
Occidente, dke-t/O-ckUn'-tai, s. m., the west.
LSI.
Ochcnta, b-ehain'-tay nnm. a4)., eighty. L.
Ocho, 3'-cAo, nnm. ai^., eight. L. 14.
OchoclentOB, d-cho-t/ii-ain-toce^ num. a^).,
el!£Cbt hundred. L. 14.
Octavo, bke-tafi'-vo^ ord. a4}., eighth.— £n
octavo^ 8vo. L. 15.
Octubre, dke-too'-tnxU^ b. m., October. L
34.
OcnlUr, dkool'tar', to hide. L. 48.
Oculto, 6-koW'tjOy adj., hidden. L. 52.
Ocupaclon, dkoo-pah'tM-dne\ s. f., occupa-
tion, business, concern. L. 51.
Ocnpar, 0-koo-par', to occupy, to engage, to
flllcapost). L.47.
Ocurrir, O-kjoor-reer'^ to occur, to strike.—
Le ocurre una idea, an idea strikes him.
L. 6^.
Oeste, d-ai^f-tcU, s. m., west. L. 51.
OfeiKler, b-Jain-dair', to offend. L. 27.
Oiicio, b-Jl'-thi-Oy b. m., office, employ,
trade. X. 38.
Ofreccr, d-frai-lkair'. to offer. L. 49
Oldo, d-^'-do, s. m., hearing, ear.— Hablar al
oWo, to whisper in one's ear. L. 61.
Olr, d-eer*, to heaj^ Oiga / Just listen 1 L.
OJal& 1 bhah-la^ inter., would to Qod I L.
87.
OJo, d'ho, B. m., eye. L. 29.
Oler, d-kUr', to Bmell. L. 41.
Olfttto, dU'/ah'-to. s. m., the seoBe of smelL
L.61.
Olla, Ote'-ya^ s. f., earthen pot.— ^XZs podri-
da, Spanish mixed dish of meats, vegeta-
bles. &c., cooked to^i^ether. L. Gi.
Olor, b-ldre\ s. m., odor, scent, smell. L. 62.
Oiivar, O-ti'Vaf, s. m., olive ground. L. 62.
Olvldar, olevi-dar', to forget. L. 40.
Omnibus, bme'-ni-boocey b. m., omnibus-.
L. 51.
Once, bne^-tAai, num. a^., eleven.- Hacer
las once, to lunch about noon. L. 14.
Opera, d'-pairra, s. f., opera. L. 25.
Opmion, o-pi'/H-bne', s. f., opinion. L. 42.
Oponer, d-pd-nair', to oppose. L. 51.
Optimo, ope^U^mo, acQ., best, extremely
good. L. 21.
Opuesto, lH»waig8'4o^ a^J-i opposite, op-
Dosed. (meg. paBt. part or Oponeb.)
Oracion, d-rah'Ua-iyne'y s. f., prayer, speech,
discourse. L. 45.
Ordcn, Ore'-dmn, s. m. and f., order.— A la
6rden de V., at your service. L. 89.
Ordcnar, bre-dai-nar' ^ to order, to com-
mand. L. 51.
On;anlsta, 0ng<ih-nee98'4a, 8. m., organist.
Oriente, d-rd-ain'-tai, east. L. 51.
Oro, 3'-ro, s. m., Rold.— No es oro todo lo
Zue reluce, all m not gold that glitters.
u8. . "
Os, A», pron., yon (objective of verbs). L.
26.
Ostion, ^o^/j-^n^', B. m. (SeeOsTBA.) L.62.
Ostra, Dee'-tra, s. f., oyster. L. 68.
Oto&o, b-tOne^-yo, s. m., autumn, fall. L. 24.
Otro, O'-tro, Indef. pron., other, another.
L. 18.
Oveja, d^ai' ha, s. f.. sheep. L. 65.
Ox I Oka, Inter, used to Inghten off fowls,
Ac. i.46.
Paca, pah'-ka. s. f., Fanny. L. 44.
Paclencia, pah-thi-ain'-lhi-a, s. f., patience.
L. 68.
Paco, pah'-ko, s. m., (contraction of Fbak-
cisco, Francis), Frank. L. 44.
Padeccr, paA-dai-iAair', to suffer pain. L.
47.
Padrastro, pah-dross' 4ro, b. m., step-fiiiher.
L. 49.
Padre, /MiA'-<fmi, b. m., ftther.— T^irfr^nues-
tro, the liord's prayer, L. 6 and 45.
Pasar, pah-qar', to pay. L. 14.
Pa&;ar6, pak-qah^rm', h. m., (comra.) prom-
issory note. L. 59.
PA^ina, pah'fil-na, s. f., page (of a book,
Ac). L. 50.
Pais, pah-fess', b. m., country.— i Cn&nto
ticmpo hacc qn6 esti V. en cste paUf
how long have yon been in this countiy ?
L. 19.
Paisano, pah-^-sah'-no, s. m., countryman
• (one flrom the same country). L. 60.
PfliJa, pah'-ha, b. f., straw. L. 63.
458
TOCABULABY.
Hoaeda, nU^-nai'-iia, b. t, moner, coin.—
Fapei mo/ieda^ paper money. L. fi5.
Houuir, r/iOne-iar'^ to mount, to ascend, to
ride (ou horseback). L. 62.
Moutaraz, tuone-toA-ratA'^ ad^., moontam,
wild. L.&1.
Moutc, tuone'-tai^ s. m., moontain.— ifon/e
de piedad, pawn-office. L. 4U.
Mordcr, more-Uatr', to bite, to nip.— No fle
tnutrde Urn labios, he speaks out hid mind.
L. an.
Moribundo, md-rS-liooA'-do, a^)., dying. L.
Monr, m^reer', to die. L; 41.
Hobca, t/ioce'-ka^ b. f., fly. L. 44.
Mo^ttrar. r/wce-trar'^ to efaow. L. 86.
Motivo, tn&'ti'-co^ 8. m., motive. L. dl
Muver, vii^'Vair'y to move. L. 36.
Mozo, mo'-tho^ B. m., youUi, young man,
waiter. L. 4)3. ^
Muciuicha, nuxhchah'-cha, b. f., girl. L. 6.
Muchacho, moo^htUi'-cho^ 6. m., l>oy. L. 6.
Mucho, fMO'-c/iO, a4). and adv., much, a
great deai, very- L- 8.
Madable, moo-Uah'-Uai^ b^Im mutable,
cliangeable, fickle. L. 49.
Mudar, fnoo-dar*^ to change.— ITucfar/v, to
move (ftom one place to another). L. 02.
Hnela, moo-ai'-la. ». f., back tooth.— Dolor
dc muelas^ tootluu^hc. L. fiO.
U ncrte, rnoo^ir'-tai, 8. f., death. L. 88.
Huerto, nioo-air'-to, past part, (of Horib),
dead, killed. L. 63.
Muci^tra, fiuxHUse'-tra^ b. f., sample, elgn.
Miijcr. moo-hair'^ b. f, vr oman, wife. L. 6.
Multitud, ntcol-a-tcoth', e. f., multitude. L.
40.
Mnndo, moon'-do, b, m., world.— Todo el
71} undo, everybody. L. 35^
Munnuraclon, mocr-moo-rahthi-dne\ b. f.,
myrmnring, backbitinc:. L. 62.
Murmurar, mcoT'tnoo-Tar't to murmur, to
backbite. L. 62.
Mn^oo, mofHtai'-d, b. m., mupoum. L. 61.
MtVlca, froo'-fs?-I:a^ b. f., mupic. L. 16.
Muhico, viOfZ-si-ko^ b. m., musician. L. 16.
Muy, tnoo'-iy very. L. 6.
N.
Nacer, n/ifi-fhnfr\ to bo horn.— Karer do
pIt'S, to bo bom to good luck. L. 62.
Nacion, nak-f/i9-i>ne*^ b. f., nation. L. 24.
Nada, nah'-ffn, adv.. In no degree.— iVcrfa
Tn<^noB, nothincr Icbb. L. 11.
N.irtn. fl. f.. nothinir. nonentltv. L. 11.
Nft'lnr, nah'dar\ to Pwim. t. 5.3.
Nadlo, naJi'-di-ai, Ind. pron., nobody, no
ono. L. 11.
Nnpolcs, nah'-ji^laUs, b. f. N"np1o«. L. 47.
Nnmnia, nnf>-ran'-7in, fl. f.. ornn'ro. L. 31.
Nat n nil, vnh-iof*-rnI\ B. m. and adj., natu-
ral; rntlve. L. 44.
Natnraleza, nah-loo-rdh-iai' -tha, b. f., na-
ture. L. 40.
Natnnili«ta, nalt'too-rah-leess'-ta, b. m., na-
turalist. L. 86.
Navarra, nah-var'-ray b, f., Navarre. L.
55.
Navarro. ruih-f*ar'.ro. b. m., Navarrese (na-
UveofNavane). L. 66.
Nayegadoii, nahrvai-ffoh-ihi-^ne'^ s. C, naii-
gation. L. iM
Navidad, naAc^-<iath\ a. £, naUvity, Clirist-
mas. L. 48.
Navio, na/t-ti'-6, b. m., ship. L. 63.
Necesario, nai^tJuU-w/ir''ri-d, adi., neces-
sary. L. 27.
Necesldad, nai'iJiai-a-{l<Uh\ b. C, neceaeitr.
need, want. L. 44. '
Necesitar, nai-tJiai-ii-(ar\ to be neceecaxr,
to necessitate, to require, to wan:. L. 5.
Neclo, nai'-tht-O^ ac^. and s. m., focliili :
fool. L.65. •» .
NefkB, naiV"«»-— For fas 6 por n^of, right
or wrong. L. 68.
Negacion, naL-gahrUil-^t', b.C, negation.
Negar. nai-ffar^^ to deny, to refuse. L. 51.
Nq^ttva, Tiai-gak-W-ia^ e. f., negation, neg-
ative, refusal. L. 63.
Negligente, nahi^-hoin'-tai^ a^).^ . ncgli>
gent. L. CO.
N<^pcio, nai-gi>'4M-l^ a. m., tmsineas,
i^air, matter. L. 27.
N^jo, noi'-^rv, s. m. and adj., negro ; blade
Neutro, nai'-co-trOy a^., neuter. L. GS.
Ncvar, nai-rar'y to snow. L. 80.
Ni, ni^ conj., neither, nor.— A'^i mas ni vaS-
noa, neither more nor less. L. 8.
Nieve, nl-ai'-rai^ b. f., snow. L. 80.
Ninguno, neen-ffoo'-no, pron., no one, no-
body.— Alngrt/na cosa, nothing. L. 11.
NiBa. netn'-ya^ s. f., little girl, young giil,
maiden. L. 17.
Nifio, neai'-yo^ s. m., cbild, Infant. L. 27.
No, adv., no, not. L. 1.
Noble, nC'-llaU adj.. noble. L. 62.
Nobleza, rw-Utd' tha, b. f., nobleness, no-
bility. L.66.
Nochc, rtd'-c/tai, s. f., evening, night.— Bne-
nas tiocfuf^ good evening, good ni(!ht. —
A'orAd buena, Christmas eve. — AnocAf,
iBHt night. L.23.
Nombrar, nCtM-Orar'. to name, to appoint.
L.48.
Nombre, nCme^'brai, s. m., name, noun.—
Acmlnv propio, proper name, proper
noun. L. 40.
Nominativo, nd-mX-nah-d'-ro^ b. m., nomi-
native. L. 62.
Nono. (Sec Novkko.) L. 16.
No obstante, r.o-Ct>e-i^an'4aL, adv., never-
t hcless, notwithstanding, however. L. 54.
Norte. vCre'-tai^ a. m., north. L- ^ ^
Nop, ndce, pers. pron., up, to us. L. 26.
Noeotros, nOso'-trCcf, pron^ we, oureelves.
Nota,W-^a, 8.1, note. L.C2.
Notar, nd-far\ to ncte, to o^fc^^J- ^^.^j-
Noticia, nr>-(r-thl-c, s. f., noUcc. news ; ^.1.,
Ticivp, L. 27. . . . T Ar
yotoT\orr}d-(d'-fi-d. aflj., noV^J^^^^- ^' Y'
Novcclontop, rd-Toi-tM-um'-tut, ^^^- at'J-
nine bnrrlrod. L. 14. i*.. ironiiV
Novcrlad, n&-v<a-dath\ s.f., novelty, troub.e.
Novcla, nl^rai'-la, s. f., novel, lomance, L.
62
Noveno, n^-ral'-fio, ord. adj. and s. m-
ninth. L.15. .. . *» i
Novcnta, nO-vain'-ta, num. adj., ninety, i^-
14.
VOCABULABY.
459
Novlembre, «5-u^fllJ»'-*rfli, 8. m., Novem-
ber L. 34.
Nuestro, ruxyaigy^-lro, poss. pron., our, ours.
L. 13.
NncTa, noo-ai'-va, n. f., news (generally
used ID the pi). L. 60.
Nueva York, noo-ai'-va, a. f., New York.
L. 9.
Nueve, noo-ai'-vai^ nnm. acy., nine. L. 11.
Nuevo, noo-ai'-vOy a^)., new.— De wuWs
anew. L. 21.
Nuea, naHtith\ a. f., walnnt. L. 40.
Nomeral, noo-tnai-ral\ a4}., numeral. L.
14.
Ndmero, nay-mai-ro^ a. m., number. —i Que
numero tienc au caaa de V. ? what 1b the
number of your house ? L. 14.
Nunca, noon'-ka, adv., never. L. 85.
O.
O, coi^., or, either. L. 8.
O I inter., oh ! L. 39.
Obedecer, d-bairdai-thtUr'^ to obey. L. 48.
Objetivo, Sbe-hai-t^-vo,, adj. and a. m., ob-
Icctive. L. 63.
Objeto, dbt-hai'-tOy a. m., object. L. 48.
Obligacion, ^-M-gahrlta-dne' , a. f., obliga-
tion, duty. L. 34.
Obliga^^^l-^ar', to oblige, to force, to
compeK L. 61.
Obra, o'^-br€L s. f., work (any thing made, aa
a book, a house, &c. ). L. 16.
Obrar, d-6rar', to work, to act, to operate.
L. 40.
Obaervar, dbesair-var'y to obaerve, to re-
mark. L. 43.
Obstante, ^ibe-stan'-tai^ present part.— No
obatanU. (See no obstante.) L. 54.
Obvio, dbe^vi-d^ a^j., obvious. L, 43.
Ocasion, d-kah-si-dne\ s. f., occasion, oppor-
tunity.— Tomar la ocasion por los cabeUos,
to take time by the forelock. L. S9.
Occidente, bke-i/a-dain'-taly s. m., the west
L,51.
Ochenta, d-ehain'-tay num. a^j., eighty. L.
14.
Ocho, y-chOy num. a^J., eight. L. 14.
Ochocientos, d-cho-t/ti-ai^-toce^ num. a^J.,
eight hundred. L. 11.
Octavo, dke-tah'-vo^ ord. a^., eighth.— En
octavo^ Svo. L. 15.
Octubre, dke-too'-braiy a. m., October. L
Ocultar, d hxi'tar, to hide. L. 48.
Oculto, d-hool'-to^ adi., hidden. L. 53.
Ocupaclon, d koo-pah'iM'One\ s. f., occupa-
tion, business, concern. L. 54.
Ocnpar, b-koo-par', to occupy, to engage, to
fiir (a post). ^. 47.
Ocurnr, O-koor-rter' ^ to occur, to strike.-
Le ocitrre una idea, an idea strikes him.
L. oa.
Oeste, d-aiss'-tai.B. m., west. L. 61.
Ofender, d-Jain-dair'^ to offend. L. 27.
Olido, d-Ji'-t/ii-Oy 8. m., office, employ,
trade. L. 38.
Ofrecer, d-frai-ihait''^ to offer. L. 49.
Oido, d'^-do, 8. m., hearing, ear.— Hablar al
oidOy to whisper in one's ear. L. 61.
Oir, &-eer', to hea^^ Oiga / just listen 1 L.
OJal&l bhah-la\ inter., would to God I L.
»T.
Ojo, d'ho, a. m., eye. L. 29.
Oler, 04011^, to smell. L. 41.
Olfato, dU'/a/i'40y s. m., the aenee of emell.
L. 61.
Olla, OU'-ya^ s. f., earthen pot.— OlBa podri-
da, Spanish mixed dish of meats, vegeta-
bles, &c., cooked together. L. 62.
Olor, b-ldre\ s. m., odor, scent, smell. L. 63.
OUvar, d-n-var'. s. m., olive ground. L. 63.
Olvldar, OUvi-dar', to forget. L. 40.
Omnibus, bUM'-n^-boooe^ b. m., omnibus-.
L.51.
Once, dne'-thaiy num. a^., eleven.— Hacer
las OFUX, to lunch about noon. L. 14.
Opera, d'-pai-ra^ s. f., opera. L. 25.
Opmion, O'pli-nt-One'^ s. f., opinion. L. 43.
Oponer, i>-pd-nair\ to oppose. L. 51.
Optimo, opeiO-mOy a^j., best, extremely
good. L. 31.
Opuesto, ^wai88'40y adj., opposite, op-
posed, (meg. past, part or Oponeb.)
1.53.
Oraclon, d-rah'tkl-dne'y s. f, prayer, speech,
discourse. L. 45.
Orden, Ore'-dam, s. m. and f., order.— A la
6rden de V., at your service. L. 89.
Ordenar, Sre-dal-nar' ^ to order, to com-
mand. L. 51.
ista, &ngah-nee88'-ta, s. m., organist.
Oriente, iyr^-ain'-tai, east L. 61.
Oro, d'-rOy B. m., cold.— No es oro todo lo
Zue reluce, all is not gold that glitters.
.8. . ^
Os, dce^ pron., you (objective of verbs). L.
26.
Ostiojiy Dee- ii-dne\ a. m. (SccOstra.) L.63.
Ostra, Dce'-tra, s. f., oyster. L. 63.
Otoiio, d40ne'-yo, s. m., autumn, fall. L. 34.
Otro, S'-tro^ indef. pron., other, another.
L. 18.
Oveja, d-vcU' ha, s. f.. sheep. L. 65.
Ox ! dks. Inter, used to fnghten off fowls,
&c. L.46.
P.
Paca, pah'-ka. s. f., Fanny. L. 44.
Paciencla, pah-thi-ain'-thS-a, s. f., patience.
L. 68.
Paco, pah'-ko^ s. m.. (contraction of Fran-
cisco, Francis), Frank. L. 44.
Padecer, pcUt-dai-thair' , to Buffer pain. L.
47.
Padraatro, pah-drags' -trOy a. m., step-fother.
L. 49.
Padre, paA'-drcrf, s. m., fethcr.— i^w/rfnuea-
tro, the Lord's prayer. L. 6 and 45.
Pagar, pah-gar', to pay. L. 14.
Pa£;ar6, pah-qah-rai\ h. m., (comm.) prom-
issory note. L. 69.
Po^na, pah'-hl-na^ s. f., page (of a book,
&c.). L. 50.
Pais, pah-eess*, s. m., country.— iCn&n to
ticmpo hace qu6 est& V. en cste paUf
how long have you been in tills country f
L. 19.
Paiaano, pah-isah'-no, s. m., countryman
(one flrom the same country). L. 60.
PiOa* poA'-Ao, 8. f., Btnw. t. 63.
460
VOCABULABT.
PlUaro, pah'^ah-ro, b. m., bird. L. 48.
P^urraco, pah-har-rah'-ka, b. m., (aug. of
Pajabo), an ogiv, clumoy bird. L. 40.
Paiabra, paii-lcUv-bra^ 8. f., word, promiee.
—J\Uaorm mayorca, oli'cn«ive worda. L.
15 and U5.
Palaeio, pa/i-kth'-tfti-o^ a. m., palace. L.
Palaa^'aoa, pah4an-g<jji'-na^ a. f., washbowl.
L. 40.
Palo, ixih'-lo, a. m., stick of wood. L. 62.
Pan. ;x{/}, ». m.. bread, loaf. L. 7.
Pauaderia, pa/i-na/i-dai-ri'-a^ a. f., bakery.
L*. 11.
Panadero, pah-^iahrdai'-ro, a. m., baker.
L. n.
Pantalon, pan-iah-ldru\ a. m., pantaloons,
troattcFi}. L. 17.
Pano, iHin'-yo, s. in., cloth. L. 62.
Pailuelo, wn-yoo-ai'-lo^ s. m., Qpckct-hand-
kcrchicf. L. 5.
Papa. pah-na\ a. m., papa. L. 6.
Papei, paA-ixUl\ s. m., paper, part (in a
play).— Ilacer ;>«/>£/, to cut a fiu'urc. L. 4.
Paquito, pah-kl-to, h. ni., (contraction of
I-iiANcisco, FranciH), Franky. L. 44.
Par, /wr, a. m., pair, couple. L. 40.
Para, p(i/i'-ra, prep., for, to, in order to,
toward.— Tiene una carta jxtra V.. he lias
a letter for you.— Esta para partir, ho ia
about to ^ct ont. L. 19.
Parabi(m, pnh-rah-fH-ain', s. m.. conj^ratu-
lation, complimcut.— Dar cl parai/Un, to
con«;mtulatc. L. U2.
Pardt^uas, paJi-rali'-t/wass^ e. m., umbrella.
L. 50.
Parar, pah-rar', to stop, to end (In). L. 51.
Pank-ol, jxt/hrafi-.<<'U\ ». m., parasol. L. 50.
Pareccr, pah-rai-UuUr'^ to appear, to seem.
L. :».
Pared, jxih-raith\ s. f, wall. L. 60.
Paris, pah- reels', ^. m., Paris. L. 12.
Parquc, par'-kai, s. m., park. L. 17.
Parte, par'-tai, a. f., part.— Alpfuna park,
somewhere.— Ningruna parfe, nowhere.—
l)e ocho dias & e«ta parte, for the la-'t
claht days;— s. m., messa^^e, dispatch.
Information. L. 27.
Partlcipar, par-ti-iJil-par*^ to participate, to
partake. L. 67.
Pttrticipio, par-li-iM'-pi-O^ a. m., partici-
ple. L. 4a
Partlcula, par^'-kco-ta, s. f., particle. L.
50.
Particular, par-ti-koo-iar', a^J., particular,
private. It. 40.
Partida, par-fS'-da, s. f, departure. L. 42.
Partir, par-U(r\ to depart, to act out, to
divide, to split. L. 19.
Pirtitivo, par-iitl-vo, a^J- partitive. L.
63.
Paw^e, pah-sali'-hai, s. m., passage, ihrc.
L. 58 and 63.
Pa^^ar. jxih-mr\ to pass, to 50 {ttom place
to place). L. 10.
Pa*«cua, point' kwa, e. f . Easter. L. 69.
Paevante, pah sai-an'-tai, s. m., paP3cr by,
walker, promcnadcr. (Prcs. part, of Pa-
SEAB.) L. 38.
Paccar, txth-sai-ar^ to walk, to promenade.
L. »1.
Pasco, pa/i-sai'-o, a. m., walk, promenade.
L. 51.
I PasiTa, pdth'O'-va^ a. f. , the ptsaive Toice.
L. 50.
Pasivo, pah-ti'^vo, Bd^., passive. L. 63.
Paso, pa/i'-fOy 6. m., step, pacx;. L. 61.
I Patio, pah'-Ck-Oy a. m., yard, pit (in theatr^is).
; L. 40.
1 Patronimico, pah-ir^nl'-iM-ko^ adj., patro-
I nymic. L. 40.
Ptti, iMth, 8. t, peace. L. 4S.
Pecho, pai'-du>, s. m., breast.— A lo liccho
pechOy what is done cannot be helped. L.
65.
Pccbuga, pai<h(xf-gay a. f., breast of fowL
L. 58.
Podazo, jMi-c^oA'-^, e. m., piece, moTad,
bit. L.63.
Podir, pai-dur", to ask, to demand, to ask
for.— A pt^dir dc boca, aa well as could be
desired L. SO.
Pedro, pai'-drOy s. m., Peter. L. 19.
Pea;ar, pai-gar', to stick, to paste, to beat.
L.63.
Peinar, pai-i-nar', to comb. L. 46.
Peine, pai-^'-nai, s. m.. comb. L. 46.
Peli^px), pat'tt-grOy s. m., danger, peril. L.
61.
Pelo, pai'-hy s. m., hair.— A pdo^ to the
purpose. L. 33 and 41.
Pclota, jMU4d'-ta, a. f., baU (for playing).
L. 54.
Pena, pai'-na, s. f., pain, penalty.-^ dona
pt'nw<\ with much difficulty. L. 50.
Pcnsamlento, pain-sahini-inin'-to^ a. m.,
thoui^ht. L. 48.
Penaar, pa«A-^-ar', to think, to intend. L.
SI.
PcnOUimo, wU-nod'-tk-mOy a^)., penulti-
mate, last out one. L. 50.
Penasco, pain-yaeg'-kOy s. m., a large rock.
L. 56.
Pcor, pai-Or^y acy. and adv., worse. L. 90.
Pcpa, pai'-pa, s. f., (contraction of Fkast-
ciscA, Frances), Fanny. L. 44.
Pepe. (Sec Pepito.) L. 44.
Pepito, pai-pS'-lo, 8. m. (contzsction of
Jo8£, Joseph), Joe. L. 44.
Pcqueilo, pai-hain'-yOy a4J., amall, little,
young. L. 7.
Per, p(Ury Latin prep, need in Spanish as a
prefix only ; as, jjerturbar. L. 60.
Pcra. pai'-ra, s. f., pear. L. 59.
Pcral, pai-ral\ s. m., pear-tree. L. 60.
Perder, pair-dair'. to lose. L. 87.
Perdonar, patr-d^-nar*, to pardon. L. 27.
Pcrczoeo, pai-rai-tho'-io, acy., lazy, eloth-
Pcrfcccionar. pair-faik-tM-d-nar'y to per-
fect, to improve. L. 38.
Perfccto, palr-faik'-to, acy., perfect. L. 29.
Periila, pai-refr-uoy s. f., small pear.— Vc-
nir dc pcnllOy to suit exactly. L. 61.
Peri6dico, pai-r^-d'-dS-ko, s. m., newspaper.
L.a
Pcrmanccer, pair-ma7i-nai-(hair^ , to re-
main, to stop, to stay. L. 46.
Permanencia, pair-nuiJi-n<Un'-ihl-ay a. f.,
permanence, duration, stop. Ftay. L. 51.
Permitir, pair-mi-teer' , to permit, to allow.
L.44.
Pero, pai'-ro, conj., but. L. 3.
Perpendicular, pair^pain-dl-koo'lar^ y a^}..
perpendicular. L. 61. ^
Perro, palr^-rOy s. m., dog.^ L. 63.
VOCABUI^ABY,
461
Fenererancia, pair-sai-vai^ran'-t/a-a^ b. f,
pcreeTerance. L. 63.
PeraiBtir« pcUrseess-teer^ , to persist. L. 60.
Persona. jxiir-sO'-na, s. f., pcr»»on. L. 38.
Pcraonal, pair^a-nal\ a^)., personal. L.
Ga.
Pesa, pai'-M^ a. f., weight (for wcighin;;).
L. 55.
Pcsame, pai'-Mh-mai^ a. m., condoleoce.
Li. — .
Pcsar, pai'Sar'^ to weigh, to regret— No le
puia ue haber nocido, he has an czcclleDt
opinion of himself. L. 31.
Pcsar. 8. m., regret, grief, sorrow.— A pe^ar
dc, in apite of, notwithstanding. L. 31.
Pericado, iHiij^kah'-do^ s. m., llsh. L. 7.
Pcscar, ixUsS'kar'^ to fish. L. ({3.
Pesimo, pai'-i^-ino^ at^., worst, veiy bad.
L. 21.
Peso, /M<'-«), B. m., weight, heavineBB, dol-
lar. L. 14.
Pianista, pi-ah-Mess'-ia^ b. m., pianist. L.
15.
Piano, p^-ahf-no, b. m., piano. L. 16.
Picante, pS-kan'-tai, ai^j., piquant, high-
seasoned, pungent. L. 54.
Picar, pS-kat^y to prick, to bite, to pique.
L. 46.
Picarcsco, pl-keUi-raitt'-ko, ad^.^ roguish.
L. 49.
Picaro, pi'-kaJi-ro^ a^)., rogue, rascal,
scoundrel. L. 32.
Pico, p9''ko^ 8. m.j beak, bill.— Callarse cl
pico^ to hold one^s tongue. L. 61.
Pie, ja-<U\ s. m., foot.— A pit\ on foot.—
^accr do imtf, to bo bom to good luck.
L. 39.
Plema, jiB-air'-nay b. f, leg. L. 33.
Pleza, j^-cu'-tAa, b. f., piece. L. W.
Plnar, j)i-nar', s. m., pine-grove. L. 49.
Pino. p3'-/w, 8. m., pine. L. 40.
Pintar, peen-lar', to paint, to represent. L*.
54.
Pintor, peen-tdre\ 8. m,, painter. L. 31.
Pintura, pcen-ioo'-ra^ s. l, painting. L. 31.
Pipa, fiS'-pa, B. f., pipe. L. 42.
Pique, /)?-^a/, 8. m., pique, oflcncc.— Esta-
bia jMr/tie de perderse, he was on the brink
of ruin. L. 62.
PIropos (Declr), jiS-rd'-pOce, to say soft
things (to the lacllcs). L. 58.
Pisavcnlc j!??-A>a/i-ra«r'-d(rf, s. m., fop, cox-
comb. L. 50.
PisOjjyc'-.^o, B. m., iloor, aiory (of a house).
— Tercer piao, third floor. L. 53.
PIstola, pee^'(v'-la^ s. f., pistol. L. 44.
Pisioletazo, j)ee<is-l^-ku-tah'-t/iOy b. m., pis-
tol-shot. L. 44.
Placer, pla/i-t/iair'. to please. L. 31.
Placer, s. m., pleasure. L. 81.
Plata, piah'-fa, s. f., silver. L. 8.
Plato, j)la/L'-(o, s. m., plate, dlBh (of viands).
L. 57.
Plaza, plah'Vta, ». f, place, situation,
square, market-place.— /Yoza de toros.
Arena (for bull-lights). L. 17 and TA.
Plazo, plah'-UiOy s. m., term (of payment).
L. 63.
Plomo, pld'-mo, s. m., lead. L. 63.
Plunuu, ptoC-ma, s. f., pen, feather. L. 6.
Plural, ploo-rtU\ a^)., plural. L. 67.
PluBcnamperfecto, ptoooe-kwam-pair'/aik'-
to, s. m., plnperfect L. 48.
Pobrc, p5'-6fYil, a4J., poor, needy, wretched.
L. 13.
Pobreza, pd-brai'-tha, b. f., poverty. L. 59.
Poco, pd-ko, adv., litUe; pi., few.— /iw d
pooo, gently, sottly. L. 82.
Poco, 8. m., little. L. 6.
Poder, pd-(iair\ to be able.— No poder mas,
to be exhausted. L. 32.
Poder, s. m„ power, possession. L. 35.
Podrir, po-drter\ to rot. L. 41.
Poesia, pC-ai-ai'-a, s. f., poesy, poetry. L.
31.
PoetA, pli^'-ta, B. m., poet. L. 81.
Poetastro, pO-ai-tass'-irOy b. m., poetaster.
JL. 44.
Po6tlco, piHU'-a-kOy a4J., poetic, poetical.
ia. 35.
Poica, poie'-kCy s. f., polka. L. 23.
Polftica, j;5-ft'-/«-to, b. f., politics; polite-
ness. L. 52.
Politico, pdjl'-a-ko, a4|., political; polite.
L. 52.
Politico, 8. m., man of politics. L. 52.
Polio, jOW-yo. s. m., chicken. L. 5.
Polvo, poie'-ro, s. m., powder, dust. I^ 62.
P61vora, pole'-rd-ra^ s. f., gunpowder. 1^. 63.
Ponderar, pone-dai-rar', to exaggerate, to
cry up. L. 54.
Poncr, po-nair', to put, to place, to lay, to
set (as the sun).— /Iwi^tw, to oeconie, to
L^et.— Se puso Berio, he became serious.
Por, pdre^ prep., by, for, in behalf of, in fla-
vor of, about, through.— ftr las calles,
through the streets.— Ir j)or pan, to go
for bread.— 7l;r si acaso, in case, if by any
chance. L. 10.
Porcion, pdre-f/i9-Sne'y b. f., portion, part,
lot, number, quantity. L. 63.
Ponnenor, p6rK'mat-tibre\ b. m. (generally
used in the plural).- i\^i^<ore», details,
particulars. L. 60.
Porque, piire'-kaL, coqj., because. L. 18.
Porqu6, pore-ka£\ conj., whyy for what
reason f— s. m., reason wherefore. L. 18.
Portarse, p&re-tar^-eaiy to behave, to conduct
one's self. L. 65.
Portugal, pdre-too-g(U\ b. m., Portugal. L.
60.
Portugues, p0re-(oo-{;hai88*yB. m. and a^J., >
Portuguese (language), Portuguese (na-
tive of Portugal). L. 84.
Poseer, pd-fai-atr. to posseBs. L. 84.
Posesivo, p&-ifai-t>e''tOy adj., possessive. L.
63.
Posibic, p^sV-UaU a4)*) possible. L. 31.
Positivo. pO-tS-tl'-vOy adj., positive. L. 48.
Posponer, poce-])6Hatr' ^ to postpone, to
place after. L. 63.
Potencial, po-taln-Utl-al^ adj., potential.
L. 63.
Practita, prak'-fi-la, b. f., practice. L. 23.
Practicante, »rai[-^2-Aaa'-«ii, s. in., practi-
tioner. (Present part, of Pbacticab.)
L. 88.
Practicar, pmk-tikar', to practise. L. 23.
Prfictico, prak'tl-kOy adj., practical. L. 66.
Pre, praiy Latin prep. UBeu m bpanlsh as a
prefix only. L. 5().
Preceder, prai4h€U-(UUr*y to precede, to go
before. L. 63.
Precepto, prai4haip^4o^ 8. zn., precept L.
63.
462
VOCABULABY.
Preclo, prai'-tM-d, 8. m., price, prize. L. 60.
Preclso, prai'Ua'so, a4J., neceoaary, obllt;-
atory, prb*ci8e.— fis preciM qae la lean,
they ma!»t read it L. 68.
Preferir, pnU-fai-reer' ^ to prefer. L. 88.
TTe^n\A,prai-goon'-ta^ b. f., queetion. In-
quiry. L. 33.
Pro^uutar. prai-wfon-tar'j to ask qneetions.
to qntMtlon. L. *i.
Preliniiaar. prai-H-tni-nar*^ acy., prelimi-
nary. L. 61.
Prcmlar, prai-mi-ar', to reward. L. 68.
Premio, prai'-fni-O, ». m., premiam, reward,
prize. L. 39.
Prenda, prain'-da, b. f., pled<7e, jewel ; pi.,
endowmeutA, talcntH, partt». L. 41, 63.
Prcndcr, prain-dair'j to talvc, to talce ap, to
arrent. L. 39.
Prepoaicion, prai-pl^-fi'lM-dne'^ preposi-
tion. L. 43.
PrcHcncia, prai-Mln'-thha, s. f, pre»ence.—
Preiencij, de finlino, prescuce of mind.
L. 6-).
Prcaentar, prai-Min-iar'^ to present, to in-
troduce, to oTcr. L. 39.
Preaeate, prai-nain'tcU. ad)., present.— Te-
nor or-f^/x/^, to bear In mlna. L. 43.
Pre^l'teute, prai-d9-dain'-taL b. m., presi-
dent. L. 46.
Presidio, praisi'-di-O, b. m., state prison.
L. 59.
Pro^idir, prai-si-deer', to prc-^lde. L. 54.
Preso, prai''<io, Irrc?. past part, (of PjucN'
DRR), taken. L. 5'^
Preslar, prai*si'tar\ to lend. L. B9.
Pre-^to, prai^M'-to, ac^., qoiclc, ready,
prompt. L. 20.
Presto, adv., soon, qnlckly. L. 90.
Pretender, prai-tain-fJair\ to pretend, to
lay claim to. to claim, to Boliclt. L. 48.
Pretension, prai-t(Un-fi^-dne\ s. f., preten-
sion, claim, thin<? solicited, L. 57.
Pret^rito, prai-tai'-r^-to, a^j., preterit L.
63.
PreteBto, prai-taiat'-tOy b. m., pretext L.
53.
Prevenir, jirai-vai-neer'^ to prevent, to fore-
see, to warn, to prepare. L. 63.
Prever, prai-rair', to foresee. L. 89.
Primavera, pri-ma/irvai'-ra, b. f.. Spring.
Prlmero, pr^-maV-ro, a^J., flrst.— De bnenaa
kprimerait^ all at once, rashly.— adv., first,
rather, sooner. L. 16.
Primo, prV-mo, b. m., consln. L. 13.
Principal, preen-tM-pcU\ a4)., principal,
chief. L. 36.
Prlnclplantc, mw»-^A?-/)?-fln'-^al, s, m. and
ores. part, (of Pbincitiar), beginner. L.
Princlpiar, preen-ffif-p^-ar'^ to begin, to
commence. L. 23.
Principio, preen-t/i^'-pf-d, s. m^ bcrinnlnj?,
commencement, principle. L. r»3.
Prisa, pr9'-fta, s. r., haste, hurry.— Tener
prisa, to be In a hnrrv. L. 30.
Priaionero, pri-^-iS-nai'-ro, s. m., prisoner.
L.48.
Prisma, preess'-mn. s, m., prism. L. 54.
Probt^bie, prMah'-dlai^ a^}., probable. L.
29.
Prob.ar, pri>4far\ to try, to prove, to taste.
—El <dima de ebte pals le prueba bien, the
climate of thlB conntry agrees \f en with
him. L. 85.
Procesion,pn0-<Aai-£2-dfatf', s. f., procession.
L.46.
Procurar. prv-lcoo-fxtr' ^ to procure, to en-
deavor, to try. L. 51.
Pruduccion, prO-dook-Uti-dne', b. f., produc-
tion. L. 4U.
Produclr, prO-doo-ifteer'^ to produce. L. 40.
Proeza, prO-ai'-iAa, b. f., prowess. L. 51.
Profecia, prd-/al-itii'-a^ s. f., prophecy. L.
45.
Profesion, prd-/ai-»9'SAe*^ b. t, profeseian.
L. 38.
Profesor, prO-fai-Ore*^ s. m., professor. L.
Prohibir, pro^l-beer', to prohibit. L. 68.
Pr6Jimo, prO'-hl-mOy b. m., neighbor (fellow-
creature). L. 28.
Promcsa, jtrd-mai'-ga^ b. f., promise. L. 57.
Prometer, pr^-mai-tmr' ^ to promise. L. 25.
Pronombre, pro-rUhne'-braiy s. m., pronoun.
L.43.
Pronominal, pr&-nd-mi-ncU\ 4id1., pronomi-
nal. L. 61.
Prontitud, prone-a-iooth\ s. f., promptncBS,
promptitude, quickness. "L. 43.
Pronto, ;>r5n^-/o,adj., prompt, quick, mdy;
—adj., soon, promptly, qnickiy. L. 20.
Pronanciacion, pro-noon'thl-uh't/ti-ijne*^ s.
f., prononciation. L. 63.
Pronnnchir, prd-noon-tM-ar^ to pronounce,
li. 15.
Propiedad, pr^pf-ai-dath' ^ b. f., propriety,
property. L. 63.
Propio, prO'-pS-d, a^J., proper, own, self-
same, same. L. 49.
Proponer, prd-pf^-nair'^ to propose. L. 61.
Prosa, prd'sa, s. f, prose. L. 81.
Proporcionar, pr6-p6rt'thJt-d-nar'^ to pro-
portion, to procure, to offer. L. 48.
Protestante, prd-CaiM-ian'-tai, s. m., Prot-
estant. L. 49.
Protestantismo, pt^aiM^anrt^etf-fno^ 8.
m.. Protestantism. L. 49.
Provccho, prO-vai'-cho^ s. m., profit, benefit
L. 64.
Ppoveer, prO-vairair', to provide. L. 84.
Proverbio, pr&-vair-bl6-0y s. m., proverb.
L. 65.
Provlncla, pr^-tMfn'-^AS-a, 8. f., province.
Provisto, pri>-Tfes8'4o^ past part (of Pbo-
VBKR), provided. L. 62.
Prdximo, pr&kt'-^-Tno, adj., proximo, next,
nearest.— El sdbado pn»imo, next Sator-
dav. L. 83.
Pmdencia, proo-dain'-thi-a, s. f., prudence.
L. 34.
Pmdcnte, proo-dain'-tai, a43-i prudent L.
20.
Pmeba, proo-al'-ba, s. f., proof. L. 46.
Prn!?ia. proo'-<?-a, e. f , Prussia. L. 46.
Pnblicar, jx)0-f'f9'f:ar\ to publish. L. 4^.
Publico, poo'-NS-ko, s. m. and a^]., public.
L.51.
Pueblo, pwai'-blo, s. m., town, people. L. 60.
Puerta, ptrair'-(a, s. f., door. L. 27.
Paes, tncaiff^ coi^., then, therefore, inas-
mucn as, since, because :— inter., weU I —
Ptfsff, qu6 ? well, what of It?. L. 41.
Puesto qne, pwaifs'-to, adv., since, inas-
much as, supposing that L. 37.
VOCABULABY.
463
Pol^dA, pool-gah'-aa^ b. f.. inclL L. 63.
Pimtapii;, pooti^tCLfi-Di-ai^ a.m., kick. L. 60.
Pauta, poua'-ta^ point, stitch. L. 60.
PuntiUa, poonrUa'-ifa^ s. f., email point. —
De punUlku, on tiptoe. L. 44.
Panto, poon'-to^ a. m., point (of time or
Bpace), spot, place.— Al puntOy at once.
L. 51.
Pantnacion^DOon-too-oA-MS-^ntf^ s. f., punc-
tuation. L. 68.
Puntnal, poottrUxHil'y ad^., ponctnal, exact,
accurate. L. 63.
Pontoalidad, pam-UxHihrll-dath'y b. f.,
punctuality. L. 03.
Purista, poo-reess'-iGy b. m., purist. L. 86.
Qqc, kai, rel. pron., ttiat, which, who.—
i(hie bneno ! now t^ood \—/QuS desgracia !
what a miefortune I— Que vcnga, let him
come.— 4/ ^u^ ec dice de bueno ? wtiat la
the good news?— Tarde que temprano,
eooner or later. L. 3, 16, 17.
Qucbrar, kairbrar'y to break, to smash. L.
Qucdar, kai-dar'y to stay, to stop, to re-
main, to become.— £1 campo quedo por
loa Americanos, the Americans were vic-
torious. L. 88.
Qnojarse, kai-har'saiy to mooa, to com-
plain. L. 48.
Onemar, kai-^mar'y to bam. L. 82.
Quorer, kairralr'y to wish, to desire, to will,
to lore, to like, to be willing. L. 13.
Querido, kai-rf-do, a^J., dear. (Past part.
ofQuEREB.) L. 1.3.
Qneso, kai'-80y s. m., cheese. L. 7.
Quicn, Ja-ain\ rel. pron., who, whom. L.
17.
Qnlcnquiera, ki-ain-ke-ai'-ray indcf. pron.,
whosoever. L. 60.
Qnieto, kit-ai'-tOy a4J., quiet, still, at rest
L. 63.
Qnijada, kS-kah'-da, s. f, jaw. L. 60.
Quince, ke(:n''thai;.iinm. acU., flfteen. L. 14.
Qninlcntos, khnS-ain'-tdeey acU., five hon-
dred. L. 14.
Qainto, keen'-tCy ord. a4). and s. m., fifth.
L.50.
Qui tar, ki-tar\ to remove, to take away,
off, out ; to prevent. L. 63.
Qnitasol, ki-tah-ff^le', s. m., parasol. L. 60.
Qoiza, quizas, kH-tfiah'y -thasd'y adv., per-
haps. L. 84.
Radical, rah-de-kal'y acU-, radical. L. 63.
Rafz, rah-eeth'y s. f., root. L. 63.
Kama, niA'-ma, s. f., branch (of trees, fiimi-
lies, &c.) L. 61.
Ramillete, rah-nud-pcU'-taiy s. m., bonqact.
L. 27.
Ramo, rah'-mOy s. m., brancli, department
L. 66.
Rana, rah'-na^ b. f., tros.—'So ser ranOy to
be wide awake, expert. L. 66.
Bapaza, rahrpah'-thOy s. f, little j^rl.— iMl-
ren la rapazuda ! the little vixen ! L. 61.
Raro, Toh'-roy adj., rare, odd, cnrioos,
scarce. L. 63.
Rasj^ar, ras9-gar*y t6 tear, to scratch. L. 64.
Raago, TWtif-gOy s. m., trait, 8a*oke, In-
stance. L. 63.
Bato, rah'-tOy s. m., while, moment— A ra-
toSy from time to time. L. 44.
Raton, rah'Uyne'y s. m., mouse. L. 63.
Raya, ra/i'-yay s. f., etroke, dash.— U'ener &
rayOy to keep within bounds. L. 04.
Bayo, rah'-yOy s. m., ray, thunderbolt.—
l!k±ar raij09 y centellas, to foam with
ra^e. L. 62 and 63.
Razon, ra/i-tMne'y s. f., reason, right.—
Tener razoriy to be right. L. 25.
Bazonar, rah-tJU^nar'y to reason. L. 63.
Re, raiy always nsed as a pretlz. L. 50.
Real, rai-al'y a«U., real, royal ;— s. m., real
(Spanish coin). L. 47 and 48.
ReaUdod, riU-ah-U'dath'y s. f., reality. L.
48.
Rebajar, raUbah-har' y to reduce, to abate,
to lower (prices, Ac.). L. 64.
Rcbanada, rai-bah-nah'-day s. f., slice (of
bread, &c.). L. 63.
Rebanar, roi-bah-nar^y to slice. L. 61.
Rebafio, rai-ban'-yOy s. m., flock of sheep.
L.40.
Recado, r<d-kah'-dOy s. m., message, errand.
L.63.
Rcccpcion, rai-UuUp-thl-bne' y b. f., recep-
tion. L.M.
Recibimlcnto, rat-tia-fi^-^nM-ain'-tOy s. m.,
act of receiving, reception. L. 65.
Recibir, rai-thl-Uer'y to receive^ L. 8.
Recibo, rcU-tM'-bo, s. m., receipt. L. 68.
Reciproco, roi-lKt-prb-kOy a^)., reciprocal.
L. 6:3.
Recltar, rai-thl-iaT' . to recite. L. 61
Recomendaclon, rai-kdtnain-dah-i/ii'dne'y
s. f., recommendation. L. 60.
Recomendar, rat-kO-mainrdar'y to recom-
mend. L. &4.
Reconocer, rai-kd-nO-fhair'y to recognize,
to acknowledge. L. 89.
Recordnr, rai-kHrt-dar' y to remember, to
remind. L. 2&.
Recto, raik'-f4>, adj., right.— En fingalos
rttrfoff, at rltrht angles. X. 65.
Rector, raik^tbre'y s. m., rector, director.
L.63.
Recnrrlr, rai-knor^rter' y to recur, to have re-
course. L. 60.
Recnrso, rai-koor'sOy s. m., recourse, re-
source. L. 40.
Reduclr, rai-dno-theer\ to rednce. L. 5i.
Refcrir, rai-fai-refer't to refer, to relate. L.
64.
Reflcxivo, rai-Jl(Uk-€i'-V0y acy., reflective.
L.63.
Reflexionar, rai-JUUk-il-b-nar* y to reflect.
L.48.
Rcfbnna, rai-f^r^-may s. f., reform, refor-
mation. L. 63.
Reformar, rat-Jdre-mar' , to reform, to form
anew, to diochai^ (fhsm an employment
or office). L. 48.
Refhm, rai'Jran'y s. m., refrain, proverb.
L. 63 and 65.
Regalar, rai-goA-lar'y to regale, to present
with, to make a present of. L. 63.
lo, nO-gah'-lOy s. m., gift, present. L.
.._„ , rcU'-hhrnain^ s. m., regimen, gov-
ernment, object (of verbs). L. 67.
404
VOCABULARY.
Begrimiento, rai'hhnO-ain'-to^ b. m., rcg!-
meQt. L. 19.
Rcglr, ral-/ttrtr\ to govern. L. 67.
Kt^la, raiff'-(a, e. f., role, ruler. L. 63.
Kc^mlar, rai-'jvo4ar^y aty., re<^alar, tolera-
ble, modcruio, ordinary ; — adv., tolerably,
middlin;; ;— v., to rei,nilate. L. 27, 67, ana
04.
Regularidad, rai-goo-lah'r%-<IcUh\ 8. f., regu-
lunty. L. 55.
Re;^ulari2ar, rai-goo-lah^^4har' ^ to regu-
lutc. L.48.
ReUut«r, nU-oo-^ar'. to refhse. L. 61.
Keina, rtti-i -nu^ h. f., queen. L. 63.
Keinaiile, rai-i-nan'-tai^ pres. part., reign-
in-. L. ;w. *^ F« . b
Reiiiar, nii-inar'^ to reign. L. 15.
Ktino, rai-i'-nu^ ». m., kingdom. L. 45.
Reir, raittn^' to lau-'h. L. 41.
Kclucion, rai4ah-th€-oi*e\ 8. f., relation, ac-
count, recital. L. 43.
Rclumpapro, rai-lam' -pah-go. b. m., flash of
ll'^itniii;;. L. 63.
Rolaiapoi^ucar, rai-Utm-pah-gai-ar'^ to
li^'hten, L, 30.
RHutar, rui-lnh-tnr'. to relate. L. 46.
!{• ii„non, rai-le-hi-One\ 8. f., religion. L.
Relii,'ioflo, rai-U-hl-O'-fO^ a4J., religious. L.
TivXo), r(U-fo\ B. m., watch, clock. L. 28.
Iiol()j(*ro, rai-lihhai'-ro^ b. m., watchmaker.
L. m.
Reluclr, rai-loo-tfiirr'. to Fparklc, to glitter.
—No «» oro todo lo tiuc /%/{<£«, alTie not
ffold that erlittore. L 65.
Rcinedlar, rai-mal-ff?-ar', to remedy. L. 64.
Rwnedio, rai-tnai'-iJi-o, 8. m., remedy. L.
53.
Remendar, rai-mainrdar*^ to repair, to
mend. L. 64.
Reranncrar, rai-moo-nai-rar' ^ to remuner-
ate. L. 52.
Rendir. rain-divr', to render, to aubdue.—
Jftrulirifp, to surrender. L. 89.
Reflir, rain-yet r\ to quarrel, to dispute, to
Hcold. L. 89.
Rco, rai'-o, o. m., culprit, ofltender. L. 68.
Repartir, rai-]>ar-tfer\ to divide. L. 58.
Repa«ar, rai-ixih-mr'^ to repass, to reex-
amine, to irlance over again. L. 64.
Repaso, rai-pah'-m^ s. m., revision, act of
LToinir over anew. L. 61.
Rcpente, ral-iyun'-fai.—lie repenU^ endden-
ly, on a sudden. L. 54.
Repclicion, rai-pai-Ct-thl-dne'. s. f., repeti-
tion. L. 63.
Rtpotir. rai-pai-t<^, to repeat. L. 39.
Repo?ar, ral-p0-8ar\ to repose, to rest. L.
Vi).
RipoBo, rai-pO'-to^ 8. m., repose, rest. L.
Ro])rcnder. rai-prain-dair'^ to reprehend, !
n>primand. L. 42. !
Ri^prcsentar, rai-;rrai-min-far\ to repre-
sent, t4) make appear ; to perform (a part), '
to enact. L. 64.
Rcprobar, rai-iiri^^xur', to reprove, to up-
braid. L. 60.
Rcpfiblica, rai-poo'-Ui-ka, s. f., republic.
Reputacion, rai'P0O'tah4M-9n«fn B' t, repu-
tation. L. ^
Resarcir, rai-sar-theer', to indemnify, to
compensate, to make up fo[. L. 69.
Reseutin»e, rai-min-teer'-gal, to feel tJhe
efl'ectH (of), to resent. L. 50.
Reafriado, raing-frt-aJt'-do^ b. m., cold (dis-
eanc cau&ed by cold). L. 63.
Re:«rriarHe, rai^-fri-ar' 'foi^ to catch cold-
L. 6>i.
Ret^idente, rai-f?-fiain'-fai^ Bidj. and part
£art. (Of RssiDiB), rceideut, reeidin^.
I. 88.
Residir, rai-a-de/r' . to res^ide. L. 9.
Rcjiislir. rai-see^fi-ffer', to resibt. L. 51.
Resolucion, rai-6o-loo-f/ie-(/M\ b. f., reMln-
tion. L. 63.
Resolver, rai-edU-tair'^ to solve, to reaolve.
L.64.
Reapecta, raigg-pcdkf-ta.—^Si lo que regpceta,
with rcppoct to. L. 51.
Re«pctablc, raiM-pai-tah'-llai, a^., re-
spectable. L. 39.
Rcppetar. raite-pai-tar'. to respect, L. 38.
Reupcto, raihb-pai'-to^ s. m., respect, regard.
L. 66.
Reppondcr. rai»^-pl>ne-daif^^ to respond, to
answer. L. 33.
Reppondon, raifs-rfine-dGM\ adj., aliiaja
ready to reply. L. 38.
Rei*puei*ta, raiM-puaititt'-tay a. f., response,
reply, answer. L. 30.
Restaute, txii-f-tan'-tai, s. m., and pros.
part, (of RssTAB), remainder, reat ; re-
maining. L. 46.
Resnltar, rai-mtd-tar' ^ to result, to turn out,
to occur. L. 43.
Retirar, rai-fi-rar\ to retire, to withdraw,
to retreat. L. 63.
Rctrato, rai-trah'-to^ b. m., portrait, liko-
ncB.**. L. 17.
Reumatinno, rai-4X>-maK-U£u'-mOy a. m.,
rheumatism. L. 63.
Reunir, rni-oo^ne^y to reunite, to aBsem-
ble. L. 62.
Rcv^s, rai-niiMi', b. m., back part, wrong
side.— Al nrig, on the contrary; upside
down. L. 63.
RevoltoBO, rai-vOle-tO'-fOy a4J., turbulent,
rebellious. L. 44.
Rcy, rai'-i, s. m.. king. L. 16.
Royezuclo, rai-yai-thirai'-io^ b. m. (dim. of
Rey), pett V king. L. 44.
Ricacho. rTkah'-cho, a4j., veiy rich. L. 49.
Rico, rr-ko, a^J.. rich. L. la
Ridicules, ri-di-hoo-laith\ s. £, ridicule.
L. 45.
Ridiculizar, r^d^-hoo-l^thar*^ to ridicule.
L.48.
Ridiculo, r9-*W h)0-lo, adj. and 8. m.. ridicn-
loup, reticule («ort of lady's basket). L. 5.
Rigodon, t^-g^ddfte\ b. m., rigadoon. coun-
try dance. L. 28.
Rincon, reen-kone', §. m., comer. L. 61.
Rio, rg'-<>, p. m.. river. L. 40.
Riqncza, r9-kai'-(/ta, s. f., riches. L. 48.
Rii«a. r?'-,<fl, s. f.. ]au;;h. laughter. L. 48.
Rivalixar. r^-rah-t^iar' ^ to rival, to Tie
with. L. 51.
Rohar, rf^mr'^ to rob, to steal. L. 44.
Rodar, rd-dar*, to roll. L. 54.
Rodear, r&-dai-ar', to surround, togorouBd,
to revolve. L. 64.
Rodeado, rd-dai-ah'-do^ adj. and past part
(ofRoDEAB), Burrounded. L. 68.
VOCABULABT.
465
Kodilla, rd-ded'-yoy b. f., knee— De rodillag,
on one's knees. L. BU.
Rodriguez, rO-<irl-gaith\ s. m., Rodriguez.
RoL^r/rS-fl'ar'. to pray, to beg of. L. 86.
Rofo, rd'ho, adj., red. L. 54.
Romano, id-mah'-M, ac^J., Roman. L. 54,
Romper, rOme-jxiir', to break, to tear.-
Hamper el sUenclo, to break the aileuce.
Ropa?r5'-;w, b. f, clothes, wearing appareL
Rosa, r^'-wr, s. f, roec. L.68. ^^^^^^^.
Roto, rd'-to, irr. past part, (of Bompbb),
broken. L. 52.
Rubio, roo'-i>S-0, tid}., feir (of the complex-
ion), ruddy. L. 6.3.
Rnldo, roo-i'-do, s. m., noise. L. 46.
Rum. roo-een\ adj., mean, churlish. L. 63.
Ruindad, roo-een-dalh\ s. f., meanness,
churlishness. L. 48.
Ruiseflor, roo^'Saln-ydref ^ b. m., nightin-
gale. L. 6:i.
Rumor, roo-ml^y s. m., rumor. L. 54.
Rutina, nxHl'-na^ s. t, routine. L. 68.
Sabado, mh'-bah-do, s. m., Saturday. L. 9.
Saber, sah-bair\ to know, to have knowl-
edge of, to hear from ; to savor, to taste :
— s. m., learning, knowledge. L. 42 and
21.
Sabio, sah'-U-o^ a^j., wise, sage, learned.
L. 21.
Sabor, sah-bSre\ %. m., savor, taste.— A su
sabor, at liia pteaeure, ta.ste. L. 62 and 66.
Sacacorchos, sah-kaJi-kdre'-chOce^ s. m.,
corkscrew. L. 64.
Sacamnela?, sah-kah-mwai'-lass^ a. m.,
tooth-dmwer, dentist. L. 50.
Sacar, mh-kar', to take or draw out, to pull
out. L. 5Uand66.
Saco, fo/i'-ko, a. m., sack, bag. L. 61.
Sacudir, sali'koo-deer\ to shake off, to shake.
L. 54.
Sal, 8. f., salt, wit. L. 5.5.
Saldo, gal' -do, s. m., balance (of accounts,
Ac). L.64.
Salida, sa/i-lS'-da^ s. f., going out, departure,
start. L. O:^.
Sal Ion te, sah-t^-ain'-tcdy adj. and pres. part,
(of Salik). projecting, salient. L. 88.
Salir, 8ah-lfer\ to ffo or come out, to set
out, to leave, to start, to go out, to end or
finish, to rise (said of the sun, &c.) : to
turn out, to turn up.— .S'o//^ a su padre,
he resembled his ihther. L. 20.
Salon, 8ah4dne', s. m., saloon, large hall. L.
Sal tar, sal-tar', to jump, to leap, to bound,
to spring. L. 58.
Balto. ml'-to, s. m., leap, Jump, bound,
spring. L. 59.
Salud, sah-looth' s. f.. hcalth.^A }Afiafvd de
la»^ sefloraa, to the good healtli of the
ladies. L. 25.
Salndar, sah-loo-dar^, to salute. L. 64.
Sanchez, mn'-chaiih^ s. m„ Spanish family
name, signifying son of Sancfio. L. 49.
Ban.gre, mn'-grai, s. f., blood. L. 64.
Santificar, tan-O-fhkar'^ to sanctify. L. 45.
20*
Santo, san'-io, adj., holy, eaUntlj.—Sanio j
bueno, well and good. L. W.
Sastre, Mue'-trai, s. m., Uilor. L. 11.
Sastreria, 6ass-lTai-i^''ay s. f., tailor s shop.
Satirico, sah-tl'-ri-ko, adj., satirical. L. 35.
batiblacer, mJi-te(Hs«-ja/i-l/itur\ to satisfy.
L. 42.
Satrefecho, saJirkess-fai'-cliO^ adJ. and past
part, (of tiATisFAC£B;, satisued. L. 44
and 62. _^ , .
Sayo, sa/i'-yo^ b. m., sort of loose coat or
jacket. L. ti6. , «^
Sozonar, sah-tAo-nar^y to season. L. 62.
Se mL pers. pron. (instead of Le, les, to
him to her, to them). L. 26.— Fron. (used
to form the passive voice). L. ifcJ.— Ke-
flecttve pron. L. 3a.-Impers. pron., we,
they people, Ac.-** dice, Uiey say.-nCs*
cree it !» believed. L. 86.
Se prep., used as a prelix in composition.
L. 50. '
Secrcto, aai-krai'-to, b. m., secret, secrecy.
Scd', gaith, s. f., thirBt- Tencr ted, to be
thirsty. L. 25.
Seda, sai'-da, s. f., silk. L. 5.
Scguir, sai-gheer'y to follow; to continue.
£.89.
Segun, sai-fioon\ prep., accordlntr to.— 5fe-
gun y como, just as. L. 40 and 66.
Segundo, sal-goon' -do, ord. adj. and b. m.,
second. L. 15 and S3.
Se^ro, gairgoo'^rOs adl, sure, eecnre. L. 4-3.
Sejs, mi'<e9s, nnm. adj., six. L. 14.
8clscientoj», sair^.^.th^-ain' -Idee, num. adj.,
six hundred. L. 14.
Scmana, sai-maJt'-vn, s. f , week. L. 8.
bemblante, mlm-fjlan'-tai, s. m,. cotmte-
nance, fiice, aspect, appearance, look. L.
Sentar, nain-i^xr', to set down, to enter (in
a book) ; to fit, to bcrome. L. JM.
Sentencia, win-tain'-t/ti-a, s. f., sentence,
phrase. L. 4.3.
Sentldo, min-(?''do, s. m.. sonse/ L. 65.
Sentir, sain-teer'y to feel: to be sorry for.
L. 38.
Seflor. min-i/dre', e. m., lord, sir, Mr.—
Muy senor niio, my dear fir. L. 1.
Scflora, eain-yd'-ra, s. f, ladv, madam, Mrs.
L.2.
Scflorita, sain-yd-rl'-ta, s. f., young lady,
miss. L. 2. .
Scfiorito, fairhv9-ri''fo, s. m., young gentle-
man, sir (used generally by ser\ants),
Mr. L.2.
S^ptimo, sa^-a-mOy ord. ac^., seventh. L.
Ser, «?/r, to be, to exist. (Not to be con-
founded with EsTAB, which see.) L. 11
and 22.
Ser, 8. m., boine, existence. L. 54.
Ser\'idor. Mfr-rhd&re' , s. m., servant.- &7^
ridor de V.. your servant, L. R9.
Scr^ir, mir-'veer' , to serve, to oblige, to do
a service —iSiTfir^?, to be irood enough,
kind cnoasrh. to plcw*e.— .S'frrrr^^ V. to-
mar asicnto, please to take a scat.— -Ser-
nVw de, to use. L. 89.
Seacnta, mi-min'-ta, num. adj.. sixty. L. 14.
Setenta, 9ai4ain'4a, num. a^)., seventy.
L. 14.
466
VOCABULA&Y.
Setedentot, taHai^M'ain'-idoe, nun. a^.,
seven houdred. L. 14.
Betiembre, eat-U-ai/n'-inxU, s. m., Septem-
ber. U%L
Bezo, saiJt'SO, 0. m., sex.— £1 bello Max), the
iair Bcz. L. u6.
Sexto, naikt'-to^ ord. a4)* >Q<1 ■• m., sixth.
Li. iu.
&i, Mc, adr., yes. L. 1.
bi, iuuet*. proa., selL one's self.— HabI6
para At, hu spoke to liluittelf. L. SHi.
SL coi\)., U'; but.— <£iU no viene, hombre,
bat he is not couiln^, my dear lellow. L.
Siempre, ii-aim'-prai^ adv., always.— Per
munpre Jamas, lor ever and ever. L. "£».
Siesu, ifi'aii(if''ta, s. t, sicaia, afternoon
nap. L. Gii.
Siete, t^-ai'-tai, num. acU., seven. L. 14.
Biglo, f^-lOy B. m., century. L. &8.
biguillcado, neegr-n*^ l-kah'-ilOy s. m., signi-
licalloa, meauing. L. 49.
Si'^uilicar, Htg-ttl-j l-kar\ to signify. L. 64.
Slluba, tV-laJk-ha, u. f., syllable. L. 63.
Bilcucto, gi4ain'-t/ti-d, s. m., silence. L. 63.
Bilencioso, «e'/ain^<2-d'-«o, at^., silent. L.
64.
Silla. jvy/'-i/fl, s. f, chair. L. 14.
Blmpatizar, futm-pa/i-U-tAar'^ to sympa-.
tliizc. L.61.
Simple, fe^m'-pfai, a^., simple, single;
simple, silly. L. 43.
Sin, fififn. prep., without.— *?/n embanjo,
notwithstanding, however.— .SSfn qa6 ni
para qu6, without any cause or reason.
L. 19.
Finccridad. feen-thai-f^-dath' , s. f., sinccri-
tv. L.46. , _
Pincero. nfen-ihai'-ro, a^).. Biocoro. L. 40.
SlnirnlBT. p^^-rfoo4ar' , adj., sin^nilaT'- L- R'-
Sino. *«'.no, con)., but; if not.— No es 61,
rfwo sn hormano. It Is not he, but his
brother. L. «.
SinAnlmo, a-nH'-n^-mo^ s. m., synonyme.
L. m. ,
SInrazon, 9mi rah-ih^ne' ^ s. f., wrong, In-
Instice. L. 50. ^ , ,
Sloulcra, fT-kl-id'-ra, conj., even, at least.
L. 'iO.
Sitio. /??'-/!-«, s. m., place, position, siege.
L. R«.
Sitnndo, Atoo-ah'-do, past part, of Situab.
Pit'inr, f9-(o(Hir', to sltnate. L. 64.
Bo. jc»5. prep., under.— 5b prelcsto de, under
pretext of. L. 41. . , .
Sohrar, sThbrar^ to be over and above, to
have more of any thing than one needs.
I. 64.
Sobre, gd'-hrai, prep., upon, above, over,
nhout.— Vino w)*rc las ocho, he came
Pbont elsht o'clock. L. 41.
Sohrecprrito, 90-fnv*'af^-Jrr?'-to, s. m., sn-
per>crlptlon. addrepf* (of a letter). L. 56.
Bohrlna, ^fi-f>r7'-na. s. f., niece. L. 65.
PobriPo, fiThbr'-'-nn, p. m., nephew. L. m 1
Soclaligmo, fid-tM-ah-leess' -mo, s.m., social- 1
ipm. L. KO. - . . ^ '
Socledad, f^th^-ai-dafh\ s. f, society, firm,
partnerphip (commercial). L. 82.
Socio, 9b''thho, 8. m., partner, companion.
L. 02.
Bofi, «9/a', e. m., BOlH. L.84.
, Sol, aOfe, 8. m., 8un. L. 46i.
! i^olas (A), tO'-ioM, aU alone. L. 64.
1 boldado, gdle-dah-do, s. m., soldier. L. 52.
Boledad, sd4ai-iiath\ s. t, solitude, loneH-
I ness. L.. 63.
Solemne, 904ahn''naU a4J., solemn; thor-
I oujjh, downright. L. til.
• Boler, ifO-lair'^ to be accustomed to, to be
I wouL L. 41.
Soliciiar, «W5-^««-tor', to solicit. L,47.
boUioquio, iM9-iO 'Jtc-Oy s. m., so&loqoy.
L. 6u.
Solo, ifo'4o^ a4J., alone ;— adv., only. L. '25.
Boltar, sdle-tar', to untie, to loose, to libci^
ate, to let go, to let free. L. ^L
Boltero, a(e4(U'-ro^ s. m., bachelor, on-
married man. L. 51.
Bombra, si^fie'-tffu, b. f., shade, shadow.
L.5d.
Sombrero, «9me^rai'-ro, s. m., hat. L. 10.
Son, A>>i(„ii. m., sound.— bin ton y siu am,
without rhyme or reason. L. 47.
Sonar, sO-nar\ to sound. L. 45.
Bouido, s6-ni'ilo, s. m., sound. L. 47.
Sonreirse, a&ne-rai-ncT'-dai^ to smile. L. 64.
Bonrisa, ^ne-ri'-sa, s. f., smile. L. 54.
Bonrojar, sOne-rO'har', to make one blnah.
L. 64.
Sofiar, fdne-yar'. to dream. L. 85.
Sopa. «0'-jMr, s. r, soup. L. 44.
Sopeton, si^nai'tdn€'.—De fopeton, unex-
pectedly. L. 44.
Soplar, sd^pUir*^ to blow* to prompt L, M.
Sordo, tGre'-do, a<y., deaf. L. 04.
Sorprcnder, aOre-prainrdair', to snrprlae.
• L.42.
Sorprepa, f!hr-prai'-M, s. f, surprise. L. 51.
Sospechar, foof-pai-char*, to suspect. L. 60.
8n. fioo, poss. ad^M his, her. its, their. L. 5.
Sub, /KXih, Latin prep, used in Spanish as
a prefix only. L. 50.
Bublda, €00-ta'-da, s. f., rising, rise: ascent.
L.68.
Sublr, itco^bcfr'^ to co or come up, to ascend,
to mount, to rii>e. L. 60.
Subjnntivo, fwMioon-W'VO^ a^J., subjnnc-
tive. L. 43. » -w ^
Snceder</w)-tta/-rfffi>'. to happen, to take
place, to succeed (come after). L. 45.
Sucesivo, 9c>0'1hai'6i''V0.—'EM. lo eucesivo, in
ftiture. L. !K.
Sucio, foo'-m-d, adj., dirty. L. 64.
Sud, «»d, s. m., sonth. L. 26.
Sncgra, twai'-gra^ s. f., mother-in-law. L.
63.
Sne^ro, gwai'-grOy s. m., &ther-ln-law. L.
63.
Snela, inpai'4a^ 8. f., Bole. L. 61.
Snelo, swcU'40y s. m., ground, floor, soil.
L. 54.
Suelto, stcaU'-tOy a^. and past part, (of
SoLTAR), loose, free.— A riendia wudta^
with loose rein. L. 04.
Snefio. nratn'-yo, s. m., sleep, dream.— To-
ner fntefio^ to be sleepy. L. 95.
Suerte, tncatr'-tai, s. r,*lnck, chsnce, sort
Eehar mertef, to ca«t lots. L. 58.
Snficiente, soo-fl-Ua-ain'-tai^ a^., sufficient.
L. 49.
SufHr, MfO'freer'^ to suffer, to bear with, to
undergo. L. 64.
Sngcto, Boo-hai'-to^ s. m.. tndivldnal, per*
eon; topic, matter, Bubject It. 87.
VOCABULABT.
467
SuJeto, too-hai'-io, aOJ. and past part, (of
bujETAB), snbject; sabjticted, tied, fast-
ened. L.66. ™_ ,
Snma^ 400' -ma^ 0. m., Bam. — ^En suma^ in
short. L. 68 and 64.
Superior, «oo-iw«-re-^re', a4j., Buperior, L.
Superlatlvo, »oo-p(Ur4ah'1!if^co^ acy., super-
lative. L.50.
Supersticioso, sot^pairss-d-tJa-^-so^ adj., bu-
penttitioiis. L. 46.
Suplicar, MO-pH-kar'^ to supplicate, to beg,
to crave, L. 64.
Sapouer, tfOO-pO-iutir'^ to suppose. L. 64.
Supremo, soo-prai'-ftw^ adj., siyireme, high-
est, most excellent. L. s!l.
Supuesto. $oo-pwai8^'to^ past part of Supo-
NKB.— ror supuesto^ of coarse. L. &1.
Sur. (SeoSuJU.) L.66.
Sua ! sooce^ inter., holla ! L. 46.
Susplrar, sooce-pi-rar' . to sigh. L. 64.
Sasumcia, sooct-tan'4M^ s. f., substance.
L. 68.
SustantiTO, MOce-ton-^'-ro, b. m. and adj.,
substantiye. L. 64.
Sustcntar, eooce-tainrtar', to sustain. L. 65.
SutiL, soo4ed\ ac^., subtle, thin, slender.
L.61.
Sutileza, fOO-a-Ua'-iha, s. f., BubUety, cun-
ning, thinness, sIcndeinesB. L. 68.
Suyo, wW-yo, his, hers, its, theirs, one's.
T.
Tabaco, tahrbah'-kOy s. m., tobacco, cigar.
L 42
TableK). tah-blai'-ro, b. m., a smooOi board.
—TabUro de ajcdrea, chess-board. L. 51.
Tacto, takf-U)^ s. m., the sense of touch.
Tali adj., such, so.— TW cual, middling, so
BO.— To/ vez, perhaps. L. 88. ......^
Talcnto, tah-kOn'-to, s. m., talent, abintleB.-
Tamblen, tam-hi-ain'. couj. and adv., also,
as well, morever. L. 29.
Tampoco, tam;pS''ko, adv., neither, not
eitner nor. T*, 29.
Tan, adv., so, so much, a«, afl much. L. SO.
Tanto, ian'-to, adj., so, in such a manner.—
Tanto mejor, so much the better.— For 10
tonto, therefore. L. 20. ^ ^
Tapar, tah-par', to cover up, to stop up
(with a cover). L. 65. .^, _
Tapete, tah-pai'4ai, s. m., table-cover. L.
Tardar, tar-dar', to delay, to put off. L. ao.
T^rde, taf-doL, s. f , afternoon ;— adv., late.
—Algo terA?, rather late. L. 20.
Tarea, tah'-nd^, s. f., task. L. 68.
TarJetA, tor-Aoi'-te, b. t, card, visitmg card.
Tnte ! 'iah'4ai, inter., easy 1 toke care ! L.
43. ♦ , ^^
Taza. iah'4ha^ b, f, cup. L. 66.
T^, tai, 8. m., tea. L. 86.
Te, pron., thee, to thee. L. 28.
Teatro, fai-ah'-tro, s. m., theatre. L. 17..
Tcja, tai'-ha, b. f, tile.— Do (^<u abijo, hu-
manly speakinsr. L. 61.
Telegrftflco, tairUO-groA'ifl-lto, a4J-i tele-
graph, li. 66.
Tel^grafo, iairiat'-grahifOy s. m., telegraph.
L.46.
Tema, tai'-mOy b. m., theme, exercise;—
s. f , dispute, contention. L. 57.
Temer, tai-mair', to fear. L. 28.
Temerario, tai-mai-ra/i'-H'O^ adj., rash, in-
conbidcrate. L. 64.
Temor, tai-mdref .-For ttmor dc, for fear of.
Tcmprano, taimrprah'-no^ adv., early, soon.
L. 20.
Tenacidad, tairnah-thi^ath*, s. f., tenacity.
L. 66.
Tenedor, tai-nai'ddfe', s. m., fork. L. 66.
Tencr, tai-nair^^ to have, to hold : to be, to
take (p\acc).—Tener hambrc, frio, sed, to
be hungry, cold, ihinty. —Tener lugar, to
take ylace.—Jener que hacer, to have
Bomethlng to do.— To (engo para mf, it is
my opinion.— 7(en{70 V. la bondad dc de-
cirme, be good enough to tell me. L. 10.
TenUcion, Fo»n-te/t/A«-^«^, ». m., tempta-
tion. L.61. , _
Tefiir, iain-yeer*, to dye. L. 89. ^
Teoria, to-^;y-«, B. f., theory. L. 2a
Tercero, iatr-thai'-ro^ ord. adj., third. L.
Tercio, tair'-tfa^, a.m., third, third part.
L. 40.
Termlnacion, tatr-ml-nah-Uii-^ne'^ b. f., ter-
mination. L. 49. . ,
Terminante, tair'-ml^an'-tca, a<y., conclu-
sive. L.66. , X -r
Terminar, iair^mX-nar*, to terminate. L.
T^rmino, tair'^hno, a. m., termination,
end: term. L. 65.
Termometro, tair-fnd'-fnai4ro^ s. m., ther-
mometer. L. 60. ._. , »
Terrenal, tair-rttirnal\ adj., terrestrial. L.
Terrcno, tair-rai'-no. b. m., ground. L. M.
Terrible, tair-r^'-Uai, ad)., terrible. L. 68.
Terron, tair-Hine', a. m., turned up earth.
L. 49.
Terroeo, tair-rd'so, adj., terreouB, earthy.
L 49.
Terrcstre, tair-r(d8s'4rai, adj., terrestrial,
earthly. L.49. ^ r ^
Tertulia, tair-to&-n-a, b. f , party. L. 88.
Tf, ff, pron., thee (governed by a prep.).
Tieinpo, U-tOm'-po, s. m., time, weather.—
Con el ««wi», in the course of time. L.
2S.
Tlenda, a-ain'-da, s. f., store, shop. L. 64.
Tlcrra, O-air'-Ta, s. f., earth, land, naUve
Tijeras, a-hai'-nu, s. f pi., scisBors. L. 64.
Tinto, <«»'-/a. B. f.. Ink. L. 6.
TIntero, Um-tai'-ro, s. m., inkstand.- De-
jarse algo en el tintero, to forget to say
someUiing. L. 4. ^
Tinto, teen^, adj., red (said of wines). L.
Tio,'«'-5,B.m., uncle. L.66.
Ti«bu«on, fl-ro^-*oo-tWn<', fl. m., cork-
Tirinico, a^roh'-nl-hOy adU., tyrannical. L.
T^, a-rar', to throw, to cast, to take
(speaking of a road).— 2Yre V. por aqui,
UfeUiisway. L.64.
468
VOCABULARY,
^Mro, n'-ro^ n. m., throw, cast.— A tiro dc
i)i nola, within a pistol-.-hot. L. 51^
Tit'ilo. te'4oo-lo, 8. lu.. title. L. 55.
To ante A, to-kan'-tui a, prep., concorn-
i:i ', ri'latlir^ to, touchiiiL,'. L. 518.
Tgcar, fO:':ar*, lo touch, to play (oium In-
Btrumeut). L. 15.
To;livia. tO-tl(Lh^9i'-a^ adv., yet, stUl. L. 25.
To lo, tO'-dt\ adj., ail.— yix/a? loa dlas, every
diy.— Del tolo, entirely.— Con todo, Udw-
cvcr, notwithstanding. L. 11.
Todo, f*. m.. the whole L- 61.
Tolorar, fd4ai-rar', to tolerate. L. C5*
Torna! (5'-tnn^ inter., Indeed I L. 45.
Toniar, td-umr'^ to take. Ii. 14.
To:n<>, tiT-mo, 8. m., volume.- Un libro do
trc:) l4>moi^ a book in three volumes. L.
1.-).
Toiid, fonall^ B. m., cask, barrel. L. (50.
Toiito, ton-:' -to. adj., foolitih.- A ton/a« y d
Nk-i-*, at randoai. L. 60.
Tontcra, tOne-tai'-ra^ a. t, foolish action.
L. (>).
To iiie. fr/kaf, s. m., roll (of a drum), rin::-
iiU' (of bcll.^).— Ahf C8tu el toque, that Id
wh 're the diniculty llc-^. L. 05.
Torero, fdrai'tv, ». m., bull-ll','hter. L. B3.
TtMiiar, tOrtnar'^ lo return, to begin anew.
L. G3.
To-no, tiirf'-no^ s. m., lathe.— En tomo,,
round about. L. 65.
Toro. to-ro, «. m., bull. L. 63.
Tu.-f, A>v, e. f., cou^h. L. f>5.
TrMbij i'l'»r, t rah-hah-hah-dore', a^j. and s.
ni., hurdworkiu'^, worker. L. 17.
Tr.ib ij.ir, trah-bak-har^ . to work, to labor.
L. 17.
Tr.ibiijo, trah-ba!i'-ho, s. m., work, hibor,
occupation. L. 47.
TraMucclon, trah'dook4M-dne'^ s. f., trans-
lation. L. 61.
Traduclr, trak-doo-tkeer^ ^ to translate. L.
4'».
Tracr, trah-alr'^ to bring, to carry, to wear.
L. \'L
Tra^'ar. /ra'>-7ar', to swallow. L. 615.
Trau'i'dia, trdJi-IuW -d^-a^ s. t, tragedy. L.
52.
TraVico, trih'-hS-ko, adj., trade L. 35.
Tra^'o, trah'-r/o. s. m.. drauq:ht, drink.-
Kchar un fra 70, to take a dram. L. 69.
Trajti, irah'-fiiii, s. m., dross, costume. L.
51.
Tniinpa, tram'-pa, s. f., trap, swindle.—
Cucr en la tranipa. to foil Into the pnare.
L. 61.
Trampear, fram-pii-ar', to swindle, to im-
pose upon. L. fi5.
Trauipo^o, tram-pd'-^, a^J., dcccltfhl,
Hwiudling;— 8. m., clieat, swindler. L.
65.
TninonlUdad, iran-n4?-flaf.h\ s. f., tran-
(luillitv. peace, quintnes^. L. 46.
Tranquilizar, tran-kUZ-thar', to tnmqnll-
Truiquil.1, tmn-ir-lo, adj., tranqntl, quiet,
Peaceful. L. 60. H , 1 V,
Trapo, trah'-m. s. m.. ra?. L. M.
Tras. prep., behind, after. L. 41.
IrascurKo. frft<8-kwr'-so, s. m., course, pro-
cess (of tirae>. L. 51.
Trasnochar, irasa-nd-char' , to filt np aU
night. L. 05.
Trasqnilar, fnus-ibe-fer', to shear (ahoep).-
Ir por hina y volver traagnalado^ the bit>cr
tit. L.65.
Trastlenda, trass-H-ain'-da^ s. f., back shop.
L. 61.
Tratado, trahrtah'-do^ s. m., treatise, tvsafy.
L. 46.
Tra tantc, trahrtan'-tai, a.m., dealer. L. S>.
Tratar, trah-tar'y to treat, to have liitcr-
course or relations with, to trade, to
de.al, to traffic, to try. L. S2.
Trato, trafi'-to^ s.m., treatment, dealii^gs,
intercourse. L. 65.
Traves, trah-rais8\ prep.— Al trad* de,
through. Ij.65.
Trave^Kura, (rah-vai-M(/'ra, s. f., trick, mis-
chief, nanghtinoss. L. 5.1
Travleso, frah-ri-ai'-w, aty., t4cky, nangh-
ty, mischievous. L. 52.
Traza, trah'4ha, s. f., trace.— Tener baeoa
traza, to look well. L. 64.
Trcce, trcA'-thai^ num. acy., thirteen. L. 14.
Trointa, trm-teti'-ta^ num. a<ij., thirty. 1*.
11.
Tres, trai8», num. aj^)., three. L. 14.
Tribunal, lrl-boo-naI\ s. m., tribomU, court
of justice. L. 53.
Trlgo, frv'-ifo.s. m., wheat. L. 63.
Trig«ei\o, fn-gain'-yo, a4J., bro\ra, dait
(complexion). L. 65.
Trinchar, treen-char'^ to cut up, to carve.
L. 53.
Triueo, trS-Tiai'-d, s. m., sleigh. L. 65.
Trinidad, trZ-nl-da(h\ s. f.. Trinity. L. 21.
Triptongo, trtep-td/tc'-t/o, a. m., triphthong.
L. 57.
Tri*<te, treess'-tai^ a43., sad, moumlU, dull.
L. 21.
Tristeza, treess-ixd'-tha^ s. f., sadness, dnl-
nc.'<8. L. 41.
Trouar, tro-nar', to thunder. L. .30.
Tropa, tro'-pa^ s. f., troop. L. 40.
Tmeco, frtrai'-ko, s. m., barter, exchange.
—A /rittw, provided that L. 61.
Tnieno, trwai'-no, s. m., thunder, clap of
thunder. L. 30.
Trueque. (See Tbueco.) L. 4a
Tu,.tot>, pers. pron., thou;— poss. a<y., thy.
L. 1.
Tuorto, twaif-io, adj., blind of one cye.
L.05.
Tutcar, foo-fai-^rr', to speak Ihmiliarly (in
the Hccond person sinirulsr). L. 65.
Tnteo, too-tai'-d. s. m., thoninc:. L. 65.
Tuyo, too'-yOy poss. pron., thine. L. 13.
U, 00, conj., nped instead of 6., before words
besinninj? with o or ho. L. 8.
rf ! oof, inter., neh 1 L. 46.
niimo, onl'-f^-mo. adi., last.— Por ftffimo
at last, finally. L. 61.
Un. of)T), ndj. and indof. tw\„ one. a (nlwnys
n'sed before, never nftcr. word«V L. 4.'
r*na. m'-nn. fem, of TTtto. whifh see. L. 5.
Univor'sidad, f)o--n'^^tiir-^-dath\ s. f., nni-
vernltv. L. ^•>.
Uro. or>'-7?/). Indef art. and ft<y., a, one.--
r«o A w;>o, one by one. L. 14.
TTfta, oon'-ya, s. f , finger-nail. L, 33.
Usar, ot>-«ar', to use. L.6d.
VOCABULAET.
469
TJbo, oo^-eOy e. m.. ubc. L. 61.
Ustcd, ooss-taith\ s. m. and f., you. (Con-
traction of VuESTRA MBUCED, yotZT Wor-
ship.) L. 1.
Util, co'-hi!^ adj., uscftil. L. 13.
Vva, 00' -la, s, I'., fjfi}^. L. 40.
Voca, twA'-toi, 8. f., cow, boet L. 65.
Vacio, vah't/it'-d, aty., empty. L. B8.
Valencia, vah4ain'-Ua'a^ s. f., Valencia.
L, 55.
Valcntia, vahlain-tS'-a^ b. f., vilor, biETciy.
L. 51.
Valcr, vah-iair*, to be worth, to be good
for.— Mas vale tardo que nunca, better
late than never.— To^^am^ Dioal bless
mc! L. 41.
Valicnte, tuMi-ain'-tai. a4).,Ti|liant, brave.
L.47.
Valor, €aA4ore\ b. m., valor, bravery;
worth, value. L. 23.
Vald, ralce, s. in., waltz. L. 23.
VamosI vah'-moce^ inter., comet come
alon;; I L. 46.
Vapor, vafi-pore\ s. m., steam, eteamboat,
steamer. L. 87.
Vara, va/i'-rOy b. f, rod; yard measure. L.
47.
Varlo, t;aA'-r*-o, adj., various, variable;—
pi., several. L. 43.
Varon, vah-rOne\ s. m., man, male human
bcinj;. L, 62.
Vascongadaa, (Las Provikciab), vasn-kOne-
gah'-das8, s. f. pi., the three Spanish pro-
vinces of Alava, Guipuzcoa, and Biscay.
L. 55.
Vascucnce, vcutg-kicain'-thaiy s. m., the Bis-
cavan dialect. L. 55.
Vasija, va/i-si'-ka^ s. f., cask for liquors.
L.52.
Vaso. vah'-w^ s. m., vase, glass (for drink-
ing), tumbler. L. 61.
Vaya ! ra/i'-yo. Inter., come now I Indeed I
L.42.
Vccino, vai'thi'-no, s. to., ncljjhbor. L. S8.
Vclnte, vai'-eefi-tai, num. ad^)., twenty. L.
Vela, rai'-la, b. f., sail (of a ship), candle.
L.53.
Veneer, valn-thair'y to vanquish, to ovci^
come, to conquer. L. 59.
Vender, rain-dair', to pcU. L. 6.
Venir. rai-nen-'^ to come : to fit, to suit. —
Venir A pelo, to be jii8t the thlnir.— No
hay mal quo por b!en no renga, it's an ill
wind that blows jrood to nohcxly. L. IS.
Venti^a, vain-t<ih^fia^ s. f., advantage. L.
13.
Vontana. vain-tah'-na. s. f., window. L. 28.
Vcr, rafr, to pee. to look —A r^. let us
9Qii.— Verse negro, to be in prrcat distress.
L.20.
VersTio. rni-rnh'-vn. s. m,. ffnmTner. L. 24.
Vorhftl, rn^r-hnl\ adj., verbal. L. 49.
Verbo. r<i/r'-^, s. m.. verb, L. 41.
Verdftd, rair-<lath'. s. f, truth.— A la Ter-
dad. truly ; indeed. L. 43.
Verdaderamentc, rair-dah-dai-rahrmcUn,'-
tai, adv.. trulv, veritably. L. 82.
Verde, tJO^-fitoi, ad^., green. L. 64.
blcs. 7l. 84.
B. f., yordorc; vi^geta^
Vergaenza, vair-0W^ain'-£fta, b. f., shame.—
Tcuer vergiUma^ to be aabamed. L. 25.
Version, vair-^-One'^ s. f., version. L. 64.
Verso, ^oir'-w, b. m., verse; Jincofpoetir.
L. 62.
Vcbtido, vaisa4S'-do, b. m^ dress, wearing
apparel. L. 89.
VcsUr, vaisHeer'^ to dress, to clothe. L. 25.
Vez, vaith, b. f., time.— Una tez, ouce.^
Dos feces, twice.— En 9^ de, instead of.
— Uacer las veces de, to act as. ser>-e as.—
Tal vcz, perhaps.— Ami cee, in my turn.
—A vece8<t at tuMes. L. ^.
ViJvJar, xl-afi-har', to travel. L. 21.
VIcerector, tl-thai-raik-Wre', 6. m., vice-
rector. L. 50. .
Vice verso, v9'-thai vair'-ea^ rice versa, L.
47.
Vicio, Tl'-thl-d. 8. m., vice. L. 41.
Victoria, Teek-to'-r^-a^ s. f., victory. L. 46.
Vida, t»?-tfa, e. f., life. L. 50.
Vicjo, vl-ai'-ho, a<y., old. L. 13.
Viena, ve-ai'-na^ s.f., Vienna. L. 12.
Vicnto, vl-ain'-to^ s. m., wind. L. 30.
Vi^rnes, vl-air'-naiss^ s. m., Friday.— Yitr
ties banto, Good Friday. L. 9.
Viga, vi'-ga, s. f., beam. L. 65.
VlUadlego, reei-yah-ile-ai'-go, s. m.— Tomar
las de ViUadieaOy to run away ; to take to
one's heels. L. 50.
Vinacho, vl-nah'-cho, b. m., bad wine. L.
49.
Vino, r?'-no, s. m., wine. L. 7.
Violado, rl-o-ia/t'-do, s. m. and a^J.* violet
(color). L. 54.
Violeta, t^-o-iai'-ta, s. f., violet. L. M.
Violin, r?-5-fe»w' 8. m., violin. L. 15.
Violinista, ve-C-ti-neess'-la^ s. m., violinist.
L. 36.
Virtud, teer-tooth\ s. f., virtue.— En vlrtwi
de, by virtue of. L. 41.
Visita, vl-Hl'-ta, s. f., \ibit. L. 28.
Visitar, ve-ahtar'. to visit; to examine.
L.52.
Vista, reess'-ta^ s. f., view, sight. -A rista,
at Hight,- Perdcr de rfato, to lose sight of.
L. 29 and 51.
Visto, reess^'to, past part, (of Veb), seen.
L.52.
Vistoso, reessW-80^ a^J., conspicuous,
phowy L. 51.
Viva I r?'-rrt, inter., long live! hurrah I
huzza I L. 46.
Vivionte, r^-rl-ain'-tai^ s. m. and pros, part.,
livinjr bcinar; living, animated. L. 38.
Vivir, r^-reer', to live. L. 9.
Vivo, r2'-«?, adj., alive, lively, sprightly.
L. 20.
Vireaino, veefh-l-ah-V-fio, b. m. and adj.,
Bipcavan. L. 55.
Vizcava. r^fth-Jeoh'^ta, b. f. Biscay. L. Ro.
Vocabniario. rd-1:nh4)Oo4ah'-r^-d^ s. m., vo-
cabularv. L. 5S.
Vocal, rfy-kal', adj. and s. m., vocal; vowel.
L.58.
Volnr. rS-lnr'. to tly. L. 4!i.
Volfimen. r^no'-mafn, s. m., volume. L. 15.
Volnntad, rMo(m'tafh\ s. f., will. L. 45.
Volver, vole-rair*^ to come or go back, to
return, to do as:ain. to turn.— PWrvr en
Bi, to recover one*B Benses.— Fh^wr & las
470
YOCABULABT,
andadM, to return to one^s old' habits.
L. 36.
Vo«, vAas, pen. pron., yon. L. 08.
VoeotioA, tO-tiy-trOoe. pen. pron., yon, yc.
L. 1.
Voz, ««*, ■. t, Yolce; word; rumor: re-
port.— <;orre la voz qne . . . , it is
rumored UuU ... L. 58.
Vuelta, vtcaU'-ta, b. t, return, turn, trip.—
A tmeUa de oorreo, by retum mail.— Dar
una vueita^ to take a walk.— Dar la vueUa
alparque, to gofouud the paik. L. 46.
Vnclto, vwaU'^o, past part, {pt Voltes),
returned. L. 62.
Vucptro, vwaist'-tro^ poaa. ad)., yonr. L. 13.
Vulgar, voo^^r', adi)-, Tolgar. L.60.
T, 2, coiO., and. L. 3.
Ya, adv., already, yet; Bometlmes.— 7^ lo
uno, ya lo otro, sometimefl one, aome-
timcB the other. L. 26 and 87.
Tacer, pah-thair'^ to lie. L. 41.
Yerbo, yoir'-ba, %. f., herb, srasB. L. 00.
Yemo, yaiT'-no^ b. m., Bon-u-law. L. 00.
Yo, pera. pnm., L— Fo miamo, I myaelt
Yngo,'ifOO'-0O,B.m.,yoke. L. 61.
Z.
Z^hr8^ttj*./ar'.«a«, to escape, to get rid
Zaga, tAah'-ffa, a. f., rear.-No trie & cno
en ao^a, not to be lar behind any one.
Zapaterla, thah-pahtai-rV-n.^. f, shoe
trade ; ahoemaker'a ehop. L. n.
Zapatero, tkahpah-tai'fxf^ a. ul. shoe-
maker. L. 8.
Zapato, thah-pQh*-to, b. m., shoe. L. la
Zape! tAah'pat, inter., need to frighten
away the catB; God forbid I L. 46.
Zaal sasl tAofg^ inter., used to imitate
the Bound of repeated knocka or Uowa.
L. OS.
Zeca en Meca (Akdar dx), that-hi ein
mtd'-ka, to wander about Aom pillar to
poBt. L. 61.
Zutano, thoo-tahf'no^ a. m., ench a one. L.
65.
THB EKD.
I
D. APPLETON d C0:8 PUBLICATIONS. ^
SPANISH QBAMMABS.
OUendorJff's Spanish Grammar :
A New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spaniak
Language; with Practical Rulea for Spanish Fronundadon, and
Models of Social and Commercial Correspondence. By M. YB"
LAZQUEZ and T. T. SIM0NN£. 12mo, 660 pages.
Ihe admirable system introduced by Ollendorff is applied in this volnme
to the Spanish language. Having received, from the two distinguished
editors to whom its supervision was intrusted, corrections, emendations, and
additions, which spcci&lly adapt it to the youth of this country, it is believed
to embrace every possible advantage for imparting a thorough and practical
knowledge of Spanish. A course of systematic grammar underlies the
whole ; but its development is so gradiial and mductive as not to weary the
learner. Numerous examples of r^ular and irregular verbs are presented :
and nothing that can expedite the pupil's progresSi in the way of exphma-
tion and illustration, is omitted.
KEY to the Same. Separate volume.
Grammar of the Spanisli Language :
With a History of the Language and Practical Exerdses. By M.
SCHELE DE VERE. 12mo, 278 pages.
In this volume are embodied the results of many years' experience on
the part of the author, as Professor of Spanish in the University of Virginia.
It aims to impart a critical knowledge of the language by a systematic
eonrse of grammar, illustrated with appropriate exercises. The author has
availed himself of the Uibors of recent grammarians and critics; and by
condensing his rules and prindples and rejecting a burdensome superfluity
of detail, he has brought the whole within comparatively small compass.
By pursuing this simyle course, the language may be easily and quickly
mastered, not only for conversational purposes, but for reading it fluently
and writing it with el^mce.
D, AFPLETON A CO:a PUBL1CATI0N&
Seoane, Neuman, and Baretti's Spanish and
English, and Enghsh and Spanish
Pronouncing Dictionary.
Bj HARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA GADEKA, ProfoBflor of the
Spanish Language and literatare in Columbia Coll^gey N. Y., and
Corresponding Member of the National Listitate, Washington.
Laif^e 8to, 1,800 pages. Neat type, fine paper, and strong binding.
The pronunciation of the Gastilian language is so clearly set forth in
this DictioDary, as to render it wdl-mgh imposaUe for any person vho
can read English readily, to fall of obtaining the true sounds of the Spanish
words at ai^t
Li the revision of the work, more than eight thousand words, idioms,
and familiar phrases have been added.
It gives in both languages the exact equivalents of the words in general
nsc, both ip their literal and metaphorical acceptation^
Also, the technical terms most frequently used in the arts, in chemistry,
botany, medidne, and natural history, as well as nautical and mercantile
terms and phrases — ^most of which are not found in other Dictionaries.
Also many Spanish words used only in American countrieA which were
formerly dependencies of Spain.
The names of many important articles of commerce, gleaned firom the
price currents of Spanish and South American cities, are inserted for the
benefit of the merchant, who wUl here find all that he needs for carrying on
a business correspondenoe.
The parts of the irregular verbs in Spanish and English are here, for the
first time, given in full, in thdr alphabetical order.
The woric likewise contams a grammatical synopsis of both languages,
arranged for ready and convenient reference.
The new and improved orthography sanctioned by the latest edition of
the Dictionary of the Academy — ^now universally adopted by the press — ii
here given for the first tune in a Spanish and English Dictionary.
tn Abridgment of 7elazc[Tiez'8 Large Dictionary,
IirrKNDXD roB Schoois, Goxjjbgks, akd Tkavsllxu.
In Two Parts :— I. Spajiish-EnsliBh : H. finfflisli-Simiiiah.
By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 12mo. 888 pages.
2>. APPLETON A CO: 8 PUBLICATIONS,
Elementary Spanish Reader
By M. F. TOLON. 12mo, 156 pages.
This is one of the best Elementary Spanish Headers, not only for the
purposes of self-instruction, but also as a class-book for schools, that has
ever been published. A full Vocabulary of all the words employed is api
pendad, rendering a large dictionary unnecessaiy.
Progressive Spanish Reader :
With an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By AUGUSTIN
iO^t MORALES, A.M., H.M., Professor of the Spanish Language
and literature in the New York Free Academy. 12mo, 336 pages.
The prose extracts in this volume are preceded by an historical account
of the origin and progress of the Spanish Language, and a condensed,
scholarlike treatise on its grammar ; the poetical selections arc introduced
with an Essay on Spanish versification. Prepared in either case by the pre-
liminary matter thus furnished, bearing directly on his work, the pufnl
enters intelligently on his task of translating. The extracts arc brici^ spirited,
and entertaining ; drawn mainly from writers of the present day, they are a
faithful representation of the language as it is now written and spoken. The
arrangement is progressive, specimens of a more difficult character being
presented as the student becomes able to cope with them.
New Spanish Reader :
Consisting of Extracts from the Works of the Most Approved Authors
in Prose and Verse, arranged in Progressive Order; with Notes
explanatory of the Idioms and Most Difficult Constructions, and a
Copious Vocabulary. By M. VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA.
12mo, 351 pages.
This book, bdng particulariy intended for the use of beginners, has been
prepared with three objects in view : First, to furnish the learner with pleas*
bg and easy lessons, progressively developing the beauties and difficulties
of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their minds with valuable
knowledge ; and thirdly, to form thdr character, by instilling correct princt
pies into thdr hearts. In order, therefore, to obtain the de^red effects, the
txtracts have been carefully selected from those classic Spanish writers,
both andent and modem, whose style is. generally admitted to be a patten
flf elcipuice, combined with idiomatic purity and sound morality
A APPLETON df C0:B PUBLICATIONS,
The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase
Book.
Aa EaBj and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowledge of
the Spanish Language. B7 Professor BUTLEB. 18mo, 299
pages.
The object of the author is to make the Spanish language a liTlng^
^leaking tongue to the leamer ; and the method he adopts is that of nature.
He begins with the simplest elements, and progressirdy adrances, applying
all former acquisitions as he proceeds, until the leamer has mastered one of
the most perfect languages of modem times.
From M4 Kew York Journal qf Oomm^rtt.
** This la a good book, and well fitted for the mtrposea for which it is desifiied. The
Bptniah language ia one of great aimplidty, ana moHB eaally Aeqnired than anj other
modem tongueL For a begmner. we recommend thia little book, which ia small, and
dealgned to be carried in the pocket^
All Easy Introduction to Spanish Conver-
sation.
By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA. GADENA. 18mo, 100 pages.
This little wwk contains all that is necessary for making rapid progresa
in Spanish conversation. It is well adapted for schools, and fbr persooa
who have little time to study or are their own instractors.
Spanish Grammar.
Being a New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Lan-
guage ; aftec the System of A. F. AHN, Doctor of Philosophy, and
Professor at the College of Neuss. First American Edition, ro>
vised and enlarged. 12mo, 149 pages.
Prof. Ahn's method is one of peculiar excellence, and has met with grest
luooess. It has been happily described in his own words : " Learn a foreign
language as you learned your mother tongue" — ^in the same dmple manner,
ind with the same natural gradations. This method of the distingviished
Berman Doctor has been applied in the present instance to the Spanish
Language, upo^ the basis of ^e excellent Grammars of Lespada and Marti-
•es, and it is hoped that its dmplicity and utility will procure for It the
Ckvor that its German, French, an^ Italian prototjrpes have already found io
the Schools and Colleges of Europe.
D. APPLET02r df CO:S PUBUOATIONS.
•
German and English, and English and Ger-
man Pronouncing Dictionary.
By 6. J. ADLEIR, A. M., Frof^or of the German Language and
Literature in the University of New York. One elegant lai^ 8to
ToL, 1,400 pages.
The turn of the dlstingoished author of this work has been to
embodj all the valnable resalts of the most recent inyestigations in
a German Lexicon, which might become not only a i^liable guide
for the practical acqaisition of the language, but one which would
not forsake the student in the higher walks of his pursuits, to which
its treasures would invite him.
In the preparation of the German and English Part, the basis
adopted has been the work of Fl&gel, compiled in reality by Hei-
mann, Feiling, and Oxenford. This was the most complete and
judiciously prepared manual of the kind in England.
The present work contains the accentuation of every German
word, several hundred synonymes, together with a classification'
and alphabetical list of the irregular verbs, and a Dictionary of
German abbreviations.
The foreign words, likewise, which have not been completely
Germanized, and which often differ in pronunciation and inflection
from such as are purely native, have been designated by particular
marks.
The vocabulary of foreign words, which now act so important
a part, not only in scientific works, but in the best classics, reviews,
journals, newspapers, and even in conversation, has been copiously
supplied from the most complete and correct sources. It is believed
that in the terminology of chemistry, mineralogy, the practical arts,
commerce, navigation, rhetoric, grammar, mythology, philosophy,
&c., scarcely a word will be found wanting.
The Second or German-English Part of this volume has been
chiefly reprinted from the work of FlQgel. (The attention which
has been paid in Germany to the preparation of English dictionaries
for the German student has beisn such as to render these works
very complete. The student, therefore, will scarcely find any tiling
deficient in this Second Part.)
An Abridgment of the Above. 12mO| 844 pages.
D. jlppleton df co:a pubucations.
Progressive German Reader.
Bt G. J. ADLER, Professor of the German Language and Literature in
the University of the City of New York. 12nio, 308 pages.
The plan of this German Reader is as follows :
1. The pieces are both prose and poetry, selected from the best auters,
nd present sufficient variety to keep alive the interest of the ediolar.
a. It is progressive in its nature, the pieces being at first veiy short and
Sisy, and increasing in difficulty and length as the learner advances.
8. At the bottom of the page constant references to the Grammar arc
made, the difficult passages are explained and rendered. To encourage the
first attempt of the learner as much as possible, the twenty-one [ueces of
the first section are analyzed, and all the necessary words givoi at the bot
torn of the page. The notes, which at first are very abundant, diminish as
i Uiejeamer advances. \
4. It contuns five sections. The first contains easy pieces, chiefly in
prose, with all the words necessary for translating them ; the second^ short
pieces in prose and poetry alternately, with copious notes and renderings;
the thirds short popular talcs of Grimm and others; ihe fourth, select bal-
lads and other poems from Burger, Goethe, Schiller, Uhland, Schwab, Cha-
«nisso, &c. ; the^/A, prose extracts from the first classics.
6. At the end is added a vocabulary of all the words oocuiring in the
book.
The pieces have been selected and the notes prepared with great taste
and judgment, so much so as to render the book a general favorite with
German teachers.
Hand-Book of German Literature :
Containing Schiller's ^*Mud of Orleans," Goethe'^ **Iphigenia in
Tauris," Tieck's '^Puss hi Boots," and *' The Xenia " by Goethe and
Schiller. With Critical Introductions and Explanatory Notes ; to
which is added an Appendix of Specimens of German Prose, from
the Middle of the Sixteenth to the Middle of the Nineteenth Cen*
tunes. By G. J. ABLER. 12mo, 5&0 pages.
For classes that have made some proficiency in the German language^
tfid desire an acquaintance with specimens of its dramatic literature, no
more charming selection than this can be found. Sufficient aid is given, in
the form of introductions and notes, to enable the student to understana
thoroughly what he reads.
D. APPLMTON df CO:S PUBUCATION&
Ollendorff's Italian Grammars
Prixxiary liOSsonB in Ijeamlxier to Read, Write, and Si>eak the Ital-
ian Langnace. Introduotory to.the Larger Grammar. Bjr G. W. GEEEN&
18m<s 283 poges.
OUendoriTB New Method of Leaixiinff to Bead, Write, and Speak
the Italian Lanstiage. WlUi Additionii u.d Oorrectlona. By E. FELIX
FOKESTI, LL.D.. 12m<s 088 pages.
Key. Beporate Yolame.
Xn Ollendorff's grammars is for tlie first time presented a system
bj wliich the stadent can acquire a conversational knowledge of
Italian. This will recommend them to practical students; while
at the same time there is no lack of rules and principles for tliose
who would pursue a systematic grammatical course with the view
of translating and writing the language.
Prof. Greene's Introduction should be taken up by youthful
classes, for whom it is specially designed, the more difficult parts
of the course being left for the larger .volume.
The advanced work has been carefully revised by Prof. Fovesti,
who has made such emendations and additions as the wants of the
country required. In many sections the services of an Italian
teacher cannot be obtained ; the Ollendorff Course and Key will
there supply th» want of a master in the most satisfactory manner.
Italian Reader.
A Collection of Pieces in Italian Ptose, designed as a Reading-Book for
Students of the Italian Language. By E. FELIX FORESTI, LL.D
12mo, 298 pages.
In making selections for this volume, Prof. Forcsti has had re-
course to the modem writers of Italy rather than to the old school
of novelists, historians, and poets; his object being to present a
picture of the Italian language as it is written and spoken at the
present day. The literary taste of the compiler, and his ^dgment
as an instructor, have been brought to bear with the happiest
raaults in this valuable Header.
D. APPLSTOK &i ao: 8 PUBLICATIONS.
Spiers and Surenne's French and English
and Enghsh and French Pronoun
cing Dictionary,
Edited by 6. P. QUAGEEKBOS, A.M. One large* Tolsme, 8to, o*
1,816 pages. Neat type and fine paper.
THB FITBLIBKBBS CLADf FOB THIS WO^K:
1« That it is a revi^on and combinaUon of (Sfikrs*) the best defining,
and (Sdrdimi's) the most accaiate pronooncing dictionaiy extant-
2. That in this work the numerous errors m Spiers* Dictionary hare beer
carefully and fsdthfully corrected.
8. That some three thousand new definitions have been added.
4. That numerous definitions and constructions are elucidated by gram-
matical remarks and illustrative d&uses and sentences.
5. That several thousand new phrases and idioms are embodied.
6. That upward of twelve hundred synonymous terms are explained, by
pointing out their distinctive shades of meaning.
7. That the parts of all the irregular verbs are inserted in alphabetical
order, so that one reference gives the mood, tense, person, and number.
8. That some some four thousand new French words, connected with
•oienoe, art, and literature, have been added.
9. That every French word is accompanied by as exaet a pronunciation
as can be represented by corresponding English sounds, and vice verBd,
10. That it contains a full vocabulaxj of the names of pereons and
places, mytholo^cal and classical, andent and modem.
11. That the arrangement is the most convement for reference that can
be adopted.
12. That it is the most complete,, accurate, and reliable dictionary of
these languages published.
From Wabbinotoh Ibvxko.
** Ab htwl have had time to examlife it, it appeftrs to me that Mr. Qa«ekenibM| bj
his revlaioii, ootreetionsi oad Additions, hae rendered the Paris Edition, ah-eady ao ex-
wUent, the most complete and valaable lexicon now In prinU^
From Wm, H. Pbzsooti^
* Is the ooplonanesB of Its vocabulaiy and its definitions, and in the great varietj
of diomatio phraaea and STnonymes, it fhr exeecds any ether French and Bn^lsl
Diotlonaf^ with which I am aoaoalntod."
D, APPLETON A CO:S FTTBUCATIONB.
Spiers and Snrenne's French and English
and English and French Pronoun-
cing Dictionary,
Occ Volume, 12ino, 978 pages. Standard Abridged Edition. Fran
new and large type.
Tlw first Ptft of this weU-known tnd unlreniny popular work oontaliia:
Words in oomffioii use;
Teims connoeted with sdenoe ; Terms belonging to tlie fine srts ;
Foot thousand historiesl names ; Four thousand geogrsphioal names ;
Upward of eleren thousand words of reoent origin ;.
The pronnndation of eyery word aooording to the F^renoh AcsJemf and the msM
eminent lexioographers and grammarians; also,
More than seren hondred critical remarks, in which the Tarlons methods of pro
oodBdng employed hy dllTerent aathora are investigated and compared.
The Second Fart contains: A copious yocabulaiy of English words, with theb
proper pronnnolation. The whole is preceded by a critical treatise on French pro-
■ nundatlon.
** It embracea all the words in common use, and those in science and the fine art^
historical and georaphical names, etc, with the pronunciation of erery word according *
to the French Academy, together with such critical remarks as will be useftil to every
learner. It contains so ftill a compilation of words, definitions, eta, as soaroely ti
leave any thing to be dealred.**— ilTeie York ObMrttr,
Pronouncing French dictionary
By GABRIfX SURENNE, F. A. S. £. 16mo, 666 pagefi.
POCKET EDITION.
In the preparation of this new work, due regard has been paid to the introdnetioa
of such new words and definitions as the progressive changes in the language have
rendered necessary; and for this purpose the best and most recent authorities have
been careftilly consulted. It is therefore confidently anticipated that the volume will
prove not only a usefbl auxiliary to the student, but also a convenient Pocket Com*
panlon to the traveller, wherever the SYench language is spoken. A vocabulary ol
proper names accompanies the work.
"IL Snrenne is a very prominent profbsaor in Edinburgh, aud all who use his
huks may rely on having before them the purest style of the French toi>guei**-
OArMtoA IfiMligmu>sr
J). APPLETON ds CO:a PUBUCATIONB.
Ollendorff's French Grammars.
FZBST LESSONS VR THB FRENCH I.ANOT7 AGE : belxtj? u Intro-
duction to OllendorfTs lanrer Gnmmar. By Q. W. GKEEN. Ifimo, 138 pages.
OIXENDOBFP*S NEW UETHOD of Learning U End, Write, and Speak
the French Tiuignagc With full Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular, A^ax-
UUrjr, Reflect] re, and Imperaonal Verba. By J. L. JEWETT. 12mo, 498 pagea
OIiZiENDOBFF'S NEW METHOD of Leaning to Bead, Write, and Speak
the French Language. With numerous Correetlot s, Additional and ImproTementi,
■uitabla fior this Country. To which are added, YaIne*B System of French I¥i>-
nundatlon, his Orammatleal Synopsia, a New Index, and short Models of Oommcr*
dal Conespondenoe. By V. VALUE. 12mo> 588 pages.
OIlendorflTs French Grammars have been before the public so long, and
UiTe had thdr merits so generally acknowledged, that it is unnecessary to
enter into any detailed description of thdr peculiarities or l^)gthy argument
in their favor. Suffice it to say, that they are founded in nature, and follow
the same course that a child pursues in first acquiring his native tongue.
They teach inductively, understindingly, interestingly. They do not repel
the student in the outset by obliging him to memorize dry abstract language
which conveys little or no idea to his mind, but impart thdr lessons agree-
ably as well as efficiently by exercises, which teach the prindples succeas.
Ivdy involved more dearly than any abstract language can. They ^ve a
oonversational, and therefore a practically useful, knowledge of the language;
the student is made oonstantly^to apply what he learns. To these peculi
ariUcs is due the wide^spread and lasting popularity of the Ollendorff series.
Prof. Greene's Introduction, the first of the works named above, will be
found useful for young beginners. In !t are presented the fundamental
principles of the language, carefully culled oat, and illustrated with easy
ttercises. It paves the way for the lai^ger works, preparing the pupil^s
mind for thdr more oomprebensive course and awakening in it a desire for
farther knowledge.
Value's and Jewett*s wadn are essentially the same, though differing
somewhat in their arrangement and *he additions that have been made to
fhe original Some institutions prefer one, and others the other; dther, k1
b believed, will impart a thorough acquaintance with French, both gram-
matical and conversational, by an interesting process, and with bitt littk
outlay o( time and labor.
TliiB book should be returned to
the libraxy on or before the last date
stamped below.
A fine of five oents a day is incurred
by retaining it^ beyond the specified
time.
Please return promptly.
ALG J lyi:
n^ M !'> 3
i
r
^